GRZ200 (6F2S1905) 0.80

6F2S1905 (Rev. 0.
80)
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Distance Protection IED
GR200 series (GRZ200)
GRZ200---
S, G, and T positions
TOSHIBA ENERGY SYSTEMS & SOLUTIONS CORPORATION
Notice: GRZ200 manual is issued for ‘011’

software code, which you can identify at ‘S, G,
and T positions’ on Software nameplate.
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Safety Precautions
Before using this equipment, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GR
equipment. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly
read and understood.
Explanation of symbols used
Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in

death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in
WARNING
death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided,
may result in minor injury or moderate injury or property
damage.
DANGER
•Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to
be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a
dangerously high voltage.
WARNING
•Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous.
•Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
•Fiber optic
Invisible laser radiation
Do not view directly with optical instruments.
i
6F2S1905 (0.80)
CAUTION
•Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
•Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and
dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
•Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check
that they conform to the equipment ratings.
•Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is
on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully
check the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
•Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
•Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•Short-wire(link)
Do not remove the short-link wire(s) connected to the frame earth (FG) at the terminal
block on the rear of the relay.
•Electric wire between #35 - #37 on the power-supply terminal block
Make sure the wire is connected.
(Exception: This wire needs to be detached for performing the dielectric voltage test.)
ii
6F2S1905 (0.80)
•Disposal
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled.
When disposing of this equipment, the customer must contact an operator responsible for
industrial waste disposal, and request that the operator dispose of this equipment in
accordance with the local waste disposal regulations; otherwise the person who disposes
of this equipment may be punished under local regulations. When disposing of this
equipment is practiced by the customer acting on their own behalf, it must be done so in a
safe manner according to local regulations. For further information in terms of the disposal,
the customer shall contact to a local dealer and sales staff at Toshiba Energy Systems &
Solutions Corporation (TESSC, Japan).
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor recyclables.
•Plastics material
This equipment contains the following plastics material.
- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins, Nylon 66, and others.
Equipment installation and operation

•Equipment installation
Never remove cables at frame ground terminals (FGs) while the AC/DC power supplies.
•Equipment operation
The user shall have responsibilities to use and install the equipment where the
specifications are designated by the manufacture. Never operate the equipment on the
condition where the manufacture cannot intend. Otherwise, the safety function furnished
into the equipment may not be operated properly.
•Symbols
Symbol Description
Protective conductor terminal
Caution, risk of electric shock
iii
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Liability, copyright and others

•Disclaimer of liability
We have checked the description of this manual against the hardware and software
described, but we cannot guarantee that all deviations have been eliminated from the
description completely; hence, no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions
contained in the information given. We review the information in this manual regularly
and there will be some corrections in subsequent editions. We reserve the right to
make technical improvements without notice.
•Copyright
© Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2017.
All rights reserved.
•Registered Trademarks
Product/Equipment names (mentioned herein) may be trademarks of their respective
companies.
iv
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Contents
1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 1
Protection functions ........................................................................................................................ 2
1.1.1 Purposes of the protection ....................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2 Requirements in the protection functions .............................................................................. 2
1.1.3 Behavior of backup protections ............................................................................................... 4
1.1.4 Concepts of distance protection (ZS/ZG) function.................................................................. 6
1.1.5 Concepts of carrier command protection (DISCAR/DEFCAR) function .............................. 9
1.1.6 Tripping CB by the protection functions .................................................................................. 9
1.1.7 Autoreclosing CB (ARC) after the operation of the protection functions .......................... 10
1.1.8 Conventional applications ..................................................................................................... 10
Control............................................................................................................................................ 11
Monitoring and metering functions ............................................................................................. 11
Hardware overview ....................................................................................................................... 12
Symbols used in logical diagrams ................................................................................................ 13
Abbreviation .................................................................................................................................. 17
Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID) .................................................... 18
2 Relay application .................................................................................................................................. 19
Distance protection (ZS/ZG with 6 zones) ................................................................................... 20
2.1.1 Principle of distance measurement ...................................................................................... 21
2.1.2 Element characteristic in distance relay.............................................................................. 25
2.1.3 Common application for ZS and ZG...................................................................................... 38
2.1.4 Extended application ............................................................................................................. 45
2.1.5 Carrier command protection feature .................................................................................... 46
2.1.6 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................... 51
2.1.7 Tips to set the main/remote backup relays .......................................................................... 54
2.1.8 Tips to set the distance zones for multi-terminal lines ....................................................... 58
2.1.9 Setting list .............................................................................................................................. 60
2.1.10 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 74
Switch on to fault (SOTF-OC) ...................................................................................................... 84
2.2.1 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................... 85
2.2.2 Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 87
2.2.3 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 87
Distance carrier command protection (DISCAR) ........................................................................ 88
2.3.1 Permissive underreach protection (PUP) ............................................................................. 89
2.3.2 Permissive overreach protection (POP) ................................................................................ 90
2.3.3 Unblocking overreach protection (UOP) .............................................................................. 93
2.3.4 Blocking overreach protection (BOP) ................................................................................... 95
2.3.5 Protection for week infeed terminal ..................................................................................... 98
v
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.3.6 Countermeasure for current reversal ................................................................................. 100

2.3.7 Programing DISCAR using PLC function .......................................................................... 102
2.3.8 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 103
2.3.9 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 104
Directional earth fault command protection (DEFCAR) .......................................................... 106
2.4.1 Permissive overreach protection (POP) .............................................................................. 107
2.4.2 Unblocking overreach protection (UOP) ............................................................................ 110
2.4.3 Blocking overreach protection (BOP) ................................................................................. 110
2.4.4 Coordination with DISCAR protection ............................................................................... 112
2.4.5 Programing DEFCAR using PLC function ........................................................................ 113
2.4.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 114
2.4.7 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 115
Overcurrent protection (OC)....................................................................................................... 117
2.5.1 Relay polarity ....................................................................................................................... 118
2.5.2 Inverse definite mean time and definite time characteristic ........................................... 121
2.5.3 Threshold value for operation ............................................................................................. 126
2.5.4 Reset Ratio............................................................................................................................ 126
2.5.5 Miscellaneous functions....................................................................................................... 126
2.5.6 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 128
2.5.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 130
2.5.8 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 133
Earth fault protection (EF) ......................................................................................................... 135
2.6.1 Relay polarity ....................................................................................................................... 136
2.6.2 Inverse time and definite time delay characteristic .......................................................... 139
2.6.3 Threshold level for operation .............................................................................................. 145
2.6.4 Reset Ratio............................................................................................................................ 145
2.6.6 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 146
2.6.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 148
2.6.8 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 151
Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN) .................................................................... 152
2.7.1 Relay polarity ....................................................................................................................... 153
2.7.2 Inverse time and definite time delay characteristic .......................................................... 155
2.7.3 Threshold value .................................................................................................................... 160
2.7.4 Reset Ratio............................................................................................................................ 160
2.7.6 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 161
2.7.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 163
2.7.8 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 166
vi
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Thermal overload function (THM) ............................................................................................. 167

2.8.1 Thermal state determination .............................................................................................. 168
2.8.2 Thermal characteristic ........................................................................................................ 169
2.8.3 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 170
2.8.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 171
2.8.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 172
Broken conductor protection (BCD) ........................................................................................... 173
2.9.1 Equivalent circuit for a one-phase series fault .................................................................. 174
2.9.2 Characteristic and setting ................................................................................................... 176
2.9.4 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 177
2.9.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 177
2.9.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 178
Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF)......................................................................................... 179
2.10.1 CBF operation and its elements ......................................................................................... 180
2.10.2 Re-trip feature ...................................................................................................................... 180
2.10.3 Backup feature ..................................................................................................................... 181
2.10.4 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 182
2.10.5 Operation timing .................................................................................................................. 183
2.10.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 184
2.10.7 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 185
Stub protection with overcurrent relay (STUB-OC) ................................................................. 187
2.11.1 Stub-OC characteristic ........................................................................................................ 188
2.11.2 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 188
2.11.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 189
2.11.4 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 190
Overvoltage protection for phase-to-neutral (OV) .................................................................... 191
2.12.1 Drop-off and pickup characteristic ..................................................................................... 192
2.12.2 Delay for the operation of the OV element ........................................................................ 192
2.12.3 Time characteristic .............................................................................................................. 192
2.12.5 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 195
2.12.6 Setting list ............................................................................................................................ 196
2.12.7 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 197
Overvoltage protection for phase-to-phase (OVS)..................................................................... 198
2.13.1 Drop-off and pickup setting ................................................................................................. 199
2.13.2 Delay for the operation of the OVS element ...................................................................... 199
vii
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.13.5 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 202

2.13.6 Setting list ............................................................................................................................ 203
2.13.7 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 204
Phase under-voltage protection (UV) ......................................................................................... 205
2.14.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic .................................................................................... 206
2.14.4 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 209
2.14.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 211
2.14.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 212
Phase-to-phase under-voltage protection (UVS) ....................................................................... 213
2.15.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic .................................................................................... 214
2.15.4 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 217
2.15.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 219
2.15.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 220
Out of step tripping protection by distance relay (OSTZ) ........................................................ 221
2.16.1 Phenomenon and principle of out-of-step ........................................................................... 222
2.16.2 Function features ................................................................................................................. 223
2.16.3 Operation zones and element characteristics .................................................................... 223
2.16.4 Scheme logic and setting ..................................................................................................... 225
2.16.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 227
2.16.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 228
Inrush current detection function (ICD).................................................................................... 229
2.17.1 Operation and characteristic............................................................................................... 230
2.17.2 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 230
2.17.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 231
2.17.4 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 231
Fail safe (FS)................................................................................................................................ 232
2.18.1 Overcurrent element (OCFS) .............................................................................................. 233
2.18.2 Phase current change detector element (OCDFS) ............................................................. 233
2.18.3 Earth fault current element (EFFS) ................................................................................... 233
2.18.4 Multi-level overcurrent elements (OCMFS) ...................................................................... 234
2.18.5 Under-voltage element for phase-to-earth (UVFS) ........................................................... 235
2.18.6 Under-voltage element for phase-to-phase (UVSFS) ........................................................ 235
2.18.7 Under-voltage change detection element (UVDFS) .......................................................... 235
2.18.8 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 236
2.18.9 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 238
viii
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.18.10 Data ID list ....................................................................................................................... 239

VT failure detection (VTF).......................................................................................................... 240
2.19.1 VTF features......................................................................................................................... 241
2.19.2 Operation for the VTF function .......................................................................................... 241
2.19.3 VTF Logic ............................................................................................................................. 242
2.19.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 244
2.19.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 245
CT failure detection (CTF).......................................................................................................... 246
2.20.1 CTF features......................................................................................................................... 247
2.20.2 Operation for the CTF function .......................................................................................... 247
2.20.3 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 247
2.20.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 249
2.20.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 250
Single-end fault locator (FL-Z) ................................................................................................... 251
2.21.1 Computation method ........................................................................................................... 252
2.21.2 Output of FL computation on display................................................................................. 255
2.21.3 Setting and operation .......................................................................................................... 256
2.21.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 264
2.21.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 266
Autoreclose (ARC) ....................................................................................................................... 267
2.22.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................. 268
2.22.2 Terminology .......................................................................................................................... 272
2.22.3 Function block diagram ....................................................................................................... 277
2.22.4 Timing diagram .................................................................................................................... 284
2.22.5 Autoreclosing logics ............................................................................................................. 288
2.22.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 304
2.22.7 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 305
Voltage check for autoreclosing (VCHK) ................................................................................... 310
2.23.1 VCHK1 for 1CB system ....................................................................................................... 311
2.23.2 VCHK1 and VCHK2 for 1.5CB system .............................................................................. 312
2.23.3 Scheme for synchronism ...................................................................................................... 313
2.23.4 VCHK1 setting for 1CB system .......................................................................................... 318
2.23.5 VCHK1 and VCHK2 settings for 1.5CB system ................................................................ 322
2.23.6 Scheme and activation ......................................................................................................... 324
2.23.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 326
2.23.8 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 328
Trip circuit (TRC) ........................................................................................................................ 329
2.24.1 Command for tripping CB and signal to block reclosing CB#1/CB#2 .............................. 332
2.24.2 Recording identifiers for respective fault types ................................................................. 335
ix
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.24.3 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 336

2.24.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 341
2.24.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 342
Protection common (PROT_COMMON) .................................................................................... 344
2.25.1 Selection of breaker system ................................................................................................. 345
2.25.2 Decision of CB open/close status ......................................................................................... 345
2.25.3 Decision of DS open/close status ......................................................................................... 348
2.25.4 Dead line detection .............................................................................................................. 349
2.25.5 Detection of current change (OCD)..................................................................................... 350
2.25.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 351
2.25.7 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 352
3 General control function .................................................................................................................... 354
Control scheme ............................................................................................................................ 355
Control mode................................................................................................................................ 358
3.2.1 Select-before-operation mode (SBO) ................................................................................... 358
3.2.2 Direct-operation mode (DIR) ............................................................................................... 359
Common controls (CMNCTRL) .................................................................................................. 361
3.3.1 PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signal ............................................................................................. 362
3.3.2 Provision of selected status ................................................................................................. 363
3.3.3 Miscellaneous settings ......................................................................................................... 363
3.3.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 365
3.3.5 Signal .................................................................................................................................... 366
Local, remote and PLC control ................................................................................................... 368
3.4.1 Local control ......................................................................................................................... 369
3.4.2 Remote control...................................................................................................................... 369
3.4.3 Programmable logic control (PLC)...................................................................................... 369
3.4.4 Signal for Local/Remote control .......................................................................................... 370
LED reset function (LEDR) ........................................................................................................ 371
3.5.1 Select logic for resetting LEDs ............................................................................................ 372
3.5.2 Cancel logic in SBO mode .................................................................................................... 374
3.5.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR mode ........................................................................................ 375
3.5.4 Settings in LED logics ......................................................................................................... 376
3.5.5 Mapping for IEC61850 communication.............................................................................. 378
3.5.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 382
3.5.7 Signal .................................................................................................................................... 383
Counter function for the general (GCNT) ................................................................................. 384
3.6.1 Counter setting for a signal................................................................................................. 385
3.6.1 Select logics for SBO/DIR modes ........................................................................................ 387
3.6.2 Cancel logic for SBO mode .................................................................................................. 393
x
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.6.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes....................................................................................... 395

3.6.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 403
3.6.6 Signal .................................................................................................................................... 404
Mode control function (MDCTRL).............................................................................................. 413
3.7.1 Function ................................................................................................................................ 414
3.7.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 419
3.7.4 Signal .................................................................................................................................... 420
4 Technical Description ......................................................................................................................... 422
IED case and module slots.......................................................................................................... 425
4.1.1 3/4 case for Compression-type terminal ............................................................................. 425
4.1.2 1/2 case for Compression-type terminal ............................................................................. 427
Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT)....................................................................... 429
4.2.1 VCT11B ................................................................................................................................. 430
4.2.2 VCT12B................................................................................................................................. 431
4.2.3 Constitution of VCT ............................................................................................................. 432
4.2.4 Setting VCT ratio ................................................................................................................. 434
4.2.5 Check of rated current ......................................................................................................... 436
Signal processing and communication module (CPU) .............................................................. 438
4.3.1 Processing module................................................................................................................ 438
4.3.2 Communication modules ..................................................................................................... 440
4.3.3 Location of communication modules................................................................................... 443
Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO)......................................................................................... 444
4.4.1 Binary input feature for Compression-type terminal ....................................................... 445
4.4.2 Binary input circuit ............................................................................................................. 446
4.4.3 Binary output feature for Compression-type terminal ..................................................... 455
4.4.4 Binary output circuit ........................................................................................................... 457
4.4.5 Structure of binary IO Module for Compression-type terminal ....................................... 463
4.4.6 Settings of binary input circuits ......................................................................................... 469
4.4.7 Signals (Data ID) of binary input circuits .......................................................................... 471
4.4.8 Settings of binary output circuits ....................................................................................... 473
4.4.9 Signlas (Data ID) of binary output circuits........................................................................ 475
Power supply module (PWS) ...................................................................................................... 477
Human Machine Interface (HMI) .............................................................................................. 480
4.6.1 Outlook.................................................................................................................................. 480
4.6.2 LED Indicators ..................................................................................................................... 481
4.6.3 Function keys with LEDs .................................................................................................... 486
4.6.4 Monitoring jacks................................................................................................................... 491
xi
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.6.5 Operation keys ..................................................................................................................... 493

Clock function .............................................................................................................................. 494
4.7.1 Clock setting ......................................................................................................................... 494
4.7.2 Selection of date and time formats ..................................................................................... 494
4.7.3 Time Synchronization .......................................................................................................... 495
4.7.4 Setting time zone ................................................................................................................. 499
4.7.5 DST setting (Summer time setting).................................................................................... 500
4.7.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 502
Group setting for protection functions ....................................................................................... 503
5 Engineering tool.................................................................................................................................. 506
Overview of GR-TIEMS .............................................................................................................. 507
Connection ................................................................................................................................... 508
Common tools .............................................................................................................................. 508
Monitoring tools........................................................................................................................... 509
Record tools .................................................................................................................................. 509
Generic configuration tools ......................................................................................................... 509
IEC 61850 configuration tool...................................................................................................... 510
MIMIC configuration tool ........................................................................................................... 510
6 PLC function ....................................................................................................................................... 511
Overview of PLC function ........................................................................................................... 512
PLC data error ............................................................................................................................. 512
PLC driver.................................................................................................................................... 513
7 Recording function .............................................................................................................................. 517
Fault recorder .............................................................................................................................. 518
7.1.1 Types of recording information ........................................................................................... 518
7.1.2 Screen information............................................................................................................... 520
7.1.3 Setup for the fault recorder ................................................................................................. 521
7.1.4 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 524
7.1.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 525
7.1.6 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................... 525
Event recorder ............................................................................................................................. 526
7.2.1 Trigger signals ...................................................................................................................... 526
7.2.2 Trigger modes ....................................................................................................................... 531
7.2.4 Setup for the event recorder................................................................................................ 532
7.2.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 533
7.2.6 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................... 533
Disturbance recorder................................................................................................................... 534
7.3.1 Recording time and amount ................................................................................................ 534
xii
6F2S1905 (0.80)
7.3.2 Relays within disturbance recorder .................................................................................... 534

7.3.3 Maximum number for recording disturbance phenomena ............................................... 535
7.3.4 Number of analog quantities and logical signals for disturbance recorder ..................... 535
7.3.5 Trigger settings for PLC programming .............................................................................. 538
7.3.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 540
7.3.8 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................... 541
8 Monitoring function ............................................................................................................................ 542
Outline ......................................................................................................................................... 543
Metering data (Metering group)................................................................................................. 544
8.2.1 Metering information on the screen ................................................................................... 544
8.2.2 Setting for measurements ................................................................................................... 545
8.2.3 Diminishing a very small value to display zero ................................................................. 546
8.2.4 Flow settings for active/reactive/apparent powers ............................................................ 546
8.2.5 Polarity setting for power factor values ............................................................................. 547
8.2.6 Setting for the report (Dead band feature) ........................................................................ 548
Statistics data (Power value group) ........................................................................................... 551
8.3.1 Power information on the screen ........................................................................................ 551
8.3.2 Setting for power values ...................................................................................................... 551
8.3.3 Regulation of power values ................................................................................................. 551
Statistics data (Demand value group) ....................................................................................... 552
8.4.1 Demand information on the screen .................................................................................... 552
8.4.2 Max/Min/Averaged information about the demand feature ............................................. 553
8.4.3 Demand cycle........................................................................................................................ 553
8.4.4 Resetting data in demand features .................................................................................... 553
Statistics data (Peak-demand value group) .............................................................................. 555
8.5.1 Max/Min/Averaged information about the peak-demand feature .................................... 555
8.5.2 Resetting data of peak-demand features............................................................................ 555
Statistics data (Counter group) .................................................................................................. 556
8.6.1 Count information on the screen ........................................................................................ 556
8.6.2 Report setting for GCNT (Dead band feature)................................................................... 556
Statistics data (Accumulated time) ............................................................................................ 557
Monitoring for miscellaneous functions..................................................................................... 558
Setting .......................................................................................................................................... 559
Signal (Data ID) .......................................................................................................................... 560
9 Automatic supervision........................................................................................................................ 565
Outline of automatic supervision ............................................................................................... 566
Generic supervision tasks ........................................................................................................... 569
9.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM (ROM/RAM error)..................................................... 571
xiii
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.2 Check-sum error (SUM error) ............................................................................................. 572

9.2.3 Supervision of RAM (RAM error) ....................................................................................... 573
9.2.4 Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error) ..................................................................... 574
9.2.5 Supervision of MRAM (MRAM) .......................................................................................... 575
9.2.6 Supervision of program codes (CPU error) ........................................................................ 576
9.2.7 Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error)................................................................. 577
9.2.8 Supervision of DPRAM on sub-CPU (DPRAM error) ........................................................ 578
9.2.9 Supervision of DPRAM on external-CPU (DPRAM error)................................................ 579
9.2.10 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error)...................................................................... 580
9.2.11 Detection of sub-CPU not operated (Stopped error) .......................................................... 581
9.2.12 Detection of external-CPU not operated (Stopped error).................................................. 582
9.2.13 Supervision of setting data (Setting error) ........................................................................ 583
9.2.14 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error) ........................................................................ 584
9.2.15 Supervision of analog input data on VCTs (AI ACC error) ............................................... 585
9.2.16 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error) .................................................................... 586
9.2.17 Supervision of current in zero-sequence (I0 error) ............................................................ 587
9.2.18 Supervision of voltage in negative-sequence (Z21/Z22 error) ........................................... 588
9.2.19 Supervision of voltage in zero-sequence (VZ error) ........................................................... 589
9.2.20 Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error) ............................................................ 590
9.2.28 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error) ...................................................... 598
9.2.29 Supervision of power supply module (Power error)........................................................... 599
9.2.30 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error) ..................................................... 600
9.2.31 Current transformer failure (CT fail) ................................................................................. 601
9.2.32 Voltage transformer failure (VT fail) .................................................................................. 602
9.2.33 Supervision of circuit breaker contacts (CB1/CB2 fail)..................................................... 603
9.2.34 Supervision of disconnector contacts (DS fail) ................................................................... 604
9.2.35 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error) ............................................................... 605
9.2.36 Supervision of data in 61850 settings (Commslv error) .................................................... 606
9.2.37 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error) .................................................. 607
9.2.38 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 608
9.2.39 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................... 612
10 Communication protocol ................................................................................................................. 617
xiv
6F2S1905 (0.80)
LAN communication ................................................................................................................... 618

10.1.1 Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 618
10.1.2 Auto reset function............................................................................................................... 626
10.1.3 Monitoring LAN communication ........................................................................................ 627
10.1.4 Settings ................................................................................................................................. 628
10.1.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 630
IEC 61850 communication.......................................................................................................... 632
10.2.1 61850 protocol ...................................................................................................................... 634
10.2.2 Communication service ....................................................................................................... 637
10.2.3 Engineering in 61850 communication ................................................................................ 640
10.2.4 Setting for IED ..................................................................................................................... 655
10.2.5 How to monitor 61850 communications ............................................................................. 657
10.2.6 Quality signal in 61850 communication ............................................................................. 658
10.2.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 659
10.2.8 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 659
USB communication.................................................................................................................... 661
11 User interface .................................................................................................................................. 662
Outline ......................................................................................................................................... 663
HMI operation ............................................................................................................................. 667
Record sub-menu ......................................................................................................................... 670
Monitoring sub-menu .................................................................................................................. 675
Setting sub-menu ........................................................................................................................ 682
I/O setting sub-menu................................................................................................................... 695
Time sub-menu ............................................................................................................................ 702
Test sub-menu.............................................................................................................................. 708
Security setting sub-menu .......................................................................................................... 714
Security setting sub-menu ...................................................................................................... 715
12 Installation ...................................................................................................................................... 717
Caution for storage ...................................................................................................................... 718
Handling precautions .................................................................................................................. 718
Unpack and inspection of hardware and software ................................................................... 719
PWS alarm threshold setting ..................................................................................................... 723
Removing and installation of an inside module ........................................................................ 724
Rack mounting............................................................................................................................. 730
Wiring work ................................................................................................................................. 734
13 Commissioning and maintenance .................................................................................................. 739
Cautions ....................................................................................................................................... 741
Preparations ................................................................................................................................ 741
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function ......................................................................................... 755
xv
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Appendix 2 Case outline .......................................................................................................................... 763

Appendix 3 Typical external connection ................................................................................................. 768
Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT, and TICS .......................................................................... 773
Appendix 5 Ordering................................................................................................................................ 843
Appendix 6 Technical data ...................................................................................................................... 855
Appendix 7 Manufacture setting ............................................................................................................ 869
Appendix 8 Rack mounting ..................................................................................................................... 871
Appendix 9 CT requirement .................................................................................................................... 878
Appendix 10 Input dummy for relay application ................................................................................. 881
Appendix 11 Notes for the dielectric voltage test ................................................................................ 889
xvi
6F2S1905 (0.80)
1 Introduction
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 1 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
GRZ200 distance protection is designed to provide distance protection with control

applications. The GRZ200—intelligent electronic device (IED)—provides you with the
flexibility to meet their application and engineering requirements in addition to offering
excellent performance, the high quality and reliability.
Protection functions
The IED has a number of protection functions and these functions are being optimized for
transmission or distribution systems. The followings functions incorporated and programmed
with the user’s settings using the menus on the IED or in the engineering tools can operate
well with mutual linkage between protection functions.
1.1.1 Purposes of the protection

In order to secure the stability in the power system, the protection function provides three
significant fundamentals for the protection in response to various faults:
(1) Prevention of power supply interruption is to clear the faults and recover the faulted
power transmission as soon as possible.
(2) Prevention of damage to equipment is serviced not to damage the primary device even if
faults occur successively. For example, destruction of insulators, rupture of lines, burning of
transformers, and others may result in severe damages in devices in the power system. The
protection function can serve the device not be vulnerable severely for such damages.
(3) Prevention of system instability is to clear faults in the power system speedy by the
operation in the protection functions. Otherwise, a generator will be in out-of-step if a fault
does not clear speedy.
1.1.2 Requirements in the protection functions

Several essences shall be considered for the operation within the relays:
(i) Selectivity
If any fault occurs in the power system, it shall be cleared. At the same time, we should
consider that the unfaulted segments of the power system must be isolated from the faulted
segment in which the fault may clear. Figure 1.1-1 illustrates the protection areas constructed
with two different protection schemes; the two schemes are overlapped so that the entire
areas are protected.
Figure 1.1-2 illustrates the locations of a circuit breaker (CB) and a current transformer
(CT) connected with the relays. In Figure 1.1-2(a), for example, two CTs locates on the both
sides of the CB(N): a CT is connected with the relay Ry(S) seeing into the line and another CT is
connected with the relay Ry(X) seeing to the busbar; the zones protected by the two relays are
overlapped.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 2 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 1.1-2(b) exemplifies that both the forward line and the busbar are protected using
a CT. Once a fault occurs between the CT and the CB(N), the relay Ry(S) for the forward line
can operate, but the relay Ry(X) for the busbar may fail to operate to clear the fault. That is, we
should keep in mind that a blind spot never exits in the power system for designing the
protection.
Busbar G Busbar H
M N K L Line
Ry(V) Ry(U) Ry(S) Ry(X) Ry(T) Ry(O) Ry(P) Ry(Q)
: Current transformer (which is connected with a relay)
M : Circuit Breaker (which is located at M)
Ry(V) : Protection relay (which is located at V)
: Protection area by line protection scheme
: Protection area by busbar protection scheme
Figure 1.1-1 Two protection schemes for line and busbar
Busbar G Busbar G
N Line N Line
Ry(S) Ry(X) Ry(S) Ry(X)
(a)Line and Busbar protected relays with two CTs isolated (b)Line and Busbar protected relays with a CT
Figure 1.1-2 Protection schemes and the location of the CB
(ii) Speediness
As mentioned earlier, shortening the fault duration is realized by the speedy operation of the
relay; it is achieved by the high speed signal processing module. However, we have to note
that the operating time of the CB is slower comparted with the one of the processing module.
Additionally, the propagation delay of the communion should also be considered when the
carrier command protection function is considered for the protection.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 3 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) Reliability
The relay is in a quiescent state normally, but the relay shall respond to a fault instantly once
it occurs on the power system. Hence, the operation availability shall be checked whenever
the line is energized in unfaulted state. Additionally, to improve the operation reliability, the
protection scheme is checked externally by fail-safe function (FS). That is, the relay
operations are checked not to issue a trip command mistakenly by the FS relay; consequently,
erroneous tripping can be prevented dramatically if the prime (main) relay operates
mistakenly. The check results of the FS relay are combined together with the operation
results of the prime relay at the last stage (i.e., AND logics runs on the trip circuit).
1.1.3 Behavior of backup protections

Faults shall be securely cleared and clearing the faults shall be made as soon as possible, or
the power system may result in the outage. As to protect the power system, as a rule, a main
(primary) relay operates along with a number of backup relays. A protection function
represents the main (primary) relay, whereas the other protection functions operate as the
backup relays. Accordingly, faults could be clear if the main (primary) relay were in the failure
to operate.
(i) Protection for the line

The zone1 element† in the distance protection function (ZS/ZG) is designed to operate for the
main relay. However, we shall note that the main protection cannot operate perfectly at any
time. For example, the ZS/ZG protection function cannot operate correctly once the following
incidents occur: a power supply failure, a CT/VT failure, an incident in the CB (or the
operation failure in the ZS/ZG protection function, of course). Thus, we shall design that
clearing the faults can be performed with backup relays if the main relay fails to operate in
any case, but we should figure the capability for clearing the faults being dependent on the
system integrity. The conventional relays (such as overcurrent relay and others) are serviced
as the backup protections, which we discuss successively.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 4 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Busbar R Busbar G Busbar H
Zone2(N)
Zone1(N)
Line
M S N K O
Trip command
Relay(M) Relay(S) Relay(N) Relay(K) Relay(O) Rela

Main (primary) TRC
Zone1 in ZS(N) Zone1 i
Backup (local) Delay timer OC(O)

t 0
OC(N) ≥ & EF(O)
EF(N) t 0 Zone2 i
Backup (remote) Fail safe

Zone2 in ZS(N) t 0
Extra
Fail safe (FS) relay(N)
Extra FS relay
Figure 1.1-3 Protection zone provided by the main relay and backup relays
†Note:When the carrier command protection function (DISCAR or DEFCAR) is available,
the function can also service as a local backup protection. We shall also note that
the function cannot operate in the device failure in the telecommunication.
(ii) Coordination between the main and the backup protections

The operation of the backup protection is realized by retarding the operation of the backup
protection rather than the main protection; retarding is made with setting the delay timer of
the backup protection. We shall note that the setting value for the delay timer should be
chosen so that the coordination between the main protection and the backup protection is
realized. The degree for retarding the backup protection is determined by the consideration of
operating and reset time margins:
• Operating time of the main protection
• Reset time of backup protections
• Operating time of the circuit breaker
(iii) Types of the backup protections

The backup protections are grouped into two: 1.backup protections serviced from the remote
end far from the location of the main protection and 2.backup protections serviced locally as
same as the main protection.
Remote backup protection (Retarded backup protection)

Due to practical problems such as the incidents of power supply and others, there is
possibility to fail to operate the main protection. Therefore, providing a backup protection
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 5 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
from the remote end is essential so that the main protection is backed up remotely. For the
ZS/ZG protection, the zone2 and zone3 for the relaying elements can be serviced as the remote
backup protections.
Local backup protection (High-speed backup protection)

If the circuit breaker have failed to trip by the commands of the main protection, the CB could
be tripped by the commands of the backup protections located beside the main protection. For
the ZS/ZG function, the DISCAR and DEFCAR function and others are serviced as the local
backup protection.
1.1.4 Concepts of distance protection (ZS/ZG) function

In the distance protection function, the line protection is grouped into six zones; the zones are
protected with six measuring elements: zone1(Z1), zone1X(Z1X), zone2(Z2), zone3(Z3),
zone4(Z4) and zone5(Z5). Figure 1.1-4 illustrates the six elements in the Mho characteristic.
Z1S–Z5S in Mho characteristic with blinders
X
Z4S-Mho.Reach
Z3S
Z2S
Z1XS
Z5S-R.Reach
Z4S-R.Reach
Z1S
R Z5S-R.Angle
Z5S
Z5S-Mho.Angle
Z4S Z4S-R.Angle
Figure 1.1-4 Six zones in Mho characteristic
(i) The reach of the zone1 element

The user shall notice that the reach of the zone1 element is usually set to approximately 80 to
90% of the length of the line (the reach of the zone1 should not include the busbar at the
remote end. That is, the zone1 element shall not operate for a fault occurring beyond the
remote busbar). Accordingly, if a fault occurs out of the zone1 and lies behind the remote
busbar, the zone2 element starts to operate to clear the fault, but its operation will be
retarded by the comparison of the operation of the zone1 element†.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 6 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
†Note:Operation of the carrier command protection function (DISCAR or DISDEF) is

practical when the user wishes to clear instantly the fault that occurs in that area.
(ii) Measuring error and its influence

In the case of a fault with resistance, the reactance component seen by the relay at the
terminal sending power is smaller than the actual value and it tends to overreach. On the
contrary, the reactance component seen by the relay at the terminal receiving power is greater
than the actual value and it tends to underreach. The line impedance has different values in
different phases. When its average value is used for the relay setting, underreaching will
occur in a phase with greater impedance than the average value. In the case of fault
resistance, its impedance is greater for earth faults where the fault is grounded via a steel
tower or tree rather than a phase fault consisting of arc resistance only. Therefore, measuring
errors about the earth fault relay are generally greater than the errors about the phase fault
relay. The fault arc is considered to be almost equivalent to pure resistance. But if the phase of
a current that flows into a fault point from the remote end is different from the phase of the
local current, the voltage at the fault will have a phase angle difference with respect to the
local current, producing a measuring error in the distance relay with the principle of
measuring the reactance component. The existence of a zero-sequence current on the
protected line and adjacent line can also cause errors in the earth fault relay. The
zero-sequence current normally acts in the direction of relay underreaching due to the effect
of the induced voltage. The compensation method will be described in detail in the next
section. The earth fault relay contains more errors than the phase fault relays even with these
compensation methods. Therefore, the earth fault relays are usually set with a greater margin
than the phase fault relays.
Regarding measuring errors in the relay, it is also necessary to consider hardware errors
in the relay itself, errors introduced by coupling capacitor voltage transformers (CCVT), and
transient overreach errors caused by the DC component of the fault current. For the GR200
series relays, the errors are defined to be less than 5%.
(iii) Detection of power swing and out-of-step

Power swings occur when the output voltages of generators at different points in the power
system slip relative to each other, which result in system instabilities that may be caused by
sudden changes in load magnitude or direction, or by power system faults and their
subsequent clearance. During the course of such a power swing, the impedance seen by a
distance relay may move (relatively slowly) from the load area into the operating
characteristic of the distance protection. In fact, this phenomenon appears to the distance
protection measuring elements like a three phase fault condition and may result in tripping if
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 7 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
no countermeasure is applied. Most power swings are transient conditions from which the
power system can recover after a short interval, and distance protection tripping is therefore
highly undesirable in such cases. GR200 series relay provides the block function for power
swing (PSB) so that preventing unwanted tripping is possible during the power swing. Figure
1.1-5 illustrates the typical impedance locus as seen by the distance relay during the transient
power swing.
X Distance protection
characteristic
(Mho)
Impedance locus during

transient power swing
R
Load Area
Figure 1.1-5 Impedance locus during transient power swing
A special case of the power swing condition occurs when the power system disturbance is
so severe that generators lose synchronism with each other and are said to be out-of-step.
During an out-of-step condition the phase angle between generators continues to increase and
pass through 180°, at which point a distance relay measures an impedance equal to that for a
three phase fault at the center of the power system. The impedance locus typically describes
an arc passing through the electrical center, as shown in Figure 1.1-6.
X
Distance protection
characteristic
(Mho)
Impedance locus during

out-of-step condition
R
Load Area
Figure 1.1-6 Impedance locus during out-of-step condition
In the case of a full out-of-step condition (as opposed to a transient power swing), it is
desirable to separate the system in the vicinity of the center of the out-of-step condition.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 8 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
GR200 series can provide an out-of-step detection element (OST) which can provide tripping
in these circumstances.
Although the power swing and out-of-step conditions are very closely related (in fact one
is simply the most severe form of the other), completely different actions are required from the
protection relay. The PSB function must ensure stability of the distance protection during
transient power system conditions, while the OST element initiates system separation by
tripping in the event that a severe power swing results in potentially irrecoverable loss of
stability in the power system. The PSB and OST elements are therefore completely separate
functions within the relay, with different characteristics, separate scheme logic and different
settings.
1.1.5 Concepts of carrier command protection (DISCAR/DEFCAR) function

(i) DISCAR Command protection by the distance (ZS/ZG) protection
If information picked up in the distance protection (ZS/ZG) function located at the ends of the
protected line are exchanged mutually by means of the telecommunication, it is possible to
determine accurately whether a fault occurs within the protecting zone or not. Consequently,
at each ends, the trip command can be issued faster. The GR200 series can provide the
following carrier command schemes using the elements of the ZS/ZG function.
• Permissive underreach protection (PUP)
• Permissive overreach protection (POP)
• Unblocking overreach protection (UOP)
• Blocking overreach protection (BOP)
(ii) DEFCAR command protection by the earth fault (EF) protection

Like in the DISCAR function, the DEFCAR function is designed to operate using the
directional characteristic of the earth fault protection (EF) function. The DEFCAR function
can provide the following carrier command schemes:
• Permissive overreach protection (POP)
• Unblocking overreach protection (UOP)
• Blocking overreach protection (BOP)
(iii) Operation with autoreclosing (ARC)

The user should notice that the operation in respective command protections initiate the
operation of the autoreclose (ARC) for the circuit breaker very fast.
1.1.6 Tripping CB by the protection functions

After issuing the trip commands by the protection functions, the trip commands are grouped
within the trip circuit (TRC) function; then, the TRC function drives the binary output circuits
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 9 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
within the relay for transferring the trip commands to the CB. The TRC function can operate
for tripping single-pole or multi-poles. Before the protection functions is reset, the auxiliary
contacts of the CB must be derived to open; this is because, the protection function cannot
interrupt straightforward the current flowing on the tripping coil circuit of the CB.
1.1.7 Autoreclosing CB (ARC) after the operation of the protection functions

Most faults that occur on high voltage or extra-high voltage overhead lines are transient
faults caused by lightning. Once a transient fault occurs, the circuit breaker (CB) is tripped to
clear the fault; reclosing the CB is performed after the confirmation of the de-ionized gases in
the CB. The time between clearing the fault and reclosing the CB should be made as short as
possible to keep the power system stable. Given the de-ionization generated by the fault arc,
we should take enough time for the de-ionization, which commences once the CBs at all
terminals are tripped. However, we can take the time in minimum if all CBs at the terminals
are tripped at the same time.
1.1.8 Conventional applications

[OC] Directional/non-directional phase over current protection
The OC function provides two or four relay elements. The OC function includes inverse time
and definite time characteristics.
[EF] Directional/Non-directional phase earth fault protection

The EF function provides two or four relay elements. The choice of characteristic is selectable
between inverse time, and definite time.
[SOTF-OC] Switch on to fault protection

In order to quickly remove a fault which may occur when a faulted line or bus-bar is energized,
the SOTF protection will be operational for a certain period after the circuit breaker closes.
[FS] Fail-safe protection

The IED is provided with Fail-safe elements which function as a check relay and enhance
security against a fault a power system with week infeed, or prevent a false tripping due to a
signal failure in the protection system.
[VTF] VT failure detection function

When a fault occurs in the secondary circuit of a voltage transformer (VT), voltage dependent
measuring elements may operate incorrectly. Thereby when the VTF function detects a failure
in the VT, the VTF function blocks the voltage dependent relay.
[CTF] CT failure detection function

When a fault occurs in the secondary circuit of a current transformer (CT), current dependent
measuring elements may operate incorrectly. Thereby when the CTF function detects a failure
in the CT, the CTF function blocks the current dependent relay.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 10 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
[FL] Single-end fault locator

When a fault is detected, fault locator can determine distance between the IED and the fault
point.
[VCHK] Voltage check for auto-re-close function

This function is used in corporation with the function of auto-re-close (ARC). The VCHK
checks voltage and frequency differences between a Bus-bar and Lines, and permits the ARC
the operation.
Control
The control functions are provided for circuit breakers and isolators, other switchgear and
transformers. The user can operate the functions using the human machine interface; the
functions are able to operate together with such as automatic sequence control, interlocking
safeguard function and manual overridden function.
[LRST] LED reset function

The LRST function can turn off a LED when the LED is lit by tripping.
[L/R] Remote/Local control function

When control of the object device is required, this function allows the selection of the control
command for either local or remote, (dispatch site/control centre) operation.
[GCNT] General pulse counter function

This function can observe a signal, for example the output of a PLC function and counts the
number of pulses for the signal. The total number of pulses counted is recorded.
[MDCTRL] Mode control function

This function enables an interface for test function block (TSET-FB). With this interface, a
mode change command is made within the IED for the TEST-FB.
Monitoring and metering functions

Using the HMI, the monitoring and metering functions can display status, settings, data and
others. The user can also see information using “GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and
Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS)” both at local and remote end.
Monitoring function:
This function supervises status of protection functions, and displays power system quantities.
It also shows failure information in the CT and VT.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 11 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Fault record function:

Such function records the state of a fault when the trip command is issued. It also memorizes
the fault data. The user can see, with the IED screen, these data with additional information:
date & time, fault phase, tripping phase, tripping mode, fault location, operating mode and
power system quantities.
Event record function:

The function provides recording feature that memorizes any event occurred in the IED.
Disturbance record function:

Disturbance record is triggered by fault detection. The user can see the waveform recorded by
this function using GR-TIEMS.
Hardware overview
The HMI consists of a screen, indication lights, operation and function keys, monitoring jacks
and a USB connector. The signal enters into the IED via terminals at the rear. Input and
output module circuits are provided as the interface.
HMI features:
- Menu-driven human interfaces for relay setting or viewing of stored data.
- A standard LCD or a large LCD (MIMIC) screen, LEDs, function keys and operation keys
- Password protection
Communication features:
- USB for GR-TIEMS
- RS485 for Substation control and Automation System (SAS) with IEC60870-5-103 protocol
- Fiber Optic (FO, option) for SAS with IEC60870-5-103 protocol
- 100BASE-TX, or -FX for SAS with IEC61850 protocol
Module circuits and others:

- Binary input circuits and binary output circuits with configurable features
- AC inputs
- Programmable logic for I/O configuration, alarms, indications, recording and others
- Automatic supervision
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 12 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Symbols used in logical diagrams

Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
(i) Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and

Mapping point
1. Marked with : Relay elements
2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number
Note that the symbol can be connected with what follows:

A binary output (BO) circuit
A LED circuit
Like in the BO and LED circuits, it can also be connected or mapped to what follows:
A PLC connection point
The IEC 61850 logical node (LN) to send a signal for the SAS
3. Marked with : PLC connection points designated by Element ID and its name
Element ID (or Data ID) Signal name corresponding to Element or Data ID
Note that the symbol can be used for the reception point coming from the output of PLC
logics.
Note that the user does not apply a PLC connection point straightforward when
functions (relays/control and monitoring) are operated on sub-CPU rather than
main-CPU. Thereby, an alternative connection point (PLC driver1/Input dummy2) is
provided in place of the PLC connection point. The user shall notice that the provision
of the alternative connection point is dependent upon the selection of the model.
1PLC driver is discussed in Chapter PLC function.
2Input dummy can be discussed in Appendix Input dummy for relay application.
4. Marked with : Mapping points designated by Data ID and its name
Data ID Signal name corresponding to Data ID
1Note that the symbol can be used as a signal reception-point coming from the SAS.
The reception point is mapped to the LN of the IEC61850.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 13 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Timer symbol

 Delay timer
Delayed pick-up timer
t 0 Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
t 0
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─ YYY
Delayed drop-off timer
0 t Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
0 t
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─YYY
 One-shot timer
A Output A
XXX - YYY Output

XXX - YYY: Setting range
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 14 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) Logic symbol

 AND gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
& Output
B 1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 0
 OR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
≥1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 XOR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 0
=1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 Signal inversion
A Output
0 1
A 1 Output
1 0
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 15 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iv) Flip-flop symbol

A B Output
A S 0 0 No change
Output 1 0 1
B R 0 1 0
1 1 0
(v) Scheme switch

A Switch Output
1 On 1
A Output
On 1 Off 0
Switch Output
+ Output
On On 1
Off 0
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 16 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Abbreviation
Abbreviation Description
ADC Analog to digital converter
BCU Bay Control Unit
BCPU Bay Control and Protection Unit
BI Binary Input module or circuit
BO Binary Output module or circuit
BIO Binary Input and Output module or circuit
CB Circuit Breaker
CPU Signal processing and communication module
CT Current Transformer
DS Disconnecting Switch
EF Earth Fault
ES Earthing Switch
EWS Engineering Workstation in the substation
GPS Global Positioning System
GR-TIEMS GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software
GUI Graphical User Interface
HMI Human Machine Interface
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time
LCD Liquid Crystal Display for IED screen (standard LCD screen)
LCP Local Panel for Controlling
LED Light Emitting Diode
MIMIC MIMIC display panel for IED screen (Large LCD screen)
NA Not Applicable
NGR Neutral Grounding Resistance
N/C Normally Closed
N/O Normally Open
OWS Operator Workstation in the substation
PC Personal Computer for maintenance
PCB Printed circuit board
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
RCC Remote Control Centre
SAS Substation Automation System
SC Station Computer
SCMS Substation Control and Monitoring System
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 17 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Abbreviation Description
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
SyncSrc Synchronization Source
VT Voltage Transformer
VCT Transformer module including VTs and CTs
43 Selector device or selector switch
Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID)

Function Block (FB) is the software module and GR-series IED implements FBs for
protections, controls and communications. The function ID is unique ID described by six digits
in hexadecimal; each function ID represents each FB. Signal number (or Data ID) is the
logical address of the input and output data of the FB. The signal number (Data ID) consists
of a function ID and an element ID. The function ID is common within the FB; accordingly the
element ID will be shown to make description simple. The element ID is 10 hexadecimal and
it has the element ID name for easy to read. Figure 1.7-1 exemplifies the symbols, the
function ID, and the element ID. The table below shows the structure of the signal.
Function ID Element ID Note
Format (Hex) FFFFFF XXXXXXXXXX Content

Signal example 123456 80000xxxx0 XX relay in phase-A is operated.
Element ID
FB (Function ID=123456)
80000xxxx0 8000xxxxx
A & ≥1 XX1_OPT
81000xxxx1
XX1 B &
82000xxxx2
C
&
Element ID Signal name
&
8000011xxxx0 XX_BLOCK 1
3. PLC connection point† 1. Relay element 2. Signal monitoring point

Figure 1.7-1 Example of symbols and others
†Note that a PLC connection point can be shown with the function ID (12345) plus
element ID (8000011xxxx0) expressed in 16 delights in hexadecimal, in some
scheme logics. The ‘PLC connection point’ could be found to search the letter ‘E’ of
element ID (i.e., ‘8000011Exxx0’).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 18 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2 Relay application
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 19 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Distance protection (ZS/ZG with 6 zones)
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.1-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
11 Note
– Main features ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 20 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.1.1 Principle of distance measurement

(i) Phase-to-phase fault
The distance protection function used to detect phase-to-phase faults measures the impedance
from the relay to the fault point using delta voltage and current. The positive-sequence
impedance is used to represent the line impedance.
Figure 2.1-1 provides an illustration of the power system for the condition of a
phase-to-phase fault. The impedance from the relay to the fault is the same in phase-B and
phase-C, the self-impedance is Zs and the mutual impedance between phases is Zm. If the
voltages and currents of phase-B and phase-C are Vb, Vc, Ib and Ic and the fault point voltage
is VF, then Vb and Vc are given by the following equations.
𝑉𝑏 = 𝑍𝑠 × 𝐼𝑏 + 𝑍𝑚 × 𝐼𝑐 + 𝑉𝐹 (2.1-1)
𝑉𝑐 = 𝑍𝑠 × 𝐼𝑐 + 𝑍𝑚 × 𝐼𝑏 + 𝑉𝐹 (2.1-2)
From equations (2.1-1) and (2.1-2), the following equation is obtained.
𝑉𝑏 − 𝑉𝑐 = (𝑍𝑠 − 𝑍𝑚) × (𝐼𝑏 − 𝐼𝑐 ) (2.1-3)
where,
Zs: Self impedance
Zm: Mutual impedance
Since the effect of the phase-A current is small, and hence negligible in equation (2.1-3),
there is no need to introduce it in equations (2.1-1) and (2.1-2).
When each phase of the line is symmetric with the other, the positive-sequence and
zero-sequence impedances are Z1 and Z0 according to the method of symmetrical components.
Z1 and Z0 are defined by the following equations, using the self-impedance Zs and the mutual
impedance Zm:
𝑍1 = 𝑍𝑠 − 𝑍𝑚 (2.1-4)
𝑍0 = 𝑍𝑠 + 2𝑍𝑚 (2.1-5)
where,
Z1: Positive-sequence impedance
Z0: Zero-sequence impedance
Equation (2.1-3) can be rewritten as follows:
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 21 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
𝑉𝑏 − 𝑉𝑐
𝑍1 = (2.1-6)
𝐼𝑏 − 𝐼𝑐
As shown above, the positive-sequence impedance is used when determining settings for
phase faults.
Va
Ib
Vb
Ic Zm VF
Vc VF
Zs
ZS
Figure 2.1-1 Phase-to-phase fault
(ii) Single-phase-earth fault

Figure 2.1-2 shows the power system in the event of a single-phase-earth fault. It is very
difficult to measure precisely the distance to the fault point for a single-phase-earth fault.
This is because the impedance of the zero-sequence circuit including the earth return is
generally different from the positive-sequence impedance. Therefore, the faulted phase
voltage is not simply proportional to the faulted phase current.
Ia
Va
Ib VaF
Vb
Ic
Vc
ZG
Figure 2.1-2 Single-phase-earth fault

It is necessary to analyze the impedance seen by the relay in the event of a
single-phase-earth fault according to the method of symmetrical components. Figure 2.1-3
shows an equivalent circuit for a single-phase-earth fault based on the method of symmetrical
components. If we define the positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence voltages
as being V1F, V2F and V0F, then the voltage at the relaying point of each symmetrical circuit
will be given by the following equations based upon the assumption that the positive-sequence
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 22 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
impedance and negative-sequence impedance are the same and that the influences of the fault
resistance are ignored.
𝑉1 = 𝑍1 × 𝐼1 + 𝑉1 𝐹 (2.1-7)
𝑉2 = 𝑍1 × 𝐼2 + 𝑉2 𝐹 (2.1-8)
𝑉0 = 𝑍0 × 𝐼0 + 𝑍0 𝑚 × 𝐼0 𝑚 + 𝑉0 𝐹 (2.1-9)
where,
V1: Relay point positive-sequence voltage
V2: Relay point negative-sequence voltage
V0: Relay point zero-sequence voltage
V1F: Fault point positive-sequence voltage
V2F: Fault point negative-sequence voltage
V0F: Fault point zero-sequence voltage
I1: Relay point positive-sequence current
I2: Relay point negative-sequence current
I0: Relay point zero-sequence current
I0m: Adjacent line zero-sequence current
Z1: Fault point - relay point positive-sequence impedance
Z0: Fault point - relay point zero-sequence impedance
Z0m: Adjacent line zero-sequence mutual impedance
Considering the faulted phase voltage VaF at the point of fault is,
𝑉𝑎 𝐹 = 𝑉1 𝐹 + 𝑉2 𝐹 + 𝑉0 𝐹 = 0 (2.1-10)
Phase-A voltage Va at the relay is calculated from the following equation:
𝑍0 − 𝑍1 𝑍𝑚0
𝑉𝑎 = 𝑉1 + 𝑉2 + 𝑉0 = 𝑍1 (𝐼𝑎 + × 𝐼0 + × 𝐼0𝑚 ) (2.1-11)
𝑍1 𝑍1
Where, Ia is the current of phase-A at the relay and is defined in the following equation
by the symmetrical component of the current:
𝐼𝑎 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 + 𝐼0 (2.1-12)
Here, defining the current synthesized using the phase-A current at the relay as Ia', and
(𝑍0 − 𝑍1 )
Ia′ = 𝐼𝑎 + × 𝐼0 + 𝑍0 𝑚/𝑍1 × 𝐼0 𝑚 (2.1-13)
𝑍1
Then equation (2.1-11) can be re-written in the following form:
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 23 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
𝑉𝑎 = 𝑍1 × 𝐼𝑎 ′ (2.1-14)
That is, the positive-sequence impedance Z1 up to the fault point can be obtained from
the simple ratio of voltage Va to compensated current Ia' according to equation (2.1-14).
Obtaining the compensated current according to equation (2.1-13) is called

"zero-sequence compensation." Note that in this implementation of zero-sequence
compensation, the compensation coefficient
𝑍0 − 𝑍1
𝑍1
and
𝑍0𝑚
𝑍1
are not real numbers, but complex numbers. The distance protection function has a
configuration that allows this compensation coefficient to be set as a complex number and
setting the coefficient correctly makes it possible to measure exactly the distance to the fault
point.
In equations (2.1-7) to (2.1-9), the fault resistance is ignored. Since the measurement of
the distance up to the fault point, based on equation (2.1-14) is carried out using the reactance
component, in principle there is no influence on the voltage component due to the fault
resistance. However, under real operating conditions, distance measurement errors are
introduced because of the fault resistance combined with the power flow or the current
flowing into the fault point from the remote terminal opposite to the relay location.
Z1
I1
V1
V1F
Positive-sequence circuit
Z2
I2
V2
V2F
Negative-sequence circuit
Z0
I0
V0
Zero-sequence circuit V0F
ZG
Figure 2.1-3 Equivalent circuit of single-phase earth fault
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 24 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.1.2 Element characteristic in distance relay

The distance protection function has six measurement zones; it is possible to identify the fault
point using these zones. This function has ZS elements to determine phase-to-phase faults
and ZG elements to determine single-phase-earth faults.
This distance protection function can be selected to have either a Mho characteristic
(Mho) or a Quadrilateral characteristic (Quad) for both ZS and ZG. Each of the measuring
zones in this function has a directional characteristic.
Note: The Asterisk (*) in the setting is used to show the zone number in ZS/ZG (either "1",
"1X", "2", "3", "4", or "5"). The numbering and application of ZS/ZG are described
later.
(i) Common characteristic of ZS and ZG

The distance protection function has a Mho characteristic (Mho) element and a Quadrilateral
characteristic (Quad) element and either the Mho characteristic or the Quad characteristic is
selected by the scheme switches [ZS-Chara] and [ZG-Chara].
Note: The complete elements and their characteristics, ZS and ZG are based on the
scheme switches [ZS-Chara] and [ZG-Chara].
Mho characteristic
(i)-1-1 Conventional Mho characteristic
Figure 2.1-4(a) and (b) show Z*S and Z*G with the Mho characteristic. The Z*S can
be set using the settings [Z*S-Mho.Reach] and [Z*S-Mho.Angle].
The blinder positions (left line and right line) are defined by the resistance and the
angle in the Figure 2.1-4; they are set using settings [Z*S-R.Reach] and
[Z*S-R.Angle]. The blinders are aligned symmetrically with the X-coordinate.
Scheme switches [Z*S-MhoR.EN] should be set On to enable the blinders.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 25 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
a. Z1S Mho element b. Z1G MHO element

X X
Z1S-Mho.Reach Z1G-Mho.Reach
Z1S-Mho.Angle Z1G-Mho.Angle
Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-R.Angle Z1G-R.Angle Z1G-R.Angle
R R
Z1S-R.Reach (in the left) Z1S-R.Reach (in the right) Z1G-R.Reach (in the left) Z1G-R.Reach (in the right)
Figure 2.1-4 Z1S Mho element (Zone1 Mho element with Blinders)
(i)-1-2 Mho with reactance characteristic

Figure 2.1-5 (a) and (b) show Z1S MHO element and Z1G MHO element set with
reactance X.
The ZS with the MHO reactance characteristic should be set using the setting
[Z*S-X.Reach], when the user set On for the scheme switch [Z*S-MhoX.EN]. Similarly,
ZG should be set using the setting [Z*G-X.Reach], when On set for the
[Z*G-MhoX.EN].
The ‘knee’ function is configured by using the settings [ZSF-X.GrAngle1] and

[ZSF-X.GrAngle2]. When On-Adapt is set for the scheme switch [ZS-X.GrAngleEN],
the ‘knee’ function operates when power flow is detected.
For the Mho characteristic, a composition component (Z-X) is provided. As shown in

Figure 2.1-5 (a), if Z1S is set with reactance components (X), other components can be
set using impedance components (Z).
A directional reactance element ‘DX’ (left line crossing the originate) can be set by the
settings [Z*S-DX.Angle] when On set for the [Z*S-MhoDX.EN]. Similarly, ZG should
be set using the setting [Z*G-DX.Angle] when On set for the [Z*G-MhoDX.EN].
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 26 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
a. Z1S MHO with reactance X b. Z1G MHO with reactance X
Z1S-DX.Angle
X Z1G-DX.Angle X
Z1S-X.Reach Z1G-X.Reach
ZSF-X.GrAngle1 ZGF-X.GrAngle1
Z1S-R.Angle ZSF-X.GrAngle2 Z1S-R.Angle Z1G-R.Angle ZGF-X.GrAngle2

Z1G-R.Angle
R R
Z1S-Mho.angle Z1G-Mho.angle
Figure 2.1-5 Zone1 MHO element set with reactance X in forward direction
Quad characteristic
Figure 2.1-6(a) and (b) show the Z*S and the Z*G used in the Quad characteristics. For
example, the reach of Z*S (top line) is defined by reactance X and the reach value should be
set for the scheme switch [Z*S-X.Reach]. A resistive element (left line) and a directional
element (bottom line) can be set by the settings [Z*S-DX.Angle] and [Z*S-DR.Angle]
respectively. The resistive elements (right and left lines) can be configured by the settings
[Z*S-R.Reach] and [Z*S-R.Angle]; the blinder (left line) is used to cut the area of the Quad
characteristic by applying settings [Z*S-R.Reach] and [Z*S-R.Angle].
The ‘knee’ function is configured by the settings [ZSF-X.GrAngle1] and

[ZSF-X.GrAngle2]. When On-Adapt is set for the scheme switch [ZS-X.GrAngleEN], the ‘knee’
function operates when power flow is detected, similar to the MHO element.
a. Z1S Quadrilateral a. Z1G Quadrilateral

X X
Z1S-X.Reach Z1G-X.Reach
ZSF-X.GrAngle1 ZGF-X.GrAngle1
Z1S-R.Angle ZSF-X.GrAngle2 Z1S-R.Angle Z1G-R.Angle ZGF-X.GrAngle2 Z1G-R.Angle
R R
Z1S-DR.Angle Z1G-DR.Angle
Z1S-DX.Angle Z1G-DX.Angle
Figure 2.1-6 Zone1 Quadrilateral element in forward direction
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 27 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Number of zones
The distance protection for phase-to-phase faults (ZS) includes six measuring zones and these
are termed Z1S, Z1XS, Z2S, Z3S, Z4S and Z5S. The distance protection for single-phase-earth
faults (ZG) also includes six measuring zones that are similarly termed Z1G, Z1XG, Z2G, Z3G,
Z4G and Z5G.
Z1XS–Z5S Mho with impedance Z
X
Z3S-Mho.Reach
Z3S
Z2S
Z1XS
Z5S-R.Reach Z1S
Z3S-R.Angle
R
Z5S-R.Angle
Z5S-Mho.Angle
Z4S
Z3S-R.Reach
Z5S
Figure 2.1-7 Composition feature for Mho characteristic

Selection of Forward, Reverse, or Non-directional for the respective zones
The selection of the element direction is provided with the setting [Z*S-Dir]. For instance, if
Forward is set, then Z*S is set in forward direction, as shown in Figure 2.1-4 to Figure 2.1-6.
If Reverse is set, then Z*S is set in reverse direction, as shown in Figure 2.1-8 to Figure
2.1-10. Z*S can be set non-directional by setting NonDir, as shown in Figure 2.1-11 and Figure
2.1-12. The other elements can be set in a similar manner.
Elements in the reverse direction of ZG are not drawn in Figure 2.1-8 to Figure 2.1-10,
but they are similar to the ZS elements.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 28 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Z1S-DX.Angle
X
Z1S-R.Reach Z1S-R.Reach
Z1S-Mho.angle
R
Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-R.Angle
Z1S-DR.Angle
Z1S-Mho.Reach
Figure 2.1-8 Z1S MHO element in reverse direction
Z1S-Mho.angle Z1S-R.Reach
Z1S-R.Reach
R
Z1S-X.Reach
Z1S-DX.Angle
Figure 2.1-9 Z1S MHO element set with reactance X in reverse direction
Z1S-DR.Angle X
Z1S-R.Reach Z1S-R.Reach
R
Z1S-DX.Angle
Z1S-X.Reach
Figure 2.1-10 Z1S Quadrilateral element in reverse direction
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 29 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Z1S-Mho.Reach
Z1S-Mho.angle
Z1S-R.Angle
Z1S-R.Reach R
Figure 2.1-11 Z1S MHO element non-directional†

†Note:The tilted line, crossing the originate, instructs the function of the non-directional
element.
X
Z1S-X.Reach
Z1S-R.Angle
R
Z1S-R.Reach
Figure 2.1-12 Z1S Quad element non-directional
Function and classification of 6 zones

Table 2.1-2 provides a summary of the zones and characteristics for each element. Z1XS and
Z1XG can be set to cover ≤ 100% of the protected line in their respective zones of protection in
order to provide extended coverage beyond the settings of Z1S and Z1G. On the other hand,
Z5S and Z5G, can be set to protect beyond 100% of the protected line. The element
characteristic used for Z1XS and Z5S is similar and so is the element characteristic for Z1XG
and Z5G.
Note that the elements Z2S to Z5S and the Z2G to Z5G can have either the Mho or the
Quad characteristic element, but these elements do not have the ‘knee’ function.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 30 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 2.1-2 Zone element, characteristics and directional
Zone
Element
Purpose
Directional
Characteristic
Set the ‘Knee’

Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Quadrilateral
MHO
Set Z
Set X
1 Z1S Protection for Zone 1 (Relay Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
/Z1G reach ≤ 80 % )
1X Z1XS Protection for Zone 1 extension Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Z1XG (Relay reach ≤ 100 %)
2 Z2S Back up for Z1S, Z1X Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
/Z2G
/Z3G
/
/Z4G
5 Z5S Protection for over Zone 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
/Z5G extension (Relay reach > 100 %)
Charging current compensation

When this distance protection function is applied to underground cables or long-distance
overhead lines, the effect of charging current is to be considered; it appears as a distance
measurement error to the fault. In order to suppress the effect and maintain the
high-accuracy distance-measurement capability, the charging current compensation function
should be used. Compensation is recommended if the minimum fault current is three times
less than the charging current.
The charging current compensation function has common scheme switches for both ZS
and ZG. The On setting is selected for the scheme switch [Z-IcC.EN] along with a setting value
for the setting [Z-IcC].
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 31 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Special characteristic in ZS

Overreach countermeasure
If we consider ZS, when a phase-to-phase fault occurs, the setting of the ZS reactance element
tends to be less than the fault impedance. For example, Figure 2.1-13 shows the relationship
between the phase-to-phase impedances in a three-phase system when a phase-to-phase BC
fault arises across Bus H. Here, ZS is not required to operate because the fault lies outside of
the protection zone. However, ZS may operate because the impedance of the phase-to-phase
impedance AB is located inside the setting of the reactance element (X1). This means that the
phase-to-phase protection element AB, which is not connected with the faulted phase, may
operate although the other elements do not operate.
jX
Zca
Zbc
X1
Zab
o R
60°
60°
Operation zone of
S
X1 element
Bus G Bus H
F
O Ia
Zbc
ZS
ZL1
F: Fault location
S: Infinite bus system
O: Location of Protective relay
ZL1: Fault impedance seen from S
Zbc: Fault impedance of phase-to-phase bc in the fault
Figure 2.1-13 Impedance seen from ZS on occurrence of phase-to-phase BC fault
The previous phenomenon is referred to as overreaching of the leading phase in distance

protection terminology. A countermeasure is necessary to deal with this phenomenon. The
countermeasure is to utilize a Zmin element as shown in section 2.1.6. It is generally
recognised as being the result of a phase-to-phase fault impedance which is smaller than the
normal impedance.In the above instance, the element Zmin-BC of the faulted phase would
operate but the Zmin-AB and Zmin-CA elements of the healthy phases would not operate, so
that the unnecessary overreaching operation of ZS-AB can be blocked.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 32 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Offset characteristics in ZS
Some elements in ZS are used for the detection of faults in the reverse direction and these
elements can have an offset characteristic, which assures the detection of a close-up
three-phase fault. Offset characteristic1 is provided in Z1S, Z1XS, and Z5S; the offset
characteristic instructs to start the memory action at which the voltage drops to zero upon the
occurrence of a fault. That is, for dropping to zero voltage, the memory action services an
important role for deciding whether the fault is located in the forward or in the reverse
direction based upon the relay location. In the offset characteristic, its offset value is fixed at
1.5Ω for 5A rating2, whereas it is fixed at 7.5Ω for 1A rating2. Figure 2.1-14 exemplifies the
action of the Mho offset characteristic of Z1S in the reverse direction; Figure 2.1-15 illustrates
that the action of the Quad characteristic is applied. Note that the offset characteristic in the
reverse direction is not provided in Z2S and Z3S.
1Note: As a rule, Z1S, Z1XS, and Z5S are utilized for a close-up three-phase fault. For
example, the Z1S element can be instructed to operate in the reverse direction; the
operation of the Z1S element should be covered the origin (i.e., voltage=0), as
shown in Figure 2.1-14. Owing to the memory action for the close-up fault, the Z1S
element is able to detect a fault even if the memory does not hold voltage data (say,
in the memory the voltage data is set to zero for the close-up three-phase fault).
The operation of the memory action has been available for the last three-cycles at
the occurrence of the close-up fault; the memory action has not been available for
the last four-cycles. The same memory action is also provided in the Z1XS and the
Z5S.
2Note: Either 1A or 5A rating is fixed to operate on a transfer modules (VCT). For more
information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical Description: Transformer
module for AC analog input.
Static MHO characteristic

X
Z1S-Mho.Angle
Z1S-R.Reach
Z1S-R.Angle
R
Offset MHO characteristic

during close-up fault
Z1S-X.Reach
Figure 2.1-14 Z1S Mho element during close up fault (Offset action)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 33 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
X Offset Quadrilateral characteristic during close-up fault

ZS-DirRθ(R abscissa)
Static Quadrilateral characteristic
Z1S-R
R
ZS-Rθ
Z1S
ZS-DirXθ(X ordinate)
Figure 2.1-15 Z1S Quad element close-up fault (Offset action)
Operation of ZS for earth and multi-phase-faults

ZS can operate either when a phase-to-phase fault not involving earth occurs or when a fault
evolves into a multi-phase fault. Note that detection of the multi-phase fault is determined by
two or three phase operation of ZG. A setting and a scheme switch is provided for the
operation of each ZS element for earth-faults. For example, On is set for the scheme switch
[Z*S-MSDET] if the operation of Z*S is required for either multi-phase faults or faults that do
not involve earth.
(iii) Special characteristic in ZG

Earth fault compensation (Zero sequence current compensation)
On the detection of an earth fault, ZG requires a compensation function that corrects
measuring errors caused by the earth return of zero-sequence current. By using the
compensation function, the positive-sequence impedance to the fault point can be determined
precisely by the reactance element in the faulted phase. For a double-circuit line, the
zero-sequence current from the adjacent line is introduced to compensate for influences from
zero-sequence mutual coupling. Considering a case where the angle of the positive-sequence
impedance and the zero-sequence impedance differs, the distance protection function carries
out zero-sequence current compensation vectorially. We can see this case commonly in cable
circuits.
In ZG, this function provides the compensation factors for all elements and these factors
are defined with settings. For example, for Z1G, the settings [Z1G-Krs], [Z1G-Kxs],
[Z1G-Krm], [Z1G-Kxm] are provided. Where, “s” refers to the protected line; the resistance “r”;
the reactance “x” reflect its property and “m” refers to a mutual circuit line for parallel line
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 34 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
applications.
Table 2.1-3 ZG compensation factors in lines
Element Settings for Protected line Settings for Parallel line
Z1G [Z1G-Krs], [Z1G-Kxs] [Z1G-Krm], [Z1G-Kxm]
Z1XG [Z1XG-Krs], [Z1XG-Kxs] [Z1XG-Krm], [Z1XG-Kxm]
Measuring the positive-sequence impedance to the fault point is necessary. Therefore,

for a single circuit line, the current input to the earth fault-measuring element is
compensated by the residual current (3I0) of the protected line.
On the other hand, for a double circuit line, the current input is compensated by the
residual current (3I0) of the protected line and residual current (3I0’) of the adjacent line.
Generally, the following equation is used to compensate the zero-sequence voltage drop,
in this example for the case of phase “a”.
Va = (Ia − 𝐼0 ) × Z1 + 𝐼0 × 𝑍0 + 𝐼0𝑚 × 𝑍0𝑚 (2.1-15)
where,
Va: Phase “a” voltage
Ia: Phase “a” current
I0: Zero-sequence current of the protected line
I0m: Zero-sequence current of the adjacent line
Z1: Positive-sequence impedance (Z1 = R1 + jX1)
Z0: Zero-sequence impedance (Z0 = R0 + jX0)
Zom: Zero-sequence mutual impedance (Zom = Rom + jXom)
Equation (2.1-15) can be presented as follows:

Va = (R 1 + j X1 )Ia + (R 0 R 1 ) + j(X 0  X 1 )I 0
+ (R 𝑜𝑚 + j X 𝑜𝑚 ) I𝑜𝑚
𝑅0 − 𝑅1 𝑅0 𝑚
= R 1 (I 𝑎 + I0+ I ) + 𝑗𝑋1 (𝐼𝑎 (2.1-16)
𝑅1 𝑅1 𝑜𝑚
𝑋0 − 𝑋1 𝑋𝑚
+ I0+ I )
𝑋1 𝑋1 𝑜𝑚
In the relay, the voltage is compensated independently for resistance and reactance
components as shown in equation (2.1-16) instead of equation (2.1-15).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 35 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
𝐾𝑟𝑠
−1
VaR + jVaX = R1( IaR + 100  3I0R
3
𝐾𝑟𝑚 𝐾𝑥𝑠
100 −1
+  3𝐼𝑜𝑚𝑅 ) X1( IaX + 100  3I0X
3 3
𝐾𝑥𝑚
+ 100  3I0mX ) + jR1( IaX (2.1-17)
3
𝐾𝑟𝑠 𝐾𝑟𝑚
100 −1
+  3I0X + 100  3I0mX ) + X1( IaR
3 3
𝐾𝑥𝑠 𝐾𝑥𝑚
−1
+ 100  3I0R + 100  3I0mR )
3 3
where,
Kxs: compensation factor (Kxs = X0/X1 × 100)
Krs: compensation factor (Krs = R0/R1 × 100)
Kxm: compensation factor (Kxm = Xom/X1 × 100)
Krm: compensation factor (Krm = Rom/R1 × 100)
X: imaginary part of the measured impedance
R: real part of the measured impedance
VaX: imaginary part of phase “a” voltage
VaR: real part of phase “a” voltage
IaX: imaginary part of phase “a” current
IaR: real part of phase “a” current
I0X: imaginary part of zero-sequence current of the protected line
I0R: real part of zero-sequence current of the protected line
IomX: imaginary part of zero-sequence current of the adjacent line
IomR: real part of zero-sequence current of the adjacent line
I 0’
Zom
I 1, I 2, I 0 Fault
Va
ZG
Z1, Z2, Z0
Figure 2.1-16 Earth fault compensation
The Zero-sequence Current Compensation function (ZPCC) controls the zero-sequence

compensation required as a consequence of the influence of the adjacent line in parallel line
applications.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 36 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
When an earth fault occurs on the protected line, the ZPCC function will operate, in this
case parallel line compensation is performed to prevent under-reach caused by the mutual
zero-sequence current of the adjacent line.
When an earth fault occurs on the adjacent line, the ZPCC function does not operate,
compensation for the adjacent line is not performed to prevent overreach. The operating
condition of the ZPCC function is as follows:
3𝐼0
≥ 0.8 (2.1-18)
3𝐼0𝑚
Operation of ZG for earth-faults and multi-phase faults

ZG uses an EFL function for the detection of earth faults; hence, ZG will operate when the
EFL function operates. However, the operation of Z*G can be set to be either dependent or
independent of the operation of EFL; that is, On is set for the scheme switch [Z*G-EFL] for the
Z*G operation with EFL and Off is set for the scheme switch [Z*G-EFL] for the Z*G operation
without EFL.
If multi-phase fault (MPF) is detected, the operation of Z*G should be disengaged; hence,
user can set the scheme switch [Z*G-MPFBlk] Block in order to overridden the operation of
Z*G when a multi-phase fault occurs. On the other hand, if the operation of Z*G is not
required to be disengaged when MPF occurs, user can set this scheme switch Non.
With regard to the leading-phase-block function, where the leading phase of ZG tends to
operate in event of a multi-phase fault. Thus it is possible to set Non for scheme switch
[Z*G-LPBlk] in order to enable the operation of Z*G. However, Block can be set for this
scheme switch in order to block the operation of Z*G.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 37 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.1.3 Common application for ZS and ZG

Applications in ZS and ZG are divided into common features and special features. Each
feature secures this distance protection function.
(i) Power swing block

Operation of power swing block (PSB)
Power swings occur when the output voltages of generators located at different points in the
power system slip relative to one another because of system instabilities. This may be caused
by sudden changes in load magnitude or direction, or by power system faults and their
subsequent clearance. During the course of such a power swing, the impedance locus seen by
the distance protection relay may move (relatively slowly) from the load area into the
operating region of the distance protection. Actually, the relay may see this phenomenon as a
three-phase fault condition and may issue a trip signal if no countermeasure is applied. The
majority of power swings are transient and the power system recovers after a short period.
Since a trip signal from the relay is undesirable in such cases, a power swing blocking
function, (PSB) is provided enabling the operation of the distance protection to be blocked
during the power swing. Figure 2.1-17 illustrates a typical impedance locus as seen by the
relay during the transient power swing.
X
Distance protection zone (Mho char.)
Impedance locus
during transient
power swing
R
Load Area
As shown in Figure 2.1-18 (a), for ZS, the power swing blocking elements (PSBSOUT
and PSBSIN) are formed as shown in the shaded area. For ZG, as shown in Figure 2.1-18 (b),
power swing blocking elements (PSBGOUT and PSBGIN) are provided and have the same
characteristic and feature. The PSBG function is disengaged when a residual overcurrent
(EFL) element operates. The detection of earth faults is discussed later.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 38 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
X X
PSBSOUT PSBGOUT
PSBSZ PSBGZ
PSBSIN Z2S PSBGIN Z2G
PSBGZ
PSBGZ
PSBSZ
PSBSZ
0 R 0 R
Z3S Z3G
PSBSZ PSBGZ
a. PSBSIN and PSBSOUT in ZS b. PSBGIN and PSBGOUT in ZG
Figure 2.1-18 Example of PSB element in Mho characteristic
The setting of PSBSIN adjusts automatically so that the PSBS operates properly in
accordance with the operation of ZS. The shaded area formed by the rectangle, which is
tangential with the elements (circles) in both directions of ZS, determines the size of PSBSIN.
For example, in Figure 2.1-18, Z2S is the most distant measuring element in the forward
direction; Z3S is the most distant measuring element in reverse direction; the top line of the
PSBSIN function is similar to the tangent of Z2S, the bottom line of the PSBSIN function is
similar to the tangent of Z3S. The outer element PSBSOUT encloses the inner element
PSBSIN with a width which can be set using the setting [PSBSZ].
The case of the Quad characteristic is similar to that of the Mho characteristic, as shown
in Figure 2.1-19.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 39 -
Z2S 6F2S1905 (0.80)
X X
PSBSOUT PSBGOUT
PSBSZ PSBGZ
PSBSIN PSBGIN
Z2S Z2G
PSBGZ
PSBGZ
PSBSZ
PSBSZ
0 R 0 R
Z3S Z3G
PSBSZ PSBGZ
a. PSBSIN and PSBSOUT in ZS b. PSBGIN and PSBGOUT in ZG
Figure 2.1-19 Example of PSB element in Quad characteristic
Figure 2.1-20 shows the PSBS-out and PSBS-in logic. During a power swing, the
impedance viewed from the PSB elements passes through the area between the PSBSOUT
and PSBSIN in a certain time. In the event of a system fault, the impedance passes through
this area instantaneously. A power swing, therefore, can be detected in the time that the locus
of the power swing remains within the shaded area of the rectangle between the outer and
inner elements. A delayed pick-up timer, [TPSBS] is initiated when the locus passes through
the PSBSOUT element and continues until the PSBSIN element operates in order to measure
the time duration for the locus to pass through the shaded area. If this time duration is longer
than the set value of the delayed pick-up timer, [TPSBS] the PSBS element will operate to
block the operation of the distance protection trip signal.
Suppose that impedance locus may stay in the PSBS zone for a certain time. On this
case, the PSB detection is reset forcibly when the user set On for scheme switches [PSBSFR].
Another delayed timer resets the trip block signal that is generated by the PSBS
element when the power swing is detected after the PSBSOUT operation is removed; 500ms is
the value set for the delayed pick-up timer.
Similarly, a PSB element is also provided for ZG and its operation is termed as PSBG.
(See Figure 2.1-21) The setting of PSBG is similar to that of PSBS.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 40 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8400081B65 To VTF and CTF

AB &
& 1
PSBS 8500081B66 ≥1 & 8100081B60
OUT BC S
& PSBS-CVTF-BLK
8600081B67
CA R
&
8000081B62
AB
& TPSBS
8100081B63 ≥1 t 0 8000081B61
PSBS BC S
& 1
IN 8200081B64 PSBS DET
CA 0.02 to 0.100s R
&
From
DISTANCE COMMON
OCCR-AB
OCCR-BC
OCCR-CA
1 & t 0 ≥1
EFL ≥1 0.5s
8000081BB0
800008EBB0 PSBS_BLOCK 1
TPSBSFR
t 0
&
PSBSFR
On 0.0 to 10.00s
8100081BB1
810008EBB1 PSBS F.RESET
Figure 2.1-20 PSBS logic
8400081B63 To VTF and CTF

A &
& 1
8500081B64 ≥1 & 8100081B6F
PSBG B S
& PSBG-CVTF-BLK
OUT 8600081B65
C R
&
8000081B66
A
& TPSBG
8100081B67 ≥1 t 0 8000081B70
PSBG B S
& 1
IN 8200081B68 PSBG DET
C 0.02 to 0.100s R
&
From
DISTANCE COMMON
OCCR-A
OCCR-B
OCCR-C
1 & t 0 ≥1
EFL ≥1 0.5s
8000081BB0
800008EBB0 PSBG_BLOCK 1
TPSBGFR
t 0
&
PSBGFR
On 0.0 to 10.00s
8100081BB1
810008EBB1 PSBG F.RESET
Figure 2.1-21 PSBG logic
Setting for blocking operation of Distance protection

Scheme switches [Z*S-PSBBlk] and [Z*G-PSBBlk] are provided to block the operation of the
respective Z*S and Z*G elements. Generally, it is desirable to block the operation of the
respective ZS elements and ZG elements during a power swing. Thus, Block is set for the
respective scheme switches [Z*S-PSBBlk] and [Z*G-PSBBlk].
However, when it is required to continue the operation of respective ZS and ZG elements

during a power swing, Non is set for respective scheme switches.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 41 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Load encroachment

The load encroachment element is used to improve security when heavy load current flows in
a line. When the impedance remains within the hatched area as shown in Figure 2.1-22, a
signal that reflects the operation of the load encroachment element is yielded and ZS is
forbidden from operating by a blocking signal.
As shown in Figure 2.1-22(a), for ZS the minimum load resistance R is defined by the
setting of scheme switches [LESR] and [LESL]. Setting of the maximum load angles across the
R ordinate is performed using scheme switches [LESR-Angle] and [LESL-Angle], provided On
is set for the scheme switches [LES-EN].
For ZG, when On is set for the scheme switches [LEG-EN], similar settings and scheme
switches are provided: settings [LEGR], [LEGL], [LEGR-Angle], and [LEGL-Angle], are shown
in Figure 2.1-22(b).
X X
ZESL-Angle ZEGL-Angle
ZESR-Angle ZEGR-Angle
R R
LESR LEGR
LESL LEGL
a. LESL and LESR for ZS b. LEGL and LEGR for ZG
Figure 2.1-22 Load encroachment characteristic
(iii) Fail safe function

Both ZS and ZG have overcurrent elements, which can be used to stop the erroneous
operation for checking the ZS/ZG operations.
For example, an overcurrent element is provided in Z*S, termed Z*S-OCFS-EN. The

Z*S-OCFS-EN element can start when On is set for the scheme switch [Z*S-OCFS-EN], the
overcurrent element is subject to the setting of [OCF*S] in Z*S. The setting value is chosen
between 0.02–5.00 A (1 A rating) or 0.10–25.00 A (5 A rating).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 42 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Similarly, ZG has overcurrent elements for checking. When On is set for the scheme
switch [Z*G-OCFS-EN], the overcurrent element is subject to the setting of [OCF*G] in Z*G.
(iv) Definite time delay operation

In accordance with the location of the fault, the timing of trip signals can be adjusted with
delayed timers. For instance, a delay timer in Z*S tripping can be set by applying a time delay
setting using [TZ*S] whose value can be chosen between 0.00–100.00s. Similarly, for ZG
delayed timers can be applied using [TZ*G].
For Z1S and Z1G tripping, either instantaneous tripping or time delayed tripping can be
selected; hence, the scheme switch [Z1CNT-INSTOP] is provided for the selection of the trip
mode, which is described earlier.
(v) Autoreclose initiation blocking

If ZS and ZG detect a fault, the output signals of ZS and ZG are generated in trip circuit (TRC)
and the CB is tripped. If autoreclose (ARC) is not required following the operation of Z*S, Block
can be set using the scheme switch [Z*S-ARCBlk]. Conversely, if ARC is required following the
operation of Z*S, then Non can be set using the scheme switch [Z*S-ARCBlk]. Similarly, for
ZG scheme the following switch is provided: [Z*G-ARCBlk].
The function for blocking the initiation of autoreclose is also represented in Figure
2.1-30 and Figure 2.1-32 of section 2.1.6.
Note: The operation and setting of the ARC are discussed separately. For more
information on ARC, see Chapter Relay application: Autoreclose and voltage check.
(vi) Zone 1 control

Both Z1S and Z1G offer a variety of trip modes in order to satisfy the diverse nature of the
many schemes and applications in which the relay is required to operate. The following
scheme switches provide the flexibility required to meet the wide range of applications. Figure
2.1-23 shows the scheme logic for Zone 1 control. When signal “Z1CNT_MPROT” is active,
user can control Z1S and Z1G as follows:
 A trip signal is blocked if On is set for the scheme switch [Z1CNT-TPBlk].
 A three-phase trip is initiated by Z1G on the occurrence of a fault if On is set for the
scheme switch [Z1CNT-3PTP].
 Autoreclose is blocked if On is set for the scheme switch [Z1CNT-ARCBlk].
 Both Z1S and Z1G generate an instantaneous operation signal if On is set for the
scheme switch [Z1CNT-INSTOP].
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 43 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8000001BB0 Z1CNT_MPROT
8000001B62
Z1CNT-TPBLK
&
Z1CNT-TPBlk On
8100001B63
Z1CNT-3PTP
&
Z1CNT-3PTP On
8200001B64
Z1CNT-ARCBLK
&
Z1CNT-ARCBlk On
8300001B65
1 Z1CNT-INSTOP
&
Z1CNT-INSTOP On
Figure 2.1-23 Scheme logic of Zone1 operation control
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 44 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.1.4 Extended application

(i) Switch-onto-fault (SOTF)
If a dead line has a fault prior to energization the CB should trip quickly upon when the line is
energized. To trip the CB when the faulted line is energized, a switch-onto-fault (SOTF)
protection function is provided. This function is armed for a certain period after the CB is
closed.1
The SOTF function can operate, in the case when a line remains in a non-energized state
for a certain time, which is termed as the deadline time defined by the protection common
(PROT_COMMON2) function.
If Z*S is required to operate for the SOTF function, On is set for the scheme switch
[Z*S-SOTF]. When Z*S is not required to operate for the SOTF operation, the scheme switch
is set to Off.
The SOTF function is provided for all of the ZS/ZG elements; hence, all of the elements
are provided with similar scheme switches and these switches are termed “SOTF” with the
zone names [Z*S-SOTF] for ZS, [Z*G-SOTF] for ZG.
1Note: The distance- measuring element can operate for faults other than close-up
three-phase faults.
2Note: The operation and settings of the PROT_COMMON is described separately, (See
Chapter Relay application: Protection common)
(ii) Prevailing one-line-to-ground fault (1LG) in Z1G element

The Z1GCOV element is designed for two purposes in Quad characteristic. One is for making
the coordination concerning the operating time between the reactance element (X), the
resistive element (R), and the directional element (DR); the other is for prevailing the zone1 in
the ZG function just for the incident with the one-line-to-ground (1LG) fault (i.e., the other
faults will not be detected in the ZG function). The user should select a value from 2.0 (200%)
to 3.0 (300%) for settings [ZS-CovCoeff] and [ZG-CovCoeff]. This is because, an adjacent line
beyond the remote end (i.e., beyond the remote busbar) will be protected surely (i.e., 100% or
far reach can be covered). Incidentally, prevailing for the zone1 operation in the ZG function
will not be held unconditionally if a fault occurs at different terminals of the parallel lines and
the fault is found in different phases. Figure 2.1-24 illustrates the characteristic of Z1GCOV
element that is defined with the multiplier settings [ZS-CovCoeff] and [ZG-CovCoeff] so that
the Z1GCOV element can operate between the zone2 and the zone3.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 45 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
X 300% X
Z3-X.Reach
Expansion made with setting [Z-CovCoeff]
Z2-X.Reach
150%
Reactance element (X)
Z1-X.Reach
100%
Z1GCOV element
Z1S/Z1G element
Resistive element (R)
R R
Directional element (DR)
Figure 2.1-24 Z1GCOV element in Quad characteristic programmed by settings
2.1.5 Carrier command protection feature

The means of telecommunication makes possible for protective relays to exchange its
operation information. If the protective relays locate at each end of the protected line with the
telecommunication, the distance protection functions can determine whether the fault is
internal or external to the protected line.
As for the ZS, we provide you the function of distance protection telecommunicated as
carrier command protection (ZCSF and ZCSR). As for the ZG, we also provide you the ZCSF
and ZCSR for the command protection. You should take case that, discussed here are the
elements and characteristic of the command protection only; we provide the operation
instruction of this function separately. (See Chapter Relay application: Distance carrier
command protection.)
(i) ZS carrier command protection

Figure 2.1-25 and Figure 2.1-26 show the ZS characteristic of the command protection. You
can find the Mho or the Quad characteristic; and you can select its characteristic when you
place the set of Mho or Quad for the scheme switch [ZS-Chara].
As shown in Figure 2.1-25, if you require placing an element in the Mho characteristic in
forward direction (ZCSF), you should place the reach setting of the ZCSF for settings
[ZCSF-Mho.Reach] and [ZCSF-Mho.Angle] both. On the other hand, when you need to
prescribe the reach setting of the ZCSF in reactance X, you should place its setting value for
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 46 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
setting [ZCSF-X.Reach] with a set of On being placed for scheme switch [ZCSF-MhoX.EN].
You can also prescribe resistive elements as shown on right and left side with settings
[ZCSF-R.Reach] and [ZCSF-R.Angle]; the resistive elements are applicable when you place a
set of On for scheme switch [ZCSF-MhoR.EN].
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 2.1-26, when you require placing an element in
the Quad characteristic in forward direction, you should place the reach of the ZCSF with
setting [ZCSF-X.Reach]. You can also place resistive elements, right side and left side in the
figure with setting [ZCSF-R.Reach] and [ZCSF-R.Angle]. The resistive elements are
symmetrical and the right side is placed across the origin from the left side. Additionally, you
can place a directional element—as shown with a bottom line—with setting
[ZCSF-DR.Angle].
The same holds true for an element in the Mho characteristic in reverse direction (ZCSR) and
you can place the ZCSR with settings and scheme switches:
for the Mho, [ZCSR-Mho.Reach], [ZCSR-Mho.Angle], [ZCSR-X.Reach]
[ZCSR-R.Reach], [ZCSR-R.Angle], [ZCSR-MhoX.EN] and
[ZCSR-MhoR.EN] and
for the Quad, [ZCSR-X.Reach], [ZCSR-R.Reach], [ZCSRF-R.Angle], and
[ZCSR-DR.Angle].
You should place a set of Block for setting [ZCSF-PSBBlk] because the operation of the ZCSF
should stop when the power swing is detected. You should place a set of Non for the setting
when you require the ZCSF operation keeping in the power swing detection.
You also should place a set of a set of Block for setting [ZCSR-VTFBlk] because the operation
of the ZCSR should stop when the VTF is detected. Conversely, you should place a set of Non
for the setting were you to require the ZCSR operation keeping in the VTF detection.
Make sure that the ZCSF does not supply the offset feature while the ZCSR supplies the offset
feature. The settings for the offset element are fixed at 7.5 Ω for 1 A rating or 1.5 Ω for 5 A
rating. The fix offset makes the ZCSR operate constantly even when the three-phase fault
appears close in the reverse side. However, the ZCSF blocks its operation in the three-phase
fault because the ZCSR runs together with the ZCSF. As a result, the command protection can
avoid improper operations.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 47 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
X
ZCSF-Mho.Angle
ZCSF-Mho.Reach
ZCSF-R.Angle ZCSF-R.Angle
ZCSF-X.Reach
ZCSR-R.Reach ZCSR-R.Reach
R
ZCSF-R.Reach ZCSF-R.Reach
ZCSR-R.Angle
ZCSR-R.Angle
ZCSR-X.Reach
ZCSR-Mho.Reach
ZCSB-Mho.Angle
Figure 2.1-25 ZCSF and ZCSR in Mho characteristic
ZCSF-DX.Angle X
ZCSF-X.Reach
ZCSF-R.Angle ZCSF-R.Angle
ZCSR-DR.Angle
ZCSF-R.Reach
ZCSR-R.Reach
R
ZCSR-R.Angle ZCSF-R.Reach
ZCSF-DR.Angle
ZCSR-X.Reach
ZCSR-R.Angle
Figure 2.1-26 ZCSF and ZCSR in Quad characteristic
(ii) ZG carrier command protection

With respect to the ZCGF and the ZCGR both, these characteristics and functions are similar
to the ZCSF and the ZCSR. However, you should make sure that the ZCGR does not have an
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 48 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
offset action in revers zone as shown in Figure 2.1-27 and Figure 2.1-28. That is, only static
characteristics are drawn in the characteristic figures.
As for the cancellation of the ZCGF and the ZCGR, provided are settings [ZCGF-PSBBlk] and
[ZCGR-VTFBlk].
ZCGF-Mho.Angle
ZCGF-Mho.Reach
ZCGF-R.Angle ZCGF-R.Angle
ZCGF-X.Reach
ZCGR-R.Reach ZCGR-R.Reach
R
ZCGF-R.Reach ZCGF-R.Reach
ZCGR-R.Angle
ZCGR-R.Angle
ZCGR-X.Reach
ZCGR-Mho.Reach
ZCGR-Mho.Angle
Figure 2.1-27 ZCGF and ZCGR in Mho characteristic
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 49 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
X
ZCGF-DX.Angle
ZCGF-X.Reach
ZCGF-R.Angle
ZCGB-DR.Angle
ZCGF-R.Reach
ZCGR-R.Reach
R
ZCGR-R.Angle
ZCGF-DR.Angle
ZCGR-DX.Angle
ZCGR-X.Reach
Figure 2.1-28 ZCGF and ZCGR in Quad characteristic
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 50 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.1.6 Scheme logic

(i) ZS logic
Figure 2.1-29 shows the scheme logic of the Z1S and the SOTF.
Z1S ｒｅｌａｙ 8000011C20 TZ1S 8000011B66 8000011B23

Z1S-AB t 0 Z1S-OPT-AB
Zab ≤ Z1S ≥1 Z1S-OPT
& 8100011C21 & & 8100011B67 ≥1
Z1S-BC t 0 Z1S-OPT-BC
Zbc ≤ Z1S ≥1
& 8200011C22 & & 8200011B68
Z1S-CA t 0 Z1S-OPT-CA
Zca ≤ Z1S ≥1
& & &
0.00-100.00s
Fail safe operated

Zmin-AB & &
Zmin-BC 8000011BB0 Z1STP_BLOCK 1 &
Zmin-CA &
Z1CNT-TPBLK 1
Z1S-TPEN On 8000011BB1 Z1S_INST_OP ≥1
Z1CNT-INSTOP 8000011B6A 8000011B2B

SOTF-Z1S-OPT-AB
VTF detection 1 ≥1 SOTF-Z1S-TRIP
& & 8100011B6B
SOTF-Z1S-OPT-BC
Load encroachment detection 1 & 8200011B6C
≥1 SOTF-Z1S-OPT-CA
LES-EN Off &
Multi phase fault Dead line detection

≥1 &
Z1S-MSDET Off 8000011BB3 SOTF-Z1S_BLOCK 1
Z1S-SOTF On
PSB detection 1
&
Z1S-PSBBlk Block
Figure 2.1-29 Scheme logic of Zone1 element and SOTF signal
In the above figure, the Z1S element generates a trip command immediately when the
instantaneous mode is selected using the scheme switch [Z1CNT_INSTOP]. Note that the
scheme switch [LES_EN] can be used to block the Z1S element. The scheme switches
[Z1S-PSBBLK] and [Z1G-PSBBLK] can be used to block tripping when a power swing occurs
in the system. The scheme switch [Z1S-MSDET] is also used to cancel the operation condition,
which we have discussed with regard to the selection of the operation of ZS effected by the
occurrences of multi-phase fault or earth-fault. (see section 2.1.2(ii)-3).
Both ZS and ZG generate a trip command if On is set for all of the scheme switches
termed “TPEN” with zone names [Z*S-TPEN] for ZS and [Z*G-TPEN] for ZG.
The scheme switch is set to Off to disable the trip command.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 51 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 2.1-30 shows blocking of the ARC in Z1S. Based on the Z1S_ARCBLOCK signal,
the Z1S element generates a final trip command for all faults.
Z1S-OPT To block the

& Autoreclose
8000011BB2 Z1S_ARCBLOCK
≥1
Z1S-ARCBlk Block
Z1CNT-ARCBLK
Figure 2.1-30 ARC_BLOCK functions for zone 1 of the distance protection (ZS)
(ii) ZG logic
Figure 2.1-31 shows the scheme logic for Z1G and SOTF. The SOTF function is available in
every zone (Z1SG, Z1GX, Z2G, Z3G, Z4G, and Z5G) and can be selected using the scheme
switches.
Scheme switch [Z1G-EFL] is used to select the EFL element for the detection of earth
faults; when the EFL element operates, detection of the PSB is canceled.
Scheme switch [Z1G-LPBlk] is used to enable blocking of the operation of the

leading-phase-block function. The ARC_BLOCK function configures the Z1G element to
perform final three-phase tripping for all faults. The Z1G_3PTP configures the Z1G element
to perform the three-phase trip.
The Z1G element is able to operate in an instantaneous mode by using the scheme
switch [Z1CNT_INSTOP]. Furthermore, the scheme switch [LEG_EN] can block this element.
The scheme switch [Z1G-PSBBLK] is selected for blocking the tripping when a power swing
occurs in the system.
A residual overcurrent element (EFL) is provided as a common function. A value can be

set using the setting [EFL].
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 52 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8000011C20 TZ1G 8000011B66

t 0
Z1G A Z1G-OPT-A
8100011C21 & & ≥1 8100011B67
t 0 Z1G-OPT-B
B ≥1
8200011C22 & & 8200011B68
t 0 Z1G-OPT-C
C ≥1
& & 8000011B69
0.00-100.00s
Fail safe operated Z1G-OPT

& & ≥1
8000011BB0 Z1GTP_BLOCK 1 &
&
Z1G-TPEN On
& &
EFL
Z1CNT-TPBLK 1
Z1G-EFL On
8000011BB1 Z1G_INST_OP
≥1
VTF detection 1
Z1CNT-INSTOP 8000011B6B 8000011B2B
1 SOTF-Z1G-OPT-A
Load encroachment detection ≥1 SOTF-Z1G-TRIP
& 8100011B6C
SOTF-Z1G-OPT-B
Multi phase fault 1 & 8200011B6D
& SOTF-Z1G-OPT-C
Z1G-MPFBlk Block &
PSB detection 1 Dead line detection

& &
Z1G-PSBBlk Block 8000011BB4 SOTF-Z1G 1

BLOCK
Z1G-SOTF On
8000011B20
Z1G-OPT-A Z1G-TRIP-A
≥1 8100011B21
Z1G-OPT-B Z1G-TRIP-B
≥1 8200011B22
Z1G-OPT-C Z1G-TRIP-C
≥1
Z1G-OPT
&
8000011BB2 Z1G_3PTP
≥1
Z1G-TPMD 3P
Z1CNT-3PTP
Figure 2.1-31 Scheme logic for Z1G, SOTF and EFL
Z1G-OPT To block the

& Autoreclose
8000011BB3 Z1G_ARCBLOCK
≥1
Z1G-ARCBlk Block
Z1CNT-ARCBLK
Figure 2.1-32 ARC BLOCK and 3TP for zone 1 of the distance protection (ZG)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 53 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.1.7 Tips to set the main/remote backup relays

To make the coordination between the main (primary) relay and backup relays on lines, using
a reach1 setting and a delay timer setting2 can resolve the problems. Figure 2.1-33 exemplifies
that respective reaches and delays in the distance protection (ZS/ZG) functions result in the
coordination between the main (primary) relay and backup relays on the lines.
Busbar A Busbar B Busbar C Busbar D

G X R Y Q Z P
CTI Line AB Line BC Line CD
Zone5(X) Zone5(Y) Zone5(Z)

TZ5
TZ4
Zone3(X) Zone3(Y)
TZ3

TZ2
TZ1 Zone1(X) Zone1(Y) Zone1(Z) Reach in the forward

X R Y Q Z P
Reach in the forward TZ1
Zone1(R) Zone1(Q) Zone1(P)
TZ2
TZ3
Zone3(Q) Zone3(P)
TZ4
TZ5
Zone5(R) Zone5(Q)
CTI
Figure 2.1-33 Zones and time coordination between terminals3

1Note: For the ZS elements, the ‘reach’ setting is possible using the settings
[Z*S-Mho.Reach] and [Z*S-Mho.Angle] for the Mho characteristic. If the Quad
characteristic is applied, the value of the reach setting is projected on the
reactance-axis.
2Note: To realize the coordination time interval (CTI), the user can apply delay times for
the operation in respective elements. For the ZS elements, for example, use the
settings [TZ*S].
3Note: ‘Zone1’, ‘zone2’, and ‘zone3’ are zones seen by the ZS/ZG relays looking into the
forward. On the other hand, ‘zone4’ and ‘zone5’ are zones seen by the ZS/ZG relays
looking into the backward. The locations of the ZS/ZG relays are shown with
parentheses. That is, the zone1(X), which is operated at the location X, trips ‘circuit
breaker (X)’.
(i) Setting for the primary line (Zone1)

The zone1 of the ZS/ZG function is equivalent to the main (primary) relay; the zone1 shall
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 54 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
operate instantly. As shown in Figure 2.1-33, the reach of the zone1(X) is required to cover the
majority of the line length AB, whereas the zone1(X) should be independent on faults that
occur beyond the busbar B. Given the existence of the measuring errors in the VT and the CT,
approximate 80 to 90% of the line AB is required to set for the reach setting at the zone1(X).
For the CTI as the main (primary) relay, the delay timer in the zone1(X) should be set
zero in order that tripping is executed instantly. The delay timer is programmed using the
setting [TZ1S or TZ1G], which retard the operating time of the main (primary) relay; note
Equation (2.1-19) shall be satisfied for the zone 1:
(𝑋) (𝑋) (𝑋)

𝑇𝑍1(𝑋) > 𝑇𝑃 + 𝑇𝐶𝐵 + 𝑇𝑍𝑜𝑛𝑒1 − 𝑇1(𝑋) (2.1-19)
where we have defined

Tp(X): Maximum operating time in the main (primary) relay(x),
Tcb(X): Opening time in the circuit breaker(X),
T1(X): Minimum operating time for the zone1(X),
TZone1(X): Reset time for the zone1(X)
(ii) Setting for adjacent lines (Zone2 serviced as a backup relay)

The reach setting in the zone2(X) is required to cover 100% of the line AB plus about 20% of the
adjacent line BC. To preserve the operation selectivity for the adjacent line BC (i.e., the
operation in the zone1(Y)), the user should set the reach of the zone2(X) not beyond the reach of
the zone1(Y).
Note that setting TZ2(X) does not influence the CTI regarding the zone1(Y). If delayed
tripping in the zone1(X) is preferred, the CTI between the zone2(X) and the zone1(Y) should be
taken into account. Note that setting TZ2(X) should be satisfied with Equations (2.1-20) and
(2.1-21):
(𝑌) (𝑌) (𝑋)

𝑇𝑍2(𝑋) > 𝑇𝑃 + 𝑇𝐶𝐵 + 𝑇𝑍𝑜𝑛𝑒2 − 𝑇2(𝑋) (2.1-20)
𝑇𝑍2(𝑋) > 𝑇𝑍1(𝑋) (2.1-21)
where we have defined

Tp(Y): Maximum operating time in the main (primary) relay(Y),
Tcb(Y): Opening time in the circuit breaker(Y),
T2(X): Minimum operating time for the zone2(X),
TZone2(X): Reset time for the zone2(X)
Figure 2.1-34 shows that the adjacent line BC is too short so that the coordination
between the zone1(Y) and the zone2(X) is not realized straightforward. Hence, setting TZ2(X) is
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 55 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
required to be larger than setting TZ2(Y); consequently, the coordination between is achieved.
Busbar A Busbar B Busbar C

X Y
Line AB Line BC
CTI
Zone3(X)
TZ3
Zone2(X)
TZ2(X)
Zone2(Y)
TZ2(Y)
Zone1(X) Zone1(Y)
TZ1
X Y Reach
Figure 2.1-34 Setting zone2 when line BC is shorter than line AB

Tips: For the reach and delay settings about the CTI to the zone 2, the user is generally
required to check the selectivity that is influenced with the slowest timer of the
following protection relays: (1) Busbar, transformer, and breaker-failure relays at
the remote end and (2) line protection relay on the adjacent lines.
(iii) Setting for far adjacent lines (Zone3 serviced as a backup relay)
The zone3(X) will be served as a backup relay for far adjacent lines, if the coordination could be
satisfied with the zone2(Y); then, the user should set the reach of the zone3(x) that can cover the
remote-end of the longest adjacent line whenever possible. Note that the effect of fault infeed
should be taken into account at the remote busbars. If the line-configuration is similar to the
one in Figure 2.1-33, the user is only required to think of the coordination between the
settings TZ3(X), TZ2(X), and TZ2(Y).
X Y
Line AB Line BC
Busbar E
Line BE
CTI
Zone3(X)
TZ3(X)
Zone3(Y)
TZ3(Y)
Zone2(X)
Zone2(Y)
Zone1(X) Zone1(Y)
TZ1
X Y Reach
Figure 2.1-35 Zone3 setting when the line BC is shorter than the line BE
Figure 2.1-35 illustrates that the adjacent line BC is shorter than the adjacent line BE.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 56 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
For the CTI between the adjacent lines BC and BE, if it is difficult to achieve the coordination
by using only the reach settings, the user may be required to set the TZ3(X) longer than the
TZ2(Y).
(iv) Setting for backward lines (Zones4 and 5 serviced as backup relays)
If backward adjacent lines are required to protect by the relay(X), the zone4(X) or the zone5(X) is
suitable to protect. For example, as shown in Figure 2.1-33, if setting the reach of the zone4(X)
can be performed in the reverse to cover the busbar and the transformer, the zone4(X) will
operate as a back-up relays.
(v) Extra setting for the primary zone (Zone1X with autoreclosing)
The user should notice that disadvantages exist in the CTI schemes, because a fault occurred
a bit beyond the zone1 may be cleared in delay by the zone2. That is, the zone1 plus the zone2
cannot clear speedily for any fault on the line AB†. Thus, the extra zone1 (zone1X) is designed
to clear the fault occurred near the busbar B; its operation is taken together with the
operation of the autoreclose function (ARC‡).

G X R Y Q
CTI Line AB Line BC
Zone5(X)
TZ5
Zone4(X)
TZ4
1
Zone3(X)
TZ3
Zone2(X) Zone2(Y)
TZ2
Zone1X(X)
TZ1 Zone1(X) Zone1(Y)
X Y Q Reach
Figure 2.1-36 CTIs for zone1 and zone1X
As shown in Figure 2.1-36, the reach of the zone1X should be set to overreach the
protected line AB. Once a fault occurs near busbar B, the ARC function must operate to follow
the trip command issued by the zone1X. The user must know that the zone1X is just effective
about the transient fault for which the ARC operation§ can recover the power transmission.
If evolving faults occur, the zone1X will issue one-more trip command successively to
follow a CB reclose command issued by the ARC function. If the permanent fault occurs, the
zone1X will issue no trip command respond to a reclose-on-to-fault condition.
†Note:The command distance protection (DISCAR) is provided for the speedy protection
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 57 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
when the telecommunication is provided. See chapter Relay application: Command

distance protection.
‡Note:For more information about the ARC function, see chapter Relay application:
Autoreclosing function.
§Note:For the transient fault, the power transmission could be recovered transiently by
the operation of the ARC function, whereas the zone1X cannot operate effectively
for the permanent fault (i.e., more of the network will be lost than necessary). We
recommend one to use the DISCAR function when the DISCAR function is
available.
2.1.8 Tips to set the distance zones for multi-terminal lines

(i) Setting for reverse zones (Zone4 served as a backup relay)
Suppose multi-terminal lines (AJ, FJ, and JK) are configured behind the busbar A, as shown
in Figure 2.1-37. The line AB may be required to protect by the remote-backup relay(S or O)
together with the main (primary) relay(X). However, the zone4(W) may operate more effectively
than the zone3(S). That is, it is difficult for the zone3(S) (or the zone3(O)) to service a remote
backup relay for the line AB once a fault occurs on the line AB, because a fault current is fed
from several busbars. On the other hand, the fault current feeding will not influence the
operation of the zone4(W).
Busbar F Busbar A Line AB Busbar B

Line FJ J Line AJ
S U X R
Fault
Busbar K
Line JK
O
CTI
TZ3 Zone3(S)
Zone2(S)
TZ2
TZ1 Zone1(S) Zone1(X) Line BE

S W X Reach R
TZR1 Zone1(W) Zone4(W)
Figure 2.1-37 Reverse zone protection for multi-terminal lines
(ii) Setting for the primary zone (Zone1 and a junction)

Suppose that a line AC is connected at line AF at junction J, as shown in Figure 2.1-38. The
zone1(S) may underreach due to a feeding current behind busbar A, whereas, the zone1(S) is not
allowed to overreach for any fault on the busbar B. Hence, the zone1(S) must be set so that it
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 58 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
can operate correctly for any faults within the protected zone even if a power source does not
exist behind busbar B. Accordingly, as for the fault on the line AB, the user should have
underreach setting in enough to the zone1(S).
Busbar A Busbar B
Line AJ J Line BJ CTI
S U
TZ3
Fault
Line CJ X TZ2
O TZ1 Zone1(S)
Busbar C
S
TZR1
Figure 2.1-38 Line CJ tapped at junction J
(iii) Setting for the primary zone (Zone1 and a shot tapped line)
Suppose the busbar C is tapped at the junction J on the line AB, as shown in Figure 2.1-39. It
is required to have the reach setting in both the zone1(S) and the zone1(U) so as to hold a part
of the entire length of the line as shown in the long-dashed-short-dashed -circle line to avoid
unwanted operations for external faults at busbar C. Consequently, clearing faults by a
delayed zone2 are performed mostly, as shown in the broken-circle line that is operated at an
end of the line AB†.
Busbar A Busbar B
Line FJ J Line AJ
S U
Line JK
O
Busbar C
Busbar A Busbar B
S U
O
Busbar C
long-dashed-short-dashed-circle line
broken-circle line
dotted-circle line
Figure 2.1-39 Short line CJ tapped at junction J

†Note:To solve the problem, we recommend using the distance carrier command
protection or the current differential protection for the multi-terminals line shown
in the dotted-circle line.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 59 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.1.9 Setting list
Setting of Distance common(Function ID: 432001)

Default setting
Range
value
Setting item Units Contents Notes
1A 5A 1A 5A
rating rating rating rating
Charging current compensation Off/On
Z-IcC.EN Off / On – Off
selection for ZG and ZS
0.00 – 0.00 – Charging current compensation for ZG and
Z-IcC A 0
1.00 5.00 ZS
Z-Vn 100 – 120 V Rated voltage for ZG and ZS 110
0.10 – 0.50 –
EFL A EF element for ZG operation 0.20 1.00
1.00 5.00
Z1 operation control, set to Z1 trip block
Z1CNT-TPBlk Off / On – Off
when main-protection is out-of-service
Z1 operation control, set to Z1
Z1CNT-INSTOP Off / On – instantaneous trip when main-protection Off
is out-of-service
Z1 operation control, set to Z1 3-phase trip
Z1CNT-3PTP Off / On – Off
when main-protection is out-of-service
Z1 operation control, set to autoreclose
Z1CNT-ARCBlk Off / On – block by Z1 operation when Off
main-protection is out-of-service
Setting of ZS(Function ID: 430001)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Common ZS-Chara Quad / Mho – ZS relay characteristic Quad
ZS-forward gradient characteristic angle
ZSF-X.GrAngle1 0 – 45 deg 0
(for Quad and Mho-X)
ZSF-X.GrAngle2 45 – 90 deg 75
ZS-CovCoeff 1.5 – 3.0 – Covered characteristic size coefficient 1.5
Z1S Z1S-TPEN Off / On – Z1S protection enable On
Z1S-SOTF Off / On – SOTF using Z1S Off
Forward / Reverse
Z1S-Dir – Z1S directional characteristic Forward
/ NonDir
Z1S-Mho.Angle 30 – 90 deg Z1S mho characteristic angle (for Mho) 85
0.10 – 0.01 –
Z1S-Mho.Reach ohm Z1S mho reach (for Mho) 8.00 1.60
500.00 100.00
Z1S reactance reach Off/On selection (for
Z1S-MhoX.EN Off / On – Off
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
Z1S-X.Reach ohm Z1S reactance reach 8.00 1.60
500.00 100.00
Off / On–Set / On–
Z1S-X.GrAngleEN – ZS gradient characteristic Off
Adapt
Z1S resistive reach Off/On selection (for
Z1S-MhoR.EN Off / On – Off
Mho)
Z1S-R.Angle 30 – 90 deg Z1S resistive reach characteristic angle 75
0.10 – 0.01 –
Z1S-R.Reach ohm Z1S resistive reach 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 60 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Z1S directional-X characteristic Off/On
Z1S-MhoDX.EN Off / On – Off
selection (for Mho)
Z1S-DX.Angle 0 – 60 deg Z1S directional-X characteristic angle 30
Z1S directional-R characteristic angle (for
Z1S-DR.Angle 0 – 60 deg 5
Quad)
TZ1S 0.00 – 100.00 S Z1S operation delay time 0.00
Multi-phase or non-earth-fault condition
Z1S-MSDET Off / On – On
Off/On selection
Z1S operation blocked/not-blocked
Z1S-PSBBlk Non / Block – Block
selection by PSB detection
Z1S-ARCBlk Non / Block – Autoreclose execution block by Z1S-trip Non
Z1XS Z1XS-TPEN Off / On – Z1XS protection enable Off
Z1XS-SOTF Off / On – SOTF using Z1XS Off
Forward / Reverse
Z1XS-Dir – Z1XS directional characteristic Forward
/ NonDir
Z1XS-Mho.Angle 30 - 90 deg Z1XS mho characteristic angle (for Mho) 85
0.10 – 00.01 –
Z1XS-Mho.Reach ohm Z1XS mho reach (for Mho) 12.00 2.40
500.0 100.00
Z1XS reactance reach Off/On selection (for
Z1XS-MhoX.EN Off / On – Off
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
Z1XS-X.Reach ohm Z1XS reactance reach 12.00 2.40
500.00 100.00
Off / On-Set /
Z1XS-X.GrAngleEN – ZS gradient characteristic Off
On-Adapt
Z1XS resistive reach Off/On selection (for
Z1XS-MhoR.EN Off / On – Off
Mho)
Z1XS-R.Angle 30 – 90 deg Z1XS resistive reach characteristic angle 75
0.10 – 0.01 -
Z1XS-R.Reach ohm Z1XS resistive reach 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
Z1XS directional-X characteristic Off/On
Z1XS-MhoDX.EN Off / On – Off
selection (for Mho)
Z1XS-DX.Angle 0 – 60 deg Z1XS directional-X characteristic angle 30
Z1XS directional-R characteristic angle
Z1XS-DR.Angle 0 – 60 deg 5
(for Quad)
TZ1XS 0.00 – 100.00 S Z1XS operation delay time 0.00
Z1XS-MSDET Off / On – On
selection Off/On
Z1XS operation blocked/not-blocked by
Z1XS-PSBBlk Non / Block – Block
PSB detection
Z1XS-ARCBlk Non / Block – Autoreclose execution block by Z1XS-trip Non
Forward / Reverse
/ NonDir
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
selection (for Mho)
Quad)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

61
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Multi-phase or non-earth-fault condition is
Z2S-MSDET Off / On – Non
Off/On selection
Z2S operation block or not by PSB
Z2S-PSBBlk Non / Block – Non
detection
Z2S-ARCBlk Non / Block – Autoreclose execution block by Z2S-trip Block
Forward / Reverse
/ NonDir
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Z3S-MhoR.EN Off / On - Off
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
selection (for Mho)
Quad)
Multi-phase or non-earth-fault condition is
Off/On selection
Z3S operation block or not by PSB
detection
Forward / Reverse
Z4S-Dir – Z4S directional characteristic Reverse
/ NonDir
Z4S-Mho.Angle 30 - 90 deg Z4S mho characteristic angle (for Mho) 85
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
selection (for Mho)
Quad)
selection Off/On
Z4S operation block/not-blocked t by PSB
detection
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

62
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Forward / Reverse
Z5S-Dir – Z5S directional characteristic Reverse
/ NonDir
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Off / On-Set /
Z5S-X.GrAngleEN – ZS gradient characteristic Off
On-Adapt
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
selection (for Mho)
Quad)
selection Off/On
Z5S operation blocked/not-blocked by PSB
detection
Note 1: On-Adapt is only applicable when Forward is set for ZS.
Note 2: When On-Adapt is set for the scheme switch [ZS-X.GrAngleEN], the setting
values of [ZSF-X.GrAngle1] and [ZSB-X.GrAngle1] are calculated
automatically. However, setting values should be set for [ZSF-X.GrAngle2] and
[ZSB-X.GrAngle2] regardless of the setting of the scheme switch
[ZS-X.GrAngleEN].
Setting of power swing blocking in ZS(Function ID: 430001)

Default setting
Range
Setting item value
Units Contents Notes
1A 5A 1A 5A
2.50 - 0.50 -
PSB PSBSZ ohm Power swing block detection 10.00 2.00
75.00 15.00
TPSBS 0.020 - 0.100 s Power swing block detection timer 0.040
PSBSFR Off / On – Power swing reset enable Off
TPSBSFR 0.00 – 10.00 s Power swing reset timer 1.00
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

63
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting of load encroachment in ZS(Function ID: 430001)

Default setting
Range
Setting item value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Load
LES-EN Off / On – Load encroachment enable Off
encroachment
0.10 – 0.01 –
LESR ohm Minimum load resistance on the right 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
LESR-Angle 5 – 75 deg Maximum load angle on the right 10
0.10 – 0.01 –
LESL ohm Minimum load resistance on the left 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
LESL-Angle 5 – 75 deg Maximum load angle on the left 10
Setting of Failsafe of ZS(Function ID: 430001)

Default setting
Range
Setting item value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Fail Z1S Z1S-OCFS-EN Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z1S-trip Off
0.02 – 0.10 –
Safe OCF1S A Fail-safe OC operation level for Z1S-trip 0.20 1.00
5.00 25.00
Z1XS Z1XS-OCFS-EN Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z1XS-trip Off
0.02 – 0.10 –
OCF1XS A Fail-safe OC operation level for Z1XS-trip 0.20 1.00
5.00 25.00
Z2S Z2S-OCFS-EN Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z2S-trip Off
0.02 – 0.10 –
OCF2S A Fail-safe OC operation level for Z2S-trip 0.20 1.00
5.00 25.00
0.02 – 0.10 –
5.00 25.00
0.02 – 0.10 –
5.00 25.00
0.02 – 0.10 –
5.00 25.00
Setting of test of ZS(Function ID: 430001)
Default setting
Test Setting device Range Units Contents Notes
value
ZS-Test.CTRL Off/On – ZS-test mode Off/On selection Off

ZS-Test.XAngle Off/On – ZS-reactance test mode Off/On selection Off
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 64 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting of ZG(Function ID: 431001)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Common ZG-Chara Quad / Mho – ZG relay characteristic Quad
ZG-forward gradient characteristic angle
ZGF-X.GrAngle1 0 – 45 deg 0
ZG-forward gradient characteristic angle
ZG-CovCoeff 1.5 – 3.0 – Covered characteristic size coefficient 1.5
Z1G Z1G-TPEN Off / On – Z1G protection enable On
Z1G-SOTF Off / On – SOTF using Z1G Off
Forward / Reverse
Z1G-Dir – Z1G directional setting Forward
/ NonDir
Z1G-Mho.Angle 30 - 90 deg Z1G mho characteristic angle (for Mho) 85
0.10 – 0.01 –
Z1G-Mho.Reach ohm Z1G mho reach (for Mho) 8.00 1.60
500.00 100.00
Z1G reactance reach Off/On selection (for
Z1G-MhoX.EN Off / On – Off
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
Z1G-X.Reach ohm Z1G reactance reach 8.00 1.60
500.00 100.00
Off / On-Set /
Z1G-X.GrAngleEN – ZG gradient characteristic Off
On-Adapt
Z1G resistive reach Off/On selection (for
Z1G-MhoR.EN Off / On – Off
Mho)
Z1G-R.Angle 30 – 90 deg Z1G resistive reach characteristic angle 75
0.10 – 0.01 –
Z1G-R.Reach ohm Z1G resistive reach 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
Z1G directional-X characteristic Off/On
Z1G-MhoDX.EN Off / On – Off
selection (for Mho)
Z1G-DX.Angle 0 – 60 deg Z1G directional-X characteristic angle 30
Z1G directional-R characteristic angle (for
Z1G-DR.Angle 0 – 60 deg 5
Quad)
Z1G-Krs 0 – 1000 % Zero phase current factor, Self line R0/R1 340
Z1G-Kxs 0 – 1000 % Zero phase current factor, Self line X0/X1 340
Zero phase current factor, Adjacent line
Z1G-Krm 0 – 1000 % 300
R0m/R1
Z1G-Kxm 0 – 1000 % 300
X0m/X1
TZ1G 0.00 – 100.00 S Z1G operation delay time 0.00
EFL operation condition Off/On selection
Z1G-EFL Off / On – On
for Z1G operation
Z1G operation blocked /not-blocked for
Z1G-MPFBlk Non / Block – Block
multi-phase fault
Z1G operation blocked/not-blocked by PSB
Z1G-PSBBlk Non / Block – Block
detection
Z1G leading phase operation
Z1G-LPBlk Non / Block – block/not-blocked in multi-phase-fault Non
mode
Z1G trip mode, phase segregated trip or
Z1G-TPMD 1P / 3P – 1P
3-phase trip
Z1G-ARCBlk Non / Block – Autoreclose execution block by Z1G-trip Non
Z1XG Z1XG-TPEN Off / On – Z1XG protection enable Off
Z1XG-SOTF Off / On – SOTF using Z1XG Off
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 65 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Forward / Reverse
Z1XG-Dir – Z1XG direction to protect Forward
/ NonDir
Z1XG-Mho.Angle 30 - 90 deg Z1XG mho characteristic angle (for Mho) 85
0.10 – 0.01 –
Z1XG-Mho.Reach ohm Z1XG mho reach (for Mho) 12.00 2.40
500.00 100.00
Z1XG reactance reach Off/On selection (for
Z1XG-MhoX.EN Off / On – Off
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
Z1XG-X.Reach ohm Z1XG reactance reach 12.00 2.40
500.00 100.00
Off / On-Set /
Z1XG-X.GrAngleEN – ZG gradient characteristic Off
On-Adapt
Z1XG resistive reach Off/On selection (for
Z1XG-MhoR.EN Off / On – Off
Mho)
Z1XG-R.Angle 30 – 90 deg Z1XG resistive reach characteristic angle 75
0.10 –- 0.01 –
Z1XG-R.Reach ohm Z1XG resistive reach 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
Z1XG directional-X characteristic Off/On
Z1XG-MhoDX.EN Off / On – Off
selection (for Mho)
Z1XG-DX.Angle 0 – 60 deg Z1XG directional-X characteristic angle 30
Z1XG directional-R characteristic angle
Z1XG-DR.Angle 0 – 60 deg 5
(for Quad)
Z1XG-Krs 0 – 1000 % Zero phase current factor, Self line R0/R1 340
Z1XG-Kxs 0 – 1000 % Zero phase current factor, Self line X0/X1 340
Z1XG-Krm 0 – 1000 % 300
R0m/R1
Z1XG-Kxm 0 – 1000 % 300
X0m/X1
TZ1XG 0.00 - 100.00 S Z1XG operation delay time 0.00
Z1XG-EFL Off / On – On
for Z1XG operation
Z1XG operation block/not-blocked
Z1XG-MPFBlk Non / Block – Blcok
multi-phase fault
Z1XG operation block/not-blocked PSB
Z1XG-PSBBlk Non / Block – Block
detection
Z1XG leading phase operation
Z1XG-LPBlk Non / Block – block/not-blocked in multi-phase-fault Non
mode
Z1XG trip mode, phase segregated trip or
Z1XG-TPMD 1P / 3P – 1P
3-phase trip
Z1XG-ARCBlk Non / Block – Autoreclose execution block by Z1XG-trip Non
Forward / Reverse
Z2G-Dir – Z2G direction to protect Forward
/ NonDir
Z2G-Mho.Angle 30 – 90 deg Z2G mho characteristic angle (for Mho) 85
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Z2G-MhoX.EN Off / On – Z2G reactance reach Off/On (for Mho) Off
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Z2G-MhoR.EN Off / On – Z2G resistive reach Off/On (for Mho) Off
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 66 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
selection (for Mho)
Quad)
Z2G-Krm 0 – 1000 % 300
R0m/R1
Z2G-Kxm 0 – 1000 % 300
X0m/X1
TZ2G 0.00 – 100.00 S Z2G operation delay time 0.30
for Z2G operation
Z2G operation blocked/not-blocked for
Z2G-MPFBlk Non / Block – Non
multi-phase fault
Z2G operation blocked/not-blockedby PSB
Z2G-PSBBlk Non / Block – Non
detection
Z2G-LPBlk Non / Block – blocked/not-blocked in multi-phase-fault Block
mode
3-phase trip
Z2G-ARCBlk Non / Block – Autoreclose execution block by Z2G-trip Block
Forward / Reverse
Z3G-Dir – Z3G direction to protect Forward
/ NonDir
0.10 - 0.01 -
500.00 100.00
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 -
500.00 100.00
selection (for Mho)
Quad)
Z3G-Krm 0 – 1000 % 300
R0m/R1
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 67 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Z3G-Kxm 0 – 1000 % 300
X0m/X1
TZ3G 0.00 – 100.00 s Z3G operation delay time 0.40
for Z3G operation
Z3G operation blocked/not-blocked for
multi-phase fault
Z3G operation blocked/not-blockedby PSB
detection
Z3G-LPBlk Non / Block – blocked/not-blocked in multi-phase-fault Non
mode
3-phase trip
Forward / Reverse
Z4G-Dir – Z4G direction to protect Reverse
/ NonDir
Z4G-Mho.Angle 30 – 90 deg Z4G mho characteristic angle (for Mho) 85
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
selection (for Mho)
Quad)
Z4G-Krm 0 – 1000 % 300
R0m/R1
Z4G-Kxm 0 – 1000 % 300
X0m/X1
for Z4G operation
Z4G operation block/not-blocked for
multi-phase fault
Z4G operation blocked/not-blocked by PSB
detection
Z4G-LPBlk Non / Block – blocked/not-blocked in multi-phase-fault Non
mode
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 68 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
3-phase trip
Forward / Reverse
Z5G-Dir – Z5G direction to protect Reverse
/ NonDir
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Z5G-MhoX.EN Off / On – Z5G reactance reach use or not (for Mho) Off
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
Off / On-Set /
Z5G-X.GrAngleEN – ZG gradient characteristic Off
On-Adapt
Mho)
0.10 – 0.01 –
500.00 100.00
selection (for Mho)
Quad)
Z5G-Krm 0 – 1000 % 300
R0m/R1
Z5G-Kxm 0 – 1000 % 300
X0m/X1
for Z5G operation
Z5G operation block/not-blocked for
multi-phase fault
Z5G operation block/not-blocked by PSB
detection
Z5G-LPBlk Non / Block – block/not-blocked in multi-phase-falut Non
mode
3-phase trip
Note 1: On-Adapt is only applicable when Forward is set for ZG. If On-Adapt is set for
Reverse operation, it is necessary to set scheme switch [ZG-X.GrAngleEN] Off.
Note 2: When On-Adapt is set for scheme switch [ZG-X.GrAngleEN], the setting values
of [ZGF-X.GrAngle1] and [ZGB-X.GrAngle1] are calculated automatically.
However, setting values should be set for [ZGF-X.GrAngle2] and
[ZGB-X.GrAngle2] regardless of the setting of scheme switch [ZG-X.GrAngleEN.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 69 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting of PSB of ZG(Function ID: 431001)

Default setting
Range
value
1Aratin 5A
1A rating 5A rating
g rating
PSB PSBGZ 2.50 – 75.00 0.50 – 15.00 ohm Power swing block detection 10.00 2.00
TPSBG 0.020 – 0.100 s Power swing block detection timer 0.040
PSBGFR Off / On – Power swing block reset enable Off
TPSBGFR 0.00 – 10.00 s Power swing block reset timer 1.00
Setting of Load encroachment of ZG(Function ID: 431001)

Default setting
Range
Setting item Units Contents value Notes
1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A
Load LEG-EN Off / On – Load encroachment enable Off
0.10 – 0.01 –
encroachment LEGR ohm Minimum load resistance on the right 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
LEGR-Angle 5 – 75 deg Maximum load angle on the right 10
0.10 – 0.01 –
LEGL ohm Minimum load resistance on the left 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
LEGL-Angle 5 – 75 deg Maximum load angle on the left 10
Setting of Failsafe of ZG(Function ID: 430001)

Default setting
Range
Setting item value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Z1G Z1G-OCFS-EN Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z1G-trip Off
0.02 – 0.10 –
OCF1G A Fail-safe OC operation level for Z1G-trip 0.20 1.00
5.00 25.00
Z1XG Z1XG-OCFS-EN Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z1XG-trip Off
0.02 – 0.10 –
OCF1XG A Fail-safe OC operation level for Z1XG-trip 0.20 1.00
5.00 25.00
0.02 – 0.10 –
5.00 25.00
0.02 – 0.10 –
5.00 25.00
0.02 – 0.10 –
5.00 25.00
0.02 – 0.10 –
5.00 25.00
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 70 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting of UV for positive week infeed of ZG(Function ID: 431001)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
UVPWI ZG-UVPWIEN Off / On – UV for positive weak infeed Off
UVPWI 5.0 – 130.0 V UVPWI relay operation level 30.0
Setting of test of ZG(Function ID: 431001)

Default setting
Range
value
Test Setting device Units Contents Notes
1A 5A 1A 5A
ZG-Test.XAngle Off/On – ZG-reactance test mode Off/On selection Off
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 71 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting of ZCSF and ZCSR(Function ID: 430001)

Default setting N
Range
value o
Setting item Units Contents t
1A 5A 1A 5A
e
s
ZCSF ZCSF-Mho.Angle 30 - 90 deg ZCSF mho characteristic angle (for Mho) 85
0.10 - 0.01 -
ZCSF-Mho.Reach ohm ZCSF mho reach (for Mho) 30.00 6.00
500.00 100.00
ZCSF-MhoX.EN Off / On - ZCSF reactance reach use or not (for Mho) Off
0.10 - 0.01 -
ZCSF-X.Reach ohm ZCSF reactance reach 30.00 6.00
500.00 100.00
ZCSF-MhoR.EN Off / On - ZCSF resistive reach use or not (for Mho) Off
ZCSF-R.Angle 30 - 90 deg ZCSF resistive reach characteristic angle 75
0.10 - 0.01 -
ZCSF-R.Reach ohm ZCSF resistive reach 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
ZCSF-MhoDX.EN Off / On - ZCSF directional-X characteristic use or not (for Mho) Off
ZCSF-DX.Angle 0 - 60 deg ZCSF directional-X characteristic angle 30
ZCSF-DR.Angle 0 - 60 deg ZCSF directional-R characteristic angle (for Quad) 5
ZCSF-PSBBlk Non / Block - ZCSF operation block or not by PSB detection Block
ZCSR ZCSR-Mho.Angle 30 - 90 deg ZCSR mho characteristic angle (for Mho) 85
0.10 - 0.01 -
ZCSR-Mho.Reach ohm ZCSR mho reach (for Mho) 40.00 8.00
500.00 100.00
ZCSR-MhoX.EN Off / On - ZCSR reactance reach use or not (for Mho) Off
0.10 - 0.01 -
ZCSR-X.Reach ohm ZCSR reactance reach 40.00 8.00
500.00 100.00
ZCSR-MhoR.EN Off / On - ZCSR resistive reach use or not (for Mho) Off
ZCSR-R.Angle 30 - 90 deg ZCSR resistive reach characteristic angle 75
0.10 - 0.01 -
ZCSR-R.Reach ohm ZCSR resistive reach 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
ZCSR-DX.EN Off / On - ZCSR directional-X characteristic use or not (for Mho) Off
ZCSR-DX.Angle 0 - 60 deg ZCSR directional-X characteristic angle 30
ZCSR-DR.Angle 0 - 60 deg ZCSR directional-R characteristic angle (for Quad) 5
ZCSR-VTFBlk Non / Block - ZCSR operation block or not by VTF detection Block
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 72 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting of ZCGF and ZCGR(Function ID: 431001)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
ZCGF ZCGF-Mho.Angle 30 - 90 deg ZCGF mho characteristic angle (for Mho) 85
0.10 - 0.01 -
ZCGF-Mho.Reach ohm ZCGF mho reach (for Mho) 40.00 8.00
500.00 100.00
ZCGF-MhoX.EN Off / On - ZCGF reactance reach use or not (for Mho) Off
0.10 - 0.01 -
ZCGF-X.Reach ohm ZCGF reactance reach 40.00 8.00
500.00 100.00
ZCGF-MhoR.EN Off / On - ZCGF resistive reach use or not (for Mho) Off
ZCGF-R.Angle 30 - 90 deg ZCGF resistive reach characteristic angle 75
0.10 - 0.01 -
ZCGF-R.Reach ohm ZCGF resistive reach 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
ZCGF directional-X characteristic use or
ZCGF-MhoDX.EN Off / On - Off
not (for Mho)
ZCGF-DX.Angle 0 - 60 deg ZCGF directional-X characteristic angle 30
ZCGF directional-R characteristic angle
ZCGF-DR.Angle 0 - 60 deg 5
(for Quad)
ZCGF-Krs 0 - 1000 % Zero phase current factor, Self line R0/R1 340
ZCGF-Kxs 0 - 1000 % Zero phase current factor, Self line X0/X1 340
ZCGF-Krm 0 - 1000 % 300
R0m/R1
ZCGF-Kxm 0 - 1000 % 300
X0m/X1
ZCGF operation block or not by PSB
ZCGF-PSBBlk Non / Block - Block
detection
ZCGR ZCGR-Mho.Angle 30 - 90 deg ZCGR mho characteristic angle (for Mho) 85
0.10 - 0.01 -
ZCGR-Mho.Reach ohm ZCGR mho reach (for Mho) 40.00 8.00
500.00 100.00
ZCGR-MhoX.EN Off / On - ZCGR reactance reach use or not (for Mho) Off
0.10 - 0.01 -
ZCGR-X.Reach ohm ZCGR reactance reach 40.00 8.00
500.00 100.00
ZCGR-MhoR.EN Off / On - ZCGR resistive reach use or not (for Mho) Off
ZCGR-R.Angle 30 - 90 deg ZCGR resistive reach characteristic angle 75
0.10 - 0.01 -
ZCGR-R.Reach ohm ZCGR resistive reach 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
ZCGR directional-X characteristic use or
ZCGR-MhoDX.EN Off / On - Off
not (for Mho)
ZCGR-DX.Angle 0 - 60 deg ZCGR directional-X characteristic angle 30
ZCGR directional-R characteristic angle
ZCGR-DR.Angle 0 - 60 deg 5
(for Quad)
ZCGR-Krs 0 - 1000 % Zero phase current factor, Self line R0/R1 340
ZCGR-Kxs 0 - 1000 % Zero phase current factor, Self line X0/X1 340
ZCGR-Krm 0 - 1000 % 300
R0m/R1
ZCGR-Kxm 0 - 1000 % 300
X0m/X1
ZCGR operation block or not by VTF
ZCGR-VTFBlk Non / Block - Block
detection
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 73 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.1.10 Data ID
 Signal monitoring point
ZS ZG Common (Function ID: 432001)
Element ID Name Description
8300001C27 EFL Earth fault relay element operated
8000001C20 OCCR-A OCCR relay element operated(phase-A)
8100001C21 OCCR-B OCCR relay element operated(phase-B)
8200001C22 OCCR-C OCCR relay element operated(phase-C)
8100001B63 Z1CNT-3PTP Z1 control command (3-phase trip)
8200001B64 Z1CNT-ARCBLK Z1 control command (Autoreclose block)
8300001B65 Z1CNT-INSTOP Z1 control command (Instantaneous operation)
8000001B62 Z1CNT-TPBLK Z1 control command (Trip block)
8000001BB0 Z1CNT_MPROT Z1 control signal for multi protection
 Connection point on PLC logic

ZS ZG Common (Function ID: 432001)
800000EBB0 Z1CNT_MPROT Z1 control setting for multi protection
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 74 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

ZS (Function ID: 430001)
8000081B6E LD_ENC-AB Load encroachment operated (phase-AB)
8100081B6F LD_ENC-BC Load encroachment operated (phase-BC)
8200081B70 LD_ENC-CA Load encroachment operated (phase-CA)
8000081B6B LES-L A LES-L relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100081B6C LES-L B LES-L relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200081B6D LES-L C LES-L relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000081B68 LES-R A LES-R relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100081B69 LES-R B LES-R relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200081B6A LES-R C LES-R relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000011B64 OCF1S OP OCF1S operated
8000011C24 OCF1S-AB OCF1S relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100011C25 OCF1S-BC OCF1S relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200011C26 OCF1S-CA OCF1S relay element operated (phase-CA)
8100061B64 OCF1XS OP OCF1XS element operated
8400061C24 OCF1XS-AB OCF1XS relay element operated (phase-AB)
8500061C25 OCF1XS-BC OCF1XS relay element operated (phase-BC)
8600061C26 OCF1XS-CA OCF1XS relay element operated (phase-CA)
8A00041C26 OCF4S-CA OCF2S relay element operated (phase-CA)
8A00051C26 OCF5S-CA OCF2S relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000081B61 PSBS DET PSBS detection
8000081B62 PSBSIN-AB PSBS-IN operated (phase-AB)
8100081B63 PSBSIN-BC PSBS-IN operated (phase-BC)
8200081B64 PSBSIN-CA PSBS-IN operated (phase-CA)
8400081B65 PSBSOUT-AB PSBS-OUT operated (phase-AB)
8500081B66 PSBSOUT-BC PSBS-OUT operated (phase-BC)
8600081B67 PSBSOUT-CA PSBS-OUT operated (phase-CA)
8000011B6A SOTF-Z1S-OPT-AB SOTF operated for Z1S (phase-AB)
8100011B6B SOTF-Z1S-OPT-BC SOTF operated for Z1S (phase-BC)
8200011B6C SOTF-Z1S-OPT-CA SOTF operated for Z1S (phase-CA)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 75 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

8000011B2B SOTF-Z1S-TRIP SOTF operated for Z1S (3-phases OR)
8400061B6A SOTF-Z1XS-OPT-AB SOTF operated for Z1XS (phase-AB)
8500061B6B SOTF-Z1XS-OPT-BC SOTF operated for Z1XS (phase-BC)
8600061B6C SOTF-Z1XS-OPT-CA SOTF operated for Z1XS (phase-CA)
8100061B2B SOTF-Z1XS-TRIP SOTF operated for Z1XS (3-phases OR)
8A00041B6C SOTF-Z4S-OPT-CA SOTF operated for Z4S (phase-CA)
8A00051B6C SOTF-Z5S-OPT-CA SOTF operated for Z5S (phase-CA)
8C00001B66 SOTF-ZS-OPT-ABR SOTF AB phase operated
8D00001B67 SOTF-ZS-OPT-BCR SOTF BC phase operated
8E00001B68 SOTF-ZS-OPT-CAR SOTF CA phase operated
8300001B2B SOTF-ZS-TRIP SOTF protection trip
8000011C20 Z1S-AB Z1S relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100011C21 Z1S-BC Z1S relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200011C22 Z1S-CA Z1S relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000011B23 Z1S-OPT Z1S operated (3-phases OR)
8000011B66 Z1S-OPT-AB Z1S operated (phase-AB)
8100011B67 Z1S-OPT-BC Z1S operated (phase-BC)
8200011B68 Z1S-OPT-CA Z1S operated (phase-CA)
8300011B63 Z1S-ORX Z1S-X operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8400061C20 Z1XS-AB Z1XS relay element operated (phase-AB)
8500061C21 Z1XS-BC Z1XS relay element operated (phase-BC)
8600061C22 Z1XS-CA Z1XS relay element operated (phase-CA)
8100061B23 Z1XS-OPT Z1XS operated (3-phases OR)
8400061B66 Z1XS-OPT-AB Z1XS operated (phase-AB)
8500061B67 Z1XS-OPT-BC Z1XS operated (phase-BC)
8600061B68 Z1XS-OPT-CA Z1XS operated (phase-CA)
8700061B63 Z1XS-ORX Z1XS-ORX operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 76 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

8300021B63 Z2S-ORX Z2S-ORX operated (3-phases OR)
8700031B63 Z3S-ORX Z3S-ORX operated (3-phases OR)
8A00041C22 Z4S-CA Z4S relay element operated (phase-CA)
8A00041B68 Z4S-OPT-CA Z4S operated (phase-CA)
8B00041B63 Z4S-ORX Z4S-ORX operated (3-phases OR)
8A00051C22 Z5S-CA Z5S relay element operated (phase-CA)
8A00051B68 Z5S-OPT-CA Z5S operated (phase-CA)
8B00051B63 Z5S-ORX Z5S-ORX operated (3-phases OR)
8000071B60 ZCSF-AB ZCSF protection operated (phase-AB)
8100071B61 ZCSF-BC ZCSF protection operated (phase-BC)
8200071B62 ZCSF-CA ZCSF protection operated (phase-CA)
8400071B69 ZCSR-AB ZCSR protection operated (phase-AB)
8500071B6A ZCSR-BC ZCSR protection operated (phase-BC)
8600071B6B ZCSR-CA ZCSR protection operated (phase-CA)
8500001B61 ZS-ARC-BLOCK Autoreclose block signal by ZS
8C00001B62 ZS-OPT-ABR ZS protection operated (phase-A)
8D00001B63 ZS-OPT-BCR ZS protection operated (phase-B)
8E00001B64 ZS-OPT-CAR ZS protection operated (phase-C)
8300001B23 ZS-TRIP ZS trip
3000081B71 ZS_BLKZN BlkZn status signal in RPSB of IEC61580 LN

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 77 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

800008EBB2 LES BLOCK LES block
800008EBB0 PSBS BLOCK PSBS block
810008EBB1 PSBS F.RESET PSBS forcible reset
800001EBB3 SOTF-Z1S BLOCK SOTF block signal for Z1S
810006EBB3 SOTF-Z1XS BLOCK SOTF block signal for Z1XS
800001EBB0 Z1STP_BLOCK Z1S trip block signal
800001EBB2 Z1S_ARCBLOCK Autoreclose block signal for Z1S
800001EBB1 Z1S_INST_OP Z1S instantaneously operated
810006EBB0 Z1XSTP_BLOCK Z1XS trip block signal
810006EBB2 Z1XS_ARCBLOCK Autoreclose block signal for Z1XS
810006EBB1 Z1XS_INST_OP Z1XS instantaneously operated
(2.28)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 78 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

ZG (Function ID: 431001)
8000081B71 LD_ENC-A Load encroachment operated (phase-A)
8100081B72 LD_ENC-B Load encroachment operated (phase-B)
8200081B73 LD_ENC-C Load encroachment operated (phase-C)
8000081B6C LEG-L-A LEG-L relay element operated (phase-A)
8100081B6D LEG-L-B LEG-L relay element operated (phase-B)
8200081B6E LEG-L-C LEG-L relay element operated (phase-C)
8000081B69 LEG-R-A LEG-R relay element operated (phase-A)
8100081B6A LEG-R-B LEG-R relay element operated (phase-B)
8200081B6B LEG-R-C LEG-R relay element operated (phase-C)
8000011B64 OCF1G OP OCF1G operated
8000011C24 OCF1G-A OCF1G relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C25 OCF1G-B OCF1G relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C26 OCF1G-C OCF1G relay element operated (phase-C)
8100061B64 OCF1XG OP OCF1XG operated
8400061C24 OCF1XG-A OCF1XG relay element operated (phase-A)
8500061C25 OCF1XG-B OCF1XG relay element operated (phase-B)
8600061C26 OCF1XG-C OCF1XG relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00041C26 OCF4G-C OCF4G relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00051C26 OCF5G-C OCF5G relay element operated (phase-C)
8000081B70 PSBG DET PSBG detection
8000081B66 PSBGIN-A PSBGIN relay element operated (phase-A)
8100081B67 PSBGIN-B PSBGIN relay element operated (phase-B)
8200081B68 PSBGIN-C PSBGIN relay element operated (phase-C)
8400081B63 PSBGOUT-A PSBGOUT relay element operated (phase-A)
8500081B64 PSBGOUT-B PSBGOUT relay element operated (phase-B)
8600081B65 PSBGOUT-C PSBGOUT relay element operated (phase-C)
8000011B6B SOTF-Z1G-OPT-A SOTF operated for Z1G (phase-A)
8100011B6C SOTF-Z1G-OPT-B SOTF operated for Z1G (phase-B)
8200011B6D SOTF-Z1G-OPT-C SOTF operated for Z1G (phase-C)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 79 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

8000011B2B SOTF-Z1G-TRIP SOTF operated for Z1G (3-phases OR)
8400061B6B SOTF-Z1XG-OPT-A SOTF operated for Z1XG (phase-A)
8500061B6C SOTF-Z1XG-OPT-B SOTF operated for Z1XG (phase-B)
8600061B6D SOTF-Z1XG-OPT-C SOTF operated for Z1XG (phase-C)
8100061B2B SOTF-Z1XG-TRIP SOTF operated for Z1XG (3-phases OR)
8A00041B6D SOTF-Z4G-OPT-C SOTF operated for Z4G (phase-C)
8A00051B6D SOTF-Z5G-OPT-C SOTF operated for Z5G (phase-C)
8300001B2B SOTF-ZG-TRIP SOTF protection trip
8000081B60 UVPWI-A UVPWI relay element operated (phase-A)
8100081B61 UVPWI-B UVPWI relay element operated (phase-B)
8200081B62 UVPWI-C UVPWI relay element operated (phase-C)
8000011C20 Z1G-A Z1G relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 Z1G-B Z1G relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 Z1G-C Z1G relay element operated (phase-C)
8000011B69 Z1G-OPT Z1G operated (3-phases OR)
8000011B66 Z1G-OPT-A Z1G operated (phase-A)
8100011B67 Z1G-OPT-B Z1G operated (phase-B)
8200011B68 Z1G-OPT-C Z1G operated (phase-C)
8300011B63 Z1G-ORX Z1G-ORX operated (3-phases OR)
8400061C20 Z1XG-A Z1XG relay element operated (phase-A)
8500061C21 Z1XG-B Z1XG relay element operated (phase-B)
8600061C22 Z1XG-C Z1XG relay element operated (phase-C)
8100061B69 Z1XG-OPT Z1XG operated (3-phases OR)
8400061B66 Z1XG-OPT-A Z1XG operated (phase-A)
8500061B67 Z1XG-OPT-B Z1XG operated (phase-B)
8600061B68 Z1XG-OPT-C Z1XG operated (phase-C)
8700061B63 Z1XG-ORX Z1XG-ORX operated (3-phases OR)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 80 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

8A00041C22 Z4G-C Z4G relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00041B68 Z4G-OPT-C Z4G operated (phase-C)
8B00041B63 Z4G-ORX Z4G-ORX operated (3-phases OR)
8A00051C22 Z5G-C Z5G relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00051B68 Z5G-OPT-C Z5G operated (phase-C)
8B00051B63 Z5G-ORX Z5G-ORX operated (3-phases OR)
8000071B75 ZCGF-A ZCGF relay element operated (phase-A)
8100071B76 ZCGF-B ZCGF relay element operated (phase-B)
8200071B77 ZCGF-C ZCGF relay element operated (phase-C)
8400071B78 ZCGR-A ZCGR relay element operated (phase-A)
8500071B79 ZCGR-B ZCGR relay element operated (phase-B)
8600071B7A ZCGR-C ZCGR relay element operated (phase-C)
8500001B7C ZG-ARC-BLOCK Autoreclose block signal by ZG
8800001B7D ZG-OPT-AR ZG A phase operated
8900001B7E ZG-OPT-BR ZG B phase operated
8A00001B7F ZG-OPT-CR ZG C phase operated
8000001B20 ZG-TRIP-A ZG A phase trip
8100001B21 ZG-TRIP-B ZG B phase trip
8200001B22 ZG-TRIP-C ZG C phase trip
8000001B63 ZGFCOV-A ZGFCOV relay element operated (phase-A)
8100001B64 ZGFCOV-B ZGFCOV relay element operated (phase-B)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 81 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

8200001B65 ZGFCOV-C ZGFCOV relay element operated (phase-C)
8400001B66 ZGRCOV-A ZGRCOV relay element operated (phase-A)
8500001B67 ZGRCOV-B ZGRCOV relay element operated (phase-B)

800008EBB2 LEG BLOCK LEG block
800008EBB0 PSBG BLOCK PSBG block
810008EBB1 PSBG F.RESET PSBG forcible reset
800001EBB4 SOTF-Z1G BLOCK SOTF block signal for Z1G
810006EBB4 SOTF-Z1XG BLOCK SOTF block signal for Z1XG
800001EBB0 Z1GTP_BLOCK Z1G trip block signal
800001EBB2 Z1G_3PTP Z1G trip (3-phases)
800001EBB3 Z1G_ARCBLOCK Autoreclose block signal for Z1G
800001EBB1 Z1G_INST_OP Z1G instantaneously operated
810006EBB0 Z1XGTP_BLOCK Z1XG trip block signal
810006EBB2 Z1XG_3PTP Z1XG trip (3-phases)
810006EBB3 Z1XG_ARCBLOCK Autoreclose block signal for Z1XG
810006EBB1 Z1XG_INST_OP Z1XG instantaneously operated
(2.28)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 82 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

8000071B60 ZCSF-AB ZCSF protection operated (phase-AB)
8100071B61 ZCSF-BC ZCSF protection operated (phase-BC)
8200071B62 ZCSF-CA ZCSF protection operated (phase-CA)
8400071B69 ZCSR-AB ZCSR protection operated (phase-AB)
8500071B6A ZCSR-BC ZCSR protection operated (phase-BC)
8600071B6B ZCSR-CA ZCSR protection operated (phase-CA)

8000071B75 ZCGF-A ZCGF relay element operated (phase-A)
8100071B76 ZCGF-B ZCGF relay element operated (phase-B)
8200071B77 ZCGF-C ZCGF relay element operated (phase-C)
8400071B78 ZCGR-A ZCGR relay element operated (phase-A)
8500071B79 ZCGR-B ZCGR relay element operated (phase-B)
8600071B7A ZCGR-C ZCGR relay element operated (phase-C)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 83 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Switch on to fault (SOTF-OC)

The switch-onto-fault function (SOTF-OC) is used to detect and rapidly clear faults when
circuit breakers (CBs) are closed onto a pre-existing fault in the protected zone. If a circuit
breaker is closed onto a permanent fault, the memory circuit in the IED will be unable to
memorize the voltage data required to retain the pre-fault values. This is because the voltage
input to distance measuring elements is absent continuously prior to and after the fault
particularly with voltage transformers installed on the line side; as a result, the fault cannot
be detected by conventional standard protection functions. Therefore, in order to avoid such
failures, SOTF-OC is applied so that the fault can be detected for a specific period following
the closure of the CB.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 84 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.2.1 Scheme logic

The SOTF-OC function provides signals to the TRC function: SOTFOC-OPT-A,-B,-C,
SOTFOC-TRIP, and SOTFOC-ARC-BLOCK. The SOTF-OC function issues a trip signal upon
the operation of the OCSOTF element if CBs are closed onto a fault when energizing a
transmission line following a period of non-operation. The criterion for the transmission line
being in the non-operation state are when (1) the CBs are open for more than 0.5 seconds and
(2) the undervoltage elements in the PROT COMMON function remain operated for more
than 0.5 seconds. The TRIP and PROT COMMON functions are discussed separately. (See
chapter Relay application: Trip circuit and Protection common.)
Setting [OCSOTF] is provided to determine the SOTF threshold. Setting

[OCSOTF-2fBlk] is used to override the SOTF function when the SOTF-OC detects a second
harmonic. If Block-3P is set for the setting [OCSOTF-2fBlk], all of the OCSOTF elements are
overridden when second harmonic is present. Alternatively, if Block-PerP is set for the setting
[OCSOTF-2fBlk], each individual OCSOTF element of the SOTF function is overridden for
second harmonic currents. The detection of the second harmonic is determined by the function
of the inrush current detector (ICD). The ICD function is discussed separately. (See chapter
Relay application: Inrush current detection function.)
The SOTF-OC function is active when On is set for the setting [SOTFOC-EN]. Setting
[SOTF-test] is used for the mandatory condition of cold load when testing. When wishing to
add another condition into the logic for the SOTF operation, the user can inject the signal
using PLC connection point “ADD.SOTF.EN”.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 85 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
To DISCAR
800000EBB1 OC-RTP.EN
OC-RETRIP
From ARC & To TRC
SHOT_MULTI ≥1 SOTFOC-TRIP
8000001B60
≥1
SOTFOC-ARC-BLOCK
≥1
8000011C20
A & 8800011B62
&
8100011C21 & SOTFOC-OPT-A
OCSOTF B & & 8900011B63
8200011C22 & SOTFOC-OPT-B
C & & 8A00011B64
& SOTFOC-OPT-C
From ICD
ICD-A & ≥1
ICD-B & ≥1
To Recording
ICD-C & ≥1
SOTFOC-TRIP
≥1
&
Block-3P
OCSOTF-2PBlk
Block-PerP
SOTFOC-EN On
800000EBB0 SOTFOC_BLOCK 1 &
From PROT COMMON
DEAD_LINE_DETECT
≥1 To ZS,ZG
800000EBB2 ADD.SOTF_EN 0 t
SOTF_EN_COND
SOTF-Test On 0.5s
Figure 2.2-1 Scheme logic for the SOTF-OC
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 86 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.2.2 Setting
Setting of SOTF-OC(Function ID: 454001)
Default setting
Range
value No
Setting item Units Contents
1A 5A tes
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
SOTF-OC SOTFOC-EN Off / On - SOTF-OC protection enable Off
OCSOTF 0.02 - 3.00 0.10 - 15.00 A OC relay for SOTF threshold 1.20 6.00
OCSOTF operation block by
OCSOTF-2fBlk Non / Block-3P / Block-PerP - Non
2f-detection
Forcibly establishing the cold load
SOTF-Test Off / On - Off
condition
2.2.3 Data ID
 Monitoring point for operation
SOTF-OC(Function ID: 454001)
8000001B67 OC-RETRIP OC-RETRIP
8000001C20 OCSOTF-A SOTFOC relay element operated (phase-A)
8100001C21 OCSOTF-B SOTFOC relay element operated (phase-B)
8200001C22 OCSOTF-C SOTFOC relay element operated (phase-C)
8000001B60 OCSOTF-OR SOTFOC relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8800001B62 SOTFOC-OPT-A SOTFOC protection operated (phase-A)
8900001B63 SOTFOC-OPT-B SOTFOC protection operated (phase-B)
8A00001B64 SOTFOC-OPT-C SOTFOC protection operated (phase-C)
8300001B23 SOTFOC-TRIP Trip signal by SOTFOC protection operation

SOTF-OC(Function ID: 454001)
800000EBB2 ADD.SOFT_EN Additional SOFTOC enable
800000EBB1 OC-RTP.EN OC-Retrip enable
800000EBB0 SOTFOC_BLOCK SOTFOC protection block command
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 87 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Distance carrier command protection (DISCAR)

When every IED can exchange operational information mutually using communication
system, accurate decision of whether or not a fault is internal on the line can be made.
Distance carrier command protection (DISCAR) can provide such protection using the
distance protection (ZS/ZG). Consequently, the whole length of the line can be protected
promptly for any fault. The following techniques are provided in DISCAR:
1. Permissive underreach protection (PUP)
2. Permissive overreach protection (POP)
3. Unblocking overreach protection (UOP)
4. Blocking overreach protection (BOP)
The function of autoreclose (ARC) can be operated speedy using these protections above;
and these can issue either a single-pole trip signal or three-poles trip signal in accordance
with DISCAR settings and the states of faults.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 88 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.3.1 Permissive underreach protection (PUP)

(i) Application
When an underreach element operates at local terminal, and when the circuit breaker (CB) is
tripped by this element, a trip permission signal† is sent to other opposite terminals. When
the opposite terminals receive the signal, CBs at these terminals are tripped instantly if an
overreaching element at respective these terminals has been operated. In PUP, Z1S/Z1G
elements in ZS/ZG are used for the underreach element, and ZCSF/ZCGF elements are used
for the overreaching element.
The trip permission signal is not sent until it is observed that the fault exists in the
protection zone of Z1S/Z1G; hence, PUP can provide excellent security., but PUP cannot
provide sufficient dependability if faults exist on the line including open terminals or weak
infeed terminals. This is because Z1S/Z1G cannot operate for this case‡.
†Note: The trip permission signal yielded by the underreaching element is transmitted
only; hence, respective terminals can share a telecommunication channel; and a
simplex channel can be used.
‡Note: At remote terminals, Z1X/ Z2 have a delay timer. Thus, they can remove the faults.
(ii) Scheme logic

Figure 2.3-1 shows PUP logic. When Z1S/Z1G operate at the local terminal, Z1S/Z1G issue a
single-phase trip signal or three-phase trip signal instantaneously; and a trip permission
signal (DISCAR-CS-*) is sent to the opposite terminals through the sending circuit. Figure
2.3-2 shows the sending circuit of PUP; the trip permission signals are given at PLCs signal
monitoring point (INT.DISCAR-S-*). The selection of either the single-phase trip (1P) or the
three-phase trip (3P) is carried out using scheme switch [DisCAR-TPMD].
When the opposite terminal receives the trip permission signal, PUP at the opposite
terminal also issues a trip signal instantly when either ZCSF/ZCGF have been operated.
Receipt of the trip permission signals are found at PLC connection points (INT.DISCAR-R*).
PUP can operate when PUP is set for scheme switch [Dis-CAR]. If PUP requires
operating ARC, set scheme switch [DisCAR-ARCBlk] Non. (For more information of ARC, see
chapter Relay application: Autoreclose.)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 89 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
To carrier
send circuit
From Z1S/Z1G in local Terminal
Z1G-AX OP DISCAR-CS-A_PUP
Z1G-BX OP DISCAR-CS-B_PUP
Z1G-CX OP DISCAR-CS-C_PUP
Z1S-ABX OP DISCAR-CS-S_PUP
≥1
Z1S-BCX OP
8000001B73
Z1S-CAX OP
DISCAR-OPT-A
8100001B74
DISCAR-OPT-B
8200001B75
DISCAR-OPT-C
8300001B76
From ZG in local Terminal 8000001B68 DISCAR-OPT-S
ZCGF-AX 8000001B20
& ≥1 ≥1 8100001B69 ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-A
≥1
ZCGF-BX 8100001B21
≥1
& ≥1 ≥1 8200001B6A ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-B
ZCGF-CX 8200001B22
& ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-C
≥1
From ZS in local Terminal
ZCSF-ABX ≥1
≥1 &
-CX
ZCSF-BCX &
&
-CX
ZCSF-CAX
&
-CX
& ≥1
& ≥1
Receipt of trip permission signals
From Terminal 1 & DISCAR_TPMD
800000EB55 INT.DISCAR-R1-A 3P
≥1
810000EB56 INT.DISCAR-R1-B ≥1 8100001B77
≥1 & DISCAR-ARC-BLOCK
820000EB57 INT.DISCAR-R1-C
≥1
830000EB58 INT.DISCAR-R1-S DISCAR-ARCBlk To TRC
≥1 ≥1
Block
EXT.DISCAR-R1
From Terminal 2
DISCAR_PERM1-A
840000EB59 INT.DISCAR-R2-A DISCAR_PERM1-B
DISCAR_PERM1-C
850000EB5A INT.DISCAR-R2-B
DISCAR_PERM
860000EB5B INT.DISCAR-R2-C
870000EB5C INT.DISCAR-R2-S ≥1
DISCAR_PERM2-A
EXT.DISCAR-R2 DISCAR_PERM2-B
DISCAR_PERM2-C
From CARRIER-COMMON
CAR_BLOCK DISCAR_PERM
≥1
1 To ECHO
800000EBB0 DISCAR_BLK
8000001BB0
800000EBBF DISCAR_3PTP
810000EBC0 DISCAR_ARCBLOCK
Figure 2.3-1 PUP scheme logic
ECHO logic
8000001B78
DISCAR-CS-A_PUP ≥1 INT.DISCAR-S-A
8100001B79
DISCAR-CS-B_PUP ≥1 INT.DISCAR-S-B
8200001B7A
DISCAR-CS-C_PUP ≥1 INT.DISCAR-S-C
8300001B7B
DISCAR-CS-S_PUP ≥1 INT.DISCAR-S-S
≥1
& ≥1 &
1 8F00001B7C
DISCAR-S
800000EB55 DISCAR_F.BLOCK
810000EB56 DISCAR_PERMIT
Dis-CAR
PUP
Figure 2.3-2 Sending circuit in PUP
2.3.2 Permissive overreach protection (POP)

(i) Application
When a forward overreaching element operates at a terminal, the terminal sends a trip
permission signal to the other opposite terminals. When the forward overreaching element
operates at a terminal, and when a trip permission signal† has been received from an opposite
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 90 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
terminal, the CB at the terminal is tripped in permission overreach protection (POP).
In other words, POP can determines whether the fault exists inside the protected line
based on the overlapping operation of the forward overreaching elements at both terminals.
ZCSF/ZCGF elements are used for the forward overreaching element.
†Note:POP sends a trip permission signal when the forward overreaching element
operates. Thus, multiplex signaling channels or one channel for each direction is
required in POP. This is because that the terminal sending signals shall not trip
erroneously due to reception of its own sending signal if an external fault occurs in
the zone of forward overreaching element.
(ii) Operation of echo (ECHO) and week infeed trip (WKIT)

POP has an echo function (ECHO) and a weak infeed trip function (WKIT) in order that the
line including an open terminal or a weak infeed terminal can be protected by POP. Thus,
POP enables to trip CBs fast at both terminals for any fault along the whole length of the
protected line. (For more information of ECHO and WKIT, see section 2.3.5)
(iii) Countermeasure of current reversal (CRL)

When a fault exist on one of parallel lines, tripping CBs sequential may cause a current
reversal on another of parallel lines. The current reversal results in the false operation of POP,
hence, countermeasure logic is provided for the current reversal (CRL). (For more information
of CRL, see section 2.3.6)
(iv) Criterion of POP tripping
POP at the local terminal issues either a single-phase tripping signal or a three-phase trip
signal when the following conditions are satisfied:
 Trip permission signal is received from the opposite terminal
 The current reversal has not been observed
 One of the following conditions is established:
 The forward overreaching element operates.
 When On is set for scheme switch [Dis-WIKT], the undervoltage element UVL†
(UVLS or UVLG) operates and the forward overreaching element and the
reverse looking element have not operated.
†Note: UVL is provided in the function of protection common (PROT_COMMON). For

more information, see Chapter Relay application: Protection common.
(v) Scheme logic

Figure 2.3-3 shows POP scheme logics. POP sends a trip permission signal for the opposite
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 91 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
terminals when any of the following conditions are satisfied:

1. The forward overreaching element operates; and CRL has not observed the current
reversal.
2. When On is set for scheme switch [Dis-ECHO], CB is opened; and a trip permission
signal (DISCAR-CS-*) is received from the other terminal.
3. When On is set for scheme switch [Dis-ECHO], the forward overreaching element
(ZCSF/ZCGF) and the reverse looking element (ZCSR/ZCGR) have not operated; and
a trip permission signal is received from the other terminal.
To carrier
send circuit
DISCAR-CS-AB_POUP
DISCAR-CS-BC_POUP
DISCAR-CS-CA_POUP
DISCAR-CS-A_POUP
DISCAR-CS-B_POUP
DISCAR-CS-C_POUP
DISCAR-CS-S_POUP
8000001B73
Week infeed trip logic (WKIT) DISCAR-OPT-A

8100001B74
DISCAR-OPT-B
8200001B75
DISCAR-OPT-C
From ZG in local Terminal 8300001B76
8000001B68
ZCGF-AX & DISCAR-OPT-S
& ≥1
1 8000001B20
≥1 ≥1 8100001B69 ≥1
ZCGF-BX ≥1 ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-A
& &
1 ≥1 8200001B6A ≥1 8100001B21
≥1 ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-B
≥1
ZCGF-CX ≥1 ≥1 8200001B22
& & ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-C
1
From ZS in local Terminal ≥1
≥1
ZCSF-ABX &
≥1 &
-CX
ZCSF-BCX
-CX &
ZCSF-CAX &
-CX
≥1
DISCAR_TPMD
&
& 3P
≥1
& 8100001B77
& & DISCAR-ARC-BLOCK
≥1
& &
1
DISCAR-ARCBlk
To TRC
Block
From ZG in local Terminal

ZCGR-AX
-CX
ZCGR-BX Current
-CX reversal
ZCGR-CX logic
-CX (CRL)
ZCSF-X
-CX
ZCSR-X
-CX
Receipt of trip permission signals
From Terminal 1
800000EB55 INT.DISCAR-R1-A =1
≥1
&
810000EB56 INT.DISCAR-R1-B =1 ≥1
&
820000EB57 INT.DISCAR-R1-C =1 ≥1 &
830000EB58 INT.DISCAR-R1-S =1 ≥1 ≥1 &
EXT.DISCAR-R1 =1
From Terminal 2
840000EB59 INT.DISCAR-R2-A =1 ≥1
850000EB5A INT.DISCAR-R2-B =1 ≥1
860000EB5B INT.DISCAR-R2-C =1 ≥1
870000EB5C INT.DISCAR-R2-S =1 ≥1 ≥1
EXT.DISCAR-R2 =1
Dis-CAR UOP
POP
From CARRIER-COMMON
CH1-USE 1
CH2-USE 1
8000001BB0
CAR_BLOCK
≥1
1
800000EBBF DISCAR_ARCBLOCK
Figure 2.3-3 POP and UOP scheme logic
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 92 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(vi) Delay of trip permission signal

Figure 2.3-4 shows POP sending circuit. The trip permission signals are given at PLCs signal
monitoring point (INT.DISCAR-S-*). The selection of either the single-phase trip (1P) or the
three-phase trip (3P) is carried out using scheme switch [DisCAR-TPMD].
Transmission of the trip permission signal continues for setting [TSBCT-dis] even after
the local terminal issues a trip signal.
In many cases, at both ends of the line, the overreaching elements operate at the same
time. However, there may be some cases where they cannot operate simultaneously because
fault currents do not flows symmetrically. That is, the overreaching elements far from a fault
cannot operate by the fault, but the overreaching elements far from the fault will be operated
indirectly if the other terminals are induced to trip. To avoid this case, transmission of the trip
permission signal continues for a while set by [TSBCT-dis] after reset of ZCSF/ZCSG
operation. Consequently, the overreaching elements far from the fault can also generate a trip
signal because the trip permission signal is picked up delayed.
Thus, this command protection ensures its operation at the remote terminal.
TSBCT-DIS
DISCAR-OPT-A t 0
≥1
DISCAR-OPT-B t 0
≥1
DISCAR-OPT-C t 0
≥1
t 0
& ≥1
From Z1G 0.00 to 1.00s
Z1G-TRIP-A
Z1G-TRIP-B
Z1G-TRIP-C
Z1S-OPT
From SOTF-OC
OCH-RETRIP
Trip permission signals

8000001B78
DISCAR-CS-A_POUP ≥1 =1 INT.DISCAR-S-A
8100001B79
DISCAR-CS-B_POUP ≥1 =1 INT.DISCAR-S-B
8200001B7A
DISCAR-CS-C_POUP INT.DISCAR-S-C
≥1 =1
8300001B7B
DISCAR-CS-S_POUP =1 INT.DISCAR-S-S
≥1
≥1
ECHO logic 1
& ≥1 &
≥1 8F00001B7C
1
DISCAR-S
≥1 & &
800000EB55 DISCAR_F.BLOCK 1
POP
Dis-CAR
UOP
Figure 2.3-4 Sending circuit in POP and UOP
2.3.3 Unblocking overreach protection (UOP)

When information are exchanged using a transmission line (the power line carrier), PUP and
POP cannot trip dependably. This is because a trip permission signal may not be exchanged
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 93 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
through the transmission line because that the transmission line includes a fault; the fault
may reduce the power of the signal and then PUP and POP may fail to operate. Unblocking
overreach protection (UOP) is introduced in order to negate this issue.
We can regard a transmitted signal as a trip block signal; and the trip block signal is
transmitted continuously except for the fault conditions. When the forward overreaching
element operates, signal transmission is stopped; hence, a trip block signal is not reached at
an opposite terminal. Consequently, the opposite terminal is allowed to trip; and CB tripping
is carried out when the forward overreaching element on its own operates.
ZCSF/ZCGF elements are used for the forward overreaching element. On the other hand,
ZCSR/ZCGR elements are used for the reverse looking element.
In UOP, the signal is required to send except for the occurrence of internal faults.
Therefore, a failure to operate or false operation due to attenuation of the signal will be
removed even if the power line carrier is used to exchange operation information.
(i) Operation of echo (ECHO) and week infeed trip (WKIT)

UOP can have the functions of ECHO and WKIT, as well as POP. To operate these function,
user should set [Dis-ECHO] On or [Dis-WIKT] On. (For more information of ECHO and WKIT,
see section 2.3.5)
(ii) Countermeasure of current reversal (CRL)

UOP has the countermeasure of current reversal, as well as POP. (For more information of
CRL, see section 2.3.6)
(iii) Delay of trip block signal

As similar to POP, UOP has setting [TSBCT-dis] not to send the trip block signal even after
the local terminal issues a trip signal.
(iv) Scheme logic

Figure 2.3-3 and Figure 2.3-4 also show UOP scheme logic. In UOP, a trip block signal is
observed PLCs signal monitoring point (INT.DISCAR-S-*) when the logic level in UOP is
equal to “1”. Conversely, a trip block signal is not observed when the logic level is equal to “0”.
UOP does not send a trip block signal when one of the following conditions are observed:
 The forward overreaching element operates and the current reversal is not
occurred.
 When On is set for scheme switch [Dis-ECHO], CB is open and the trip block signal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 94 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
is not received from the other terminals.

 When On is set for scheme switch [Dis-ECHO], both the forward overreaching
element and the reverse looking element are not operating and a trip block signal is
not received from the other terminals.
The trip block signals are given at PLCs signal monitoring point (INT.DISCAR-S-*). The
selection of either the single-phase trip (1P) or the three-phase trip (3P) is carried out using
scheme switch [DisCAR-TPMD].
UOP issues single-phase tripping signal or three-phase trip signal locally when the
following conditions are established:
 Trip block signal is not received from the opposite terminals.
 Current reversal is not observed
 One of the following conditions are observed:
 The forward overreaching element operates.
 When On is set for scheme switch [Dis-WIKT], the undervoltage element UVL
(UVLS or UVLG) operates and the forward overreaching element (ZCSF/ZCGF)
and the reverse looking element (ZCSR/ZCGR) have not operated.
2.3.4 Blocking overreach protection (BOP)

BOP send a trip block signal if the revers overreach element operates and the forward
overreaching element dose not operate. Thus, at local terminal, CB tripping is performed
when the forward overreaching element has operated and a trip block signal has not been
received from the opposite terminal.
BOP does not send a trip block signal normally; and a trip block signal is sent only when
the reverse looking element operates. In BOP, a trip block signal is required to send in the
event of an external fault. Hence, failure operation or false operation can be removed when
the communication is performed by power line carrier,
BOP does not receive a trip block signal except for the occurrence of internal fault. If an
external fault occurs in forward, the forward overreaching element at a local terminal issues a
trip signal instantly. However, if an internal fault occurs, the reverse looking element at an
opposite terminal can operate and it transmits a trip block signal. At the local terminal, the
trip block signal will receive in the delay due to the propagation of communication channel.
Therefore, a short delay is required for CB tripping to check for the reception of a trip block
signal.
BOP can trip for any fault along the whole length of the protected line even if an open
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 95 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
terminal exists. A strong infeed terminal operates for all internal faults even if a weak infeed
terminal exists; therefore, ECHO is not required in BOP. WIKT is not applicable in BOP;
hence, the weak infeed terminal cannot operate.
(i) Countermeasure of current reversal (CRL)

BOP has the countermeasure of current reversal, as well as PUP. (For more information of
CRL, see section 2.3.6)
(ii) Scheme logic

Figure 2.3-5 and Figure 2.3-6 show BOP scheme logic. In BOP, a trip block signal is observed
at PLC signal monitoring point (INT.DISCAR-S-*) when the logic level in BOP is equal to “1”.
Conversely, a trip block signal is not observed when the logic level is equal to “0”.
In BOP, a trip block signal is not transmitted. If the reverse overreaching element
operates while the forward overreaching element does not operate, a trip block signal is
transmitted.
A trip block signal is not sent for setting [TREBK-dis] even after the local terminal
issues a trip signal so that command tripping at the remote terminal is secured.
The selection of either the single-phase trip (1P) or the three-phase trip (3P) is carried
out when the trip block signal is not received.
The delayed pick-up timer [TCHD-dis] is provided to allow for the transmission delay for
receipt of the trip block signal from the remote terminal in the event of a forward external
fault.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 96 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
To carrier
send circuit
DISCAR-CS-A_BOP
DISCAR-CS-B_BOP
DISCAR-CS-C_BOP
DISCAR-CS-S_BOP
8000001B73
DISCAR-OPT-A
8100001B74
From ZS and ZG DISCAR-OPT-B

8200001B75
TCHD-Dis DISCAR-OPT-C
8300001B76
t 0 & 8000001B68 DISCAR-OPT-
ZCGF-AX ≥1
1 &
8000001B20
t 0
≥1 ≥1 8100001B69 ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-A
& ≥1
ZCGF-BX 1 & 8100001B21
≥1 ≥1 ≥1 8200001B6A ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-B
t 0 8200001B22
ZCGF-CX & & ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-C
1 ≥1
≥1
ZCSF-ABX t 0
≥1
& ≥1
& &
t 0
ZCSF-BCX
&
t 0 &
ZCSF-CAX
&
1 &
0.000 to 0.100s
≥1
8000001B64
& DISCAR_TPMD
8100001B65 ≥1 1
&
≥1
ZCGR-AX Current 8200001B66 & 3P
1
-CX reversal &
ZCGR-BX 8100001B77
logic 8300001B67 &
-CX
ZCGR-CX 1 & ≥1 DISCAR-ARC-BLOCK
(CRL)
-CX &
ZCSF-X & DISCAR-ARCBlk
-CX 1 To TRC
ZCSR-X
-CX Block
1 &
1 &
1 &
1 &
Permission signals received:

From Terminal 1
≥1
&
810000EB56 INT.DISCAR-R1-B =1 ≥1
&
820000EB57 INT.DISCAR-R1-C =1 ≥1 &
830000EB58 INT.DISCAR-R1-S =1 ≥1 ≥1 &
EXT.DISCAR-R1 =1
From Terminal 2
840000EB59 INT.DISCAR-R2-A =1 ≥1
850000EB5A INT.DISCAR-R2-B =1 ≥1
860000EB5B INT.DISCAR-R2-C =1 ≥1
870000EB5C INT.DISCAR-R2-S =1 ≥1 ≥1
EXT.DISCAR-R2 =1
Dis-CAR
BOP
From CARRIER-COMMON
CH1-USE 1
CH2-USE 1
8000001BB0
CAR_BLOCK
≥1
1
800000EBBF DISCAR_ARCBLOCK
Figure 2.3-5 BOP scheme logic
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 97 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
TSCT-Dis To opposite
t 0 terminal
DISCAR-OPT-A & ≥1 8000001B78
t 0 & INT.DISCAR-S-A
DISCAR-OPT-B & ≥1
1
8100001B79
& INT.DISCAR-S-B
DISCAR-OPT-C & t 0 1 8200001B7A
≥1
& INT.DISCAR-S-C
t 0 1 8300001B7B
& ≥1
& INT.DISCAR-S-S
From Z1G 1
0.00 to 1.00s
Z1G-TRIP-A
≥1
Z1G-TRIP-B
Z1G-TRIP-C
Z1S-OPT 8F00001B7C
From SOTF-OC ≥1 & & DISCAR-S
OCH-RETRIP
1
DISCAR-CS-A_BOP
DISCAR-CS-B_BOP
DISCAR-CS-C_BOP
DISCAR-CS-S_BOP
800000EB55 DISCAR_F.BLOCK
Dis-CAR
BOP
Figure 2.3-6 Sending circuit of BOP
2.3.5 Protection for week infeed terminal

Both POP and UOP are provided with ECHO and WIKT; both are used for a line including
weak infeed terminals.
(i) ECHO function

With regard to POP, if a terminal receives a trip permission signal when neither forward
overreaching element nor reverse looking element have operated, ECHO sends back the
received signal to the opposite terminal.
With regard to UOP, if a terminal receives a block signal when neither forward
overreaching element nor reverse looking element have operated, ECHO stops sending the
block signal to the opposite terminal.
When CB is open, ECHO sends back the trip permission signal or stops sending the trip
block signal. User can set the time from CB opened to ECHO enabled using setting
[TCARECCB].
The terminal on which the forward overreaching element has operated can issue a trip
signal speedy by using the signal by ECHO.
Once the forward overreaching element or reverse looking element have operated,
transmission of the echo signal is inhibited for 250 ms by delayed drop-off timer T1 even after
these elements are reset.
To prevent any spurious echo signal from looping round between the terminals in a
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 98 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
healthy state, the echo signal is restricted to last for 200 ms by delayed pickup timer T2.
Figure 2.3-7 and Figure 2.3-8 shows ECHO logic. User can enable ECHO operation
using scheme switch [Dis-ECHO] Off.
From ZS and ZG
ZCGF-AX ≥1
ZCGF-BX
ZCGF-CX T1
0 t
1 & ECHO1_CONDITION
ZCGR-AX
0.25s
ZCGR-BX
ZCGR-CX
ZCSF-ABX
ZCSF-BCX
ZCSF-CAX
ZCSR-ABX
ZCSR-BCX
ZCSR-CAX
From PROT-COMMON
CB_ANYPH_CLOSE
TCARECCB
t 0 ECHO2_CONDITION
CB_ANYPH_OPEN
0.00 to 200.00s
Figure 2.3-7 ZCS and ZCG for ECHO/WKIT operation

Permission signals received: 8000001B6B
From Terminal 1 & ECHO_CS-A
T2 ≥1
=1 0 t t 0
800000EB55 INT.DISCAR-R1-A ≥1 1
&
810000EB56 INT.DISCAR-R1-B =1 ≥1 0.05s 0.2s

&
8100001B6C
820000EB57 INT.DISCAR-R1-C =1 ≥1 & ≥1 ECHO_CS-B
&
0 t t 0
830000EB58 INT.DISCAR-R1-S =1 1
≥1 & ≥1
EXT.DISCAR-R1 0.05s 0.2s
=1
8200001B6D
&
From Terminal 2 ≥1 ECHO_CS-C
0 t t 0
& 1
0.05s 0.2s
850000EB5A INT.DISCAR-R2-B =1 & 8300001B6E
& ≥1 ECHO_CS
860000EB5B INT.DISCAR-R2-C =1 & 0 t t 0
1
870000EB5C INT.DISCAR-R2-S =1 ≥1 & 0.05s 0.2s
EXT.DISCAR-R2 =1
DISCAR=UOP+BOP
ECHO1_CONDITION
&
Dis-ECHO On
810000EBBE DIS-ECHO BLOCK 1
& ≥1
DISECHO=ON ≥1
&
& ≥1
& ≥1
&
&
&
&
ECHO2_CONDITION &
Figure 2.3-8 ECHO logic
(ii) WIKT function

Figure 2.3-9 shows WIKT logic. WIKT can issues a trip signal on condition that a trip
permission signal has been received when POP operates. On the other hand, when UOP
operates, WIKT can issue a trip signal when a trip block signal has been stopped.
To operate WIKT, the following conditions are required:
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 99 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
 Undervoltage elements (UVLS or UVLG) being operated.

 Neither forward overreaching element nor reverse looking element being operated.
From PROT COMMON
0 t
UVLG-A
≥1 & WKIT-A_CONDITION
0 t
UVLG-B
≥1 & WKIT-B_CONDITION
0 t
UVLG-C
≥1 & WKIT-C_CONDITION
≥1
≥1 1
UVLS-AB
UVLS-BC TWICOORD
UVLS-CA t 0
&
DEAD_LINE_DEDTECT
1 0.000 to 0.100 s
Figure 2.3-9 UV for WIKT

DISCAR_PARM1-A
& 8000001B6F
≥1 & ≥1
& DISCAR_WITIP-A
DISCAR_PARM1-B
& 8100001B70
≥1 & ≥1
& DISCAR_WITIP-B
DISCAR_PARM1-C 8200001B71
& & ≥1
≥1 & DISCAR_WITIP-C
DISCAR_PARM1 8300001B72
& &
≥1 ≥1 DISCAR_WITIP
From CARRIER-COMMON
CH1-USE 1
DISCAR_PARM1-A
& ≥1
DISCAR_PARM1-B
& ≥1
DISCAR_PARM1-C
&
≥1
DISCAR_PARM1 &
From CARRIER-COMMON ≥1
CH2-USE 1
ECHO1_CONDITION &
DIS-WKIT On
810000EBBE DIS-WKIT BLOCK 1
From CARRIER-COMMON
WKIT-A_CONDITION
WKIT-B_CONDITION
WKIT-C_CONDITION
POP
Dis-CAR UOP ≥1
From Z1G
Figure 2.3-10 WIKT logic
UV responds to three phase-to-phase voltages and three phase-to-ground voltages. UV

prevents false weak infeed tripping due to spurious operation of the channel.
WIKT can be enabled using scheme switch [Dis-WKIT] On.
2.3.6 Countermeasure for current reversal

When a fault occurs on one of the parallel lines, the reversal of fault current may be found on
another line owing to sequential CB opening. In the worst case, the current reversal can
result in false operation in POP, UOP and BOP. Thus, POP, UOP and BOP have current
reversal logic (CRL) to prevent the false operation.
Figure 2.3-11(a) shows the arrangement of parallel lines, as an example. Suppose that a
fault occurs at location F on line L1 at time t1. CBA1 is tripped at time t2; and later, CBB1 is
tripped at time t3. The current direction on line L2 can be reversed at time t2. That is, the
current ( ) from terminal B to terminal A is found from time t1 to t2. However, the
current ( ) from terminal A to terminal B is found from time t2 to t3. The current
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 100 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
reversal may be found when an external looped circuit exists if not for parallel lines.
B1
A1 F L1
A B
L2 B2
A2
:Fault current flow before CBA1 being opened

:Fault current flow after CBA1 being opened
(a) Direction of fault current

t1 t2 t3
Forward looking element

A2
Reverse looking element
CRL
TREBK setting
Forward looking element

B2
Reverse looking element
CRL
TREBK setting
(b) Sequence diagram
Figure 2.3-11 Current reversal phenomeon
Figure 2.3-11 (b) shows sequentially the operation of the forward looking element, the
reverse looking element, and CRL on line L2 before and after the occurrence of the current
reversal.
At terminal A2, the forward looking element does not run, but the reverse looking
element runs when the current reversal is yielded. At terminal B2, the forward looking
element runs, but the reverse looking element does not run.
Provided that the forward looking element runs at terminal A2 before the forward
looking element does not run at terminal B2. This may cause false operation of POP, UOP and
BOP on line L2.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 101 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure shows CRL logic. CRL logic can determine the current reversal when the reverse
looking element runs and the forward looking element does not run. If the current reversal is
found, CRL declares for the opposite terminal to block the trip operation immediately. At the
same time, CRL blocks CB tripping at its own terminal. If the condition of current reversal
continues longer than 20ms, CRL lasts to run for setting [TREBK-Dis] even after the current
reversal ceases.
TREBK-Dis 8000001B64
t 0 t 0
Forward looking element in phase A & DIS-REVBLK-A
≥1
1 -CX
Reverse looking element in phase A 0.02s 0.0s
t 0 t 0
Forward looking element in phase B & DIS-REVBLK-A
≥1
1 -CX
Reverse looking element in phase B 0.02s 0.0s
t 0 t 0
Forward looking element in phase C & DIS-REVBLK-A
≥1
1 -CX
Reverse looking element in phase C 0.02s 0.0s
t 0 t 0
Forward looking element in three-phase & DIS-REVBLK-A
≥1
1 -CX
Reverse looking element in three-phase 0.02s 0.0s
Figure 2.3-12 Current reversal logic
The operation of CRL and its effect in the current reversal are follows:
 CRL at terminal A2 runs immediately after the fault occurs.
 The operation of CRL lasts for setting [TREBK-dis] even after the reverse looking
element does not run and the forward looking element runs; CRL continuously
blocks the local tripping and transmitting a trip block signal to terminal B2.
Even if operation overlap of the forward looking elements between terminal A2 and
terminal B2 arises due to the current reversal, the operation overlap will disappear during
the operation of CRL. Thus, the false operation on the healthy line of parallel lines can be
removed. When the current reversal occurs in the direction opposite to the above, CRL at
terminal B2 will respond similarly.
CRL does not pick up for internal faults; thus, high-speed operation of any protection
scheme is not obstructed.
2.3.7 Programing DISCAR using PLC function

It is required to make the connection between the DISCAR function and the DIF_COMM
function. This is because the DISCAR function needs to operate with the communication. The
PLC function can provide the means of the connections; see Chapter PLC function.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 102 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.3.8 Setting
Setting of CARCOM(Function ID: 438001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
CAR-CHNUM 2-TERM/3-TERM – Carrier scheme terminal number 2-TERM
TCARECCB 0.00 to 200.00 s Echo enable timer from CB opened 0.10
TWICOORD 0.000-0.100 s Time coordination for UV relay operation 0.000
Setting of DISCAR (Function ID: 436001)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Dis-CAR Off/PUP/POP/UOP/BOP Distance carrier scheme enable Off
Dis-ECHO Off/On Echo function enable Off
Dis-WKIT Off/On Weak-infeed trip function enable Off
DisCAR-CHSEL Single/And/Guard Carrier channel configuration Single
TREBK-Dis 0.00 to 10.00 s Current reverse blocking time 0.10
TCHD-Dis 0.000 to 0.100 s Coordination timer in BOP function 0.012
TSBCT-Dis 0.00 to 1.00 s SBCNT timer 0.10
DisCAR-TPMD 1P/3P Distance carrier trip mode, phase segregated 1P
trip or 3-phase trip
DisCAR-ARCBlk Non/Block Autoreclose block by distance carrier trip Non
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 103 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.3.9 Data ID
CARCOM(Function ID: 438001)
800000EBB0 CAR_BLOCK Carrier block signal

DISCAR(Function ID: 436001)
8000001B60 EXT.DISCAR-R1
8000001B61 LOSS-DISCAR1
8100001B62 EXT.DISCAR-R2
8100001B63 LOSS-DISCAR2
8000001B64 DIS-REVBLK-A
8100001B65 DIS-REVBLK-B
8200001B66 DIS-REVBLK-C
8300001B67 DIS-REVBLK-S
8000001B68 PPUB_TRIP-A PPUB trip signal(phase-A)
8100001B69 PPUB_TRIP-B PPUB trip signal(phase-B)
8200001B6A PPUB_TRIP-C PPUB trip signal(phase-C)
8000001B6B ECHO_CS-A
8100001B6C ECHO_CS-B
8200001B6D ECHO_CS-C
8300001B6E ECHO_CS
8000001B6F DISCAR_WITRIP-A WI trip signal(phase-A)
8100001B70 DISCAR_WITRIP-B WI trip signal(phase-B)
8200001B71 DISCAR_WITRIP-C WI trip signal(phase-C)
8300001B72 DISCAR_WITRIP
8000001B73 DISCAR-OPT-A DISCAR operation(phase-A)
8100001B74 DISCAR-OPT-B DISCAR operation(phase-B)
8200001B75 DISCAR-OPT-C DISCAR operation(phase-C)
8300001B76 DISCAR-OPT DISCAR operation
8000001B20 DISCAR-TRIP-A Distance carrier trip signal(phase-A)
8100001B21 DISCAR-TRIP-B Distance carrier trip signal(phase-B)
8200001B22 DISCAR-TRIP-C Distance carrier trip signal(phase-C)
8100001B77 DISCAR-ARC-BLOCK Distance carrier ARC block signal
8000001B78 INT.DISCAR-S-A
8100001B79 INT.DISCAR-S-B
8200001B7A INT.DISCAR-S-C
8300001B7B INT.DISCAR-S-S
8F00001B7C DISCAR-S
8800001B7E DISCAR-OPT-AR Distance carrier operation(phase-A)
8900001B7F DISCAR-OPT-BR Distance carrier operation(phase-B)
8A00001B80 DISCAR-OPT-CR Distance carrier operation(phase-C)
8C00001B81 DISCAR-OPT-ABR Distance carrier operation(phase-AB)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 104 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

8D00001B82 DISCAR-OPT-BCR Distance carrier operation(phase-BC)
8E00001B83 DISCAR-OPT-CAR Distance carrier operation(phase-CA)
8000001BB0 DISCAR_BLOCK Distance carrier block signal
8000001BB1 DISCAR-R1
8000001BB2 DISCAR-R1-2
8100001BB3 DISCAR-R2
8100001BB4 DISCAR-R2-2

800000EBB0 DISCAR_BLOCK Distance carrier block signal
800000EBB1 DISCAR-R1
800000EBB2 DISCAR-R1-2
810000EBB3 DISCAR-R2
810000EBB4 DISCAR-R2-2
800000EBB5 INT.DISCAR-R1-A
810000EBB6 INT.DISCAR-R1-B
820000EBB7 INT.DISCAR-R1-C
830000EBB8 INT.DISCAR-R1-S
840000EBB9 INT.DISCAR-R2-A
850000EBBA INT.DISCAR-R2-B
860000EBBB INT.DISCAR-R2-C
870000EBBC INT.DISCAR-R2-S
800000EBBD DIS-ECHO BLOCK
810000EBBE DIS-WKIT BLOCK
800000EBBF DISCAR_3PTP DISCAR 3phase trip command
810000EBC0 DISCAR_ARCBLOCK DISCAR ARC block command
800000EBC1 DISCAR_F.BLOCK
810000EBC2 DISCAR_F.PERMIT
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 105 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Directional earth fault command protection (DEFCAR)

Directional earth fault command protection (DEFCAR) provides POP, UOP and BOP
techniques† using two elements of earth fault protection between in forward and in reverse
(DEFCF and DEFCR‡). POP, UOP and BOP can issue either a single-pole trip (1P) or
three-phase trip (3P). These can also enable to run the function of autoreclose (ARC). User can
select either first tripping or delayed tripping in DEFCAR with set of delay timer. Thus, it is
possible to give priority to the function of distance carrier protection (DISCAR) so that
DISCAR runs faster than DEFCAR. DEFCAR send a trip block signal for the opposite
terminal when one or two poles in CB are open and when the failure of voltage transformer
occurs.
†Note:When both DISCAR and DEFCAR are used mutually for the command protection,
user should coordinate the technique between DISCAR and DEFCAR. For the
selection of the techniques in DEFCAR, see section 2.3.
‡Note:In DEFCAR, EF1 is used for a forward element (DEFCF); EF2 is used for a reverse
element (DEFCR). Both EF1 and EF2 are the function of earth fault protection
(EF). For more information, see Chapter Relay application: Earth fault protection.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: Several IED models do not have carrier features. To determine whether the features
are implemented in the IED or not, locate the IED ordering number; and check the order
number at “G&T position” referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see
Appendix: Ordering.
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 106 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.4.1 Permissive overreach protection (POP)

DEFCAR sends a trip permission signal in POP; and POP does not send a trip permission
signal for non-internal fault. Figure 2.4-1 shows POP scheme logic. The elements of OCD are
used to select a phase which should be tripped in CB.
When POP receives a trip permission signal, POP issues a trip signal on condition that
DEFCF has operated. To assure issuing a trip signal at the opposite terminal, POP continues
to send a trip permission signal for setting [TSBCT-DEF] after DEFCF stops. (Figure 2.4-2)
DEFCR is used for CRL as a revers looking element; DEFCF is used as a forward
looking element, as shown in Figure 2.4-3. (For more information of CRL, see section 2.3.6)
When DEFCR runs but DEFCF continues to stop for 20 ms or more—even if DEFCF starts to
run or DEFCR stops later—tripping CB at local terminal or transmission of the trip
permission signal is blocked for setting [TREBK-DEF].
In POP, users can delay the DEFCAR sending using settings [TDEFCF] and [TDEFCB].
Users can also delay the DEFCAR tripping using setting [TDEFC]. Thus, if users wish to carry
out the DEFCAR sending and the DEFCAR tripping separately, users should set a value for
the setting [TDEFCF] and another value for the setting [TDEFC]. For example, when 0 ms set
for the [TDEFCF] and 50 ms set for the [TDEFC], the DEFCAR sending is performed faster
than the DEFCAR tripping. (See section 2.4.4 for more information)
POP can provide ECHO and WKIT functions, which are used for the line having weak
infeed terminals. ECHO allows fast CB tripping at the terminal on which DEFCF has
operated when applied to the line having an open terminal or a weak infeed earth fault
current terminal. (Figure 2.4-4 to Figure 2.4-7) (For more information of ECHO and WKIT,
see section 2.3.5)
When a trip permission signal is received if neither DEFCF nor DEFCR operates, ECHO
sends back the received signal to the opposite terminal. When CB is open, ECHO also sends
back the trip permission signal.
Once DEFCF or DEFCR operates, ECHO inhibits to send the echo signal for 250 ms by
delayed drop-off timer T1 even after DEFCF and DEFCR stop to operate.
In order to prevent any spurious echo signal from looping round between terminals in a
healthy state, sending ECHO signal is restricted for 200 ms by delayed pick-up timer T2.
Echo can operate using scheme switch [DEF-ECHO] On.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 107 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
To CRL
TDEFCB 8400001B68
From EF (EF2)
t 0 DEFCR-X
DEFCR &
-CX 0.00 to 0.30s
8300001B67
≥1 DEFCF-X
From VTF
≥1 To carrier send circuit
VTF_DETECT
From PROT COMMON 1 DEFCAR-CS-A_POUP
CB_LOSS_PHASE DEFCAR-CS-B_POUP
DEFCAR-CS-C_POUP
8000001B74
& DEFCAR-OPT-AR
8100001B75
& DEFCAR-OPT-BR
8200001B76
& DEFCAR-OPT-CR
TDEFCF TDEFC 8300001B77
DEFCF t 0 0 8000001B6A DEFCAR-OPT-S
& & &
t
-CX &
From PROT-COMMON ≥1 8000001B20
& &
t 0 t 0 8100001B6B ≥1 DEFCAR-TRIP-A
OCD-AT S & & ≥1 8100001B21
& 8200001B6C
-CX R ≥1 t 0 ≥1 DEFCAR-TRIP-B
≥1 & t 0
≥1 8200001B22
OCT-BT & &
S ≥1 DEFCAR-TRIP-C
-CX 0.00 to 0.30s 0.00 to 0.30s
R ≥1 ≥1
OCT-CT S Week infeed ≥1
-CX R ≥1 ≥1 trip logic &
(WIKT)
1 ≥1 1
Current
800000EBBB EFF PHSEL-A Reversal 1
Logic ≥1
800000EBBC EFF PHSEL-B (CRL)
DEFCAR_TPMD
800000EBBD EFF PHSEL-C 3P
1P DEFCAR-TPMD=1P
8100001B77
& DEFCAR-ARC-BLOCK
Permission signals received: ≥1
From Terminal 1
DEFCAR-ARCBlk
800000EBB5 INT.DEFCAR-R1-A =1 To TRC
≥1 ≥1
& Block
810000EBB6 INT.DEFCAR-R1-B =1 ≥1 ≥1
&
820000EBB7 INT.DEFCAR-R1-C =1 ≥1 ≥1 &
EZT.DISCAR-R1 =1
From Terminal 2
DEFCAR_PERM1-A
840000EBB8 INT.DEFCAR-R2-A =1 ≥1 ≥1 DEFCAR_PERM1-B
DEFCAR_PERM1-C
860000EBBA INT.DEFCAR-R2-C =1 ≥1 ≥1
DEFCAR_PERM2-A
EZT.DISCAR-R2
=1 DEFCAR_PERM2-B
DEFCAR UOP
DEFCAR_PERM2-C
POP
From CARRIER-COMMON To ECHO/EIKT

CH1-USE 1
CH2-USE 1
CAR_BLOCK
≥1
1
800000EBB0 DEFCAR_BLK
810000EBC1 DEFCAR_3PTP
800000EBC0 DEFCAR_ARCBLOCK
Figure 2.4-1 POP and UOP scheme logic
TSBCT-DEF
t 0
DEFCAR-OPT-A
t 0
DEFCAR-OPT-B
t 0
DEFCAR-OPT-C
0.00 to 1.00s
8000001B79
DEFCAR-CS-A_POUP ≥1 =1 INT.DEFCAR-S-A
8100001B7A
DEFCAR-CS-B_POUP ≥1 =1 INT.DEFCAR-S-B
8200001B7B
DEFCAR-CS-C_POUP INT.DEFCAR-S-C
≥1 =1
≥1
ECHO logic =1
& ≥1 &
≥1 8F00001B7C
1
DEFCAR-S
≥1 & &
800000EBC2 DEFCAR_F.BLOCK
1
810000EBC3 DEFCAR_PERMIT
DEFCAR UOP
POP
Figure 2.4-2 Sending circuit in POP and UOP
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 108 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
TREBK-DEF 8000001B69
t 0 t 0
DEFCF-X & DEF-REVBLK
≥1
-CX 1 -CX
DEFCR-X 0.02s 0.0s
-CX
Figure 2.4-3 Current reversal logic
From PROT COMMON
0 t
UVLG-A
≥1 & WKIT-A_CONDITION
0 t
UVLG-B
≥1 & WKIT-B_CONDITION
0 t
UVLG-C
≥1 & WKIT-C_CONDITION
≥1
≥1 1
UVLS-AB
UVLS-BC TWICOORD
UVLS-CA t 0
&
DEAL_LINE_DEDTECT
1 0.000 to 0.100 s
Figure 2.4-4 UVL for WKIT operation

DEFCAR_PARM1-A TDEFC
& 8000001B70
≥1 & t 0
& DEFCAR_WITIP-A
DEFCAR_PARM1-B
& & 8100001B71
≥1 t 0
& DEFCAR_WITIP-B
DEFCAR_PARM1-C 8200001B72
& &
≥1 & t 0 DEFCAR_WITIP-C
8300001B73
0.00 to 0.30s ≥1 DEFCAR_WITIP

From CARRIER-COMMON
CH1-USE 1
DEFCAR_PARM1-A
& ≥1
DEFCAR_PARM1-B
& ≥1
DEFCAR_PARM1-C
&
≥1
From CARRIER-COMMON
CH2-USE 1
ECHO1_CONDITION &
DEF-WKIT On
CAR
810000EBBE DEF-WKIT BLOCK 1
From CARRIER-COMMON
WKIT-A_CONDITION
WKIT-B_CONDITION
WKIT-C_CONDITION
POP
≥1
UOP
DEFCAR BOP
Figure 2.4-5 WKIT logic
From CARRIER_COMMON
T1
DEFCFX
≥1 0 t
1 & ECHO1_CONDITION
DEFCRX
0.25s
From PROT-COMMON
CB_ANYPH_CLOSE
TCARECCB
t 0 ECHO2_CONDITION
CB_ANYPH_OPEN
0.00 to 200.00s
Figure 2.4-6 EF for ECHO/WKIT operation
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 109 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Permission signals received: 8000001B6E

&
From Terminal 1 T2 DEF-ECHO_CS-A
≥1
=1 0 t t 0
800000EB55 INT.DEFCAR-R1-A ≥1 1
&
810000EB56 INT.DEFCAR-R1-B =1 ≥1 0.05s 0.2s

&
8100001BE
820000EB57 INT.DEFCAR-R1-C =1 ≥1 & ≥1 DEF-ECHO_CS-B
&
0 t t 0
1
0.05s 0.2s
8000001B6F
& DEF-ECHO_CS-C
From Terminal 2 ≥1
0 t t 0
& 1
840000EBB8 INT.DEFCAR-R2-A =1
0.05s 0.2s
850000EBB9 INT.DEFCAR-R2-B =1 &
860000EBBA INT.DEFCAR-R2-C =1 &
POP
DEFCAR ≥1
UOP
ECHO1_CONDITION &
DEF-ECHO On
810000EBBE DEF-ECHO BLOCK 1
& ≥1
≥1
&
& ≥1
&
&
&
ECHO2_CONDITION &
Figure 2.4-7 ECHO logic
2.4.2 Unblocking overreach protection (UOP)

DEFCAR sends a trip block signal in UOP. Thus, UOP stops to send a trip block signal for an
internal fault. Settings and operation of UOP is the same as POP.
2.4.3 Blocking overreach protection (BOP)

BOP send a trip block signal except for an internal fault. When DEFCF operates, BOP issues
a trip single unless a trip blocking single is received.
The delayed pick-up timer [TCHD-DEF] is provided to allow for the transmission delay of the
trip block signal from the opposite terminal. Therefore, user should set a time depending on
the delay of communication channel.
Setting [TCHD-DEF] = maximum signal transmission delay time†+ 5ms
†Note: Including operation time of circuits of Binary IO modules; these circuits are used
to send/receive a trip blocking signal.
For setting [TREBK-DEF], see section 2.4.1.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 110 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
To CRL
TDEFCB 8400001B68
From EF (EF2) DEFCR-X
t 0
DEFCR &
-CX 0.00 to 0.30s
From VTF 8300001B67
≥1 ≥1 DEFCF-X
VTF_DETECT
From PROT COMMON 1
CB_LOSS_PHASE
From EF (EF1)
TDEFCF 8000001B64
DEFCF t 0 DEFCF-AX
& &
-CX
From PROT-COMMON 8100001B65
& t 0 DEFCF-BX
&
OCD-AT S
& t 0 8200001B66
-CX R ≥1 &
≥1
DEFCF-CX
OCT-BT S
-CX 0.00 to 0.30s
R ≥1 ≥1
OCT-C S
-CX R ≥1 ≥1
1 ≥1 1
800000EBBB EFF PHSEL-A
800000EBBC EFF PHSEL-B
800000EBBD EFF PHSEL-C
Figure 2.4-8 OCD circuit for BOP
8000001B74
& DEFCAR-OPT-A
8100001B75
& DEFCAR-OPT-B
8200001B76
& DEFCAR-OPT-C
TCHD-DEF TDEFC
t 0 8000001B6A
DEFCF-AX & t 0
& 8000001B20
t 0 8100001B6B ≥1
DEFCF-BX t 0 ≥1 DEFCAR-TRIP-A
& & ≥1 8100001B21
8200001B6C
DEFCF-CX t 0 ≥1 DEFCAR-TRIP-B
t 0 8200001B22
& ≥1
& ≥1 DEFCAR-TRIP-C
0.00 to 0.100s
0.00 to 0.30s
Week infeed ≥1
trip logic &
Current
Reversal 1
detection ≥1
logic
DEFCAR_TPMD
3P
1P
8100001B77
Permission signals received: ≥1 & DEFCAR-ARC-BLOCK
From Terminal 1
=1 DEFCAR-ARCBlk
800000EBB5 INT.DEFCAR-R1-A ≥1 ≥1 To TRC
& Block
&
820000EBB7 INT.DEFCAR-R1-C =1 ≥1 ≥1 &
800000EBB1 DEFCAR-R1 =1
From Terminal 2
DEFCAR_PERM1-A
840000EBB8 INT.DEFCAR-R2-A =1 ≥1 ≥1 DEFCAR_PERM1-B
DEFCAR_PERM1-C
860000EBBA INT.DEFCAR-R2-C =1 ≥1 ≥1
DEFCAR_PERM2-A
810000EBB3 DEFCAR-R2 DEFCAR_PERM2-B
=1
DEFCAR DEFCAR_PERM2-C
BOP To ECHO/EIKT
From Terminal 2
CH1-USE 1
CH2-USE
CAR_BLOCK
≥1
1
800000EBB0 DEFCAR_BLK
810000EBC1 DEFCAR_3PTP
800000EBC0 DEFCAR_ARCBLOCK
Figure 2.4-9 BOP scheme logic
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 111 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
DEF-REVBLK
& 8000001B79
& INT.DEFCAR-S-A
& 1
8100001B7A
& INT.DEFCAR-S-B
& 1 8200001B7B
& INT.DEFCAR-S-C
1
TSBCT-DEF
t 0
DEFCAR-OPT-A
t 0
DEFCAR-OPT-B ≥1
t 0
DEFCAR-OPT-C
8F00001B7C
800000EB55 DEFCAR_F.BLOCK ≥1 &
& DEFCAR-S
810000EB56 DEFCAR_PERMIT
1
DEFCAR BOP
Figure 2.4-10 Sending circuit of BOP
2.4.4 Coordination with DISCAR protection

The DEFCAR function, as rule, is used together with the distance carrier command protection
(DISCAR†); hence, the user is required to establish the coordination between the DEFCAR
function and the DISCAR function so that both can operate without interference. The
followings exemplify how to establish the coordination using the DEFCAR settings sand
signals.
†Note:For more information of the DISCAR, see chapter Relay application: Distance
carrier command protection.
(i) DISCAR and DEFCAR signals being separated

When the DISCAR signal and the DEFCAR signal are used separately, the user should set 0
for the [TDEFCF]. Consequently, the DEFCAR function can trip in TDEFC after the reception
of the DEFCAR signal. Figure 2.4-11 shows the relationship of sending-signal,
receiving-signal, and tripping in the DEFCAR function.
DEFCAR pickup
BO Off delay
[TDEFCF]=0ms
Sending DEFCAR signal
Communication delay
Receiving DEFCAR signal

[TDEFC]
DEFCAR issuing a trip signal
Figure 2.4-11 Sending signal and receiving signal in DEFCAR

Note: It is recommend prolonging DEFCAR signal.
(ii) DISCAR and DEFCAR signals being shared

When the DISCAR signal and the DEFCAR signal are used as a shared signal, the user
should set should set 0 for the [TDEFC]. Consequently, the DEFCAR function can issue a trip
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 112 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
signal after the reception of the DEFCAR signal that is prolonged by the setting [TDEFCF].
Figure 2.4-12 shows the relationship of sending-signal, receiving-signal, and tripping in the
DEFCAR function.
DEFCAR pickup
[TDEFCF] BO Off delay
Sending DEFCAR signal
Communication delay
Receiving DEFCAR signal

[TDEFC]=0
DEFCAR issuing a trip signal
Figure 2.4-12 Sending signal and receiving signal shared in DEFCAR
2.4.5 Programing DEFCAR using PLC function

It is required to make the connection between the DEFCAR function and the DIF_COMM
function. This is because the DEFCAR function needs to operate with the communication. The
PLC function can provided the means of the connections; see Chapter PLC function.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 113 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.4.6 Setting
Setting of CARDEF (Function ID: 437001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
DEF-CAR Off/POP/UOP/BOP DEF carrier scheme enable Off
DEF-ECHO Off/On Echo function enable Off
DEF-WKIT Off/On Weak infeed trip function enable Off
DEFCAR-CHSEL Single/And/Guard Carrier channel configuration Single
TDEFCF 0.00 – 0.30 s DEF carrier trip delay time 0.15
TDEFCB 0.00 – 0.30 s DEF carrier trip delay time 0.15
TDEFC 0.00 – 0.30 s DEF carrier trip delay time 0.00
TREBK-DEF 0-10 s Current reverse blocking time 0.1
TCHD-DEF 0-0.1 s Coordination timer in BOP function 0.012
TSBCT-DEF 0-1 s SBCNT timer 0.1
DEF carrier trip mode, phase
DEFCAR-TPMD 1P/3P 3P
segregated trip or 3-phase trip
DEFCAR-ARCBlk Non/Block Autoreclose block by DEF carrier trip Block
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 114 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.4.7 Data ID
DEFCAR (Function ID: 437001)
8000001B60 EXT.DEFCAR-R1 External DEF carrier received from remote 1
8000001B61 LOSS-DEFCAR1 DEF carrier loss condition for remote 1
8100001B62 EXT.DEFCAR-R2 External DEF carrier received from remote 2
8100001B63 LOSS-DEFCAR2 DEF carrier loss condition for remote 2
8000001B64 DEFCF-AX DEF carrier A phase (Forward)
8100001B65 DEFCF-BX DEF carrier B phase (Forward)
8200001B66 DEFCF-CX DEF carrier C phase (Forward)
8300001B67 DEFCF-X DEF carrier 3-phases OR (Forward)
8400001B68 DEFCR-X DEF carrier (Reverse)
8000001B69 DEF-REVBLK
8000001B6A DEFPPUB_TRIP-A DEF carrier trip of A phase (For POP+UOP)
8100001B6B DEFPPUB_TRIP-B DEF carrier trip of B phase (For POP+UOP)
8200001B6C DEFPPUB_TRIP-C DEF carrier trip of C phase (For POP+UOP)
8000001B6D DEF-ECHO_CS-A ECHO carrier send (A phase)
8100001B6E DEF-ECHO_CS-B ECHO carrier send (B phase)
8200001B6F DEF-ECHO_CS-C ECHO carrier send (C phase)
8000001B70 DEFCAR_WITRIP-A Weak infeed trip of A phase
8100001B71 DEFCAR_WITRIP-B Weak infeed trip of B phase
8200001B72 DEFCAR_WITRIP-C Weak infeed trip of C phase
8300001B73 DEFCAR_WITRIP Weak infeed trip (3-phases OR)
8000001B74 DEFCAR-OPT-A DEF carrier operation of A phase
8100001B75 DEFCAR-OPT-B DEF carrier operation of B phase
8200001B76 DEFCAR-OPT-C DEF carrier operation of C phase
8300001B77 DEFCAR-OPT DEF carrier operation (3-phases OR)
8000001B20 DEFCAR-TRIP-A DEF carrier trip of A phase
8100001B21 DEFCAR-TRIP-B DEF carrier trip of B phase
8200001B22 DEFCAR-TRIP-C DEF carrier trip of C phase
8100001B78 DEFCAR-ARC-BLOCK ARC block signal by DEF carrier
8000001B79 INT.DEFCAR-S-A DEF carrier of A phase send (Integral type)
8100001B7A INT.DEFCAR-S-B DEF carrier of B phase send (Integral type)
8200001B7B INT.DEFCAR-S-C DEF carrier of C phase send (Integral type)
8F00001B7C DEFCAR-S DEF carrier send (3-phases OR)
8800001B7E DEFCAR-OPT-AR DEF carrier operation of A phase (For record)
8900001B7F DEFCAR-OPT-BR DEF carrier operation of B phase (For record)
8A00001B80 DEFCAR-OPT-CR DEF carrier operation of C phase (For record)
8000001B83 DEFCAR=ON DEF carrier scheme enabled condition

800000EBB0 DEFCAR_BLOCK DEF carrier block signal
800000EBB1 DEFCAR-R1 DEF carrier received from remote 1
800000EBB2 DEFCAR-R1-2 DEF carrier received from remote 1-2
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 115 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

810000EBB3 DEFCAR-R2 DEF carrier received from remote 2
810000EBB4 DEFCAR-R2-2 DEF carrier received from remote 2-2
800000EBB5 INT.DEFCAR-R1-A DEF carrier of A phase received from remote 1 (Integral type)
810000EBB6 INT.DEFCAR-R1-B DEF carrier of B phase received from remote 1 (Integral type)
820000EBB7 INT.DEFCAR-R1-C DEF carrier of C phase received from remote 1 (Integral type)
840000EBB8 INT.DEFCAR-R2-A DEF carrier of A phase received from remote 2 (Integral type)
850000EBB9 INT.DEFCAR-R2-B DEF carrier of B phase received from remote 2 (Integral type)
860000EBBA INT.DEFCAR-R2-C DEF carrier of C phase received from remote 2 (Integral type)
800000EBBB DEF PHSEL-A DEF selected A phase
810000EBBC DEF PHSEL-B DEF selected B phase
820000EBBD DEF PHSEL-C DEF selected C phase
800000EBBE DEF-ECHO BLOCK Echo function blocked
810000EBBF DEF-WKIT BLOCK Weak infeed trip function blocked
800000EBC0 DEFCAR_3PTP DEF Carrier 3 phase trip
810000EBC1 DEFCAR_ARCBLOCK ARC block signal by DEF carrier
800000EBC2 DEFCAR_F.BLOCK Blocked DEF carrier send
810000EBC3 DEFCAR_F.PERMIT Permitted DEF carrier send
800000EBB0 DEFCAR_BLOCK DEF carrier block signal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 116 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Overcurrent protection (OC)

The phase overcurrent (OC) protection is the major protection function and has both time
characteristic and directional elements. Four stages (elements) are available in the OC
protection. The user can select various features using the scheme switches provided. The
elements are named OC1, OC2, OC3, and OC4; and they operate independently.
To simplify the description, only OC1 is discussed but is applicable to the other OCs;
hence, read the expression for OC1 as OC2, OC3, and OC4 at each stage unless a special
explanation or instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 117 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.5.1 Relay polarity

The user can choose either non-directional OC or directional OC for each OC stage. In
addition, the user can further select either the forward or the reverse direction for each of the
directional OC elements selected.
(i) Characteristic of non-directional OC

The characteristic of the non-directional type OC is a circle that has a center at the origin. A
setting and a scheme switch is used to configure each non-directional OC element; i.e., the
user can set the threshold value of the non-directional OC element for stage 1 using setting
[OC1-DT], provided time characteristic is required for define time delay (DT) described in
section 2.5.2(i). Nondir is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir].
(ii) Characteristic of directional-OC element in the forward direction

As shown in Figure 2.5-1, the characteristic of the directional-OC elements in the forward
direction is a semi-circle based upon the border-line; the hatched area shows the operating
region of a directional-OC element.
Non-operation (No trip) zone
Reference voltage or
θ1 Polarizing voltage2 (Vpol)
Operation (Trip) zone
Figure 2.5-1 Characteristic of the directional-OC element in the forward direction

1Note: Directional characteristic angle (θ) forms the angle between the reference quantity
and the directional characteristic angle line. The half plane represents the zone of
operation bordered on one side by the border line and extending in the direction
that contains both the reference (polarizing) and operating quantities.
2Note: For the polarizing voltage (Vpol), greater than 1.0 voltage should be applied for
sensing.
A reference signal, that is, a polarization signal is required by the directional OC

element, the reference signal is derived from a phase-to-phase voltage: for example, the
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 118 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
directional OC element for phase-A (OC-A) uses the phase-B-to-phase-C voltage rotated by
90° (VBC90°) in the leading direction, this reference signal is illustrated in Figure 2.5-2. The
direction of the current in the protected circuit, in this case the phase-A current (IA), is
determined from the angle measured for IA against VBC90°. The purpose of using VBC in the
90° leading position is so that the reference voltage (VBC90°) takes the same direction as the
phase-A voltage (VA) because the directional-sensing element requires a reference quantity
that is reasonably constant against which the current in the protected circuit can be compared.
As a result, when a fault occurs, the fault current IA will lag VBC90°. Similarly, for the
phase-B directional OC element (OC-B) where the object current is (IB) the reference voltage
(VCA90°) is adopted. The phase-C directional element (OC-C) uses the same approach as the
OC-A and OC-B elements. Table 2.5-2 shows the relationship between each current and its
respective reference voltage.
VBC90°
Leading 90°
VA
VBC
VBC
Figure 2.5-2 Object current (IA) and reference voltage (VBC90°)
Table 2.5-2 Directional polarizing signal

Directional element Object current Reference voltage
OC-A IA VBC90
OC-B IB VCA90
OC-C IC VAB90
For a close-in three-phase fault, the three reference voltages VBC90°, VCA90° and
VAB90° may fall below the minimum threshold voltage for the directional OC element. In
order to cover this case, a voltage memory function is used to provide a polarizing signal. The
polarizing signals are provided during three-phase faults so that the OC element is able to
determine the direction of the fault. In addition, the directional element function determines
its output based on the loss of voltage memory and is effective while the fault current flows in
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 119 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
accordance with Figure 2.5-3.

Phase difference calculation
|V||I|cos() 0 &
1 Output of
directional element
Amplitude calculation F/F &
1 1
|l| OC pickup current
Amplitude calculation
|Vpol| Set voltage (OV-Vpol)
Figure 2.5-3 Direction determination after loss of voltage memory

If a single phase is connected to a heavy load, and the other phases are not connected to
heavy loads, the user can program separately the directional OC element such that OC will
send a trip signal only when the fault current detected is in the same direction among two
phases or more of the three-phases.
A setting and a scheme switch, as well as the non-directional OC element, provide the
settings for the directional OC element: for example, the user can set the threshold value of
the OC at stage 1 with the setting [OC1-DT] and Forward can be set for the scheme switch
[OC1-Dir]. Setting of the sensing angle (θ) is configured by the setting [OC1-Angle] with the
value of θ set in the range of 0–180°. Figure 2.5-4 shows an example of an angle and a
characteristic set with θ.
Reverse
Vpol Vpol Vpol
θ=30°
θ=90°
Max. torque
Forward
Reverse Forward Reverse Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
Vpol Vpol
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
Figure 2.5-4 Examples of directional characteristic angle (θ)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 120 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) Characteristic of directional OC in the reverse direction

The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. The setting and the
scheme switch, as well as the setting of the directional OC element in the forward direction,
provides the setting of the directional OC element in the reverse direction: for example,
Reverse is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir] when the direction of the OC on stage 1 is
considered.
2.5.2 Inverse definite mean time and definite time characteristic

The OC element monitors the currents; when one of the currents is beyond the threshold of
operation, the OC element will operate within a period that is defined by the time
characteristic feature. The user can choose the OC operate time delay characteristics, either
dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay (i.e., IDMT) or independent (definite) time
characteristic delay (i.e., DT). The operate time of the IDMT depends upon the level of the
energizing current, and the operate time in the DT is a constant.
For the reset-time-delay in the IDMT, either inverse (dependent)-time-reset or definite

(independent)-time-reset is characterized by setting..
The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the OC element
by setting a scheme switch. We shall see the scheme switch later.
(i) DT characteristic
The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time and is not affected by the
level of current. The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed immediately. The
user can set the operate time using a setting; it is discussed in in sections (v) and (vi).
(ii) IDMT characteristic

The operate time in the IDMT characteristic is inversely proportional to the level of the fault
current. The user can determine the operate time from a preset curve. Ten characteristic
curves are available; i.e. nine pre-installed curves covering IEC, IEEE, US and UK standard
characteristic curves and one original (user programmable) characteristic curve for which the
user can set the equation parameters. The IDMT curve equation and parameters will be
explained in section (iii).
The reset time in the IDMT is user-selectable; either inverse-time-reset or

definite-time-reset is selected. For the inverse-time-reset, the user can choose the reset time
for the preset characteristic from six characteristic curves; i.e. IEEE and US standard five
pre-installed characteristic curves and one user original characteristic curve where the user
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 121 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
can set the equation parameters. The inverse-time-reset curve equation and parameters will
be discussed in section (v).
(iii) Operate time of IDMT

The operate time in the IDMT is defined by Equation (2.5-1). (ref. IEC 60255-151):
k
t(I) = TMS × {[ α ] + 𝑐} (2.5-1)
(𝐼⁄𝐼 ) − 1
𝑠
where:
t = operate time with constant current I (seconds),
I = operate (energizing) current (amperes),
Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting number,
k, α, c = constants defining curve.
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curves are defined in Table 2.5-3. In
addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen for
each OC stage. Figure 2.5-5 illustrates these characteristic curves. For example, the user
should set one for the scheme switch [OC1-Type]. (“IEC-NI" is for IEC Normal Inverse
characteristic; “IEC-VI” for IEC Very inverse; “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse; “UK-LTI” for
UK Long Time Inverse; “IEEE-MI” for IEEE Moderately Inverse; “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very
Inverse; “IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse; “US-CO8” for US CO8 Inverse; “US-CO2” for
US CO2 Short Time Inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.)
In the IDMT, the user can also program the characteristic using time-multiplier-setting
(TMS) for the required operate time. For example, when the IEC characteristic is selected, the
user can set the TMS value using the setting [OC1-TMS-IEC] (incidentally, the default value
for the TMS is 1.00). The other TMSs are also available by the [OC1-TMS-UK],
[OC1-TMS-IEEE], [OC1-TMS-US] and [OC1-TMS-ORG].
Table 2.5-3 Constants for IDMT
Curve type k c
Curve Description α
(IEC 60255-151) sec sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) 0.14 0.02 0
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) 13.5 1 0
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) 80 2 0
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) 120 1 0
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 0.0515 0.02 0.114
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 19.61 2 0.491
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 28.2 2 0.1217
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2 0.18
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 0.02394 0.02 0.01694
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 122 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 2.5-5 IDMT characteristic curves
(iv) Operate time of DT

The operate time in the DT is a constant.
Time characteristic
The user should set DT for the scheme switches [OC1-Type]. The value of the required operate
time is set for the setting [TOC1] in the range 0.00–300.00s.
Instantaneous activation
The operate time of the instantaneous characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TOC1],
but the instantaneous one can also obtained when the logic signal ‘1(High)’ is programmed to
be injected at PLC connection point “OC1_INST_OP”.
(v) Reset time of IDMT

Programming the reset time characteristic is available for the IEEE standard, US standard
and original (user-programmable) inverse-time-reset characteristic†. In the IEEE standard,
for example, the user should set DEP for the scheme switch [OC1-Rtype]. The following
equation defines the reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic. (ref. IEC 60255-151):
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 123 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
kr
t(I) = RTMS × [ β
] (2.5-2)
1 − (𝐼⁄𝐼 )
𝑠
where,
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energizing current (amperes),
Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting,
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is
zero (seconds),
β = constants defining curve.
For setting the RTMS for the IEEE standard, the user can use the setting
[OC1-RTMS-IEEE] (incidentally, the default value is 1.000). Similarly, setting [OC1-RTMS-US]
and setting [OC1-RTMS-ORG] are provided for the US standard and the original, respectively
(For more information w.r.t the value for kr and β, see Table 2.5-4; Figure 2.5-6 shows the
characteristic curves).
Table 2.5-4 Constants for inverse-time-reset characteristics

Curve Type kr
Curve Description β
IEC 60255-151 sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI‡) N/A N/A
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI‡) N/A N/A
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI‡) N/A N/A
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI‡) N/A N/A
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 4.85 2
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 21.6 2
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 29.1 2
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 2.261 2
†Note:The user can set DEF for the scheme switch [OC1-Rtype] when the
definite-time-reset characteristic is preferred. The definite-time-reset is available
in all IDMTs (see Table 2.5-5). After that, the user should set an intentional delay
reset time for the setting [TOC1R].
‡Note:The user should set DEF for the scheme switch [OC1-Rtype] when the IEC and the
UK standards are selected.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 124 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 2.5-6 Inverse-time-reset characteristics curves
Figure 2.5-7 illustrates the effect of inverse-time-reset on the internal time delay counter.
An object current (I), where I is greater than a setting (Is) provides an energizing quantity for
the function which continues to flow for a cumulative period causing the operation of the
function. If the operating quantity falls below the Is setting, the function will return to its
reset state after the time t(I). The time t(I) is calculated using Equation (2.5-2).
start time disengaging time

Energizing
quantity I > Is
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator
Value of internal
time delay counter
(integrator)
tr reset time setting

(with I=0, TMS=1)
reset time
Figure 2.5-7 Inverse-time-reset characteristics
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 125 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(vi) Reset time of DT

In the DT characteristic, the reset time is designed to be instant. Thus, the user has no points
for the settings [OC1-Rtype] and [TOC1R].
(vii) Summary of OC operation

Table 2.5-5 shows the summary of OC operation.
Table 2.5-5 Type and standard board in the OC1 (A tick shows a selectable function)
IDMT
Characteristics DT
IEC-NI IEC-VI IEC-EI UK-LTI IEEE-MI IEEE-VI IEEE-EI US-CO2 US-CO8 Original
DT 
IEC-NI ✓
Scheme switch [OC1-Type]
IEC-VI ✓
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DEF N.A ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
Scheme switch
N.A
[OC1-Rtype]
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
DEP
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
2.5.3 Threshold value for operation

The value of threshold current at which the OC element will pick-up is configured by settings;
the settings [OC1-IDMT] and [OC1-DT] are provided for both the IDMT and DT characteristics.
Note that the settings of the threshold levels are allowed to have distinct values in the
respective OC elements. A rating current for the input is defined either 1A or 5A; the input
rating is defined on a VCT. (For more information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical
description: Transformer module for AC analogue input).
2.5.4 Reset Ratio

The ratio of the threshold current for pick-up to reset is applied using a setting; for example,
the ratio for the OC1 element is set using the setting [OC1-DPR]. The reset ratios for the
other OC elements are also provided.
2.5.5 Miscellaneous functions

(i) Trip mode
Every OC element has a selectable tripping mode; the mode is selected using a scheme switch.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 126 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
For the OC1 element, for example, a scheme switch [OC1-OPMD] is provided. When a trip is
required for any faults that are detected, 3POR (a fault occurs in one or more phases) is set for
the scheme switch [OC1-OPMD]. Conversely, when a trip is only required for faults that occur
in two or more phases, 2OUTOF3 (a fault occurs in two or more phases) is set for the scheme
switch [OC1-OPMD].
Table 2.5-6 Fault type and tripping mode
Fault type Setting [OC1-OPMD]
Phase-A Phase-B Phase-C 3POR 2OUTOF3
X – – ✓ No trip
– X – ✓ No trip
– – X ✓ No trip
X X – ✓ ✓
– X X ✓ ✓
X – X ✓ ✓
X X X ✓ ✓
Note: A tick (✓) indicates that a trip is issued when faults are detected.
A mark (X) indicates the occurrence of a fault on a particular phase. A mark
shown thus (–) indicates that no fault has occurred on that particular phase.
(ii) Blocking OC by ICD

The operation of each OC element can be blocked if the ICD function detects a second
harmonic current caused by the magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when a
transformer is energized. For example, for the OC1 element, the scheme switch
[OC1-2fBlk] is provided, and Block-3P should be set when the user wishes to block all
three-phases of the OC1 element when the second harmonic associated with the
magnetizing inrush current is present. Alternatively, Block-PerP is set if blocking is just
required for a single phase concerting to the phenomenon. Non is set for the scheme
switch [OC1-2fBlk] as the default setting. For more information about the ICD function,
see Chapter Relay application: Inrush current detection function.
(iii) Blocking OC by VTF

The operation of the OC element can be blocked by the voltage transformer failure (VTF)
function via a scheme switch. For example, Block can be set for the scheme switch
[OC1-VTFBlk] to block the operation of the OC1 element during a VTF condition. Non is
set for the scheme switch [OC1-VTFBlk] as a default. For more information about the VTF,
see Chapter Relay application: VT failure detection.
(iv) OC operation for auto-reclose

The OC element activates the auto-reclose (ARC) function. However, if for example ARC
is not required, Block is set for the scheme switch [OC1-ARCBlk]. Block is set for the
scheme switch [OC1-ARCBlk] as a default.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 127 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(v) Signal of OC trip

When a user requires an alarm signal in place of the trip signal; for example, set Alarm
for the scheme switch [OC1-UseFor]. Trip is set for the scheme switch [OC1-UseFor] for
the normal trip operation.
2.5.6 Scheme logic

The scheme logic for both the non-directional and the directional OC1 element is illustrated in
Figure 2.5-8; Figure 2.5-9 shows grouping commands for the trip circuit (TRC). Each phase of
the OC1 element issues a pick-up when a current has been exceeded over the setting; then the
pick-up signal is transferred to into the TRC as trip signals. (For more information, see
Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit function)
8100011B60
≥1
OC1-OR†
8100011B61
≥1
OC1PU-OR†
For DT characteristic 8000011C20
A TOC1 To Grouping logic

& & & t 0
8100011C21 ≥1
OC1 &
B & & OC1-OPT-AR
& t 0
8200011C22 ≥1
&
C & & & t 0
OC1-OPT-BR
≥1
&
For IDMT characteristic 8000011C24 0.00–300.00s OC1-OPT-CR
≥1
A & & ≥1 & & ≥1
&
8100011C25
OC1 PU B ≥1 &
& & & &
8200011C26
C & & ≥1 & & 8000011B68
& ≥1
& OC1-OPT
OC1-Type DT &
From ICD IEC-NI
ICD-A &
& ≥1 OC1-OPT-TRIP
IEC-VI
3POR
ICD-B IEC-EI &
& ≥1 OC1-OPMD 2OUTOF3 OC1-OPT-ALARM
UK-LTI Trip
ICD-C & ≥1 &
OC1-UseFor OC1-ARC-BLOCK
IEEE-MI Alarm
≥1
IEEE-VI OC1-ARCBlk Block
&
IEEE-EI
US-C02
Block-3P US-C08
OC1-2PBlk
Block-PerP
ORIGINAL
OC1-EN On
From VTF
VTF_DETECT
OC1-VTFBlk Block &
≥1
800001EBB0 OC1_BLOCK
800001EBB4 OC1_INST_OP
Figure 2.5-8 Scheme logic for the OC1

†Note:The presence of ‘OC1-OR’ and ‘OC1PU-OR’ signals depends on the operation
characteristic defined with setting [OC1_Type], as shown in Table 2.5-7.
Table 2.5-7 Signal behaviors of PLC monitoring points ‘OC1-OR’ and ‘OC1PU-OR’
Setting [OC1_Type]
PLC monitoring points
DT IEC-NT,VI,EI, UK-LTI, IEET-MI,VI,EI, US-CO2,CO8, ORIGINAL
OC1-OR ○
1 ○
3
OC1PU-OR ○
2 ○
4
1 :
○ A pick-up signal is generated instantly when the element operates.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 128 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2 :
○ No signal due that the PU element is killed. Use ‘OC1-OR’ in place of this.
3 :
○ A pick-up signal is generated, but delayed with the IDMT characteristic.
4 :
○ A pick-up signal is generated instantly.
From OC1 to OC4 logics To TRC

OC1-OPT-TRIP ≥1 OC-OPT-TRIP
OC2-OPT-TRIP
OC3-OPT-TRIP
OC4-OPT-TRIP
OC1-OPT-ALARM ≥1 OC-OPT-ALARM
OC2-OPT- ALARM
OC3-OPT- ALARM
OC4-OPT- ALARM
OC1-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 OC-ARC-BLOCK
OC2- ARC-BLOCK
OC3- ARC-BLOCK
OC4- ARC-BLOCK
OC1-OPT-AR ≥1 OC-OPT-AR
OC1-OPT-BR OC-OPT-BR
OC1-OPT-CR OC-OPT-CR
OC2-OPT-AR
≥1
OC2-OPT-BR
OC2-OPT-CR
OC3-OPT-AR
≥1
OC3-OPT-BR
OC3-OPT-CR
OC4-OPT-AR
OC4-OPT-BR
OC4-OPT-CR
To Recording
OC1-OPT OC1-OPT
OC2-OPT OC2-OPT
OC3-OPT OC3-OPT
OC4-OPT OC4-OPT
Figure 2.5-9 Grouping logic for TRC/Recording functions
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 129 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.5.7 Setting
Setting of OC (Function ID: 440001)
Default setting
Range
value
Notes
Un
Setting item Contents
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
Common OC-Vpol (1.0) V Polarizing voltage (fixed) -----
OC1 OC1-EN Off / On - OC1 protection enable Off
OC1-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - OC1 directional characteristic NonDir
OC1-Angle 0 – 180 deg OC1 directional characteristic angle 45

DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
OC1-Type - OC1 delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OC1-DT 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A OC1 threshold (in DT mode) 1.00 5.00
OC1-IDMT 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A OC1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 1.00 5.00
OC1-DPR 10 – 100 % OC1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOC1 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
OC1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier for IEC inverse curve 1.000
OC1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier for UK inverse curve 1.000
OC1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier for IEEE inverse curve 1.000
OC1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier for US inverse curve 1.000
OC1 time multiplier for user-defined
OC1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
‘Original’ inverse curve
OC1-Rtype DEF / DEP - OC1 reset delay type DEF
TOC1R 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 definite time reset delay 0.00
OC1 dependent reset time multiplier for
OC1-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OC1 dependent reset time multiplier for US
OC1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
OC1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-2fBlk Non / Block-3P / Block-PerP - OC1 operation block by 2f-detection Non
OC1-VTFBlk Non / Block - OC1 operation block by VTF Non
OC1-OPMD 3POR / 2OUTOF3 - OC1 operation mode 3POR
OC1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - OC1 used for trip or alarm Trip
OC1-ARCBlk Non / Block - Autoreclose block by OC1 Block
OC2-Angle 0 – 180 deg OC2 directional characteristic angle 45

Original
OC2-DPR 10 - 100 % OC2 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 130 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Default setting
Range
value
Notes
Un
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
OC2-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
OC2-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OC2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
user-defined ‘Original’ inverse curve
OC2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC2 user-defined ‘original’ curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC2 user-defined ‘original’ curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC2 user-defined ‘original’ curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC2 user-defined ‘original’ curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC2 user-defined ‘original’ curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-ARCBlk Non / Block - Auto-reclose block by OC2 Block
OC3-Angle 0 - 180 deg OC3 directional characteristic angle 45

Original
OC3-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
OC3-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OC3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 131 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Default setting
Range
value
Notes
Un
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
OC3-ARCBlk Non / Block - Autoreclose block by OC3 Block
OC4-Angle 0 - 180 deg OC4 directional characteristic angle 45

Original
OC4-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
OC4-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OC4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC4-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
OC4-ARCBlk Non / Block - Auto-reclose block by OC4 Block
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 132 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.5.8 Data ID
 Signal monitoring points
OC(Function ID: 440001)
8000011C20 OC1-A OC1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 OC1-B OC1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 OC1-C OC1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000011B60 OC1-OR OC1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000011C24 OC1PU-A OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100011C25 OC1PU-B OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200011C26 OC1PU-C OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000011B61 OC1PU-OR OC1 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000011B62 OC1-OPT-A OC1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100011B63 OC1-OPT-B OC1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200011B64 OC1-OPT-C OC1 protection operated (phase-C)
8000011B68 OC1-OPT OC1 protection operated
8600021C22 OC2-C OC2 relay element operated (phase-C)
8600021C26 OC2PU-C OC2 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8600021B64 OC2-OPT-C OC2 protection operated (phase-C)
8A00031C22 OC3-C OC3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00031C26 OC3PU-C OC3 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00031B64 OC3-OPT-C OC3 protection operated (phase-C)
8C00041C20 OC4-A OC4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00041C21 OC4-B OC4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00041C22 OC4-C OC4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00041C24 OC4PU-A OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00041C25 OC4PU-B OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00041C26 OC4PU-C OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 133 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

8C00041B62 OC4-OPT-A OC4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00041B63 OC4-OPT-B OC4 protection operated (phase-B)
8E00041B64 OC4-OPT-C OC4 protection operated (phase-C)
 Connection point in PLC logic

800001EBB0 OC1_BLOCK OC1 protection block command
800001EBB4 OC1_INST_OP OC1 protection instant operation command
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 134 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Earth fault protection (EF)

The earth fault protection (EF) function has four stages (elements); each element can have
either a directional characteristic or non-directional characteristic.
To simplify the description, only EF1 is discussed but is applicable to the other EFs;
hence, read the expression for EF1 as EF2, EF3 and EF4 at each EF stage unless a special
explanation or instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 135 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

The user can choose either non-directional EF or directional EF for each EF stage. In addition,
the user can further select either the forward or the direction for each of the directional EF
elements selected.
(i) Characteristic of non-directional EF

The characteristic of the non-directional type EF function is a circle at the origin. A setting
and a scheme switch is used to configure each non-directional EF element; i.e., the user can
set the threshold value of the non-directional EF element for stage1 using setting [EF1-DT],
provided time characteristic is required for define time delay (DT) described in section 2.6.2(i).
The user should set NonDir for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir].
(ii) Characteristic of directional-EF in the forward direction

As shown in Figure 2.6-1, the characteristic of the directional-EF elements in the forward
region of the directional-EF element.
θ Polarizing voltage (−3Vo)
φ
Figure 2.6-1 Characteristic of the directional-EF element in the forward direction

Note: Directional characteristic angle (θ) forms the angle between the reference quantity
and the directional characteristic angle line. The half plane represents the zone of
operation bordered on one side by the border line and extending in the direction
that contains both the reference (polarizing) and operating quantities.
A setting and a scheme switch, as well as the non-directional EF element, provide the
settings for the directional EF element. For example, the user can set the threshold value (IEF)
for stage 1 with the setting [EF1-DT]; Forward can be set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir].
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 136 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting of the sensing angle (θ) is configured by the setting [EF1-Angle] with the value of θ set
in the range of 0–180°. Figure 2.6-2 shows an example of an angle and a characteristic using
the θ.
The operation of the EF element is based upon the following equation.

3𝐼0 ≥ 𝐼𝐸𝐹 (2.6-1)
3𝐼0 × cos(φ − θ) ≥ 0 (2.6-2)
3𝑉0 ≥ 𝐸𝐹_𝑉𝑝𝑜𝑙 (2.6-3)
where
3Io = residual current
3Vo = residual voltage
−3Vo = reference voltage (or polarizing voltage)
φ= lagging angle
θ = EF setting angle
IEF = Setting value of the EF element ([EF1-DT] and the others)
EF_Vpol = Setting value of the polarizing voltage ([EF-Vpol])
Note: In the case of an internal fault, the phase angle is equal to the angle of the
zero-sequence impedance of the system, in a directly-earthed system this value is
in the range of approximately 50° to 90°. The sensing angle θ of the EF element can
be set between 0° to 180°. The minimum voltage necessary to maintain
directionality can be set from 0.5 to 100.0 V.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 137 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Reverse
−3Vo −3Vo −3Vo
θ=30°
θ=90°
Angle line
Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
−3Vo −3Vo
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
(iii) Characteristic of directional EF in the reverse direction

scheme switch, in addition to providing the setting of the directional EF element in the
forward direction, provides the setting of the directional EF element in the reverse direction:
for example, Reverse is set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir] when the direction of the EF
element for stage 1 is considered.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 138 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.6.2 Inverse time and definite time delay characteristic

The EF element monitors the earth-fault currents; when one of the currents is beyond the
threshold for the operation, the EF element will operate within a period that is defined by the
time characteristic feature. The user can choose the EF operate time delay characteristics,
either dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay (i.e., IDMT) or independent (definite)
time characteristic delay (i.e., DT). The operate time of the IDMT depends upon the level of
the energizing current, and the operate time in the DT is a constant.
For the reset time delay in the IDMT, either inverse(dependent)-time-reset or

definite(independent)-time-reset is characterized by the setting.
The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the EF
element by setting a scheme switch. We shall see the scheme switches later.
The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time and is not affected by the
level of current. The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed immediately. The
user can set the operate time using a setting; it is discussed in section (iv).

current. The user can choose the operate time from a preset curve. Ten characteristic curves
are available; i.e. nine pre-installed curves covering IEC, IEEE, US and UK standard
The reset time of the IDMT is user selectable; either inverse-time-reset or

definite-time-reset is selected. For the inverse-time-rest, the user can choose the reset time for
the preset characteristic from six characteristic curves; i.e. IEEE and US standard five
pre-installed characteristic curves and one user original characteristic carver where the user

The dependent time in the IDMT is defined by Equation (2.6-4). (ref IEC 60255-151):
k
𝑡(𝐼) = 𝑇𝑀𝑆 × {[ α ] + c} (2.6-4)
(I⁄I ) − 1
s
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 139 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
Is = earth fault current setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curve are defined in Table 2.6-2. In
addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen for
each EF stage. Figure 2.6-3 illustrates these characteristic curves. For example, the user
should set one for the scheme switches [EF1-Type]. (That is, “IEC-NI” is for IEC Normal
Inverse, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very Inverse, “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse, “UK-LTI” for UK
Long Time Inverse, “IEEE-MI “ for IEEE Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse,
“IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 short time inverse, “US-CO8”
for US CO8 inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.)
In the IDMT operation, the user can also program the characteristic using
time-multiplier-setting (TMS) for the required operate time. For example, the IEC
characteristic is selected, the user can set the TMS value using the setting [EF1-TMS-IEC]
(incidentally, the default value of the TMS is 1.00). The other TMSs are also available by the
[EF1-TMS-UK], [EF1-TMS-IEEE], [EF1-TMS-US] and [EF1-TMS-ORG].
Curve type
Curve Description k α c
(IEC 60255-151)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 140 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 2.6-3 IDMT Characteristics curves

Time characteristic
The user should set DT for the scheme switch [EF1-Type]. The value of the required operate
time is set for the setting [TEF1] in the range 0.00–300.00s.
The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TEF1], but the
instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal ‘1(High)” is programmed to be
injected at the PLC connection point “EF1_INST_OP”.
(v) Reset time for IDMT

and original (user-programmable) dependent time characteristic†. In the IEEE standard, for
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 141 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
example, the user should set DEP for the scheme switch [EF1-Rtype]. The following equation
defines the reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic (ref. IEC 60255-151):
kr
𝑡(I) = 𝑅𝑇𝑀𝑆 × [ β
] (2.6-2)
1 − (I⁄I )
s
where:
zero
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting.
For setting the RTMS for the IEEE standard, the user can use setting [EF1-RTMS-IEEE]
(incidentally, the default value is 1.000). Similarly, settings [EF1-RTMS-US] and
[EF1-RTMS-ORG] are provided for the US standard and the original, respectively (For more
information w.r.t the values for the kr and β, see Table 2.6-3; Figure 2.6-4 shows the
characteristic curves).

Curve Type kr
Curve Description β
IEC 60255-151 sec
†Note:DEF is set for scheme switch [EF1-Rtype] when the definite-time-reset
characteristic is preferred. The definite-reset-time characteristic is available in all
IDMTs characteristic (See Table 2.6-4). After that, the user should set an
intentional delay reset time for the setting [TEF1R].
‡Note:The user should set DEF for scheme switch [EF1-Rtype] when the IEC and the UK
standard is selected.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 142 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 2.6-5 illustrates the effect of invers-time-reset on the internal time delay counter.
An object current (I), where I is greater than a setting (IS) provides an energizing quantity for
function. If the operating quantity falls below the value of IS setting, the function will return
to its reset state after time t(I). Time t(I) is calculated using equation (2.6-2).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 143 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Energizing
quantity I > Is
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator
Value of internal
time delay counter
(integrator)

(with I=0, TMS=1)
reset time

for settings [EF1-Rtype] and [TEF1R].
(vii) Summary of EF operation

Table 2.6-4 shows a summary for EF operation.
Table 2.6-4 Type and standard board in the EF (A tick represents a selectable function)
IDMT
Characteristics DT
DT 
IEC-NI ✓
Scheme switch [EF1-Type]
IEC-VI ✓
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DEF N.A ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
Scheme switch
N.A
[EF1-Rtype]
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
DEP
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 144 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.6.3 Threshold level for operation

The value of threshold current at which the EF (IEF) element will pick-up is configured by
settings; the settings [EF1-IDMT] and [EF1-DT] are provided for both the IDMT and the DT
characteristic. Note that the settings of the threshold levels are allowed to have distinct
values in the respective EF elements. A rating current for the input is defined either 1A or 5A;
the input rating is defined on a VCT. (For more information about the VCT, see Chapter
Technical description: Transformer module for AC analogue input).
2.6.4 Reset Ratio

the ratio for the EF1 element is set using the setting [EF1-DPR]. The reset ratios for the other
EF elements are also provided.

(i) Blocking EF by ICD
The operation of each EF element can be blocked if the ICD function detects a second
harmonic current caused by the magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when a transformer
is energized. For example, for the EF1 element, the scheme switch [EF1-2fBlk] is provided,
and Block should be set when the user wishes to block the EF1 element when the second
harmonic associated with magnetizing inrush is present. Non is set for the scheme switch
[EF1-2fBlk] as the default setting. For more information about the ICD function, see Chapter
Relay application: Inrush current detection function.
(ii) Blocking EF by VTF

The operation of the EF element can be blocked by the voltage transformer failure (VTF)
function via a scheme switch. For example, Block is set for the scheme switch [EF1-VTFBlk] to
block the operation of the EF1 element during a VTF condition. Non is set for the scheme
switch [EF1-VTFBlk] as a default.
(iii) Blocking EF by CTF

The operation of the EF element can be blocked by the current transformer failure (CTF)
function via a scheme switch. For example, Block is set for the scheme switch [EF1-CTFBlk] to
block the operation of the EF1 element during a CTF condition. Non is set for the scheme
switch [EF1-CTFBlk] as a default.
(iv) EF operation for autoreclose

The EF element activates the auto-reclose (ARC) function. However, if ARC is not required,
Block is set for the scheme switch [EF1-ARCBlk]. Block is set for the scheme switch
[EF1-ARCBlk] as a default.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 145 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(v) Signal of EF trip

When a user requires an alarm signal in place of the trip signal; for example, set Alarm for the
scheme switch [EF1-UseFor]. Trip is set for the scheme switch [EF1-UseFor] for the normal
trip operation.
2.6.6 Scheme logic

The scheme logic for both the non-directional and the directional EF1 element is illustrated in
Figure 2.6-6; Figure 2.6-7 shows grouping commands for the trip circuit (TRC). The EF1
signal is generated when the pickup current exceeds a threshold, and then trip signals are
injected into the TRC. (For more information, see Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit
function)
8000011C23
EF1†
8000011C27
For DT characteristic EF1-PU†
EF1 TEF1
&
8000011B60 To Grouping logic
& &
t 0
For IDMT characteristic ≥1 EF1-OPT

0.00-300.00s
EF1 PU &
&
≥1 &
&
From ICD & EF1-OPT-TRIP
EF1_Type DT
Trip
ICD-OR
& EF1-Usefor
IEC-NI & EF1-OPT-ALARM
EF1-2PBlk Alarm
IEC-VI
Block
IEC-EI EF1-ARCBlk
EF1-EN Block & EF1-ARC-BLOCK
On UK-LTI
From VTF
VTF_DETECT IEEE-MI
&
EF1-VTFBlk IEEE-VI
From CTF Block IEEE-EI

≥1 1
CTF_DETECT & US-C02
EF1-CTFBlk
US-C08
Block
ORIGINAL
800001EBBO EF1_BLOCK
800001EBB1 EF1_INST_OP
Figure 2.6-6 Scheme logic for the EF1

†Note:The presence of ‘EF1’ and ‘EF1PU’ signals depends on the operation characteristic
defined with setting [EF1_Type], as shown in Table 2.5-7.
Table 2.6-5 Signal behaviors of PLC monitoring points ‘EF1’ and ‘EF1PU’
Setting [EF1_Type]
EF1-OR ○
1 ○
3
EF1PU-OR ○
2 ○
4
1 :
2 :
○ No signal due that the PU element is killed. Use ‘EF1’ in place of this.
3 :
4 :
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 146 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
From EF1 to EF4 logics

To TRC
EF1-OPT-TRIP ≥1 EF-OPT-TRIP
EF2-OPT-TRIP
EF3-OPT-TRIP
EF4-OPT-TRIP
EF1-OPT-ALARM ≥1 EF-OPT-ALARM
EF2-OPT- ALARM
EF3-OPT- ALARM
EF4-OPT- ALARM
EF1-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 EF-ARC-BLOCK
EF2- ARC-BLOCK
EF3- ARC-BLOCK
EF4- ARC-BLOCK To Recording
EF1-OPT EF1-OPT
EF2-OPT EF2-OPT
EF3-OPT EF3-OPT
EF4-OPT EF4OPT
Figure 2.6-7 Grouping logic for TRC/Recording
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 147 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.6.7 Setting
Setting of EF(Function ID: 441001)
Default setting
Range
value
Notes
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
The polarizing voltage level of EF
Common EF-Vpol 0.5 - 100.0 V 3.0
directional characteristic
EF1 EF1-EN Off / On - EF1 protection enable Off
EF1-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - EF1 directional characteristic NonDir
EF1-Angle 0 - 180 deg EF1 directional characteristic angle 45

EF1-Type - EF1 delay type DT
Original
EF1-DT 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A EF1 threshold (in DT mode) 0.30 1.50
EF1-IDMT 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A EF1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.30 1.50
EF1-DPR 10 - 100 % EF1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TEF1 0.00 - 300.00 s EF1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
EF1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1.000
EF1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1.000
EF1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse
EF1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier of US inverse curve 1.000
EF1 time multiplier of Original inverse
EF1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF1-Rtype DEF / DEP - EF1 reset delay type DEF
TEF1R 0.00 - 300.00 s EF1 definite time reset delay 0.00
EF1 dependent reset time multiplier of
EF1-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
EF1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
US inverse curve
EF1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
EF1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-2fBlk Non / Block - EF1 operation block by 2f-detection Non
EF1-VTFBlk Non / Block - EF1 operation block by VTF Non
EF1-CTFBlk Non / Block - EF1 operation block by CTF Non
EF1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - EF1 used for trip or alarm Trip
EF1-ARCBlk Non / Block - Autoreclose block by EF1 Block

Original
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 148 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Default setting
Range
value
Notes
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
EF2-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF2-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF2-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
EF2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
US inverse curve
EF2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000

Original
EF3-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF3-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF3-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
EF3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
US inverse curve
EF3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 149 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Default setting
Range
value
Notes
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating

Original
EF4-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF4-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF4-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
EF4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
US inverse curve
EF4-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 150 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.6.8 Data ID
EF(Function ID: 441001)
8000011C23 EF1 EF1 relay element operated
8000011C27 EF1PU EF1 relay operation level pick up
8000011B60 EF1-OPT EF1 protection operated

EF(Function ID: 440001)
800001EBB0 EF1_BLOCK EF1 protection block command
800001EBB1 EF1_INST_OP EF1 protection instantaneous operation command
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 151 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection (OCN) function has both time characteristic and
directional elements. Four stages (elements) are available in the OCN function. The user can
select various features using the scheme switches provided. The elements are named OCN1,
OCN2, and others; and they operate independently.
To simplify the description, only OCN1 is discussed but is applicable to the other OCNs;
hence, read the expression for OCN1 as OCN2, OCN3, and OCN4 at each stage unless a
special explanation or instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 152 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

The user can choose either non-directional OCN or directional OCN for each OCN stage. In
addition, the user can further select either the forward or the direction for each of the
directional OCN elements selected.
(i) Characteristic of a non-directional OCN

The characteristic of the non-directional type (non-directional OCN) is a circle at the origin. A
setting and a scheme switch is used to configure each non-directional OCN element; i.e., the
user can set the threshold value of non-directional OCN element for state 1 using setting
[OCN1-DT], provided time characteristic is required for define time delay (DT) described in
section 2.7.2(i). NonDir is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-Dir].
(ii) Characteristic of directional OCN in the forward

As shown in Figure 2.7-1, the characteristic of the directional-OCN elements in the forward
region of the directional-OCN.
θ Polarizing voltage (−V2)
φ
I2
Figure 2.7-1 Characteristic of the directional-OCN element in the forward direction

Note: Directional characteristic angle (θ) forms the angle between the reference
quantity and the directional characteristic angle line. The half plane
represents the zone of operation bordered on one side by the border line and
extending in the direction that contains both the reference (polarizing) and
operating quantities.
A setting and a scheme switch, as well as the non-directional OCN element, provide the
settings for the directional OCN element: for example, the user can set the threshold value
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 153 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(IOCN) for stage 1 with the setting [OCN1-DT] and Forward can be set for the scheme switch
[OCN1-Dir]. Setting of the sensing angle (θ) is configured by the setting [OCN1-Angle] with
the value of θ in the range of 0–180°. Figure 2.7-2 shows an example of an angle and a
characteristic using the θ.
The operation decision of OCN uses the following equation:
𝐼2 ≥ 𝐼𝑂𝐶𝑁 (2.7-1)
𝐼2 × cos(φ − θ) ≥ 0 (2.7-2)
𝑉2 ≥ 𝑂𝐶𝑁_𝑉𝑝𝑜𝑙 (2.7-3)
where
I2 = Negative phase sequence current
V2 = Negative phase sequence voltage
−V2 = reference voltage (or polarizing voltage)
Φ = lagging angle
θ = OCN setting angle ([OCN1-Angle])
IOCN = Setting value of OCN ([OCN1-DT] and the others])
OCN_Vpol = Setting value of the polarizing voltage ([OCN-Vpol])
Note: The phase angle in the event of an internal fault is equal to the angle of the
zero-sequence impedance of the system; this value ranges approximately from 50°
to 90°. The θ of OCN can be set from 0° to 180°. The minimum voltage necessary to
maintain directionality can be set from 0.5 to 180 V.
Reverse
Vpol Vpol Vpol
θ=30°
θ=90°
Angle line
Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
Vpol Vpol
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 154 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) Characteristic of directional OCN in the reverse

scheme switch, in addition to providing the setting of the directional OCN element in the
forward direction, provides the setting of the directional EF element in the reverse direction:
for example, Reverse is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-Dir] when the direction of the OCN
element for stage 1 is considered.
2.7.2 Inverse time and definite time delay characteristic

The OCN element monitors the negative-sequence current; when the negative-sequence
current is beyond the threshold for the operation, the OCN element will operate within a
period that is defined by the time characteristic feature. The user can choose the one of the
operate time delay characteristics: (i) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay (i.e.,
IDMT) or (ii) independent (definite) time characteristic delay (i.e., DT). The operate time of
the IDMT depends upon the level of the negative-sequence current, whereas the operate time
in the DT is a constant.
For the reset time delay in the IDMT, either inverse (dependent)-time-reset or
definite(independent)-time-reset is characterized by the setting.
The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the OCN
element using scheme switches. We shall see the scheme switches later.
The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time; it is not affected by the level
of the negative-sequence current. The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed
immediately. The user can set the operate time using a setting; it is discussed in sections (iv).

current. The user can choose the operate time from a preset curve. Ten characteristic curves
are available; i.e. nine pre-installed curves covering IEC, IEEE, US and UK standard
The reset time of the IDMT is also user-selectable; either inverse-time-reset or

definite-time-reset is selected. For the inverse-time-rest, the user can choose the reset time for
the preset characteristic from six characteristic curves; i.e. IEEE and US standard five
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 155 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
pre-installed characteristic curves and one user-original characteristic carver where the user

The dependent time in the IDMT is defined by Equation (2.7-4). (ref IEC 60255-151):
k
𝑡(𝐼) = 𝑇𝑀𝑆 × {[ α ] + c} (2.7-4)
(I⁄I ) − 1
s
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curve are tabulated in Table 2.7-2;
additionally, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen
for each OCN stage by setting. Figure 2.7-3 illustrates these characteristic curves. For
example, the user should set one for the scheme switch [OCN1-Type]: “IEC-NI” for IEC Normal
Inverse, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very Inverse, “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse, “UK-LTI” for UK
Long Time Inverse, “IEEE-MI “ for IEEE Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse,
“IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 short time inverse, “US-CO8”
for US CO8 inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.
In the IDMT operation, the user can also program the characteristic using
time-multiplier-setting (TMS) for the required operate time. For example, when the IEC
characteristic is selected, the user can set the TMS value using the setting [OCN1-TMS-IEC]
(incidentally, the default value of the TMS is 1.00). The other TMSs are also available by the
[OCN1-TMS-UK], [OCN1-TMS-IEEE], [OCN1-TMS-US] and [OCN1-TMS-ORG].
Curve type
Curve Description k α c
(IEC 60255-151)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 156 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 2.7-3 IDMT Characteristics curves

Time characteristic
The user should set DT for the scheme switch [OCN1-Type]. The value of the required operate
time is set for the setting [TOCN1] in the range 0.00–300.00s.
The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TOCN1], but
the instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal “1 (High)” is programmed to
be injected at PLC connection point “OCN1_INST_OP”.
(v) Reset time of IDMT

and original (user-programmable) dependent time characteristic†. In the IEEE standard, for
example, the user should set DEP for the scheme switch [OCN1-Rtype]. The following
equation defines the reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic (ref. IEC 60255-151):
kr
𝑡(I) = 𝑅𝑇𝑀𝑆 × [ β
] (2.7-2)
1 − (I⁄I )
s
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 157 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
where:
zero
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting.
For setting the RTMS for the IEEE standard, the user can use setting
[OCN1-RTMS-IEEE] (incidentally, the default value is 1.000). Similarly, settings
[OCN1-RTMS-US] and [OCN1-RTMS-ORG] are provided for the US standard and the original,
respectively (For more information w.r.t the values for kr and β, see Table 2.7-3; Figure 2.7-4
shows the characteristic curves).
Curve Type kr β
Curve Description
IEC 60255-151 (sec)
†Note:The user can set DEF for scheme switch [OCN1-Rtype] when the
definite-time-reset characteristic is preferred. The definite-reset-time
characteristic is available in all IDMT characteristics (see Table 2.7-4). After that,
the user should set an intentional delay reset time for the setting [TOCN1R].
‡Note:The user should set DEF is for scheme switch [OCN1-Rtype] when the IEC and the
UK standards are selected.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 158 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Figure 2.7-5 illustrates the effect of invers-time-reset on the internal time delay counter.
An object current (I), where I is greater than a setting (IS) provides an energizing quantity for
function. If the operating quantity falls below the value of the IS, the function will return to its
reset state after time t(I), which is calculated using Equation (2.7-2).

Energizing
quantity I > Is
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator
Value of internal
time delay counter
(integrator)

(with I=0, TMS=1)
reset time
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 159 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

for the settings [OC1-Rtype] and [TOC1R].
(vii) Summary of OCN operation

Table 2.7-4 shows a summary for OCN operation.
Table 2.7-4 Type and standard board in the OCN1 (A tick represents a selectable function)
IDMT
Characteristics DT
DT 
IEC-NI ✓
Scheme switch [OCN1-Type]
IEC-VI ✓
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DEF N.A ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
Scheme switch
N.A
[OCN1-Rtype]
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
DEP
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
2.7.3 Threshold value

The value of threshold current at which the OCN (I2) element will pick-up is configured by
settings; the settings [OCN1-IDMT] and [OCN1-DT] are provided for both the IDMT and the
DT characteristic. Note that the settings of the threshold levels are allowed to have distinct
values in the respective OCN elements. A rating current for the input is defined either 1A or
5A; the input rating is defined on a VCT. (For more information about the VCT, see Chapter
Technical description: Transformer module for AC analogue input).
2.7.4 Reset Ratio

the ratio for the OCN1 element is set using the setting [OCN1-DPR]. The reset ratios for the
other OCN elements are also provided.

(i) Harmonic detection
The operation of each OCN element can be blocked using a scheme switch, if the ICD function
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 160 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
detects a second harmonic current caused by the magnetizing inrush current phenomenon
when a transformer is energized. For example, for the OCN1 element, the scheme switch
[OCN1-2fBlk] is provided, and Block should be set when the user wishes to block the OCN1
element when the second harmonic associated with magnetizing inrush is present. Non is set
for the scheme switch [OCN1-2fBlk] as the default setting. For more information about the
ICD function, see Chapter Relay application: Inrush current detection function.
(ii) Blocking OCN by VTF

The operation of the OCN element can be blocked by the voltage transformer failure (VTF)
function via a scheme switch. For example, Block is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-VTFBlk]
to block the operation of the OCN1 element during a VTF condition. Non is set for the scheme
switch [OCN1-VTFBlk] as a default. For more information about the VTF, see Chapter Relay
application: VT failure detection.
(iii) Blocking OCN by CTF

The operation of the OCN element can be blocked by the current transformer failure (CTF)
function via a scheme switch. For example, Block should be set for the scheme switch
[OCN1-CTFBlk] to block the operation of the OCN1 element during a CTF condition. Non is
set for the scheme switch [OCN1-CTFBlk] as a default. For more information about the CTF,
see Chapter Relay application: CT failure detection.
(iv) OCN operation for autoreclose

The OCN element activates the auto-reclose (ARC) function. However, if ARC is not required,
Block is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-ARCBlk]. Block is set for the scheme switch
[OCN1-ARCBlk] as a default.
(v) Signal of OCN trip

When a user requires an alarm signal in place of the trip signal; for example, set Alarm for the
scheme switch [OCN1-UseFor]. Trip is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-UseFor] for the
normal trip operation.
2.7.6 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of both the non-directional and the directional OCN1 is illustrated in Figure
2.7-6; Figure 2.7-7 shows grouping commands for the trip circuit (TRC). The OCN1 signal is
generated when the pickup current exceeds a threshold, and then trip signals are injected into
the TRC. (For more information, see Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit function)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 161 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8000011C23
OCN1†
8000011C27
For DT characteristic OCN1PU†
OCN1 TOCN1
&
8000011B60 To Grouping logic
& &
t 0
For IDMT characteristic ≥1 OCN1-OPT

0.00-300.00s
OCN1 PU &
&
≥1 &
From ICD &
& OCN1-OPT-TRIP
OCN1_TYPE DT
TRIP
ICD-OR
& OCN1-USEFOR
IEC-NI & OCN1-OPT-ALARM
OCN1-2PBlk ALARM
IEC-VI
Block
IEC-EI OCN1-ARCBLK
OCN1-EN BLOCK & OCN1-ARC-BLOCK
ON UK-LTI
From VTF
IEEE-MI
VTF_DETECT &
IEEE-VI
OCN1-VTFBLK BLOCK
≥1
From CTF IEEE-EI
CTF_DETECT & US-C02
OCN1-CTFBLK BLOCK US-C08
ORIGINAL
800001EBBO OCN1_BLOCK
800001EBB1 OCN1_INST_OP
Figure 2.7-6 Scheme logic of OCN1

†Note:The presence of ‘OCN1’ and ‘OCN1PU’ signals depends on the operation
characteristic defined with setting [OCN1_Type], as shown in Table 2.5-7.
Table 2.7-5 Signal behaviors of PLC monitoring points ‘OCN1’ and ‘OCN1PU’
Setting [OCN1_Type]
OCN1-OR ○
1 ○
3
OCN1PU-OR ○
2 ○
4
1 :
2 :
○ No signal due that the PU element is killed. Use ‘OCN1’ in place of this.
3 :
4 :
From OCN1 to OCN4 logics

To TRC
OCN1-OPT-TRIP ≥1 OCN-OPT-TRIP
OCN2-OPT-TRIP
OCN3-OPT-TRIP
OCN4-OPT-TRIP
OCN1-OPT-ALARM ≥1 OCN-OPT-ALARM
OCN2-OPT- ALARM
OCN3-OPT- ALARM
OCN4-OPT- ALARM
OCN1-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 OCN-ARC-BLEFK
OCN2- ARC-BLOCK
OCN3- ARC-BLOCK
OCN4- ARC-BLOCK To Recording
OCN1-OPT OCN1-OPT
OCN2-OPT OCN2-OPT
OCN3-OPT OCN3-OPT
OCN4-OPT OCN4OPT
Figure 2.7-7 Grouping logic for TRC/Recording
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 162 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.7.7 Setting
Setting of OCN(Function ID:443001)
Default
Range
Notes
Un
Setting item Contents setting value
its
The polarizing voltage level of OCN
OCN Common OCN-Vpol 0.5 - 25.0 V 3.0
directional characteristic
OCN1 OCN1-EN Off / On - OCN1 protection enable Off
OCN1-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - OCN1 directional characteristic NonDir
OCN1-Angle 0 - 180 deg OCN1 directional characteristic angle 45

OCN1-Type - OCN1 delay type DT
Original
OCN1-DT 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A OCN1 threshold (in DT mode) 0.40 2.00
OCN1-IDMT 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A OCN1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 2.00
OCN1-DPR 10 - 100 % OCN1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOCN1 0.00 - 300.00 s OCN1 operating delay time 1.00
OCN1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - OCN1 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1.000
OCN1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - OCN1 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1.000
OCN1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse
OCN1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - OCN1 time multiplier of US inverse curve 1.000
OCN1 time multiplier of Original inverse
OCN1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN1-Rtype DEF / DEP - OCN1 reset delay type DEF
TOCN1R 0.00 - 300.00 s OCN1 definite time reset delay 0.00
OCN1 dependent reset time multiplier of
OCN1-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OCN1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
US inverse curve
OCN1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
OCN1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-2fBlk Non / Block - OCN1 operation block by 2f-detection Non
OCN1-VTFBlk Non / Block - OCN1 operation block by VTF Non
OCN1-CTFBlk Non / Block - OCN1 operation block by CTF Non
OCN1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - OCN1 used for trip or alarm Trip
OCN1-ARCBlk Non / Block - Autoreclose block by OCN1 Block

Original
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 163 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Default
Range
Notes
Un
its
OCN2-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN2-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN2-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OCN2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
US inverse curve
OCN2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000

Original
OCN3-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN3-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN3-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OCN3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
US inverse curve
OCN3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 164 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Default
Range
Notes
Un
its

Original
OCN4-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN4-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN4-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OCN4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
US inverse curve
OCN4-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 165 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.7.8 Data ID
OCN(Function ID: 443001)
8000011C23 OCN1 OCN1 relay element operated
8000011C27 OCN1PU OCN1 relay operation level pick up
8000011B60 OCN1-OPT OCN1 protection operated

OCN(Function ID: 443001)
800001EBB0 OCN1_BLOCK OCN1 protection block command
800001EBB1 OCN1_INST_OP OCN1 protection instant operation command
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 166 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Thermal overload function (THM)

Apparatus such as cables, transformers, generators and others can become overheated when
overloaded beyond their respective design limits due to excessive demands being placed on the
system. The thermal overload function (THM) works by determining the temperature rise in
an item of primary equipment by monitoring the current in order to detect the thermal
overload of the apparatus.
THM has an exponential characteristics in accordance with the IEC 60255-149 standard.
THM determines both the I2R loss and the cooling effect of the coolant simultaneously; THM
also determines the pre-load condition and signals a trip signal when an overload condition
arises.
THM issues a trip signal in accordance with an alarm stage that reflects the
temperature of the thermal overload condition. The alarm stage is configured using a setting;
hence, the user should determine the appropriate setting so that a trip signal can be issued
before the apparatus is overheated
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 167 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.8.1 Thermal state determination

THM simulates the change of thermal state using an algorithm; THM can detect an overload
condition. Thermal state (θ) is determined with the following equation:
𝐼2 −𝑡⁄
θ= 2 (1 − 𝑒 τ) × 100 (%) (2.8-1)
𝐼𝐴𝑂𝐿
where I is the load current applied; IAOL is the allowable overload current;  is the thermal
time constant. The value of  is set using setting [TTHM].
Thermal state 0% is the cold state, whereas 100% reflects the thermal limit—which is
the point at which no further temperature rise can be tolerated safely and the system should
be disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is subject to setting [THM], which
determines the value of overload current. The THM signals a trip when the value of θ is at
100%.
THM determines I using the positive-sequence current (I1) and negative-sequence

current (I2) using Equation (2.8-2); and operates according to the characteristics defined in
IEC 60255-149† when the user has set scheme switch [THM-Ieq] On.
𝐼 = √𝐼12 + 𝑞 × 𝐼22 (2.8-2)
where,
q: Unbalance factor; the unbalance factor is used for motor/generator protection; the
user should set q=0 when setting [THM-q] except when it is applied to
motor/generator protection.
†Note:If the user prefers to use the thermal characteristic for the THM function specified
in IEC 60255-8, set Off for the scheme switch [THM-Ieq]. In this case, THM is
determined using the largest of the three-phase currents.
The period of time for a trip to occur depends not only on the degree of overload, but also
on the degree of load current as far as reaching the overload state. The period of the trip, that
is, depends on whether the overload is applied from ‘cold’ or ‘hot’. THM has thresholds for
alarm and trip; hence, the two thresholds exist independently.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 168 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.8.2 Thermal characteristic

THM characteristics are determined with two equations. Equation (2.8-3) is used to define the
cold state. Equation (2.8-4) is used to define the hot state:
𝐼2
t = τ ∙ Ln [ 2 ] (2.8-3)
𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝐴𝑂𝐿
𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝑃2
t = τ ∙ Ln [ 2 ] (2.8-4)
𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝐴𝑂𝐿
where t is time to trip for a constant overload current of I (minutes), I is the overload current
(largest phase current in amperes), IAOL is the permitted overload current (amperes), Ip is the
pre-load current (amperes), τ is the thermal time constant (minutes), and Ln is the natural
logarithm.
In Equation (2.8-3), cold curves are special versions of the hot curves where Ip is zero,
catering for the situation where a cold system is switched onto an immediate overload.
Figure 2.8-1.a shows the cold state where an overload has been switched onto a
previously un-loaded system. Figure 2.8-1.b shows the hot state where an overload is switched
onto a system that has previously been loaded to 90% of its capacity. The figures are in
conformity with the IEC 60255-149 curves, and these curves are drawn in a range of settings
of the time constant ().
a.Thermal Curves (Cold Curve - no prior load) b. Thermal Curves (Hot Curve - 90% prior load))

100
50
20
10
5
Figure 2.8-1 Thermal curves
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 169 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.8.3 Scheme logic

Figure 2.8-2 shows the scheme logic for THM. THM has two thresholds; threshold “A” is used
for alarming, threshold “T” for tripping. The name of the output signal for the alarm is termed
THM-OPT-ALARM and that of the output signal for tripping is termed “THM-OPT-TRIP”.
The threshold level for the alarm is set using setting [THM-Alarm] as a percentage of the
tripping threshold. The alarm signal is disabled when Off is set for scheme switch [THMA-EN].
The trip signal is prevented when Off is set for scheme switch [THMT-EN]. PLC signals
THMA_BLOCK and THMT_BLOCK are used to block the operation of THM.
8000011C23 8000011B60 8300021B23 To TRC
≥1 THM-OPT-TRIP
A 8100021C23 & & 8100021B60
THM 8400011B23
B THM-OPT-ALARM
&
& &
THMA-EN ON
& THM-ARC-BLOCK
THMT-EN ON
800001EBB0 THMA_BLOCK 1
810002EBB0 THMT_BLOCK 1
Trip
THMA-UseFor
Alarm
Figure 2.8-2 THM Logic
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 170 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.8.4 Setting
Setting of THM(Function ID: 451001)

Default setting
Range
Un value
Setting item Contents Notes
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
THMT-EN Off / On - Thermal protection enable Off
THMA-EN Off / On - Thermal alarm enable Off
THM 0.4 – 2.0 2.0 – 10.0 A Thermal overload current 1.0 5.0
mi
Thermal setting
TTHM 0.5 – 500.0 Thermal time constant 10.0

n
Thermal alarm level multiplier
THM-Alarm 50 – 100 % 80
(Percentage of [THM] setting)
THM-q 0 – 10 - Thermal unbalance factor from I2 0
Thermal equivalent heating current
THM-Ieq Off / On - On
used
TFM-UseFor Trip / Alarm - THM used for trip or alarm Trip
To utilize the setting[THM-IP], and To
Test setting
THM-Test Off / On - change the reset delay to instantaneous Off

reset
0.00 - 0.00 - Previous load current for thermal
THM-IP A 0.00/0.00
1.00 5.00 testing
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 171 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.8.5 Data ID

THM(Function ID: 451001)
8000011C23 THM-A THM relay element operated (Alarm)
8000011B60 THM-ALARM THM protection Alarm signal
8400011B23 THM-OPT-ALARM THM protection operated (Alarm)
8300021B23 THM-OPT-TRIP THM protection operated (Trip)
8100021C23 THM-T THM relay element operated (Trip)
8100021B60 THM-TRIP THM protection Trip signal

THM(Function ID: 451001)
800001EBB0 THMA_BLOCK THM protection for Alarm block command
810002EBB0 THMT_BLOCK THM protection for Trip block command
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 172 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Broken conductor protection (BCD)

A series fault or an open circuit fault can be caused by circuit breaker contact failure, the
operation of fuses, and false operation of single-phase switchgear. IEC60050 defines a series
fault as having impedances in each of three-phases that are not equal; hence, the series fault
is typified by the interruption of one or two phases, as a rule. The function of broken conductor
protection (BCD) is to detect series faults and signal a trip signal to the trip circuit.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 173 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.9.1 Equivalent circuit for a one-phase series fault

Figure 2.9-1 shows the sequence diagram of the network connection when a single-phase
series fault occurs. We can represent the series fault by the positive sequence, negative
sequence and zero sequence impedances; the impedances are distributed to the left and right
as shown in the diagram of the primary circuit below. The ratio of the left to the right is
determined by the fault location such as k1:1-k1, k2:1-k2, and k0:1-k0.
E1A Series or open circuit fault E1B
k1 1– k1
I1F I1F
k1Z1 (1-k1)Z1
E1A
E1B
Positive sequence k2Z2 I2F I2F (1-k2)Z2
Negative sequence k0Z0 I0F I0F

(1-k0)Z0
Zero sequence
I1F
k1Z1 k2Z2 (1-k2)Z2 (1-k1)Z1
K0Z0 (1-k0)Z0
E1A E1B
I1F Z2
Z1
E1A Z0 E1B
Figure 2.9-1 Equivalent circuit for a single-phase fault
The series fault results in positive sequence current (I1F), negative sequence current (I2F)
and zero phase sequence current (I0F) in the single-phase. These are given by
𝐼1𝐹 + 𝐼2𝐹 + 𝐼0𝐹 = 0 (2.9-1)
𝑍2𝐹 𝐼2𝐹 ∙ 𝑍0𝐹 𝐼0𝐹 = 0 (2.9-2)
𝐸1𝐴 ∙ 𝐸1𝐵 = 𝑍1𝐹 𝐼1𝐹 ∙ 𝑍2𝐹 𝐼2𝐹 (2.9-3)
where,
E1A, E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive sequence impedance
Z2: negative sequence impedance
Z0: zero sequence impedance
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 174 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
From Equation (2.9-1), (2.9-2), and (2.9-3), the following equations are derived:
𝑍2 + 𝑍0
𝐼1𝐹 = (𝐸 − 𝐸1𝐵 ) (2.9-4)
𝑍1 𝑍2 + 𝑍1 𝑍0 + 𝑍2 𝑍0 1𝐴
−𝑍0
𝐼2𝐹 = (𝐸 − 𝐸1𝐵 ) (2.9-5)
𝑍1 𝑍2 + 𝑍1 𝑍0 + 𝑍2 𝑍0 1𝐴
−𝑍2
𝐼0𝐹 = (𝐸 − 𝐸1𝐵 ) (2.9-6)
𝑍1 𝑍2 + 𝑍1 𝑍0 + 𝑍2 𝑍0 1𝐴
The magnitude of the fault current depends on the impedance across the system, the
difference in phase angle, and the magnitude between the power source voltages behind both
ends.
As noted earlier, the BCD element detects the presence of a fault by measuring the ratio
between the negative sequence current and the positive sequence current (I2F/I1F). The ratio is
obtained from the negative sequence impedance (Z2) and the zero sequence impedance (Z0);
hence, the equation of the ratio is expressed as follows:
𝐼2𝐹 |𝐼2𝐹 | 𝑍0
= = (2.9-7)
𝐼1𝐹 |𝐼1𝐹 | 𝑍2 + 𝑍0
A ratio value of 0.5 or higher is obtained when the zero sequence impedance is larger
than the negative sequence impedance. The ratio, thus, is close to 1.0 if the system is
high-impedance earthed or a single-end earthed system.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 175 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.9.2 Characteristic and setting

The hatched area of Figure 2.9-2 illustrates the BCD characteristic; the BCD function will
operate when the positive sequence current (I1) is larger than 0.04×In, the negative sequence
current (I2) is larger than 0.01×In, and the ratio |I2/I1| is higher than setting [BCD].
I2
|𝐼2 |
|𝐼1 | ≥ 𝐵𝐶𝐷 𝑠𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔
BCD
|𝐼1 | ≥ 0.04 × 𝐼𝑛 &
|𝐼2 | ≥ 0.01 × 𝐼𝑛
0.01×In
o I1
0.04×In
Figure 2.9-2 Characteristic of BCD

(i) Harmonic detection function
The operation of BCD can be blocked when the IED detects 2nd harmonic caused by the
phenomenon of magnetizing inrush current when a transformer is energized. To block the
operation of the BCD function during the occurrence of the harmonic, set scheme switch
[BCD-2fBlk] Block.
(ii) Block operation of CTF for BCD

The operation of the BCD function can be blocked by the current transformer failure (CTF)
function using a scheme switch. Block is set for scheme switch [BCD-CTFBlk] if the user
wishes to disable the operation of the BCD function when a current transformer failure
occurs.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 176 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.9.4 Scheme logic

Figure 2.9-3 shows the scheme logic for the BCD function. The BCD function issues a trip
signal through a delayed pick-up timer, the value of which is set for [TBCD]. The operation of
the BCD function can be disabled using scheme switch [BCD-EN] Off.
8000001C23
From ICD
BCD
& &
ICD-OR 1
To Recording
BCD-2PBlk & TBCD
+ & t 0 8000001B60
BCD-OPT
BCDEN 0.00 - 300.00s
+
From CTF
On
CTF_DETECT
&
BCD-CTFBlk To TRC
≥1 1 8300001B23
+
Block & BCD-OPT-TRIP
800000EBB0 BCD_BLOCK Trip 8400001B62

BCD-UseFor BCD-OPT-ALARM
Alarm &
+
BCD-ARC-BLOCK
Figure 2.9-3 Broken conductor protection scheme logic
Normal power system levels of negative phase sequence restrict the setting value of
[BCD]. The BCD function continuously determines the ratio (I2F/I1F). User can check the
present ratio along with the maximum value (I21 max) that has been examined for 15 minutes
ago. We recommend that user should distinguish the present ratio against the value on
commissioning stage; and user should set a value for [BCD] from 130% to 150% of the ratio
has been checked.
Note: The ratio (I2F/ I1F) is displayed only when the current in positive-sequence (or load
current) on the secondary circuit is larger than 2% of the rated current on
secondary circuit.
2.9.5 Setting
Setting of BCD(Function ID: 452001)
Un Default setting
Setting item Range Contents Notes
its value
BCD-EN Off / On - BCD protection enable Off

BCD 0.10 - 1.00 - BCD relay operating value (I2/I1) 0.20
TBCD 0.00 - 300.00 s BCD operating delay time 1.00
BCD
BCD-2fBlk Non / Block - BCD operation block by 2f-detection Non
BCD-CTFBlk Non / Block - BCD operation block by CTF Non
BCD-UseFor Trip / Alarm - BCD used for trip or alarm Trip
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 177 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.9.6 Data ID

BCD(Function ID: 452001)
8000001C23 BCD BCD relay element operated
8000001B60 BCD-OPT BCD protection operated

BCD(Function ID: 452001)
800000EBB0 BCD_BLOCK BCD1 protection block command
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 178 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF)

When a circuit breaker (CB) fails to remove a fault as a consequence of the CB failing to open,
the function of circuit breaker fail protection (CBF) is to remove the fault by the back-tripping
of other CBs. For example, if a fault current continues to flow following the issue of a trip
signal, the CBF function determines that a CB failure has occurred and issues another trip
signal to the adjacent CB(s) and/or the upstream CB.
Although a trip signal will have been issued by other protection functions, CBF
protection has relay elements and timers that are used to detect the continuing presence of a
fault following the issuance of a trip signal. The relay elements are termed OCCBF† and
EFCBF†, which run as protection functions within CBF.
†Note:The CBF function consists of two stages and their stages are operated
independently. Thus, the settings/switches/logics for two stages are provided
separately. To simply the description, only settings/switches/logics for the stage 1
are discussed as a representative, but the ones for the stage 2 are applicable in the
CBF function; hence the user can read the expression for the stage 1 as for the
stage 2 unless a special explanation or instructions has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 179 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.10.1 CBF operation and its elements

The operation of CBF is initiated by the operation of OCCBF and EFCBF, which monitors
fault current after the issuance of a trip signal by other protection functions. OCCBF or
EFCBF monitor the fault current so that the CBF feature can determine the failure of the CB
to operate. For CBF, the respective phase currents in three-phase system are monitored by
the OCCBF-A, OCCBF-B and OCCBF-C elements, while the zero-sequence current is
monitored by the EFCBF element.
The operation of these elements is reset if the threshold values of currents, applied by
the setting of [OCCBF1] and [EFCBF1], are below 80% of their setting value.
2.10.2 Re-trip feature

Once a CB failure occurs, the CBF protection would normally issue a back-trip signal to the
adjacent CB(s) and/or the upstream CB. However, the CBF protection is able to issue a
further trip signal to the faulted CB before issuing the back-trip signal. The second trip signal
is termed “re-trip”; “re-trip,” confirms the occurrence of a CB failure. In the event of an
erroneous CBF operation, the use of “re-trip” has the advantage of avoiding the issue of the
back-trip signal to the adjacent CB(s) or the upstream CB. The timing chart for “re-trip” and
back-trip are discussed later. (See Figure 2.10-1)
To enable the “re-trip” feature, set On-AftRe for scheme switch [CBF1-Trip]. There are
two operation modes (internal and external mode) for “re-trip”; the user can select the desired
mode using scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip]:
 Internal mode
If On is set for scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip] the CBF function is armed for issuing a
“re-trip” command. OCCBF and EFCBF control the “re-trip” signal along with trip
signals coming from other functions.
 External mode
When On-T is set for scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip], the CBF function is armed
forissuing a “re-trip” following tripping by external protection functions only. The
external protection functions can operate using PLC connection points in the TRC
function. If external mode is selected, an external CBF start signal must be present
continuously for as long as the fault is present.
For the re-trip operation, On should be set for both scheme switches [OCCBF1] and
[EFCBF1]. When a delay timer is needed for “re-trip”, a setting [TCBF1-RE] is available. A
setting time can be chosen between 0 and 300.000sec, the time setting to be applied must be
determined in accordance with the response time of the CB. The setting time is addressed
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 180 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
later. (section 2.10.5)
One of the benefits of the “re-trip” function is that it can used to avoid accidental
tripping of an adjacent CB or an upstream CB. This is particularly requisite during
maintenance and testing of the system.
Retrip
2.10.3 Backup feature Normal trip
As cited above, “re-trip” issues

Fault a further trip signal so that the CB receives an instruction to
trip again. If “re-trip” cannot remove the fault, CBF will issue a “back-trip” command.
Back-tripping is used as a last resort to remove the fault.
Fault occurence CBF Start Back-trip adjacent CB(s)
Adjacent CB(s) Closed

Open
On
Trip signal
Off Trip signal Trip signal Off
Normal trip Re-trip
Target CB Closed
Toc Tcb
Run
OCCBF element Stop Toc Toc Stop
Timer#1
Start TCBF-RE
Timer#1 (TCBF-RE) Off
On
Operation of Re-trip Off Off
Timer#2
Start TCBF-TP
Timer#2 (TCBF-TP) Off
On
CBF trip signal Off Off
Figure 2.10-1 Timing chart for re-trip and back trip during CBF operation
Figure 2.10-1 is a sequence diagram for the CBF function; the overall sequence
illustrated shows a target CB failing to remove a fault with the consequence that back
tripping of the adjacent CB(s) is required following operation of the CBF protection to finally
clear the fault. The CBF function is initiated via a signal from other protection functions.
If the target CB is tripped normally on receipt of a trip signal so that the fault is
removed, both OCCBF and EFCBF will reset before the time settings of timer #1 and timer #2
have elapsed.
Following the issue of the first trip signal, if either OCCBF or EFCBF were to continue
to operate and if timer #1 were to time out according to the timer setting value [TCBF1-RE], a
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 181 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
“re-trip” command would be issued to the target CB. If the target CB were to open to clear the
fault in response to the “re-trip” command, OCCBF and EFCBF would reset and the CBF
sequence is stopped.
If the target CB were to fail to remove the fault with the “re-trip” command, and if
OCCBF or EFCBF continued to operate and if the timer #2 were to time out in accordance
with the setting time applied [TCBF1-TP], CBF will issue a trip signal to the adjacent CB(s) to
clear the fault, as a last resort.
2.10.4 Scheme logic

Figure 2.10-2 illustrates that the CBF function can issue a trip signal in each phase. A trip
signal will be generated in the trip circuit (TRC) when the trip signal is provided for the TRC
function.
CBF issues trip signals (CBF1-RETRIP) when OCCBF1 and EFCBF1 operate
continuously until expiration of timer settings [TCBF1-RE] and [TCBF1-TP]. Setting
[TCBF1-RE] is overridden when On is set for scheme switch [CBF1-TRIP].
Figure 2.10-2 shows that the CBF will operate with OCCBF1, EFCBF1, and PLC signal
“EXT.CBF-START” (internal mode).
It is possible to run with PLC signal EXT.CBF1-START only. PLC signal

“EXT.CBF1-START” is required. Signal “EXT.CBF1-START” must be present continuously for
as long as the fault is present (external mode).
CBF1_START-A
CBF1_START-B
CBF1_START-C
8000011C20 8000011B20
TCBF1-RE
OCCBF1 A t 0
& CBF1-RETRIP-A
8100011C21 ≥1 & & ≥1 ≥1 8100011B21
B
t 0 CBF1-RETRIP-B
8200011C22 & ≥1 & & 8200011B22
≥1 ≥1
C
t 0
& CBF1-RETRIP-C
≥1 & & ≥1 ≥1
OCCBF-EN ON 0.000-300.000s 8300011B23
8400011C27
& ≥1 CBF1-RETRIP
EFCBF1
&
OCCBF-EN &
ON
From &
TRC GEN.TRIP-A &
≥1
TRC
GEN.TRIP-B
≥1 &
GEN.TRIP-C
≥1 &
OFF
800001EBB0 EXT.CBF1_START-A ON
CBF1-Retrip &
810001EBB1 EXT.CBF1_START-B ON-
T &
820001EBB2 EXT.CBF1_START-C
CBF-EN ON CBF-EN-ON
830001EBB3 EXT.CBF1_START
800001EBB4 CBF1 _BLOCK ≥1 CBF1-NON_BLOCK
810001EBB5 CBF1-RE_INST
Figure 2.10-2 Elements logic in CBF1
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 182 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8800011B24 To TRC
TCBF1-TP
t 0
CBF1_START-A CBF1_RETRIP-A
& ≥1 ≥1 8900011B25
CBF1_START-B t 0
CBF1_RETRIP-B
& ≥1 ≥1 8A00011B26
CBF1_START-C t 0 CBF1_RETRIP-C
& ≥1 ≥1 8B00011B27
0.000-300.000s
CBF1_RETRIP
CBF1-RETRIP-A ≥1
& &
CBF1-RETRIP-B
& &
CBF1-RETRIP-C
OFF & &
ON &
CBF1-Trip ON-AftRe
&
CBF-EN-ON
CBF1-NON_BLOCK
820001EBB6 CBF1-TP_INST
Figure 2.10-3 CBF1 logics (continued from Figure 2.10-2)
2.10.5 Operation timing

The OCCBF and EFCBF elements can check that the target CB has opened normally and that
the fault current has disappeared completely. Because load current is usually present, the
OCCBF and EFCBF settings should be account for between 10% and 200% of the rated
current.
The time settings [TCBF1-RE] and [TCBF1-TP] are determined in relation to the
opening time of the target CB and the reset time of the OCCBF or EFCBF elements (see Toc
and Tcb in Figure 2.10-1). The following description illustrates a setting calculation example
when “re-trip” is used:
Setting of TCBF-RE =Breaker opening time + OCCBF/EFCBF reset time + Margin

=40ms + 10ms + 20ms
=70ms
Setting of TCBF-TP =TCBF-RE + Output relay operating time + Breaker opening time +
OCCBF/EFCBF reset time + Margin
=70ms + 10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 10ms
=140ms
If “re-trip” were to be unused, the setting of [TCBF1-TP] should be the same as the
setting for [TCBF1-RE].
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 183 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.10.6 Setting
Setting of CBF(Function ID: 453001)
Un Default setting
its value
CBF Common CBF-EN Off / On - CBF protection enable Off
Current flow is judged by OC relay

OCCBF-EN Off / On - On
operation
Current flow is judged by EF relay
EFCBF-EN Off / On - Off
operation
OCCBF relay operating level (Current
CBF1 OCCBF1 0.02 - 5.00/0.10 - 25.00 A 1.00/5.00
flow judgment)
EFCBF relay operating level (Current
EFCBF1 0.02 - 5.00/0.10 - 25.00 A 1.00/5.00
flow judgment)
CBF1-Retrip Off / On / On-T - CBF retrip operation mode On
TCBF1-RE 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF retrip timer 0.150
CBF1-Trip Off / On / On-AftRe - CBF trip operation mode On
TCBF1-TP 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF trip timer 0.200
OCCBF relay operating level (Current
CBF2 OCCBF2 0.02 - 5.00/0.10 - 25.00 A 1.00/5.00
flow judgment)
EFCBF relay operating level (Current
EFCBF2 0.02 - 5.00/0.10 - 25.00 A 1.00/5.00
flow judgment)
CBF2-Retrip Off / On / On-T - CBF retrip operation mode On
TCBF2-RE 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF retrip timer 0.150
CBF2-Trip Off / On / On-AftRe - CBF trip operation mode On
TCBF2-TP 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF trip timer 0.200
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 184 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.10.7 Data ID
CBF(Function ID: 453001)
8000011C20 OCCBF1-A OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 OCCBF1-B OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 OCCBF1-C OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8400011C27 EFCBF1 EFCBF1 relay element operated
8000011B20 CBF1_RETRIP-A OCCBF1 Retrip (phase-A)
8100011B21 CBF1_RETRIP-B OCCBF1 Retrip (phase-B)
8200011B22 CBF1_RETRIP-C OCCBF1 Retrip (phase-C)
8300011B23 CBF1_RETRIP OCCBF1 Retrip
8800011B24 CBF1_TRIP-A OCCBF1 trip (phase-A)
8900011B25 CBF1_TRIP-B OCCBF1 trip (phase-B)
8A00011B26 CBF1_TRIP-C OCCBF1 trip (phase-C)
8B00011B27 CBF1_TRIP OCCBF1 trip
8000011BB0 EXT.CBF1_START-A External CBF1 start(phase-A)
8100011BB1 EXT.CBF1_START-B External CBF1 start(phase-B)
8200011BB2 EXT.CBF1_START-C External CBF1 start(phase-C)
8300011BB3 EXT.CBF1_START External CBF1 start
8000021C20 OCCBF2-A OCCBF2 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100021C21 OCCBF2-B OCCBF2 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200021C22 OCCBF2-C OCCBF2 relay element operated (phase-C)
8400021C27 EFCBF2 EFCBF2 relay element operated
8000021B20 CBF2_RETRIP-A OCCBF2 Retrip (phase-A)
8100021B21 CBF2_RETRIP-B OCCBF2 Retrip (phase-B)
8200021B22 CBF2_RETRIP-C OCCBF2 Retrip (phase-C)
8300021B23 CBF2_RETRIP OCCBF2 Retrip
8800021B24 CBF2_TRIP-A OCCBF2 trip (phase-A)
8900021B25 CBF2_TRIP-B OCCBF2 trip (phase-B)
8A00021B26 CBF2_TRIP-C OCCBF2 trip (phase-C)
8B00021B27 CBF2_TRIP OCCBF2 trip
8000021BB0 EXT.CBF2_START-A External CBF2 start(phase-A)
8100021BB1 EXT.CBF2_START-B External CBF2 start(phase-B)
8200021BB2 EXT.CBF2_START-C External CBF2 start(phase-C)
8300021BB3 EXT.CBF2_START External CBF2 start

800001EBB0 EXT.CBF1_START-A External CBF1 start(phase-A)
810001EBB1 EXT.CBF1_START-B External CBF1 start(phase-B)
820001EBB2 EXT.CBF1_START-C External CBF1 start(phase-C)
830001EBB3 EXT.CBF1_START External CBF1 start
800001EBB4 CBF1_BLOCK CBF1 protection block command
810001EBB5 CBF1-RE_INST CBF1 instantaneous retrip
820001EBB6 CBF1-TP_INST CBF1 instantaneous trip
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 185 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

800002EBB0 EXT.CBF2_START-A External CBF2 start(phase-A)
810002EBB1 EXT.CBF2_START-B External CBF2 start(phase-B)
820002EBB2 EXT.CBF2_START-C External CBF2 start(phase-C)
830002EBB3 EXT.CBF2_START External CBF2 start
800002EBB4 CBF2_BLOCK CBF2 protection block command
810002EBB5 CBF2-RE_INST CBF2 instantaneous retrip
820002EBB6 CBF2-TP_INST CBF2 instantaneous trip
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 186 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Stub protection with overcurrent relay (STUB-OC)

Figure 2.11-1 depicts that a one-and-a-half breaker (1.5CBs) arrangement with a
transmission line including a disconnector (DS). An area ‘stub zone’ is defined within two CBs
and the DS, which is expressed by hatching in the figure.
For the 1.5CB arrangement, a voltage transformer (VT) is generally installed along the
line GH. Figure 2.11-1 shows that the line GH is taken out of service because of the DS being
open; hence, a distance relay in the IED_G cannot detect a fault when a fault occurs in the
‘stub’ zone. This is because a faulted voltage cannot be measured correctly using the VTG.
Thereby, an overcurrent relay (OC) is provided to protect the ‘stub’ zone and the OC relay
operates speedy upon occurrence of the fault.
CT1G CT1H
CB CB
Fault
DS Line GH
VTG VTH
IED_G IED_H
CB CB
CT2G CT2H
Line Line
CB CB
Terminal-G Terminal-H
Figure 2.11-1 Fault occurred in stub zone

(2.44.1)
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of such features is dependent upon the selection of hardware
and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain features. To
determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED, identify the
IED ordering number; and check the order number at the “G&T position” referring to the
comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 187 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.11.1 Stub-OC characteristic

The characteristic of the stub-OC element is shown as a circle that has a center at the origin,
as shown in Figure 2.11-2. The user can set the threshold value of the stub-OC element using
setting [OCSTUB]. The STUB-OC function can operate when the user set scheme switch
[STUB] On.
0 I
Figure 2.11-2 Characteristic of stub-OC
2.11.2 Scheme logic

Figure 2.11-3 shows the stub-OC logic; the stub-OC function can issue trip signals during the
DS being opened (i.e., logic signal ‘DS_OPEN’ = 1 (TRUE1)).
To TRC
8000001B60
OCSTUB-OR
≥1
8000011C20
A 8000001B20
& & STUBOC-TRIP-A
8100011C21
OCSTUB B
8100001B21
& & STUBOC-TRIP-B
8200011C22
& 8200001B22
C & STUBOC-TRIP-C
From ICD 8300001B23

≥1
ICD-A & ≥1 & STUBOC-TRIP
ICD-B & ≥1
STUBOC-ARC-BLOCK
ICD-C & ≥1
STUBOC-OPT-A
≥1
& STUBOC-OPT-B
STUBOC-OPT-C
Block-3P
STUBOC-2PBlk
Block-PerP
STUBOC-EN On
&
To Recording
800000EBB0 STUBOC_BLOCK 1 STUBOC-TRIP
&
From PROT COMMON
DS_OPEN
≥1
STUB-Test On
Figure 2.11-3 Scheme logic in STUB function
Scheme switch [OCSTUB-2fBlk] is provided in order that the OCSTBU element should
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 188 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
be blocked when second-harmonic frequency components (2f) are detected on the flowing
currents. Either Block-3P or Block-PerP should be set for the scheme switch
[OCSTUB-2fBlk]: the Block-3P is used when the trip signal should be blocked when the 2f is
observed in three-phase; whereas the Block-PerP is used when the trip signal should be
blocked when 2f is observed in a phase. The user can program a block signal using PLC
connection point “STUBOC_BLOCK”.
2.11.3 Setting
Setting of STUBOC(Function ID: 455001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
STUBOC-EN Off/On Stub-OC protection enable Off
OCSTUB 0.02-3.00 0.10-15.00 A OC relay for stub threshold 1.2 1.6
OCSTUB operation block by
OCSTUB-2fBlk Non/Block-3P/Block-PerP Non
2f-detection
Forcibly establishing the stub
STUB-Test Off/On Off
condition
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 189 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.11.4 Data ID
STUB_OC(Function ID: 455001)
8000001C20 OCSTUB-A STUBOC relay element operated (phase-A)
8100001C21 OCSTUB-B STUBOC relay element operated (phase-B)
8200001C22 OCSTUB-C STUBOC relay element operated (phase-C)
8000001B60 OCSTUB-OR STUBOC relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000001B61 STUBOC-OPT STUBOC protection operated (3-phases OR)
8000001B20 STUBOC-TRIP-A STUBOC protection operated (phase-A)
8100001B21 STUBOC-TRIP-B STUBOC protection operated (phase-B)
8200001B22 STUBOC-TRIP-C STUBOC protection operated (phase-C)
8300001B23 STUBOC-TRIP STUBOC protection operated

STUB_OC(Function ID: 455001)
800000EBB0 STUBOC_BLOCK STUBOC protection block command
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 190 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Overvoltage protection for phase-to-neutral (OV)

The over voltage protection function for phase (OV) detects an over voltage condition that
phase-to-neutral voltage is larger than a setting and operates accordingly. The OV function
has two stages (elements; OV1 and OV2), which operate independently. The OV element has a
time delay characteristic; and the user can select either (1) independent (definite) time
characteristic delay or (2) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay. The OV element is
configured both the setting of a pickup voltage (PU) and the setting of a drop-off voltage (DO).
To simplify the description, only OV1 is discussed, but the expression is applicable to the
OV2; hence, read the expression for OV1 as the OV2 unless a special explanation or
instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 191 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.12.1 Drop-off and pickup characteristic

Figure 2.12-1 shows the characteristic of the OV element. The outer circle shows the
threshold of pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner dotted circle shows drop-off
voltage point (DO). The hatched area shows the operation area of the OV.
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
Figure 2.12-1 Characteristic of OV element

For example, with regard to the OV1 element, suppose the user sets a pick-up value in
P.U for setting [OV1]. Then the user should set a drop-off value using setting [OV1-DPR],
which configures the ratio of the PU to the DO.
2.12.2 Delay for the operation of the OV element

The OV element has a delay timer for the operation. For the OV1 element, the user can set a
delay time using setting [TOV1]. The user can find the delay timer in the OV function logic.
(See section 2.12.5)
2.12.3 Time characteristic

The OV element has two characteristics between a voltage condition and an operation time;
hence, the user should select a mode either (i) definite (independent) time characteristic delay
or (ii) inverse (dependent) time characteristic delay. For the definite time characteristic delay,
the operation time is a constant. In the inverse time characteristic delay, the operation time
depends upon the level of the voltage condition.
(i) Definite time characteristic (DT)

To operate the definite (independent) time delay, set scheme switch [OV1-Type] DT.
Resetting the OV element is performed when a voltage falls below the drop-off voltage.
(ii) Invers time characteristic (IDMT)

To operate the dependent (invers) time delay, set scheme switch [OV1-Type] IDMT.
Pick-up characteristic
The operate time of the inverse (dependent) time characteristic is inversely proportional to
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 192 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
the level of the voltage condition. Figure 2.12-2 shows the invers time characteristic of the OV
element when a multiplier setting [OV1-TMS] is used. The OV element uses Equation (2.12-1)
to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127:
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎 ] + 𝑐} (2.12-1)
(𝑉⁄𝑉 ) − 1
𝑠
where,
t = operating time (seconds),
V = energizing voltage (voltage),
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage), and
TMS = time multiplier setting to adjust a curve
If the user will require a user-programmable (original) curve in the inverse time
characteristic, it is provided when the constants of k, a, c are set, as shown in Table 2.12-2.
For example, the user-programmable (original) curve in the OV1 element will be acquired
when Original is set for the scheme switch [OV1-Type], and when values of respective
constants are set for [OV1-k], [OV1-a], and [OV1-C].
Overvoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
1.000
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Figure 2.12-2 IDMT characteristic of OV element
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 193 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 2.12-2 Constant value at each setting of IDMT curve

Setting K a C
IDMT 1 1 0
User programmable 0.000 – 500.000 0.000 – 10.000 0.000 – 10.000
(Original) by 0.001 step by 0.01 step by 0.001 step
Reset feature
The user should set the time for resetting. Figure 2.12-3 shows that examples of the pick-up
and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the operation time. The value of
the time counter furnished in the OV1 element is incremented if faults occur.
As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter will not reach the
trip level. In the other words, the operation of the OV1 element is paralyzed in the reset time
set by [TOV1R].
If a series of fault occurs repeatedly (the latter in the figure), and if the value of the time
counter reaches at trip level, the OV1 element will issue a trip signal after a certain delay.
After issuing the trip signal, if a series of fault completely disappears after issuing the trip
signal, the value of the time counter will be expired after the reset time [TOV1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the OV1 element immediately, setting
zero for the settings [TOV1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage falls below the reset
threshold (drop-off), the operation of the OV1 element is reset promptly.
Condition fault occurrence
Intermittent fault Series faults
T3
Fault observation by the relay
Issue of trip command
Relay operation reset

Incrimination of time counter
corresponding to the fault
duration. Trip level
Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
Increment process in time Reset of time counter
T1: Resetting time set by the user counter
T2: Actual resetting time in the relay operation Value maintenance of time counter
T3: Time gap between fault occurrence and relay start time
Figure 2.12-3 Faults occurrences and reset operation when IDMT being applied
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 194 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

(i) OV operation blocked by the occurrence of VT failure
Blocking the OV function may be required when a failure in the voltage transformer occurs.
In this case, the user shall set Block for scheme switch [OV1-VTFBlk]. Non (as a default) is set
for scheme switch [OV1-VTFBlk] in order that the OV function is not blocked by the failure.
(ii) OV trip signal

The OV function issues a trip signal for the trip circuit (TRC†) when Trip is set for scheme
switch [OV1-UseFor] as the normal trip operation. However, when an alarm signal in place of
the trip signal is required, the user can set Alarm for the scheme switch [OV1-UseFor].
†Note:For more information of the trip circuit, see Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit.
(iii) Execution of OV function

Set On for scheme switch [OV1-EN]. Otherwise, set Off for the scheme switch [OV1-EN] if the
OV1 element is not required to operate.
2.12.5 Scheme logic

Figure 2.12-4 shows the OV function logic. Signal connection points “OV*_BLOCK” are
provided for the block of the operation of the OV elements. For testing, the OV1-PU element is
provided; it generates a pick-up signal when the entering voltage is excesses of the threshold
anytime. For example, in the IDMT characteristic, using both monitoring points “8000011C20”
and “8000011C24” can facilitate to measure the pickup time after the excess.
8000011C20 TOV1
8000011B62
A & t 0 To TRC
8100011C21
& &
≥1 8100011B63 ≥1 OV-OPT-A
OV1 B & t 0
8200011C22 & &
≥1
8200011B64 ≥1 OV-OPT-B
C & t 0
& & ≥1 ≥1 OV-OPT-C
≥1 8000011B60
0.00 to 300.00s
8000011B65
8000011C24 & OV1-OPT
≥1
A
8100011C25 & OV2-OPT
OV1 PU B
8200011C26
& & OV-OPT-TRIP
C ≥1
& ≥1 OV-OPT-ALARM
≥1 8000011B61
OV-OPT-BLOCK
OV1-EN On
Block
OV1-VTFBlk & ≥1 1
800001EBB0 OV1_BLOCK
DT
IDMT
Original ≥1
OV1-Type
Trip
Alarm
OV1-UseFor
OV2-OPT-A
OV2-EN On
OV2-OPT-B
Block &
OV2-VTFBlk OV2-OPT-C
Logics of OV2 and OV2 PU are the same as the
810002EBB0 OV2_BLOCK OV2-OPT-TRIP
logics of OV1 and OV1PU
OV2-OPT-ALARM
OV2-Type
OV2-OPT
OV2-UseFor
From VTF
VTF_DETECT
Figure 2.12-4 OV function logics
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 195 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.12.6 Setting list

Setting of OV(Function ID: 460001)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
OV1-EN Off/On OV1 protection enable Off

OV1-Type DT/IDMT/Original OV1 delay type DT
OV1 1.0-220.0 V OV1 threshold 120.0
OV1-DPR 10-100 % OV1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
OV1 operating delay time (in DT
TOV1 0.0-300.0 s 1.0
mode)
OV1-TMS 0.010-100.000 OV1 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000
TOV1R 0.0-300.0 s OV1 definite time reset delay 0.0
OV1-k 0.00000-500.00000 OV1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OV1-a 0.00000-10.00000 OV1 user original curve coefficient 0.0000
OV1-c 0.00000-10.00000 OV1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OV1-VTFBlk Non/Block OV1 operation block by VTF Non
OV1-UseFor Trip/Alarm OV1 used for trip or alarm Trip
OV2-EN Off/On OV2 protection enable Off
OV2-Type DT/IDMT/Original OV2 delay type DT
OV2 1.0-220.0 V OV2 threshold 120.0
OV2-DPR 10-100 % OV2 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
OV2 operating delay time (in DT
TOV2 0.0-300.0 s 1.0
mode)
OV2-TMS 0.010-100.000 OV2 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000
TOV2R 0.0-300.0 s OV2 definite time reset delay 0.0
OV2-k 0.00000-500.00000 OV2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OV2-a 0.00000-10.00000 OV2 user original curve coefficient 0.0000
OV2-c 0.00000-10.00000 OV2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OV2-VTFBlk Non/Block OV2 operation block by VTF Non
OV2-UseFor Trip/Alarm OV2 used for trip or alarm Trip
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 196 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.12.7 Data ID
OV(Function ID: 460001)
8000011C20 OV1-A OV1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 OV1-B OV1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 OV1-C OV1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000011B60 OV1-OR OV1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000011C24 OV1PU-A OV1 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100011C25 OV1PU-B OV1 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200011C26 OV1PU-C OV1 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000011B61 OV1PU-OR OV1 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000011B62 OV1-OPT-A OV1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100011B63 OV1-OPT-B OV1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200011B64 OV1-OPT-C OV1 protection operated (phase-C)
8000011B65 OV1-OPT OV1 protection operated
8400021C20 OV2-A OV2 relay element operated (phase-A)
8500021C21 OV2-B OV2 relay element operated (phase-B)
8600021C22 OV2-C OV2 relay element operated (phase-C)
8100021B60 OV2-OR OV2 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8400021C24 OV2PU-A OV2 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8500021C25 OV2PU-B OV2 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8600021C26 OV2PU-C OV2 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8100021B61 OV2PU-OR OV2 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8400021B62 OV2-OPT-A OV2 protection operated (phase-A)
8500021B63 OV2-OPT-B OV2 protection operated (phase-B)
8600021B64 OV2-OPT-C OV2 protection operated (phase-C)
8100021B65 OV2-OPT OV2 protection operated

OV(Function ID: 460001)
800001EBB0 OV1_BLOCK OV1 protection block command
810002EBB0 OV2_BLOCK OV2 protection block command
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 197 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Overvoltage protection for phase-to-phase (OVS)

The over voltage protection function in phase-to-phase (OVS) detects an over voltage
condition that phase-to-neutral voltage is larger than a setting and operates accordingly. The
OVS function has two stages (elements; OVS1 and OVS2), which operate independently. The
OVS element has a time delay characteristic; and the user can select either (1) independent
(definite) time characteristic delay or (2) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay. The
OVS element is configured both the setting of a pickup voltage (PU) and the setting of a
drop-off voltage (DO).
To simplify the description, only OVS1 is discussed, but the expression is applicable to
OVS2; hence, read the expression for OVS1 as the OVS2 stage unless a special explanation or
instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 198 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.13.1 Drop-off and pickup setting

Figure 2.13-1 shows the characteristic of the OVS element. The outer circle shows the
threshold of pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner circle shows drop-off voltage
point (DO). The hatched area shows the operation area of the OVS.
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
Figure 2.13-1 Characteristic of OVS element

For example, with regard to the OVS1 element, suppose the user sets a pick-up value in
P.U for setting [OVS1]. Then the user should set a drop-off value using setting [OVS1-DPR],
which configures the ratio of the PU to the DO.
2.13.2 Delay for the operation of the OVS element

The OVS element has a delay timer for the operation. For the OVS1 element, the user can set
a delay time using setting [TOVS1]. The user can find the delay timer in the OVS function
logic. (See section 2.13.5)

The OVS element has two characteristics between a voltage condition and an operation time;
hence, the user should select a mode either (i) definite (independent) time characteristic delay
or (ii) inverse (dependent) time characteristic delay. For the definite time characteristic delay,
the operation time is a constant. In the inverse time characteristic delay, the operation time
depends upon the level of the voltage condition.
To operate the definite (independent) time delay, set scheme switch [OVS1-Type] DT.
Resetting the OVS element is performed when a voltage falls below the drop-off voltage.
(ii) Invers time characteristic (IDMT)

To operate the dependent (invers) time delay, set scheme switch [OVS1-Type] IDMT.
Operation feature
The operate time of the inverse (dependent) time characteristic is inversely proportional to
the level of the voltage condition. Figure 2.13-2 shows the invers time characteristic of the
OVS element when a multiplier setting is used. The OVS element uses Equation (2.13-1) to be
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 199 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
in conformity to IEC 60255-127:
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎 ] + 𝑐} (2.13-1)
(𝑉⁄𝑉 ) − 1
𝑠
where,
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage), and
TMS = time multiplier setting to adjust a curve
If the user will require a user-programmable (original) curve in the inverse time
characteristic, it is provided when the constants of k, a, c are set, as shown in Table 2.13-2.
For example, the user-programmable (original) curve in the OVS1 element will be acquired
when Original is set for the scheme switch [OVS1-Type], and when values of respective
constants are set for [OVS1-k], [OVS1-a], and [OVS1-C].
Overvoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
1.000
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Figure 2.13-2 IDMT characteristic of OVS element
Table 2.13-2 Constant value at each setting of IDMT curve

Setting K a C
IDMT 1 1 0
User programmable 0.000 – 500.000 0.000 – 10.000 0.000 – 10.000
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 200 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Reset feature
The user should set the time for resetting. Figure 2.13-3 shows that examples of the pick-up
and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the operation time. The value of
the time counter furnished in the OVS1 element is incremented if faults occur.
As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter will not reach the
trip level. In the other words, the operation of the OVS1 element is paralyzed in the reset time
set by [TOVS1R].
If a series of fault occurs repeatedly (the latter in the figure), and if the value of the time
counter reaches at trip level, the OVS1 element will issue a trip signal after a certain delay.
After issuing the trip signal, if a series of fault completely disappears after issuing the trip
signal, the value of the time counter will be expired after the reset time [TOVS1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the OVS1 element immediately,
setting zero for the settings [TOVS1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage falls below the
reset threshold (drop-off), the operation of the OVS1 element is reset promptly.
Condition fault occurrence Intermittent fault
Series faults
T3

Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
T1: Resetting time set by the user
counter
T2: Actual resetting time in the relay operation
T3: Time gap between fault occurrence and relay start time Value maintenance of time counter

(i) OVS operation blocked by the occurrence of VT failure
Blocking the OVS function may be required when a failure in the voltage transformer occurs.
In this case, the user shall set Block for scheme switch [OVS1-VTFBlk]. Non (as a default) is
set for scheme switch [OVS1-VTFBlk] in order that the OVS function is not blocked by the
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 201 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
failure.
(ii) Switch of OVS trip signal

The OVS function issues a trip signal for the trip circuit (TRC†) when Trip is set for scheme
switch [OVS1-UseFor] as the normal trip operation. However, when an alarm signal in place
of the trip signal is required, the user can set Alarm for the scheme switch [OVS1-UseFor].
†Note:For more information of the trip circuit, see Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit.
(iii) Execution of OVS function

Set On for scheme switch [OVS1-EN]. Otherwise, set Off for the scheme switch [OVS1-EN] if
the OVS1 element is not required to operate.
2.13.5 Scheme logic

Figure 2.13-4 shows the OVS function logic. Signal connection points “OVS*_BLOCK” are
provided for the block of the operation of the OVS elements. For testing, the OVS1-PU
element is provided; it generates a pick-up signal when the entering voltage is excesses of the
threshold anytime. For example, in the IDMT characteristic, using both monitoring points
“8000011C20” and “8000011C24” can facilitate to measure the pickup time after the excess.
8000011C20 TOVS1
8000011B62
AB & t 0 To TRC
8100011C21
& &
≥1 8100011B63 ≥1 OVS-OPT-AB
OVS1 BC & t 0
8200011C22 & &
≥1
8200011B64 ≥1 OVS-OPT-BC
CA & t 0
& & ≥1 ≥1 OVS-OPT-CA
≥1 8000011B60
0.00 to 300.00s
8000011B65
8000011C24 & OVS1-OPT
≥1
AB
8100011C25 & OVS2-OPT
OVS1 PU BC
8200011C26
& & OVS-OPT-TRIP
CA ≥1
& ≥1 OVS-OPT-ALARM
≥1 8000011B61
OVS-OPT-BLOCK
OVS1-EN On
Block
OVS1-VTFBlk & ≥1 1
800001EBB0 OVS1_BLOCK
DT
IDMT
Original ≥1
OVS1-Type
Trip
Alarm
OVS1-UseFor
OVS2-OPT-AB
OVS2-EN On
OVS2-OPT-BC
Block & The logics of OVS2 and OVS2 PU are the same as the
OVS2-VTFBlk logics of OVS1 and OVS2 PU. OVS2-OPT-CA
810002EBB0 OVS2_BLOCK OVS2-OPT-TRIP
OVS2-OPT-ALAR
OVS2-Type
M
OVS2-UseFor OVS2-OPT
From VTF
VTF_DETECT
Figure 2.13-4 OVS function logics
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 202 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.13.6 Setting list

Setting of OVS(Function ID: 461001)
Default setting
value
OVS1 OVS1-EN Off/On OVS1 protection enable Off
OVS1-Type DT/IDMT/Original OVS1 delay type DT
OVS1 1.0-220.0 V OVS1 threshold 120.0
OVS1-DPR 10-100 % OVS1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOVS1 OVS1 operating delay time (in DT
0.00-300.00 s 1.00
mode)
OVS1-TMS 0.010-100.000 OVS1 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000
TOVS1R 0.0-300.0 s OVS1 definite time reset delay 0.0
OVS1-k 0.00000-500.00000 OVS1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OVS1-a 0.00000-10.00000 OVS1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OVS1-c 0.00000-10.00000 OVS1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OVS1-VTFBlk Non/Block OVS1 operation block by VTF Non
OVS1-UseFor Trip/Alarm OVS1 used for trip or alarm Trip
OVS2 OVS2-EN Off/On OVS2 protection enable Off
OVS2-Type DT/IDMT/Original OVS2 delay type DT
OVS2 1.0-220.0 V OVS2 threshold 120.0
OVS2-DPR 10-100 % OVS2 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOVS2 OVS2 operating delay time (in DT
0.00-300.00 s 1.00
mode)
OVS2-TMS 0.010-100.000 OVS2 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000
TOVS2R 0.0-300.0 s OVS2 definite time reset delay 0.0
OVS2-k 0.00000-500.00000 OVS2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OVS2-a 0.00000-10.00000 OVS2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OVS2-c 0.00000-10.00000 OVS2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OVS2-VTFBlk Non/Block OVS2 operation block by VTF Non
OVS2-UseFor Trip/Alarm OVS2 used for trip or alarm Trip
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 203 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.13.7 Data ID
OVS(Function ID: 461001)
8000011C20 OVS1-AB OVS1 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100011C21 OVS1-BC OVS1 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200011C22 OVS1-CA OVS1 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000011B60 OVS1-OR OVS1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000011C24 OVS1PU-AB OVS1 relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8100011C25 OVS1PU-BC OVS1 relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8200011C26 OVS1PU-CA OVS1 relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8000011B61 OVS1PU-OR OVS1 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000011B62 OVS1-OPT-AB OVS1 protection operated (phase-AB)
8100011B63 OVS1-OPT-BC OVS1 protection operated (phase-BC)
8200011B64 OVS1-OPT-CA OVS1 protection operated (phase-CA)
8000011B65 OVS1-OPT OVS1 protection operated
8400021C20 OVS2-AB OVS2 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8500021C21 OVS2-BC OVS2 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8600021C22 OVS2-CA OVS2 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8100021B60 OVS2-OR OVS2 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8400021C24 OVS2PU-AB OVS2 relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8500021C25 OVS2PU-BC OVS2 relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8600021C26 OVS2PU-CA OVS2 relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8100021B61 OVS2PU-OR OVS2 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8400021B62 OVS2-OPT-AB OVS2 protection operated (phase-AB)
8500021B63 OVS2-OPT-BC OVS2 protection operated (phase-BC)
8600021B64 OVS2-OPT-CA OVS2 protection operated (phase-CA)
8100021B65 OVS2-OPT OVS2 protection operated

OVS(Function ID: 461001)
800001EBB0 OVS1_BLOCK OVS1 protection block command
810002EBB0 OVS2_BLOCK OVS2 protection block command
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 204 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Phase under-voltage protection (UV)

The under-voltage protection function for phase-to-earth (UV) consists of two stages
(elements) independently: UV1 and UV2. The time characteristic of the UV element is
configured either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) using settings.
Each UV stage (element) detects the under-voltage condition of phase-to-earth. The user
can set a threshold and the ratio of a drip-out voltage (DO) to a pick-up voltage (PU) in the UV
element. To simplify the description, only the UV1 element is described, but the expression is
applicable to the UV2; hence, read the expression for the UV1 element as the UV2 unless a
special explanation or instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 205 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.14.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic

Figure 2.14-1 shows the UV characteristic as hatched area with concentric circles. The
pick-up threshold voltage (PU) is represented the outer circle; the drop-off voltage point (DO)
is represented the dotted circle. The PU voltage of the UV1 element is set using [UV1]. The
DO voltage of the UV1 element is set using [UV1-DPR].
The inner circle shows the area in which the UV function is blocked when the value of
the block voltage is set for [UVBLK]. Setting [TUVBLK] is also provided so that the user can
delay blocking the UV1 and UV2 elements using the setting.
Drop-off
Pickup
o V
UV block
Figure 2.14-1 UV1 element characteristic

The UV element has the relationship between an input voltage and an operation time; the
relationship is divided into two time characteristics: (i) the definite time (DT) and (ii) the
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).

Setting pick-up operation
The user is required to set DT for scheme switch [UV1-Type] when the UV1 element should
operate in the DT characteristic. The UV1 element has a delay timer for the pick-up
operation; the user can set a delay time using setting [TUV1]. The user can find the delay
timer in the UV function logic. (See section 2.14.4)
Setting drop-off operation

Resetting the UV1 element is performed instantly when a voltage exceeds over the drop-off
voltage.
(ii) Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic

To operate the IDMT characteristic in the UV1 element, set scheme switch [UV1-Type] IDMT.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 206 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

The IDMT characteristic is applied when the operation of the UV1 element is required
inversely in accordance with the level of input voltage. The IDMT characteristic curve is
illustrated in Figure 2.14-2 using a value of time multiplier is set for [UV1-TMS]. It is followed
to Equation (2.14-1) in conformed in IEC 60255-127
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎] + 𝑐} (2.14-1)
1 − (𝑉⁄𝑉 )
𝑠
where,
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
Except for pre-programmed characteristics, the user can have a user-programmable

(original) characteristic curve. The user-programmable (original) curve is obtained when the
constants of k, a, c, as shown in Table 2.14-2, are set, and when Original is set for scheme
switch [UV1-Type]. The constants are set with settings [UV1-k], [UV1-a], and [UV1-C].
Undervoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
TMS=10
10.000
TMS=5
TMS=2
TMS=1
1.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Figure 2.14-2 IDMT characteristics curves depending on TMS
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 207 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 2.14-2 Values k, a, c for pre-programmable IDMT and user-programmable IDMT

Set item K a C
IDMT 1 1 0
User-programmable 0.000 – 500.000 0.000 – 10.000 0.000 – 10.000
The user should set the time for resetting in the IDMT characteristic. Figure 2.14-3 shows
examples of the pick-up and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the
operation time. The UV1 element has a time counter that increases in response to the fault
occurrence and duration. This figure also shows the increment degree of the time counter for
the fault occurrences.
As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter does not reach
the trip level. In the other word, the UV1 element will be paralyzed in the reset time [TUV1R].
If a series of fault occurs, the time counter increase corresponding to the duration of
series faults. When the time counter reaches the trip level, then the UV1 element issues a trip
signal after a certain delay. After issuing the trip signal, if a series of fault disappears
completely, the operation of the UV1 element is expired after the reset time [TUV1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the UV1 element immediately, setting
zero for the settings [TUV1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage is recovered over the
reset threshold (drop-off), the operation of the UV1 element is reset promptly.
Intermittent fault A series fault
Condition fault occurrence
T3

Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
counter
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 208 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

(i) Blocking UV operation
Blocking the UV function may be required when a failure in the voltage transformer occurs.
In this case, the user shall set Block for scheme switch [UV1-VTFBlk]. Non (as a default) is set
for scheme switch [UV1-VTFBlk] in order that the UV function is not blocked by the failure.
(ii) UV trip signal

The UV1 element issues a trip signal for the trip circuit (TRC†) when Trip is set for scheme
switch [UV1-UseFor] as the normal tripping. However, when an alarm signal in place of the
trip signal is required, the user can set Alarm for the scheme switch [UV1-UseFor].
†Note:For more information about tripping, see Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit.
(iii) Operation of UV element

The user should set On for scheme switch [UV1-EN] for the operation of the UV1 element.
Otherwise, set Off for the scheme switch if the UV1 element is not required to operate.
2.14.4 Scheme logic

Figure 2.14-4 show the logic of the UV function. PLC connection points “UV*_BLOCK” are
provided for blocking the operation of the UV elements. Other PLC connection points
“CB_*PH_OPEN” are provided so that the UV function can determine its operation using the
open/closed information of a circuit breaker (CB). For testing, the UV1-PU element is
provided; it generates a pick-up signal when the entering voltage is below the threshold
anytime. For example, in the IDMT characteristic, using both PLC monitoring points
“8000011B20” and “8000011B24” can facilitate to measure the pickup time after the deficiency.
(2.50.1
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 209 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8000011B20 TUV1
8000011B62
A & t 0 To TRC
8100011B21
& &
≥1 8100011B63 ≥1 UV-OPT-A
UV1 B & t 0
8200011B22 & &
≥1
8200011B64 ≥1 UV-OPT-B
C & t 0
& & ≥1 ≥1 UV-OPT-C
≥1 8000011B60
0.00 to 300.00s
8000011B65
8000011B24 & UV1-OPT
≥1
A
8100011B25 & UV2-OPT
UV1 PU B
8200011B26
& & UV-OPT-TRIP
C ≥1
& ≥1 UV-OPT-ALARM
≥1 8000011B61
UV-ARC-BLOCK
UV1-EN On Trip
UV1-UseFor
Alarm
8000011B60
A ≥1
8100011B61 TUVBLK
UVBLK B t 0
8200011B62
1 ≥1
C
0.00 to
300.00s
UVBLK-EN On
UV-Test On
800001EBB0 CB_APH_OPEN 1
810001EBB1 CB_BPH_OPEN 1
820001EBB2 CB_CPH_OPEN 1 Trip

&
UV2-UseFor
DT Alarm
&
IDMT
Original ≥1 8100021B65
UV1-Type
≥1
8400021C20 TUV2
8400021B62
A & &
t 0
8500021C21 &
≥1 8500021B63
UV2 B t 0
8600021C22 & & &
≥1
C 8600021B64
& & t 0
& ≥1
≥1 8100021B60
0.00 to 300.00s
8400021C20 &
A
8500021C25 &
UV2 PU B
8600021C26
&
C
≥1 8100021B61
UV2-EN On
800001EBB0 UV1_BLOCK ≥1
1
UV1-VTFBlk Block
&
≥1 1
810002EBB0 UV2_BLOCK
UV2-VTFBlk Block
From VTF &

VTF_DETECT
DT
IDMT
Original ≥1
UV2-Type
Figure 2.14-4 Scheme logic of UV function
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 210 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.14.5 Setting
Setting of UV(Function ID: 470001)
Default setting
value
UVBLK-EN Off/On UV block function enable Off

UVBLK 5.0-20.0 V UV block threshold 10.0
TUVBLK 0.00-300.00 s UV block delay time 10.00
UV-Test Off/On Not to execute UV block function Off
UV1 UV1-EN Off/On UV1 protection enable Off
UV1-Type DT/IDMT/Original UV1 delay type DT
UV1 5.0-130.0 V UV1 threshold 60.0
UV1-DPR 100-120 % UV1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TUV1 0.00-300.00 s UV1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
UV1-TMS 0.010-100.00 UV1 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000
TUV1R 0.0-300.0 s UV1 definite time reset delay 0.0
UV1-k 0.00000-500.00000 UV1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
UV1-a 0.00000-10.00000 UV1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
UV1-c 0.00000-10.00000 UV1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
UV1-VTFBlk Non/Block UV1 operation block by VTF Non
UV1-UseFor Trip/Alarm UV1 used for trip or alarm Trip
UV2 UV2-EN Off/On UV2 protection enable Off
UV2-Type DT/IDMT/Original UV2 delay type DT
UV2 5.0-130.0 V UV2 threshold 60.0
UV2-DPR 100-120 % UV2 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TUV2 0.00-300.00 s UV2 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
UV2-TMS 0.010-100.00 UV2 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000
TUV2R 0.0-300.0 s UV2 definite time reset delay 0.0
UV2-k 0.00000-500.00000 UV2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
UV2-a 0.00000-10.00000 UV2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
UV2-c 0.00000-10.00000 UV2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
UV2-VTFBlk Non/Block UV2 operation block by VTF Non
UV2-UseFor Trip/Alarm UV2 used for trip or alarm Trip
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 211 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.14.6 Data ID
UV(Function ID: 470001)
8000011C20 UV1-A UV1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 UV1-B UV1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 UV1-C UV1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000011B60 UV1-OR UV1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000011C24 UV1PU-A UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100011C25 UV1PU-B UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200011C26 UV1PU-C UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000011B61 UV1PU-OR UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000011B62 UV1-OPT-A UV1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100011B63 UV1-OPT-B UV1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200011B64 UV1-OPT-C UV1 protection operated (phase-C)
8000011B65 UV1-OPT UV1 protection operated (3-phases OR)
8400021C20 UV2-A UV2 relay element operated (phase-A)
8500021C21 UV2-B UV2 relay element operated (phase-B)
8600021C22 UV2-C UV2 relay element operated (phase-C)
8100021B60 UV2-OR UV2 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8400021C24 UV2PU-A UV2 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8500021C25 UV2PU-B UV2 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8600021C26 UV2PU-C UV2 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8100021B61 UV2PU-OR UV2 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8400021B62 UV2-OPT-A UV2 protection operated (phase-A)
8500021B63 UV2-OPT-B UV2 protection operated (phase-B)
8600021B64 UV2-OPT-C UV2 protection operated (phase-C)
8100021B65 UV2-OPT UV2 protection operated (3-phases OR)
8000001B60 UVBLK-A UVBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100001B61 UVBLK-B UVBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200001B62 UVBLK-C UVBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-C)

UV(Function ID: 470001)
800001EBB0 UV1_BLOCK UV1 protection block command
810002EBB0 UV2_BLOCK UV2 protection block command
800000EBB0 CB_APH_OPEN Circuit Breaker detection (phase-A)
810000EBB1 CB_BPH_OPEN Circuit Breaker detection (phase-B)
820000EBB2 CB_CPH_OPEN Circuit Breaker detection (phase-C)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 212 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Phase-to-phase under-voltage protection (UVS)

The under-voltage protection function for phase-to-phase (UVS) consists of two stages
(elements) independently: UVS1 and UVS2. The time characteristic of the UVS element is
configured either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) using settings.
Each UVS element detects the under-voltage condition of phase-to-phase. The user can
set a threshold and the ratio of a drip-out voltage (DO) to a pick-up voltage (PU) in the UVS
element. To simplify the description, only the UVS1 element is described, but the expression
is applicable to the UVS2; hence, read the expression for the UVS1 element as the UVS2
unless a special explanation or instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 213 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.15.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic

Figure 2.15-1 shows the UVS characteristic as hatched area with concentric circles. The
pick-up threshold voltage (PU) is represented the outer circle; the drop-off voltage point (DO)
is represented the dotted circle. The PU voltage of the UVS1 element is set using [UVS1]. The
DO voltage of the UVS1 element is set using [UVS1-DPR].
The inner circle shows the area in which the UVS function is blocked when the value of
the block voltage is set for [UVSBLK]. Setting [TUVSBLK] is also provided so that the user can
delay blocking the UVS1 and UVS2 elements using the setting.
Drop-off
Pickup
o V
UVS block
Figure 2.15-1 UVS1 element characteristic

The UVS element has the relationship between an input voltage and an operation time; the
relationship is divided into two time characteristics: (i) the definite time (DT) and (ii) the
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).

The user is required to set DT for scheme switch [UVS1-Type] when the UVS1 element should
run in the DT characteristic. The UVS1 element has a delay timer for the operation; the user
can set a delay time using setting [TUVS1]. The user can find the delay timer in the UVS
function logic. (See section 2.15.4)

Resetting the UVS1 element is performed instantly when a voltage exceeds over the drop-off
voltage.
(ii) Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic

To operate the inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), set scheme switch [UVS1-Type] IDMT.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 214 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Pick-up characteristic
The IDMT characteristic is applied when the operation of the UVS1 element is required
inversely in accordance with the level of input voltage. The IDMT characteristic curve is
illustrated in Figure 2.15-2 using a value of time multiplier is set for [UV1-TMS]. It is followed
to Equation (2.15-1) in conformed in IEC 60255-127
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎] + 𝑐} (2.15-1)
1 − (𝑉⁄𝑉 )
𝑠
where,
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
Except for pre-programmed characteristics, the user can have a user-programmable

(original) characteristic curve. The user-programmable (original) curve is obtained when the
constants of k, a, c, as shown in Table 2.15-2, are set, and when Original is set for scheme
switch [UVS1-Type]. The constants are set with settings [UVS1-k], [UVS1-a], and [UVS1-C].
Undervoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
TMS=10
10.000
TMS=5
TMS=2
TMS=1
1.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Figure 2.15-2 IDMT characteristics curves depending on TMS
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 215 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 2.15-2 Values k, a, c for pre-programmable IDMT and user-programmable IDMT

Set item k a C
IDMT 1 1 0
User-programmable 0.000 – 500.000 0.000 – 10.000 0.000 – 10.000
Drop-off characteristic
The user should set the time for resetting in the IDMT characteristic. Figure 2.15-3 shows
examples of the pick-up and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the
operation time. The UVS1 element has a time counter that increases in response to the fault
occurrence and duration. This figure also shows the increment degree of the time counter for
the fault occurrences.
As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter does not reach
the trip level. In the other word, the UVS1 element will be paralyzed in the reset time
[TUVS1R]. If a series of fault occurs, the time counter increase corresponding to the duration
of series faults. When the time counter reaches the trip level, then the UVS1 element issues a
trip signal after a certain delay. After issuing the trip signal, if a series of fault disappears
completely, the operation of the UVS1 element is expired after the reset time [TUVS1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the UVS1 element immediately,
setting zero for the settings [TUVS1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage is recovered
over the reset threshold (drop-off), the operation of the UVS1 element is reset promptly.
Intermittent fault
Condition fault occurrence A series fault
T3


Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
counter
Figure 2.15-3 Faults occurrences and reset operation when DT being applied
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 216 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

(i) Block of UVS operation
Blocking the UVS function may be required when a failure in the voltage transformer occurs.
In this case, the user shall set Block for scheme switch [UVS1-VTFBlk]. Non (as a default) is
set for scheme switch [UVS1-VTFBlk] in order that the UVS function is not blocked by the
failure.
(ii) UVS trip signal

The UVS1 element issues a trip signal for the trip circuit (TRC†) when Trip is set for scheme
switch [UVS1-UseFor] as the normal tripping. However, when an alarm signal in place of the
trip signal is required, the user can set Alarm for the scheme switch [UVS1-UseFor].
†Note:For more information about tripping, see Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit.
(iii) Operation of UVS function

Set On for scheme switch [UVS1-EN]. Otherwise, set Off for the scheme switch [UVS1-EN] if
the UVS1 element is not required to operate.
2.15.4 Scheme logic

Figure 2.15-4 show the logic of the UVS function. PLC connection points “UVS*_BLOCK” are
provided for blocking the operation of the UVS elements. Other PLC connection points
“CB_*PH_OPEN” are provided so that the UVS function can determine its operation using
the open/closed information of a circuit breaker (CB). For testing, the UVS1-PU element is
provided; it generates a pick-up signal when the entering voltage is below the threshold
anytime. For example, in the IDMT characteristic, using both PLC monitoring points
“8000011B20” and “8000011B24” can facilitate to measure the pickup time after the
deficiency.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 217 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8000011B20 TUVS1
8000011B62
AB & t 0 To TRC
8100011B21
& &
≥1 8100011B63 ≥1 UVS-OPT-AB
UVS1 BC & t 0
8200011B22 & &
≥1
8200011B64 ≥1 UVS-OPT-BC
CA & t 0
& & ≥1 ≥1 UVS-OPT-CA
≥1 8000011B60
0.00 to 300.00s
8000011B65
8000011B24 & UVS1-OPT
≥1
AB
8100011B25 & UVS2-OPT
V
UVS1 PU BC
8200011B26
& & UVS-OPT-TRIP
CA ≥1
& ≥1 UVS-OPT-ALARM
≥1 8000011B61
UVS-ARC-BLOCK
UV1-EN On Trip
UVS1-UseFor
Alarm
8000011B60
AB ≥1
8100011B61 TUVBLK
UVSBLK BC t 0
8200011B62
1 ≥1
CA
0.00 to
300.00s
UVSBLK-EN On
UVS-Test On
800001EBB0 CB_APH_OPEN 1
810001EBB1 CB_BPH_OPEN 1
820001EBB2 CB_CPH_OPEN 1 Trip

&
UVS2-UseFor
DT Alarm
&
IDMT
Original ≥1 8100021B65
UVS1-Type
≥1
8400021C20 TUVS2
8400021B62
AB & &
t 0
8500021C21 &
≥1 8500021B63
UVS2 BC t 0
8600021C22 & & &
≥1
CA 8600021B64
& & t 0
& ≥1
≥1 8100021B60
0.00 to 300.00s
8400021C20 &
AB
8500021C25 &
UVS2 PU BC
8600021C26
&
CA
≥1 8100021B61
UVS2-EN On
800001EBB0 UVS1_BLOCK ≥1
1
UVS1-VTFBlk Block
&
≥1 1
810002EBB0 UV2_BLOCK
UVS2-VTFBlk Block
From VTF &

VTF_DETECT
DT
IDMT
Original ≥1
UVS2-Type
Figure 2.15-4 Scheme logic of UVS function
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 218 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.15.5 Setting
Setting of UVS(Function ID: 471001)
Un Default setting
its value
UVSBLK-EN Off/On UVS block function enable Off

UVSBLK 5.0-20.0 V UVS block threshold 10.0
TUVSBLK 0.00-300.00 s UVS block delay time 10.00
UVS-Test Off/On Not to execute UVS block function Off
UVS1 UVS1-EN Off/On UVS1 protection enable Off
UVS1-Type DT/IDMT/Original UVS1 delay type DT
UVS1 5.0-130.0 V UVS1 threshold (in DT mode) 60.0
UVS1-DPR 100-120 % UVS1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TUVS1 0.00-300.00 s UVS1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
UVS1-TMS 0.010-100.00 UVS1 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000
TUVS1R 0.0-300.0 s UVS1 definite time reset delay 0.0
UVS1-k 0.00000-500.00000 UVS1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
UVS1-a 0.00000-10.00000 UVS1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
UVS1-c 0.00000-10.00000 UVS1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
UVS1-VTFBlk Non/Block UVS1 operation block by VTF Non
UVS1-UseFor Trip/Alarm UVS1 used for trip or alarm Trip
UVS2 UVS2-EN Off/On UVS2 protection enable Off
UVS2-Type DT/IDMT/Original UVS2 delay type DT
UVS2 5.0-130.0 V UVS2 threshold (in DT mode) 60.0
UVS2-DPR 100-120 % UVS2 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TUVS2 0.00-300.00 s UVS2 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
UVS2-TMS 0.010-100.00 UVS2 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000
TUVS2R 0.0-300.0 s UVS2 definite time reset delay 0.0
UVS2-k 0.00000-500.00000 UVS2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
UVS2-a 0.00000-10.00000 UVS2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
UVS2-c 0.00000-10.00000 UVS2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
UVS2-VTFBlk Non/Block UVS2 operation block by VTF Non
UVS2-UseFor Trip/Alarm UVS2 used for trip or alarm Trip
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 219 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.15.6 Data ID
UVS(Function ID: 471001)
8000011C20 UVS1-AB UVS1 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100011C21 UVS1-BC UVS1 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200011C22 UVS1-CA UVS1 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000011B60 UVS1-OR UVS1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000011C24 UVS1PU-AB UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8100011C25 UVS1PU-BC UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8200011C26 UVS1PU-CA UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8000011B61 UVS1PU-OR UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000011B62 UVS1-OPT-AB UVS1 protection operated (phase-AB)
8100011B63 UVS1-OPT-BC UVS1 protection operated (phase-BC)
8200011B64 UVS1-OPT-CA UVS1 protection operated (phase-CA)
8000011B65 UVS1-OPT UVS1 protection operated
8400021C20 UVS2-AB UVS2 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8500021C21 UVS2-BC UVS2 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8600021C22 UVS2-CA UVS2 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8100021B60 UVS2-OR UVS2 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8400021C24 UVS2PU-AB UVS2 relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8500021C25 UVS2PU-BC UVS2 relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8600021C26 UVS2PU-CA UVS2 relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8100021B61 UVS2PU-OR UVS2 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8400021B62 UVS2-OPT-AB UVS2 protection operated (phase-AB)
8500021B63 UVS2-OPT-BC UVS2 protection operated (phase-BC)
8600021B64 UVS2-OPT-CA UVS2 protection operated (phase-CA)
8100021B65 UVS2-OPT UVS2 protection operated
8000001B60 UVSBLK-AB UVSBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8100001B61 UVSBLK-BC UVSBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8200001B62 UVSBLK-CA UVSBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)

UVS(Function ID: 471001)
800001EBB0 UVS1_BLOCK UVS1 protection block command
810002EBB0 UVS2_BLOCK UVS2 protection block command
800000EBB0 CB_APH_OPEN A phase CB open
810000EBB1 CB_BPH_OPEN B phase CB open
820000EBB2 CB_CPH_OPEN C phase CB open
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 220 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Out of step tripping protection by distance relay (OSTZ)

System faults, line switching and the loss of application of large blocks of loads will induce the
change of electrical characteristics at any time at which the output of the generator and the
input of the load remain constant relatively in the system. As a result, the system will be
required to adjust itself to continue operation and service. If the changes are large, the system
may face instability; and several portions lost their synchronism in the system. The system
should be carried out separation of the faulted portion upon the occurrence of synchronism
being lost. This occurrence is termed “Out-of-step”; and the out-of-step-tripping by distance
relays (OSTZ) is provided to make separation of the system. (2.55.0)
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 221 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.16.1 Phenomenon and principle of out-of-step

(i) Occurrence of out-of-step
Figure 2.16-1 shows simple two power sources (machines) system; it introduces the discussion
of a transient operation. Electrical center is at which the impedances to the opposite
terminals are equal.
Electrical
Bus G center Bus H
VS CB1 CB2 VR
Relay A Relay B
Figure 2.16-1 Simplified system and electrical center
During the early stage of out-of-step, it is assumed that the electrical center loses
synchronism, but two terminals do not lost synchronism. Thereby, the OSTZ can disconnect
the power sources from the system, and each power source can keep operating steadily and
independently.
(ii) Impedance locus during out-of-step

Figure 2.16-2 shows an example of the loci of impedance; it is drawn as an arc during the
out-of-step condition. The locus is observed to swing from right to left; the OSTZ function
detects the out-of-step condition when swinging the locus is observed.
X Distance relay in MHO characteristic

(operation area is represented in hatching.)
Arc made impedance loci.
R
Load Area
Locus seen from Relay A
Figure 2.16-2 Impedance locus during out-of-step condition seeing from distance relay
The user should notice that the OSTZ function does not operate except the out-of-step.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 222 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 2.16-3 shows another impedance locus when transient power swing occurs; the OSTZ
function does not detect the out-of-step condition when this impedance locus is observed†.
X Distance relay in MHO characteristic

(operation area is represented in hatching.)
Impedance locus
R
Load Area
Locus seen from Relay A

†Note:Distance protection function can detect such impedance locus as the occurrence of
power swing. For more information, see Chapter Relay application: Distance
protection.
2.16.2 Function features

The OSTZ function has the elements of distance protection relays; the out of step condition
can be detected using these elements. The user should notice that the OSTZ function requires
a certain amount of time to decide the out of step condition because the OSTZ function should
observe the impedance locus and its swing. (As a rule, the time is dozens of milliseconds) Thus,
the user should keep in mind that the OSTZ function is not suitable to detect the transient
out-of-step condition. Additionally, the OSTZ function cannot recognize the electrical center on
the system being in complex. Thereby, the OSTZ is operated for star system rather than loop
system.
2.16.3 Operation zones and element characteristics

The OSTZ function has three operation zones: Zone A, Zone B, and Zone C (Figure 2.16-4).
The three zones are made by overlapping two elements: OSTZ-ZM element and OSTZ-ZN
element. The OSTZ-ZM element has a quadrilateral form, which are configured by
reactance-lines being parallel to R-axis and ohm-lines 75° leading of R-axis. On the other
hand, the OSTZ-ZN characteristics can be configured by shifting the OSTZ-ZM element in
minus R-axis (the gap between two elements = OSTZ-R1 − OSTZ-R2). The following equations
represent the OSTZ-ZM element:
−1 × XB ≤ X ≤ XF (2.16-1)
(R − R1) × tan 75° ≤ X ≤ (R − R2) × tan75° (2.16-2)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 223 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
where,
X: measured reactance
R: measured resistance
XB: reactive reach configured by setting [OSTZ-XB]
XF: reactive reach configured by setting [OSTZ-XF]
R1: resistive reach configured by setting [OSTZ-R1]
R2: resistive reach configured by setting [OSTZ-R2]
OSTZ-ZN OSTZ-ZM
OSTZ-XF
Zone C Zone B Zone A
75
R
−OSTZ-R2 OSTZ-R1
−OSTZ-XB
Figure 2.16-4 OSTZ-ZM and OSTZ-ZN elements and operation zones
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 224 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.16.4 Scheme logic and setting

Figure 2.16-5 shows the scheme logic of the OSTZ function. When the condition of out-of-step
is yielded, the OSTZ function can detect the motion of the loci impedance from Zone A, Zone B
to Zone C1. Then the OSTZ function will issue a trip command when the locus enters to Zone
C and when the locus keeps staying in Zone C for setting times [TOSTZ1] and [TOSTZ2].
The user should set scheme switch [OSTZ-EN] On in order to operate the OSTZ function.
The user should set scheme switch [OSTZ-Output] Trip to issue a trip command for the trip
circuit (TRC2). When the user requires outputting the trip command for the binary output
circuit (BO3) instead of the TRC, the user should set BO the scheme switch [OSTZ-Output].
PLC connection point “OSTZ-BLOCK” is used to blocking the OSTZ function by an

external signal. The PLC function4 makes possible the connection with the logic.
1Note: The OSTZ function also issues a trip command when the motion of the locus from
Zone C to Zone B, Zone A.
2Note: Trip circuit is discussed separately. See Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit
function.
3Note: Binary output circuit is furnished on Binary IO module. See Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module: Binary output circuit.
4Note: For more information, see Chapter PLC function.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 225 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8000001C20 8200001B6A
AB & & ≥1 ≥1 OSTZ-OPT
8100001C21 Decision logic
OSTZ-ZM for phase-AB 8000001B69
BC & To TRC
8200001C22 & 8300001B23
0 t
CA &
& & OSTZ-OPT-TRIP
0.1s
8000001C24 OSTZ-ARC-BLOCK
AB 8100001C25 & & &
Decision logic
OSTZ-ZN BC
8200001C26 & for phase-BC
&
CA & &
OSTZ-EN Decision logic

On
for phase-CA
800000EBB0 OSTZ BLOCK 1
Trip
OSTZ-Output
BO
From FS
OCMFS_OP_SEP
Figure 2.16-5 Scheme logic of OSTZ
TOSTZ1
& ≥1 t 0
&
1 0.01 to 1.00s
&
&
TOSTZ2
& ≥1 t 0
1 0.01 to 1.00s
&
&
≥1
Figure 2.16-6 Decision logic for phase-to-phase

(2.55.1)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 226 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.16.5 Setting
Setting of OSTZ(Function ID: 478001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
OSTZ-EN Off/On OSTZ protection enable Off
OSTZ-R1 15.00-150.00 3.000- 30.000 Ω OSTZ resistive reach (at Right side) 25.50 5.100
OSTZ-R2 5.00- 50.00 1.000–10.000 Ω OSTZ resistive reach (at Left side) 12.50 2.500
OSTZ-XF 5.00-250.00 1.000–50.000 Ω OSTZ reactive reach (at Forward side) 30.00 6.000
OSTZ-XB 1.00- 50.00 0.200–10.000 Ω OSTZ reactive reach (at Backward side) 5.00 1.00
TOSTZ1 0.01-1.00 s OSTZ out-of-step timer 0.04
TOSTZ2 0.01-1.00 s OSTZ out-of-step timer 0.04
OSTZ-Out
Trip/BO OSTZ trip signal output position Trip
put
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 227 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.16.6 Data ID
OSTZ(Function ID: 478001)
8000001C20 OSTZ-ZM-AB OSTZ-ZM relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100001C21 OSTZ-ZM-BC OSTZ-ZM relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200001C22 OSTZ-ZM-CA OSTZ-ZM relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000001C24 OSTZ-ZN-AB OSTZ-ZN relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100001C25 OSTZ-ZN-BC OSTZ-ZN relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200001C26 OSTZ-ZN-CA OSTZ-ZN relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000001B69 OSTZ OSTZ-AB or OSTZ-BC or OSTZ-CA
8200001B6A OSTZ-OPT OSTZ protection operated
8300001B23 OSTZ-OPT-TRIP OSTZ-OPT-TRIP scheme operated

OSTZ(Function ID: 478001)
800000EBB0 OSTZ_BLOCK OSTZ protection block command
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 228 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Inrush current detection function (ICD)

When a current transformer (CT) is first energized, an inrush current flows into the CT
transiently to establish the magnetic field. The magnitude of the inrush current can greater
than the full load current so much; thus, the protection function can issue trip signals falsely.
That is, the inrush current is required to detected and the protection functions shall not
operate during CT energizing. Inrush current detection (ICD) function is designed to detect a
second harmonic inrush current. This is because, the inrush current has all order of
harmonics, but the second harmonics is the greatest†. Signals generated in the ICD function
are transferred to other protection functions to block their operations.
†Note:The second harmonic current is present all inrush currents in three-phases. The
proportion of the second harmonic current varies with the degree of the energizing,
but the ratio of the second harmonic current to the fundamental current can be
about 20% or greater during energizing.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 229 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.17.1 Operation and characteristic

The ICD function examines the ratio of a second harmonic current (I2f) to the fundamental
current (I1f) in each phase. If the ratio|I2f |⁄|I1f | is larger than the setting [ICD-2f], the ICD
function is able to identify the presence of inrush currents. Figure 2.17-1 illustrates the
characteristic; the operation region is designated by the hatched area; the operation threshold
is set with the [ICD-OC].
I2f
ICD-2f (%) = tanθ×100
|I2f|/|I1f|ICD-2f(%) & ICD
|I1f|ICD–OC
I1f
0 ICD–OC
Figure 2.17-1 ICD characteristic and operation region
As shown in Figure 2.17-1, the user should set both the [ICD-2f] and [ICD-OC] when the
second harmonic inrush current should be detected. The user should set On for the scheme
switch [ICD-EN] to enable the ICD operation.
2.17.2 Scheme logic

Figure 2.17-2 illustrates the ICD logic. When second harmonic inrush current is detected, the
ICD signal will be received by other protection functional elements.
8000011C20 To OC, SOTF-OC, STUB-OC

A ICD-A
8100011C21
ICD B ICD-B
8200011C22
C
ICD-C
To EF, OCN, BCD

8000011C24
≥1 ICD-OR
Figure 2.17-2 ICD logic
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 230 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.17.3 Setting
Setting of ICD(Function ID: 480001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
ICD-EN On /Off – ICD function enable
ICD-2f 10 – 50 % Second harmonic detection 15%
ICD-OC 0.10 – 5.00 0.5 – 25.0 0.01A / 0.1 A ICD threshold setting 0.10A 0.5A
2.17.4 Data ID
ICD(Function ID: 480001)
8000001C20 ICD-A ICD relay element operated (phase-A)
8100001C21 ICD-B ICD relay element operated (phase-B)
8200001C22 ICD-C ICD relay element operated (phase-C)
8300001C23 ICD-OR ICD relay element operated (3-phases OR)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 231 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Fail safe (FS)

Various protection functions are connected to trip function, which opens circuit breakers. The
operation of the trip function should be reliable enough to function correctly, for which the
function of fail-safe (FS) is provided. The Fail safe function includes overcurrent element
(OCFS), phase current change detector element (OCDFS), earth fault element (EFF),
multi-level overcurrent element (OCMF), under-voltage element for phase-to-ground (UVF),
under-voltage element for phase-to-phase fault (UVSF), and under-voltage change detection
element (UVDF). Each element has a scheme switch, and the scheme switch disables the
element independently. As a rule, the FS uses the OCFS. However, for the function of out of
step tripping (OST), the FS can use the OCMF. The OST is discussed separately. (See Chapter
Relay application: Out of step tripping) (2.60.0)
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 232 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.18.1 Overcurrent element (OCFS)

This function consists of overcurrent elements for the three-phases, that is, OCFS-A, OCFS-B,
and OCFS-C. The pickup value of the OCFS is set by setting [OCFS]; the OCFS can operate
by setting On for the scheme switch [OCFS-EN].
2.18.2 Phase current change detector element (OCDFS)

This function is used to detect the change in current per phase, and the OCDFS consists
elements for the three-phases, that is, OCDFS-A, OCDFS-B, and OCDFS-C. As shown in
Figure 2.18-1, the OCDFS operates when the vectorial difference between currents IM and IN
observed is one cycle apart which is larger than the setting [OCDFS]. Therefore, the quiescent
load current does not affect the operating sensitivity of the OCDFS element, and the OCDFS
can detect a fault current precisely.
IN
Is
IM
Figure 2.18-1 Current change detection
The operation is based on the following equation.
|𝐼𝑀 − 𝐼𝑁 | ≥ 𝐼𝑆 (2.18-1)
where,
IM = present current
IN = current one cycle before
Is = setting [OCDFS]
The setting of the OCDFS is set by setting [OCDFS]; the OCDFS can operate by setting On for
the scheme switch [OCDFS-EN]. Additionally, the OCDFS has off-delay timers and setting
[TOCDFS] is provided to adjust the timers.
2.18.3 Earth fault current element (EFFS)

The EFFS measures the residual current, and when the residual current exceeds a setting
level, the EFFS signals the detection of earth fault. The setting level of the EFFS is set by
setting [EFFS]. The EFFS operates when On is set for the scheme switch [EFFS-EN].
If the earth fault current is significant, because of unbalance in the network, the scheme
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 233 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
switch [EFFS-EN] should disable the operation of the EFFS.
2.18.4 Multi-level overcurrent elements (OCMFS)

(i) Characteristic of OCMFS
As a current may fluctuate during out of step conditions, seven overcurrent elements are
provided for the FS, and are placed at multiple levels.
LD7
LD6
LD5
LD4
LD3
LD2
LD1
I
0
D.O./P.U.=0.8
Figure 2.18-2 OCMF characteristics
As shown in Figure 2.18-2, the OCMFS has seven current level detectors (LDs). The
Table 2.18-2 shows the threshold between operation and resetting of seven detectors, and
these thresholds are fixed. The overcurrent elements (level detector LD1 to LD7) operate
when a current exceeds operation threshold and resets when the current falls below 80% of
the operation threshold.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 234 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 2.18-2 Level Detector Settings

1A rating 5A rating
Detector Operate (A) Reset (A) Operate (A) Reset (A)
LD1 0.10 0.08 0.50 0.40
LD2 0.16 0.13 0.80 0.65
LD3 0.26 0.21 1.30 1.05
LD4 0.41 0.33 2.05 1.65
LD5 0.66 0.53 3.30 2.65
LD6 1.05 0.84 5.25 4.20
LD7 1.68 1.34 8.40 6.70
The OCMFS operates in five seconds when any of the level detectors operate and reset
without time delay when all the level detectors reset, as shown in the Figure 2.18-4.
(ii) Setting of OCMF

As described earlier, the signal of the OCMF is usually used for the trip function. However,
with scheme switch [OCMFS-EN], the OCMF can feed its signal to the OST exclusively. When
On-T is set for the scheme switch [OCMFS-EN], the OCMF operates the trip function, whereas
the OCMF activates for the OST when On-S is set for the scheme switch [OCMSF-EN]. If the
OCMF has to be disabled, Off is set for the scheme switch [OCMSF-EN].
2.18.5 Under-voltage element for phase-to-earth (UVFS)

The UVFS measures a phase-to-earth voltage and its sensitivity is set with setting [UVFS].
The operation of the UVFS is initiated when the phase-to-earth voltage drops below the
setting and On is set for the setting [UVFS-EN].
2.18.6 Under-voltage element for phase-to-phase (UVSFS)

In UVSFS, when a phase-to-phase voltage is below setting [UVSFS], the UVSFS is initiated.
The setting [UVSFS] is enabled when On is set for the setting [UVSFS-EN].
2.18.7 Under-voltage change detection element (UVDFS)

This element operates if a voltage drops below a setting voltage compared to that of the
previous cycle. The sensitivity of the UVDFS is configured by setting [UVDFS]. In addition,
the UVDF has off-delay timers and setting [TUVDFS] is provided to adjust the timers.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 235 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.18.8 Scheme logic

Figure 2.18-3 and Figure 2.18-4 show the scheme logic of the FS. As described earlier, each
element has a scheme switch that can either enable or disable the operation. To disable FS,
Off is set for the scheme switch [FS-EN], then the trip circuit can operate regardless of the
result of the FS.
8C00011C20
A
8D00011C21 ≥1
OCFS B OCFS-OP
8E00011C22 &
C
OCFS-EN ON
TOCDFS
8800021C20 0 t
A
8900021C21 ≥1 OCDFS_OP
OCDFS B
0 t &
8A00021C22 0 t
C
0.00-300.00s
OCDFS-EN ON
8000051C20
A
8100051C21 ≥1 UVFS-OP
UVFS B &
8200051C22
C
UVFS-EN ON
8400061C20
A
8500061C21 ≥1
& UVSFS-OP
UVSFS B
8600061C22
C
UVSFS-EN ON
TUVDFS
8800071C20
0 t
A
8900071C21 ≥1 UVDFS-OP
UVDFS B 0 t &
8A00071C22
C 0 t
0.00-300.00s
UVDFS-EN ON
Figure 2.18-3 Soft fail scheme logic (1)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 236 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
0.00-300.00s 8300041B6
8000041C60
L1 &
≥1 OCMFS_OP
&
8100041C61 &
L2 8000041B61
8200041C62 &
& OCMFS_OP_SEP
L3
OCMFS ≥1
8300041C63
L4 &
8400041C64
L5 &
8500041C65
L6 &
L7 8600041C66
&
5s
ON-T
ON-S
OCMFS-EN
Off
FS-EN_OFF
8F00031C23
EFFS
& EFFS-OP
EFFS-EN ON
Figure 2.18-4 Soft fail scheme logic (2)
To TRC
OCFS-OP 8000001B23
FSRY-OP
OCDFS_OP
UVFS-OP
UVSFS-OP
≥1
UVDFS-OP
OCMFS_OP
EFFS-OP
FS-EN Off
FS-EN=OFF
Figure 2.18-5 Output signal of the FS

(2.60.1)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 237 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.18.9 Setting
Setting of FS(Function ID: 48B001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
Failsafe FS-EN Off / On - Fail safe enable Off
OCFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe OCFS enable On
OCFS 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A OCFS relay operating value 1.00 5.00
OCDFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe OCDFS enable On
OCDFS 0.05 - 0.20 0.25 - 1.00 A OCDFS relay operating value 0.10 0.50
TOCDFS 0.00 - 300.00 s Extended time of OCDFS operating 10.10
EFFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe EFFS enable On
EFFS 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A EFFS relay operating value 0.20 1.00
OCMFS-EN Off / On-T / On-S - Fail safe OCMFS enable On-T
UVFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe UVFS enable On
UVFS 5.0 - 130.0 V UVFS relay operating value 46.0
UVSFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe UVSFS enable On
UVSFS 5.0 - 130.0 V UVSFS relay operating value 80.0
UVDFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe UVDFS enable On
UVDFS 1 - 20 V UVDFS relay operating value 5
TUVDFS 0.00 - 300.00 s Extended time of UVDFS operating 10.10
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 238 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.18.10 Data ID list

FS(Function ID: 48B001)
8C00011C20 OCFS-A OCFS relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00011C21 OCFS-B OCFS relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00011C22 OCFS-C OCFS relay element operated (phase-C)
8800021C20 OCDFS-A OCDFS relay element operated (phase-A)
8900021C21 OCDFS-B OCDFS relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00021C22 OCDFS-C OCDFS relay element operated (phase-C)
8F00031C23 EFFS EFFS relay element operated
8000041C60 OCMFS-L1 OCFS relay element operated (phase-L1)
8000051C20 UVFS-A UVFS relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100051C21 UVFS-B UVFS relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200051C22 UVFS-C UVFS relay element operated (phase-CA)
8400061C20 UVSFS-AB UVSFS relay element operated (phase-A)
8500061C21 UVSFS-BC UVSFS relay element operated (phase-B)
8600061C22 UVSFS-CA UVSFS relay element operated (phase-C)
8800071C20 UVDFS-A UVDFS relay element operated (phase-A)
8900071C21 UVDFS-B UVDFS relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00071C22 UVDFS-C UVDFS relay element operated (phase-C)
8000001B23 FSRY_OP Fail Safe Relay open signal by Fail Safe
8300041B60 OCMFS-OR OCMFS relay element operated (7-phase OR)
8000041B61 OCMFS_OP_SEP Fail Safe Relay open signal by OCMFS
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 239 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
VT failure detection (VTF)

If a failure occurs on the secondary circuit in the voltage transformer (VT), the operation in
relays cannot be obtained properly because the relays do not measure voltages correctly.
Therefore, the VT failure detection (VTF) function is provided to block operating the relays
upon occurrence of the VT failure. Accordingly, if a VT failure is detected by the VTF function,
an alarm signal is issued for the relays upon occurrence of the VT failure. Accordingly, an
alarm signal is issued if a VT failure is detected by the VTF function; a detection signal by the
VTF function blocks operating the relay for the voltage monitor 1.
After the disappearance of the VT failure, the VTF function can take account of the VT
secondary circuit being in healthy condition in the three-phase; the operation of the VTF
function is reset2. Thus, the blocked relays are allowed to operate again. Incidentally, issuing
the VTF alarm is automatically removed and then the user can find resetting the VTF alarm.
1Note: The VTF function can block the operation in several relays, but it does not block
the operation in other relays. To know the blocking, refer sections of the respective
protection functions.
2Note: The user can programmable the operation using the setting and the PLC signals.
(2.62.0)
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 240 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.19.1 VTF features

The VTF function has three relay elements in order to decide the failure in the VT; hence two
criterions (i.e., for VTF1 and VTF2) exist to detect the failure in the VT.
(i) Phase-to-earth under voltage element (UVVTF)

For the VTF1 function, the under-voltage element (UVVTF) monitors the under voltage. The
threshold of the UVVTF relay is set using the [UVVTF].
(ii) Earth fault overcurrent element (EFVTF)

For the VTF2 function, the earth fault overcurrent element (EFVTF) monitors the
overcurrent in zero-sequence. The threshold of the EFVTF relay is set using the [EFVTF].
(iii) Earth fault overvoltage element (OVGVTF)

For the VTF2 function, the earth fault overvoltage element (OVGVTF) monitors the over
voltage in zero-sequence. The threshold of the OVGVTF relay is set the using [OVGVTF].
(iv) Detection criterion for the VTF1

The criterion for the VTF1 function is defined when the UVVTF relay operates whereas the
OCD relay does not operate.
(v) Detection criterion for the VTF2

The criterion for the VTF2 function is defined when both the EFVTF relay and the OCD relay
are not operated whereas the OVGVTF relay is operated.
2.19.2 Operation for the VTF function

When the VTF function detects the failure, issuing the VTF1_DETECT signal is continuing
regardless of the operation of the OCD relay, provided On is set for both the [VTF1EN] and the
[VTF2EN]. Issuing the VTF2_DETECT signal is also continuing regardless of the operation of
both the OCD and the EFVTF relays. Note that issuing the VTF_DETECT signal is cleared
when the operations of the UVVTF relay and the OVGVTF relay are reset.
However, nonetheless the OCD/EFVTF relay is still running after the VTF detection,
issuing the VTF_DETECT signal is cleared, provided OPT-On is set for the settings [VTF1-EN]
and the [VTF2EN].
When issuing the VTF_DETECT signal continues longer than ten seconds, the signal
VTF_DETCT clears to generate the VTF_ALARM signal.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 241 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.19.3 VTF Logic

Figure 2.19-1 shows the logics of the VTF function. As described earlier, the VT failure is
grouped into the VTF1 criterion (VTF1_DETECT) and the VTF2 criterion (VTF2_DETECT).
When we consider the VTF1 criterion, the upper logic in Figure 2.19-1 is used; whereas we
consider the VTF2 criterion, lower one is used.
The user can select either the VTF1 or VTF2 criteria using the using the scheme switch
[VTF1EN] or [VTF2EN].
VTF1 DETECT
8000001C20
A &
8100011C60 8000001B61
≥1 ≥1 t 0
8100001C21 VTF1_ALARM
UVVTF B t 0
1 S
C 8200001C22 1 10.0s
t 0
0.015s ≥1
1 R
From PROT-CCOMMON1
0.1s
OCD-AT ≥1 S
OCD-BT
≥1
&
OCD-CT R
& 1
t 0
1 &
10.0s
On ≥1
VTF1-EN OPT-On
VTF2 DETECT
8800001C27
OVGVTF & 8200021C60 8200021C60
≥1 t 0 VTF2_ALARM
1 t 0
1 S 10.0s
8400001C28
t 0
0.015s ≥1
EFVTF 1 R
≥1 0.1s ≥1
S
800000B62
≥1 &
R VTF_ALARM
& To Automatic supervision

1
&
To OC3
On ≥1 To EF3
VTF2-EN OPT-On To UV3
To UVS3
To OV3
From PROT-COMMON1 To OVS3
To OVG3
To OVP3
CB_ALLPH_CLOSE 1 To OVN3
0. 2s To UVP3
1 To OCN3
From DISTANSE-ZS2 To CARRIER_DEF3
8000001B61 To DISTANCE-COMMON3
PSBS-VTF-BLK ≥1 ≥1
VTF_DETECT
From DISTANSE-ZG2
PSBG-VTF-BLK
From test
AMF_OFF 1
800000EBB0 VTF_BLOCK
8100001BB1
810000EBB1 EXTERNAL_VTF
Figure 2.19-1 Scheme logic in the VTF function

1Note: Signal CB_ALLPH_CLOSE is provided from Protection common function
(PROT_COMMON). The OCD relay is used for both the VTF1 DETECT and the
VTF2 DETECT. For more information, see Chapter Relay application: Protection
common.
2Note: Entering signals coming from distance protections (ZS/ZG) are available if the
ZS/ZG protections are provided in the IED. For more information with regard to
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 242 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
the ZS/ZG protections, see Chapter Relay application: Distance protection, when
available.
3Note: Output signals are provided for respective relays when the relays are available.
See Appendix: Ordering whether the relays are supplied into the IED.
4Note: AMF feature is used for the test. To generate the AMF signal, see chapter User
interface: test-submenu.
If a PLC signal is injected at the PLC connection point “VTF_BLOCK”, the operation of
the VTF function is blocked. The user can program to inject an external signal for the failure
detection using the PLC connection point EXTERNAL_VTF; the VTF_DETECT signal is
generated when the signal is injected at the EXTERNAL_VTF. (2.62.1)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 243 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.19.4 Setting
Setting of VTF(Function ID: 490001)
Range Default setting value
Un
Setting item Contents 1A 5A Notes
1A rating 5A rating its
rating rating
VTF VTF1 VTF1-EN Off / On / OPT-On - VTF1 enable On
Phase under voltage revel for
UVVTF 1.0 - 220.0 V 20.0
VTF1 detection
VTF2 VTF2-EN Off / On / OPT-On - VTF2 enable On
Zero phase over voltage revel for
OVGVTF 1.0 - 220.0 V 20.0
VTF2 detection
0.10 - 0.50 - Zero phase over current revel for
EFVTF A 0.20 1.00
50.00 250.00 VTF2 detection block
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 244 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.19.5 Data ID
VTF(Function ID: 490001)
8400001C2B EFVTF EFVTF relay element operated
8100001BB1 EXTERNAL VTF External VTF receive
8800001C27 OVGVTF OVGVTF relay element operated
8000001C20 UVVTF-A UVVTF relay element operated(Phase-A)
8100001C21 UVVTF-B UVVTF relay element operated(Phase-B)
8200001C22 UVVTF-C UVVTF relay element operated(Phase-C)
8000001B62 VTF ALARM VTF alarm (VTF1 ALARM/VTF2 ALARM OR)
8000001B61 VTF DETECT VTF detected (VTF1 DET/VTF2 DET OR)
8100011C61 VTF1 ALARM VTF1 alarm (10s timer)
8100011C60 VTF1 DET VTF1 detected
8200021C61 VTF2 ALARM VTF2 alarm (10s timer)
8200021C60 VTF2 DET VTF2 detected

VTF(Function ID: 490001)
800000EBB0 VTF BLOCK VTF block signal
810000EBB1 EXTERNAL VTF External VTF receive
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 245 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
CT failure detection (CTF)

If a failure occurs on the secondary circuit in the current transformer (CT), the operation in
relays cannot be obtained properly because the relays do not measure incoming currents
correctly. Therefore, the CT failure detection (CTF) function is provided to block operating the
relays1 upon occurrence of the CT failure. Accordingly, an alarm signal is issued if a CT failure
is detected by the CTF function; a detection signal by the CTF function blocks operating the
relay for the current monitor1.
After the disappearance of the CT failure, the CTF function can take account of the CT
secondary circuit being in healthy condition in the three-phase; the operation of the CTF
function is reset2. Thus, the blocked relays are allowed to operate again. Incidentally, issuing
the CTF alarm is automatically removed and then the user can find resetting the CTF alarm.
1Note: The CTF function can block the operation in several relays, but it does not block
the operation in other relays. To know the blocking, refer sections of the respective
protection functions.
2Note: The user can programmable the operation using the setting and the PLC signals.
(2.63.0)
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 246 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.20.1 CTF features

The CTF function has two relay elements in order to decide the failure in the CT; hence two
criterions exist to detect the failure in the CT in the CTF function.
(i) Earth fault overcurrent element (EFCTF)

The earth fault overcurrent element (EFCTF) monitors the zero-sequence current for the
failure in the CT. The threshold of the EFCTF element is set using the [EFCTF].
(ii) Earth fault overvoltage element (OVGCTF)

The earth fault overvoltage element (OVGCTF) monitors the zero-sequence voltage for the
failure in the CT. The OVGCTF element is set using the [OVGCTF].
(iii) Detection criterion (CTF_DETECT)

When the EFCTF element operates whereas the OVGCTF element does not operate, the
detection criterion (CTF_DETECT) is applied.
2.20.2 Operation for the CTF function

When the CTF function detects the failure, issuing the CTF_DETECT signal is continuing
regardless of the operation of the OVGCTF relay, provided On is set for the scheme switch
[CTF-EN]. Issuing the CTF _DETECT is continued until the operation of the EFCTF relay is
reset.
However, nonetheless the OVGCTF relay is still running after the CTF detection,
issuing the CTF_DETECT signal is cleared, provided OPT-On is set for the scheme switch
[CTF-EN].
When issuing the CTF_DETECT signal continues longer than ten seconds, the signal
CTF_DETECT clears to generate the CTF_ALARM signal.
2.20.3 Scheme logic

Figure 2.20-1 shows the logic of the CTF function. CTF_DET signal is issued when the EFCTF
element is running and the OVGCTF element is not running.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 247 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8000001C23
EFCTF
&
1 8100001B60 8000001B61
≥1 t 0
CTF_ALARM
t 0
S
10.0s To Automatic supervision
t 0
10.0s ≥1
8100001C27 1 R
OVGCTF & 0.1s
On ≥1
CTF-EN OPT-On
&
From PROT-CCOMMON1
CB_ALLPH_CLOSE 1 To EF3
0.02s To BCD3
To OCN3
From DISTANSE-ZS2
8000001B62
To UC3
PSBS-VCTF-BLK ≥1
1 ≥1
CTF_DETECT
From DISTANSE-ZG2
PSBG-VCTF-BLK
From test4
AMF_OFF 1
800000EBB0 CTF_BLOCK
8100001BB1
810000EBB1 EXTERNAL_CTF
Figure 2.20-1 Scheme logic in the CTF function

1Note: Signal CB_ALLPH_CLOSE is provided from Protection common function
(PROT_COMMON). For more information, see Chapter Relay application:
Protection common.
2Note: Entering signals come from distance protections (ZS/ZG) when the ZS/ZG are
available in the IED. For more information, see Chapter Relay application:
Distance protection.
3Note: Output signals are provided for respective relays when the relays are available.
See Appendix: Ordering whether the relays are supplied into the IED.
4Note: AMF feature is used for the test. To generate the AMF signal, see chapter User
interface: test-submenu.
If a PLC signal is injected at the PLC connection point “CTF_BLOCK”, the operation of
the CTF function is blocked. The user can program to inject an external signal for the failure
detection using the PLC connection point EXTERNAL_CTF; the CTF_DETECT signal is
generated when the signal is injected at the EXTERNAL_CTF. (2.63.1)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 248 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.20.4 Setting
Setting of CTF(Function ID: 491001)
Setting item Units Contents 1A 5A Notes
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
CTF-EN Off / On / OPT-On - CTF enable On
Zero phase over current level
EFCTF 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A 0.20 1.00
CTF for CTF detection
Zero phase over voltage level
OVGCTF 1.0 - 220.0 V 20.0
for CTF2 detection block
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 249 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.20.5 Data ID
CTF(Function ID: 491001)
8000001B61 CTF ALARM CTF alarm operated
8100001B60 CTF DET CTF det
8000001B62 CTF DETECT CTF detect
8000001C23 EFCTF EFCTF relay element operated
8100001BB1 EXTERNAL CTF External CTF receive
8100001C27 OVGCTF OVGCTF relay element operated

CTF(Function ID: 491001)
800000EBB0 CTF BLOCK CTF block signal
810000EBB1 EXTERNAL CTF External CTF receive
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 250 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Single-end fault locator (FL-Z)

The function of the single-end fault locator (FL) is to determine the location of faults that
occur on a transmission line with a high degree of reliability. Determination of the location of
faults provides a useful contribution to the recovery of circuits in the event of power system
failures. Fault location is provided by the FL function; computation is based on
impedance-based algorithms using information at the local end of the line only.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 251 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.21.1 Computation method

The FL calculation requires more than three cycles of power system information to determine
the location of the fault. The FL calculation uses a reference current (If") obtained by
measuring the change in the current before and after the occurrence of a fault. The reference
current (If") removes the influence of load current (IL) and arc voltage.
The accuracy† of the FL calculation is influenced by both the line impedance (Z) and the
fault current (If). Thus, the user should note that the FL computation maintains an accuracy
of better than ± 2.5 km (1.6 mile) for the distance GF shown in Figure 1.1-1 for up to 100km
(62 mile)‡ of the length of the line regardless of the setting of the length of the line GH ( 0 to
500 km (310 mile)). The accuracy of the FL calculation is better than ± 2.5% when the fault is
located 100 km to 500 km from the FL function, provided that the length of the line GH is
between 100 km to 500 km.
The FL calculation runs separately for phase-to-phase faults and earth-faults. Hence,
the selection of algorithm depends upon the type of fault that occurs.
†Note: Both line impedance and rated-current affect the accuracy of the FL computation.
If the VCT is set for 1 ampere rated-current operation, the accuracy of the FL
computation can be maintained provided that the ratio of the reactance of the
series-impedance per unit-length is greater than 0.05, provided that the fault
current that flows is greater than 2 ampere on the secondary side of the CT circuit.
For the VCT being set for 5 ampere rated-current, the same FL accuracy can be
kept when the ratio of the reactance of the series-impedance per-unit-length is
greater than 0.01, provided that the fault current that flows is greater than 10
ampere. For more information on the rated-current of the VCT, see chapter
Technical description: Transformer module .
‡Note:In order to maintain the accuracy of the FL computation, the user can use
compensation factors when unbalanced impedances are occurred in the
transmission line. (2.66.1.0)
(i) Equations for earth faults

Figure 2.21-1 shows an earth fault occurring in phase-a on transmission line GH. The fault
distance (GF = χ) can be determined using the following equations:
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 252 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Line GH
t
Distance GF
TT
t
Bus G If Bus H
Line 1
Fault F TT
FL TT t IL
t t
Source Load/Source
Line 2
G’ TT H’
t
Figure 2.21-1 Relationship between fault location and local IED in parallel line
2Ia − Ib – Ic
Iα = (2.21-1)
3
2Ia − Ib – Ic 2ILa − ILb – ILc

Iα " = − (2.21-2)
3 3
Im(Va ・Iα ") × L

χ=
{Im(R1 ∙ Iα ∙ Iα " + R 0 ∙ I0s ∙ Iα ") + Re(X1 ∙ Iα ∙ Iα " + X 0 ∙ I0s ∙ Iα ")} × K a
(2.21-3)
where,
Vα: Fault voltage (=Va0)
Iα: Fault current
Iα": Current change before and after fault occurrence
Ia, Ib, Ic: Fault currents in phase-‘a’, phase-‘b’, and phase-‘c’
ILa, ILb, ILc: Load currents in phase-‘a’, phase-‘b’, and phase-‘c’
I0s: Zero-sequence current on the local line i.e. ‘Line 1’
R 1: Resistance component of positive-sequence self-impedance (Z1),
[FL_R1]
X1: Reactance component of positive-sequence self-impedance (Z1), [FL_X1]
R 0: Resistance component of zero-sequence self-impedance (Z0), [FL_R0]
X0: Reactance component of zero-sequence self-impedance (Z0), [FL_X0]
Ka: Compensation factor for phase-‘a’ in an unbalanced 3-phase line,
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 253 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
[FL_Ka]
Im( ): Imaginary part when a value is placed in parentheses
Re( ): Real part when a value is placed in parentheses
L: Length of line GH in kilometers or miles, [FL_line_km] / [FL_line_mile]
Equation (2.21-3) is used generally when the transmission lines are treated as having
lumped constants. The user should consider the influence of the distributed capacitance of the
transmission line. Therefore, when the distance to the fault (GF) is greater than 100km (62
mile), the FL computation introduces another fault distance (GF = χ") using Equation (2.21-4).
χ3
χ" = χ − k 2 × (2.21-4)
3
where,
k: Propagation constant is pre-fixed by the manufacturer of the transmission line.
(k=0.001𝑘𝑚−1). (2.66.1.4)
(ii) Equation for phase-to-phase faults

When the occurrence of a phase-‘b’-to-phase-‘c’ fault is considered, the distance to the fault
(GF = χ) is computed using the following equations:
Ibc = Ib − Ic (2.21-5)
Vbc = Vb − Vc (2.21-6)
If " = Ibc − (ILb − ILc ) (2.21-7)
Im (Vbc ∙ If ) × L
χ= (2.21-8)
{𝑅𝑒(R1 ∙ Ibc ∙ If ) + 𝐼𝑚(X1 ∙ Ibc ∙ If )} × K bc
where,
Ibc: Fault current in phase-‘b’-to-phase-‘c’
Vbc: Fault voltage in phase-‘b’-to-phase-‘c’
ILb, ILc: Load currents in phase-‘b’ and phase-‘c’ before fault occurrence
Kbc: Compensation factor for phase-bc in an unbalanced 3-phase line, [FL_Kbc]
Equation (2.21-8) is a general expression used when the transmission lines are treated
as having lumped constants; Equation (2.21-8) is sufficient to compute the fault distance
(GF = χ) for faults that occur within 100km (62 mile) of the length of the transmission line.
When the fault distance is greater than 100km (62 mile), Equation (2.21-4) is used to obtain a
compensated value for the fault distance (GF = χ"). (2.66.1.2)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 254 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.21.2 Output of FL computation on display

Although the display screens and operations in the standard IED are discussed separately in
the Chapter Recording function, the display screen for the FL function is described here
because the FL output is unique compared to that of the standard display screens. Figure
2.21-2 shows an example of the FL display screen.
a. Fault distance in kilometers
FL ****.*km
***% OB / NC
c. Fault information
b. Fault distance in percent
Figure 2.21-2 FL information in km and percent (%) on the screen

Note: If there is an error in the setting information with regard to the length of the
transmission line, the FL computation does not start (a dash sign “—” is displayed
on the screen).
(i) Fault distance expressed in kilometers or miles

The fault distance can be displayed in the user-preferred unit† (see Figure 2.21-2.a).
Additionally, the FL computation does not output the fault distance until a trigger signal‡ has
been removed for the FL function.
†Note:The user should note that the fault distance is based on the location of the local
IED (see Figure 2.21-1). Figure 2.21-2 is shown in kilometers, but the user can
change that so that the fault distance is expressed in miles. The setting is
discussed later. (See section 2.21.3(iv))
‡Note:We shall discuss the trigger signal in the succeeding section.
(ii) Fault distance in percentage

The user can view the fault distance as a percentage value (see Figure 2.21-2.b).
As shown in Figure 2.21-1, a single IED is located near Bus G. When a fault (F) occurs
on the line GH, the fault distance (GF) is calculated in percent using the following equation.
Distance to fault F
Fault distance (%) = × 100 (2.21-9)
Length of Line GH
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 255 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) Fault information

Detailed information is displayed along with the distance to the fault (see Figure 2.21-2.c).
The output of the FL information is simplified by means of notations; these are summarized
in Table 2.21-2.
Table 2.21-2 Notation of fault information on screen

Fault info.
Meaning Comment
notation
The FL function determines a fault location as being
OB Outside boundary outside of the boundary. The boundary is defined with
setting [FL_Line_km] or [FL_Line_mile].
If a number of computation results are scattered, the FL
NC No convergence† function will select one of the resulting values from
where the scattering is minimal.
†Note:The FL function can determine the convergence in the computation when the
difference between the maximum value and the minimum value is less than 0.2 km.
For the convergence decision, the values are calculated three times: a value
calculated for the current samples, a value three samples prior to the current
samples and a value six samples prior to the current samples. (2.66.2)
2.21.3 Setting and operation

To run the FL function, the user must provide several setting items: the direction for which
the fault location is required, the mode selection for impedance settings, the impedances† of
the local and adjacent lines, imbalance-impedances and compensation factors, distance-unit
for the FL function, and others.
†Note:For impedance settings, the user should convert the primary values to secondary
values with regard to the line VT and CT. Set impedances as total-impedances; do
not set impedances as impedance per distance-unit.
(i) Impedance setting using symmetrical components

Provided the self-impedances and the mutual-impedances are symmetrically balanced (that is,
Zaa=Zbb=Zcc and Zab=Zbc=Zca), then symmetrical setting is applicable. If the impedance
unbalances cannot be ignored, the user shall set a compensation factor (section (i)-4) or use a
matrix setting (section (ii)).The following equations are used to acquire the zero-sequence and
positive-sequence impedances.
Zaa + Zbb + Zcc − (Zab +Zbc + Zca )

Z1 = (2.21-10)
3
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 256 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Zaa + Zbb + Zcc + 2(Zab + Zbc + Zca )

Z0 = (2.21-11)
3
where,
Z1: Positive-sequence series-impedance
Z0: Zero-sequence series-impedance
Zaa, Zbb, Zcc: Self-impedances for each phase conductor
Zab, Zbc, Zca: Mutual-impedances between phases
Selection of symmetrical setting mode

Prior to setting, the user should set the scheme switch [FL_ImpSet] to Symmetrical.
Setting zero-sequence impedance

With regard to the zero-sequence-impedance (Z0GH), the user should set the value of
resistance for setting [FL_R0] and the value of reactance for setting [FL_X0]. (See
Figure 2.21-1)
Setting positive-sequence impedance

With regard to the positive-sequence-impedance (Z1GH), the user should set the value
of resistance for setting [FL_R1] and the value of reactance for setting [FL_X1]. (See
Figure 2.21-1)
Setting compensation factors

Set 100% for the settings when the impedance unbalances can be ignored in each of
phases. If the self- and mutual-impedances are unbalanced, then the user should
adjust the FL results using compensation factors expressed using Equations (2.21-12)
to (2.21-17) below. The user can set the values of the compensation factors using
settings [FL_Kab] to [FL_Kc] in the symmetrical setting mode.
Zaa + Zbb
− Zab
K ab = 2 (2.21-12)
Z1
Zbb + Zcc
− Zbc
K bc = 2 (2.21-13)
Z1
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 257 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Zcc + Zaa
− Zca
K ca = 2 (2.21-14)
Z1
Zab + Zca
Zaa −
Ka = 2 (2.21-15)
Z1
Zbc + Zab
Zbb −
Kb = 2 (2.21-16)
Z1
Zca + Zbc
Zcc −
Kc = 2 (2.21-17)
Z1
(ii) Impedance setting using matrix components

With regard to Figure 2.21-1, when the voltage and current on a transmission line can
be expressed using matrix components, the user can select the following matrix
setting:
Va Zaa Zab Zac Ia

[Vb ] = [Zba Zbb Zbc ] [Ib ] (2.21-18)
Vc Zca Zcb Zcc Ic
where,
Zaa: Phase-‘a’ self-impedance on line GH (=Zbb=Zcc)
Zab: Mutual-impedances between phase-‘a’ and phase-‘b’ on line GH (=Zbc=Zca)
Selection of matrix setting mode

Prior to applying the matrix settings, the user should set the scheme switch
[FL_ImpSet] Matrix.
Setting self-impedances
With regard to the self-impedances, the user should set the resistance of the
self-impedances for settings [FL_Raa], [FL_Rbb] and [FL_Rcc] and set the reactance
of the self-impedances for settings [FL_Xaa], [FL_Xbb] and [FL_Xcc].
Setting mutual-impedances
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 258 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
With regard to setting the mutual-impedances, the user should set the resistance of
the mutual-impedance for settings [FL_Rab], [FL_Rbc] and [FL_Rca] and set the
reactance of the mutual-impedances for settings [FL_Xab], [FL_Xbc], and [FL_Xca].
Setting compensation factors

If imbalanced impedances are considered, Equations (2.21-10) and (2.21-11) are used
to acquire the zero-sequence and positive-sequence impedances. The calculations are
executed internally by the FL function; thus, the user does not need to consider them
in the matrix setting mode.
(iii) Assumption of fault direction

The user can select the direction for the FL computation to be in either the forward or the
reverse direction. When the forward direction is selected, other protection elements related to
the FL computation should have the same direction If the user selects the reverse direction,
other corresponding functions should have the reverse direction. Otherwise, the FL
computation will fail to start.
Figure 2.21-3 illustrates the relationship between the location of faults relative to the
direction of FL computations. The user should set the scheme switch [FL_Dir] Forward if the
fault location computation is required for faults that occur in the forward direction.
Conversely, set [FL_Dir] Reverse if the fault location computation is required for faults that
occur in the reverse direction.
Bus G Bus G
Fault Fault If
If
IED IED
IEF
IEF
a. Fault in Forward direction b. Fault in Reverse direction
Figure 2.21-3 Forward fault and reverse fault
Table 2.21-3 Setting [FL_DIR] corresponding to the setting of OC and other relay elements
Direction of the relay (OC element etc) Scheme switch [FL_DIR]
Forward Forward
Reverse Reverse
Non-dir Forward / Reverse
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 259 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iv) Setting the unit of length/distance

As shown in Figure 2.21-2, the fault location is displayed in kilometers when km is set for
scheme switch [FL_Unit]. On the other hand, if the preference is to display the fault location
in miles, the user should set mile for the scheme switch [FL_Unit]. In the case that km is set
using scheme switch [FL_Unit], the user can apply a value to set the line length using
[FL_Line_km]. In the case that mile is selected in setting [FL_Unit], the value of setting
[FL_Line_mile] is used to apply the line length value.
(v) Setting of FL execution

The FL computation is ready when On is set for setting [FL_EN].
(vi) Compensation for earth faults on parallel lines

When applied to parallel lines the FL computation for earth faults is compensated by
introducing the residual current (3I0) from the adjacent line. The residual current is used to
compensate the input current when the earth fault occurs. It is also possible to compensate
the input current using the source-impedance if the residual current on the adjacent line is
not available. Note that this form of compensation is only used when I0m cannot be
introduced from the parallel line.
We recommend that the input current be compensated using the residual current from
the adjacent line; compensation using the residual current improves the accuracy of the FL
computation. (Set scheme switch [FL-Z0B] to Off)
If the residual current of the adjacent line is not available, the user should set the
scheme switch [FL-Z0B] On so that the FL result is compensated using the zero-sequence
source-impedances for an earth fault. Table 2.21-4 summarizes the compensation methods
provided together with a brief description of each method and the settings necessary for an
earth fault.
Table 2.21-4 Method and setting of earth fault compensation
Required setting objects Required power
Compensation Switch Impedance Description of the compensation system quantities
method [FL-Z0B] setting method for respective
operation
When the residual current is available

[FL_R0m] I0m, Ia, Ib, Ic,
from the adjacent line, the
Residual-current Off and Va, Vb, Vc
compensation method
[FL_X0m]
“Residual-current” is applicable.
[FL_Z0B_L],
If the residual current is not
[FL_Z0B_R],
available, the compensation method Ia, Ib, Ic, Va, Vb,
Source-impedance On [FL_R0m],
“Source-impedance” should be Vc
and
selected.
[FL_X0m]
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 260 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
†Note: For a single line circuit, the local IED computes the residual current (3I0) using
the AC analog input currents internally, FL compensation is executed
automatically within the IED. Therefore, the user is not required to set the scheme
switch [FL-Z0B] Off.
(vii) Trigger of data save and calculation in operation

The FL requires start signals for the computation. The signals are provided by the following
protection functions:
(a) Distance protection
(b) Over current protection
(c) Carrier protection (command protection)
(d) External protection
With regard to the signals of the external protection function, user is allowed to program
the trigger of data-saving and calculation with Data IDs. The following Data IDs (PLC
connection points) are provided as the trigger to start the FL calculation.
Data ID “FL_RecF” and “FL_RecR”: Trigger for data save
Data ID “FL_LocF” and “FL_LocR”: Trigger for of calculation
Note: Data IDs are listed in section 2.21.5.
Data recording
Figure 2.21-4 shows logic that consists of elements of protection function; and these elements
output a trigger signal to data recording. These elements are sorted into the FL are from the
function of distance protection (ZS/ZG and ZCS/ZCG) and overcurrent protection (OC). When
these elements are operated, operation signals are outputted. In the FL, the respective
operation signals are summarized by the “OR” logic of Figure 2.21-4. This logic has selection
scheme that is prescribed by scheme switch [FL-Dir]. As a result, the FL can record the
current and voltage data if the fault occurs in either the forward direction or the reverse
direction.
Note: For the FL calculation, it is required to fit the direction of the FL calculation
between the FL and other protection function. For example, if Forward is set for
the scheme switch [FL-Dir], user should set Forward for the respective scheme
switches [Z*S-DIR], [Z*G-DIR] and [OC*]. If the contradiction is found in the
direction, the FL does not run. Additionally, it is required to check that the
respective settings of the protection functions are placed properly. For further
information, see section 2.21.3(iii).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 261 -
IR
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Forward
Z1S DIR Reverse The data
Z1S
≥1 (current and
Forward
Z1XS DIR Reverse ≥1 voltage) saved
Z1XS Forward
Forward
by the
&
Reverse
operation of
Z2S Z2S DIR
elements of
Forward
protection
Z3S DIR Reverse
Z3S functions.
≥1
Operation signal of ZS elements
≥1
Forward The data
Z1G DIR Reverse Reverse (current and
Z1G
≥1 voltage) saved
Forward
Z1XG DIR Reverse & by the
Z1XG
operation of
Forward
elements of
Z2G DIR Reverse
Z2G protection
Forward
functions.
Z3G DIR Reverse
Z3G
≥1
Operation signal of ZG elements
Forward
OC1-Dir Reverse ≥1
OC1
Forward
OC2-Dir Reverse
OC2 Forward
FL-DIR Reverse
Operation signal of OC elements ≥1
ZC
Operation signal of ZCS and ZCG elements
DIFL
RDIF ≥1
DIFG
RDIFG
Operation signal of DIF elements

Forward
310022EC60 FLZ_RecF ≥1
310022EC64 FLAZ_RecF Reverse

≥1
310022EC61 FLZ_RecF
310022EC65 FLAZ_RecR
PLC signals
Figure 2.21-4 Data recording start (Current and voltage data saved)
FL calculation start
Figure 2.21-5 shows logic for the FL calculation. In this logic, starting signals from the
respective protection functions are provided for the FL. Note that the operation resultants of
respective functions are used to start the FL calculation. The operation resultants are not the
same as the operation signals of the protection elements, as in Figure 2.21-4.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 262 -
DIR 6F2S1905 (0.80)
Forward
Z1S DIR Reverse FL calculation
Z1S
≥1 started by the
Forward
Z1XS DIR Reverse ≥1 result signals
Z1XS Forward
Forward
of respective
&
Reverse functions.
Z2S Z2S DIR
Forward
Z3S DIR Reverse
Z3S
≥1
Result signal of ZS elements
≥1
Forward FL calculation
Z1G DIR Reverse Reverse started by the
Z1G
≥1 result signals
Forward
Z1XG DIR Reverse & of respective
Z1XG
functions.
Forward
Z2G DIR Reverse
Z2G
Forward
Z3G DIR Reverse
Z3G
≥1
Result signal of ZG elements
Forward
OC1-Dir Reverse ≥1
OC1
Forward
OC2-Dir Reverse
OC2 Forward
FL-DIR Reverse
Result signal of OC elements ≥1
ZC
Result signal of ZCS and ZCG elements
DIFL
RDIF ≥1
DIFG
RDIFG
Result signal of DIF elements

Forward
310022EC60 FLZ_RecF ≥1
310022EC64 FLAZ_RecF Reverse

≥1
310022EC61 FLZ_RecF
310022EC65 FLAZ_RecR
PLC signals
Figure 2.21-5 FL calculation start (fault locator initiated)

Above-mentioned recording and starting calculation can be also started by the DATA IDs
above: FL_RecF”, “FL_RecR”, “FL_LocF”, and “FL_LocR.
(2.66.4)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 263 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.21.4 Setting
Setting of FL-Z (Function ID: 495001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Switch FL_EN Off / On — Fault locator enable On
Selection of the direction for fault
FL_Dir Forward / Reverse — Forward
location
Selection in the setting mode for
FL_ImpSet Symmetrical / Matrix — Symmetrical
impedance
Zero sequence compensation of
FL_Z0B Off/ On — —
the parallel line
FL_Unit km / mile — Selection of line length unit km
Line1 FL_Line_km 0.0 – 500.0 km Line length (km) 50.0
_Element FL_line_mile 0.0 – 310.0 mi Line length (mile) 0
Reactance component of line
FL_Xaa 0–1000 0–200 Ω 10.5 2.1
(Xaa)
FL_Xbb 0–1000 0–200 Ω 10.5 2.1
(Xbb)
FL_Xcc 0–1000 0–200 Ω Reactance component of line (Xcc) 10.5 2.1
FL_Xab 0–1000 0–200 Ω 0.5 0.1
(Xab)
FL_Xbc 0–1000 0–200 Ω 0.5 0.1
(Xbc)
FL_Xca 0–1000 0–200 Ω 0.5 0.1
(Xac)
Resistance component of line
FL_Raa 0–1000 0–200 Ω 1.1 0.21
(Raa)
FL_Rbb 0–1000 0–200 Ω 1.1 0.21
(Rbb)
FL_Rcc 0–1000 0–200 Ω 1.1 0.21
(Rcc)
FL_Rab 0–1000 0–200 Ω 0.1 0.01
(Rab)
FL_Rbc 0–1000 0–200 Ω 0.1 0.01
(Rbc)
FL_Rca 0–1000 0–200 Ω 0.1 0.01
(Rac)
FL_X1 0–1000 0–200 Ω 10 2
positive sequence impedance
FL_R1 0–1000 0–200 Ω 1 0.2
positive sequence impedance
Reactance component of line zero
FL_X0 0–1000 0–200 Ω 34 6.8
sequence impedance
Resistance component of line zero
FL_R0 0–1000 0–200 Ω 3.5 0.7
sequence impedance
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kab 50–150 % 100
compensation factors
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kbc 50–150 % 100
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kca 50–150 % 100
Impedance imbalance
FL_Ka 50–150 % 100
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kb 50–150 % 100
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 264 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting of FL-Z (Function ID: 495001)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kc 50–150 % 100
0.00 – 0.00 – Reactance component of line
FL_X0m Ω 10.00 2.00
1000.00 200.00 mutual zero sequence impedance
0.00 – 0.00 – Resistance component of line
FL_R0m Ω 1.00 0.02
1000.00 200.00 mutual zero sequence impedance
0.00 – 0.00 – Zero-sequence source-impedance
FL_Z0B_L Ω 10.00 2.00
1000.00 200.00 at local terminal
0.00 – 0.00 – Zero sequence source/Load
FL_Z0B_R Ω 10.00 2.00
1000.00 200.00 impedance at remote terminal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 265 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.21.5 Data ID
FL-Z (Function ID: 495001)
8000101349 FLTFLAG Fault locator update flag
3100101348 FLTLOOP Fault loop
3100101005 FLTQUALITY Quality of fault locator

FL-Z (Function ID: 495001)
310002EC62 FL_LOCF Fault locate start signal (forward)
310002EC63 FL_LOCR Fault locate start signal (Reverse)
310002EC60 FL_RECF Record start signal (forward)
310002EC61 FL_RECR Record start signal (reverse)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 266 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Autoreclose (ARC)
The basic objective of auto-reclosing is to restore automatically the transmission line back
into service, after being tripped by line protection relays, without depending on the operator
action. The use of auto-reclosing will improve the system stability and reliability. The choice
of the auto-reclosing type, such as, one or more reclosing shots, high speed or delayed,
single-phase or multi-phase depends on the characteristics of the transmission and protective
system together with the utility practice. The suitability of a particular auto-reclosing scheme
may also be established by conducting a transient analysis study of the interconnected
electrical network.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 267 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.22.1 Outline
Table 2.22-2 summarizes the reclosing operations and the modes in the ARC function. The
ARC function can operate for both a single CB arrangement and double CBs (1.5CB)
arrangement; hence, the ARC function is grouped into two logics: ARC1 for CB#1 and ARC2
for CB#2. Note that multi-shots scheme is only available for 1CB arrangement (CB#1). The
‘ORIGINAL’ is provided for the user’s programing.
Table 2.22-2 ARC operation modes and shot numbers
1CB or 1.5CB arrangement
Reclosing
Shot number 1CB 1.5CB
mode
ARC1 ARC2 ARC1&2
SPAR X (N.A) x
ARC1 SHOT1
TPAR X (N.A) x
or/and
SPAR&TPAR X (N.A) x
ARC2 SHOT
ORIGINAL X (N.A) x
ARC1 SHOT2 X (N.A) (N.A)
x: Operation is applicable N.A: Operation is not applicable
(i) Breaker system

The ARC function can operate in several breaker systems, as shown in Figure 2.22-1. For the
1.5CB arrangement, the ARC1 and ARC2 logics operate separately; the user can select
different reclosing scheme (Figure 2.22-1.b).
CB#1
Line Busbar G
Line VT Bus VT
CB#1 Reclosing for CB#1
Relay(G)
Bus VT VCHK1(G) VCHK1(G)
Line VT
ARC1(G)
VCHK2(G)
ARC1(G) ARC2(G)
Reclosing CB#1
Line1
Busbar G
CB#2
Reclosing for CB#2
Line VT
Line2
[ARC1-MODE]= FT / SPAR / TPAR / SPAR&TPAR [ARC1-MODE]= FT / SPAR / TPAR / SPAR&TPAR

[ARC2-MODE]= Off [ARC2-MODE]= FT / SPAR / TPAR / SPAR&TPAR
a.1CB arrangement system (CB#1) b. 1.5 CB arrangement (CB#1 and CB#2)
Figure 2.22-1 Breaker systems
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 268 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Reclosing modes in 1CB and 1.5CB

Single-phase auto reclose (Setting [ARC1-MODE]=SPAR)
A faulted phase is tripped by relay applications if a single-phase earth fault occurs; then the
ARC function tries to recloses the CB. In the case that the phase-to-phase (or multi-phases)
fault occurs, the CB is tripped forcibly in three-phases by the instruction of the ARC function
regardless of the fault detection of relay application; the ARC function does not try to reclose
the CB. For the SPAR mode, reclosing the CB is performed without the synchronism check
and voltage check.
Three-phase auto reclose (Setting [ARC1-MODE]=TPAR)

The CB is tripped forcibly in three-phases whether the relay applications detect single-phase
fault type or multi-phase fault type; then, the CB will be reclosed by the ARC function. To
reclose the CB, the permission signal of the voltage and synchronism check (VCHK†) function
is required in the TPAR mode.
†Note:VCHK are automatically applied in the TPAR mode (for ARC1 SHOT1 and ARC2
SHOT). For more information, see Chapter Relay application: Voltage check for
auto reclose.
Single- and three-phase auto reclose (Setting [ARC1-MODE]=SPAR&TPAR)

The CB is tripped in single-phase by the fault detection of relay applications if a single-phase
fault occurs; the ARC function tries to reclose the CB. Three-phase tripping is performed if a
multi-phase fault occurs; then, the CB will be reclosed by the ARC function. Note that the
VCHK permission signal is required to reclose the CB in the three-phase tripping (i.e., TPAR
scheme), but the VCHK permission signal is not required in signal-phase tripping (i.e., SPAR
scheme).
Setting selection about SPAR and TPAR modes

Since power can be transmitted through healthy phases even during the dead time, the SPAR
mode is convenient for maintaining power system stability. On the other hand, the capacitive
coupling effect between the healthy phase and faulty phase may cause a longer de-ionization
time when compared to the TPAR mode. That is, a longer dead time is required in the TPAR
mode. A shorter dead time can be set in the TPAR mode when compared to the SPAR mode.
For the TPAR mode in the 1.5CB arrangement, synchronism check and voltage check
(VCHH) between the bus bar (for bus CB#1) and the line or between the two lines (for center
CB#2) are required. The reclosing order between CB#1 and CB#2 can be selected using
setting [ARC-ORDER]; that is, CB#1 recloses first followed by CB#2 (i.e.,
[ARC-ORDER]=CB1)or vice versa (i.e., [ARC-ORDER]=CB2). Simultaneous closure of CB#1
- 269 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
and CB#2 can also be selected (i.e., [ARC-ORDER]=SIMUL).
(iii) User configurable autoreclose (Setting [ARC1-MODE]=Original)

In the user configurable auto reclose mode (ORIGINAL), the user can manage the scheme of
the ARC procedure and it allows the user program the ARC function by the PLC function.
(iv) Number of reclosing shots

Single-shot autoreclose (Setting [ARC-NUM]=S1 in 1CB)
In single-shot autoreclose scheme, autoreclose is performed only once. If the fault cannot be
cleared after reclosing, the ARC function reaches final tripping stage (ARC1 FT) and the ARC
function instructs the TRC to make three-phase tripping (94CB1_TT). The first shot (ARC1
SHOT1) is just issued when setting [ARC-NUM]=S1, as described in Table 2.22-2.
Multi-shot autoreclose (Setting [ARC-NUM]=S2/S3/S4/S5 in 1CB)

Any of the two-shot (S2) to five-shot (S5) reclosing can be selected in multi-shot autoreclose
scheme. Successive shots (ARC1 SHOT2 to ARC1 SHOT5) are three-phase tripping and
reclosing, if the first shot (ARC1 SHOT1) fails. For ‘ARC1 SHOT2’ to ‘ARC1 SHOT5’, which
are applied in three-phase reclosure, the user shall introduce a permission signal by PLC
programming or the voltage and synchronism check signal. Closing status of the CB main
contact can be monitored in the PROT_COMM function; the ARC function can evaluate the
successful reclosing-operation after issuing the shots (ARC1 SHOT1 and others). A failure
(ARC1 CLOSE FAIL) is signaled if the CB#1 fails to close after issuing the ‘ARC1 SHOT1 and
others’.
Signle-shot autoreclose (Setting [ARC-NUM]=S1 in 1.5CB)

Note that multi-shot autoreclose will not be applied in the 1.5CB busbar arrangement. The
first shot (ARC1 SHOT1/ARC2 SHOT) is just issued for the CB#1 and the CB#2. Closing
status of the CB#1 and CB#2 main contacts can be monitored in the PROT_COMM function;
the ARC function issues a failure signal (ARC1 CLOSE FAIL or ARC2 CLOSE FAIL) if a CB
fails to close after issuing the ‘ARC1 SHOT1’ or ‘ARC2 SHOT’.
(v) Operation failure in tripping CB

A check is required to determine whether the CB have been tripped to open properly when the
relay applications detect the fault. If the CB cannot open within the required time, a failure
signal “CB fail to open” is indicated; the ARC function resets the reclose operation of the CB
and a shot is not issued.
(vi) Final trip stage

When the ARC function detects the following conditions, the ARC function goes to ‘Final trip’
- 270 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
stage, which the ARC issues a three-phase trip command (CB1_94TT or CB2_94TT) for the
TRC function; the ARC function abandons to reclose the CB#1 and CB#2 (ARC1 FT or ARC2
FT).
 CB is not ready for ARC operation
 Failure to issue ARC shot
 ARC block command has come through PLC connection points
 Multi-phase trip in SPAR mode
 Evolving fault (single phase to multiphase) in SPAR and TPAR mode
 Final trip selected for 3-phase fault (user settable)
 ARC close fail
 Shot number over
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 271 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.22.2 Terminology
The terminology and signals outlined below are applicable for single CB#1 system. Signals
applicable for CB#2 in a two (2) CB system are similar and are not included for clarity.
(i) Relay operation period

The time interval commencing from the instant of the relay picking-up for the fault current to
the instant of the relay dropping-off following the cessation of the fault current.
(ii) Temporary/transient/Arc fault

A transient/temporary fault, the main cause of which is often due to lightning, (an over
voltage induced in a line due to the static electricity caused by the lightning may cause a flash
over across the insulator string), temporary contact with foreign objects, conductor clashing as
a consequence of strong wind.
(iii) Arcing time of CB

When the CB#1 contacts separate during tripping, an arc is produced between the CB#1
contacts; the arc is extinguished by the interrupting medium in the CB#1. The duration of
arcing is called the ‘Arcing time’, which is the time between the instant of separation of the
circuit breaker contacts and the instant of the extinction of the fault arc.
(iv) Permanent fault (Signal ‘ARC1 FT’)

Fallen conductors, tree growth, tree branches that have fallen across lines, as well as other
causes, may all produce permanent faults. As the operation of the ARC function is unable to
restore power transmission for permanent faults, the ARC function abandons the reclosing of
the CB#1, defined as the ‘Final trip (ARC1 FT)’ stage. If the ARC function gets into the ‘ARC1
FT’ stage, closing the CB#1 is only possible by the manual operation.
(v) Signal shot scheme (Signal ‘ARC1 SHOT1’)

The ARC function issues a first auto-reclosing signal ‘ARC1 SHOT1’ when a ‘GEN.TRIP’
signal is issued in the trip circuit (TRC†) by the first relay operation. When the user programs
the ARC function not to provide subsequent reclosures, this operating sequence provides only
one reclosing operation; then, lockout will occur on subsequent tripping, i.e. the ‘Final trip
(ARC1 FT)’ stage.
†Note:For more information, see chapter Relay application: Trip circuit.
(vi) Multi shot scheme (Signals ‘ARC1 SHOT2–5’)

Signals ‘ARC1 SHOT2’ to ‘ARC1 SHOT5’ may be issued after the ‘ARC1 SHOT1’ signal when a
persistent fault occurs.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 272 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(vii) Dead time (Delay timers TTPAR† and TD_MS2–5)

The dead time is the time interval from relay operation i.e. the initiation of the auto-reclose
scheme, to the inception of the ‘ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND’ used to energize the circuit
breaker closing circuit and is provided by delay timer [TTPAR1]. A substitute delay timer
[TTPAR1_SUB] is also available when the user wishes to program the inception of the ‘ARC
1SHOT1’ signal using the PLC function instead of [TTPAR1], this feature is only provided in
the event that the user wishes to replace the original logic.
The dead times for sequential operation of the autoreclose scheme ‘ARC1 SHOT2’ to
‘ARC1 SHOT5’, are provided by delay timers [TD_MS2]–[TD_MS5], respectively.
†Note:delay timer [TTPAR] is available when the ARC function operates in TPAR mode.
For the operation in other SPAR and ORGAR modes, the user should also set
values for delay timers [TSPAR1] and [TORGAR1].
(viii) Pulse width of ‘ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND’ (Setting TCCW1)

An ‘ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND’ signal is issued after the dead time. Setting [TCCW1] is used
to define the pulse-width of the reclosing commands for respective shots1–5.
(ix) Final trip stage to abandon CB reclosure (Signal ‘ARC1 FT’ and
setting TRR1, TRR_MS2–5)
TRR1 is the time from the ARC1 initiation to abandoning issuing the ‘ARC1 SHOT1’. In
TPAR† mode the permissive signal ‘ARC1-VCHK’ must be issued by the VCHK function
within the time interval of TRR1 at the end of the dead time (i.e., TRR1 has not timed out),
otherwise the ARC function abandons the reclosure of CB#1. That is, if TTPAR1 has timed out
and ‘ARC1-VCHK’ permissive has not been issued within TRR1 time, TRR1 signal yielded in
the TPAR mode ends up ‘Final Trip (ARC1 FT)’. Note that the timer setting of the [TRR1]
timer should be set greater than that applied to the dead time delay timer [TTPAR1] to ensure
that the dead time has fully expired.
Likewise, for shots 2–5 the timers [TRR_MS2] and others issue the signal for ‘Final Trip
(ARC1 FT)’ if the respective shots are not issued within the set time.
†Note:We can see similar ARC behavior in the other SPAR, MPAR, and ORGAR modes.
(x) Reset for tripping failure (Signal ‘ARC1 RESET’ and setting TRESET)
Subsequent to the reception of the ‘GEN.TRIP’ signal, a check is required to determine
whether the CB#1 has opened. If the CB#1 has not opened within the time setting of timer
[TRESET], then “CB#1 failing to be opened” is judeged by the ‘ARC1 RESET’ signal, which
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 273 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
also resets the reclose operation of the CB#1. The duration of the setting applied to the
[TRESET] timer must be less than the setting applied to the ARC dead time delay timers (e.g.
[TTPAR] etc.).
(xi) Decision time for successful operation or failure (Setting TARCSUC

and signals ‘ARC1 CLOSE SUCCESS’, ‘ARC1 CLOSE FAIL’, ‘ARC1
SHOT RS’)
The [TARCSUC] timer provides the following functionality depending on the setting of scheme
switch [ARC-SucChk].
Scheme switch [ARC-SucChk]=On

With [ARC-SucChk] set to On, timer [TARCDSUC] is used to define the checkpoint at which
the CB#1 (and #2) are closed successfully after issuing the ‘ARC1(or 2) CLOSE COMMAND’
signal following which, an ‘ARC1( or 2) CLOSE SUCCESS’ signal is issued.
If the CB fails to close within the setting of timer [TARCSUC],an ‘ARC1 CLOSE FAIL’ signal
is issued and the ARC1 function moves to the ‘Final trip (ARC1 FT)’ stage.
Successful reclose of the CB (subsequent to fault clearance) is checked by the ‘Success

check’ logic, which checks for the signal ‘CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE’ provided by the protection
common function (PROT_COMMON). Clearing the fault automatically resets the ARC1
operation.
Scheme switch [ARC-SucChk]=Off

With [ARC-SucChk] set to Off, timer [TARCSUC] may be used to check for a successful
closure following the issue of the ‘ARC1 SHOT’ command. The ‘ARC1 SHOT RS’ signal is
generated which is used for resetting the ARC function about the CB#1 reclosure.
Note: a CB failure to close condition cannot be detected; the user shall incorporate the
check scheme externally.
(xii) Progress of ARC operation (Signals ‘ARC1 IN-PROG’ and others)

Information regarding the progress of an ARC operation is provided following the reception of
the ‘GEN.TRIP-A/B/C’ signals as follows:
Entire ARC progress for all shots (signal ‘ARC1 IN-PROG’)

The ‘ARC1 IN-PROG’ signal is defined for the time from issuing the first ‘GEN.TRIP-A/B/C’ to
the confirmation of the ARC successful operation or the final trip.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 274 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Respective progress for respective shots (signal ‘ARC1-S* IN-PROG/OR’)

Respective signals ‘ARC1-S* IN-PROG’ are defined for the operation of respective shots. A
common ‘ARC1 IN-PROG OR’ is also issued.
Trigger for the ARC operation (signal ‘ARC_START’)

The ‘ARC_START’ signal shows the instant at which ‘GEN.TRIP-A/B/C’ signals are given from
the TRC function. If an external relay can generate the ‘ARC_START’ signal, the user can use
it by programing the binary input circuit (BI) in the PLC function.
Tripped phases (signals ‘TRIP-ANYPH’, ‘TRIP-1PH’, ‘TRIP-MPH’, ‘TRIP-3PH’)

Start logic also decides whether the trip mode is single-phase, multi-phase or three-phases.
These signals are used for issuing ARC1 SHOT1 in SPAR/TPAR modes.
(xiii) Reclaim timer (Setting ‘TREADY’)

Certain considerations are required to ensure that the ARC function is ready for the next
cycle of operation; the reclaim timer ‘TREADY’ is provided within the ARC function to
accommodate this requirement. When a CB is closed for the first time subsequent to the
maintenance of a distribution line, the closure would normally be expected to be successful
(that is, the CB is closed on to a healthy line). Then the minimum time setting of the
[TREADY] reclaim timer should be longer than the time required to judge that the CB has
closed successfully.
Another consideration required for this setting is that after the CB has gone through a
successful ARC cycle; the maximum allowable successive close-open operations are achieved
with the setting. In this case, the minimum time delay required before the CB is ready for the
next ARC cycle becomes the setting criteria for the [TREADY] timer.
Where the incidence of recurrent lightning strikes is experienced, a shorter reclaim time
will prevent the ARC function going into an unnecessary lock out. On the other hand, caution
is required when considering the exposure of the CB to an excessive number of ARC cycles
caused by recurrent faults which will result in an increase in the frequency of the
maintenance cycle.
In summary, the time required for the CB to be ready for the next cycle of ARC is the
minimum setting that can be applied to the reclaim timer [TREADY] in the ARC function.
(xiv) CB bridge (Signal ‘CB1_BRIDGE’)

The ‘CB1_BRIDGE’ signal is thrown into the TRC function when the ARC1 logic fails to be
‘Ready condition’. The ‘CB1_BRIDGE’ signal ensures three-phase tripping in the CB#1 when
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 275 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
a per-phase trip signal is provided in the TRC function.
(xv) Condition logic (Signals ‘ARC1_SPAR_COND’, ‘ARC1_TPAR_COND’)

The ‘Condition’ logic issues the above signals depending on the setting [ARC1 MODE] and the
tripped phases (i.e., signal ‘TRIP-ANYPH’ and others). This logic is available when the setting
[ARC1 MODE] = SPAR, TPAR, or SPAR&TPAR.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 276 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.22.3 Function block diagram

The function diagrams for respective modes are illustrated; they represents the general flow
of the logic in the ARC1 function. For simplicity, the function block diagrams are represented
for CB1 in a 1CB arrangement in Figure 2.22-2, Figure 2.22-3, and Figure 2.22-4; the logics
are similar for CB2 in the 1.5CB arrangement except that only a single shot is permitted in
the 1.5CB arrangement. Note that the logics are shown for a two (2) shot scheme for
simplicity.
Each functional block diagram is grouped into a number of logic blocks; four typical functional
block diagrams are illustrated below:
(i) Issuing ‘ARC SHOT1’ and ‘ARC SHOT2’ in 1 CB of the SPAR mode
(ii) Issuing ‘ARC SHOT1’ and ‘ARC SHOT2’ in 1 CB of the TPAR mode
(iii) Issuing ‘ARC SHOT1’ and ‘ARC SHOT2’ in 1 CB of the SPAR and TPAR mode
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 277 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(i) SPAR mode

Figure 2.22-2 illustrates the ARC function when settings of are performed in both Table 2.22-3
and Table 2.22-4.
Table 2.22-3 Block parts in SPAR mode

Block parts Corresponding logics Detailed logic
[1] ARC1-Mode input Figure 2.22-10
[2] Shot number Figure 2.22-12
[3] Start Figure 2.22-13
[4] Initiation Figure 2.22-14
[5] Shot counter Figure 2.22-15
[6] Condition Figure 2.22-16
[7] ARC1 SPAR Figure 2.22-17
[8] ARC1 SHOT2 Figure 2.22-20
[9] Issuing Figure 2.22-21
[10] Success check Figure 2.22-22
Table 2.22-4 Setting examples in SPAR mode

Categories Items Settings Corresponding logics
ARC1-Mode SPAR Figure 2.22-10
ARC general ARC2-Mode Off Figure 2.22-11
ARC-NUM S2 Figure 2.22-12
TREADY 60.0s Figure 2.22-14
TSPAR1 0.80s Figure 2.22-17
ARC1 TSPAR1_SUB 300.00s Figure 2.22-17
TRR1 2.00s Figure 2.22-17
TCCW1 0.20s Figure 2.22-21
TD_MS2 20.00s Figure 2.22-20
ARC1 multi-shot
TRR_MS2 30.00s Figure 2.22-20
ARC-SucChk On Figure 2.22-22
TARCSUC 0.30s Figure 2.22-22
FT-3pFault Off Figure 2.22-13
ARC misc.
TRESET 0.30s Figure 2.22-14
TEVLV 0.30s Figure 2.22-16
SHOTNUM-TEST Off Figure 2.22-15
PROT-COMMON CB-System 1CB See Protection common function
VCHK ARC1-VCHK EN Off VCHK signal not required
TRC TP-MODE Per-Phase See Trip circuit
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 278 -
800001EBCF ARC1_BLOCK To BO
≥1 ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND
820000EBB4 ARC_BLOCK
ARC1 BLOCK COM
From TRC
GEN.ARC-BLOCK ARC1 RESET
≥1
Start
Multi-phase Trip in SPAR1
GEN.TRIP-A 3
&
GEN.TRIP-B &
GEN.TRIP-C
Condition as to CB#1
800000EBB0 EXT.ARC_START-A ARC1 IN-PROG OR To TRC
6 ARC1 FT
TRIP-MPH
800000EBB1 EXT.ARC_START-B
TRIP-1PH CB1_94TT
TRIP-1PH C
ARC1 SPAR_COND
800000EBB2 EXT.ARC_START-C B SPAR
ARC START ARC1-S1 IN-PROG ≥1
From PROT_COMM NO-OFF
CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE Failure to issue shot
≥1
CONSTANT_1
TRESET1
≥1 & t 0
810001EBC9 ARC1-S2 COND
Initiation for CB#1

Shot1 for CB#1 3
Issuing for CB
4 C ARC1 SPAR
9
ARC START 7 Success check
A & ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND
CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE ARC1_SPAR_COND ARC1 10
S ARC1-S1 IN-PROG SHOT1
800001EBB7 CB1-ARC READY CB1-ARC READY ARC1 SHOT ARC1 SHOT
& ARC1 SPAR ARC1 SHOT1
R
ARC START
ARC1 IN-PROG SPAR1_COND ARC1 SHOT2
ARC1 RS SPAR1_START CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE
ARC1 NOT-IN-PROG ARC-S1 TRR
D SHOT_1ST ARC1 NOT IN PROG
Shot2–Shot5 for CB#1
≥1
S ARC1 SHOT2
ARC1 CLOSE FAIL
A & R ARC1-S2 IN-PROG
ARC1
ARC1-S2 COND SHOT2
ARC1 CLOSE SUCCESS
ARC1 SHOT2
8
ARC1-Mode input ARC1-S2 TRR
ARC-SucChk
1
ON
SPAR B
≥1 Shot counter
820001EBB2 ARC1_MODE-SPAR
ARC1-MODE=NO-OFF 5
ARC1 NOT_IN-PROG
Shot number
From PROT_COMM ARC1 SHOT1 SHOT_1ST D
2
ARC-NUM
CB-System ARC1 SHOT2 SHOT-2ND
CB-SYSTEM=1CB 1CB A
1CB S2
Figure 2.22-2 ARC SHOT1 and SHOT2’ in SPAR mode of 1CB system
6F2S1905 (0.80)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 279 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) TPAR mode

and Table 2.22-6.
Table 2.22-5 Block parts in TPAR mode

[7] ARC1 TPAR Figure 2.22-18
[11] Reclose sequence Figure 2.22-23
Table 2.22-6 Setting examples in TPAR mode

ARC1-Mode TPAR Figure 2.22-10
ARC2-Mode Off Figure 2.22-11
ARC general
ARC-ORDER CB1 Figure 2.22-23
TTPAR1 0.60s Figure 2.22-18
ARC1 TTPAR1_SUB 300.00s Figure 2.22-18
TD_MS2 20.00s Figure 2.22-20
ARC1 multi-shot
ARC misc. FT-3pFault Off Figure 2.22-13
VCHK ARC1-VCHK EN On See Voltage check for autoreclose
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 280 -
ARC1 BLOCK COM
From TRC
&
Start
GEN.TRIP-A 3
GEN.TRIP-B
(vi) ARC1 condition
GEN.TRIP-C
Condition as to CB#1
6
ARC1 FT
800000EBB1 EXT.ARC_START-B
TRIP-ANYPH TRIP-ANYPH CB1_94TT
ARC1 TPAR_COND C
800000EBB2 EXT.ARC_START-C B TPAR

(ix)ARC1 Issuing close
From VCHK ≥1
ARC1-VCHK TRESET1
≥1 & t 0
TPAR logic
Initiation for CB#1

Shot1 for CB#1
4 ARC1 TPAR Issuing for CB
ARC START C
7 9 Success check
CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND (vii)ARC1 Shot1
A &
ARC1 10
800001EBB7 CB1-ARC READY CB1-ARC READY ARC1_TAR_COND
SHOT1
S ARC1-S1 IN-PROG (x) ARC1 success check
ARC1 SHOT ARC1 SHOT
& ARC1 TPAR ARC1 SHOT1
R
TPAR1_COND ARC START
ARC1 IN-PROG Logic for shot2
TPAR1_START ARC1 SHOT2
ARC1 RS CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE
D SHOT_1ST
ARC1 CLOSE FAIL ≥1
ARC1 SHOT2 (viii)ARC1 Shot2–Shot5
S ARC1 NOT IN PROG
ARC1
ARC1-S2 COND SHOT2
ARC1 SHOT2
8
ARC1-S2 TRR
ARC1-Mode input ARC-SucChk
1
ON
TPAR B Shot Counter
≥1
820001EBB2 ARC1_MODE-TPAR
5 Reclose sequence
ARC1-MODE=NO-OFF ARC1 NOT_IN-PROG
11 TPAR1_START
Shot number ARC-ORDER
From PROT_COMM ARC1 SHOT1 SHOT_1ST D
2 CB1
ARC-NUM
CB-SYSTEM=1CB 1CB A
1CB S2
Figure 2.22-3 ARC SHOT1 and SHOT2 in TPAR mode of 1CB system
6F2S1905 (0.80)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 281 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) SPAR and TPAR mode

and Table 2.22-8.
Table 2.22-7 Block parts in SPAR and TPAR mode
[7] ARC1 TPAR Figure 2.22-19
[11] Reclose sequence Figure 2.22-23
Table 2.22-8 Setting examples in SPAR and TPAR mode

ARC1-Mode SPAR&TPAR Figure 2.22-10
ARC2-Mode Off Figure 2.22-11
ARC general
ARC-ORDER CB1 Figure 2.22-23
TSPAR1 0.80s Figure 2.22-17
TSPAR1_SUB 300.00s Figure 2.22-17
ARC1 TTPAR1 0.60s Figure 2.22-19
TTPAR1_SUB 300.00s Figure 2.22-19
TD_MS2 20.00s Figure 2.22-20
ARC1 multi-shot
FT-3pFault Off Figure 2.22-13
ARC misc.
TEVLV 0.30s Figure 2.22-16
VCHK ARC1-VCHK EN On See Voltage check for autoreclose
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 282 -
ARC1 BLOCK COM
From TRC
&
Start
GEN.TRIP-A
3
GEN.TRIP-B
Condition as to CB#1 (vi) ARC1 condition
GEN.TRIP-C
6
ARC1 FT
800000EBB1 EXT.ARC_START-B C
TRIP-MPH ARC1 SPAR_COND CB1_94TT
TRIP-MPH
800000EBB2 EXT.ARC_START-C B SPAR&TPAR
ARC1 TPAR_COND D

(ix)ARC1 Issuing close
From VCHK ≥1
ARC1-VCHK TRESET1
≥1 & t 0
TPAR logic
Shot1 for CB#1

Initiation for CB#1 Issuing for CB
C ARC1 SPAR&TPAR
4 7 9
D
ARC1_SPAR_COND ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND Success check (vii)ARC1 Shot1
ARC START A &
ARC1_TPAR_COND ARC1
CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE SHOT1
10
S ARC1-S1 IN-PROG (x) ARC1 success check
CB1-ARC READY ARC1 SHOT ARC1 SHOT
800001EBB7 CB1-ARC READY & ARC1_SPAR ARC1 SHOT1
R ≥1
TPAR1_CONDARC1_TPAR ARC START
ARC1 IN-PROG Logic for shot2
TPAR1_START ARC1 SHOT2
ARC1 RS CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE
E SHOT_1ST
ARC1 CLOSE FAIL ≥1
ARC1 SHOT2 (viii)ARC1 Shot2–Shot5
S ARC1 NOT IN PROG
ARC1
ARC1-S2 COND SHOT2
ARC1 SHOT2
8
ARC1-Mode input ARC1-S2 TRR
ARC-SucChk
1
SPAR&TPAR Shot Counter ON
B
≥1
800001EBB7 ARC1_MODE-S&T 5 Reclose sequence
ARC1-MODE=NO-OFF ARC1 NOT_IN-PROG 11
TPAR1_START
Shot number ARC-ORDER
From PROT_COMM ARC1 SHOT1 SHOT_1ST E
2 CB1
ARC-NUM
CB-SYSTEM=1CB 1CB A
1CB S2
Figure 2.22-4 ARC SHOT1 and SHOT2 in SPAR&TPAR mode of 1CB system
6F2S1905 (0.80)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 283 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.22.4 Timing diagram

(i) Single shot scheme for an Arcing fault (Shot1 for CB#1 and
successful operation in TPAR mode)
Figure 2.22-5 illustrates an example for which the single shot scheme has been selected (i.e.
[ARCNUM]=S1); an arcing fault is cleared following the operation of the protection relay and
the issue of the ‘GEN.TRIP-A/B/C’ signals for the tripping of the CB#1. The ‘GEN.TRIP-A/B/C’
also initiates the ARC function and an ‘ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND’ signal is issued following
the expiration of the dead time set for [TTPAR1]. When On is set for [ARC-SucChk], this
scheme will determine that the ARC1 was successful when the ‘CB1 ALLPH CLOSE’ signal is
detected following the issuing of the ‘ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND’ signal; the operation of the
ARC function is reset if it operates successfully (i.e., the ‘ARC1 IN-PROG’ signal is turned off).
Fault current
Closed
CB#1 status
Open
Operated
Relay operation
Issued
GEN.TRIP
ARC1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT1 Dead Time [TTPAR1]

)
ARC1-S2 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT2
ARC1-S3 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT3
ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND [TCCW1]

)
Closed
CB1_ ALLPH_CLOSE
ARC1 CLOSE SUCCESS

20ms
ARC1 CLOSE FAIL )
ARC1 FT
Figure 2.22-5 Single shot scheme [ARC-NUM]=S1 for an Arcing fault; operation is successful
Note: The permissive signal ‘ARC1-VCHK’ is required in the TPAR mode, but is omitted
here for the sake of clarity. The pulse width of the ‘ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND’
signal is defined using the setting [TCCW1].
(ii) Single shot scheme for an Arcing fault; CB#1 fails to reclose
Figure 2.22-6 also shows the single shot scheme. However, the CB#1 fails to reclose on
receiving the ‘ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND’ so that the ARC function initiates the ‘ARC1
CLOSE FAIL’ signal within the setting time [TARCDSUC]. Consequently, the ARC function
goes to the final trip (ARC1 FT) stage so that the ARC will not issue another ‘ARC1 CLOSE
COMMAND’ signal hereafter.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 284 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Fault current
Closed
CB#1 Status CB fails to be closed.
Open
Operated
Relay operation
Issued
GEN.TRIP
ARC1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT1 Dead time [TTPAR1]
ARC1-S2 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT2
ARC1-S3 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT3
ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND [TCCW1]

)
CB1 ALLPH Closed
CLOSE Open
ARC1 CLOSE SUCCESS
ARC1 CLOSE FAIL [TARCSUC]

)
ARC1 FT
Figure 2.22-6 Single shot scheme [ARC-NUM]=S1 for an Arcing fault; CB#1 fails to reclose
Note: The permissive signal ‘ARC1-VCHK’ is required in the TPAR mode for the ARC1
SHOT1 operation, but is omitted here for the sake of clarity.
(iii) Single shot scheme for Permanent fault

Figure 2.22-7 illustrates the behavior of the single shot scheme for a permanent fault.
Tripping of the CB#1 is executed correctly, but a further trip occurs following the reclosure of
the CB#1. Accordingly, the ARC function determines that the ARC1 operation cannot restore
power transmission in the single shot scheme; subsequently the ARC function goes to the final
trip (ARC1 FT) stage.
Fault current
Closed
CB#1 Status
Open
Operated
Relay operation
Issued
GEN.TRIP
ARC1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S2 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT2
ARC1-S3 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT3
ARC1 CLOSE [TCCW1]

COMMAND )
CB1 ALLPH Closed
CLOSE Open
ARC1 CLOSE SUCCESS
ARC1 CLOSE FAIL
ARC1 FT
Figure 2.22-7 Single shot ARC scheme [ARC-NUM]=S1 for Permanent fault
Note: The permissive signal ‘ARC1-VCHK’ is required for the ARC SHOT1 operation, but
is omitted here for the sake of clarity.
- 285 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iv) Single shot scheme for an Arcing fault; fault removed by a backup CB
Figure 2.22-8 shows the single shot scheme for an Arcing fault, but tripping is not executed
due to the failure of the CB#1. Therefore, the operation of the ARC function is reset in the
setting time [TRESET] before the duration of dead timer [TTPAR1] expires. Consequently, the
ARC function determines that the local CB#1 cannot be tripped to clear the fault.
Fault current
Fault cleared by tripping the backup CB at the remote end†
Closed
CB#1 Status CB at the local end fails to open
Open
Operated
Relay operation
Issued
GEN.TRIP
ARC1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S2 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT2
ARC1-S3 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT3
ARC1 CLOSE
COMMAND
CB1 ALLPH Closed

CLOSE Open
ARC1 CLOSE SUCCESS
ARC1 CLOSE FAIL
ARC1 FT
Reset
ARC RESET [TRESET]
)
Figure 2.22-8 Single shot scheme [ARC-NUM]=S1 for an Arcing fault; remote CB† tripped
†Note:the fault is removed by the tripping of the CB at the remote end; hence, the fault
current will no longer flow.
(v) Multi shot scheme for Permanent fault

Figure 2.22-9 illustrates the multi-shot scheme (S3); triple reclosing of the CB#1 by the ARC
function is required and executed correctly. However, the ARC function determines that the
fault is permanent as the fault persists after the third tripping (i.e. the shot counter logic
reaches its maximum value and the fault persists). Consequently, the ARC function moves to
the final trip (ARC1 FT) stage so that the ARC will not issue an ‘ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND’
signal hereafter.
- 286 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
Fault current
Closed
CB#1 Status
Open
Operated
Relay operation
Issued
GEN.TRIP
ARC1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S2 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT2 Dead time [TD_MS2]
ARC1-S3 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT3 Dead time [TD_MS3]
ARC1 CLOSE [TCCW1] [TCCW1] [TCCW1]

COMMAND ) ) )
Closed
CB1 ALLPH
Open
CLOSE
ARC1 CLOSE SUCCESS
ARC1 CLOSE FAIL

Lock out
ARC1 FT
Figure 2.22-9 Multi shot scheme [ARC-NUM]=S3 for a Permanent fault

Note:
1. The permissive signal ‘ARC1-VCHK’ is required for ARC SHOT1 operation, but has been
omitted for clarity in this figure.
2. ‘ARC1-VCHK’ permissive signal is introduced automatically in the TPAR mode. For
ARC-SHOT2 and onwards, the user must introduce the permissive signal from the
VCHK function by using PLC programming.
- 287 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.22.5 Autoreclosing logics

(i) Setting logic for ARC1 mode – setting (ARC1-MODE)
The ARC1-MODE input setting is illustrated in Figure 2.22-10. The scheme switch
[ARC1-MODE] has seven setting modes as OFF, FT, SPAR, TPAR, SPAR&TPAR and Original.
&
≥1
&
≥1
Condition
&
ARC1-MODE=SPAR
≥1
&
OFF ARC1-MODE=TPAR
≥1
FT
SPAR &
TPAR ≥1 ARC1-MODE=S&T
SPAR&TPAR
ARC1-MODE ≥1 ARC1-MODE=SPAR+S&T
ORIGINAL
&
≥1
Start
ARC1-MODE=NO-OFF
≥1
800001EBB0 ARC1_MODE-OFF &
810001EBB1 ARC1_MODE-FT &
≥1 Initiation
820001EBB2 ARC1_MODE-SPAR
& ARC1-MODE=ON
830001EBB3 ARC1_MODE-TPAR &
ARC1-MODE=OFF
800001EBB7 ARC1_MODE-S&T &
Original
To CB#
ARC1-MODE=ORG
860001EBB6
800001EBB7 ARC1_MODE-ORG &
8800011B62 To TRC
≥1
Signal ‘1’ is generated when there is no contradiction between the CB1_BRIDGE
various signals, that is only one signal is picking up.
CB
800001EBB8 CB1 F.BRIDGE
READY
Figure 2.22-10 ARC1-MODE input logic
When FT is selected, the ARC function send ‘CB1_BRIDGE’ signal for the TRC function
to be the CB being tripped in three-phases, regardless of the condition of the tripped phase,
the operation of respective protection elements, and the ARC settings; the ARC function does
not operate (i.e., ARC1-FT).
When TPAR is selected, the TRC and the ARC functions operate by the rule that the CB
is tripped in three-phases and can be reclosed. That is, ‘CB1_BRIDGE’ signal is sent for the
TRC function so that the CB will be tripped in three-phases forcibly even if a GEN.TRIP-A
(TRIP COMMAND-A) signal is only generated in the TRC function (as well as GEN.TRIP-B
and GEN.TRIP-C). Note the CB will be tripped in three-phases forcibly, even if a single-phase
fault is detected and instructed a single-phase tripping by the relay applications.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 288 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Setting logic for ARC2 mode – setting (ARC2-MODE)

The ARC2-MODE input setting is illustrated in Figure 2.22-11. The scheme switch
[ARC2-MODE] is provided similar to the [ARC1-MODE].
&
≥1 &
&
≥1 &
&
≥1 & ARC2-MODE=SPAR
& Condition
OFF
≥1 & ARC2-MODE=TPAR
FT
SPAR &
TPAR ≥1 & ARC2-MODE=S&T
SPAR&TPAR
ARC2-MODE ≥1 ARC2-MODE=SPAR+S&T
ORIGINAL
&
ARC2-MODE=MPAR
≥1 &
Start
ARC2-MODE=NO-OFF
800002EBB0 ARC2_MODE-OFF ≥1
&
810002EBB1 ARC2_MODE-FT &
820002EBB2 ARC2_MODE-SPAR ≥1 Initiation

&
ARC2-MODE=ON
830002EBB3 ARC2_MODE-TPAR &
≥1 ARC2-MODE=OFF
800002EBB7 ARC2_MODE-S&T &
Original
ARC2-MODE=ORG
860002EBB6
800001EBB7 ARC2_MODE-ORG &
Signal ‘1’ is generated when there is no contradiction between

the various signals, that is only one signal is picking up.
From PROT-COMMON
CB-SYSTEM=2CB
CB-SYSTEM=1CB
8800021B62 To TRC
≥1 CB2_BRIDGE
810002EBB9 CB2 F.BRIDGE
READY
Figure 2.22-11 ARC2-MODE input logic
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 289 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) Setting logic for shot number – setting (ARC-NUM)

The [ARC-NUM] switch is provided to set a number of reclosing CB#1.
To Initiation for CB#1
&
ARC-NUM=S1
≥1
& ARC-NUM=S2
S1
& ARC-NUM=S3
S2
S3
S4 & ARC-NUM=S4
ARC-NUM
S5
& ARC-NUM=S5
From PROT-COMMON
CB-SYSTEM=1 CB
CB-SYSTEM=2 CB
Figure 2.22-12 Shot number
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 290 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iv) Start logic – setting (FT-3P FAULT)

Start logic generates ‘ARC START’ signal when the TRC function has any ‘GEN.TRIP-A’, ‘-B’,
‘-C’ signals coming from relay functions. The type of tripping (i.e., single-phase-tripping,
two-or-three-phase-tripping, or three-phase tripping) is also checked in Start logic. Use PLC
connection points ‘EXT.ARC_START-A’ and others if an external relay is available to start the
ARC function.
To TRC
800001EBCE F.CB1_94TT CB1_94TT
810002EBCB F.CB2_94TT CB2_94TT

FT-3PFAULT
On
1
800000EBB5 RYOP-A 8500001B6C
810000EBB6 RYOP-B 1 ARC1 FT CB1_94TT

&
&
820000EBB7 RYOP-C 1
0.02s
≥1 ARC2 FT CB2_94TT
&
0 t
800001EBCF ARC1_BLOCK ≥1 ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
&
0.1s
810002EBB7 ARC2_BLOCK
0 t ARC2 FT CB2_94TT
≥1
&
0.1s 8300001B64
From TRC
GEN.ARC-BLOCK & EXT.ARC_START
≥1
8400001B65 Initiation
GEN.TRIP-A
≥1 & 1 ARC START
≥1
GEN.TRIP-B
≥1 & 1
GEN.TRIP-C
≥1 & 1
0.01s
800000EBB0 EXT.ARC_START-A Condition
8000001B66
810000EBB1 EXT.ARC_START-B S
TRIP-ANYPH
≥1
820000EBB2 EXT.ARC_START-C R
To Multiphase
S 8100001B67 trip in SPAR
R & TRIP-1PH
ARC1-MODE input 1 ≥1
S
ARC1-MODE=NO-OFF 1
≥1
R
ARC2-MODE input
ARC2-MODE=NO-OFF &
&
1
800000EBB3 ARC NO ACT 1
1
&
1
To Evolving fault
8200001B68 logic
&
≥1 TRIP-MPH
&
Initiation
&
ARC1 IN-PROG OR
8300001B69
& TRIP-3PH
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG MPAR judgment
≥1
Reclose sequence
ARC2-S1 IN-PROG 1 NON ARC-S1_ IN-PROG
Figure 2.22-13 Start logic
If the scheme switch [FT-3P FAULT] is set to On, ‘CB1_94TT’ and ‘CB2_94TT’ signals are
generated and introduce the three-phase tripping (final trip) for the TRC function during the
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 291 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
ARC1 and ARC2 functions being generating ‘ARC1 IN-PROG OR’ or ‘ARC2-S1 IN-PROG’
signals. The switch [FT-3P FAULT] requires signals of the external relay; PLC connection
points ‘RYOP-A, RYOP-B, and RYOP-C’ are used to get the signals.
Note that the ‘CB1_94TT’ and ‘CB2_94TT’ signals are generated when ‘ARC BLOCK’
signals are injected, provided ‘ARC1 IN-PROG OR’ or ‘ARC2-S1 IN-PROG’ signals is being
generated.
If, with regard to the tripped poles of CBs, there is not consistency between the CB#1
and the CB#2, the ARC function can generate the ‘CB1_94TT’ and ‘CB2_94TT’ signals when
an external device is able to detect the consistency; use PLC connection points ‘F.CB1_94TT’
and ‘F.CB2_94TT’ for the operation of the inconsistency.
The Start logic can receive a stop signal not to operate the ARC function; use PLC
connection point ‘ARC NO ACT’.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 292 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(v) Initiation logic – setting (TREADY1, TRESET)

Figure 2.22-14 illustrates the initiation logic for CB#1, which has ‘ARC1 READY’ signal
issued by the reception of signals ‘ARC1-MODE=ON’ and ‘CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE’. Note that
the user should connect a ready signal of the CB with PLC connection point ‘CB1-ARC
READY’ using the BI circuit. Reclaim timer [TREADY1] is provided; the flip-flop is set to issue
‘ARC1 IN-PROG’ signal when signals ‘ARC_READY’, ‘SHOT_1ST’ and ‘ARC1 START’ are
provided. ‘ARC1-S1 IN-PROG’ signal succeeds followed by the ‘ARC1 IN-PROG’ signal.
8800011B62 To TRC
CB1_BRIDGE
800001EBB7 CB1-ARC READY TREADY1 8000011B60

8000011B6D CB1_94TT
From PROT-COMMON & t 0 ARC1 READY
FT ARC1 UNREADY ARC1 FT
CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE 1 & ARC1 UNREADY To ARC1 Shot
&
0.0-600.0s To Start / Condition
ARC1-MODE input logic To TRC
ARC1-MODE=ON ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
ARC1 IN-PROG OR
& S
Start logic 8200011B61
S ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
ARC_START ARC1 IN-PROG R
& R
Shot counter logic S ARC1-S2 IN-PROG
SN TEST ≥1 1 ARC1 NOT_IN-PROG
R
SHOT_1ST
S ARC1-S3 IN-PROG
Initiation for CB#1
SHOT_2ND & R
SHOT_3RD & S ARC1-S4 IN-PROG

R
SHOT_4TH &
S ARC1-S5 IN-PROG
SHOT_5TH &
R
Shot1–Shot5 logics for CB#1
Done issuing
ARC1 SHOT1 TRESET
&
≥1 t 0
A
ARC1 SHOT2 & &
0.0-300.0s
ARC1 SHOT3 &
ARC1 SHOT4 &
ARC1 SHOT5 &
8800021B62 To TRC
CB2_BRIDGE
8000021B69
& FT ARC2 UNREADY ARC2 FT CB2_94TT
From PROT-COMMON
TREADY2
CB2_ALLPH_CLOSE 8000021B60
& t 0
ARC2 READY
810002EBB8 CB2-ARC READY
1 To CB#2 bridge, Final trip logic
0.0-600.0s &
ARC2-MODE input logic
ARC2 UNREADY
ARC2-MODE=ON
To Start
& ARC2-S1 IN-PROG
8200021B61
S
To Shot logic for CB#2
& R
S ARC2-S1 IN-PROG
800000EBB3 ARC NO ACT
1 ≥1
R
Success check
≥1 8700011B70 Initiation for CB#2
ARC1 RS
ARC2 RS TRESET
8700021B6C t 0
A ARC1 RESET ≥1 B
&
B ARC2 RESET
0.0-300.0s
ARC2 SHOT
Figure 2.22-14 Initiation and its outside logics
If the ‘ARC1 UNREADY’ signal is present, Initiation logic abandons to reclose the CB#1;
then, the status of the ARC function reaches the Final Trip stage (FT); three-phase trip signal
(CB1_94TT) is generated transferred for the TRC function.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 293 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
The ‘CB1-BRIDGE’ signal is used to combine any ‘per-phase trip signal’ into the
three-phase trip signal in the TRC function. Thus, the CB will be tripped in three-phases
forcibly even if a GEN.TRIP-A (TRIP COMMAND-A) signal is only generated in the TRC
function during the ‘ARC1 UNREADY’ being decided (as well as GEN.TRIP-B or
GEN.TRIP-C).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 294 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(vi) Shot counter- setting (SHOTNUM-TEST)

Figure 2.22-15 illustrates the shot counter logic. Scheme switch [SHOTNUM-TEST] is
provided for the shot number test. For example, if two shots are required for the test, set S2
for the [SHOTNUM-TEST]. Table 2.22-9 shows the counting up in the shot counter logic. Note
that the ARC function reaches the final trip stage if the counter is over.
Start
ARC START
Shot1 for CB#1 MULTI SHOT

ARC COUNTER
≥1
ARC1 SHOT1
Shot for CB#2 INIT STEP0

S
ARC2 SHOT & ≥1
R
& SHOT
Initiation for CB#1 STEP1 8400001B6B NUMBER OVER
& ≥1
ARC1 IN-PROG ≥1 & &
To TRC
ARC1 NOT_IN-PROG
& STEP2 & ≥1
&
& ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
Initiation for CB#2
ARC2 IN-PROG STEP3 &
≥1
&
ARC2 NOT_IN-PROG
STEP4 & ARC2 FT
Shot2–Shot5 for CB#1 ≥1 &
ARC1 SHOT2 ARC2 FT CB2_94TT
STEP5 8500001B72 &
& ≥1
ARC1 SHOT3 ≥1 CLOCK &
ARC1 SHOT4
ARC1 SHOT5
Shot number
8000001B81 To Fault record
ARC-NUM=S1
ARC-NUM=S2 ≥1 ARC IN-PROG

&
ARC-NUM=S3
ARC-NUM=S4 Initiation for CB#1
ARC-NUM=S5 Initiation for CB#2

8000001B6D
SHOT_1ST
8100001B6E
SHOT_2ND
8200001B6F
1 SHOT_3RD
8300001B70
SHOT_4TH
8400001B71
SHOT_5TH
≥1
SN TEST
OFF
S1
S2
S3
S4
SHOTNUM-TEST S5
S6
Figure 2.22-15 Shot counter
Table 2.22-9 Counting up in Shot counter logic

Output signals for SHOT1–5 logics
Input signals for SHOT
Shot counter logic SHOT_1ST SHOT_2ND SHOT_3RD SHOT_4TH SHOT_5TH NUMBER
OVER
INIT CLOCK STEP0 STEP1 STEP2 STEP3 STEP4 STEP5
0 (Undefined) X
Not turning X
First cycle X
1 Second cycle X
Third cycle X
Fourth cycle X
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 295 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(vii) Condition logic – setting (TEVLV)

The Condition logic determines the reclosing mode of either SPAR or TPAR by detecting the
tipped-phases if SPAR, TPAR, or SPAR&TPAR mode is selected.
Initiation
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
ARC2-S1 IN-PROG SPAR
&
ARC1 IN-PROG OR & ARC1_SPAR_COND
ARC2_SPAR_COND
Start TRIP-1PH
& TPAR
&
≥1 ARC1_TPAR_COND
TRIP-ANYPH ARC2_TPAR_COND
&
&
TRIP-MPH
&
&
&
&
≥1
To TRC
8200
CB1_94TT
&
& CB2_94TT
ARC1-MODE input
OFF
MPH-TRIP
FT &
ARC1-MODE=SPAR IN SPAR1 ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
MPAR
ORIGINAL ARC1-MODE=TPAR MP
SPAR
ARC1-MODE=S&T ARC
ARC1-MODE TPAR
SPAR&TPAR ≥1 ARC1-MODE=SPAR+S&T
ARC2
ARC2-MODE input
OFF
MPH-TRIP
FT &
ARC2-MODE=SPAR IN SPAR2 ARC2 FT CB2_94TT
MPAR
ORIGINAL ARC2-MODE=TPAR
SPAR ARC2-MODE=S&T
ARC2-MODE TPAR
SPAR&TPAR ARC2-MODE=SPAR+S&T
≥1
&
EVOLV_FAULT
8200001B6A & TIME OVER1 ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
&
TEVLV
t 0 & EVOLV_FAULT
TIME OVER2 ARC2 FT CB2_94TT
&
0.01-300.00s
Figure 2.22-16 Condition logic
When a multiphase fault (TRIP-MPH) occurs in the settings [ARC1-MODE]=SPAR, then

CB1_94TT signal is generated so that the function will reach the final trip stage. When a
single phase fault (TRIP-1PH) evolves to a multiphase fault (TRIP-MPH), then the final trip
stage is also induced; a timer [TEVLV] is provided for this purpose. Note that the timer
[TEVLV] should be lower than the dead timers [TSPAR1].
Note that the ‘CB1_94TT’ and ‘CB2_94TT’ signals are unconditionally generated when a
single phase tripping occurs in TPAR.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 296 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(viii) SPAR logic – settings (TSPAR1, TRR1)

The SPAR logic for CB#1 and CB#2 is illustrated in Figure 2.22-17. The ‘ARC1_SPAR’ signal
is generated when the SPAR condition is appeared in the Condition logic; the SPAR logic has
the dead timer [TSPAR1] provided to delay issuing a reclose command, which turns into
‘ARC1 SHOT1’ signal later. The user should set the [TRR1] to have the coordination with the
[TSPAR1]; the final trip will occur when ‘ARC1-S1 TRR’ signal is present. The SPAR logic for
CB#2 is similar to the one for CB#1.
Always ‘1’
Issuing for CB#1/CB#2
TSPAR1
Initiation 8000011B63
t 0
& ARC1_SPAR
ARC1 IN-PROG ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
&
800001EBB9 SPAR1_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
& ≥1
Condition of CB#1
800001EBBA SPAR1_COND
ARC1_SPAR_COND
TSPAR1_SUB
t 0
&
800001EBBB SPAR1_SUB_START
0.01 – 300.00 s &
800001EBBC SPAR1_SUB_COND
Always ‘1’
TSPAR2
ARC2-S1 IN-PROG t 0 8000021B63
& ARC2_SPAR
&
800002EBB9 SPAR2_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
& ≥1
Condition of CB#2
ARC2_SPAR_COND
TSPAR2_SUB
For iss
t 0
&
0.01 – 300.00 s &
800002EBBC SPAR2_SUB_COND I
TRR1
To TRC
t 0
ARC1-S1 TRR ARC1-FT CB1_94TT
0.01 – 310.00 s
TRR2
t 0
ARC2 TRR ARC2-FT CB2_94TT
0.01 – 310.00 s
Figure 2.22-17 ARC1 SPAR and ARC2 SPAR

Note: Settings [TSPAR1_SUB] and [TSPAR2_SUB] are not required as in the default.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 297 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ix) TPAR logic – settings (TTPAR1, TRR1)

The TPAR logic for CB#1 and CB#2 are illustrated in Figure 2.22-18. To operate in the TPAR
mode in the CB#1, the VCHK function provides a permission signal for the TPAR logic. The
dead timer [TTPAR1] is required to set in the logic. The user should set the [TRR1] to have the
coordination with the [TTPAR1].
From VCHK function
ARC1-VCHK
ARC2-VCHK
For Issuing for CB
From Initiation TTPAR1
8000011B63
t 0
& ARC1_TPAR
ARC1 IN-PROG ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
&
810001EBBD TPAR1_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
& ≥1
From Condition in CB#1
ARC1_TPAR_COND
810001EBBE TPAR1_COND
TTPAR1_SUB
t 0
&
&
810001EBBF TPAR1_SUB_START
0.01 – 300.00 s
810001EBC0 TPAR1_SUB_COND
From Initiation For Issuing for CB

TTPAR2
8100021B64
ARC2-S1 IN-PROG t 0
& ARC2_TPAR
&
810002EBBE TPAR2_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
& ≥1
From Condition in CB#2
ARC2_TPAR_COND
810002EBBF TPAR2_COND
TTPAR2_SUB
t 0
&
&
810002EBC0 TPAR2_SUB_START
0.01 – 300.00 s
From Reclose sequence
TPAR1_START
TPAR2_START
TRR1 To TRC
t 0 ARC1-S1 TRR CB1_94TT
ARC1-FT
0.01 – 310.00 s
TRR2
t 0 ARC2 TRR ARC2-FT CB2_94TT
0.01 – 310.00 s
Figure 2.22-18 ARC1 TPAR and ARC2 TPAR

Note: Settings [TTPAR1_SUB], [TTPAR2_SUB] are not required as in the default.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 298 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(x) SPAR+TPAR logic – settings (TSPAR1,TTPAR1,and TRR1)

The SPAR&TPAR logic for CB#1 and CB#2 is illustrated in Figure 2.22-17. As for the CB#1,
the dead timers [TSPAR1] and [TTPAR1] should be set in the coordination with the [TRR1].
Always ‘1’
From VCHK function
ARC1-VCHK
ARC2-VCHK Issuing for CB#1
TSPAR1
Condition in CB#1 t 0 8000011B63
ARC1_SPAR_COND & ARC1_SPAR
&
ARC1_TPAR_COND 800001EBB9 SPAR1_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
& ≥1
From Initiation
ARC1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
TSPAR1_SUB
t 0
&
800001EBBB SPAR1_SUB_START 0.01 – 300.00 s &
TTPAR1
8000011B63
t 0
& & ARC1_TPAR
810001EBBD TPAR1_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
& ≥1
810001EBBE TPAR1_COND
TTPAR1_SUB
t 0
&
&
810001EBBF TPAR1_SUB_START
Condition in CB#2 0.01 – 300.00 s
ARC2_SPAR_COND
ARC2_TPAR_COND Issuing for CB#2
TSPAR2
t 0 8000021B63
& ARC2_SPAR
From Initiation &
800001EBB9 SPAR2_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
ARC2-S1 IN-PROG & ≥1
TSPAR2_SUB
t 0
&
0.01 – 300.00 s &
ARC1-S1
TTPAR2
8000021B64
t 0
& & ARC2_TPAR
S1 IN-PROG 810002EBBE TPAR2_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
& ≥1
810002EBBF TPAR2_COND
TTPAR2_SUB
t 0
&
From Reclose sequence &
TPAR1_START 810002EBC0 TPAR2_SUB_START
0.01 – 300.00 s
TPAR2_START 810002EBC1 TPAR2_SUB_COND

TRR1 To TRC
t 0 ARC1 TRR ARC1-FT CB1_94TT
TRR2
0.01 – 310.00 s t 0
ARC2 TRR ARC2-FT CB2_94TT
0.01 – 310.00 s
Figure 2.22-19 ARC1 SPAR&TPAR and ARC2 SPAR

Note: Settings [TSPAR1_SUB], [TSPAR2_SUB], [TTPAR1_SUB], [TTPAR2_SUB] are not
required as in the default.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 299 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(xi) Shot2 to Shot5 for CB#1 –settings (TD_MS2, TRR2 and others)
The ARC1 logic for shot 2-shot5 is illustrated in Figure 2.22-20. Shots 2-5 are applicable for a
CB#1 only. For example, two shots (Shot2 and Shot3, i.e., [ARC_NUM]=S3) are required
following the Shot1, the user should set the [TS_MS2]/[TS_MS3] and [TRR2]/[TRR3]. The user
should program to inject a permission signal for the Shot2 and Shot3 at PLC connection
points ‘ARC1-S2 COND’ and ‘ARC1-S3 COND’, as shown in Figure 2.22-20. Note that the CB
will be tripped in three-phases forcibly even if a GEN.TRIP-A (TRIP COMMAND-A) signal is
only generated, because the ‘CB1_BRIDGE’ signal is generated during the Shot 2-Shot5.
Initiation
TD_MS2
ARC1 IN-PROG ARC1-S2 Issuing
S t 0 8100011B67
& IN-PROG
& ARC1 SHOT2
R
0.01 – 300.00 s
TD_MS3 A
ARC1-S3
& S
IN-PROG t 0 8200011B68
R
& ARC1 SHOT3
0.01 – 300.00 s
& S B
ARC1-S4 TD_MS4
R IN-PROG t 0 8300011B69
Shot counter & ARC1 SHOT4
& S 0.01 – 300.00 s
SHOT_2ND
R C
SHOT_3RD ARC1-S5 TD_MS5
SHOT_4TH IN-PROG t 0 8400011B6A
SHOT_5TH & ARC1 SHOT5
0.01 – 300.00 s
≥1 D
Shot number
TRR2
ARC-NUM To TRC
t 0
ARC1-S2 TRR ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
A Done issuing ARC1 SHOT2
0.01 – 310.00 s
B Done issuing ARC1 SHOT3
TRR3
C Done issuing ARC1 SHOT4
t 0 ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
ARC1-S3 TRR
D Done issuing ARC1 SHOT5
8100011B67 0.01 – 310.00 s
TRR 4
8100011B68
t 0 ARC1-S4 TRR ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
810001EBCA ARC1-S3 COND
8100011B69
810001EBCB ARC1-S4 COND 0.01 – 310.00 s
8100011B6A TRR 5
810001EBCC ARC1-S5 COND t 0 ARC1-S5 TRR ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
0.01 – 310.00 s
8800011B62
CB1_BRIDGE
Figure 2.22-20 ARC1 logic for Shot2 to Shot5
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 300 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(xii) Issuing close command – setting (TCCW1)

The logic for issuing close command for ARC1 and ARC2 is illustrated in Figure 2.22-21.
Shot1–Shot5 for CB#1 Success check for CB#1
ARC1 SHOT1
ARC1 SHOT
ARC1 SHOT2 TCCW1
8000011B6C To BO
ARC1 SHOT3 ≥1
ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND
ARC1 SHOT4
0.01-10.00s
ARC1 SHOT5
800001EBCD CB1_MANUAL_CLOSE
Shot for CB#2 Success check for CB#2

ARC2 SHOT
ARC2 SHOT
TCCW2
8100021B68 To BO
≥1
ARC2 CLOSE COMMAND
0.01-10.00s
810002EBCA CB2_MANUAL_CLOSE
Figure 2.22-21 Issuing for CB#1 and CB#2
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 301 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(xiii) Success check logic – settings (TARCSUC, ARC-SucChk)

Figure 2.22-22 illustrates the success check logic for CB1 and CB2.
Issuing for CB#1 TARCSUC
ARC1 SHOT S t 0
&
R ARC-SUCCHK=ON
Initiation for CB#1 ≥1 0.10-100.00s FT stage
ARC1 NOT_IN-PROG 8C00011B71 To TRC
& FT stage
Start ARC1 CLOSE FAIL ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
ARC_START 8000011B72
Initiation for CB#1
& ARC1 CLOSE SUCCESS ARC1 RS
0.1s
Issuing for CB#2 TARCSUC

ARC2 SHOT S t 0
&
R
Initiation for CB#2 ≥1 0.10-100.00s
F
8C00021B6D To TRC
ARC2 NOT_IN-PROG &
ARC2 CLOSE FAIL ARC2 FT CB2_94TT
Start
ARC_START 8000021B6E Initiation for CB#2
& ARC2 CLOSE SUCCESS ARC2 RS
From PROT_COMMON 0.1s
CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE
ARC-SUCCHK=OFF
CB2_ALLPH_CLOSE Initiation
ARC1 SHOT RS ARC1 RS
Off ARC2 SHOT RS ARC2 RS

ARC-SucChk
Initi
On
Figure 2.22-22 Success check logic
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 302 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(xiv) Reclosing sequence for two CBs system– setting (ARC-ORDER)

Figure 2.22-23 shows that the logic determines the reclosing priority between CB#1 and
CB#2; the scheme switch [ARC-ORDER] is provided to set the process priority. For example,
the user should set CB1 for the [ARC-ORDER] if the CB#1 is being closed firstly.
Table 2.22-10 Starting condition for two CBs system
Setting
Mode setting Start condition
[ARC-ORDER]
[ARC1 mode]= CB1 CB#1 recloses first.

TPAR or SPAR&TPAR
CB2 CB#2 recloses first.
[ARC2 mode]=
TPAR or SPAR&TPAR SIMUL Both CB#1 and CB#2 reclose simultaneously.
Shot1 for CB#1

S 8000011B73 ARC1 TPAR
ARC1 SHOT1 ≥1
R 810001EBBD TPAR1-START TPAR1_START
Shot for CB#2
ARC2 SHOT S 8100021B6F ARC2 TPAR
≥1
R 810002EBBD TPAR2-START TPAR2_START
Initiation
FT ARC1 UNREADY S 8800011B74 For user’s programming
≥1
R ARC1-SUB_INIT
FT ARC2 UNREADY S 8900021B70 Not connected

≥1
R ARC2-SUB_INIT
Start
NON ARC-S1_IN-PROG
SIMUL
CB1
ARC-ORDER
CB2
Figure 2.22-23 Reclose sequence logic
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 303 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.22.6 Setting
ARC Setting (Function ID: 4A6001)
Default
Setting item Range Units Contents setting Notes
value
Off / FT / SPAR /
TPAR /
Auto reclose ARC1-MODE - ARC mode in 1CB-system Off
SPAR&TPAR /
Original
Off / FT / SPAR /
TPAR /
ARC2-MODE - ARC mode of Center-CB in 2CB-system Off
SPAR&TPAR /
Original
SIMUL / CB1 /
ARC-ORDER - Order of the 3-phase auto-reclosing start SIMUL
CB2
S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 /
ARC-NUM - ARC maximum shot number S1
S5
ARC1 TREADY1 0.0 - 600.0 s ARC1 ready check time 60.0
TSPAR1 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 SPAR dead time 0.80
TSPAR1_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 sub-SPAR dead time 300.00
TTPAR1 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 TPAR dead time 0.60
TTPAR1_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 sub-TPAR dead time 300.00
TMPAR1 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 MPAR dead time 1.00
TMPAR1_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 sub-MPAR dead time 300.00
TORGAR1 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 user original ARC dead time 300.00
TORGAR1_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 sub user original ARC dead time 300.00
TRR1 0.01 - 310.00 s ARC1 reset time 2.00
TCCW1 0.01 - 10.00 s ARC1 ARC command pulse width 0.20
Multi-shot TD_MS2 0.01 - 300.00 s 2nd shot ARC dead time 20.00
TRR_MS2 0.01 - 310.00 s 2nd shot ARC reset time 30.00
TD_MS3 0.01 - 300.00 s 3rd shot ARC dead time 20.00
TRR_MS3 0.01 - 310.00 s 3rd shot ARC reset time 30.00
TD_MS4 0.01 - 300.00 s 4th shot ARC dead time 20.00
TRR_MS4 0.01 - 310.00 s 4th shot ARC reset time 30.00
TD_MS5 0.01 - 300.00 s 5th shot ARC dead time 20.00
TRR_MS5 0.01 - 310.00 s 5th shot ARC reset time 30.00
ARC2 TREADY2 0.0 - 600.0 s ARC2 ready check time 60.0
TSPAR2 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 SPAR dead time 0.80
TSPAR2_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 sub-SPAR dead time 300.00
TTPAR2 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 TPAR dead time 0.60
TTPAR2_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 sub-TPAR dead time 300.00
TMPAR2 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 MPAR dead time 1.00
TMPAR2_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 sub-MPAR dead time 300.00
TORGAR2 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 user original ARC dead time 300.00
TORGAR2_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 sub user original ARC dead time 300.00
TRR2 0.01 - 310.00 s ARC2 reset time 2.00
TCCW2 0.01 - 10.00 s ARC2 ARC command pulse width 0.20
ARC-SucChk Off / On - ARC success checking enable On
TARCSUC 0.10 - 100.00 s ARC success checking time 0.30
FT-3pFault Off / On - Execute final trip in 3-phase fault mode Off
TRESET 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC reset time under CB closed 0.30
TEVLV 0.01 - 300.00 s Evolving fault waiting time 0.30
Off / S1 / S2 / S3 /
SHOTNUM-TEST - ARC test shot number Off
S4 / S5 / S6
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 304 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.22.7 Data ID
ARC(Function ID: 4A6001)
8500001B6C 3PHASE FAULT 3 phase fault
8000001B81 ARC IN-PROG
8000001BB3 ARC NO ACT No action for ARC
8000011B6C ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND CB close command for ARC1
8C00011B71 ARC1 CLOSE FAIL ARC1 fail
8000011B72 ARC1 CLOSE SUCCESS ARC1 success
8400011B6E ARC1 FT Final trip for ARC1
8200011B61 ARC1 IN-PROG ARC1 in progress
8000011B60 ARC1 READY ARC1 ready
8700011B70 ARC1 RESET ARC1 reset when ARC no action or success
8000011B6B ARC1 SHOT1 ARC1 shot1
8100011B67 ARC1 SHOT2 ARC1 shot2
8400011B6A ARC1 SHOT5 ARC1 shot5
8100011BC9 ARC1-S2 COND ARC1 shot2 condition
8200011BCA ARC1-S3 COND ARC1 shot3 condition
8300011BCB ARC1-S4 COND ARC1 shot4 condition
8400011BCC ARC1-S5 COND ARC1 shot5 condition
8800011B74 ARC1-SUB_INIT ARC1 sub initiation
3000001B82 ARC1_AUTORECST AutoRecSt signal in RREC of IEC61580 LN
8000011BCF ARC1_BLOCK ARC1 block signal
8000011B73 ARC1_INIT ARC1 initiation
8100011BB1 ARC1_MODE-FT Final trip mode for autoreclose 1
8000011BB0 ARC1_MODE-OFF Off mode for autoreclose 1
8600011BB6 ARC1_MODE-ORG Original mode for autoreclose 1
8400011BB4 ARC1_MODE-S&T Single and three-phase mode for autoreclose 1
8200011BB2 ARC1_MODE-SPAR Single-phase mode for autoreclose 1
8300011BB3 ARC1_MODE-TPAR Three-phase mode for autoreclose 1
8300011B66 ARC1_MPAR For multi-phase ARC1 operation
8200011B65 ARC1_ORGAR For original ARC1 operation
8000011B63 ARC1_SPAR For single-phase ARC1 operation
8100011B64 ARC1_TPAR For three-phase ARC1 operation
8100021B68 ARC2 CLOSE COMMAND CB close command for ARC2
8C00021B6D ARC2 CLOSE FAIL ARC2 fail
8000021B6E ARC2 CLOSE SUCCESS ARC2 success
8400021B6A ARC2 FT Final trip for ARC2
8200021B61 ARC2 IN-PROG ARC2 in progress
8000021B60 ARC2 READY ARC2 ready
8700021B6C ARC2 RESET ARC2 reset when ARC no action or success
8100021B67 ARC2 SHOT ARC2 shot
8900021B70 ARC2-SUB_INIT ARC2 sub initiation
3000001B83 ARC2_AUTORECST AutoRecSt signal in RREC of IEC61580 LN
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 305 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

8100021BB7 ARC2_BLOCK ARC2 block signal
8100021B6F ARC2_INIT ARC2 initiation
8100021BB1 ARC2_MODE-FT Final trip mode for autoreclose 2
8000021BB0 ARC2_MODE-OFF Off mode for autoreclose 2
8600021BB6 ARC2_MODE-ORG Original mode for autoreclose 2
8400021BB4 ARC2_MODE-S&T Single and three-phase mode for autoreclose 2
8200021BB2 ARC2_MODE-SPAR Single-phase mode for autoreclose 2
8300021BB3 ARC2_MODE-TPAR Three-phase mode for autoreclose 2
8200021B65 ARC2_ORGAR For original ARC2 operation
8000021B63 ARC2_SPAR For single-phase ARC2 operation
8100021B64 ARC2_TPAR For three-phase ARC2 operation
8200001BB4 ARC_BLOCK ARC1 & ARC2 block signal
8400001B65 ARC_START ARC start by general trip
8000011BB8 CB1 F.BRIDGE Forcible bridge signal for CB1
8000011BB7 CB1-ARC READY CB1 ready signal for ARC1
8500011B6F CB1_94TT Discrepancy trip signal in CB1
8800011B62 CB1_BRIDGE CB1 bridge
8000011BCD CB1_MANUAL_CLOSE CB1 manual close signal
8100021BB9 CB2 F.BRIDGE Forcible bridge signal for CB2
8100021BB8 CB2-ARC READY CB2 ready signal for ARC2
8500021B6B CB2_94TT Discrepancy trip signal in CB2
8800021B62 CB2_BRIDGE CB2 bridge
8100021BCA CB2_MANUAL_CLOSE CB2 manual close signal
8200001B6A EVOLV-FAULT TIME OVER Time over of evolved fault under S&T mode
8300001B64 EXT.ARC_START External ARC operation
8000001BB0 EXT.ARC_START-A External ARC start signal (phase-A)
8100001BB1 EXT.ARC_START-B External ARC start signal (phase-B)
8200001BB2 EXT.ARC_START-C External ARC start signal (phase-C)
8000011BCE F.CB1_94TT Forcible discrepancy trip signal in CB1
8100021BCB F.CB2_94TT Forcible discrepancy trip signal in CB2
8000011B6D FT ARC1 UNREADY Final trip under ARC1 unready condition
8000021B69 FT ARC2 UNREADY Final trip under ARC2 unready condition
8200011BC2 ORGAR1_COND For original ARC1 condition
8200011BC1 ORGAR1_START For original ARC1 start
8200011BC4 ORGAR1_SUB_COND For original ARC1 condition (sub)
8200011BC3 ORGAR1_SUB_START For original ARC1 start (sub)
8200021BC3 ORGAR2_COND For original ARC2 condition
8200021BC2 ORGAR2_START For original ARC2 start
8200021BC5 ORGAR2_SUB_COND For original ARC2 condition (sub)
8200021BC4 ORGAR2_SUB_START For original ARC2 start (sub)
8000001BB5 RYOP-A Relay operation (phase-A)
8100001BB6 RYOP-B Relay operation (phase-B)
8200001BB7 RYOP-C Relay operation (phase-C)
8400001B6B SHOT NUMBER OVER Shot number over
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 306 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

8000001B6D SHOT_1ST 1st shot from Multi shot ARC counter
8100001B6E SHOT_2ND 2ND shot from Multi shot ARC counter
8200001B6F SHOT_3RD 3RD shot from Multi shot ARC counter
8300001B70 SHOT_4TH 4TH shot from Multi shot ARC counter
8000001B84 SHOT_MULTI Signal of the second and the following ARC shots
8000011BBA SPAR1_COND For single-phase ARC1 condition
8000011BB9 SPAR1_START For single-phase ARC1 start
8000011BBC SPAR1_SUB_COND For single-phase ARC1 condition (sub)
8000011BBB SPAR1_SUB_START For single-phase ARC1 start (sub)
8000021BBB SPAR2_COND For single-phase ARC2 condition
8000021BBA SPAR2_START For single-phase ARC2 start
8000021BBD SPAR2_SUB_COND For single-phase ARC2 condition (sub)
8000021BBC SPAR2_SUB_START For single-phase ARC2 start (sub)
8100011BBE TPAR1_COND For three-phase ARC1 condition
8100011BBD TPAR1_START For three-phase ARC1 start
8100011BC0 TPAR1_SUB_COND For three-phase ARC1 condition (sub)
8100011BBF TPAR1_SUB_START For three-phase ARC1 start (sub)
8100021BBF TPAR2_COND For three-phase ARC2 condition
8100021BBE TPAR2_START For three-phase ARC2 start
8100021BC1 TPAR2_SUB_COND For three-phase ARC2 condition (sub)
8100021BC0 TPAR2_SUB_START For three-phase ARC2 start (sub)
8100001B67 TRIP-1PH 1 phase trip signal
8300001B69 TRIP-3PH 3 phase trip signal
8000001B66 TRIP-ANYPH Any phase trip signal
8200001B68 TRIP-MPH Multi-phase trip signal

800000EBB3 ARC NO ACT No action for ARC
810001EBC9 ARC1-S2 COND ARC1 shot2 condition
820001EBCA ARC1-S3 COND ARC1 shot3 condition
830001EBCB ARC1-S4 COND ARC1 shot4 condition
840001EBCC ARC1-S5 COND ARC1 shot5 condition
800001EBCF ARC1_BLOCK ARC1 block signal
810001EBB1 ARC1_MODE-FT Final trip mode for autoreclose 1
800001EBB0 ARC1_MODE-OFF Off mode for autoreclose 1
860001EBB6 ARC1_MODE-ORG Original mode for autoreclose 1
840001EBB4 ARC1_MODE-S&T Single and three-phase mode for autoreclose 1
820001EBB2 ARC1_MODE-SPAR Single-phase mode for autoreclose 1
830001EBB3 ARC1_MODE-TPAR Three-phase mode for autoreclose 1
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 307 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

810002EBB7 ARC2_BLOCK ARC2 block signal
810002EBB1 ARC2_MODE-FT Final trip mode for autoreclose 2
800002EBB0 ARC2_MODE-OFF Off mode for autoreclose 2
860002EBB6 ARC2_MODE-ORG Original mode for autoreclose 2
840002EBB4 ARC2_MODE-S&T Single and three-phase mode for autoreclose 2
820002EBB2 ARC2_MODE-SPAR Single-phase mode for autoreclose 2
830002EBB3 ARC2_MODE-TPAR Three-phase mode for autoreclose 2
820000EBB4 ARC_BLOCK ARC1 & ARC2 block signal
800001EBB8 CB1 F.BRIDGE Forcible bridge signal for CB1
800001EBB7 CB1-ARC READY CB1 ready signal for ARC1
800001EBCD CB1_MANUAL_CLOSE CB1 manual close siganl
810002EBB9 CB2 F.BRIDGE Forcible bridge signal for CB2
810002EBB8 CB2-ARC READY CB2 ready signal for ARC2
810002EBCA CB2_MANUAL_CLOSE CB2 manual close siganl
800000EBB0 EXT.ARC_START-A External ARC start signal (phase-A)
810000EBB1 EXT.ARC_START-B External ARC start signal (phase-B)
820000EBB2 EXT.ARC_START-C External ARC start signal (phase-C)
800001EBCE F.CB1_94TT Forcible discrepancy trip signal in CB1
810002EBCB F.CB2_94TT Forcible discrepancy trip signal in CB2
820001EBC2 ORGAR1_COND For original ARC1 condition
820001EBC1 ORGAR1_START For original ARC1 start
820001EBC4 ORGAR1_SUB_COND For original ARC1 condition (sub)
820001EBC3 ORGAR1_SUB_START For original ARC1 start (sub)
820002EBC3 ORGAR2_COND For original ARC2 condition
820002EBC2 ORGAR2_START For original ARC2 start
820002EBC5 ORGAR2_SUB_COND For original ARC2 condition (sub)
820002EBC4 ORGAR2_SUB_START For original ARC2 start (sub)
800000EBB5 RYOP-A Relay operation (phase-A)
810000EBB6 RYOP-B Relay operation (phase-B)
820000EBB7 RYOP-C Relay operation (phase-C)
800001EBBA SPAR1_COND For single-phase ARC1 condition
800001EBB9 SPAR1_START For single-phase ARC1 start
800001EBBC SPAR1_SUB_COND For single-phase ARC1 condition (sub)
800001EBBB SPAR1_SUB_START For single-phase ARC1 start (sub)
800002EBBB SPAR2_COND For single-phase ARC2 condition
800002EBBA SPAR2_START For single-phase ARC2 start
800002EBBD SPAR2_SUB_COND For single-phase ARC2 condition (sub)
800002EBBC SPAR2_SUB_START For single-phase ARC2 start (sub)
810001EBBE TPAR1_COND For three-phase ARC1 condition
810001EBBD TPAR1_START For three-phase ARC1 start
810001EBC0 TPAR1_SUB_COND For three-phase ARC1 condition (sub)
810001EBBF TPAR1_SUB_START For three-phase ARC1 start (sub)
810002EBBF TPAR2_COND For three-phase ARC2 condition
810002EBBE TPAR2_START For three-phase ARC2 start
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 308 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

810002EBC1 TPAR2_SUB_COND For three-phase ARC2 condition (sub)
810002EBC0 TPAR2_SUB_START For three-phase ARC2 start (sub)
(2.69a)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 309 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Voltage check for autoreclosing (VCHK)

The voltage-check-for-autoreclose (VCHK) function is used along with the function of
autoreclose (ARC), as Bus-bar between Lines requires the restoration of service after the
clearance of fault.
The ARC covers two breaker systems: single breaker system (1CB) and single-and-a-half
breaker system (1.5CB), and the ARC has two scheme logics: one scheme logic (ARC1) is for
1CB and for Bus-bar CB of 1.5CB, and another scheme logic (ARC2) is for Center CB of 1.5CB.
Thus, the VCHK consist of two scheme logics (VCHK1 and VCHK2), and VCHK1 is applied to
ARC1; on the other hand, VCHK2 is used for ARC2.
Bus-bar Bus-bar
CB (CB#1)
Line
CB#1(Busbar CB)
ARC1 with
ARC1 with VCHK1 Line
VCHK1
CB#2(Center CB)
ARC2 with
VCHK2 Line2
a. Single breaker on system (1CB) b. One-and-a-half breaker on system (1.5CB)
Figure 2.23-1 Single breaker and double breakers on the system
As discussed above, the implementation of VCHK is subjected to the ARC. Thus, the
setting of VCHK should be in corresponding to the setting of the ARC. The ARC is discussed
separately. (See Chapter Control and monitoring application: Auto-reclose function)
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
- 310 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.23.1 VCHK1 for 1CB system

(i) Characteristic and elements
VCHK1 does voltage and synchronous check in 1CB system. Four relay elements (OVB, OVB,
UVL, and UVL) are used for voltage check. Tow relay elements (OVB and OVL) are used for
verification of existing voltage; the remaining ones (UVB and UVL) are used for verification of
non-existing voltage.
(ii) Voltage condition and check zone

Figure 2.23-2 shows four zones (A1 to D1) for voltage verification. For example, if both UVB
and OVL elements are active, VHCK1 determines that the Bus-bar is in Dead condition
(no-voltage) and Line is in Live condition (existing voltage). This condition holds true for A1
zone. If voltage condition matches with B1 zone, synchronous check is carried out on VCHK1.
Thus, this means that Synchronous check is not carried out in A1, C1 or D1 zones.
VL Line voltage
(Incoming voltage)
Dead bus and Live bus and
live line live line
A1 (DB-LL)
B1 (LB-LL)
VCHK-OVL

dead line dead line
(DB-DL) (LB-DL)
VCHK-UVL
C1 D1
VB Bus-bar voltage
0(V) VCHK-UVB VCHK-OVB (Running voltage)
A1, C1, D1: Voltage check

B1: Synchronism check
Figure 2.23-2 Check zones by VCHK1
Table 2.23-2 Voltage condition by VCHK1

Voltage condition DB_LL LB_LL DB_DL LB_DL
Check zone A1 B1 C1 D1
Bus-bar voltage (VB) Dead Live Dead Live
Line voltage (VL) Live Live Dead Dead
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 311 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.23.2 VCHK1 and VCHK2 for 1.5CB system

(i) Characteristic and elements
VCHK1 and VCHK2 are used for verification of existence or non-existence of voltage on 1.5CB
system. As shown in Figure 2.23-3(b), VCHK2 is used in the center CB (CB#2). Four elements
(OVL2, UVL2, OVL, and UVL) are configured for VCHK2; they are used for determination of
existence or non-existence of voltage.
(ii) Voltage condition and check zone

Figure 2.23-3(a) shows that VCHK1 checks the presence of voltage between the Bus-bar and
Line; Figure 2.23-3(b) shows that the VCHK2 checks the presence of voltage between Line2
and Line. The result of the VCHK1 and VCHK2 are shown in Table 2.23-3 and Table 2.23-4,
respectively. Sync check is carried out if the result by VCHK1 is B1 zone and if the result by
VCHK2 is B2 zone.
VL Line voltage
VL Line voltage
(Incoming voltage)
(Incoming voltage)
live line live line Live line and Live line and
A1 (DB-LL)
B1 (LB-LL) dead line2 live line2
A2 (DL2-LL)
B2 (LL2-LL)
VCHK-OVL
VCHK-OVL

Dead line and Dead line and
dead line dead line dead line2 Live line2
(DB-DL) (LB-DL) (DL2-DL) (LL2-DL)
VCHK-UVL VCHK-UVL
C1 D1 C2 D2
VB Bus-bar voltage VL2 Line2 voltage
0 (V) VCHK-UVB VCHK-OVB (Running voltage) 0 (V) VCHK-UVL2 VCHK-OVL2 (Running voltage)
A1, C1, D1: Voltage check A2, C2, D2: Voltage check
a. VCHK1 check zone B1: Synchronism check b. VCHK2 check zone B2: Synchronism check
Figure 2.23-3 Check zones by VCHK1 and VCHK2

Voltage condition DB_LL LB_LL DB_DL LB_DL
Bus-bar voltage (VB) Dead Live Dead Live
Line voltage (VL) Live Live Dead Dead

Voltage condition DL2_LL LL2_LL DL2_DL DL2_LL
Line2 voltage (VL2) Dead Live Dead Dead
Line voltage (VL) Live Live Dead Live
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 312 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.23.3 Scheme for synchronism

VCHK has a measuring function, which checks the difference between a running voltage and
an incoming voltage. The measuring function checks phase angles, voltages, and frequencies.
The VCHK1 determines the synchronism based on the presence of voltage on both Bus-bar
and Line, as shown in Figure 2.23-4(a). The VCHK2 also determines the synchronism based
on the presence of voltage on both Line2 and Line, as shown in Figure 2.23-4(b).
S = SYN1-Angle S =SYN2-A n g l e
VL VL
s VB s VL2
1 2
V1 V2
VCHK-OVB or VCHK-O V L
2or
VCHK-OVL V C H -O
K VL
a. SYN1 b .S Y N
2
Figure 2.23-4 SYN1 and SYN2 characteristics
This function performs three checks: (1) checking voltage difference, (2) checking
frequency difference, and (3) checking phase difference. The following variables represent
algebraic expression used in these checking:
VB = Bus-bar voltage
VL1 = Line voltage
VL2 = Line2 voltage
ΔV1 = Voltage difference between Bus-bar and Line
ΔV2 = Voltage difference between Line2 and Line
fVB = frequency of VB
fVL = frequency of VL
fVL2 = frequency of VL2
f= slip cycle
Δf1 = frequency difference between Bus-bar and Line
Δf2 = frequency difference between Line2 and Line1
θ1= phase difference between VB and VL
θ2 = phase difference between VL2 and VL
SYN1-dV = Voltage difference setting [SYN1-dV]
SYN2-dV = another voltage difference setting [SYN2-dV]
VCHK-OVB = voltage setting for Bus-bar [VCHK-OVB]
VCHK-OVL = voltage setting for Line [VCHK-OVL]
VCHK-OVL2 =voltage setting for Line2 [VCHK-OVL2]
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 313 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
SYN1-Angle = phase difference between VB and VL, set by [SYN1-Angle]

SYN2-Angle = phase difference between VL2 and VL, set by [SYN2-Angle]
SYN1-df = value of frequency difference between Bus-bar and Line, set by [SYN1-df]
SYN2-df = value of frequency difference between Line2 and Line, set by [SYN2-df]
T_SYN1 = setting of synch check timer (second) [T_SYN1]
T_SYN2 = setting of synch check timer (second) [T_SYN2]
Table 2.23-5 VCHK synchronism setting

Scheme switch Set Comment
SYN1-dV 0 - 150 Difference voltage for the checking SYN1
SYN1-df 0.01 - 2.00 Difference frequency for the checking SYN1
SYN1-Angle 0 - 75 Difference angle for the checking SYN1
SYN1-dfEN Off/ On Enabling for df checking in SYN1
SYN2-df 0.01 - 2.00 Difference frequency for the checking SYN2
SYN2-Angle 0 - 75 Difference angle for the checking SYN2
SYN2-dfEN Off/ On Enabling for df checking in SYN2
VCHK-OVL 10 - 150 Voltage for the checking Live-Line
VCHK-UVL 10 - 150 Voltage for the checking Dead-Line
VCHK-OVL2 10 - 150 Voltage for the checking Live-Line2
Voltage check time "SYN1(Live-Bus &
T_SYN1 0.01 - 100.00
Live-Line & Synchro.)"
Voltage check time "SYN2(Live-Line2 &
T_SYN2 0.01 - 100.00
The VCHK can have the decision of synchronism between the running voltage and the
incoming voltage when the following items (i) to (iv) are satisfied:
(i) Voltage magnitudes
The magnitude of the running voltage and the incoming voltage are greater than
the SYN1 and SYN2 settings:
For SYN1 setting: VB ≥ [VCHK-OVB] and VL ≥ [VCHK-OVL]
For SYN2 setting: VL2 ≥ [VCHK-OVL2] and VL ≥ [VCHK-OVL]
(ii) Voltage difference

The differences of the magnitude between the running voltage and the incoming
voltage (ΔV1 and ΔV2) are smaller than the SYN1 and SYN2 settings:
For SYN1 setting: ΔV1 ≥ | VB − K × VL | ≤ [SYN1-dV]
For SYN2 setting: ΔV2 ≥ | VL2 − K × VL | ≤ [SYN2-dV]
Note: The VCHK calculation should be achieved correctly even if respective rating
voltages in VB, VL, and VL2 are not identical. Thus, the VCHK function has
a matching factor (K) designed to adjust the respective rating voltages when
they are not identical. The matching factor (K) is calculated automatically
using the setting values of VCT ratios; the K is generated based on the
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 314 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
busbar voltage as shown below:
VT ratio at Line
K = VT ratio at busbar
whereas, ‘VT ratio at Line’ is obtained from the actual value in VCT
ratio setting corresponding with scheme switch [SYN-VLine], and ‘VT ratio
at busbar’ is obtained from the actual one corresponding with the scheme
switch [SYN-VBus]. We shall see the scheme switches in the succeeding
section.
(iii) Frequency difference

The frequency differences between the running voltage and the incoming voltage
(Δf1 and Δf2) are smaller than the SYN1 and SYN2 settings:
For SYN1 setting: Δf1 ≥ | fVB − fVL | ≤ [SYN1-df]
For SYN2 setting: Δf2 ≥ | fL2 − fVL | ≤ [SYN2-df]
Note: When Off is set for the scheme switch [SYN1-dfEN], the VCHK abandons
the frequency difference condition from synchronism requirements.
Similarly, the frequency difference condition is not valid when [SYN2-dfEN]
= Off.
(iv) Phase angle difference

The phase differences between the running voltage and the incoming voltage (θ1
and θ2) are smaller than the SYN1 and SYN2 settings:
For SYN1 setting: VB × VL cosθ1 ≥ 0
VB × VL sin ([SYN1-Angle]) ≥ VB × VL sin θ1
For SYN2 setting: VL2 × VL cosθ2 ≥ 0
VL2 × VL sin ([SYN2-Angle]) ≥ VL2 ×VL sin θ2
(v) Notice and tips

If the frequency difference between the VL and the VB is shown very large, the
VCHK may fail to make the decision for the synchronism, although Off is set for
the [SYN1-dfEN] to abandon checking the frequency difference. This is because; the
vector passes the [SYN1-Angle] zone very quickly. As a result, the VCHK may fail
to issue the permission command. To avoid the failure, the user has to set values
for settings [SYN1-Angle] and [T_SYN1] depending on the assumed frequency
difference (Δf):
Setting [SYN1-Angle]
∆f > (2.23-1)
180° × Setting [T_SYN1]
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 315 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
where,
Δf= Frequency-difference (or cycle-slip in Hertz)
Tips: Cycles for the synchronism closure can be calculated:
Cycle for synchronism = 1⁄∆f[Hz] (2.23-2)
Time length for getting a synchronism:
2 × Setting [SYN1-Angle] 1
Time = × (2.23-3)
360° ∆f[Hz]
Check time for the synchronism:
2 × Setting [SYN1-Angle] 1
Setting [T_SYN1] < × (2.23-4)
360° ∆f[Hz]
Equations rearrangements:
Setting [SYN1-Angle] 1
Setting [T_SYN1] < × (2.23-5)
180° ∆f[Hz]
1 𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [T_SYN1] 1
> ÷ (2.23-6)
∆𝑓[𝐻𝑧] Setting [SYN1-Angle] 180°
𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [SYN1-Angle] 1
𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [T_SYN1] < × (2.23-7)
180° ∆𝑓[𝐻𝑧]
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 316 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
VL : fVL=50.02Hz
VB : fVB=50.00Hz
time
Δf Δf Δf
Example: |fVB – fVL |=|50.00Hz – 50.02Hz| = 0.02Hz = 10s
VL
50s SYN1-Angle
VB Synchronism zone
Figure 2.23-5 Synchronism between VB and VL when system frequency = 50Hz

Note: Settings [SYN2-Angle] and [T_SYN2] are also applicable for these calculations.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 317 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.23.4 VCHK1 setting for 1CB system

When the VCHK1 is applied to 1CB system, OVB and UVB it checks the voltage of a Bus-bar,
whereas OVL and UVL checks the voltage of Line, as described earlier. The Bus-bar and Line
voltages are obtained in the VCT1. Thus, user should set the scheme switches [SYN-VBus]
and [SYN-VLine] in accordance with the phase(s) of input-voltage(s). The following are the
setting examples when VCHK is used in 1CB system.
1Note: For more information on VCT, see Chapter Technical description: Transfer module.
For external connection, see Appendix: Typical external connection.
Table 2.23-6 VCHK line selection setting

V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3
V-L12 / V-L23 / V-L31
Selection of Bus
SYN-VBus V2-L1 / V2-L2 / V2-L3 voltage(Running Voltage) for
V2-L12 / V2-L23 / V2-L31 SYN1
V3 / V4
V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3
V-L12 / V-L23 / V-L31
Selection of Line voltage
SYN-VLine V2-L1 / V2-L2 / V2-L3
(Incoming Voltage) for SYN1
V2-L12 / V2-L23 / V2-L31
V3 / V4
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 318 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(i) Setting example 1 (Bus-bar VT=three phases, Line VT=phase-A)
Line
VCT1
Line VT
(Phase-A)
Va
Va (VL1)
Vb (VL2)
Bus-bar VT
Bus-bar
(Three Phase)
Vc Vb
Vc (VL3)
a. Phasor diagram in Line
Vs (V3)
Vs
Vs2 (V4) b. Phasor diagram in Bus-bar
V Line (Vs)2
VBus-bar (Va)3
Figure 2.23-6 Example 1: Input voltages and respective phasor diagram for SYN1
1Note: The structure of VCT is dependent on the VCT type. (See chapter Technical
description: Transformer module)
2 Note: VBus-bar is Running voltage.
3Note: VLine is Incoming voltage.
Figure 2.23-6 shows the VCT input voltages and phases from Bus-bar and Line, and
shows the phase relationship between the running voltage and the incoming voltage. In this
case, configure the settings in accordance with Figure 2.23-6 and Table 2.23-7.
Table 2.23-7 Setting for example 1
Output voltage at VT Bus-bar VT= Three phase
Line VT= Phase-A
Input voltage at VCHK Running voltage (Va)= Phase-A (Bus-bar VT)
Incoming voltage (Vs)= Phase-A (Line VT)
VCHK Setting4 [SYN-VBus] = V-L1
[SYN-VLine]= V3
4Note: Set V3 for the scheme switch [SYN-VLine]. This is because V3 and V-L1 are in the
same phase.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 319 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Setting example 2 (Bus-bar VT=three phases, Line VT=phase-BC)
Line VCT
Line VT
(Phase B-C)
Va
Va (VL1)
Vb (VL2)
Bus-bar VT Vc
Bus-bar
(Three Phase)
Vb
Vc (VL3) Vbc
a. Phasor diagram in Bus-bar
Vs (V3) Vs
b. Phasor diagram in Line

Vs2 (V4)
VLine (Vs)1
VBus-bar (Vbc)2
Similarly, Figure 2.23-7 shows the VCT input voltages and phases from Bus-bar and
Line. In this case, configure the settings in accordance with Figure 2.23-7 and Table 2.23-8.
Output voltage at VT Bus-bar VT= Three phase
Line VT= Phase-BC
Input voltage at VCHK Running voltage(Vb and c)= Phase-B and C (Bus-bar VT)
Incoming voltage (Vs)= Phase-BC (Line VT)
VCHK Setting3 [SYN-VBus] = V-L23
[SYN-VLine]= V3
3Note: V3 is set for the scheme switch [SYN-VLine]. This is because the resultant phase of
V-L2, V-L3 and V3 is same.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 320 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) Setting example 3 (Bus-bar VT=Phase-C, Line VT= Three-phase)
Line
VCT
Line VT
(Three phase)
Va (VL1) Va
Vb (VL2)
Bus-bar VT
Bus-bar
(Phase C)
Vc Vb
Vc (VL3)
a. Phasor diagram in line
Vs (V3) Vs
b. Phasor diagram in Bus-bar

Vs2 (V4)
VLine (Vc)1
VBus-bar (Vs)2
The configuration of inputs voltages and phases is done as shown in Figure 2.23-8. In
this case, configure the settings in accordance with Figure 2.23-8 and Table 2.23-9.

Output voltage at VT Bus-bar VT= Phase-C
Line VT= Three phase
Input voltage at VCT Running voltage (Vs)= Phase-C (Bus-bar VT)
Incoming voltage (Vc)= Phsse-C (Line VT)
VCHK Setting [SYN-VBus] = V3
[SYN-VLine]= V-L31
1Note: Set V-L3 for the scheme switch [SYN-VLine]. This is because V3 and V-L3 are in
the same phase.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 321 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.23.5 VCHK1 and VCHK2 settings for 1.5CB system
Bus-bar
VCT
Bus-bar VT
(Phase-B)
Line Va (V-L1) Va
Line VT
(Three-phase) Vb (V-L2)
Vc Vb
Vc (V-L3)
a. Phasor diagram in Line
Line2
Vs (V3) Vs
Line2 VT
(Phase-B) b. Phasor diagram in Bus
Vs2 (V4)
Vs2
c. Phasor diagram in Line2
VLine (Vb) VLine (Vb)
VBus-bar (Vs)
VLine2 (Vs2)
d. Phasor diagram in SYN11 e. Phasor diagram in SYN22
Figure 2.23-9 Input voltages and respective phasor diagram for SYN1 and SYN2
1Note: V
Bus-bar is Running voltage. VLine is Incoming voltage.
2Note: V
Line2 is Running voltage. VLine is Incoming voltage.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 322 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
When VCHK1 and VCHK2 are used in 1.5CB system, set the scheme switches
[SYN-VBus], [SYN-VLine], and [SYN-VLine2]. For example, the settings in Figure 2.23-9 are
applied when VCHK 1 and VCHK2 are applied in the 1.5CB system.
Table 2.23-10 Setting example for 1.5CB system

Output voltage Bus-bar VT= Phase-B
at VT Line VT= Three phase
Line2 VT= Phase-B
Input voltage Running voltage of SYN1(VS)=Phase-B (Bus-bar VT)
at VCT Incoming voltage of SYN1 and SYN2 (Vb)=Phase-B (Line VT)
Running voltage of SYN2 (VS2)= Phase-B (Line2 VT)
VCHK Setting3 [SYN-VBus] = V3
[SYN-VLine]= V-L2
[SYN-VLine2] = V4
3Note: Set V-L2 for the scheme switch [SYN-VLine]. This is because V3 and VL2 are in the
same phase. Set V4 for the scheme switch [SYN-VLine2]. This is because V3 and V4
are in the same phase.
Table 2.23-11 VCHK line1 and line2 selection setting

V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3 / V-L12 / V-L23 / Selection of Bus
SYN-VBus V-L31 / V2-L1 / V2-L2 / V2-L3 / voltage(Running Voltage) for
V2-L12 / V2-L23 / V2-L31 / V3 / V4 SYN1
V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3 / V-L12 / V-L23 / Selection of Line voltage
SYN-VLine V-L31 / V2-L1 / V2-L2 / V2-L3 / (Incoming Voltage) for SYN1
V2-L12 / V2-L23 / V2-L31 / V3 / V4 and SYN2
V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3 / V-L12 / V-L23 /
Selection of Line2 voltage
SYN-VLine2 V-L31 / V2-L1 / V2-L2 / V2-L3 /
(Running voltage) for SYN2
V2-L12 / V2-L23 / V2-L31 / V3 / V4
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 323 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.23.6 Scheme and activation

VCHK1 and VCHK2 provide output signals to the ARC with results of voltage check and
synchronism check as described earlier. The energizing control scheme of VCHK1 is drawn in
Figure 2.23-10, the output signal ARC1-VCHK is fed to ARC1 when one or more of the
following conditions are established: (1) the VCHK1 runs, (2) the OVB and the UVL run, or (3)
the UVB and the OVL run. The activation of VCHK1 is controlled by using the scheme
switches: [ARC1-LB_DL], [ARC1-DB_LL], [ARC1-DB_DL], and [ARC1-SYN1]. For example,
DB_LL in Table 2.23-2 is only the criteria for ARC1 operation, On is set for the scheme switch
[ARC1-DB_LL] while Off is set for other scheme switches. As a result, the system is energized
in the direction from line to bus with ARC1. As shown in Figure 2.23-11, the operation of the
VCHK2 is also applicable in accordance with Figure 2.23-3 similar to VCHK1. Note that the
SYN1-df and SYN2-df operations are nullified when Off are set for the [SYN1-dfEN] and
[SYN2-dfEN].
8200011B62 OVB T_LB_DL

OVB t 0 8000011B6D
&
&
8000011B23
0.01-100.00S
ARC1-LB_DL ON ≥1 ARC1-VCHK
8000011B63
UVB T_DB_LL 8100011B6E
& t 0
&
0.01-100.00S
ARC1-DB_LL ON
8300011B60 OVL
OVL
8C00011B67 T_OVL3P 8F00011B6F

L1 t 0
8D00011B68 & VCHK_OVL3P
OVL L2
8E00011B69 0.01-100.00S
L3
T_DB_DL
8100011B61 UVL 8200011B70
& t 0
UVL &
0.01-100.00S
ARC1-DB_DL ON
8300011B71
OVB
T_SYN1 8300011B72
&
t 0 &
OVL
0.01-100.00S ARC1-SYN1 ON
8400011B64
SYN1-dƟ
8500011B65 ARC1-NOVCHK ON
SYN1-dV
8600011B66
SYN1-df
≥1
SYN1-dfEN OFF
Figure 2.23-10 Logic of VCHK1
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 324 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8200021B60 OVL2 T_LL2_DL

OVL2 t 0 8024001001
&
&
8100021B23
0.01-100.00S ARC2-VCHK
ARC2-LL2_DL ON ≥1
8000021B61
UVL2 T_DL2_LL 8124011001
& t 0
&
0.01-100.00S
ARC2-DL2_LL ON
OVL
T_DL2_DL
UVL 8200021B6A
& t 0
&
0.01-100.00S
ARC2-DL2_DL ON
8300021B6B
OVL2
T_SYN2 8300021B6C
&
t 0 &
OVL
0.01-100.00S ARC2-SYN2 ON
8400021B62
SYN2-dƟ
8500021B63 ARC2-NOVCHK ON
SYN2-dV
8600021B64
SYN2-df
≥1
SYN2-dfEN OFF
Figure 2.23-11 Logic of VCHK2
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 325 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.23.7 Setting
Setting of VCHK (Function ID: 4A8001)
2CB system
1CB system 1CB system V-Line：
V-Bus ： V-Bus ： Input from
Input from Input from three-phase
three-phase representat voltage
Units
Setting items 1A 5A Contents voltage ive phase V-Bus & Notes
rating rating V-Line： voltage V-Line2：
Input from V-Line： Input from
representat Input from representat
ive phase three-phase ive phase
voltage voltage voltage
(Fixed)
V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3 Select a set
/ V-L12 / V-L23 / from V-L1,
V-L31 / V2-L1 / Selection of Bus voltage(Running Voltage) V-L2, V-L3, V3 (Fixed V3 (Fixed
SYN-VBus -
V2-L2 / V2-L3 / for SYN V-L12, setting) setting)
V2-L12 / V2-L23 / V-L23,
V2-L31 / V3 / V4 V-L31
V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3 Select a set Select a set
/ V-L12 / V-L23 / from V-L1, from V-L1,
V-L31 / V2-L1 / Selection of Line voltage (Incoming Voltage) V3 (Fixed V-L2, V-L3, V-L2, V-L3,
SYN-VLine -
V2-L2 / V2-L3 / for SYN setting) V-L12, V-L12,
V2-L12 / V2-L23 / V-L23, V-L23,
V2-L31 / V3 / V4 V-L31 V-L31
VCHK-OVB 10 - 150 V Voltage for the checking Live-Bus 51
VCHK-UVB 10 - 150 V Voltage for the checking Dead-Bus 13
VCHK-OVL 10 - 150 V Voltage for the checking Live-Line 51
VCHK-UVL 10 - 150 V Voltage for the checking Dead-Line 13

ARC1 Voltage check
SYN1-Angle 0 - 75 deg Difference angle for the checking SYN1 30
SYN1-dV 0 - 150 V Difference voltage for the checking SYN1 150
SYN1-df 0.01 - 2.00 Hz Difference frequency for the checking SYN1 1.00
SYN1-dfEN Off / On - Enabling switch in SYN1 Off
Voltage check "Live-Bus & Dead-Line" is

ARC1-LB_DL Off / On - Off
applied to ARC1
Voltage check "Dead-Bus & Live-Line" is
ARC1-DB_LL Off / On - Off
applied to ARC1
Voltage check "Dead-Bus & Dead-Line" is
ARC1-DB_DL Off / On - Off
applied to ARC1
Voltage check "SYN(Live-Bus & Live-Line &
ARC1-SYN1 Off / On - Off
Synchro.)" is applied to ARC1
ARC1-NOVC
Off / On - Voltage check is not applied to ARC1 On
HK
Voltage check time "Live-Bus and
T_LB_DL 0.01 - 100.00 s 0.05
Dead-Line"
Voltage check time "Dead-Bus and
T_DB_LL 0.01 - 100.00 s 0.05
Live-Line"
Voltage check time "Dead-Bus and
T_DB_DL 0.01 - 100.00 s 0.05
Dead-Line"
Voltage check time "SYN1(Live-Bus &
T_SYN1 0.01 - 100.00 s 1.00
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 326 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting of VCHK (Function ID: 4A8001)

2CB system
1CB system 1CB system V-Line：
V-Bus ： V-Bus ： Input from
Input from Input from three-phase
three-phase representat voltage
Units
Setting items 1A 5A Contents voltage ive phase V-Bus & Notes
rating rating V-Line： voltage V-Line2：
Input from V-Line： Input from
representat Input from representat
ive phase three-phase ive phase
voltage voltage voltage
(Fixed)
T_OVL3P 0.01 - 100.00 s Voltage check time "Live-line" 0.05
V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3

/ V-L12 / V-L23 /
V-L31 / V2-L1 / Selection of Line2 voltage (Running voltage) V4 (Fixed
SYN-VLine2 - Not applicable
V2-L2 / V2-L3 / for SYN2 setting)
V2-L12 / V2-L23 /
V2-L31 / V3 / V4
VCHK-OVL2 10 - 150 V Voltage for the checking Live-Line2 -- 51
VCHK-UVL2 10 - 150 V Voltage for the checking Dead-Line2 -- 13
SYN2-Angle 0 - 75 deg Difference angle for the checking SYN2 -- 30
SYN2-dV 0 - 150 V Difference voltage for the checking SYN2 -- 150
SYN2-df 0.01 - 2.00 Hz Difference frequency for the checking SYN2 -- 1.00
SYN2-dfEN Off / On - Enabling switch in SYN2 -- Off

ARC2 Voltage check
Voltage check "Live-Line2 & Dead-Line" is

ARC2-LL2_DL Off /On - -- Off
applied to ARC2
Voltage check "Dead-Line2 & Live-Line" is
ARC2-DL2_LL Off /On - -- Off
applied to ARC2
Voltage check "Dead-Line2 & Dead-Line" is
ARC2-DL2_DL Off /On - -- Off
applied to ARC2
Voltage check "SYN2(Live-Line2 & Live-Line
ARC2-SYN2 Off /On - -- Off
& Synchro.)" is applied to ARC2
ARC2-NOVC
Off /On - Voltage check is not applied to ARC2 -- On
HK
Voltage check time "Live-Line2 and
T_LL2_DL 0.01 - 100.00 s -- 0.05
Dead-Line"
Voltage check time "Dead-Line2 and
T_DL2_LL 0.01 - 100.00 s -- 0.05
Live-Line"
Voltage check time "Dead-Line2 and
T_DL2_DL 0.01 - 100.00 s -- 0.05
Dead-Line"
Voltage check time "SYN2(Live-Line2 &
T_SYN2 0.01 - 100.00 s -- 1.00
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 327 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.23.8 Data ID
VCHK(Function ID: 4A8001)
8300011B60 OVL OVL relay element operated
8100011B61 UVL UVL relay element operated
8200011B62 OVB OVB relay element operated
8000011B63 UVB UVB relay element operated
8400011B64 SYN1-Angle SYN1-Angle relay element operated
8500011B65 SYN1-dV SYN1-dV relay element operated
8600011B66 SYN1-df SYN1-df relay element operated
8C00011B67 OVL-L1 OVL relay element operated (phase-L1)
8D00011B68 OVL-L2 OVL relay element operated (phase-L2)
8E00011B69 OVL-L3 OVL relay element operated (phase-L3)
8700011B6A SYN1-Angle zero SYN1 Angle check(zero)
8800011B6B SYN1-Angle loss SYN1 Angle check(loss)
8B00011B6C SYN1-V5per SYN1 Voltage check(V5per)
8000011B6D VCHK_LB-DL Voltage check(Live Bus & Dead Line)
8100011B6E VCHK_DB_LL Voltage check(Dead Bus & Live Line)
8F00011B6F VCHK_OVL3P Voltage check(Live 3phase Line)
8200011B70 VCHK_DB-DL Voltage check(Dead Bus & Dead Line)
8300011B72 VCHK_SYN1 Synchronous voltage 1(after timer)
8000011B23 ARC1-VCHK Voltage check for autoreclose 1
8200021B60 OVL2 OVL2 relay element operated
8000021B61 UVL2 UVL2 relay element operated
8400021B62 SYN2-Angle SYN2-Angle relay element operated
8500021B63 SYN2-dV SYN2-dV relay element operated
8600021B64 SYN2-df SYN2-df relay element operated
8700021B65 SYN2-Angle zero SYN2 Angle check(zero)
8800021B66 SYN2-Angle loss SYN2 Angle check(loss)
8B00021B67 SYN2-V5per SYN2 Voltage check(V5per)
8300021B6C VCHK_SYN2 Synchronous voltage 2(after timer)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 328 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Trip circuit (TRC)

The trip circuit (TRC) scheme issues trip commands to the circuit breakers (CB#1, CB#2)
when it receives trip signals from the protection functions (which are identified with ‘FC9’, etc.
to represent ZS relay, etc.). The TRC function is able to receive an alternate trip signal
generated by an additional relay external to the IED using PLC connection points via the
binary IO module (BIO)†. If the additional relay can provide a check-signal to condition
tripping, increased reliability can be achieved within the IED when using the check-signal as
an input to the TRC logic (i.e., fail-safe operation is realized by the operation of the additional
relay).
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 329 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 2.24-1 shows that the function is made with following logics:
Collection: The signals, received from the various protection functions (shown as
‘FC18’ and others; see Table 2.24-2 and Table 2.24-6), are gathered in the Trip-signal
collection logic.
Generation: CB trip signal generation, Sub-signal generation for blocking ARC§, and
Alarm-signal generation logics are provided.
A binary output (BO†) circuit must be selected in order to energize the trip coil of the
CB#1 and CB#2. That is, the BOs should be made the connection with the CB#1 and CB#2
trip coils; the drive signal should be outputted (i.e., ‘TRIP-COMMAND1-A,-B,-C’ and
‘TRIP-COMMAND2-A,-B,-C’†). The Alarm-signal generation logic operates to provide a
trigger signal for the recording function‡.
†Note:The internal connection between the TRC function and the BIO module should be
performed using the BIO settings or the PLC programming. The user can program
the connection the PLC monitoring point ‘TRIP-COMMAND1-A (8000001B20) etc.’
with preferred BO circuits using the settings [Input signal1] etc. of each BO on the
BIO module. The externally wired connection between the BIO module and trip
coil circuit is made at the IED terminals. For more information with regard to the
BO circuit concerning the Element ID (Data ID), see Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module.
§Note: Autoreclose (ARC) and other protection functions are discussed separately. See
Chapter Relay application, respectively.
‡Note: For information on recording, see Chapter Recording function.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 330 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Protection functions TRC function

FC1-OPT-TRIP-A
FC1-OPT-TRIP-B
FC1-OPT-TRIP-C
FC1-OPT-TRIP
FC1-ARC-BLOCK Binary IO module
FC1
FC1-OPT-ALARM TRIP-COMMAND1-A BO1 CB#1 (bus CB)
FC1-OPT-AR TRIP-COMMAND1-B
BO2 Transmission line
FC1-OPT-BR OPT-TRIP-A TRIP-COMMAND1-C
FC1-OPT-CR BO3
OPT-TRIP-B
CB trip TRIP-COMMAND2-A
FC1-OPT-ABR OPT-TRIP-C BO4
signal CB#2 (center CB)
FC1-OPT-BCR Trip-command TRIP-COMMAND2-B
generation BO5
FC1-OPT-CAR collection TRIP-COMMAND2-C Transmission line
BO6
Busbar
FC2-OPT-TRIP-A A
FC2-OPT-TRIP-B
OPT-TRIP B
FC2-OPT-TRIP-C Protection
GEN.TRIP
FC2-OPT-TRIP functions
GEN.TRIP-A
FC2-ARC-BLOCK
FC2 GEN.TRIP-B ZG
FC2-OPT-ALARM GEN.TRIP-C
Sub-signal
FC2-OPT-AR CBF
generation
FC2-OPT-BR GEN.ARC-BLOCK ARC
FC2-OPT-CR
FC2-OPT-ABR GEN.TRIP_ALARM
FC2-OPT-BCR
FC2-OPT-CAR Alarm signal OPT.PHASE-A Recording
generation OPT.PHASE-B function
OPT.PHASE-C
FC40-OPT-TRIP-A etc.
FC40 OPT.PHASE-N
CBF1_RETRIP
CBF CBF1_ARC-BLOCK
CB1_BRIDGE B
CB2_BRIDGE
ARC
CB1_94TT A
CB2_94TT
Figure 2.24-1 TRC block diagram
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 331 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.24.1 Command for tripping CB and signal to block reclosing CB#1/CB#2

The TRC logic is designed to issue per-phase trip or three-phase trip commands when a fault
occurs. Table 2.24-2 shows the receipt of trip signals from the protection functions, which are
identified by ‘Protection function identification numbers (‘*’). Note that an operation block
signal for the ARC function is also provided along with the trip signal.
Table 2.24-2 Trip/ARC block signal inputs to the TRC function
Trip and ARC-block signals provided by the protection functions
Protection ID
‘*’ FC*_OPT FC*_OPT FC*_OPT FC*_OPT FC*_OPT_ARC-
functions Note
_TRIP-A _TRIP-B _TRIP-C _TRIP BLOCK
N.A. 1 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 2 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 3 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 4 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 5 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 6 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 7 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 8 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
ZS 9 – – – X X
ZS (SOTF) 10 – – – X X
ZG 11 X X X – X
ZG (SOTF) 12 – – – X –
DISCAR 13 X X X – X
DEFCAR 14 X X X – X
OSTZ 15 – – – X X
SOTF-OC 16 – – – X X
STUB-OC 17 – – – X X
OC 18 – – – X X
EF 19 – – – X X
OCN 20 – – – X X
UC 21 – – – X X
THM 22 – – – X X
BCD 23 – – – X X
N.A. 24 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
OV 25 – – – X X
OVS 26 – – – X X
N.A. 27 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 28 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 29 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
UV 30 – – – X X
UVS 31 – – – X X
N.A. 32 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 33 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 34 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 35 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 36 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 37 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 38 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 39 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. 40 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
Note: ‘N.A.’ represents ‘Not available for the IED’, ‘X’ represents a ‘Valid signal received
from the protection function’, ‘–’ represents that no ‘valid signal’ received in the
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 332 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
TRC function. ‘FC*_OPT_TRIP’ represents a three-pole trip command.

‘ARC-BLOCK’ represents a signal used to block the operation of the ARC function;
the ‘ARC-BLOCK’ signal is transferred to the autoreclose function (ARC).
Incidentally, the term ‘FC*’ represents one of the relay elements connected to the
TRC function.
Table 2.24-3 and Table 2.24-4 summarize the operation results in the TRC function.
Table 2.24-3, shows the correspondents between the input signals (which are signals provided
from the protection functions) and their reasons (that is, types of faults). For example, if a
fault (1LG in phase A) occurs, ‘FC*_OPT_TRIP-A’ signal may be provided for the TRC function
from a protection function; the TRC function may generates ‘TRIP-COMMAN1-A’ and
‘TRIP-COMMAND2-A’ signals when the scheme switch [TP-MODE]=PER-PHASE (see Table
2.24-4). Note that Table 2.24-3 illustrates generic operation rules concernin g fault types;
the inputs depend on the practical operation of relay functions. Hence, the user should figure
out actual inputs using Table 2.24-2 together with the characteristics of respective protection
functions.
Note the TRC outputs will be influenced by the signals generated in the ARC function.
That is, when a CB1_BRIDGE or a CB1_94TT signal is generated and it is injected into the
TRC function, the TRC function is instructed to output a three-phase tripping (i.e., issuing
CB1_94TT following ARC1 FT or TPAR) or the TRC function is instructed to operate
unconditionally in three-phase tripping mode (i.e., issuing CB1_BRIDGE following ARC1
UNREADT). We shall see a number of operation settings [ARC1-MODE] and [ARC2-MODE] in
the ARC function.
Table 2.24-3 Trip command and its correspondent fault
Trip phase Inputs (See Table 2.24-2) Outputs
(Fault type) Trip signals coming from protection functions (FC*) Trip commands
Phase A (1LG) FC*_OPT_TRIP-A
Phase B (1LG) FC*_OPT_TRIP-B
Phase C (1LG) FC*_OPT_TRIP-C
Phase AB (L-L) FC*_OPT_TRIP-A and FC*_OPT_TRIP-B See Table 2.24-4
Phase BC (L-L) FC*_OPT_TRIP-B and FC*_OPT_TRIP-C
Phase CA (L-L) FC*_OPT_TRIP-C and FC*_OPT_TRIP-A
Phases ABC (3PH) FC*_OPT_TRIP (=FC*_OPT_TRIP-A & B & C)
No trip (Unfaulted) No input No output
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 333 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 2.24-4 Trip commands

Outputs
Inputs
[TP-MODE]= [TP-MODE]= [TP-MODE]=
(see Table 2.24-3)
1-PHASE† 3-PHASE‡ PER-PHASE
TRIP-COMMAND1-A TRIP-COMMAND1-A
FC*_OPT-TRIP-A
TRIP-COMMAND2-A TRIP-COMMAND2-A
TRIP-COMMAND1-B TRIP-COMMAND1-B
FC*_OPT-TRIP-B
TRIP-COMMAND2-B TRIP-COMMAND2-B
TRIP-COMMAND1-C TRIP-COMMAND1-C
FC*_OPT-TRIP-C
TRIP-COMMAND2-C TRIP-COMMAND2-C
TRIP-COMMAND1-A
FC*_OPT-TRIP-A TRIP-COMMAND1-B
FC*_OPT-TRIP-B TRIP-COMMAND2-A
TRIP-COMMAND1-A
TRIP-COMMAND2-B
TRIP-COMMAND1-B
TRIP-COMMAND1-B
TRIP-COMMAND1-C
FC*_OPT-TRIP-B TRIP-COMMAND1-C
TRIP-COMMAND1-A
FC*_OPT-TRIP-C TRIP-COMMAND2-B
TRIP-COMMAND1-B TRIP-COMMAND2-A
TRIP-COMMAND2-C
TRIP-COMMAND1-C TRIP-COMMAND2-B
TRIP-COMMAND1-C
TRIP-COMMAND2-C
FC*_OPT-TRIP-C TRIP-COMMAND1-A
TRIP-COMMAND2-A
FC*_OPT-TRIP-A TRIP-COMMAND2-C
TRIP-COMMAND2-B
TRIP-COMMAND2-A
TRIP-COMMAND2-C
TRIP-COMMAND1-A
TRIP-COMMAND1-B
FC*_OPT-TRIP-A
TRIP-COMMAND1-C
FC*_OPT-TRIP-B
TRIP-COMMAND2-A
FC*_OPT-TRIP-C
TRIP-COMMAND2-B
TRIP-COMMAND2-C
†Note: the tripping phase does not have the match with the phase of an input signal for
1-PHASE or 3-PHASE being set for the scheme switch [TP-MODE].
‡Note: Three-phase trip command is issued unconditionally for any fault at 3-PHASE.
Table 2.24-5 illustrates CBF function can generate a re-trip signal and an ARC-BLOCK
signal.
Table 2.24-5 Signals coming from CBF function
Signals issued in the CBF
Protection function Note
CBF1_RETRIP CBF1_ARC-BLOCK
CBF X X
Note: ‘X’ represents a valid signal for the TRC’. The ‘CBF1_ARC-BLOCK’ signal is
grouped with the ‘FC*_OPT_ARC-BLOCK’ signal in the Sub-signal generation
scheme.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 334 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.24.2 Recording identifiers for respective fault types

Table 2.24-6 shows an identifier signal for the recording function generated when a fault is
detected by the protection functions. That is, the identifier is generated in each protection
function (relay element) and is transferred to the recording function.
Table 2.24-6 Recording identifiers for relay operating elements for different faults
Fault identifier for relay element operated in each phase
Protection ID FC* FC*_OPT_ FC*_OPT_ FC*_OPT_ FC*_OPT_ FC*_OPT_ FC*_OPT_
functions ‘*’ _OPT_ AR BR CR ABR BCR CAR
ALARM Phase-A Phase-B Phase-C Phase-AB Phase-BC Phase-CA
N.A. 1 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
ZS 9 – – – – X X X
ZS (SOTF) 10 – – – – X X X
ZG 11 – X X X – – –
ZG (SOTF) 12 – X X X – – –
DISCAR 13 – X X X X X X
DEFCAR 14 – X X X – – –
OSTZ 15 – – – – – – –
SOTF-OC 16 – X X X – – –
STUB-OC 17 – X X X – – –
OC 18 X X X X – – –
EF 19 X – – – – – –
OCN 20 X – – – – – –
UC 21 X X X X – – –
THM 22 X – – – – – –
BCD 23 X – – – – – –
OV 25 X X X X – – –
OVS 26 X – – – X X X
UV 30 X X X X – – –
UVS 31 X – – – X X X
Note: ‘X’ represents a ‘Valid signal’. ‘–’ is not ‘Valid signal’.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 335 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.24.3 Scheme logic

(i) Trip-signal collection
Trip-signal collection gathers the trip signals provided by each protection function and groups
them to the trip operation commands “OPT-TRIP”, “OPT-TRIP-A”, “OPT-TRIP-B”, and
“OPT-TRIP-C” for General-trip-signal production, as shown in Figure 2.24-2.
The TRC logic has PLC connection points, which the user can program for issuing the
trip command. For example, if the user wishes to trip the CBs using signals generated by
external relays, the signals can be connected to the TRC logic using the following PLC
connection points: TRIP-A_ADD, TRIP-B_ADD, TRIP-C_ADD and TRIP_ADD.
Protection 8000001B60
functions FC*-OPT-TRIP_A
OPT-TRIP-A
≥1
FC01
800000EBB3 TRIP-A_ADD
FC02
8100001B61
FC*-OPT-TRIP_B
OPT-TRIP-B
≥1
810000EBB4 TRIP-B_ADD
FC40
8200001B62
FC*-OPT-TRIP_C OPT-TRIP-C
≥1
820000EBB5 TRIP-C_ADD
8300001B63
OPT-TRIP
FC*-OPT-TRIP
≥1
830000EBB6 TRIP_ADD
Figure 2.24-2 Scheme logic for Trip-signal collection
(ii) General-trip-signal production

Figure 2.24-3 illustrates the general-trip-signal production logic. The user can program the
generation of trip signals using the PLC connection point “ADD_OPT_COM”, when trip
signals are not available from the relay functions.
The TRC function has a scheme switch [TP-MODE] to determine a trip mode; hence, the
user can select either single-phase trip mode (1-PHASE) or three-phase trip mode (3-PHASE)
or per-phase trip mode (PER-PHASE) for the CB tripping. Table 2.24-4 has shown the output
signals when the TRC function receives the trip signals from the protection functions. Note
that the scheme switch [TP-MODE] is only applicable when a phase trip mode (1P) is set in a
protection function (i.e., the user should set trip-phase selectors using [TPMD] settings, which
some protection functions have. If single-phase trip signals are not generated in the protection
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 336 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
functions, the scheme switch [TP-MODE] is useless.
The “GEN.TRIP-A,-B,-C” signals are transferred to the ARC function to initiate the
reclose operation of the CBs.
To ARC
8200001BB2 GEN.TRIP-A
820000EBB2 ADD_OPT_COM GEN.TRIP-B
GEN.TRIP-C
Trip-command To ZG
≥1
collection scheme GEN.TRIP
OPT-TRIP-A ≥1
& 8000001B6C
8014281001 To CB#1
≥1
OPT-TRIP-B ≥1
≥1 8100001B6D
≥1 TRIP COMMAND1-A
&
8014291001
≥1
OPT-TRIP-C ≥1 TRIP COMMAND1-B
≥1 8200001B6E ≥1
& 80142A1001
OPT-TRIP ≥1 ≥1
≥1 TRIP COMMAND1-C
≥1 & ≥1
& 80142C1001 To CB#2
&
≥1 TRIP COMMAND2-A
80142D1001
& &
≥1 ≥1 TRIP COMMAND2-B
& 80142E1001
& & ≥1 TRIP COMMAND2-C
&
1-PHASE
TP-MODE 3-PHASE
PER-PHASE
≥1
8000001BB0
800000EBB0 TPMODE_3PH
8100001BB1 To Recording function

810000EBB1 ADD-FS TRIP COMMAND1-A
≥1 ≥1 ≥1
& TRIP COMMAND1-B
From FS
OPT-TRIP ≥1 TRIP COMMAND1-C
≥1
& TRIP COMMAND CB2 -A
≥1 TRIP COMMAND CB2 -B
≥1 & TRIP COMMAND CB2 -C
From CBF ≥1
&
CBF1_RETRIP-A
CBF1_RETRIP-B
CBF1_RETRIP-C
CBF2_RETRIP-A
CBF2_RETRIP-B
CBF2_RETRIP-C
From ARC
CB1_BRIDGE
CB2_BRIDGE
CB1_94TT
CB2_94TT
From PROT-COMMON
CB-SYSTEM=1CB
CB-SYSTEM=2CB
Figure 2.24-3 Logic for general trip and CB trip signals

Acquisition of fail-safe signal provided externally
If an external relay is available to provide a fail-safe check for the internal operation of the
IED, and the user wishes to use the output of the external relay in order to enhance the
reliability of tripping further, then the PLC connection points ‘ADD-FS’ can be used in the
Trip-signal generation scheme. That is, the external check signal is connected at the ‘ADD-FS’
point.
Acquisition of external trip command

As the PLC connection point ‘ADD_OPT_COM’ is provided, the TRC function can accept a trip
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 337 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
command that is generated externally.
Provision of trigger signals to Recording functions

The ‘TRIP COMMMAND1-A, -B, -C’ and ‘TRIP COMMMAND2-A, -B, -C’ signals are viable to
operation of Recording function, which we shall see in Chapter Recording function.
Provision for distance relay

The ‘GEN.TRIP’ signal is provided to direct the operation of the UVPWI relay in the distance
protection function, which we shall see in Chapter Relay application: Distance protection.
(iii) CB trip signal production

As illustrated in Figure 2.24-3, the ‘TRIP COMMMAND1-A, -B, -C’ and ‘TRIP
COMMMAND2-A, -B, -C’ signals are transferred to trip coils of the CB#1 and CB#2 when the
signals “OPT-TRIP-A, -B, and -C” or “OPT-TRIP” enter into the TRC function.
CB trip signals for 1CB system

When the TRC function operates in a single CB (1CB) system; the “TRIP COMMMAND1-A,
-B, -C” signals should be connected with BO circuits.
Table 2.24-7 Output signals for single CB#1
Output signals Usage of signals
TRIP-COMMMAND1-A CB trip in phase A
TRIP-COMMMAND1-B CB trip in phase B
TRIP-COMMMAND1-C CB trip in phase C
CBs trip signals for 1.5CB system

When the TRC function can operate in a single-and-a-half breaker system (1.5CB); the other
“TRIP COMMMAND2-A, -B, -C” signals also should be connected with other BO circuits.
Table 2.24-8 summarizes the outputs signals of the TRC function in the 1.5CB system.
Table 2.24-8 Output signals for CB#1 and CB#2 in 1.5CB system
Output signals Usage of signals
TRIP-COMMMAND1-A CB#1(Bus CB) trip in phase A
TRIP-COMMMAND1-B CB#1(Bus CB) trip in phase B
TRIP-COMMMAND1-C CB#1(Bus CB) trip in phase C
TRIP-COMMMAND2-A CB#2(Center CB) trip in phase A
TRIP-COMMMAND2-B CB#2(Center CB) trip in phase B
TRIP-COMMMAND2-C CB#2(Center CB) trip in phase C
(iv) Sub-signal generation

In a similar way to the Trip-signal collection, the Sub-signal generation groups the blocking
signals for ARC operation; it groups them into ‘GEN.ARC-BLOCK’ signal, as illustrated in
Figure 2.24-4. Blocking signal from the CBF function is also integrated into the
‘GEN.ARC-BLOCK’ signal; then it is transferred to the ARC function.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 338 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8500001B65
Protection
functions FC*-ARC-BLOCK
FC01 To ARC function
≥1 8500001B79
FC02
GEN.ARC-BLOCK
≥1
FC40
From CBF function
CBF1 CBF1-ARC-BLOCK
CBF2 CBF2-ARC-BLOCK
Figure 2.24-4 Scheme logic for Sub-signal generation
(v) Alarm-signal generation

Figure 2.24-5 shows the alarm-signal generation logic. The signals in Table 2.24-6 are
collected and grouped into OPT-PHASE-A, OPT-PHASE-B, OPT-PHASE-C, OPT-PHASE-N,
and GEN.TRIP_ALARM signals.
8000001B66 To Recording function
8000001B71
Protection OPT-AR ≥1 &
functions FC*-OPT-AR OPT-PHASE-A
≥1
FC01
880000EBB8 OPT-P-A_ADD
FC02
8100001B67
FC*-OPT-BR ≥1 8000001B72
OPT-BR &
≥1 OPT-PHASE-B
890000EBB9 OPT-P-B_ADD
8200001B68
FC40
8000001B73
FC*-OPT-CR OPT-CR ≥1 &
OPT-PHASE-C
≥1
8A0000EBBA OPT-P-C_ADD
8000001B74
8400001B69 &
OPT-PHASE-N
FC*-OPT-ABR OPT-ABR
≥1
8C0000EBBB OPT-P-AB_ADD 8000001B77

GEN.TRIP_ALARM
8500001B6A
FC*-OPT-BCR OPT-BCR
≥1
8D0000EBBC OPT-P-BC_ADD
8600001B6B
FC*-OPT-CAR OPT-CAR
≥1
8E0000EBBD OPT-P-CA_ADD
8400001B64
FC*_OPT-ALARM GEN-ALARM ≥1
≥1
840000EBB7 OPT-ALARM_ADD
Logic for general trip and trip command GEN.TRIP
800000EBBE OPT-P-N_ADD
Figure 2.24-5 Scheme logic for Alarm-signal generation
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 339 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
When an alarm signal indicating a Line-to-Line (LL) fault and others is provided
externally, the user can also record it as the alarm by the use of PLC connection points
‘OPT-P-A_ADD’ and others. If the additional relay being designed to operate for a ground fault
is available, use the alternative PLC connection point ‘OPT-P-N_ADD’.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 340 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.24.4 Setting
Setting of TRC(Function ID: 4A0001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
TRC TP-MODE 1-Phase / 3-Phase / Per-Phase - Trip mode selection Per-Phase
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 341 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.24.5 Data ID
TRC(Function ID: 4A0001)
8400001B64 GEN.ALARM operation (GEN.ALARM)
8300001B6F GEN.TRIP General trip
8000001B6C GEN.TRIP-A General trip (Phase-A)
8100001B6D GEN.TRIP-B General trip (Phase-B)
8200001B6E GEN.TRIP-C General trip (Phase-C)
8000001B77 GEN.TRIP_ALARM General trip or General alarm
8400001B69 OPT-ABR operation (ABR)
8000001B66 OPT-AR operation (AR)
8500001B65 OPT-ARC-BLOCK operation (ARC-BLOCK)
8500001B6A OPT-BCR operation (BCR)
8100001B67 OPT-BR operation (BR)
8600001B6B OPT-CAR operation (CAR)
8200001B68 OPT-CR operation (CR)
8300001B63 OPT-TRIP operation (trip)
8000001B60 OPT-TRIP-A operation (phase-A)
8100001B61 OPT-TRIP-B operation (phase-B)
8200001B62 OPT-TRIP-C operation (phase-C)
8000001B71 OPT.PHASE-A Operating phase-A
8100001B72 OPT.PHASE-B Operating phase-B
8200001B73 OPT.PHASE-C Operating phase-C
8300001B74 OPT.PHASE-N Operating phase-N
8000001B20 TRIP_COMMAND1-A Trip command 1 (Phase-A)
8100001B21 TRIP_COMMAND1-B Trip command 1 (Phase-B)
8200001B22 TRIP_COMMAND1-C Trip command 1 (Phase-C)
8000001B24 TRIP_COMMAND2-A Trip command 2 (Phase-A)
8100001B25 TRIP_COMMAND2-B Trip command 2 (Phase-B)
8200001B26 TRIP_COMMAND2-C Trip command 2 (Phase-C)

810000EBB1 ADD_FS Additional fail-safe command
820000EBB2 ADD_OPT_COM Additional operation command
840000EBB7 OPT-ALARM_ADD Additional alarm output command
8C0000EBBB OPT.P-AB_ADD Additional operated phase-AB command
880000EBB8 OPT.P-A_ADD Additional operated phase-A command
8D0000EBBC OPT.P-BC_ADD Additional operated phase-BC command
890000EBB9 OPT.P-B_ADD Additional operated phase-B command
8E0000EBBD OPT.P-CA_ADD Additional operated phase-CA command
8A0000EBBA OPT.P-C_ADD Additional operated phase-C command
800000EBBE OPT.P-N_ADD Additional operated phase-N command
800000EBB0 TPMODE_3PH 3-phases trip permissive command
800000EBB3 TRIP-A_ADD Additional A-phase trip command
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 342 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

810000EBB4 TRIP-B_ADD Additional B-phase trip command
820000EBB5 TRIP-C_ADD Additional C-phase trip command
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 343 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Protection common (PROT_COMMON)

The contact states of the circuit breaker (CB) and the disconnector (DS) provided are grouped
in the protection common function (PROT_COMMON) and are used in a number of relay
applications to decide conditions. The PROT_COMMON function also examines whether a
line is dead (de-energizing), as the PROT_COMMON has an under-voltage detection (UV)
relay. The PROT_COMMON function is operated as the common function.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 344 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.25.1 Selection of breaker system

A single breaker arrangement (1CB) is applied and the protection function is required to
operate in the 1CB, the user should set 1CB for the scheme switch [CB-System]. When a
single-and-a-half breaker arrangement system (1.5CB) is applied, the user should set 2CB for
the scheme switch. (2.84.8)
2.25.2 Decision of CB open/close status

Circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact is used to state the CB status; a normal-open contact (N/O)
and a normal-close contact (N/C) can be furnished in the CB. Thus, as to the phase-A contact
of the CB, signals “CB1-A_NO_CONT” and “CB1-A_NC_CONT” can be used to represent the
CB status in phase-A (i.e., tripped or closed in phase-A). The PROT_COMM function can
decide the CB status using the both signals; the decision generated will be provided for other
protection functions so that the IED can operate in accordance with the CB status.
(i) Signal option

As the CB auxiliary-contacts (N/O and/or N/C) may generate the signals, the user should set
the rule for the decision. When the N/O signal is generated but the N/C signal is not generated,
set NO for the scheme switch [CB1-Contact] so that the PROT_COMMON function can decide
the CB state using only the N/O. Conversely, the decision should be made with only the N/C,
NC is set for this scheme switch. When both N/O and the N/C used, set Both for the scheme
switch [CB1-Contact]†.
†Note:When the IED operates for the 1.5CB arrangement (i.e., two CBs are connected
with the IED), the user should set the scheme switches [CB1-Contact] and
[CB2-Contact] both.
(ii) Contact supervision

Table 2.25-2 exemplifies the rules between the CB main-contact and the CB auxiliary-contact.
Given that the main-contact is open, the N/O is open and the N/C is closed; however if the
both are open when the main contact is open, we should decide the information generated in
the PROT_COMMON is not true (say, an incorrect signal is generated). The contact
supervision can find the inconsistency in the decisions using the rule of Table 2.25-2.
Table 2.25-2 Main and Auxiliary contacts within CB
Main contact
OPEN CLOSED
N/O OPEN CLOSED
Auxiliary contacts
N/C CLOSED OPEN
The user should set On for the scheme switch [CB-SV] when the operation of the contact
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 345 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
supervision feature is required; set the time for the setting [TCBSV] to define the monitoring
period, which the user can have an option among 0 to 100 sec.
(iii) CB decision logic

Figure 2.25-1 shows the decision logic of the PROT_COMMON and outputs the decision state
of the CB: CB-A_CLOSE, CB-B_CLOSE, and others.
For the operation, the user should inject signals of CB states for the following PLC
connection points: ‘CB1-A NO CONT’, ‘CB1-A NC CONT’ and others. Note that a common
point is ready for the CB designed to three-phase tripping: CB1-NO CONT’ and ‘CB1-NC
CONT’.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 346 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8000001BB0
8300001BBE ≥1
TCBSV
8000001B93
=1 1 t 0
8000001B87 & CB1-A_FAIL
8300001BBF ≥1
0–100S
8100001BB1
8300001BBE ≥1 TCBSV
8100001B94
8100001B88 =1 1 t 0
&
8300001BBF ≥1 CB1-B_FAIL
0–100S
8200001BB2
8300001BBE ≥1 TCBSV
t 0 8200001B95
8200001B89 =1 1
& CB1-C_FAIL
8300001BBF ≥1
0–100S 8300001B96
& ≥1 CB1-FAIL
800000EBB0 CB1-A_NO_CONT To Common of DISCAR, DEFCAR

≥1 &
8000001B73
≥1 8000001B88
≥1
800000EBB7 CB1-A_NC_CONT ≥1 1
& CB-A_CLOSE
810000EBB1 CB1-B_NO_CONT ≥1 &

8000001B7４
≥1 8100001B89
≥1
810000EBB8 CB1-B_NC_CONT ≥1 1 CB-B_CLOSE
&
820000EBB2 CB1-C_NO_CONT ≥1 & 8000001B75

≥1 8200001B8A
≥1 CB-C_CLOSE
820000EBB9 CB1-C_NC_CONT ≥1 1
& 8000001B76
&
830000EBBE CB1-NO_CONT
To VTF, CTF, ZS
8000001B77 8300001B8B
830000EBBF CB1-NC_CONT 1 ≥1
CB-ALLPH_CLOSE
≥1 8000001B78
1
NO To CLP
8000001B79
NC ≥1 1 CB-ALLPH_CLOSE
Both 8800001B90
& 8000001B7A ≥1 CB-ANYPH_CLOSE
CB1-Contact
On
8400001B97
CB-SV CB2-A_FAIL CB2-A_FAIL
8400001BB3 8500001B98
CB2-B_FAIL CB2-B_FAIL
8400001B8A
8500001BB4 8600001B99
CB2-C_FAIL CB2-C_FAIL
8500001B8B
8700001B9A
8600001BB5
CB2-FAIL CB2-FAIL
8600001B8C
To ARC
840000EBB3 CB2-A_NO_CONT
CB2-A_CLOSE CB1-ALLPH_CLOSE
840000EBBA CB2-A_NC_CONT CB2-B_CLOSE CB2-ALLPH_CLOSE
CB2-C_CLOSE CB-SYSTEM=1CB
850000EBB4 CB2-B_NO_CONT CB2-ALLPH_CLOSE CB-SYSTEM=2CB
8400001B8C To TRC, CBF

850000EBBB CB2-B_NC_CONT CB2-A_OPEN & CB-A_OPEN
8500001B8D
& CB-B_OPEN
CB2-B_OPEN
860000EBB5 CB2-C_NO_CONT 8600001B8E
& CB-C_OPEN
CB2-C_OPEN
860000EBBC CB2-C_NC_CONT &
CB2-ALLPH_OPEN To Dead line
detection logic
Note: CB2 logic is similar to CB1
logic; OPEN signals are 8700001B8F
CB-ALLPH_OPEN
TRUE (1) and CLOSE
signals are FALSE (0) when
this logic is used in 1CB
system.
≥1 &
To OVG, OVN, UVP, DEFCAR
NO &
≥1 TCBLOSPH 8900001B91
NC ≥1 & ≥1 t 0 CB-LOSS_PHASE
Both 1 0.00 to 0.10s
CB2-Contact
&
CB2-CONTACT=BOTH
1CB
2CB
CB-System
Figure 2.25-1 CB decision logic with supervision feature in 1.5CB system
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 347 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.25.3 Decision of DS open/close status

The PROT_COMMON function can determine the behavior and position status of a DS.
Signal configuration and settings for the DS position status are similar to that of the CB. Note
that settings and logics cited below are just available for the DS.
(i) Signal selection

Set either NO, NC, or Both for scheme switch [DS-Contact].
(ii) Contact supervision

When Both is set for scheme switch [DS-Contact], the auxiliary switch contact state of the DS
is supervised. Set On for scheme switch [DS-SV] when contact supervision is required. The
supervision period has to be set between 0 to 100 seconds for the setting [TDSSV].
(iii) Logic
Figure 2.25-2 shows the logic used to determine DS status and generates the output signal of
the DS state: DS_CLOSE or DS_OPEN. The supervision scheme logic to supervise the status
of the DS auxiliary switch contacts. This scheme logic is applied when BOTH is set for the
scheme switch [DS-Contact]. For the operation, the user should inject signals of DS states for
the following PLC connection points: ‘DS-NO CONT’, ‘DS NC CONT’ and others.
8C00001BB6 TDSSV 8C00001B9B

8C00001BBD
=1 1 t 0
&
DS-FAIL
0–100s
8C0000EBB6 DS-NO_CONT & 8E00001B85 To STUB-OC
≥1 DS_CLOSE
8C0000EBBD DS-NC_CONT 1
& 8F00001B86
1 DS_OPEN
≥1
NO
NC ≥1
Both
DS-Contact &
Both
DS-SV
Figure 2.25-2 Scheme logic to determine DS status
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 348 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.25.4 Dead line detection

The dead line detection (DLD) determinates whether the line is out-of-service or not.
Checking for the voltage existence in three-phase is required when all CBs are closed; hence,
the output signal of the DLD is being checked. (2.84.3)
(i) Under-voltage relay

A phase-to-phase (UVLS) element and a phase-to-ground (UVLG) element are provide in the
UV relay. Both elements operate when On is set for scheme switch [DLDbyUV]. (2.84.3.1)
(ii) Decision of CB operation

Deciding the dead line state is carried out by examining the CB position. The user should set
On for the scheme switch [DLDbyCB] for the decision. (2.84.3.2)
(iii) Detection time

The examining period for DLD detection is required to set using the setting [TDSSV], the
value of the detection time can be set between 0 to 100 seconds. (2.84.3.3)
(iv) Dead line detection logic

Figure 2.25-3 shows the scheme logic for the detection of an under voltage condition. It is also
used to determine whether the line is dead or not.
To Common of DISCAR, DEFCAR
UVLG-A
UVLG-B
UVLG-C
UVLG-AB
UVLG-BC
UVLG-CA
8000001B60 DEAD_LINE_DETECT
A & TDLD
8100001B61 & t 0
UVLG 8000001B9C To SOTF-OC
B ≥1
8200001B62 DEAD_LINE_DETECT
t 0
C
0.00 to 3000.00s
≥1
UVLG-OR
& UVLG-AND
8400001B63
AB
8500001B64
UVLS BC
8600001B65
CA
≥1
UVLS-OR
&
UVLS-AND
DLDbyUV On
From
DLDbyCB On
CB decision logic &
CB_ALLPH_OPEN
Figure 2.25-3 Dead line detection logic with under voltage relays
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 349 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.25.5 Detection of current change (OCD)

(i) Current change detection relay
Suppose that the difference exists between the latest current vector (IM) and the last current
vector (IN). The OCD function will operate if the difference is larger than the setting. The IN is
measured for the last two-cycles; the difference is decided using Equation (2.25-1):
|𝐼𝑀 − 𝐼𝑁 | > 𝐼𝑠 (2.25-1)
where a criteria for the decision is given by the pick-up threshold value (Is).
The pick-up threshold is defined using setting [OCD], which is from 0.05 A to 0.20 A at 1 A
rating†. At 5 A rating, 0.25 A to 1.00 A is applied.
IM
IS
IN
Figure 2.25-4 Current change detection
(ii) OCD logic

Figure 2.25-5 shows the OCD logic and its output signals.
To Common of DISCAR, DEFCAR
8000001B66 0 t 8000001B6F To VTF
A OCD-A
8100001B67 8100001B70
0 t
OCD B OCD-B
8200001B68 8200001B71
C 0 t OCD-C
0.1s
Figure 2.25-5 Scheme logic for current change check
(2.84.4)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 350 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.25.6 Setting
Setting of PROT_COMMON (Function ID: 48A001)
Default setting
Range Unit
Setting item Contents value Notes
s
1A rated 5A rated 1A 5A
UVLS 5.0 - 130.0 V UV phase-phase relay operating value 77.0
UVLG 5.0 - 130.0 V UV phase-ground relay operating value 45.0

OCD 0.05 - 0.20 0.25 - 1.00 A OCD relay operating value 0.10 0.50
CB
CB-System 1CB / 2CB – Single CB or One-and-a-half CB system 1CB
Kind of injected CB contact

CB1-Contact NO / NC / Both – Normally open contact, Normally close NO
contact or Both.
Kind of injected CB2 contact
CB2-Contact NO / NC / Both – Normally open contact, Normally close NO
contact or Both contact.
TCBLOSPH 0.00 – 0.10 s CB loss phase time 0.03
CB-SV Off / On – CB contact supervisor enable Off
TCBSV 0 - 100 s CB contact supervisor time 10
Kind of injected DS contact

DS
DS-Contact NO / NC / Both – Normally open contact, Normally close NO

contact or Both contact.
DS-SV Off / On – DS contact super visor enable Off
TDSSV 0 - 100 s DS contact super visor time 60

Dead-line detection
DLDbyUV Off / On – Dead line detection by under voltage Off
DLDbyCB Off / On – Dead line detection by CB open Off
TDLD 0.00 - 300.00 s Dead line detection timer 10.00
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 351 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2.25.7 Data ID
PROT_COMMON(48A001)
8300001B8B CB_ALLPH_CLOSE Three-phase contacts closed in CB
8700001B8F CB_ALLPH_OPEN Three-phase contacts not closed in CB
8800001B90 CB_ANYPH_CLOSE Any UVLG element operated in three-phases
8900001B91 CB_LOSS_PHASE Any one of three-phase contacts opening in CB
8300001B96 CB1_FAIL States of the CB1 not to be defined in three-phase
8000001B73 CB1-A_CLOSE Main contact closed in phase-A of CB1
8100001B74 CB1-B_CLOSE Main contact closed in phase-B of CB1
8200001B75 CB1-C_CLOSE Main contact closed in phase-C of CB1
8700001B9A CB2_FAIL States of the CB2 not to be defined in three-phase
8000001B7C CB2-A_CLOSE Main contact closed in phase-A of CB2
8100001B7D CB2-B_CLOSE Main contact closed in phase-B of CB2
8200001B7E CB2-C_CLOSE Main contact closed in phase-C of CB2
8000001B9C DEAD_LINE_DETECT Detected the line not being energized
8E00001B85 DS_CLOSE Main contacts closed in DS
8C00001B9B DS_FAIL States of the DS not to be defined
8F00001B86 DS_OPEN Main contact opening in DS
8000001B66 OCD-A OCD element operated in phase-A
8000001B6F OCD-AT Off-delay timer after OCD element in phase-A
8100001B67 OCD-B OCD element operated in phase-C
8100001B70 OCD-BT Off-delay timer after OCD element in phase-B
8200001B68 OCD-C OCD element operated in phase-C
8200001B71 OCD-CT Off-delay timer after OCD element in phase-C
8000001B60 UVLG-A UVLG element operated in phase-A
8100001B61 UVLG-B UVLG element operated in phase-B
8200001B62 UVLG-C UVLG element operated in phase-C
8400001B63 UVLS-AB UVLS elements operated in phase-AB
8500001B64 UVLS-BC UVLS elements operated in phase-BC
8600001B65 UVLS-CA UVLS elements operated in phase-CA
2200001BA9 CB1_OPCNT IEC61850 OpCnt in three-phase of CB1 in XCBR
3000001BA1 CB1_POS LN Pos-signal of three-phase of CB1 in XCBR
2200001BA6 CB1-A_OPCNT IEC61850 OpCnt of CB1-A in XCBR
3000001B9E CB1-A_POS IEC61580 Pos-signal of CB1-A in XCBR of LN
2200001BA7 CB1-B_OPCNT IEC61850 OpCnt of CB1-B in XCBR
3000001B9F CB1-B_POS IEC61580 Pos-signal of CB1-B in XCBR of LN
2200001BA8 CB1-C_OPCNT IEC61850 OpCnt of CB1-C in XCBR
3000001BA0 CB1-C_POS IEC61580 Pos-signal of CB1-C in XCBR of LN
2200001BAD CB2_OPCNT IEC61850 OpCnt in three-phase of CB2 in XCBR
3000001BA5 CB2_POS LN Pos-signal of three-phase of CB2 in XCBR
2200001BAA CB2-A_OPCNT IEC61850 OpCnt of CB2-A in XCBR
3000001BA2 CB2-A_POS IEC61580 Pos-signal of CB2-A in XCBR of LN
2200001BAB CB2-B_OPCNT IEC61850 OpCnt of CB2-B in XCBR
3000001BA3 CB2-B_POS IEC61580 Pos-signal of CB2-B in XCBR of LN
2200001BAC CB2-C_OPCNT IEC61850 OpCnt of CB2-C in XCBR
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 352 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

PROT_COMMON(48A001)
3000001BA4 CB2-C_POS IEC61580 Pos-signal of CB2-C in XCBR of LN

PROT_COMMON (48A001)
800000EBB0 CB1-A_NO_CONT CB1-A normally open contact
810000EBB1 CB1-B_NO_CONT CB1-B normally open contact
820000EBB2 CB1-C_NO_CONT CB1-C normally open contact
840000EBB3 CB2-A_NO_CONT CB2-A normally open contact
850000EBB4 CB2-B_NO_CONT CB2-B normally open contact
860000EBB5 CB2-C_NO_CONT CB2-C normally open contact
8C0000EBB6 DS_NO_CONT DS normally open contact
800000EBB7 CB1-A_NC_CONT CB1-A normally close contact
810000EBB8 CB1-B_NC_CONT CB1-B normally close contact
820000EBB9 CB1-C_NC_CONT CB1-C normally close contact
840000EBBA CB2-A_NC_CONT CB2-A normally close contact
850000EBBB CB2-B_NC_CONT CB2-B normally close contact
860000EBBC CB2-C_NC_CONT CB2-C normally close contact
8C0000EBBD DS_NC_CONT DS normally close contact
830000EBBE CB1_NO_CONT CB1 normally open contact
830000EBBF CB1_NC_CONT CB1 normally close contact
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 353 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3 General control function
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 354 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Control scheme
Figure 3.1-1 shows the control overview for the control function; there are two control stages:
“Wait for a command” and “Receiving commands”. The function will wait for a command from
the server in the first stage. During the receiving stage, the function will respond to “Select”,
“Cancel”, and “Operate” commands. Specific logic is provided for each command for each
receiving stage. A decision is required from each logic block to move to the next step (i.e.,
‘Failed’ or ‘Success’). When a ‘success’ decision is determined in the operate logic, the
respective command is issued to the relevant device; the device commences with its operation
(for example, a 43-switch is changed to “ON” from “OFF”). The waiting and receiving stages
loop around at the receipt of every command.
Wait for a command
Waiting stage
Selection stage Failed
Receiving “select command” Select logic Wait for next command

Success
Failed (Do nothing)
Receiving “cancel command” Cancel logic

Success Cancel of “Select command”
Failed
Receiving “operate command” Operate logic Operation completed

Success
Figure 3.1-1 Stages in control function
The type of control can be categorized in accordance with its origin, (Remote/Local/PLC)
and modes (SBO/DIR). That is, the respective control scheme should respond to the respective
origin and mode. The user should be aware of the context of the control action, “On (or
Closing) control” and “Off (or Open) control” in relationship to its origin and mode†.
†Note:The “On control” and “Off control” can be found in the SPOS, DPSY and other
functions. For more information on these functions, see the explanations provided
for each respective function.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 355 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(i) Command reception in SBO mode

In the SBO receiving stage shown in Figure 3.1-1 we can find three processes: select, cancel,
and operate command flows.
Reception of “select command”

Figure 3.1-2 shows a schematic process flow diagram when receiving a “select command”
following the “Wait for a command”. The receipt “select command” is divided into “select
command ‘On’ (Closing)” and “select command ‘Off ’ (Open)”. The select command is carried
out based on its origin: “Remote”, “Local”, and “PLC”. If the “select command” is successful,
the process will wait for the receipt of the next command.
Wait for a command
Receiving “Select command”

Failed
When On is issued Select logic F/S Waiting for a next
Success
from the remote-end “Remote-On-control” “operate command”
or
“cancel command”
When Off is issued Select logic
from the remote-end “Remote-OFF-control”
When On is issued Select logic

from the local-end “Local-On-control”
When Off is issued Select logic

from the local-end “Local-OFF-control”
When On is issued by Select logic

the PLC function “PLC-On-control”
When Off is issued by Select logic

the PLC function “PLC-OFF-control”
Figure 3.1-2 Schemes for “Select command”
Reception of “cancel command”

If the “select command” proceeds successfully following the receiving stage, the function can
subsequently receive a “cancel command”. Figure 3.1-3 shows the reception of a “cancel
command”. If the “cancel command” is successful, the “select command” is discarded and the
function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage (i.e., the initial stage). In other words, the
function waits for a new “select command” so that the other control functions can receive a
command.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 356 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Wait for a command
Receiving “Cancel command”

Success Discarding of Return to “Wait
Cancel logic F/S
When Cancel is issued “select command” for a command”
from the remote-end “Remote-cancel”
Failed
When Cancel is issued Cancel logic Do nothing
from the local-end “Local-cancel”
Figure 3.1-3 Scheme “Cancel command”
Reception of “operate command”

Following successful completion of the “select command”, the control function is ready to
receive an “operate command” in order to control a device. The receipt of “operate command”
is divided into “Operate command ‘On’ (Closing)” and “Control command ‘Off ’ (Open)”; each of
the two commands is carried out based upon its origin i.e. “Remote”, “Local”, and “PLC”. If the
“operate command” is completed, the “select command” can be released; then a new “Wait for
a command” stage can commence for receipt of a new “select command”.
Wait for a command Failed
Receiving “Select command” Receiving “Operate command”

Failed
Return to “Wait
Release of
F/S for a command”
Select logic Operate logic Success “select command”
“Remote-On-control” “Remote-On-control”
Select logic Operate logic

“Remote-OFF-control “Remote-OFF-control
” ”
“Local-On-control” “Local-On-control”

“Local-OFF-control” “Local-OFF-control”

“PLC-On-control” “PLC-On-control”

“PLC-OFF-control” “PLC-OFF-control”
Figure 3.1-4 Scheme “Operate command”
(ii) Command reception in DIR mode

In DIR mode, issuing an “operate command” is possible without the reception of the “select
command”. Thus, the reception of an “operation command” only features in the control
scheme†. We shall see the DIR mode later.
†Note:We can encompass the operation of the “select command” being performed
internally in the control scheme. Thus, the user is not required to take account of
the reception of the “select command”.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 357 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Control mode
Either Select-Before-operation (SBO) or Direct-Operate-control (DIR) is provided as a control
mode for the device. The user can select the preferred control mode.
3.2.1 Select-before-operation mode (SBO)

The user should be aware that in the SBO mode a signal is returned from the target device in
the form of a response signal, (answer). When the target device sends a response to the IED
after receiving a command, the server (and the IED) can send another command to the target
device if the criterion of the response (answer) is satisfied. A safe SBO operation (SBOns) is
normally utilized; however, the user can opt to select an enhanced-security SBO operation
(SBOes), if additional safety is deemed necessary.
(i) SBO with enhanced security (SBOes)

In the SBOes, an operation process (Oper) commences after the completion of a selection
process (SBOw). Figure 3.2-1 exemplifies the exchange of commands and responses; the
server receives a response (answer#1) from the IED with regard to a SBOw command. Then,
provided that the response, (answer#1) received from the IED is satisfied, the server can send
an Oper request to the IED to control the device. If the target device completes the operation
successfully, the server will receive an operation result. Figure 3.2-1 shows the
communication flow between the server (remote-end) and the IED, note that the user will also
see the same process flow when using the IED-front-panel key-operations. That is, the
IED-front-panel (local-end) takes the place of the server (remote-end).
Server IED
Process (SAS) (Control function) Target device
SBOw
Selection Command
Answer#1 Response
Oper. Command
Operation
Answer#2 Response
Device status changed

Operation result Command
Result termination
Figure 3.2-1 SBO with enhanced security
(ii) SBO with normal security (SBOns)

Figure 3.2-2 shows normal SBOns control. The difference between the SBOes and the SBOns
is that the IED does not send an operation result in response to the request Oper.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 358 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Process Server IED

(SAS) (Control function) Target device
Selection SBOw
Command
Answer Response
Oper.
Operation
Command
Answer
Response
Figure 3.2-2 SBO with normal security
3.2.2 Direct-operation mode (DIR)

In the DIR mode, a target device is controlled without the reception of the select command. An
enhanced security mode (DOes) is also provided when the user wishes to control a device with
additional security rather than the normal level of security experienced with mode (DOns) .
(i) DIR with enhanced security (DOes)

Figure 3.2-3 illustrates the server sending the Oper request to the IED; the server receives a
response, (answer#1) from the IED. The result is notified when the operation of the target
device is complete. The result includes status information; it informs whether the target
device has operated normally or not. Note that the control start of the target device is
initiated regardless of the state of the target device.
Process SAS IED

(Server) (Control function) Target device
Oper.
Operation Command
Answer#1 Response
Device status changed
Answer#2 Command
termination
Result
Figure 3.2-3 Direct control with enhanced security
(ii) DIR with normal security (DOns)

A response (answer#2) from the target device is not sent to the SAS in DOns, as shown in
Figure 3.2-4.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 359 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
SAS IED
Process (Server) Control function Target device
Operation
Control
Command
Answer#1
Response
Figure 3.2-4 Direct control with normal security
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 360 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Common controls (CMNCTRL)

The CMNCTRL function is designed to act as a mediator to provide a bridge between the
control functions.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 361 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.3.1 PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signal

The control and monitoring functions are mutually interconnected within the IED; hence,
cascading features are provided to transfer information between them so that the user does
not need to check the interconnections. Approximately 1500 signals are included to facilitate
the internal connection of the control and monitoring functions; their signals are distributed
into BIT, UNIT, BOOLEAN types. Amongst these signals†, approximately 130 are available to
the user and can be applied to program an event operation or another function‡. Figure 3.3-1
exemplifies the “PLC_BIT_0201” signal, which can be used for recording events and other
purposes.
CMNCTRL2
function
PLC_O_BIT_0201 For
・Event record function
5A0101 800200EF40 PLC_BIT_0201 (5A0101 8002001F40)
・Communication (required mapping)
Information ・LEDs
cascaded§ ・IED screen display
・Binary output module
etc…
Figure 3.3-1 Cascading information using signal “PLC_BIT_0201”

†Note:The PLC connection points and monitoring points are listed later.
‡Note:Although 130 signals are available for user programming, nonetheless, the PLC
function also provides the user with other signals for the same purpose. It is
recommended that the user selects the PLC signals provided (i.e., PLC drivers; see
chapter PLC function for more information).
§Note:The CMNCTRL2 function is used to cascade information between signal processing
modules. For more details on the processing module, see chapter Technical
description: Signal processing and communication module.
Figure 3.3-2 shows the input-points and the output-points. During manufacture, several
CMNCTRL2 output-points are connected to the respective control functions. Hence, the user
will find that some control functions use the PLC_BIT to import external signals, as shown in
Figure 3.3-2.
Control function1
CMNCTRL2 Reception of “PLC but signal
function
PLC_O_BIT_1264 Internally Result output
connected
5A0101 801263EF40 PLC_BIT_1264 (5A0101 8012631F40)
Control function2
BIT type PLC_O_BIT_1265
5A0101 801264EF40 PLC_BIT_1265 (5A0101 8012641F40) Control function3
PLC monitoring points for

PLC connection points nominal event recording and others
Control function10
Figure 3.3-2 Mutual connections between CMNCTRL2 and control functions
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 362 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.3.2 Provision of selected status

Let us assume that a select-command is sent for an IED to control a target-device by the
substation automation system (SAS†), but the target-device is not ready to be controlled. The
unready condition might be due to the target-device already being in operation (e.g., CB
tripping) or a failure of the device may have occurred; thus, the IED has to drop the
select-command. If this occurs, the IED is required to send a message stating the reason to the
SAS†. Table 3.3-2 lists the messages generated in the CMNCTRL1 function describing the
failure.
Table 3.3-2 Reason messages due to the release of the select-command

Signal Number Signal Name Description
5A0001 3008001FB4 SCS_CTLNUM
5A0001 2008001008 SCS_ORCAT
5A0001 2208001001 SCS_ADDCAUSE Reason codes for the SAS†
5A0001 6A08001009 SCS_ORIDENT
5A0001 3008001FB4 SCS_CTLNUM
†Note:The user should recognize that the reason messages are only available for
operation with the GCS1000 control system manufactured by Toshiba.
3.3.3 Miscellaneous settings

The CMNCTRL1 function has the following five common settings:
1. Control direction: Scheme switch [SDCEN] can configure the control directions of the
SPOS, DPOS and TPOS functions. If required these functions can
be in the same control direction, set On for the scheme switch
[SDCEN].
2. Return value: When the number of the counter reaches its maximum value (in
case of the default setting, 999,999), it can return and begin
incrementing from either 0 or 1. The return number can be set by
[CNTRV].
3. Select-cancel timer: If the selection of a target device is made, but the control operation
of the selected device is not carried out in a predetermined time
limit, the selection is canceled. The time limit can be set using
[TSC]; the setting range is between 30 and 300 seconds having a 1
second step.
4. Time out: When the selection of the target device and its control execution is
made, the selection will be canceled automatically after the setting
time [EXEWAIT] if the control result is not received at the IED from
the target device. The setting time ranges from 30 to 300 seconds in
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 363 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
1 second steps.
5. Counter limit: The maximum value of the counters can be set between 9 and
2,147,483,647 using [CNTVALMAX]. The default setting is 999,999.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 364 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.3.4 Setting
CMNCTRL setting list (FunctionID:5A0001)
Default setting
Units
value
CMNCTRL SDCEN Off/On - Setting of control to the same direction Off
CNTRV Next value of the counter[CNTVALMAX]

0-1 - 0
level
TSC 30-300 s Selection cancel time-out timer 30
EXEWAIT Waiting execute operation time-out

30-300 s 30
timer
CNTVALMAX 9-2147483647 - Upper limit level of the counter 999999
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 365 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.3.5 Signal
 Connection points in bit type
CMNCTRL2 (Function ID: 5A0101)
320000EF43 CHK_NMI_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal1
320001EF43 CHK_ROMRAM_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal2
320002EF43 CHK_SUM_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal3
320003EF43 CHK_PROGRAM_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal4
320004EF43 CHK_RAM_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal5
320005EF43 CHK_ECC_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal6
320006EF43 CHK_SAMPLING_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal7
320007EF43 CHK_ACC1_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal8
320010EF43 CHK_GOOSERCV_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal11
320011EF43 CHK_PING1_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal12
320012EF43 CHK_PING2_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal13
320013EF43 CHK_CMLV_DAT_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal14
800000EF40 PLC_BIT_0001 PLC event bit information 1
…. ….. …..
 PLC monitoring points in unit type

310008EF41 PLC_UNIT_9 Free connection point for the user (reserved in 16-bit unsigned integer)
 PLC monitoring points in boolean type

000004EF42 PLC_BOOL_5 Free connection point for the user (reserved in boolean)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 366 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
 PLC monitoring points in boolean type

 PLC monitoring point in 32 bit unsigned type

320014EF43 PLC_UNIT32_15 Free connection point for the user (reserved in 32bit unsigned)
 Monitoring points in PLC logic in bit type

8000001F40 PLC_O_BIT_001 PLC event bit output 1
………….. ……….. ……………..
 Monitoring points in PLC logic

0000001F42 PLC_O_BOOL_1 PLC event boolean output 1
………….. ……….. ……………..
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 367 -
L/R CHANGE & 1≥ “True” means Local,
R
“False” means Remote
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Local to remote
&
53000 13109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST
Local, remote and PLC control 1≥
The user can select either local

If there is no operation for a period of 35 minutes
the selection/control process expires.
or remote& control by pressing the L│R key on the front
panel of the IED. Selection is executed within the LOCRMT function. Control logic is provided
Disable default logic
5A0101 801263EF40 PLC_BIT_1264
by default, but the user can customize each application using the PLC function and PLC
connection
5A0101 801264EF40 points. Generally, the LOCRMT function is applied within all IEDs. Figure 3.4-1
PLC_BIT_1265
shows the LOCRMT logic. Note that the LOCRMT function changes for the remote control
Users can fully customize logic by PLC.
unconditionally if the operation/function keys on the front panel are not touched within 35
minutes in the local control.
From KEYINPUT function LOCRMT function (Function ID: 530001)
L/R CHG LRSW01_LR_ST
(240001 31000A1735) (530001 3109001001)
Remote to local S
LRSW01_CH_LR_LCD
& 1≥
R “True” means Local,
“False” means Remote
Local to remote
&
If the user does not touch the
1≥
operation/function keys on the front panel &
&
within 35 min. in the local control, the IED
will be changed for the remote control
unconditionally. &
5A0101 801263EF40 PLC_BIT_1264 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01

Disable default logic
5A0101 801264EF40 PLC_BIT_1265 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02
Users can fully customize logic by PLC.
Figure 3.4-1 LOCRMT logic
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 368 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.4.1 Local control

Local control refers to control operation from the front panel of the IED. Either the DIR or the
SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the user.
3.4.2 Remote control

Remote control refers to control operation from a remote control center or the SAS server.
Either the DIR or the SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the
user. Note that the parameters used in the control commands are defined in international
standards†. The parameter details are provided in the communication profiles. (See Chapter
Communication protocol and Appendices)
†Note:As a rule, the control commands have parameters. For example, the “Off to On”
and “On to Off” control directions that are used in commands are pre-configured as
parameters in the communication protocol. Note that the parameters vary
depending upon the respective protocol used, such as IEC61850, Modbus and
others. For IEC61850, Table 3.4-2 shows the parameters defined: the rule for
control direction can be found in “ctlVal”, the command publisher is recognized
using the parameter “origin”. For more information about the parameters, see
Appendix IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT and TICS.
Table 3.4-2 Defined command parameters in IEC61850-7-2

Parameter Types Descriptions
ctlVal Control direction (On or Off)
origin Indicates the command publisher
ctlNum Sequential Number
T Time that the command is sent
Test Test information (Test/On)
Check Interlock synchronizing
3.4.3 Programmable logic control (PLC)

The programmable logic control, (PLC) function can be used to provide user-preferred control
schemes. Several control functions have connection points to enable connections to be made to
the PLC function; they can be used to create user-preferred control schemes. It is necessary
for the user to program the PLC logic that will be used for the particular connection. Users
need to apply the automatic sequence control (ASEQ) function in order to initiate the
user-preferred control scheme, as shown in Figure 3.4-2. For more details on PLC
programming, refer to the Chapter PLC function.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 369 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
ASEQ User’s PLC SPOS User’s PLC DPOS

logic logic
PLC monitoring point PLC connection point
Figure 3.4-2 Example of user-preferred control scheme using PLC user logic
Note: The user-preferred control scheme implemented by users can only be operated in
the DIR mode.
3.4.4 Signal for Local/Remote control

Note: The user should note the meaning of the following references used in the column
“M/O” in Tables 1.4-2 to 1.4-4:
“O” means the signal is optional.
“M” means the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the user
may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
“N/A” means that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 3.4-3 PLC connection point (Input point for LOCRMT)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
240001 31000A1735 L/R CHG [L/R] key “push” N/A
5A0101 801263EF40 PLC_BIT_1264 Disable condition by PLC O
5A0101 801264EF40 PLC_BIT_1265 User configurable condition by PLC O
Table 3.4-4 Mapping points for LOCRMT

530001 3009011008 LRSW01_LR_ORCAT Mapping data for “originator” in IEC61850 N/A
530001 6A09011009 LRSW01_LR_ORIDENT Mapping data for “originator” in IEC61850 N/A
Table 3.4-5 PLC monitoring point (LOCRMT)

530001 3109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST Local(T) / Remote(F) status (single bit expression)
530001 3009011001 LRSW01_LR_ST_RMT Local(0x80) / Remote(0x40) status (double bit expression)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 370 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
LED reset function (LEDR)

The IED has a number of LEDs on the front panel. For example, a “TRIP” LED is provided as
an indicator for tripping operation. The status of the “TRIP” LED is maintained until the user
has been able to confirm that tripping was initiated by the IED; hence, by inspection the user
is able to reliably determine that the IED initiated tripping. The LED reset (LEDR) function
is furnished within the IED so that the following operations are available to reset the LED
status:
1 Pushing “CLEAR” key1
2 Operation by GR-TIEMS2
3 Operation by the SAS
1Note: For the operation, see Chapter User interface: Outline. Note that pressing the
“CLEAR” key causes the Reset of the LEDs.
2Note: For more information, see Chapter Engineering tool.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 371 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.5.1 Select logic for resetting LEDs

The user should set scheme switch [LEDDR1] to On prior to the LEDR operation. Figure 3.5-1
shows selection logic in the LEDR function.
Wait for a command
Wait for a next command

Select logic
Cancel logic
Resetting LED by remote-SAS Cancel command

Failed
Cancel logic
Signal reception Select
Selection logic Signal output
IEC61850 decision Success
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 3.5-1 Outline of selection command for resetting LEDs
(i) Input signal required mapping

Figure 3.5-2 shows the select logic when a “Select command (reset)” signal is applied to the
LEDR function. The logic has an input-point “LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ” for the reception;
the input-point must be mapped for IEC61850 communication. The function will fail to
operate if mapping is not performed correctly. We will discuss how to map the input points for
the IEC61850 communication in section 3.5.5.
Input Selection logic in LEDR Output
LEDR function (Function ID: 528001)

LEDR01_FSE_RCV
Command “Reset”
For SBO operation (528001 8007011F42)
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Selection
command & 1≥
&
For DIR operation
Operation
command &
LEDR01_NSD_CSF
To “Wait for a next command”
(528001 8307011F41)
0 t
528001 0007011001 LEDR01_STSELD
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” In SBO operation
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) 0.2s
In DIR operate
Select condition‡
0 t
Failed
Logic '0' signal (Always Low (FALSE))
0.3s
Figure 3.5-2 Selection logic for resetting LEDs

‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition scheme. For more
information, see Figure 3.5-8.
*Note:The LEDR function can run on either “the SBO mode” or “the DIR mode” using a
“ctlmodel” signal when the communication is carried out in the IEC61850; thus,
mapping is required for the IEC61850 communication.
(ii) Output signal required mapping

The LEDR function can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“LEDR01_NSD_CSF”, when the LEDR function determines that the input signal “Select
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 372 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
command (reset)” is true. If the LEDR function determines that the “LEDR01_NSD_CSF” is
not true, the LEDR function returns to the “Wait for a next command” stage.
(iii) Select condition

Figure 3.5-3 shows the select condition logic in the LEDR function.
To selection logic
1≥ & Select condition
Other devices traveling detected*1

Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *2
Logic '1' signal (Always high (TRUE))

&
IED serious error detected
SERI_ERR
[LEDDR1_EN]
On
Figure 3.5-3 Select condition logic in LEDR*4

*1Note:If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it indicates
that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should
inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is detected. The
detecting signal is denoted as “Traveling OR” in Table 3.5-2.
*2Note:Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
*3Note:To identify the input point of the LEDR function, see Table 3.5-2.
Table 3.5-2 Input signals for condition logic

5A0001 0008001F40 Traveling OR Travelling events are detected. N/A
5A0101 3100001F43 SERI_ERR Serious Error detected N/A
Table 3.5-3 Setting of LEDR

Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value
LEDDR1_EN Activate LED reset control On Off / On
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 373 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.5.2 Cancel logic in SBO mode

In the SBO mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel conditions are
satisfied. Accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation
returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.)
(i) Receiving “Cancel” from the remote-end

Figure 3.5-4 depicts the cancel command procedure for a cancel command initiated from the
remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select logic Wait for a next command
Cancel by the remote-end

Success
Command Reset from the Signal reception in Cancel

Cancel logic Do nothing
remote-end IEC61850 decision Failed
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 3.5-4 Outline of ‘cancel’ command from the remote-end
(ii) Input signal required mapping

Figure 3.5-6 depicts the cancel logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal is
applied to the LEDR function. The input-point “LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ” is the same the
same as that for the signal as shown in Figure 3.5-2.
510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in LEDR Output

Command “Cancel”
Cancel command
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ
&
Unmatched condition To “Wait for a command”

detected† &
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Figure 3.5-5 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end

†Note:The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in a
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 374 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.5.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR mode

Once the operation of the select logic is completed, the operate logic is applied to reset LEDs.
Resetting LEDs is executed when the operate conditions are satisfied.
Wait for a command
Select logic Wait for a next command
LED resetting by the remote-end

LED resetting from the Success
Operation
remote-end Signal reception in Operate logic Resetting LEDs
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
LED resetting by the local-end

Success
Operation
Pushing “CLEAR” key Operate logic Resetting LEDs
decision
Failed Do nothing
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Cancel logic
Figure 3.5-6 Outline of operation command for resetting LEDs

†Note: For more information, see Chapter User interface: Outline.
(i) Mapping required Input signal

Figure 3.5-7 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operation command (reset)” signal is
applied to the LEDR function. The input-point “LEDR_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the
reception of the “Operation command (reset)” signal. Pressing “CLEAR” key or the operation
on GR-TIEMS will reset LEDs.
Input Select logic in LEDR Output
LEDR function (Function ID: 528001) To LED3–LED26†

Command “Operating reset”
Operation
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ 528001 3107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD
command & ≥
Operate condition‡
From KEYINPUT
240001 31000E1730
LEDR_KEY_CLEAR
CLEAR
From TOOL_COM (GR-TIMES) 1≥

201501 3101001001
LEDR_TOOL_CLEAR
LED_RESET_TOOL
Figure 3.5-7 Operation logic for resetting LEDs
(ii) Output signal required mapping

The operation logic issues a “LED_RST_COM” signal to clear the LEDs†. The signal
“LED_RST_COM” is also transferred to the remote-end, when signal mapping is executed in
IEC61850 communication. (See section 3.5.5)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 375 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
†Note:Although the “LED_RST_COM” signal is connected previously with several LEDs,

by the manufacturer, user can also connect the signal with the LEDs. See section
3.5.4 for how to connect.
(iii) Operate condition

Figure 3.5-8 shows the operate condition logic of the LEDR function, which is used to
determine a reset-condition for the operation.
To operate logic
1≥ & Operate condition


&
IED serious error detected
SERI_ERR
[LEDDR1_EN]
On
Figure 3.5-8 Operate condition logic in LEDR

*1Note:If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it indicates
that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should
inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is detected. The
detecting signal is denoted as “Traveling OR” in Table 3.5-2.
*2Note:Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
3.5.4 Settings in LED logics

The user can program the status and the signal of the LED, so that the LEDs are possible to
switch off upon occurrence of the reset. As shown in the logic relating to the LED†, each logic
has a timer and a setting; accordingly, setting Latch should be set for the operation of the
LEDR function. Additionally, the user should connect the signal LED_RST_CMD with the
LED logic.
†Note:For more information on LED logics, see Chapter Technical description: Human
machine interface: LED indicators.
(i) Settings using GR-TIEMS

Figure 3.5-9 shows how to connect the reset signal LED_RST_CMD for the LED-03 logic. The
user can assign a reset signal for the respective LED logics by the drag and drop operation.
The user should also select Latch for the behavior from the pull-down menu.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 376 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Set [Behavior] to Latch

Choose the signal
LED_RST_CMD for the
LED-03 logic
Figure 3.5-9 Settings for LED-03 circuit provided by “Setting I/O menu” of GR-TIEMS
(ii) Settings using IED screen

The operation from the IED screen can also be set. See Chapter User interface: I/O setting
sub-menu.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 377 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.5.5 Mapping for IEC61850 communication

The user can operate the LEDR function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the LEDR function is designed for “LEDRs” in the IEC 61850
standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed
below:
Step1: Editing Logical Node
Step2: Mapping output data
Step3: Mapping input data
(i) Editing Logical Node

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the LEDR function. Figure 3.5-10
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “logical node zero (LLN0)” is chosen for the LERD
function. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode should be chosen in the editing for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 3.5-10 Defining “LEDRs” object in LLN0 logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 3.5-11 exemplifies the LEDR logic node saved as “LLN0”. In the SBO mode, the user
should select the following items in the “LLN0$LEDRs” using GR-TIEMS:
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 378 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
 sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down.
Figure 3.5-11 LN editing for SBO mode (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 3.5-12 exemplifies the LEDR logic node saved as LLN0. In the DIR mode, the following
three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Figure 3.5-12 LN editing for DIR mode (for example)
(ii) Mapping output data

The user should group the OPTR signals with regard to GOOSE and Report; the user should
map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. Figure 3.5-13 illustrates how to
map a signal for IEC61850 communication; it indicates that the signals for the LEDR function
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 379 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
are required to be mapped for IEC 61850 communication

Table 3.5-4 Mapping signals for SPC object
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orCat orCategory ST 5280013107011008 LEDR01_ORCAT
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5280016A07011009 LEDR01_ORIDENT
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs stVal BOOLEAN ST 5280013107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs q Quality ST 3010013110041005 Qual_Val
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs t Timestamp ST 2003019010001006 SYS_TIME
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs stSeld BOOLEAN ST 5280010007011001 LEDR01_STSELD
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850.
Figure 3.5-13 orCat attribute mapped for LEDRs object of LLN0
(iii) Mapping input data

The LEDR function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “LED01_CONTROL_REQ” to the IEC61850 communication. Table
3.5-5 shows the input-point “LED01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference
“Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs”; the user should map the input-point to the Object references having
attributes CO and CF†. Figure 3.5-14 shows how to map a signal.
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” and “CF”
stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 380 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 3.5-5 Mapping signals required for LEDRs object for LLN0
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Check Check CO 5280017007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Figure 3.5-14 Input-point mapped for LLN0
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 381 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.5.6 Setting
Setting of LEDR (Function ID: 528001)
Default setting
value
LEDDR1-EN Off / On - LEDR01 Reset Control Enable Off
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 382 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.5.7 Signal
LRST(Function ID: 528001)
5280018007011D53 LEDR01_SC LEDR01 select command
5280018007011D57 LEDR01_EC LEDR01 execute command
5280018007011D51 LEDR01_SC_OWS LEDR01 select command by OWS(HMI)
5280018007011D52 LEDR01_SC_RCC LEDR01 select command by RCC
5280018007011D55 LEDR01_EC_OWS LEDR01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
5280018007011D56 LEDR01_EC_RCC LEDR01 execute command by RCC
5280018207011F40 LEDR01_TMP1 LEDR01 signal before KC_LEDR_SA001
5280018307011F41 LEDR01_NSD_CSF LEDR01 signal after KC_LEDR_SA001
5280018007011F42 LEDR01_FSE_RCV LEDR01 signal before LC_LEDR_SA002
5280018607011F43 LEDR01_TMP2 LEDR01 signal after KC_LEDR_SA002
5280018B07011F44 LEDR01_CTR_SGU LEDR01 signal before KC_LEDR_SC001
5280018607011F45 LEDR01_TMP3 LEDR01 signal after KC_LEDR_SC001
5280018607011F46 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG1 LEDR01 signal before MCTLEDR_SC001
5280018E07011F47 LEDR01_SLD_TM0 LEDR01 signal after MCTLEDR_SC001
5280018707011F48 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG2 LEDR01 signal before MCTLEDR_SC002
5280018F07011F49 LEDR01_EX_CMP_TM0 LEDR01 signal after MCTLEDR_SC002

LRST(Function ID: 528001)
820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT LEDR01 control right from PLC
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 383 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Counter function for the general (GCNT)

When a signal is generated and it is received by the generic counter function (GCNT), the
GCNT function can count the transition of signals. For example, as shown in Figure 3.6-1, a
signal is issued repeatedly and if it is required that the number of signals is reported, the
GCNT function is able to count the number of signal transitions and report them. When an
object is in a device state, a binary input-circuit (BI) is provided to receive the signal.
Closed/Open signals
Inputs CNT_VALs
Changes in device status
(e.g., operations of 43S) BI 540001 800428EF40 PLC_BIT_0429 GCNT01
Operations at the local or Control commands

remote-end
540001 800433EF40 PLC_BIT_0434 GCNT06
(e.g., issuing commands)
Changes in a function Status signals

status
(e.g., function operations)
540001 800459EF40 PLC_BIT_0460 GCNT32
Count objects Signals generated GCNT functions
Figure 3.6-1 Reception of signals at the GCNT functions
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 384 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Signal acquisition timing must be adjusted in accordance with the application, in that the
acquisition should be regulated for the nature of the signal; hence, several settings are
provided in the GCNT functions. Thirty-two independent GCNT counters† are available. That
is, counters GCNT01 to GCNT32† can operate simultaneously. The values counted are stored
in the non-volatile memory so that they are not erased if the power supply to the IED is
interrupted.
†Note: The number of counters provided in GCNT functions depends on the model.
Several models are limited to having a couple of counters.
For simplicity, only the GCNT01 function is discussed; the features in the remaining
GCNT02–GCNT32 functions are identical to the GCNT01 function.
3.6.1 Counter setting for a signal

(i) Setting for count timing
In the GCNT01 function count timing is grouped into three, as shown in Figure 3.6-2 (a, b,
and c). When the user wishes to count the On(Closed), set On for the scheme switch
[GCNT01-CNTS]; conversely, set Off for the scheme switch when the Off(Open) is to be
counted. Additionally, OnOff is provided for counting the number of pulses. If the GCNT01
function is not required, set NA for the scheme switch.
a. On (Closed) signals
“On” is counted on the rising edge of the pulse
Counter 1 2 … n …
b. Off (Open) signals
“Off” is counted on the falling edge of the pulse
c. OnOff (Closed-Open) signals
“OnOff” is counted in response to pulses.
Figure 3.6-2 Count types
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 385 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Setting the maximum value

The GCNT01 function is able to count to 2147483647 (=231−1). When the count-value reaches
the value “2147483647”, the count-value returns to an initial-value. If the user wishes to set a
different maximum number in place of “2147483647”, the user can use the setting
[GCNT01-CNTMAX] and set a user-preferred value. Note that the user can set the maximum
number from 9 to 2147483647.
(iii) Setting the initial-value

The counter returns to an initial-value when the counter reaches the maximum value;
generally, the initial-value is set to either zero or one (0 or 1); hence, the number is re-counted
from either “0 (or 1)” following the maximum value. If the user wishes to set an alternative
initial number, setting [GCNT01-CNTRV] can be used. Note that the user can select the
initial-value from zero (0) to 999999.
Counter
Max set by [GCNT01-CNTMAX]
Initial-value set by [GCNT01-CNTRV]

0
Time
Figure 3.6-3 Maximum-value and initial-value
(iv) Setting for the report (Dead band)

The counter-value can be reported to the remote-end; the user can set the report-timing using
the setting [GCNT01-SDB]. For example, if the counter-value is to be reported for every
change, the user should set 0 for the setting [GCNT01-SDB]. When five(5) is set for the
[GCNT01-SDB], reporting is performed when the counter has incremented by six(6) following
the previously reported counter-value.
Counter Counter Counter
10 10 10
5 5 5
0 Time 0 Time 0 Time
Reporting………………. Reporting Reporting………………. Reporting Reporting Reporting
a. 0 set for [GCNT01-SDB] b. 1 set for [GCNT01-SDB] c. 5 set for [GCNT01-SDB]
Figure 3.6-4 Counter value and report timing
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 386 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.6.1 Select logics for SBO/DIR modes

The user should set scheme switch [GCNT01-EN] to On prior to counting.
(i) Receiving “Select command Reset” from the remote-end

Figure 3.6-5 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select stage Wait for a next command
Select command Reset from the remote-end Cancel logic

Failed
Signal Cancel command

Select
reception Select logic Signal output
decision Success
IEC61850
Cancel logic
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 3.6-5 Outline of Select command ‘Reset’
Input point required mapping

Figure 3.6-6 shows the select logic when a “Select command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”
signal is applied to the GCNT01 function. The logic has an input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ”
for the reception of the select command. That is, the input-point must be mapped for
IEC61850 communication. The function will fail to operate if mapping is not performed
correctly. We will discuss how to map the input-points for IEC61850 communication in section
3.6.4.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can issue a “Complete” signal at the output point
“GCNT01_SLD_CSCN”, when the GCNT01 function determines that the input signal
“Remote-Reset-Control” is true. If the GCNT01 function determines that the
“Remote-Reset-Control” is not true, the GCNTS01 function returns to the “Wait for a
command” stage.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 387 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Input Select logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 54001)

Command “Remote-Reset-Control”
For SBO operation
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ Select command
& 1≥ &
To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation command”
To BO connection
Operate command
& “GCNT01_SLD_CSCN”
(540001 8A0E011E76)
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” 0 t

In SBO operate Complete
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*)
0.2s
In DIR operate
To “Wait for a command”
“GCNT01_SLF_CSCN”
Select condition‡ (540001 8B0E011E7B)
0 t
Select “Failed”
0.3s
Figure 3.6-6 Select ‘Reset’ in GCNT01††

‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition logic. For more
information, see Figure 3.6-7.
*Note:The GNCT01 function can run in either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode” using a
signal called “ctlmodel” when communication is implemented using IEC61850. To
use this signal, the user should map it for IEC61850 communication.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other GCNT02–GCNT32 logics, see
Table 3.6-2 for the inputs and Table 3.6-4 for the outputs.
(ii) Select condition

Figure 3.6-8 shows the select condition logic in the GCNT01 function. When resetting the
counter is performed from the “Statics sub-menu” in the HMI operation†, the user should set
On for scheme switch [GCNT01-HMI].
†Note: The HMI operation is discussed in Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.

To select logic
1≥ & Select condition


&
From CMNCTRL
Serious error detection
SERI_ERR
[GCNT01-HMI]
On
[DPOS01-EN]
On
Figure 3.6-7 Select condition logic for Reset in GCNT01

1Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected, it indicates that another operator is
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 388 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of any
device for the duration that the event is detected. The detected signal is denoted as
“Traveling OR” in Table 3.6-3.
2Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
(iii) Signal name and number

Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” for
each table:
“O” indicates that the signal is provided for optional use.
“M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the
user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are
used.
“N/A” indicates that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 3.6-2 Mapping points for the reception of control command
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ GCNT01 control request(Mapping data) M
540001 700E0A6D09 GCNT10_CMM_REQ GCNT10 control request(Mapping data) M
540001 700E0B6D09 GCNT11_CMM_REQ GCNT11 control request(Mapping data) M
540001 700E0C6D09 GCNT12_CMM_REQ GCNT12 control request(Mapping data) M
540001 700E0D6D09 GCNT13_CMM_REQ GCNT13 control request(Mapping data) M
540001 700E0E6D09 GCNT14_CMM_REQ GCNT14 control request(Mapping data) M
540001 700E0F6D09 GCNT15_CMM_REQ GCNT15 control request(Mapping data) M
540001 700E1A6D09 GCNT26_CMM_REQ GCNT26 control request(Mapping data) M
540001 700E1B6D09 GCNT27_CMM_REQ GCNT27 control request(Mapping data) M
540001 700E1C6D09 GCNT28_CMM_REQ GCNT28 control request(Mapping data) M
540001 700E1D6D09 GCNT29_CMM_REQ GCNT29 control request(Mapping data) M
540001 700E1E6D09 GCNT30_CMM_REQ GCNT30 control request(Mapping data) M
540001 700E1F6D09 GCNT31_CMM_REQ GCNT31 control request(Mapping data) M
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 389 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 3.6-3 Input signals to condition logic

5A0001 0008001F40 Traveling OR Travelling events are detected. N/A
5A0101 3100001F43 SERI_ERR Serious Error detected N/A
Table 3.6-4 PLC Monitoring points (Signal “select complete/ failed” for BIO)
540001 8A0E011E76 GCNT01_SLD_CSCN GCNT01 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E0A1E76 GCNT10_SLD_CSCN GCNT10 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E0B1E76 GCNT11_SLD_CSCN GCNT11 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E0C1E76 GCNT12_SLD_CSCN GCNT12 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E0d1E76 GCNT13_SLD_CSCN GCNT13 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E0E1E76 GCNT14_SLD_CSCN GCNT14 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E0F1E76 GCNT15_SLD_CSCN GCNT15 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E1A1E76 GCNT26_SLD_CSCN GCNT26 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E1B1E76 GCNT27_SLD_CSCN GCNT27 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E1C1E76 GCNT28_SLD_CSCN GCNT28 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E1d1E76 GCNT29_SLD_CSCN GCNT29 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E1E1E76 GCNT30_SLD_CSCN GCNT30 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E1F1E76 GCNT31_SLD_CSCN GCNT31 Selection completed (Mapping)
5400018B0E011E7B GCNT01_SLF_CSCN GCNT01 select failed
5400018B0E0A1E7B GCNT10_SLF_CSCN GCNT10 select failed
5400018B0E0B1E7B GCNT11_SLF_CSCN GCNT11 select failed
5400018B0E0C1E7B GCNT12_SLF_CSCN GCNT12 select failed
5400018B0E0D1E7B GCNT13_SLF_CSCN GCNT13 select failed
5400018B0E0E1E7B GCNT14_SLF_CSCN GCNT14 select failed
5400018B0E0F1E7B GCNT15_SLF_CSCN GCNT15 select failed
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 390 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

5400018B0E1A1E7B GCNT26_SLF_CSCN GCNT26 select failed
5400018B0E1B1E7B GCNT27_SLF_CSCN GCNT27 select failed
5400018B0E1C1E7B GCNT28_SLF_CSCN GCNT28 select failed
5400018B0E1D1E7B GCNT29_SLF_CSCN GCNT29 select failed
5400018B0E1E1E7B GCNT30_SLF_CSCN GCNT30 select failed
5400018B0E1F1E7B GCNT31_SLF_CSCN GCNT31 select failed
Table 3.6-5 PLC Monitoring points (Signal “stSeld” for BIO)

540001 000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01 GCNT01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
540001 000E0A1D91 GCNT10_TMP_01 GCNT10 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
540001 000E0B1D91 GCNT11_TMP_01 GCNT11 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
540001 000E0C1D91 GCNT12_TMP_01 GCNT12 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
540001 000E0D1D91 GCNT13_TMP_01 GCNT13 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
540001 000E0E1D91 GCNT14_TMP_01 GCNT14 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
540001 000E0F1D91 GCNT15_TMP_01 GCNT15 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
540001 000E1A1D91 GCNT26_TMP_01 GCNT26 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
540001 000E1B1D91 GCNT27_TMP_01 GCNT27 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
540001 000E1C1D91 GCNT28_TMP_01 GCNT28 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
540001 000E1D1D91 GCNT29_TMP_01 GCNT29 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
540001 000E1E1D91 GCNT30_TMP_01 GCNT30 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
540001 000E1F1D91 GCNT31_TMP_01 GCNT31 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 391 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iv) Setting names
Table 3.6-6 Settings of select logics for GCNT01 to GCNT32

Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value
GCNTxx-EN Activation of the GCNTxx function On Off / On
GCNTxx-HMI Counter is used for the HMI operation in the GCNTxx function Off Off / On
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 392 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.6.2 Cancel logic for SBO mode

In the SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel
conditions are satisfied; accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the
operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.)
(i) Receiving “Cancel” from the remote-end

Figure 3.6-8 depicts the cancel command procedure for a cancel command initiated from the
remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select logics Wait for a next command
Cancel from the remote-end

Select command Success
Reset from the
Signal reception Cancel
remote-end Cancel logic Do nothing
in IEC61850 decision Failed
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 3.6-8 Outline of ‘cancel’ command from the remote-end
Input point required mapping

Figure 3.6-9 depicts the cancel logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal is
applied to the GCNT01 function. The input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ” is the same as that
for the signal “Select command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring point
“GCNT01_CC_SSCN”, when the GCNT01 function has determined that the signal
“Remote-cancel” is true. Another signal “Operation failed” is issued if the function is able to
determine that the signal “Remote-cancel” is not true.
Input Cancel logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001) To “Wait for a command”

Command “Remote-cancel”
“GCNT01_CC_SSCN”
Cancel command
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ (540001 840E011E95)
&
Successes to cancel
Unmatched condition detected *1 &
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Figure 3.6-9 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end in GCNT01

1Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in a
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 393 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Signal name and number

Table 3.6-7 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ logic)
540001 840E011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal
540001 840E0A1E95 GCNT10_CC_SSCN GCNT10 cancel success signal
540001 840E0B1E95 GCNT11_CC_SSCN GCNT11 cancel success signal
540001 840E0C1E95 GCNT12_CC_SSCN GCNT12 cancel success signal
540001 840E0D1E95 GCNT13_CC_SSCN GCNT13 cancel success signal
540001 840E0E1E95 GCNT14_CC_SSCN GCNT14 cancel success signal
540001 840E0F1E95 GCNT15_CC_SSCN GCNT15 cancel success signal
540001 840E1A1E95 GCNT26_CC_SSCN GCNT26 cancel success signal
540001 840E1B1E95 GCNT27_CC_SSCN GCNT27 cancel success signal
540001 840E1C1E95 GCNT28_CC_SSCN GCNT28 cancel success signal
540001 840E1D1E95 GCNT29_CC_SSCN GCNT29 cancel success signal
540001 840E1E1E95 GCNT30_CC_SSCN GCNT30 cancel success signal
540001 840E1F1E95 GCNT31_CC_SSCN GCNT31 cancel success signal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 394 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.6.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes

After the operation of the select logic, the operate logic starts to clear the counters.
(i) Receiving “Operate command Reset” from the remote-end

Figure 3.6-10 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command Operate command Reset from the remote-end

Success
Reset from the Operation
Signal reception Operate logic Signal output
remote-end decision
in the IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Operate command Reset from the local-end

Success
Operation
decision
from
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 3.6-10 Outline of Operate command ‘Reset’
Mapping required for Input point

Figure 3.6-11 illustrates the operation logic when an “Operate command Reset
(Remote-Reset-Control)” signal is applied to the GCNT01 function. The input-point
“GCNT01_CMM_REQ” is used for the reception of the “Operate command Reset
(Remote-Reset-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function, in Figure 3.6-11, can provide a signal at the point “GCNT01_OK_CSC”,
when the GCNT01 function determines that the signal “Remote-Reset-Control” is true.
Input Operate logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001) “GCNT01_EC_OK_CSC”

Command “Remote-Reset-Control” (540001 820E011E84)
Operate Cmd.
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ
& 1≥
Operate condition‡
Statics-counter
Figure 3.6-11 Operate ‘On’ from the remote-end ††

††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the GCNT02–32 logics, see Table
3.6-2 for the mapping points, Table 3.6-8 for the outputs.
(ii) Receiving “Operate command Reset” from the local-end

Figure 3.6-12 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Reset’ from the local-end.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 395 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Wait for a command
Select command Operate command Reset from the remote-end

Success
Reset from the Operation
remote-end decision
in the IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Operate command Reset from the local-end

Success
Operation
decision
from
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 3.6-12 Outline of Operate command ‘Reset’
New counter value

Figure 3.6-13 shows that the user can set a new value for the counter using the statics
sub-menu†. The new value is applied into “Statics counter” point in Figure 3.6-11.
Counter
10:48 1/8
COUNT1 (No Assign) +
0
0
0
Figure 3.6-13 Counter menu in the statics sub-menu

†Note: For the operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can provide a signal at the point “GCNT01_OK_CSC”, when the new
value applied from the sub-menu is appropriate.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 396 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) Select condition

Similar to the select condition (see sec.3.6.1(ii)), the GCNT01 function has an
operate-condition logic. Figure 3.6-14 shows the operate-condition logic.
To operate logic
1≥ & Operate condition


&
From CMNCTRL
Serious error detection
SERI_ERR
[GCNT01-HMI]
On
[DPOS01-EN]
On
Figure 3.6-14 Operate condition logic for GCNT01

1–2Note: The signals and settings in Figure 3.6-14 are same as the signals shown in
Figure 3.6-7.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 397 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iv) Signal names and number

Table 3.6-8 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for BIO)
540001 820E011E84 GCNT01_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT01 execute command OK condition signal
540001 820E0A1E84 GCNT10_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT10 execute command OK condition signal
540001 820E0B1E84 GCNT11_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT11 execute command OK condition signal
540001 820E0C1E84 GCNT12_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT12 execute command OK condition signal
540001 820E0D1E84 GCNT13_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT13 execute command OK condition signal
540001 820E0E1E84 GCNT14_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT14 execute command OK condition signal
540001 820E0F1E84 GCNT15_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT15 execute command OK condition signal
540001 820E1A1E84 GCNT26_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT26 execute command OK condition signal
540001 820E1B1E84 GCNT27_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT27 execute command OK condition signal
540001 820E1C1E84 GCNT28_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT28 execute command OK condition signal
540001 820E1D1E84 GCNT29_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT29 execute command OK condition signal
540001 820E1E1E84 GCNT30_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT30 execute command OK condition signal
540001 820E1F1E84 GCNT31_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT31 execute command OK condition signal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 398 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

The user can operate the GCNT function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the GCNT function is designed for the class of “Integer Status
Controller (ISC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these
steps, each of which is discussed below:

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the GCNT01 function. Figure 3.6-15
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “Integer Status controller (ISCSO)” is chosen for the
GCNT01 function. After the user has defined an object “ISCSO”, the GCNT01 logical node can
be saved with the name “GIGO” plus “LN Instance”. Create a definition of the object “ISCSO”
in the GGIO logical node. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the editing
for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 3.6-15 Defining “ISCSO” object in GIGO3302 logic node
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 399 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Defining SBO mode

Figure 3.6-16 exemplifies the GCNT01 logic node saved as “GIGO3302”; in the SBO mode, the
user should select the following items for the “GIGO3302$ISCSO” using GR-TIEMS:
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
 sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)
Figure 3.6-16 LN editing screen for SBO mode (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 3.6-17 exemplifies the GCNT01 logic node saved as save as “GIGO3302”; in the DIR
mode, the following three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS.
 Oper
 Origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
Figure 3.6-17 LN editing screen for DIR mode (for example)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 400 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

The user should group the GCNT01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS (Figure 3.6-18 illustrates
how to map a signal); it indicates that the signals for the GCNT01 function are required to
map the IEC 61850 communications.
Table 3.6-9 Mapping signals required for GIGO3302 object in GCNT01 function
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$origin orCat orCategory ST 540001300e011D23 GCNT01_CNT_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5400016A0e011FA7 GCNT01_CNT_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO stVal INT32 ST 540001320e011D20 GCNT01_CNT_VAL
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO q Quality ST 3010013110041005 Qual_Val
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO t Timestamp ST 2003019010001006 SYS_TIME
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 540001000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850.
Drag and drop
Figure 3.6-18 orCat attribute mapped into ISCSO object of GIGO3302

The GCNT01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the
user should map the input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ”. Table 3.6-10 shows the input-point
“GCNT01_CMM_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GIGO3302$ISCSO1”; the user should map
the input-point to the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC†. Figure 3.6-19 shows
how to map a signal.
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” in the
functional constraint (FC).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 401 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 3.6-10 Mapping signals required for ISCSO object for GIGO3302
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Check Check CO 540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Check “Input”
Figure 3.6-19 Input-point mapped for GIGO3302
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 402 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.6.5 Setting
Setting list for the GCNT (Function ID: 540001)
Default setting
Setting device Range Units Contents Notes
value
G_CNT CNT1 GCNT01-EN Off / On Counter1 Enable Off
GCNT01-CNTS NA / On / Off / OnOff count status NA
GCNT01-SDB 0 to 999 none Counter1 Sending Dead Band 0
Return value at counter roll

GCNT01-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNT01-CNTMAX 9 to 2147483647 none counter value maximum 999999
GCNT01-HMI Off/On Counter1 for HMI Off
CNT2 GCNT02-EN Off / On Counter2 Enable Off
GCNT02-CNTS NA / On / Off / OnOff count status NA
GCNT02-SDB 0 to 999 none Counter2 Sending Dead Band 0

GCNT02-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNT02-CNTMAX 9 to 2147483647 none counter value maximum 999999
GCNT02-HMI Off/On Counter2 for HMI Off
…… ………………….. ………………….. ………………….. …………………..
CNTxx GCNTxx-EN Off / On Counter xx Enable Off
GCNTxx-CNTS NA / On / Off / OnOff count status NA
Counter xx Sending Dead

GCNTxx-SDB 0 to 999 none 0
Band
GCNTxx-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNTxx-CNTMAX 9 to 2147483647 none counter value maximum 999999
GCNTxx-HMI Off/On Counter xx for HMI Off
Note: The number of counters in the GCNT depends on IED model. We omit the setting
tables of GCNT03 to GGNTxx because the setting items are the same except the
device number.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 403 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.6.6 Signal
 Connection points in PLC logics
GCNT (Function ID: 540001)
800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51 GCNT00IN_TMP_51
800E01EDE0 GCNT01_PLC_SGNL GCNT01 PLC signal
800E0AEDE0 GCNT10_PLC_SGNL GCNT10 PLC signal
800E0BEDE0 GCNT11_PLC_SGNL GCNT11 PLC signal
800E0CEDE0 GCNT12_PLC_SGNL GCNT12 PLC signal
800E0DEDE0 GCNT13_PLC_SGNL GCNT13 PLC signal
800E0EEDE0 GCNT14_PLC_SGNL GCNT14 PLC signal
800E0FEDE0 GCNT15_PLC_SGNL GCNT15 PLC signal
800E1AEDE0 GCNT26_PLC_SGNL GCNT26 PLC signal
800E1BEDE0 GCNT27_PLC_SGNL GCNT27 PLC signal
800E1CEDE0 GCNT28_PLC_SGNL GCNT28 PLC signal
800E1DEDE0 GCNT29_PLC_SGNL GCNT29 PLC signal
800E1EEDE0 GCNT30_PLC_SGNL GCNT30 PLC signal
800E1FEDE0 GCNT31_PLC_SGNL GCNT31 PLC signal
 Signal monitoring points for the common terms

000E001F41 GCNT00_CCTRL_COUNTER GCNT00 cmnctrl counter correction summarize
800E001D5B GCNT00_CH_SC_OWS GCNT00 count change select command by OWS(HMI)
800E001D5D GCNT00_CH_SC_RCC GCNT00 count change select command by RCC
800E001D5D GCNT00_CH_SC_RMT GCNT00 count change select command by Remote
800E001D54 GCNT00_CH_SC_LCD GCNT00 count change select command by LCD
800E001D5E GCNT00_CH_EC_OWS GCNT00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 404 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
 Signal monitoring points for the common terms

800E001D5F GCNT00_CH_EC_RCC GCNT00 count change execute command by RCC
800E001D60 GCNT00_CH_EC_RMT GCNT00 count change execute command by Remote
800E001D58 GCNT00_CH_EC_LCD GCNT00 count change execute command by LCD
310E001707 Counter DataID for GCNT Function(Setting)
 Signal monitoring points for respective counters (GCNT01 to GCNT32)

320E011D20 GCNT01_CNT_VAL GCNT01 count value
310E011D21 GCNT01_CNT_QLT GCNT01 count quality
000E011F42 GCNT01_CORR_INS GCNT01 correction instruction
000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01 GCNT01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
890E011EA2 GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN GCNT01 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0E011E76 GCNT01_SLD_CSCN GCNT01 selected condition signal
8B0E011E7B GCNT01_SLF_CSCN GCNT01 select fail condition signal
820E011E84 GCNT01_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT01 execute command OK condition signal
830E011E8B GCNT01_EC_F_CSCN GCNT01 execute command fail condition signal
840E011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 405 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 406 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

320E0A1D20 GCNT10_CNT_VAL GCNT10 count value
310E0A1D21 GCNT10_CNT_QLT GCNT10 count quality
000E0A1F42 GCNT10_CORR_INS GCNT10 correction instruction
000E0A1D91 GCNT10_TMP_01 GCNT10 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
890E0A1EA2 GCNT10_CTR_SGUCN GCNT10 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0E0A1E76 GCNT10_SLD_CSCN GCNT10 selected condition signal
8B0E0A1E7B GCNT10_SLF_CSCN GCNT10 select fail condition signal
820E0A1E84 GCNT10_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT10 execute command OK condition signal
830E0A1E8B GCNT10_EC_F_CSCN GCNT10 execute command fail condition signal
840E0A1E95 GCNT10_CC_SSCN GCNT10 cancel success signal
320E0B1D20 GCNT11_CNT_VAL GCNT11 count value
310E0B1D21 GCNT11_CNT_QLT GCNT11 count quality
000E0B1F42 GCNT11_CORR_INS GCNT11 correction instruction
000E0B1D91 GCNT11_TMP_01 GCNT11 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
890E0B1EA2 GCNT11_CTR_SGUCN GCNT11 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0E0B1E76 GCNT11_SLD_CSCN GCNT11 selected condition signal
8B0E0B1E7B GCNT11_SLF_CSCN GCNT11 select fail condition signal
820E0B1E84 GCNT11_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT11 execute command OK condition signal
830E0B1E8B GCNT11_EC_F_CSCN GCNT11 execute command fail condition signal
840E0B1E95 GCNT11_CC_SSCN GCNT11 cancel success signal
320E0D1D20 GCNT12_CNT_VAL GCNT12 count value
310E0D1D21 GCNT12_CNT_QLT GCNT12 count quality
000E0D1F42 GCNT12_CORR_INS GCNT12 correction instruction
000E0D1D91 GCNT12_TMP_01 GCNT12 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
890E0D1EA2 GCNT12_CTR_SGUCN GCNT12 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0E0D1E76 GCNT12_SLD_CSCN GCNT12 selected condition signal
8B0E0D1E7B GCNT12_SLF_CSCN GCNT12 select fail condition signal
820E0D1E84 GCNT12_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT12 execute command OK condition signal
830E0D1E8B GCNT12_EC_F_CSCN GCNT12 execute command fail condition signal
840E0D1E95 GCNT12_CC_SSCN GCNT12 cancel success signal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 407 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

320E0E1D20 GCNT14_CNT_VAL GCNT14 count value
310E0E1D21 GCNT14_CNT_QLT GCNT14 count quality
000E0E1F42 GCNT14_CORR_INS GCNT14 correction instruction
000E0E1D91 GCNT14_TMP_01 GCNT14 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
890E0E1EA2 GCNT14_CTR_SGUCN GCNT14 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0E0E1E76 GCNT14_SLD_CSCN GCNT14 selected condition signal
8B0E0E1E7B GCNT14_SLF_CSCN GCNT14 select fail condition signal
820E0E1E84 GCNT14_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT14 execute command OK condition signal
830E0E1E8B GCNT14_EC_F_CSCN GCNT14 execute command fail condition signal
840E0E1E95 GCNT14_CC_SSCN GCNT14 cancel success signal
320E0F1D20 GCNT15_CNT_VAL GCNT15 count value
310E0F1D21 GCNT15_CNT_QLT GCNT15 count quality
000E0F1F42 GCNT15_CORR_INS GCNT15 correction instruction
000E0F1D91 GCNT15_TMP_01 GCNT15 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
890E0F1EA2 GCNT15_CTR_SGUCN GCNT15 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0E0F1E76 GCNT15_SLD_CSCN GCNT15 selected condition signal
8B0E0F1E7B GCNT15_SLF_CSCN GCNT15 select fail condition signal
820E0F1E84 GCNT15_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT15 execute command OK condition signal
830E0F1E8B GCNT15_EC_F_CSCN GCNT15 execute command fail condition signal
840E0F1E95 GCNT15_CC_SSCN GCNT15 cancel success signal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 408 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 409 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

320E1A1D20 GCNT26_CNT_VAL GCNT26 count value
310E1A1D21 GCNT26_CNT_QLT GCNT26 count quality
000E1A1F42 GCNT26_CORR_INS GCNT26 correction instruction
000E1A1D91 GCNT26_TMP_01 GCNT26 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
890E1A1EA2 GCNT26_CTR_SGUCN GCNT26 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0E1A1E76 GCNT26_SLD_CSCN GCNT26 selected condition signal
8B0E1A1E7B GCNT26_SLF_CSCN GCNT26 select fail condition signal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 410 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

820E1A1E84 GCNT26_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT26 execute command OK condition signal
830E1A1E8B GCNT26_EC_F_CSCN GCNT26 execute command fail condition signal
840E1A1E95 GCNT26_CC_SSCN GCNT26 cancel success signal
320E1B1D20 GCNT27_CNT_VAL GCNT27 count value
310E1B1D21 GCNT27_CNT_QLT GCNT27 count quality
000E1B1F42 GCNT27_CORR_INS GCNT27 correction instruction
000E1B1D91 GCNT27_TMP_01 GCNT27 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
890E1B1EA2 GCNT27_CTR_SGUCN GCNT27 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0E1B1E76 GCNT27_SLD_CSCN GCNT27 selected condition signal
8B0E1B1E7B GCNT27_SLF_CSCN GCNT27 select fail condition signal
820E1B1E84 GCNT27_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT27 execute command OK condition signal
830E1B1E8B GCNT27_EC_F_CSCN GCNT27 execute command fail condition signal
840E1B1E95 GCNT27_CC_SSCN GCNT27 cancel success signal
320E1E1D20 GCNT30_CNT_VAL GCNT30 count value
310E1E1D21 GCNT30_CNT_QLT GCNT30 count quality
000E1E1F42 GCNT30_CORR_INS GCNT30 correction instruction
000E1E1D91 GCNT30_TMP_01 GCNT30 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
890E1E1EA2 GCNT30_CTR_SGUCN GCNT30 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0E1E1E76 GCNT30_SLD_CSCN GCNT30 selected condition signal
8B0E1E1E7B GCNT30_SLF_CSCN GCNT30 select fail condition signal
820E1E1E84 GCNT30_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT30 execute command OK condition signal
830E1E1E8B GCNT30_EC_F_CSCN GCNT30 execute command fail condition signal
840E1E1E95 GCNT30_CC_SSCN GCNT30 cancel success signal
320E1F1D20 GCNT31_CNT_VAL GCNT31 count value
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 411 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

310E1F1D21 GCNT31_CNT_QLT GCNT31 count quality
000E1F1F42 GCNT31_CORR_INS GCNT31 correction instruction
000E1F1D91 GCNT31_TMP_01 GCNT31 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
890E1F1EA2 GCNT31_CTR_SGUCN GCNT31 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0E1F1E76 GCNT31_SLD_CSCN GCNT31 selected condition signal
8B0E1F1E7B GCNT31_SLF_CSCN GCNT31 select fail condition signal
820E1F1E84 GCNT31_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT31 execute command OK condition signal
830E1F1E8B GCNT31_EC_F_CSCN GCNT31 execute command fail condition signal
840E1F1E95 GCNT31_CC_SSCN GCNT31 cancel success signal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 412 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Mode control function (MDCTRL)

The mode control (MDCTRL) function provides an interface; it can inform a command of
changing a mode for a test function (TEST-FB). The MDCTRL function is made of two parts:
(1) sensing either an On-mode or a Test-mode in the IED and (2) interface between the IED
and the SAS.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 413 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.7.1 Function
(i) Mode sensor
The MDCTRL function can monitor the state change (On to TEST / TEST to Off) in the IED.
To use this monitoring function, On should be set for the scheme switch [MDCTRL-EN] prior to
operation. During the operation, a select signal and an operate signal are provided for the
TEST-FB when the SAS provides a test command for the IED; hence, the MDCTRL function
comes with two time-out timers. Setting [MDCTRL-SELRST] provides a time-out timer for
canceling a select command; setting [MDCTRL-EXERST] provides a time-out timer for
canceling an operate command.
(ii) Interface for IEC61850

The MDCTRL function can fulfil the two operation modes (On and Test) specified in the IEC
61850 communication, as shown in Table 3.7-2; the MDCTRL function can carry a signal for
changing for the TEST-FB; the signal is generated in the select and control logics in the
MDCTRL function. The change signal is initiated by the mode change command that is
received at the communication interface. Note that control operations from a SAS is only
taken account.
Table 3.7-2 Values of mode and behavior in IEC 61850

Value Mode Definition in IEC 61850
The application represented by the LN works. All communication
1 On
services work and get updated values.
The application represented by the LN works. All communication
services work and get updated values. Data objects will be transmitted
with quality “test”. Control commands with quality test will be accepted
3 Test
only by LNs in “test” or “test-blocked” mode. “Processed as valid” means
that the application should react in the manner what is foreseen for
“test”.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 414 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

The user can operate the MDCTRL function over the IEC61850 communication after the
mapping using GR-TIEMS. The user should follow steps,

The user should make a logical node (LN) for the MDCTRL function. Figure 3.7-1exemplifies
LN editing; the LN “LLNO” is chosen for the MDCTRL01 for IEC61850 communication. After
the user defining an object “MOD”, the MDCTRL01 logical node can be saved with the name
“LLNO”. Make a definition of the object “MOD” in MDCTRL01 logical node. Either the SBO
mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the LN editing.
Figure 3.7-1 Defining “MOD” object in LLNO logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 3.7-2 exemplifies the settings in LN “LLNO” when the SBO mode is required for the
MDCTRL01 function. In the SBO control, the user should select the following items for the
“LLNO$MOD” using the GR-TIEMS;
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 415 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
Figure 3.7-2 LN editing screen for SBO mode (for example)

Defining DIR mode
Figure 3.7-3 exemplifies the settings in LN “LLNO” when the DIR mode is required for the
MDCTRL01 function. In the DIR mode, the following three items should be selected using the
GR-TIEMS:
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Figure 3.7-3 LN editing screen for DIR mode (for example)

The user should group the MDCTRL01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for the IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.
Table 3.7-3 shows the required mapping signals in MDCTRL01 function to the IEC
61850 communications. Figure below shows how to map a signal.
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850 standard.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 416 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 3.7-3 Mapping signals for MOD object.

System/LLN0$Mod$origin orCat orCategory ST 5500013013011000 MDCTRL01_ORCAT
System/LLN0$Mod$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5500016A13011009 MDCTRL01_ORIDENT
System/LLN0$Mod stSeld BOOLEAN ST 5500010013011D90 MDCTRL01_SLD_RPT
Drag and drop
Figure 3.7-4 orCat attribute mapped into MOD object of LLNO

The MDCTRL01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel. Thus, the
user should map the input-point “MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ”. Table 3.7-4 shows the
input-point “MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “System/LLN0$Mod$”; the
user should map the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC to the input-point.
Note that the user should map the input-point to all attributes having CO and CF. Figure
below shows how to map a signal.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 417 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 3.7-4 Mapping signals required for LLNO object in MDCTRL01 function
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Check Check CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper Check Check CO 5500017013016D08 MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod ctlModel ctlModel CF
System/LLN0$Mod sboTimeout INT32U CF
System/LLN0$Mod sboClass sboClass CF
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850 standard; “CO” stands for “Control” and
“CF” stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).
Check “Input”
Figure 3.7-5 Input-point mapped for LLNO
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 418 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.7.3 Setting
Setting of MDCTRL (Function ID: 550001)
Default setting
value
MDCTRL-EN Off/On – Switch for operation On

MDCTRL-SELRST 10-100 s Selection cancel time-out timer 30
MDCTRL-EXERST 10-100 s Waiting execute operation time-out 30
timer
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 419 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3.7.4 Signal
MDCTRL(Function ID: 550001)
8013011D51 MDCTRL01_SC_OWS MDCTRL01 select command by OWS(HMI)
8013011D52 MDCTRL01_SC_RCC MDCTRL01 select command by RCC
8013011D53 MDCTRL01_SC_RMT MDCTRL01 select command by Remote
8013011D55 MDCTRL01_EC_OWS MDCTRL01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
8013011D56 MDCTRL01_EC_RCC MDCTRL01 execute command by RCC
8013011D57 MDCTRL01_EC_RMT MDCTRL01 execute command by Remote
8713011E98 MODE01_SLF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal
8013011F56 MODE01_NSL_CS06 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 06
8613011F5E MODE01_NSL_CS07 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 07
8B13011EA2 MODE01_CTR_SGU MDCTRL01 control logic stage(under selection)
8213011F5F MODE01_NSL_CS10 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 10
8313011F41 MODE01_NSD_CSF MDCTRL01 no direction selected condition signal
8513011F60 MODE01_FSL_CS19 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 19
8A13011F61 MODE01_FSL_CS20 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 20
8113011F64 MODE01_FSL_CS21 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 21
8D13011F42 MODE01_FSD_CSF MDCTRL01 On direction selected condition signal
8513011F65 MODE01_OSL_CS40 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 40
8813011F5D MODE01_OSL_CS41 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 41
8513011F5B MODE01_OSL_CS42 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 42
8F13011F43 MODE01_OSD_CSF MDCTRL01 Test direction selected condition signal
8013011E76 MODE01_SLD_CS MDCTRL01 selected condition signal
8113011E7B MODE01_SLF_CS MDCTRL01 select fail condition signal
8013011F54 MODE01_SC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 select command mode err
8813011F6B MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG07 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixed logic 07
8613011F62 MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG03 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixed logic 03
8E13011F57 MODE01_SLD_TMO MDCTRL01 time out after selected
8F13011F58 MODE01_EX_CMP_TMO MDCTRL01 timeout after execute completion
8313011E9D MODE01_CTR_SGN MDCTRL01 control logic stage(unselected)
8013011F66 MODE01_SLD_CS04 MDCTRL01 selected condition signal 04
8013011E7D MODE01_SLR_CS MDCTRL01 select release condition signal
8113011E9A MODE01_ECF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 execute command fail factor signal check
8013011E81 MODE01_FEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 On direction execute command OK condition signal
8113011E82 MODE01_OEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command OK condition signal
8213011E88 MODE01_FEC_F_CS MDCTRL01 On direction execute command fail condition signal
8313011E89 MODE01_OEC_F_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command fail condition signal
8013011F55 MODE01_EC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 execute command mode err
8213011F44 MODE01_EX_OUT MDCTRL01 execute output signal
8913011F6C MODE01_EX_CS01 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 01
8A13011F6D MODE01_EX_CS02 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 02
8513011E8F MODE01_EX_SFL MDCTRL01 execute success signal
8613011E91 MODE01_EX_FFL MDCTRL01 execute fail signal
8013011E93 MODE01_EX_CMP MDCTRL01 execute complete signal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 420 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

8B13011F6E MODE01_EX_CS03 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 03
8813011E9B MODE01_CC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 cancel command mode err
8313011E9C MODE01_CCF_FCT_CS MDCTRL01 cancel command fail factor condition signal
8613011E95 MODE01_CC_SS MDCTRL01 cancel command success signal
8713011E96 MODE01_CC_FS MDCTRL01 cancel command fail signal

8313002F52 MDCTRL00IN_TMP_16 MDCTRL00IN_TMP_16
821301ED50 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 421 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4 Technical Description
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 422 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
The IED hardware consists of a case, modules, and a human machine interface (HMI). For
instance, Figure 4-1 shows the structure of the GR-series IED which is mounted in 3/4×19”
rack. The user can find that the IED consists of a transformer module (VCT), a signal
processing and communication module (CPU), binary input and output modules (BI, BI, and
BIO, and a power supply module (PWS), which can be mounted in an order from left to right.
The IED case, which is designed for rack mount as shown in Figure 4-1, has two flanges
attached on the IED sides. Figure 4-2 shows hardware block diagram. The module structure
depends on the GR-series models, IED cases, and the customer specification. Therefore, the
user should check and confirm the actual modules with the ordering number in advance.
(The description of IED case helps to understand the IED structure and its functions.
Based on slot reference, terminal block, slot reference, GR-Series selects different cases. VCT,
CPU, BI, BO and BIO modules, PWS and HMI are described sequentially in this chapter. The
user is required to understand information provided in this chapter when wiring between the
IED and external devices and setting of the IED are performed. Hence, the user is required to
read this chapter thoroughly.)
BI, BO, and BIO

VCT CPU PWS
Figure 4-1 Modules in 3/4 19” rack’s chassis (Front view, removed the front panel)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 423 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
VCT CPU
Filter MPU LAN I/F Tele-

I A/D communication
CT×n system
LAN I/F
AC
input
MPU PCM Remote PC
V
VT×m
BO
Auxiliary
relay Binary output
×18
HMI
BI
LCD/MIMIC
Photo coupler Binary input
×18
LEDs
Operation keys BIO

Auxiliary
relay Binary output
Monitoring jacks ×18
Function Key
Local Photo coupler Binary input

USB ×18
PC I/F
Power
PWS
Figure 4-2 Hardware Block Diagram (for example)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 424 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
IED case and module slots

4.1.1 3/4 case for Compression-type terminal
Figure 4.1-1 shows diagrams of the IED case structure for 3/4 size: (a) IED internal structure
seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic
diagram.
(i) Viewing from the front side (Figure 4.1-1.a)

Nine slots are provided for mounting modules. The transformer module (VCT), the signal
processing and communication module (CPU), and the power supply module (PWS) are
mounted at predefined locations in the case. The binary IO modules (BI, BO, and BIO) are
placed in slots (IO#1 to IO#6), these slot locations are determined before factory shipment. For
detailed information on slot locations, module types and their connections for all IEDs, see
external connection figures. (See Appendix: Typical external connection).
(ii) Viewing from the rear side (Figure 4.1-1.b)

The group of terminal blocks for the 3/4 case can be viewed from the rear. With respect to BI,
BO, and BIO, the terminal blocks are designed with both upper terminals and lower
terminals and are labeled with alpha-numeric references “T1”, “T2” and so on. Note that both
the upper and the lower terminals are provided in the form of a single terminal block for
respective BIs, BOs, or BIOs. The terminal screw numbers for each terminal block relate to
individual circuits and the user should check the configuration for each circuit.. Each slot is
identified by its alpha-numeric reference (or slot reference) on the IED case. For example, the
user can identify that “IO#1” is linked with alpha-numeric reference “T1” and “IO#2” is linked
with alpha-numeric reference “T2”.
For PWS, note that the terminal blocks are located on the left hand side. The user can
also find alpha-numeric reference “T7” for PWS. The PWS circuits and relevant terminals are
discussed later.
The communication modules, which are between VCT slot and BIO slot, are labeled “C11”
to “C15”. These communication modules are used for LAN, IEC61850 communication, and
external devices
(iii) Schematic figure (Figure 4.1-1.c)

The slots and terminal blocks in the IED are shown. Using this figure, the user can find the
location of VCT, BIO, and PWS. This figure is useful when the user sets binary IO modules
using the setting tables.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 425 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
a. View from front side
T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C11
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 C12
11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 C13
20 20 20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 C14
26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 C15 FG1
35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38
E
39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40
FG FGD FGC FGB FGA
b. View from rear side
T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic figure
Figure 4.1-1 Slots and terminal blocks in 3/4 case for Compression-type terminal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 426 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.1.2 1/2 case for Compression-type terminal

Figure 4.1-2 shows diagrams of the IED case structure for 1/2 size: (a) IED internal structure
seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic
diagram. For PWS, note that the terminal blocks are placed on the left hand side. The user
can also find alpha-numeric reference “T4” for PWS.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 427 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
a. View from front side

T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 8 8
9 9 9
10
11
10
11
10
11
C12
12 12 12
13 13 13
14 14 14
15 15 15
16 16 16
17 17 17
18 18 18
19 19 19 C13
20 20 20
21 21 21
22 22 22
23 23 23
24 24 24
25 25 25 C14
26 26 26
27 27 27
28 28 28
29 29 29
30 30 30
31 31 31
32 32 32
33 33 33
34 34 34 C15 FG1
35 35 35
36 36 36
37 37 37
38 38 38
E
39 39 39
40 40 40
FG FGB FGA
b. View from rear side
T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic diagram
Figure 4.1-2 Slots and terminal blocks in 1/2 case for Compression-type terminal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 428 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT)

The transformer module (VCT) of the IED is used to acquire the power system quantities. A
safety feature is available such that all of the VCT current inputs are shorted when a VCT
module is removed from the IED case. Note also that all of the voltage inputs are disconnected.
However, the user should make short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC
voltage inputs.
Note; The user should understand that the rating current is fixed once the ordering is
done.
Note: We represent respective input signals at the “AC analog input (VCT)” as “Channel
numbers (Ch*)” when settings as to the ratio and others are required. The figure
below shows the operation screen for the AC analog input, which we shall discuss
later. The term “AI#1” in the below figure represents the VC alpha-numeric
references discussed in the preceding section.
Figure 4.2-1 exemplified the ratio setting for respective channels on the VCT. For more
information about the IED operation, see chapter User interface.
AC Analog Input AI#1 AI#1

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/12 10:48 1/2
AI#1 > CH1 > AI1_Ch1_Ratio +
AI#2 > CH2 > 2000
CH3 >
CH4 >
CH5 >
CH6 >
Figure 4.2-1 Ratio setting sample of AC analog input for VCT
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 429 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.2.1 VCT11B
VCT11B is designed for 1.5 circuit breaker arrangement (1.5CB), as shown in Figure 4.2-2.
VCT11B is available for 1/2 case and larger.
VCT11B
Three-phase voltages
Va Jumper
Va Terminal Input Type of AC analog
Vb Vb Screw position input
Number signal(3) input channel(1)
Vc Vc (2)
Reference voltage#1 on busbar

Vs
1 2 Va Voltage NA Ch1
Vs
3 4 Vb Voltage NA Ch2
Vs2 Vs2
5 6 Vc Voltage NA Ch3
The three-phase currents in the
7 8 Vs(4) Voltage NA Ch4
1.5CB arrangement
Ia
Ia 9 10 Vs2(4) Voltage NA Ch5
Ib
Ib 11 12 Ia Current W6 Ch6
Ic 13 14 Ib Current W7 Ch7
Ic
15 16 Ic Current W8 Ch8
Ie
Residual current
17 18 Ie Current W13 Ch9
The other three-phase currents in the 19 20 Ia2 Current W9 Ch10
1.5CB arrangement
Ia
Ia2
21 22 Ib2 Current W10 Ch11
Ib 23 24 Ic2 Current W11 Ch12
Ib2
Ic
25 26 Ie2 Current W14 Ch13
Ic2
27 28 Iem Current W12 Ch14
Ie2
Residual current
The other residual current in the
parallel lines
Iem
Figure 4.2-2 Transformer module (VCT11B)

(1)Note: The channel number about the AC analog input is used to represent the
terminal location when the user sets the ratio about the CT or the VT. We
shall discuss later in section Setting VCT ratio.
(2)Note: Inserting a jumper on the board is carried out to operate for 5A rated current.
We shall discuss the rated current in later section Check of rated current.
(3)Note: For the destination of input signals, see Appendix: Matrix between VCT
terminals and relay applications.
(4)Note: Reference voltage is used in the Voltage check (VCHK) function; see Chapter
Relay applications.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 430 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.2.2 VCT12B
VCT12B is designed for a single circuit breaker arrangement (1CB), as shown in Figure 4.2-3.
VCT12B is available for 1/2 case and larger.
VCT12B
Three-phase voltages
Va Jumper
Va Terminal Input Type of AC analog
Vb
Vb Screw position input
Number signal(3) input channel(1)
Vc (2)
Vc
1 2 Va Voltage NA Ch1
Vs Vs
3 4 Vb Voltage NA Ch2
Vs2
Vs2 5 6 Vc Voltage NA Ch3
The three-phase currents in the 1CB
7 8 Vs(4) Voltage NA Ch4
arrangement
Ia
Ia 9 10 Vs2(4) Voltage NA Ch5
Ib
Ib 11 12 Ia Current W6 Ch6
Ic 13 14 Ib Current W7 Ch7
Ic
15 16 Ic Current W8 Ch8
Ie
Residual current
17 18 Ie Current W13 Ch9
19 20 – – – –
21 22 – – – –
23 24 – – – –
25 26 – – – –
27 28 Iem Current W12 Ch14
The other residual current in the

parallel lines
Iem
Figure 4.2-3 Transformer module (VCT12B)

(1)Note: The cannel number about the AC analog input is used to represent the
terminal location when the user sets the ratio about the CT or the VT. We
shall discuss later in section Setting VCT ratio.
(2)Note: Inserting a jumper on the board is carried out to operate for 5A rated current.
We shall discuss the rated current in later section Check of rated current.
(3)Note: For the destination of input signals, see Appendix: Matrix between VCT
terminals and relay applications.
(4)Note: Reference voltage is used in the Voltage check (VCHK) function; see Chapter
Relay applications.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 431 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.2.3 Constitution of VCT

Figure 4.2-4 shows a VCT terminal block together with its schematic diagram1; the same
terminal screw numbers are shown on the terminal block and schematic diagram. The user
should note that the last terminal screw2 and FG terminal are connected with a short-wire by
default.
1Note: When the size of the IED case is 1/1, two alpha-numeric references (VC1 and VC2)
and two slot references (VCT#1 and VCT#2) are available.
2Note: In standard VCTs, the last terminal screw is designated as “No. 30”.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 432 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
VC1
VC1
VCT
Alpha-numeric Module type
reference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Short-wire1
21
22
FG1 23
24
Frame ground 25
terminal on the case
26
27
28
29
30
1
Short-wire
FG1
VC1 terminal Schematic diagram
Figure 4.2-4 VC1 terminals2 (Rear view)

1Note: The connection between terminal screw 30 and FG is made with a short-wire by
the manufacturer.
2Note: This figure is used for general instruction with regard to the VCT. Thus, the
alpha-numeric reference for the VCT will depend on the IED model.
3Note: “VC2” is available for VCT#2 slot.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 433 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.2.4 Setting VCT ratio

As input sources are transformed with various VTs and CTs in the power system, the user
shall set each VT or CT ratio at each VCT terminal.
(i) Setting a ratio for the VT

When the VT quantity applied at the VCT terminal, a ratio of the primary voltage to the
secondary voltage should be set. A voltage is applied at the first terminal (Ch1) at VC1
alpha-numeric reference, the user should set the ratio for the setting [AI1_Ch1_Ratio]. For
example, the user is requires to set a value ‘3636’ for the [AI1_Ch1_Ratio] when the primary is
400kV and the secondary is 110V (i.e., 400kV/110V=3636). The channel position on the VCT is
discussed in the preceding section VCT.
(ii) Setting a ratio for the CT

When the CT quantity flows into the VCT terminal, a ratio of the primary current to the
secondary current should be set. For example, the user is required to set a value ‘4000’ for the
[AI1_Ch1_Ratio] when the primary is 4000A and the secondary is 1A (i.e., 4000/1=4000).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 434 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) Setting list

Setting of AC analog input(Function ID: 200201/200202)
Default setting
value
VC1 AI1_Ch1_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#1 1.000
alpha-numeric AI1_Ch2_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#1 1.000
reference AI1_Ch3_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#3 at VCT#1 1.000
AI1_Ch4_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#4 at VCT#1 1.000
VC2 AI2_Ch1_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#2 1.000
alpha-numeric AI2_Ch2_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#2 1.000
reference AI2_Ch3_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#3 at VCT#2 1.000
†Note: For more information on the IED operation, see Chapter User interface: AC analog
input.
‡Note:The number of AC analog input channels depends on the configuration of the VCT
type and the VCT slot. Thereby, the user has to set the value of the VCT ratio
corresponding to a specific auxiliary VT/CT.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 435 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.2.5 Check of rated current

On the VCT, the rated current is fixed by the manufacturer according to the hardware
configuration. The set value is not allowed to change by the user; hence, the user should be in
touch with the sales representative once changing the rated current is required. We just
discuss here the means for checking the rated current set by the manufacture at each input
channel.
(i) Hardware definition by jumper insertion

Each of the auxiliary CTs has a Jumper; either rated-1-ampere (1A) or rated-5-ampere (5A) is
defined using the Jumpers. The user can examine the rated current by following the steps
below with reference to Figure 4.2-5:
Step1: Open the IED front panel.
Step2: Check the receptacle at respective jumpers.
The Jumpers positons are represented with the marks “W1” to “W14”, which are printed
on the circuit board of the VCT. The user can find the “W*” marks correspond to the AC analog
input channel numbers in the preceding section.
Front Rear
Tr.1 Tr.2
W1
W2
W3 Tr.3 Tr.4
Location of Jumpers
W4
Connector
Jumpers
W5
Tr.5 Tr.6
W6
W7
W8
W9 Tr.7 Tr.8
W10
W11
W12 Tr.9
W13 Tr.10
W14
Tr.11
Tr.12 Tr.13 Tr.14
Layout of VCT components VCT Photograph
Setting for 5 A rating Setting for 1 A rating

receptacle
header header
Figure 4.2-5 Jumpers and their locations
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 436 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Software definition

The table below shows the software definitions for each AC analog input channel. As a rule,
the rated current is defined once the customer has done the ordering: hence, term “DEP” is set
for all settings [AI1_Ch*_Rating] (and [AI2_Ch*_Rating] when another VCT is available). The
term “DEP” represents a pre-configured rated current set by the manufacturer; the
pre-configured rated current is identical to the AC rating determined at the customer’s
ordering.
Setting of AC analog input(Function ID: 200201/200202)

U Default setting
Range
n value
Setting item i Contents Notes
1A 5A 1A 5A
t
s
VC1 AI1_Ch1_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#1 DEP
alpha-numeric AI1_Ch2_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#1 DEP
reference AI1_Ch3_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#3 at VCT#1 DEP
AI1_Ch4_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#4 at VCT#1 DEP
VC2 AI2_Ch1_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#2 DEP
alpha-numeric AI2_Ch2_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#2 DEP
reference AI2_Ch3_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#3 at VCT#2 DEP
†Note: Number of auxiliary CTs depends on the configuration of the VCT type and the
VCT slot. For more information, see Chapter User interface: AC analog input.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 437 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Signal processing and communication module (CPU)

A signal-processing including communication module (CPU) consists of a main circuit board
for processing (CPU1) and ‘piggyback’ circuit boards for communication modules (COM#1 to
COM#5). The piggyback circuit boards are provided so that the IED can have the
communication with the network, time synchronization servers and others. The piggyback
circuit boards are mounted on the CPU1.
Other signal-processing modules (CPM1 and CPX1) are provided to augment the CPU
performance. The CPUs configuration depends on respective models; the arrangement of the
CPU1, CPM1, and CPX1 varies in the respective models. Figure 4.3-1 exemplifies the full
implementation for the CPU.
CPU1
CPM1 CPX1
COM#1
MPU#2
COM#2
DDR2#2
COM#3
MPU#1
COM#4
DDR2#1 MPU#3
NOR-Flash MRAM COM#5 DDR2#3
AM
Figure 4.3-1 CPU and communication modules for the processing

Note: The implementation of the above may vary according to circumstances.
4.3.1 Processing module

Assuring the performance of protection and control functions can be obtained with some
MPUs. The numbers of MPUs are chosen based on the performance. Memory on the CPU1
consists of MRAM, and NOR-Flash. The NOR-Flash is used to store setting data and
recording data, whereas the MRAM is used to store several counter values. Both are of
non-volatile memory so that the stored data will be not be erased if the power is cut off. Table
4.3-1 summarizes the memory type.
The relaying practices, which are validated by several IO modules, are operated through
the signal processing. The diagram of their processing is illustrated in Figure 4.3-2.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

438
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 4.3-1 memory on CPU

Memory Type Memory Purpose of use
Volatile DDR2 CPU working area
Non-volatile NOR-Flash Storage of setting data and recording data
Non-volatile MRAM Storage of counter values
MPU Telecommunication Telecommunication

#2 Interface System
Other modules
Sampled
data Fibre-optic, Link with Serial
Ethernet-LAN or others communication
(Option) System
Input
signal
MPU#1 Other modules
MPU#3 Other modules
Figure 4.3-2 Diagram of processing
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

439
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.3.2 Communication modules

For communication, piggyback-circuit-modules are provided and these are mounted on CPU1,
as shown in Table 4.3-2. These specifications are tabulated and their symbols are also shown
in Table 4.3-2. The arrangement of these modules depends on the IED models. Thus, it is
required to refer external connection figures in order to examine which modules are used and
where they are located. The external connection figures are shown separately. (See Appendix:
Typical External connection)
Table 4.3-2 Communication modules

I/F 100BASE-FX 100BASE-TX Protection Protection
signaling signaling
Connector SC type RJ45 type ST type LC type
(Duplex)
Medium Fiber optic Twist pair Fiber Fiber
optic(GI) optic(SM/DSF)
Usage Substation Substation Tele- Tele-
automation automation protection Protection
system and system and (2km class) (30km / 80 km
others others class)
Symbol 100BASE-TX 100BASE-TX Protection Protection
TX RX TX
RX
RX
TX
I/F RS485 GIO IRIG-B000

Connector PCB connector D-sub 9 type PCB connector
Medium Shielded twist pair Shielded twist pair Shielded twist pair
Usage Setting and Connection for Time
monitoring for the IED external I/O unit synchronization
Symbol A1
RS485 GIO IRIG-B000
A1
B1 B1 SIG
COM-A
A2 A2(Disuse)
B2 B2(Disuse)
COM-B
A3 A3
B3 B3
COMM GND
1. 100BASE-TX module (RJ-45 plug)

A twisted-pair cable is required for the LAN connection. The 100BASE-TX module is used for
the GR-TIEMS operation or the communication for remote end. Use a shielded twisted pair
cable so that electric magnetic compatibility is satisfied.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 440 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2. 100Base-FX module (SC plug)

A fiber optic cable is required for the connection. 100Base-FX module is used for the LAN
communication.
3. Protection signalling module (GI-ST plug or SM/DSF-LC plug)

The protection signalling communication module is to communicate with the remote IED for
relay applications. A fiber optical cable classified in the GI optical fiber is mainly used in short
haul communication (shorter than 2km). In medium haul, an optical fiber in SM is required.
In long haul, an optical fiber in DSF is required.
4. RS485 module
RS485 module has a PCB connector. The module should be connected with a
shielded-twisted-pair cable; it is used for communication in the IEC60870-5-103, Modbus, and
DNP. The terminal arrangement and references are shown below. The cable sheath should be
connected with the frame ground (FG) in the IED case. For the use of the a
shielded-twisted-pair cable, the user should note that the total length should be less than
1200 meter (0.75 miles); the terminal resistor (150 ohms) should be connected when any
connector is not connected. The settings of the RS485 module are provided for the first module
(#1) and the second module (#2), respectively, as shown the table below. For setting the
parameters, see Chapter Communication protocol: RS485 communication.
Sheath
Top
PCB connector A1 A cable for
A1 B1 B1 an IED
COM-A(+)
A2
A2 B2 Sheath
COM-B(−) B2
A cable for
A3 B3 A3
another
Bottom
COMM(GND) B3
IED
0V
a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit Frame ground (FG)
Figure 4.3-3 RS485 connector and circuit

Setting of RS485 (Function ID: 232201)
Default setting
value
Module RS485_1_BRATE_SW 9.6 / 19.2 / 38.4 /57.6 / 115.2 kbps Transmission speed 19.2
#1 RS485_1_PAR_SW NONE / ODD /EVEN – Parity check code NONE
Module RS485_2_BRATE_SW 9.6 / 19.2 / 38.4 /57.6 / 115.2 kbps Transmission speed 19.2
#2 RS485_2_PAR_SW NONE / ODD /EVEN – Parity check code NONE
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 441 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
5. GIO module
GIO module is used to link an IED with an external I/O unit. GIO module is made with a
D-sub9 socket. It is connected using twisted pair cables. Figure 4.3-4 shows the cable
specification of GIO.
Dsub–9P (Plug) Dsub–9P (Plug)

(male) (male)
Twist pair cable
CN1 CN2
s D
M2.6 screw M2.6 screw
FG Shielded cable FG
CN1 Twist pair cable CN2
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
10 10
FG FG
Figure 4.3-4 GIO cable and its structure
6. IRIG-B000 module
IRIG-B000 module is used to receive the digital signal generated with an external clock; the
signal is in conformity to serial IRIG-B000 format. Note that the IRIG-B000 module is able to
receive digital signal (TTL) only (i.e., the reception of AM signal is not applicable). This
module is isolated using a photo coupler; the user should note A2 and B2 connectors are not
used. The peak value of IRIG-B000 signal should be greater than 3.5 volts; the IRIG-B000
module has the input register (about 3k ohm). Thus, the terminal register can be required
when the IRIG-B000 signal is delivered for several devices; the value of the terminal register
depends on the number of deliveries and the performance of the external clocks. For setting of
time synchronization, see Chapter Technical Description: Clock function.
Top
PCB connector A1
A1 B1 B1 SIG
A2 (Disuse)
A2 B2
B2 (Disuse)
A3 B3 A3
Bottom B3 GND
a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 442 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.3.3 Location of communication modules

As described earlier, the user should examine the type of communication module and the
location where the module is placed. Therefore, the user is required to understand the
reference, when the user examines the connection figures. (See Appendix: Typical external
connection)
For example, Figure 4.3-5 shows LAN modules (100BASE-FX) and IRIG-B000 module placed
at location C11 to C15. Blank panels are placed at locations C13 and C14. The user can find
the corresponding communication modules placed in the IED on the right side.
Com. SLOT VCT SLOT

100BASE-FX
VC1
VC1
C11 VCT
100BASE-FX
C11 100BASE-FX
C12
Blank panel
C12 100BASE-FX
Blank panel C13

C13 (BLANK)
C14
C14 (BLANK)
IRIG-B000
FG1
E C15
C15
FGE
FG1
Practical communication modules Schematic figure
Figure 4.3-5 Communication modules structure (an example)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 443 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO)

Binary IO modules are provided in the IED to signal a command for external devices. Binary
IO modules are also used to receive status information. Binary IO modules are connected to
external devices with signal wires using terminal blocks on the rear of the IED. There are
standard type and variable type in Binary IO modules as shown in Table 4.4-1.
Table 4.4-1 Number of input and output circuits1

Number of Number of output circuits2
Module Module
# input Fast Semi-fast Auxiliary
name3 Type4 Hybrid Form C
circuits operating operating (Normal)
1 BI1A Standard 18 0 0 0 0 0
2 BI2A Variable 12 0 0 0 0 0
3 BI3A Standard 32 0 0 0 0 0
4 BO1A Standard 0 0 6 0 12 0
5 BO2A Standard 0 0 0 16 0 0
6 BIO1A Standard 7 0 6 0 3 1
9 BIO4A Variable 6 0 0 6 1 1
1Note: One of two voltages is applied for the binary IO modules: 48Vdc (24 to 60) and
220Vdc (110 to 250). The DC voltage supplied to the IED determines the
voltage type selection; hence, a combination of different voltage types is not
possible.
2Note: For the structure and the number of binary IO modules, see section 4.4.5.
3Note: For details of the output circuits, see Table 4.4-6.
4Note: For the binary input circuits in the standard type, the user can choice either a
high voltage or a low voltage with regard to the input threshold. For the ones of the
variable type, the user itself can set a threshold value with regard to input voltage
using settings.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 444 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.4.1 Binary input feature for Compression-type terminal

Binary input circuits have common programmable logic (CPL). Each circuit is independent,
but the circuits in the BI3A module are not independent, as shown in Table 4.4-2.
Table 4.4-2 Input circuits and features associated with binary IO module
Module Input features Example Symbols
type sign
1 BI1A - Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw number
-Polarity dependent
1
(+)
-Independent circuit 2
BI1
(−)
2 BI2A -Isolated using photo Circuit
number
coupler
Screw on terminal block
-Polarity dependent
- Independent circuit
-Variable threshold
3 BI3A -Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw
number
-Polarity dependent (+)
1
-Sharing common BI1 BI1

Circuit number
connections (+)
2
BI2
Circuit
Terminal screw
number
number
34
(+)
BI32
35
(−) Photo coupler
36
(−)
37
(−)
38
(−)
4 BIO1A
5 BIO2A Same as BI1A
Same as BI1A and BI2A
6 BIO3A
7 BIO4A Same as BI2A
The user can find the connector of binary IO modules, the terminal number and
arrangement of the binary input circuits in section 4.4.5.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 445 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.4.2 Binary input circuit

The binary input circuit has a threshold for the input voltage and the user can regulate the
threshold using scheme switches and settings. Additionally, the binary input circuit has a
function in response to chattering signals produced by bouncing contacts, a programmable
logic for retarding and inverting the signal, and the user can set the respective features with
settings. Table 4.4-3 shows the respective settings and ranges in the standard type. Table
4.4-4 shows the ones in the variable types.
Table 4.4-3 Setting items for binary input circuits in the standard type
Units
Setting item1 Range Contents Default
THRES_Lvl Low/High – Threshold level for input voltage Low

Common
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
BI1_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BI1 Off
BI1 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the off-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BI1 signal Normal
….. ….. ….. ….. …..
BIn_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BIn Off

BIn2 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
1Note: Setting items are provided in each slot; see Figure 4.4-4. Also, see section 4.4.6 (i).
2Note: BIn_CPL and other settings are provided for all binary input circuits. For example,
the user can configure 18 CPLs in BI1A.
3Note: Each setting item above is required to set at every IO_slots.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 446 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 4.4-4 Setting items for binary input circuits in the variable type (i.e., BI2A and BIO4A)
Units
Setting devices Range Contents Default
BI1-3_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI1, BI2, and BI3 77

BI4-6_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI4, BI5, and BI6 77
Common BI7-9_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI7 to BI94 77
BI10-12_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI10 to BIn4 77
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
BI1_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI1 Off
BI2_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI 2 Off
BI3_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI 3 Off
….. ….. ….. ….. …..
BIn_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI n Off

BIn4 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
4Note: BIn_CPL and other settings are provided for all binary input circuits. For example,
the user can set for 12 CPLs in BI2A and for 6 CPLs in BIO4A.
As an example, Figure 4.4-1 shows the binary input circuit of BI1A in order to help
understand the settings. BI1A consists of 18 binary input circuits and each circuit has three
settings:
Setting threshold level
Comparison feature for contact chatter
CPL switches (“Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal” and “Logic level
inversion”), used as basis of input signal characteristics.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 447 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
From 8001001111 8001001110

External devices For Relay & and
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8001001172 control functions
BI1-NC Filter BI1
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI1 BI1-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BI1-CPL] Off
8101011111 8101011110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8101011172
BI2-NC BI2
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI2 BI2-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8201021110 8201021110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
BI3-NC BI3 8201021172
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI3 BI3-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8********** BIn
BIn-NC BIn
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8**********
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BIn BIn-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BIn-CPL] Off
Low
[THRES_Lvl]
High
R
Figure 4.4-1 Common programmable logic for BI1A
Respective element IDs (i.e., 8001001172 and others) designate respective signal
monitoring points of the binary input circuits (i.e., BI1-CPL and others). Thus, the user can
handle the signals on the binary input circuit using element ID together with function ID.
When we assume that BI1A module is at IO#1 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to
see the first circuit signal of this BI1A module, the user can identify its signal† using the
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 448 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
element ID (8001001172) and the function ID of IO#1 slot‡.
†Note:The user can see the signals of the binary input circuits on the IED screen.
Chapter User interface: Monitoring-sub menu discusses how to see the state of the
binary input circuits.
‡Note:Function IDs identify every IO slots. For example, IO#1 slot has been identified by
the function ID “200B001”. Therefore, when the user wishes to program the signal
“BI1-CPL” on BI1A at IO#1, the user should designate its signal using the function
ID “200B001” and Element ID “8001001172”. On the other hand, when the signal
“BI2-CPL” on BI1A at IO#2 is required to program, the user should designate that
signal using the function ID “200B002” and Element ID “8001001172”. For more
information with regard to the function ID and the Data ID at IO#1, see sections
4.4.6(i), 4.4.7(i), and others.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 449 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(i) Setting threshold level

For Standard type (BI1A and others)
The selection switch is used to adjust the threshold of an input signal; it is designated as
[THRES_Lvl]. If an external device signal is lower than DC 110V1, the user should set Low for
scheme switch [THRES_Lvl]. Conversely if an external device signal is higher than DC 220V1,
the user should set High for the scheme switch. Note that scheme switch [THRES_Lvl] is used
to control all binary input circuits. The user must ensure that the input voltage is higher than
DC 77V1 when the setting ‘Low’ is applied; the input voltage should be higher than DC 136V1
when the setting ‘High’ is applied.
For Variable type (exclusive for BI2A and BIO4A)

BI2A and BIO4A have a unique feature as a substitute for setting (i)-1 in order that the user
can determine the guaranteed-minimum-pick-up voltages (thresholds) as required. This
unique feature is performed with settings [BI1-3_PICKUP], [BI4-6_PICKUP], [BI7-9_PICKUP],
and [BI10-12_PICKUP]; every setting is applied to a group of three binary input circuits.
Provided that the user uses BI2A, then binary input circuits #1 to #3 follow the setting
[BI1-3_PICKUP] and the user should set the value between 18 to 222V DC2 for this setting.
For the setting [BI4-6_PICKUP], the above mentioned value holds true for #4 to #6 binary
input circuits; similarly the setting [BI7-9_PICKUP] is used for #7 to #9 binary input circuits;
and finally the setting [BI10-12_PICKUP] is used for #10 to #12 binary input circuits.
On the other hand, when BIO4A is used, the binary input circuits #1 to #3 follow the
setting [BI1-3_PICKUP]; and the binary input circuits #4 to #6 follow the setting
[BI4-6_PICKUP]. Since BIO4A has six binary input circuits, the other settings
[BI7-9_PICKUP] and [BI10-12_PICKUP] are not required here.
1Note: The threshold value is fixed for all binary IO module types with the exception of
BI2A and BIO4A. The user should notice that “binary IO module voltage type”
influences these values (see the 1st note in Table 4.4-1). These particular values
are found when 220V dc type is used.
2Note: In the variable type, the user can set the threshold arbitrarily between 18 to 222V
in DC, and can regulate its threshold voltage in a voltage step. Table 4.4-5 shows
the corresponding values with regard to guaranteed and typical thresholds in
response to the setting values. Note that the operation in the variable type is
segmented into ‘Operate’, ‘Intermediate’, ‘and ‘Non-operate’ areas, which are
decided by the guaranteed-pick-up, typical-pick-up, and guaranteed-drop-off levels,
as illustrated in Figure 4.4-2.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 450 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 4.4-5 Guaranteed and typical thresholds in the variable type

Guaranteed levels Typical levels
Setting values [V]
Pick-up voltage [V] Drop-off voltage [V] Pick-up voltage [V]
18 17.9 10.5 14.2
19 18.5 11.1 14.8
20 19.9 12.3 16.1
21 20.5 12.9 16.7
22 to 29 21.8 14.0 17.9
30 29.3 20.8 25.0
31 to 32 30.8 22.2 26.5
33 32.5 23.7 28.1
34 to 35 34.0 25.0 29.5
36 to 37 36.0 26.8 31.4
38 to 39 37.5 28.3 32.9
40 39.2 29.8 34.5
41 to 49 40.8 31.2 36.0
50 to 52 49.8 39.4 44.6
53 to 56 53.0 42.2 47.6
57 to 59 56.3 45.3 50.8
60 to 61 59.5 48.1 53.8
62 to 63 61.8 50.2 56.0
64 to 65 63.6 51.8 57.7
66 65.9 53.9 59.9
67 to 70 66.7 54.7 60.7
71 70.1 57.7 63.9
71 to 73 70.3 57.9 64.1
74 73.2 60.6 66.9
75 to 79 74.4 61.6 68.0
80 to 83 79.7 66.4 73.0
84 to 88 83.7 70.1 76.9
89 to 92 88.2 74.0 81.1
93 to 99 92.3 77.8 85.0
100 to 106 99.4 84.2 91.8
107 to 111 106.4 90.6 98.5
112 to 113 111.4 95.0 103.2
114 to 119 114.0 97.4 105.7
120 119.3 102.3 110.8
121 to 127 121.0 103.8 112.4
128 to 130 128.0 110.1 119.0
131 130.1 112.0 121.0
132 to 135 131.9 113.7 122.8
136 to 137 135.9 117.3 126.6
138 to 141 137.1 118.3 127.7
142 to 143 141.5 122.3 131.9
144 143.9 124.5 134.2
145 to 146 144.6 125.2 134.9
147 to 151 146.1 126.5 136.3
152 to 154 151.8 131.6 141.7
155 to 161 154.4 134.0 144.2
162 161.3 140.3 150.8
163 to 165 162.6 141.4 152.0
166 to 170 165.8 144.3 155.0
171 to 173 170.6 148.6 159.6
174 to 176 173.6 151.4 162.5
177 to 183 176.3 153.8 165.0
184 to 189 183.3 160.1 171.7
190 to 193 189.7 165.9 177.8
194 to 200 193.6 169.4 181.5
201 to 203 200.3 175.5 187.9
204 to 211 203.1 178.1 190.6
212 to 221 211.5 185.7 198.6
222 222.0 195.2 208.6
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 451 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Input voltage
Operating area
Guaranteed pick up level

Intermediate area
Typical pick up level
Guaranteed drop off level
Non-operating area
Figure 4.4-2 Operating area in the variable type

Note: In practice, the pick-up voltages depend on respective binary circuits physically
This means the characteristics are not affected by the ambient conditions and the
applied voltages.
(ii) Comparison feature for contact chatter

The input circuit incorporates a comparison feature that protects against contact chatter and
this feature is configured using the setting [CMP_NUM]. Figure 4.4-3 illustrates this feature;
the comparison feature removes contact chatter. The period ‘t’ applied for the removal of
contact chatter can be configured by setting a value for [CMP_NUM]. The formula for the
calculation of ‘t’ is,
1
[CPM_NUM]×
System Frequency×12
The setting [CMP_NUM] is provided for all binary input circuits.
Actual input signal
Imported signal by
binary input circuit
t
Figure 4.4-3 Chattering countermeasure (e.g. [CMP_NUM] = 4)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 452 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) CPL switch

If the user needs to operate the CPL for binary input circuit #1, the user should set On for
scheme switch [BI1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for scheme switch [BI1_CPL] if
CPL is not required. Since the entire range of binary input circuits have CPLs, a setting of On
or Off is a pre-requisite for every binary input circuit. The number of CPL is equal to number
of binary input circuits: that is, if BI1A is selected, the number of CPLs is 18.
(iv) Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal

Both an on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in CPL; both are used to adjust
the timing for input signals, the user should set their respective time values for settings [On
Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(v) Logic level inversion

The Logic inversion function can invert the input signal and is provided for each binary input
circuit; the user can invert an input signal by setting Inverse for scheme switch
[INVERSE-SW]. A setting of Normal is also provided when inversion is not required.
(vi) How to set the settings for binary input circuits

Figure 4.4-4 illustrates an example of the binary IO module arrangement for the binary input
circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs); it illustrates the setting targets are on BI1A at IO#1 and
BIO1A at IO#3. The user should key the settings with regard to BI1A and BIO1A using the
setting tables for IO_SLOT1 and IO_SLOT3. As the setting points are for BI1A and BIO1A at
IO#1 and IO#3, the user should take the setting table of the standard type (in section
4.4.6(i)-1 and 4.4.6(ii)-1).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 453 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
IO#n
IO#5
IO#3
IO#1
IO#4
IO#2
IO_SLOT1 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (input) Setting table (in & out)
Setting targets: BI1–BI18

and Common. Setting targets: BI1–BI7
and Common.
a. Setting targets for BI1A (IO#1) c. Setting targets for BIO1A (IO#3)
Figure 4.4-4 BO and BIO setting tables related to IO_slot1 and IO_slot3
The setting table of section 4.4.6(i)-1 is available for all binary IO modules except for
BI2A and BIO4A; thus, the user should understand and select the setting points that are
relevant to BI1A. That is, for BI1A the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e.,
binary input circuits #1 to #18) from IO_SLOT1 setting table. On the other hand, for BIO1A
the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e., binary input circuits #1 to #7) from
IO_SLOT3 setting table. The IO_SLOT3 setting table for the binary input circuits are shown
section 4.4.6(ii)-1. The setting operation via the IED screen is discussed later. (See chapter
User interface: I/O setting sub-menu)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 454 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.4.3 Binary output feature for Compression-type terminal

A binary output circuit (BO) along with the CPL drives a single contact. There are five types of
BOs; different types of BOs are provided which are suitable for controlling the speed and
capacity of current in a variety of external devices, as listed below:
(1) Fast operating
(2) Semi-fast operating
(3) Hybrid
(4) Auxiliary
(5) BO with Form-C
The arrangement of the BO types is determined for every binary IO module, as shown in
Table 4.4-1 and Table 4.4-6. The difference in the types and number of BOs are also found in
section 4.4.5.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 455 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 4.4-6 Output circuits and features associated with binary IO module
No Type Binary output feature Example Symbol Applied
sign module
1 Fast -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BIO3A
-Dry contact BO1(F) number
operating
-Closure is the fastest 1
(F) amongst all of the BO types. 2
Type
-Make & Carry: 5A cont.
BO number
-Break: 0.15A at 290Vdc
-OP Time: 3ms (typical) N/O contact
2 Semi-fast -Normally open (N/O) BO1A

-Dry contact BO1(SF)
operating BIO1A
-Closure is faster than
(SF) normal. BIO2A
Type
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc
0.2A at 125Vdc
-OP Time: 6ms (typical)
3 Hybrid -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO2A
-Polarity dependent BO1(H) number
(H) (+) BIO4A
-Interruption capability for 1
(−)
high-current (up to 10A) 2
Type
-Consisting of an IGBT BO number
device and a contact
-Make and carry: 8A cont. N/O
-Break: 10A at 220/110Vdc
-OP Time: 1ms
4 Auxiliary -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO1A
-Dry contact BO1 number
BIO1A
-Normal speed closure 1
-Make and carry: 8A cont. 2 BIO2A

-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc BO number BIO3A
0.2A at 125Vdc
-OP Time: 8ms (typical) N/O contact
5 Form-C -Uses a N/C and a N/O Terminal screw number BIO2A

contact BO1
BIO3A
-Shares a common 35
connections BIO4A
37
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
36
-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc N/O
0.2A at 125Vdc 38
-OP Time: 8ms (typical) N/C
Contact
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 456 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.4.4 Binary output circuit

Either a CPL logic or a PLC signal can drive a binary output circuit. Table 4.4-7 shows the
settings summary of CPL function.
Table 4.4-7 Setting items in binary output circuits
Setting-range or
Unit
Setting items Contents Default
Data_ID
BO1_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO1 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the second input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the third input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the forth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the fifth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the sixth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the seventh input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO1. Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO1 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse s Inversion operation of BO1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO1 OFF
Logic Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Setting Off Delay Timer for Delay and Dwell 0.000
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) – Setting Data ID for Latch Not assigned1
BO2_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO2 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO2. Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO2 Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO2 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BO2 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO2 OFF
…..
BOn_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off

BOn Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BOn Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BOn Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BOn AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BOn signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BOn OFF
1Note: The user can set a reset signal and eight input signals with Data IDs. Data IDs are
listed as a signal monitoring point for each function. Setting items are summarized
in each slot. (See sections 4.4.8(i) and 4.4.8(ii))
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 457 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 4.4-5 shows the binary output circuits on BO1A in order to help understand the
settings. BO1A consists of 18 binary output circuits and every circuit has timers and switches.
The features of the CPLs are divided into the five components as listed below:
CPL switch
Selection of input signals
Logic gate switch
Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off
Logic level inversion
Logic timer switch
From relay
application and To external
control functions devices
8002001112 Contact
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
[LOGIC-SW] & ≥1
t 0 0 t BO1
Input signal 1 DRIVER BO1
&
AND
1 & Logic Timer ≥1 & ≥1
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8002001113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On &
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO1_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
310200E11D BO1-SOURCE
810201112 Contact
[LOGIC-SW] On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
& ≥1 BO2
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BO2
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR &
810201113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BO2 RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO2_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
820202112 Contact
& ≥1 BO3
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BO3
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8202021113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BO3 RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO3_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
8********* Contact
& ≥1 BOn
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BOn
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR &
8*********
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BOn RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BOn_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
3102E**11D BOn-SOURCE
Figure 4.4-5 Binary Output Circuit for BO1A (#1 to #n=18)
In Figure 4.4-5 respective element IDs (i.e., 8002001112 and others) designate respective
signal monitoring points of the binary output circuits. The user can monitor the operations of
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 458 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
the binary output circuit using element ID together with function ID. When we assume that
BO1A module is at IO#2 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to monitor the first-circuit
in the BO1A module, the user can see the operation using the element ID (8002001112) and
the function ID† of IO#2 slot.
†Note: A function ID identifies every IO slots. For example, with regard to the function
ID and the Data ID at IO#1 slot, see section 4.4.9(i). On the other hand, for IO#2
slot see section 4.4.9(ii).
(i) CPL switch

When the user needs to operate the CPL for binary output circuit #1, the user should set On
for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for the scheme switch
[BO1_CPL] if CPL is not required. Since all binary output circuits have CPLs setting between
On and Off is required for every binary output circuit. The number of CPL is equal to the
number of binary output circuits: that is, if the BO1A module is selected, the number of CPLs
is 18. Note that the subsequent PLC settings described later require that Off be set for the
scheme switch.
(ii) Selection of input signals

Since a binary input circuit is operated by commands introduced from other functions, eight
ports for input signals are provided, designated as input-signal1 to input-signal8. The user
must ensure that input-signal1 to input-signal8 are configured with eight DataIDs. That is,
the user can select input-signals that are available from other functions, these input-signals
are designated using DataIDs. The user can key the DataIDs into settings [Input signal1] to
[Input signal8]. The DataIDs are selected from the Signal monitoring point list, which is
provided for every function.
(iii) Logic gate switch

A binary input circuit has a logic scheme for the eight input signals, and can combine the
eight input signals as required using scheme switch [LOGIC-SW] for which the user should
set either AND, OR or XOR.
(iv) Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off signal

An on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in the CPL; both are used to adjust the
timing for binary output circuits, the user should set their respective time values for settings
[On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(v) Logic level inversion

The logic inversion function can invert the input signal for each binary output circuit; the user
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 459 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
can invert an input output when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch [INVERSE-SW].
Normal setting is also provided when logic inversion is not required for processing.
(vi) Logic timer switch

In order that the binary output circuit can have a programmable reset characteristic, a
scheme switch and a setting are provided. The programmable reset characteristic consists of
four types and the user can select the type required using a scheme switch: (1) dwell type, (2)
delay type, (3) latch type, and (4) instantaneous type:
Instant type
When the user uses a binary output signal without the following characteristics, the user
should set Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
Delay type
If the user requires a binary output signal with a delayed characteristic, the user should set
Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting [Logic
timer].
Dwell type
For instance, if the user requires a binary output signal as a one shot pulse, the user should
set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value in the
setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other hand, if
the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width will be
equal to the width of the input signals.
Latch type
If the user requires a binary output signal to be removed by a reset signal, the user should set
Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and key the Data ID of the reset signal for setting
[Reset signal]. Since the binary output signal is removed with the Data ID, the user should
determine the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the signal
monitoring point for each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 460 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(vii) How to set the settings for binary output circuits
IO#n
IO#3
IO#5
IO#1
IO#4
IO#2
BO1A BIO1A
IO_SLOT2 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (output) Setting table (in & out)
Setting targets: BO1–BO18 Setting targets: BO1–BO10

b. Setting targets for BO1A (IO#2) c. Setting targets for BIO1A (IO#3)
Figure 4.4-6 BO and BIO modules and setting tables related to IO_SLOT2 and IO_SLOT3
Figure 4.4-6 illustrates an example of a binary IO module arrangement and the binary
output circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs). If the user wishes to set the binary output
circuits, the setting targets are on BO1A and BIO1A at locations IO#2 and IO#3. The user
should key the CPL settings from the setting tables for the IO2_SLOT and IO3_SLOT.
The setting table is available for all binary IO modules; thus, the user should
understand and select setting points that are relevant to BO1A and BIO1A. That is, for BO1A
the user should choose the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary output circuits #1 to #18)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 461 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
from IO_SLOT2. On the other hand, for BIO1A, the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary
output circuits #1 to #10) are from IO_SLOT3. These setting tables are shown in section
4.4.8(ii).
(viii) PLC and the binary output circuits

The Programmable logic controller (PLC) is also available for the control of binary output
circuits as a substitute for the CPL, and is able to signal an output command directly. In the
case that the binary output circuit is controlled by the PLC, the user is required to connect the
PLC to the binary output circuit. In Figure 4.4-5, the PLC logic connection points are
designated with BO1-SOURCE, BO2-SOURCE, and others. (The PLC is discussed separately.
Note that Connection points on the PLC are shown with the DataIDs of BIO_SLOT. See
section 4.4.9(i)-3 and 4.4.9(ii)-3. (For more information of PLC function, see Chapter PLC
function)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 462 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.4.5 Structure of binary IO Module for Compression-type terminal

Binary IO modules consist of a number of module types and the arrangement of the respective
inputs-and-outputs are particular to each binary IO module type, as shown in Figure 4.4-7 to
Figure 4.4-11. Referring to the figures on the left, the user can for example, identify the actual
terminal blocks of the binary IO module. Corresponding circuits are drawn on the right in the
form of schematic diagrams. If the wiring of BI1A is considered, the wiring objects are
designated with terminal screw numbers 1 to 40. The terminal screw numbers are shown next
to the terminal blocks. Here the user can find a slot number labeled with alpha-numeric
reference “T*”. The asterisk sign (*) is substituted for any one of the slot numbers. For the
actual implementation of a binary IO module, the user should examine the arrangement of
binary IO modules from External connection figures, which are shown separately. (See
Appendix: Typical external connection)
Note that some input and output circuits have polarity, which is designated with either a
plus sign (+) or a minus sign (−) respectively.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 463 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Alpha-numeric reference for the BI. Sign “*”

is substituted for the actual slot location
number.
T* T*
Screw
BI1A BI3A
T*
(+) 1 (+) 1 (
1
2 BI1 2 BI1
2 (−) (+) BI2 (
(+) 3 (+) 3
3
4 BI2 4 BI3
4 (−) (+) BI4
(+) 5 (+) 5 (
5 BI3 BI5
6 (−) 6 (+) 6 (
7 7 BI6
7 (+) (+) BI7 (
8 BI4 8
8 (−) (+) (
9 9 BI8
9 (+) (+)
10 BI5 10 BI9
10 (−) (+)
11 11 BI10
11 (+) (+) (
12 BI6 12 BI11
12 (−) (+) (
13 13 BI12
13 (+) (+) (
14 BI7 14 BI13
14 (−) (+) (
15 15 BI14
15 (+) (+) BI15
16 BI8 16
16 (−) (+)
17 17 BI16
17 (+) (+) (
18 BI9 18 BI17
18 (−) (+) (
BI18
19
20 The same terminal screw
is denoted with the same
number.
21 (+) 21 (+) 21 (+
22 BI10 22 BI19
22 (−) (+) BI20 (−
23 (+) 23 (+) 23
24 BI11 24 BI21
24 (−) (+)
25 25 BI22
25 (+) (+) (+
26 BI12 26 BI23
26 (−) (+) (−
27 27 BI24
27 (+) (+) (+
28 BI13 28 BI25
28 (−) (+) (−
29 29 BI26
29 (+) (+)
30 BI14 30 BI27
30 (−) (+)
31 31 BI28
31 (+) (+) (+
32 BI15 32 BI29
32 (−) (+) (−
33 33 33 BI30
(+) (+) BI31 (+
34 (−) 34 BI16 34
(+) BI32 (−
35 (+) 35 (−) 35
36 (−) 36 BI17 36
(−)
37 (+) 37 (−) 37 (+
38 (−) 38 BI18 38
(−) (−
39
40
Terminal blocks Schematic figures
Figure 4.4-7 Input arrangements for BI1A and BI3A

Note: For more detailed circuit information, refer to Table 4.4-2 or Table 4.4-6.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 464 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Alpha-numeric reference for the BI. Sign “*”

is substituted for the actual slot location
number.
T*
T
The same terminal screw is denoted with
Screw the same number.
BI2A B
T*
(+) 1 (+) 1
1 BI1
(−) 2 (−) 2
2
(+) 3
3
(−) 4
4
5 (+) 5 (+) 5
(−) 6 BI2 (−) 6
6
7 (+) 7 (+) 7
(−) 8 BI3 (−) 8
8
9 (+) 9
10 (−) 10
11 (+) 11 (+) 11
(−) 12 BI4 (−) 12
12
13 (+) 13 (+) 13
(−) 14 BI5 (−) 14
14
15 (+) 15
16 (−) 16
17 (+) 17 (+) 17
18 18 BI6 18
(−) (−)
19
20 Cables to Flame ground terminal
required
21 (+) 21 BI7
(+) 21
22 (−) 22 (−) 22
23 (+) 23
24 (−) 24
25 (+) 25 (+) 25
26 26 BI8 (−) 26
(−)
27 (+) 27 (+) 27
28 28 BI9 (−) 28
(−)
29 (+) 29
30 (−) 30
31 (+) B31 (+) 31
32 B32 BI10 (−) 32
(−)
33 (+) B33 (+) 33
34 B34 BI11 (−) 34
(−)
35 (+) 35
36 (−) 36
37 (+) B37 (+) 37
BI12
38 (−) B38 (−) 38
39
40
FG
Figure 4.4-8 Input arrangements for BI2A

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 465 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Alpha-numeric reference for BO. Sign “*” is substituted for

the slot location number.
T* T*
BO1A BO2A
T*
1 1 1
(+)
2 BO1(SF) 2 BO1(H) 2
(−)
3 3 3
(+)
4 BO2(SF) 4 BO2(H) 4
(−)
5 5 5
(+)
6 BO3(SF) 6 BO3(H) 6
(−)
7 7 7
(+)
8 BO4(SF) 8 BO4(H) 8
(−)
9 9 9
(+)
10 BO5(SF) 10 BO5(H) 10
(−)
11 11 11
(+)
12 BO6(SF) 12 BO6(H) 12
(−)
13 13 13
(+)
14 BO7 14 BO7(H) 14
(−)
15 15 15
(+)
16 BO8 16 BO8(H) 16
(−)
17 17 17
(+)
18 BO9 18 BO9(H) 18
(−)
19
20 The same terminal
screw is denoted
with the same
number.
21 21 21 (+)
22 BO10 22 BO10(H) 22 (−)
23 23 23 (+)
24 BO11 24 BO11(H) 24 (−)
25 25 25 (+)
26 BO12 26 BO12(H) 26 (−)
27 27 27 (+)
28 BO13 28 BO13(H) 28 (−)
29 29 29 (+)
30 BO14 30 BO14(H) 30 (−)
31 31 31 (+)
32 BO15 32 BO15(H) 32 (−)
33 33 33 (+)
34 BO16 34 BO16(H) 34 (−)
35 35
36 BO17 36
37 37
38 BO18 38
39
40
Figure 4.4-9 Output arrangements in BO1A and BO2A

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 466 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Alpha-numeric reference of BIO. Sign “*” is

substituted for the actual slot location number.
T* T*
BIO1A BIO2A
T* (+) 1 1
BI1 (+) BI1
1 (−) 2 (−) 2
2 (+) 3 (+) 3
4 BI2 4 BI2
3 (−) (−)
4 (+) 5 (+) 5
6 BI3 6 BI3
5 (−) (−)
6 (+) 7 7
BI4 (+) BI4
7 (−) 8 (−) 8
8 (+) 9 (+) 9
9 10 BI5 10 BI5
(−) (−)
10 (+) 11 (+) 11
11 12 BI6 12 BI6
(−) (−)
12 (+) 13 13
BI7 (+) BI7
13 (−) 14 (−) 14
14 15 15
BO1(SF) (+) BI8
15 16 16
17 (−)
16 (+) 17
17 BO2(SF) 18 18 BI9
(−)
18
19
20
The same terminal

21 21 21
screw is denoted with BO3(SF) (+)
22 22 22 BI10
the same number. (−)
23 23 23
BO4(SF) 24 (+) 24 BI11
24 (−)
25 25 25
BO5(SF) 26 (+) 26 BI12
26 (−)
27 27 27
BO6(SF) 28 BO1(SF) 28
28
29 29 29
BO7 30 BO2(SF) 30
30
31 31 31
32 BO8 32 BO3(SF) 32
33 33 33
34 BO9 34 BO4 34
35
36 35 35
37 37 37
38 BO10 36 BO5 36
39
40 38 38
Figure 4.4-10 Input and output arrangements in BIO1A and BIO2A

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 467 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Alpha-numeric of BIO. Sign “*” is substituted

for the actual slot location number. T* T*
BIO3A BIO4A
T* 1 1
1 (+) (+)
2 BI1 2 BI1
2 (−) (−)
(+) 3 (+) 3
3 BI2 BI2
(−) 4 (−) 4
4
(+) 5 (+) 5
5 BI3 BI3
(−) 6 (−) 6
6
(+) 7 (+) 7
7 BI4 BI4
(−) 8 (−) 8
8
(+) 9 (+) 9
9 BI5 BI5
(−) 10 (−) 10
10
(+) 11 (+) 11
11 BI6 BI6
12 (−) 12 (−) 12
13 (+) 13
14 BI7
14 (−)
15 (+) 15
16 BI8
16 (−) 17 (+)
17 BO1(H) 18 (−)
18
19
20 The same terminal screw
is denoted with the same
number.
21 21 21 (+)
BO1(F) 22 BO2(H) 22
22 (−)
23 23 23 (+)
BO2(F) 24 BO3(H) 24
24 (−)
25 25 25 (+)
BO3(F) 26 BO4(H) 26
26 (−)
27 27 27 (+)
BO4(F) 28 BO5(H) 28
28 (−)
29 29 29 (+)
BO5(F) 30 BO6(H) 30
30 (−)
31 31
32 BO6(F) 32
33 33 33
34 BO7 34 BO7 34
35
36 35 35
37 37 37
38 BO8 36 BO8 36
39
40 38 38
Figure 4.4-11 Input and output arrangements in BIO3A and BIO4A
Note: PHOENIX CONTACT ® is the manufacturer of the terminal block. The model of
this terminal is described as “FRONT-MSTB 2.5/20-STF 5.08”. The user can
connect a cable to this terminal directly without a cable ferrule; hence, the
recommended cables are AWG12–AWG24 and their stripping lengths are 10mm.
Use a cable ferrule made in PHOENIX CONTACT ® when required.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 468 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.4.6 Settings of binary input circuits

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
For the standard type being furnished
Default setting
value
Common THRES_Lvl Low / High - Determination of input threshold Low

CMP_NUM 4-9 - Number of times filtered 4
BI1 BI1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary input enable Off
On Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s On delay timer value 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s Off delay timer value 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Binary signal inversion Normal
…… …… …… …… ……

For the variable type being furnished

Default setting
value
Common THRES_Lvl Low / High - Determination of input threshold Low

Threshold through BI1 to BI3
THRES_Grp1 10 - 220 V Applicable only in BI-2 module and 75
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
CMP_NUM 4-9 - Number of times filtered 4
…… …… …… …… ……

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 469 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID:

200B02 to 200B0n)
For the standard type being furnished
Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in previous section (i)-1)
For the variable type being furnished

Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#2 (in previous section (i)-2)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 470 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.4.7 Signals (Data ID) of binary input circuits

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
Before the filer
 Signal monitoring points (before the filter)
8001001111 BI1-NC BI1 signal without filter
8A010A1111 BI11-NC BI11 signal without filter
8B010B1111 BI12-NC BI12 signal without filter
8C010C1111 BI13-NC BI13 signal without filter
8D010D1111 BI14-NC BI14 signal without filter
8E010E1111 BI15-NC BI15 signal without filter
8F010F1111 BI16-NC BI16 signal without filter
After the filter

 Signal monitoring points (after the filer)
8001001110 BI1 BI1 signal with filter
8A010A1110 BI11 BI11 signal with filter
8B010B1110 BI12 BI12 signal with filter
8C010C1110 BI13 BI13 signal with filter
8D010D1110 BI14 BI14 signal with filter
8E010E1110 BI15 BI15 signal with filter
8F010F1110 BI16 BI16 signal with filter
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 471 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
The ends of binary input circuits

 Signal monitoring points (at the end of binary input circuit)
8001001172 BI1-CPL BI1 signal with filter and programmable logic
8A010A1172 BI11-CPL BI11 signal with filter and programmable logic
8B010B1172 BI12-CPL BI12 signal with filter and programmable logic
8C010C1172 BI13-CPL BI13 signal with filter and programmable logic
8D010D1172 BI14-CPL BI14 signal with filter and programmable logic
8E010E1172 BI15-CPL BI15 signal with filter and programmable logic
8F010F1172 BI16-CPL BI16 signal with filter and programmable logic
(ii) Tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID: 200B02 to

200B0n)
Before the filter
Table is the same as the table in previous section (i)-1.
After the filter

The ends of binary input circuits

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 472 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.4.8 Settings of binary output circuits

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID 200B01)
Default setting
Units
value
BO1 BO1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary output enable Off

Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - First Data ID as input signal #1 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Second Data ID as input signal #2 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal3 ditto - Third Data ID as input signal #3 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal4 ditto - Forth Data ID as input signal #4 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal5 ditto - Fifth Data ID as input signal #5 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal6 ditto - Sixth Data ID as input signal #6 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal7 ditto - Seventh Data ID as input signal #7 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal8 ditto - Eighth Data ID as input signal #8 for Logic gate Not assigned
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Operation selection in Logic gate AND
TIMER-SW Off / Delay / Dwell / Latch - Selection of Logic circuit Off
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell" circuit 0.000
Reset signal (Data-ID from other FBs) - Reset signal selection for "Latch" circuit Not assigned
Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - Keying Data ID#1 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Keying Data ID#2 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
….. …… ……. ……. ……..

Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - Keying Data ID#1 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
……. ……. ……. …….
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 473 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID

200B02 to 200B0n)
Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in section (i))
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 474 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.4.9 Signlas (Data ID) of binary output circuits

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
Before the contact-driver
 Signal monitoring points (before the contact-driver)
8002001112 BO1 BO1 signal
8902091112 BO10 BO10 signal
8A020A1112 BO11 BO11 signal
8B020B1112 BO12 BO12 signal
8C020C1112 BO13 BO13 signal
8D020D1112 BO14 BO14 signal
8E020E1112 BO15 BO15 signal
8F020F1112 BO16 BO16 signal
8002101112 BO17 BO17 signal
8102111112 BO18 BO18 signal
After the contact-driver

 Signal monitoring points (after the contact-driver)
8002001113 BO1 RB BO1 driver read signal
8A020A1113 BO11 RB BO11 driver read signal
8B020B1113 BO12 RB BO12 driver read signal
8C020C1113 BO13 RB BO13 driver read signal
8D020D1113 BO14 RB BO14 driver read signal
8E020E1113 BO15 RB BO15 driver read signal
8F020F1113 BO16 RB BO16 driver read signal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 475 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Connection points for the PLC

310200E11D BO1-SOURCE BO1 output command by PLC-logic
31020AE11D BO11-SOURCE BO11 output command by PLC-logic
31020BE11D BO12-SOURCE BO12 output command by PLC-logic
31020CE11D BO13-SOURCE BO13 output command by PLC-logic
31020DE11D BO14-SOURCE BO14 output command by PLC-logic
31020EE11D BO15-SOURCE BO15 output command by PLC-logic
31020FE11D BO16-SOURCE BO16 output command by PLC-logic
(ii) Tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID: 200B02 to

200B0n)
Before the contact-driver
After the contact-driver

Connection points for the PLC

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 476 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Power supply module (PWS)

The power supply module (PWS) consists of a DC/DC converter and line noise filters. The
input range rating of the PWS is 110 to 250 V DC.
Alpha-numeric reference of PWS. Sign “*” is
substituted for actual slot location number.4
Upper block
is designated
“1 to 20” T*
PWS
*
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
7
8
4
9
10 FAIL15
11 3
12 Terminal screw
1
13 number
14 Terminal
15 screw
16 number
17 8
18
19 10
20 Lower block
is FAIL25 9
designated
“21 to 40” 7
21
22
23 Terminal screw
24 number
25 29
26 Positive(+) DC
30
27 /
28
29 Negative(−) 31 DC
30 32
31
35
32
33 36
Short wire1 34 Short wire1
35 E 37
36
37 38
38
Short-wire2 39 Short wire2
40
FG
FG
E3
Frame earth Screw M5 screw for case earthing3
Terminal and Earthing screws Schematic diagram
Figure 4.5-1 PWS terminal block (Rear view)
PWS consists of a pair of terminal blocks4 (which are labeled with alpha-numeric
reference “T*”; a number replaces the asterisk “*” to designate the slot numbers.) The left of
Figure 4.5-1 shows the PWS terminal blocks, and the schematic figure for PWS is also shown
on the right.
Terminal screws No. 1 to 4 (FAIL1) and No. 7 to 10 (FAIL2) are provided to output the
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

477
6F2S1905 (0.80)
failure results of the automatic supervision function5. Terminal screws No. 29(+) and 31(−) are
linked to the power supply. Other terminal screws No. 30(+) and 31(–) are also provided for
the power terminal and are used when bus distribution is required or when the safety
improvement of the cable capacity is required because the power cable is thin. Terminal screw
No. 38 and FG, by default, are linked with a short-wire and also terminal screw No. 35 and
terminal screw No. 37. The user should connect the IED case to the earth with the earth screw.
The other terminal screws are not used.
The actual terminal slot location is also found in external connection figures. (See
Appendix: Typical External connection)
Table 4.5-1 PWS specifications

Input voltage Voltage fluctuation
Description
rating6 permissible
Input voltage (110/125Vdc, 220/250Vdc) is available
DC: 110 to 250V DC: 88 to 300V where the voltage varies in ±20% of the rated
voltage (110V× 80% to 250V×120%).
CAUTION
1Note: The connection (triplet lines) between terminal screw No. 35 and terminal screw
No. 37 is made with a short-wire, which is installed by the manufacturer. Read
Appendix: Notes for the dielectric voltage test carefully and follow the instructions
during testing.
2Note: The connection (double lines) between terminal screw 38 and screw labeled “FG” is
made with a short-wire by the manufacturer.
3Note: For installation, the user should connect the case earth screw labeled “E” to the
protective earth of the panel or others using earthing wire, such that its
cross-section is AWG9 or larger.
4Note: The terminal block is made by PHOENIX CONTACT®. This model is designated
“FRONT-MSTB 2.5/20-STF 5.08”. The user can connect a cable to this terminal
directly without a cable ferrule; hence, the recommended cables are AWG12 to
AWG24 and their stripping lengths are 10mm. Use “AI2.5-10BU” ferrule for
AWG14 (cross section 2mm2) or “AI1.5-10BK” ferrule for AWG16 (cross section
1.25mm2) when the user wishes to use a cable ferrule made by PHOENIX
CONTACT®.
5Note: The PWS module monitors dropping the DC voltages; the supervision function can
issue a power failure (for more information about the power failure, see Chapter
Automatic supervision function). The power failure (Power error) is issued when
the DC voltage is less than 85V (default). However, the user can change the
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

478
6F2S1905 (0.80)
threshold for 170V by inserting a shunt connecter (1-2) at JP4 on the PWS module
(see Figure 4.5-2).
6Note: We do not guarantee the PWS operation in the AC power source.
JP4 JP4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Shifting to 170V (typical) Shifting to 85V (typical)

(Position ‘1-2’) (Default position ‘2-3’)
Figure 4.5-2 Alarm threshold for DC voltage dropping on the PWS module
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

479
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Human Machine Interface (HMI)

4.6.1 Outlook
Figure 4.6-1 shows the outlook of human machine interface module (HMI) on the front panel.
The HMI has a screen (standard LCD or large (MIMIC) LCD), LED indicators (#1– #26),
operation keys, function keys (F1–F7), monitoring jacks (Term A/B/C) and a USB receptacle.
The LCD/MIMIC can display information; e.g. IED operation menu, status, setting data,
monitoring, fault records and others. We shall see the menus on the display in Chapter User
interface later. A USB receptacle in B-type is provided for the connection to the PC. Thus, the
user can connect the engineering tools (GR-TIEMS®) or the PLC editor (MULTIPLOG®) with
the IED using the USB receptacle.
LED indicators
(#1–#26) Screen
Indicator label
Operation keys
Function keys
(F1–F7)
Monitoring jacks
(Term A/B/C) USB port
Figure 4.6-1 HMI on front panel
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 480 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.6.2 LED Indicators

The LED indicators #1 and #2 are used to indicate the IED statuses. The others (#3 to #26)
are provided to indicate statuses, which the user wishes to check; the settings or by the PLC
function can control to indicate the statuses. The user can make a new indicator label using
the label maker of the GR-TIEMS®. (See Chapter Engineering tool)
The LED indicators‡ (#3 to #26) are also provided as user-programmable indicators.
Figure 4.6-2 shows the schematic diagrams. Each LED indicator can be lit and controlled
using a logic-gate-switch setting and others. For simplicity, we discusses setting the LED
indicator #3 only, but the user can take account that setting the other LED indicators (#4 to
#26) is the same as the #3. Table 4.6-1 shows the LED indicator settings; Table 4.6-2 shows
the signal monitoring points on all LED indicator logics.
‡Note:Setting menus of the LED indicator are also discussed in Chapter User interface:
I/O setting sub-menu.
(i) Selection of input signals

The LED indicator (#3) is lit by entering signals from other functions; eight ports are provided
for the entering signals, designated as input-signal1 to input-signal8. The user should ensure
one or more DataIDs are set for the input-signal1 to input-signal8. Entering signals are
designated using DataIDs, respectively; the user should set respective DataIDs for the
settings [Input signal1] to [Input signal8].
(ii) Logic gate switch

In the LED indicator logic #3 a logic scheme is provide for the eight entering signals; the
entering signals are grouped by the selection using scheme switch [LOGIC-SW] for which the
user should set either AND, OR or XOR.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 481 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
LED-03
3100031001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #3
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t DRIVER
& AND & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
[LOGIC-SW] Dwell & Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-04
3100041001 LED indicator #4
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer]
& ≥1
[Input signal 2]
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1
[Input signal 3]
& 0 t
&
≥1 OR 0.000-300.000s
[INVERSE-SW] Normal
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-26
31001A100
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #26
& ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Figure 4.6-2 LED indicator logics (#3 to #26)
(iii) Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off signal

For the LED indicator logic #3 the user can use an on-delay timer and an off-delay timer; both
are used to adjust the timing for lighting the LED indicator #3. The user should set their
respective time values for settings [On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(iv) Logic level inversion

On the LED indicator logic #3 the entering signal is inverted by the logic inversion function;
inverting an entering signal is carried out when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch
[INVERSE-SW]. Set Normal for the scheme switch when logic inversion is not required.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 482 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(v) Logic timer switch

The LED indicator #3 can have programmable reset characteristics using scheme switch
[TIMER-SW]. Four types are available: (1) dwell type, (2) delay type, (3) latch type, and (4)
instantaneous type:
Instant type
When required not to have the below characteristics (v)-2, (v)-3, and (v)-4, the user should set
Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
Delay type
If the user requires lighting the LED indicator with a delayed characteristic, the user should
set Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer].
Dwell type
For instance, if the user requires lighting the LED indicator as a one shot pulse, the user
should set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using
setting [Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value
in the setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other
hand, if the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width
will be equal to the width of the input signals.
Latch type
If the user requires lighting the LED indicator to be removed by a reset signal, the user
should set Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW]; the user should set the Data ID of the reset
signal for setting [Reset signal]. Since lighting the LED indicator is cleared with the Data ID,
the user should determine the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the
signal monitoring point for each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
(vi) Selection of the LED color

For the LED indicator #3, color selection of either RED/GREEN/YELLOW is possible using
the setting [Color].
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 483 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 4.6-1 Settings of LED indictors #3 to #26 (Function ID: 201B01))
Default setting
Setting items Range Units Contents
value
LED#3 Color RED / GREEN / YELLOW - LED#3 color selection RED

Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED3 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on LED#3 AND
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on LED#3 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on LED#3 0.00
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of LED#3 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on LED#3 Off
Logic Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell" circuit 0.00
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) - Setting Data ID for "Latch" circuit (No Assigned)
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED#4 (No Assigned)
……….
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED#26 (No Assigned)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 484 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 4.6-2 Signal monitoring points on all LED indicator (Function ID: 201B01)
3100021001 ERROR Error LED
3100011001 IN SERV In service LED
3100031001 LED-03 Output signal of the LED indicator #3
31000A1001 LED-10 Output signal of the LED indicator #10
31000B1001 LED-11 Output signal of the LED indicator #11
31000C1001 LED-12 Output signal of the LED indicator #12
31000D1001 LED-13 Output signal of the LED indicator #13
31000E1001 LED-14 Output signal of the LED indicator #14
31000F1001 LED-15 Output signal of the LED indicator #15
31001A1001 LED-26 Output signal of the LED indicator #26
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 485 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.6.3 Function keys with LEDs

The function keys (F1 to F7) are provided to jump to other menus during the LCD operation;
the jump destinations are already set as factory default (see Table 4.6-3). However, the user
can program the F1 to F7 keys to jump to user-preferred menus using settings. Incidentally,
the user can program the function key so that a binary signal is generated when the user
presses the function key.
Table 4.6-3 Function keys and jump destinations (default)
Function LED lit when
Jump destination as default
Key# pressing
F1 Metering menu Yellow

F2 Fault Record menu Yellow
F3 Event Record1 menu Yellow
F6 Diagnostics menu Yellow
F7 (Not defined) Yellow
For testing, the user can also program to generate binary signals when the user presses
the F1 to F7 keys. The F1 to F7 circuits have LEDs; accordingly, the user can also program to
light the LEDs using the settings.
(i) Screen jump pressing the function key

The user can program the F1 to F7 keys as the user-preferred jump keys. For example, when
the user wishes to use the F1 key to jump to another screen, set Screen jump for scheme
switch [Function] in the F1 key (see Table 4.6-6). We shall see the setting in Chapter User
interface: Setting sub-menu: Configuration of Function keys.
(ii) Binary signal generated pressing the function key

When the user wishes to generate a binary signal upon occurrence of pressing the F1 key, set
Assign Signal for scheme switch [Function] in the F1 key. For instance, if the user wishes to
send a signal generated pressing F1 to the binary output circuit (BO1‡) at the IO#1 slot, set
the Data ID of “FUNC-KEY1(240001 310001730)” for the setting [Input signal 1] of the BO1‡
circuit. Note that the user should set On for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL] when the
connection is done using the setting [Input signal 1]. Figure 4.6-3 shows that a generate signal
is outputted at the FUNC-KEY1 SIGNAL. Table 4.6-7 shows the other FUNC-KEY2 to 7
points. We shall see the setting procedure in Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu:
Signal control function.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 486 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Function key logic for F1 Terminal and

(Function ID: 240001) BO1 circuit at IO_SLOT1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“BO1”
Setting Data ID “F1 Signal designated by
setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112)
SIGNAL” for the Signal to the
device
“FUNC-KEY1” [Input signal 1] [Input signal 2] DRIVER BO1
& ≥1
Pressing the F1 key (240001_ 3100001730)
[Input signal 3]
“BO1-RB”
F1
& [BO1_CPL] On &
[Input signal 4] (200B01_8002001113)
Off
[Input signal 5]
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
“F1 SIGNAL”
Setting Data ID (240001_ 3100001737) PLC connection point in BO1
“BO1_SOURCE”
&
for the [Signal]† 200B01 310200E11D BO1_SOURCE
[Logic] Instant
Toggle
Figure 4.6-3 F1 key connected with the BO1‡

‡Note:The BO1 circuit is used just for an explanation; it is discussed in Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module.
†Note:When the user wishes to inject the signal at the PLC connection point of the
“BO1-SOURCE (200B01 31200E11D at the IO#1 slot)”, the user should set the
BO1-SOURCE (200B01 31200E11D) for the setting [Signal] of the F1 key. Then,
set Off for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL]
The user can select either Toggle or Instant modes for the signal generation using
scheme switch [LOGIC], as shown in Table 4.6-4. Thus, the user can substitute “F1-SIGNAL
(240001 310001737)” for the “FUNC-KEY1 SIGNAL (240001 310001730)”, provided the
Toggle mode is preferred. In the Table 4.6-7 the other FUNC-KEY2 to FUNC-KEY7 are
shown.
Table 4.6-4 Signal mode selection using setting [LOGIC]
Setting Generated signal corresponding to pressing the function key
Pressing Key
Toggle
Binary signal
Pressing Key
Instant
Binary signal
(iii) Lighting LEDs on F1 to F7

Figure 4.6-4 shows the F1 to F7 LED logics. Programing to light the LEDs (F1 to F7) is the
same as the programing of the LED indicators (#3 to #26) (for the programming, see section
4.6.2). As a default, e.g., the “FUNC-KEY1 (240001 310001730)” is set for the setting [Input
signal 1] of the F1 LED logic. The LED-F2 to F7 points are listed in Table 4.6-8.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 487 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
31001B1001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] F1 LED logic
& ≥1
t 0 0 t LED-F1
[Input signal 1] DRIVER
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] 31001C1001 F2 LED logic
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t LED-F2
DRIVER
& AND 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1 & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] & 0 t
[Input signal 3]
[INVERSE-SW]
&
≥1 OR Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] 3100211001 F7 LED logic

& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t LED-F7
DRIVER
& AND 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1 & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] & 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Figure 4.6-4 LED logics on the function keys F1 to F7
Table 4.6-5 Settings of Function keys (Function ID: 240001)
Default setting
value
Screen Jump / Assign Signal /

Function - Operation mode for the F1 key Screen Jump
No Assign
F1
Signal (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the input on F1 key (No Assigned)
Logic Instant / Toggle - Switch for logic-gate operation on F1 Instant
No Assign
F2
……….
No Assign
F7
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 488 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 4.6-6 Settings of LEDs on the Function keys (Function ID: 240001)
Default setting
value
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on F1 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on F1. (No Assigned)
F1 Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on F1. (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on F1 AND
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of F1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on F1 Off
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on F1 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on F1 0.00
……….
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 489 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 4.6-7 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
3100001737 F1 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F1 referring the setting [LOGIC]
3100001730 FUNC-KEY1 Signal generated directly when pressing F1
Table 4.6-8 Signal monitoring points for function LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
31001B1001 LED-F1 Signal generated during pressing the F1 key
31001C1001 LED-F2 Signal generated during pressing the F2 key
31001D1001 LED-F3 Signal generated during pressing the F3 key
31001E1001 LED-F4 Signal generated during pressing the F4 key
31001F1001 LED-F5 Signal generated during pressing the F5 key
3100201001 LED-F6 Signal generated during pressing the F6 key
3100211001 LED-F7 Signal generated during pressing the F7 key
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 490 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.6.4 Monitoring jacks

A monitoring jack including a LED is provided so that the user can monitor a binary signal on
the logic straightforwardly. For example, when the user wishes to monitor the operating state
of a relay function, set the signal number (Data ID) that the user wishes to monitor; then the
user can see lighting the LED when the relay is operated. Using with an oscilloscope, the user
can also observe the binary signal that comes from the monitoring jack; three monitoring
jacks (Term A, B, and C) are available on the front panel.
Table 4.6-9 Output terminals for signal monitoring (No default setting)
Jack Jack name LED Color Remarks
A Term A Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number

B Term B Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number
C Term C Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number
When the user wishes to test the phase-A element the OC1 relay using an oscilloscope,
for example, set the phase-A monitoring point (44001 8000011C20†) for the setting [Term A],
as shown in Figure 4.6-5. Consequently, the OC1 operating signal is outputted to the jack at
the Term A. The LED at the Term A is also lit in step with the output signal. The user can use
to monitor the phase-B and phase-C signals using by settings respective Data IDs for the
[Term B] and [Term C]. We shall see the menus for the Term A to Term C in Chapter User
interface: Setting sub-menu: Signal monitoring screen.
OC function
(Function ID: 440001) Monitoring jack (Function ID: 201301) Jacks and LEDs
Signal designated by
setting [Term A] DRIVER Term Signal to the
440001 8000011C20
A oscilloscope
A
OC1 440001 8100011C21
B “TEST-A”
440001 8200011C22 (201B01_3100221001)
C
Term A LED
setting [Term B] DRIVER Term Signal to the
B oscilloscope
“TEST-B”
(201B01_3100231001)
Term B LED
setting [Term C] DRIVER Term Signal to the
C oscilloscope
“TEST-C”
(201B01_3100241001)
Term C LED
Figure 4.6-5 Monitoring logics A, B and C

†Note:The monitoring point is just selected for the explanation; the user can select a
monitoring point from the relay applications and the control and monitoring
applications. The monitoring points is listed as PLC monitoring points in each
function.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 491 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 4.6-10 Settings of Monitoring jacks (Function ID: 201301)

Setting items Range Units Contents Default setting value
Term A (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term A (No Assigned)
Term B (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term B (No Assigned)
Term C (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term C (No Assigned)
Table 4.6-11 Signal monitoring points for monitoring jack LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
3100221001 TEST-A TEST-A
3100231001 TEST-B TEST-B
3100241001 TEST-C TEST-C
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 492 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.6.5 Operation keys

(i) L/R key
The IED has two LEDs on the L/R key; either LEDs is lit in response to a local mode or a
remote mode. Lighting the LED is instructed by the LOCRMT function. Table 4.6-12 shows
the signal monitoring points on the L/R LEDs.
Table 4.6-12 Signal monitoring points for L/R LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
3100251001 LOC LED Local
3100261001 REM LED Remote
(ii) Operation keys except L/R key

Like in the function keys (F1 to F7), the operation keys can provide signals when pressing the
keys; the user can monitor the signals at the signal monitoring points in Table 4.6-13.
Table 4.6-13 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
3100081730 CANCEL Key situation of CANCEL
31000E1730 CLEAR Key situation of CLEAR
31000D1730 CLOSE Key situation of CLOSE
31000F1730 DOWN Key situation of DOWN
3100071730 ENTER Key situation of ENTER
3100091730 HELP Key situation of HELP
3100111730 LEFT Key situation of LEFT
31000A1730 LOC/REM Key situation of LOC/REM
31000C1730 OPEN Key situation of OPEN
3100121730 RIGHT Key situation of RIGHT
3100101730 UP Key situation of UP
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 493 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Clock function
Clock function (or time function) provides the time information for recording upon occurrence
of the fault; it includes a synchronization function when the reference clock is available out of
the IED. The clock is operated referring the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC‡) when the
UTC is selected; the clock can run in accordance with the user’s time zone and summer
time(DST)† by referring the UTC when the time zone and the DST are set. The explanation is
also found in Chapter User interface: Time sub-menu.
†Note:In other words, it is called “daylight saving time (DST)”. For setting, see section
4.7.5.
‡Note:For example, the Internet and World Wide Web standards run in the UTC. For
more information, see section 4.7.4.
4.7.1 Clock setting

The user can set the time using the time sub-menu as shown in Figure 4.7-1. The user also
can set the time using the GR-TIEMS†.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 4.7-1 Time sub-menu in Clock menu

†Note:Make the calibration the when the clock is set using the GR-TIMES. This is
because the transmission time is required from the PC to the IED.
4.7.2 Selection of date and time formats

The user can select user-preferred date/time format; setting [Data_fmt] is provided for the
selection of the format. For example, ‘March 24th 2014 10:48’ can be displayed when the
format “DDMMYYYY” is selected.
 “2014-03-24 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “YYYYMMDD”.
 “03-24-2014 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “MMDDYYYY”.
 “24-03-2014 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “DDMMYYYY”.
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Figure 4.7-2 Setting screen of Display format
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 494 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.7.3 Time Synchronization

The synchronization function can run when a synchronized signal is provided for respective
IEDs; the user should select one of the following synchronization methods using the setting
[Time_Sync_Src]:
 SNTP method
 IRIG-B method
 Binary Input (BI) method
(i) Synchronization using SNTP

Example of SNTP synchronization
The SNTP method is possible when IEDs connect with time-servers. Figure 4.7-3 exemplifies
two servers are connected with the IEDs using the LAN.
Time server1 Time server2
LAN
………….
IED_1 IED_2 IED_n
Figure 4.7-3 Two time servers connected on the LAN
Setting procedure
The user should make the following steps in respective IEDs.
1) Set SNTP for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [SNTP].
2) Set the address of a time server using settings [Server1]. The settings [Server2],
[Server3], and [Server4] are provided for other time-servers.
3) Check that the SNTP is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 4.7-4.
4) Check to see that the time zone and the DST are set correctly (see 4.7.4 and 4.7.5).
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] > Check “SNTP” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
SNTP
Figure 4.7-4 Time setting for SNTP

Table 4.7-1 Settings for the SNTP synchronization
Setting item Range Contents Setting example Notes
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method SNTP
SNTP Off /On Operation of SNTP ()On
Server1 000.000.000.000–255.255.255.255 Setting for Time server 1 197.1.23.11
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 495 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Synchronization using IRIG-B

Example of IRIG-B synchronization
The IRIG-B method is possible when a synchronization signal in the IRIG-B format is
provided. The synchronization signal is transferred using the IRIG-B000 module†.
IED
IRIG-B000†
Clock
10:00 1/2
Signal [Time] +
A1 2012-11-21 10:00:05
IRIG-B signal
[Format]
generator Unit GND
A3 YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
IRIG-B
Figure 4.7-5 IED connected with the signal generator unit using IRIG-B000 module
†Note:See Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module .
Setting procedure
1) Set IRIG-B for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [IRIG-SYNC].
2) Check that the IRIG-B is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 4.7-6.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
Check “IRIG-B” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
IRIG-B
Figure 4.7-6 Time setting for IRIG-B
Setting year in IRIG-B

When the IRIG-B data is generated in the IEEE C37.118 / IRIG-B000 format, the user should
set On for setting [USE_BCDYEAR]. Conversely, when the IRIG-B data with absence the
C37.118† is generated, Off should be set for the setting [USE_BCDYEAR].
†Note: “Year” is informed from the IED clock itself when the C37.118 is absent.
Setting UTC/local time

When the IRIG-B data is generated in the UTC†, set Off for the setting [USE_LOCALTIME].
Conversely, when the IRIG-B data is generated in the local time‡, set On for setting
[USE_LOCALTIME]; set Off for the setting [IS_UTC_base].
†Note:We shall see the settings of the UTS in section 4.7.4.
‡Note:In the IRIG-B signal generator unit, the DST settings should be corresponded to
the DST settings of the IED. We shall see the DST settings in section 4.7.5.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 496 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 4.7-2 Settings for the IRIG-B Time synchronization

Setting
example
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method IRIG-B
IRIG-SYNC Off /On Operation of IRIG-B On
USE_BCDYEAR Off / On Selection of IEEE C37.118/IRIG-B000 Off
USE_LOCALTIME Off / On Operation in the local time Off
(iii) Synchronization using BI signal

When accurate1Hz square-wave can be supplied as a reference clock, the clock function can
make the time synchronization. The 1Hz square-wave is transferred using a binary input
circuit (BI).
Example of time synchronization via BI circuit

Figure 4.7-7 exemplifies that the 1Hz square-wave is provided via the BI1 circuit†.
IED
BI1
BI1A (200B01 8001001111)
1
2 BI1
3
4 BI2
5
6 BI3
7
8 BI4
9
10 BI5 Setting [BI_ID]
11
12 BI6
13
14 BI7
15
16 BI8
17
18 BI9 Clock
21
22 BI10
23
24 BI11
25
26 BI12
27
Signal generator 28 BI13
29
30 BI14
31
32 BI15
1Hz squire wave 33
34 BI16
35
36 BI17
37
38 BI18
IO#1
Figure 4.7-7 IED connected with the signal generator via BI module
†Note:The BI1 circuit is just used for the explanation; hence, an actual BI circuit should
be selected in accordance with wiring cables. For more information of the BI circuit,
see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 497 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting procedure
1) Set BI for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [BI-SYNC].
2) Check BI is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 4.7-8.
3) Set a Data_ID for setting [BI_ID]. For example, as shown in the Figure 4.7-7, when
the user wishes to inject the signal at the BI1 on the IO#1 slot, the user should set
BI1(200B01 8001001111) for the setting [BI_ID].
4) Set a time adjuster for the setting [SYNC ADJ]. For example, set a value (e.g.,
−0.050s) for setting [SYNC ADJ]. The setting is used when the clock function should
be synchronized before reaching the 1Hz square-wave due to the propagation or the
operating time on the BI circuit.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
BI
Check “BI ” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
Figure 4.7-8 Time setting for BI
Table 4.7-3 Setting items for the BI Time synchronization

Setting item Range Contents Setting example Notes
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method BI
BI-SYNC Off /On Operation of BI On
BI_ID [Preferred ID] Signal monitoring point 200B01 8001001111
−：Leading the clock
SYNC ADJ −0.050 to +0.050 Time adjust factor (in sec.) 0.000
+：Delaying the clock
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 498 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.7.4 Setting time zone

When the clock should run in the UTC, the user should set On for the setting [IS_UTC_base].
Additionally, the user should set the time zone† when the time should be displayed in the
Local standard time. The time zone is divided in every 15 minutes; the user can set it using
0.25 units (i.e., 15 min = 0.25 unit). For example, if that the IED is used in Venezuela
(UTC-04:30), the user should set “−4.50” for the setting, as shown Figure 4.7-9.
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
-4.50hour
Figure 4.7-9 Setting screen of Time zone

Table 4.7-4 Example time offsets and locations
Time offset† Example locations
UTC−10:00 United States (Hawaii)
UTC−09:00 United States (Anchorage)
UTC−08:00 United States (PST)
UTC−06:00 Canada , Costa Rica, El Salvador, Ecuador, Mexico, United States (CST)
UTC−05:00 Brazil (Acre), Colombia, Cuba, Jamaica, Panama, Peru, United States (EST)
UTC−04:30 Venezuela
UTC−04:00 Bolivia, Brazil, Dominican Republic, Puerto Rico, Barbados
UTC−03:00 Argentina, Brazil (Bahia, Pernambuco), Chile
UTC−02:00 Brazil (Fernando de Noronha)
UTC±00:00 United kingdom, Iceland, Senegal, Saint Helena, Mali
UTC+01:00 Germany, Hungary, Italy, France
UTC+02:00 Egypt, Estonia, Finland
UTC+03:00 Ethiopia, Iraq, Kenya, Madagascar, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Turkey
UTC+04:00 Armenia, Azerbaijan, Oman, Seychelles, United Arab Emirates
UTC+05:30 India, Sri Lanka
UTC+07:00 Western Indonesia, Thailand, Vietnam, Cambodia, Laos
UTC+08:00 China, Malaysia, Philippines, Australia (Western Australia)
UTC+09:00 Japan, South Korea
UTC+10:00 Australia (Queensland)
UTC+12:00 New Zealand
†Note:Time zone is expressed in the difference between UTC and the local standard time.
Table 4.7-5 Setting time zone

Setting
example
IS_UTC_base On / Off Selection of either the UTC or the local time On
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 499 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.7.5 DST setting (Summer time setting)

When the summer time (DST) is applied, the user should set the beginning and the ending
dates of the DST in the clock function. The user should set On for the setting [Summer time]
for DST.
Note: The clock function is not designed for particular DSTs such as they are depending
on the religious events and the astronomy.
(i) DST set by the day (Mon to Sun) of week

For example, when the DST starts at 01:00 a.m. on Sunday of the fifth week in March and it
ends at 2:00 a.m. on Sunday of the fourth week in October, the user has the following settings.
Note that transposing the calendar is required, as shown in Figure 4.7-10; accordingly the
first of the month is located at the first row and the first column of the transposed calendar.
Beginning of the DST at 01:00 a.m. in Mar. 29 Ending of the DST at 02:00 a.m. in Oct. 25
March October
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
1 1 2 3 4
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 26 27 28 29 30
30 31
Transposed Transposed
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
Setting 3 for the [Start_Month] Setting 10 for the [End_Month]

Setting 5 for the [Start_Week] Setting 4 for the [End_Week]
Setting Sun for the [Start_Wday] Setting Sun for the [End_Wday]
Setting 1 for the [Start_Hour] Setting 2 for the [End_Hour]
Figure 4.7-10 DST setting examples by the day of week
(ii) DST set by the day (1st or 15th) of month

For example, when the DST starts at 01:00 p.m. on the first day in March and it ends at 3:00
p.m. on the middle day in October; the user has the following settings.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 500 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
Beginning of the DST Ending of the DST

at 01:00 p.m. in Mar. 1 at 03:00 p.m. in Oct. 15
Setting 3 for the [Start_Month] Setting 10 for the [End_Month]

Setting 1 for the [Start_Week] Setting 3 for the [End_Week]
Setting – for the [Start_Wday] Setting – for the [End_Wday]
Setting 13 for the [Start_Hour] Setting 15 for the [End_Hour]
Figure 4.7-11 DST setting examples by the day (1st or 15th) of month
(iii) Time shift

After setting the DST, the clock is forwarded by 1 hour at the DST start; the clock is backed by
1 hour at the DST end.
Table 4.7-6 DST settings
Setting
example
Summer time On / Off Enabling DST operation On
Start_Month 1 to 12 Set the beginning of DST in the month 3
Start_Week 1 to 5 Set the beginning of DST in the week 5

–, Sun, Mon,
Start_Wday Tue, Wed, Thu, Set the beginning of DST in the day Sun
Fri, Sat
Start_Hour 0 to 23 Set the beginning of DST in 24 hour-clock 1
End_Month 1 to 12 Set the end of DST in the month 10
End_Week 1 to 5 Set the end of DST in the week 5

–, Sun, Mon,
End_Wday Tue, Wed, Thu, Set the end of DST in the day Sun
Fri, Sat
End_Hour 0 to 23 Set the beginning of DST in 24 hour-clock 2
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 501 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4.7.6 Setting
Setting of CLOCK (Function ID: 200301)
Default setting
value
Timezone -14.00 - 14.00 hour Time zone 0.00
--- / SNTP / BI /
TimeSyncSrc - Time sync source SNTP
MODBUS / IRIG-B
YYYYMMDD /
Date_fmt MMDDYYYY / - YMD/MDY/DMY YYYYMMDD
DDMMYYYY
Date_delimiter -///. - - or / or . -
Time_delimiter :/. - : or period :
Sec_delimiter ./, - . or , .
SummerTime Off / On - Summer time enable Off
IS_UTC_base Off / On - Is setting value base on UTC? On
Start_Month 1 - 12 - Start month 3
Start_Week 1-5 - Start week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue. /
Start_Wday - Start day of week Sun.
Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / Sat.
Start_Hour 0 - 23 - Start hour 1
End_Month 1 - 12 - End month 10
End_Week 1-5 - End week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue. /
End_Wday - End day of week Sun.
Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / Sat.
End_Hour 0 - 23 - End hour 1
Setting of SNTP_SYNC (Function ID: 200A01)

Default setting
value
SNTP Off / On - Enabling SNTP synchronization On
Server1 0 - 255 - IP address#1 0. 0. 0. 0
Setting of BI_SYNC (Function ID: 202001)

Default setting
value
BI SYNC Off / On - BI sync switch Off
BI_ID [Preferred ID] - Source BI Data ID
SYNC ADJ -0.050 to 0.050 s Time adjust factor 0.000
Setting of IRIG_SYNC (Function ID: 202101)

Default setting
value
IRIG SYNC Off / On - IRIGB sync switch Off
USE_BCDYEAR Off / On - Use BCD year code Off
USE_LOCALTIME Off / On - Use local time Off
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 502 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Group setting for protection functions

With regard to protection functions (i.e., OC, EF, and others), eight groups are available for
settings, as shown in Figure 4.8-1; different values for the relays can be set as per
circumstances such as operation conditions and others. Note that changing the group cannot
be not carried out instantly.
Settings
Protection (Relay)
Group1 setting
OC
EF
OV
UV
THM
TRC
Group2 setting
OC
EF
OV
UV
THM
TRC
Group8 setting
OC
EF
OV
UV
THM
TRC
Figure 4.8-1 Eight groups for protection settings
(i) Changing group number by menu operation

The user can change the group number using the menu† on the IED screen. See the Chapter
User interface: Setting sub-menu.
(ii) Changing group number by user-programming

Another changing method is provided by programing PLC logics (For more information about
PLC programing, see the Chapter PLC function.) Figure 4.8-2 exemplifies a PLC logic:
changing group2 from group1 is performed while BI1 circuit is energized. The group setting
function “Setting (Function ID 201400)” has a signal reception point ‘PLC_Group_ENUM’ in
UNIT type; thus changing the group is performed when either numbers (1 to 8) enters at the
signal reception point. The example logic, designed for changing to group2 from group1,
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 503 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
consists of a binary input circuit (BI1), a number generation function (‘Binary selection’
provided in basic functions of the PLC editor), and the signal reception point. That is, when
the B1 switch is closed, a signal enters the BI1 circuit and is carried to the Binary selection;
accordingly the Binary selection, which is programmed to generate a group number ‘2’ in
UNIT when signal ‘1’ is injected in BOOL(BIT), can generates and inject the group number ‘2’
at the ‘PLC_Group_ENUM’. Consequently, the Setting function (201400) starts change the
group from number ‘1’ to ‘2’. Note that changing is only performed during the BI1 is closed in
the example logic; hence, the setting number goes back to ‘1’ when the BI1 is open.
GR200 IED
Binary selection
(+) (–)
IO_SLOT1 (200B01)
BI1 8001001110 Entering → Leaving 201400 314000E1A0 PLC_Group_ENUM Operation of
BI1 changing
‘1’ in BOOL ‘2’ in UNIT
‘0’ in BOOL ‘1’ in UNIT
BI2 8101011110
BI2
PLC basic-function PLC basic-function A group number enters

Binary input circuits BI1 and BI2
(Flip-Flop) (SEL) to “Setting function (FunctionID: 201400)”
at IO#1 (IO_SLOT1)
2 3
2
SEL DOUT_UNIT
1
DIN_BOOL RS
Unit#16#201400 FID ST
DO Q1 G
FID SET Unit#16#31 DTYPE
RESET1 Unit#16#1 IN0 Unit#16#4000E1A0 DID
DTYPE ST
IN1 DI
DID Unit#16#2
1
DIN_BOOL
FID DO
DTYPE ST
DID
Figure 4.8-2 Example for changing a group setting4

1Note: Function block for the binary input circuit (Binary input FB) is provided in User
library of PLC editor. See the Chapter PLC editing in Basic manual
“Programmable Logic Controller and PLC editor” attached the PLC software.
2Note: The SEL and RS functions are the basic functions. In the logic, when signal ‘1’
enters the SEL function, value ‘2’ is generated. For more information, see the help
menu on the PLC editor.
3Note: For your reference, changing to group3 is performed when value ‘3’ enters. In other
words, values ‘1’ to ‘8’ correspond to ‘group1’ to ‘group8’, respectively.
4Note: This example is designed to change ‘group1’ to ‘group2’ or ‘group2’ to ‘group1’.
Figure 4.8-3 exemplifies that selecting a group among eight groups is required by the
usage of three BI circuits (i.e., Group 1→Group2, Group3,… Group8).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 504 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Binary input circuits BI1 to BI3 A group number enters

at IO#3 (IO_SLOT1) PLC basic-function PLC basic-function
to “Setting function
(Ondelay) (SEL)
(Function ID: 201400)”
BI3_1
DIN_BOOL TON
UDINT#16#200B03 FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST
UDINT#16#01001111 Delay time# PT ET
DID ADD
XX ms
BI3_2
DIN_BOOL TON DOUT_UNIT_1
UDINT#16#200B03 FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT MUL
DOUT_UNIT
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST Unit#16#201400 FID ST
Delay time# PT ET
UDINT#16#01011111 DID UDINT#16#2 Unit#16#31 DTYPE
XX ms
Unit#16#4000E1A0 DID
DI
BI3_3
DIN_BOOL TON
UDINT#16#200B03 ADD ADD
FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT
MUL
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST
UDINT#16#01021111 DID Delay time# PT ET
XX ms UDINT#16#4
UDINT#16#1
Figure 4.8-3 Logic for changing a group setting
(iii) Setting
Setting_PF (Function ID: 201400)
Un Default setting
its value
Active Group 1 to 8 – Selection of a setting group number 1
(iv) Signal (Data ID)

314000E1A0 PLC_Group_ENUM Reception for setting group number

3200001001 ACT_GRP
3010011001 COM_CHG
3010031001 CTRL_CHG
3010021001 PRO_CHG
3010001001 SYS_CHG
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 505 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
5 Engineering tool
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 506 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Overview of GR-TIEMS
When engineering, monitoring, record viewing, and test support functions are required in the
IED, the user can handle these advanced and integrated functions using GR-Series Toshiba
IED Engineering and Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS). The GR-TIEMS should be installed
into a PC prior to engineering. After that, the user can view the IED states (Table 5.1-1) on a
PC screen connected with the IED. The user can also program the IED using the GR-TIEMS.
Figure 5.1-1 GR-TIEMS® screen on PC
Table 5.1-1 Information on the GR-TIEMS

Information Displaying format
Display of voltage and current waveform Oscillograph, vector display
Symmetrical component analysis On arbitrary time span
Harmonic analysis On arbitrary time span
Frequency analysis On arbitrary time span
The GR-TIEMS is software to retrieve and analyze power system quantities, fault and
event records. The user can change the settings in the respective IEDs when the PC is
connected with the IED via a USB or a LAN. For more information in the GR-TIEMS
operations, see a separate manual “Operation manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082)”.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 507 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Connection
The user can connect the GR-TIEMS with the IED using either the LAN or the USB, as shown
in Figure 5.2-1.
IED
LAN
USB Cable
Personal Computer
Figure 5.2-1 GR-TIEMS connected with IED
Common tools
(i) Project management
Project files are required to engage sub-engineering tolls in the GR-TIEMS. The user can
manage to read/write the project file of the IED using the project management function. The
user can also see the contents of the project files.
(ii) Comparison
When the user wishes to get the comparison between respective IEDs, using the compare
function the user can get the comparison data about Settings, Disturbance record binary
signals, PLCs, Interlock, Large LCD (MIMIC)†, IEC61850, and IEC60870-5-103 data†.
(iii) Pocket label creator

The user can create the name label of LEDs and Function keys for the IED front panel using a
pocket label sheet, which is provided together with the IED. For more information with regard
the LEDs and Function keys, see Chapter Technical description: Human machine interface.
(iv) Logging
The user can view the recorded data with regard to the logging date/time. As the user can also
find operation recorded when an operator/engineer logs into the IED, analyzing a problem is
possible when an error is detected during the IED operations.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 508 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Monitoring tools
The user can monitor status and measurement value obtained in the IED using the
monitoring tools. All signals monitored are tabulated in the monitoring list dialog. When the
user wishes to monitor a signal, select a signal in the monitoring list dialog after the operation
of the drag-drop on the monitoring window. The monitoring tools can generate an exporting
layout file in the CSV; it also can obtain the layout file in the CSV.
Record tools
(i) Fault record
Fault records are including measuring information before and after the occurrence of the
faults. Accordingly, the user can see information before the fault so that the user can analyze
the fault more precisely. The user can select a fault from the recorded lists; the user can save
it into the fault information file in the CSV. The user can also view the fault records when the
exported data file in the CSV are retrieved into the IED.
(ii) Disturbance record

Disturbance record is a kind of module information measured so that the user can see them in
several graphs: an oscilloscope chart, a harmonic graph, a 3D harmonic graph, a vector in
relay operation analysis (ROA) chart. The user can see disturbance records when the
disturbance records file in COMTRADE are provided. The user can also save disturbance
records into the COMTRADE file.
(iii) Event list

The event list is recorded events information in the IED. The user can generate events
information file in the CSV; the user can retrieve events data file into the IED to view when
the file is in the CSV.
Note: In the IED the date and time is clocked in the coordinated universal time (UTC)
when the clock is selected to operate in UTC. In the record tools within the PC the
date and time is treated in the UTC. Notice that the time in the UTC is converted
for the local time when the recording time is displayed on the PC. For the clock
operation if the user selects neither the UTC, the time zone or the daylight saving
time (the summer time), displaying incorrect time may result in between the IED
and the PC. For more information about the clock and time, see Chapter Technical
description: Clock function.
Generic configuration tools

(i) Setting (general setting for the relay and controlling functions)
The user can make the IED settings on the GR-TIEMS; the IED settings are transferred into
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 509 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
the IED by the connection between the IED and the GR-TIEMS.
(ii) Setting I/O

The user can see and make the setting with regard to binary input/output circuits (BIO),
LEDs using the setting I/O function. For more information about the BIO, and the LED, see
chapter Technical description.
(iii) Setting event list

The user can set information with regard to the event of an IED using the event list function.
(iv) Interlock configurator

The user can program conditions for executing to control the primary equipment using the
interlock (ILK) configurator. For example, controlling a circuit breaker (open and closing) is
significant; therefore note not induce mal-operations caused by improper conditions;
otherwise a severe fault/blackout results in. The ILK configurator can provides the user to
program conditions concerning the status of the power system. For more information of the
ILK, see chapter Control and monitoring application.
IEC 61850 configuration tool

The user can configure conversion data for the IEC61850 communication†, provided the IED
exchanges the data with the SAS. The user also configures a logical device, a logical node,
Goose publish information, and Goose subscribe information. For setting and configuration
for the IEC61850 communication see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850
communication”.
†Note:The configuration of the IEC 61850 standard is dependent on the software and the
hardware configurations in the IED. Thereby, the user should understand that the
operations of the GR-TIEMS are in response to hardware/software configurations
(i.e., the configurations has been determined when the IED model is selected using
the ordering code, which is described in Appendix: Ordering code)
MIMIC configuration tool

When the IED has a large LCD†, the user can create user-preferred screens using the MIMIC
configurator. The large LCD will be able to display measurement values, diagrams and others
after the configuration. Note that the MIMIC is not available when the standard LCD is
equipped for the IED.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 510 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
6 PLC function
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 511 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Overview of PLC function

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) software is used for configuring the Inputs/outputs
(I/Os), alarms, indications, recording and others. PLC logic consist of “timers”, “flip-flops”, and
logic gates “AND, OR, XOR, NOT”. The user can configure PLC-logic using the PLC editor
(MULTIPROG®), which should be installed in the user’s PC. Figure 6.1-1 shows the screen for
the PLC editor.
Figure 6.1-1 PC screen of MULTIPROG®

Note: To handle the PLC editor on the PC, the user shall purchase a software license
(EP-261; see Appendix: Ordering) from Toshiba sales representative. For more
information of PLC and MULTIPROG®, see separate manual Basic manual:
Programmable Logic Controller and PLC editor (6F2S1904)).
PLC data error

The Automatic supervision reports the error information when an error occurs in PLC logic.
The error information† is shown in the Monitoring sub-menu on the IED screen. See Chapter
Automatic supervision: Supervision tasks: Supervision of data in PLC function.
PLC data error 1/1
10:48
[Minor error]
[00000006] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
PLC error code†
Figure 6.2-1 Error code at 1st row and 1st column on Monitoring sub-menu
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 512 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
PLC driver
Figure 6.3-1 illustrates that a function logic, modules, and the 61850 communication are
linked with the PLC logic; a PLC driver is provided as one of coupling methods between. One
hundred and twenty-eight PLC drivers are provided in the function “PLC_DRV (Function ID:
230301)”; the PLC drivers are termed “BIT_xx_x”.
CPU1 board Binary IO module

Binary output circuits
PLC logic PLC_DRV
configured by
BIT_xx_x
the user
HMI module
LEDs
PLC
61850 communicaion
Mapping for
IEC 61850 communication
Figure 6.3-1 Communication between boards operated by the BIT
Table 6.3-1 PLC drivers

 Monitoring point at PLC Driver
PLC_DRV (Function ID: 230301)
Name Element ID Description
BIT_00_0 8810101BB0 (not used in the default configuration)
BIT_00_2 8A10101BB2 (not used in the default configuration)
BIT_00_3 8B10101BB3 (not used in the default configuration)
BIT_00_4 8C10101BB4 (not used in the default configuration)
BIT_00_5 8D10101BB5 (not used in the default configuration)
BIT_00_6 8E10101BB6 (not used in the default configuration)
BIT_00_7 8F10101BB7 (not used in the default configuration)
BIT_01_2 8210101BBA (not used in the default configuration)
BIT_01_3 8310101BBB (not used in the default configuration)
BIT_01_4 8410101BBC (not used in the default configuration)
BIT_01_5 8510101BBD (not used in the default configuration)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 513 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

BIT_01_6 8610101BBE (not used in the default configuration)
BIT_01_7 8710101BBF (not used in the default configuration)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 514 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 515 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 516 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
7 Recording function
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 517 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
The recording function consists of three recording features: (1) Fault recorder, (2) Event
recorder, and (3) Disturbance recorder. The fault recorder collects the information about the
power system quantities when a fault occurs. The event recorder groups state information
when the changes are detected. The disturbance recorder is designed to memory the various
quantities—numerical analog data and logic data (binary data)—from the monitoring
function and the BIO modules; it is possible to analyze the disturbance using the engineering
tool (GR-TIMES), which can draw several chronological waves.
Fault recorder
During the fault, the fault recorder can memory reasons by equipment failures/operation
states, system information etc. It commences by injecting a signal coming from the TRC
alarm-signal generation logic, but is also started by a trigger provided by PLC function. The
fault recorder captures the following items for each fault:
 Date and time at the fault
 Tripped phase information
 Operating mode information
 FL calculation result (if the FL function operates)
 Evolving faults (if the ARC function operates)
 Fault and pre-fault quantities
7.1.1 Types of recording information

The fault recorder can cyclically memory past eight faults; the oldest memory will be erased
cyclically if another fault occurs. The memorized information has 1ms accuracy. If a fault
occurs, the fault recorder is directed to operate to memory operating modes etc. about the
fault.
(i) Date and time at fault

The date and time at the fault is recorded. The date and time information is provided by the
clock function (see Chapter Technical description: Clock function).
(ii) Tripped phase information

Information about tripped phases (i.e., faulted phases) are recorded using the recording
identifiers (‘OPT-PHASE-A,B,C, and -N’ signals), which the TRC function provides.
(iii) Mode information

At the occurrence of a fault, the protection functions gives the fault recorder the reasons of
tripping; the reasons are brought using operation identifiers† and logical signals‡. The fault
recorder can have up to 192 of all identifiers and signals in the IED. The operation identifiers
are chosen using the settings [OP Mode ID1] to [OP Mode ID128]. The settings [OP Mode
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 518 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
ID201] to [OP Mode ID264] are used for general purposes to record the logical signals.
†Note:A number of the operation identifiers are provided by the protection functions. For
example, the ‘OC1-OPT-A’ operation identifier is used to identify the pickup in the
first element of the overcurrent function (OC1) in phase-A. See respective
protection functions in Chapter Relay application.
‡Note:64 logical signals are selectable for recording. For example in this purpose, the
user may choose an operation signal on the circuits of the BIO modules (BIOs).
(iv) FL calculation result

The location of the fault occurrence is recoded if the fault locator function (FL) operates.
(v) Evolving faults

The fault recorder is able to record evolving faults† during the operation of the ARC function.
Strikes number for reclosing CB is also recorded.
†Note:The evolving faults are found during the ‘ARC_IN_PROG’ signal being generating.
For more information, see Chapter Relay application: Autoreclose.
(vi) Fault quantities and pre-fault-quantities

Several quantity items (amplitude and phase angle of current, etc.) are memorized in the fault
recorder, as shown in Table 7.1-1. Quantities just before the fault are also memorized. The
pre-fault quantities are captured 10 seconds before tripping, but it is possible to take back
longer using the setting [Pre-Fault time].
Table 7.1-1 Recording quantities before the fault and at the fault
Abbreviations Displayed quantities
Ia, Ib, Ic,
Iab, Ibc, Ica,

Current in phase, phase-to-phase , symmetrical, residual currents
Ie (2)
I1, I2, I0 (1)
Iem(2) Residual current in the other side of the parallel line
Va, Vb, Vc
Vab, Vbc, Vca Voltage in phase, phase-to-phase, and symmetrical
V1, V2, V0(1)
Vs, Vs2 One or two reference (busbar) voltages
Ra, Rb, Rc ,Rab, Rbc, Rca

Impedance and reactance components at Fault
Xa, Xb, Xc ,Xab, Xbc, Xca
THM-Capacity(3) Rate of thermal capacity in %

1Note: Terms ‘I0 (i.e., 3I0)’ and ‘V0 (i.e., 3V0)’ are calculated using three-phase quantities.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 519 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2Note: The ‘Ie’ and ‘Iem’ are taken usually with corresponding ‘Ie’ and ‘Iem’ circuits of the
VCT.
3Note: Those recoding items are provided by the special software, which is selected using
the ‘Software selection’ in the ordering.
7.1.2 Screen information

Figure 7.1-1 illustrates the information displayed on the IED screen†, which can display up to
eight fault records (#1 to #8). Figure 7.1-2 illustrates the structure of the first fault record#1.
The line○
c indicates the tripped phase. The lines○
d show how tripping occurred. The lines○
f
have the information about evolving faults, which is able to memory up to 32 developing
faults. Quantitates when the fault occurred are shown below messages○ h .
g ○
Fault Record Fault Record#1

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/222
#1 2012-07-25 > 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223 10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 > Phase AB
01:15:55.018 OC1, OC2, OC3, OC4
#3 2012/07/21 > SOTF–OC
13:11:29.621 FL 0.0km
List of fault records (#1 to #8) Details of #1 information
Figure 7.1-1 Information of the fault recorder displayed on the IED screen
†Note:For more screen information, see Chapter User interface: Record sub-menu. For
more information about the FL calculation, see Chapter Relay application:
Single-end fault locator.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 520 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Fault Record#1 ○a Record Number (#1)

11:12 1/222
2012-07-25 ○b Date and Time at Fault (YYYY-MM-DD)
10:48:21.223
Phase AB ○c Tripped phase information
OC1, OC2, OC3, OC4 ○d Mode information
SOTF–OC
Screen scroll down FL 0.0km ○e FL calculation results
0% OB/NC
2012-07-25 ○f Detail information about evolving faults
10:48:22.421 ARC Shot#1 issued Deta
ARC-S1
2012-07-25
10:48:22.835 Evolving fault#1; detection made by OC1 relay
OC1
2012-07-25
10:48:23.208 ARC Shot#2 issued
ARC-S2
2012-07-25
10:48:23.649 Evolving fault#2; abandoning to reclose CB (i.e., Final Trip)
OC1, FT
Fault values ○g Fault quantities
Ia
1234.56kVa 123.4deg
Ib
1234.56kVa 123.4deg
Ic
1234.56kVa 123.4deg
PreFault values ○
h Pre-fault quantities
Ia
1234.56kVa 123.4deg
Ib
1234.56kVa 123.4deg
Ic
1234.56kVa 123.4deg
Figure 7.1-2 Screen structure about the information #1.
7.1.3 Setup for the fault recorder

(i) Operation identifiers (ID1–ID128)
The user can select the operation identifies arbitrarily using the settings [OP Mode ID1] etc.
For example, when the operation result with regard to the overcurrent relay element (i.e.,
OC1 in phase-A) shall be recorded, choose the operated signal ‘OC1-OPT-A (440001
800011B68)” and set it for the [OP Mode ID1]. Remember to program the displaying name
about the OC1-OPT-A using the setting [OP Mode Name1] (e.g., “OC1-A relay OP-ed”). Note
that the length of the displaying name should be less than 18 letters. The user should find
blanks in the setting list, because several IDs have been already set.
(ii) Logical signals (ID201–ID264)

Wishing to record a logical level ‘1 (TRUE)’ or ‘0 (FALSE)’ on the circuits, the user can pick the
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 521 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
logical signal using settings the [OP Mode ID265] etc. For example, the user wishes to recode
the output level of the binary input circuit#1 (BO1) at the IO#1 slot, set its PLC monitoring
point ‘200B01 8002001112’ for the setting [OP Mode ID265]; set the displaying name using the
[OP Mode Name265].
(iii) Additional triggers for the recording

Wishing to start the fault recorder except for the trip instruction, the user can use the PLC
connection points ‘ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1’ to ‘ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG4’, respectively.
(iv) Time setting for Pre-fault

The instant before the trip is programmable using the setting [Pre-Fault Time] among 10s,
50s, 100s, 200s, 300s.
(v) Unit setting for the quantities

To change the units of power quantities, go to the metering function discussed in Chapter
Metering function.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 522 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 7.1-2 Default settings (ID1–ID128 and ID201–ID264)

Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection
Data IDs Screen names points Data IDs Screen names points
[OP Mode ID1] Not assigned [OP Mode Name1] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID97] Not assigned [OP Mode Name97] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID8] 430001 8000011B23 [OP Mode Name8] Z1S Z1S-OPT [OP Mode ID104] Not assigned [OP Mode Name104] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID9] 430001 8100061B23 [OP Mode Name9] Z1XS Z1XS-OPT [OP Mode ID105] Not assigned [OP Mode Name105] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID14] 430001 8300001B2B [OP Mode Name14] SOTF-ZS SOTF-ZS-TRIP [OP Mode ID110] Not assigned [OP Mode Name110] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID15] 431001 8000011B69 [OP Mode Name15] Z1G Z1G-OPT [OP Mode ID111] Not assigned [OP Mode Name111] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID16] 431001 8100061B69 [OP Mode Name16] Z1XG Z1XG-OPT [OP Mode ID112] Not assigned [OP Mode Name112] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID21] 431001 8300001B2B [OP Mode Name21] SOTF-ZG SOTF-ZG-TRIP [OP Mode ID117] Not assigned [OP Mode Name117] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID22] 436001 8300001B76 [OP Mode Name22] DISC DISCAR-OPT [OP Mode ID118] Not assigned [OP Mode Name118] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID23] 436001 8300001B72 [OP Mode Name23] DISC_WI DISCAR_WITRIP [OP Mode ID119] Not assigned [OP Mode Name119] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID24] 437001 8300001B77 [OP Mode Name24] DEFC DEFCAR-OPT [OP Mode ID120] Not assigned [OP Mode Name120] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID25] 437001 8300001B73 [OP Mode Name25] DEFC_WI DEFCAR_WITRIP [OP Mode ID121] Not assigned [OP Mode Name121] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID26] 440001 8000011B68 [OP Mode Name26] OC1 OC1-OPT [OP Mode ID122] Not assigned [OP Mode Name122] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID30] 441001 8000011B60 [OP Mode Name30] EF1 EF1-OPT [OP Mode ID126] Not assigned [OP Mode Name126] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID34] 443001 8000011B60 [OP Mode Name34] OCN1 OCN1-OPT [OP Mode ID202] 479001 8200001B61 [OP Mode Name202] OSTV OSTV-OPT
[OP Mode ID35] 443001 8100021B60 [OP Mode Name35] OCN2 OCN2-OPT [OP Mode ID203] Not assigned [OP Mode Name203] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID36] 443001 8200031B60 [OP Mode Name36] OCN3 OCN3-OPT [OP Mode ID204] Not assigned [OP Mode Name204] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID37] 443001 8300041B60 [OP Mode Name37] OCN4 OCN4-OPT [OP Mode ID205] 453001 8300011B23 [OP Mode Name205] CBF1-RE CBF1-RETRIP
[OP Mode ID38] Not assigned [OP Mode Name38] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID206] 453001 8B00011B27 [OP Mode Name206] CBF1 CBF1_TRIP
[OP Mode ID39] Not assigned [OP Mode Name39] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID207] 453001 8300021B23 [OP Mode Name207] CBF2-RE CBF2-RETRIP
[OP Mode ID40] 451001 8000011B60 [OP Mode Name40] THM-A THM-ALARM [OP Mode ID208] 453001 8B00021B27 [OP Mode Name208] CBF2 CBF2_TRIP
[OP Mode ID41] 451001 8100021B60 [OP Mode Name41] THM THM-TRIP [OP Mode ID209] Not assigned [OP Mode Name209] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID42] 452001 8000001B60 [OP Mode Name42] BCD BCD-OPT [OP Mode ID210] Not assigned [OP Mode Name210] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID43] 454001 8300001B23 [OP Mode Name43] SOTF-OC SOTFOC-TRIP [OP Mode ID211] Not assigned [OP Mode Name211] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID45] 460001 8000011B65 [OP Mode Name45] OV1 OV1-OPT [OP Mode ID213] Not assigned [OP Mode Name213] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID46] 460001 8100021B65 [OP Mode Name46] OV2 OV2-OPT [OP Mode ID214] Not assigned [OP Mode Name214] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID47] 461001 8000011B65 [OP Mode Name47] OVS1 OVS1-OPT [OP Mode ID215] Not assigned [OP Mode Name215] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID48] 461001 8100021B65 [OP Mode Name48] OVS2 OVS2-OPT [OP Mode ID216] Not assigned [OP Mode Name216] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID55] 470001 8000011B65 [OP Mode Name55] UV1 UV1-OPT [OP Mode ID223] Not assigned [OP Mode Name223] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID56] 470001 8100021B65 [OP Mode Name56] UV2 UV2-OPT [OP Mode ID224] Not assigned [OP Mode Name224] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID57] 471001 8000011B65 [OP Mode Name57] UVS1 UVS1-OPT [OP Mode ID225] Not assigned [OP Mode Name225] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID58] 471001 8100021B65 [OP Mode Name58] UVS2 UVS2-OPT [OP Mode ID226] Not assigned [OP Mode Name226] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID65] Not assigned [OP Mode Name65] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID233] 4A6001 8000011B63 [OP Mode Name233] SPAR1 ARC1_MODE_SPAR
[OP Mode ID66] Not assigned [OP Mode Name66] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID234] 4A6001 8100011B64 [OP Mode Name234] TPAR1 ARC1_TPAR
[OP Mode ID67] Not assigned [OP Mode Name67] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID235] 4A6001 8200011B65 [OP Mode Name235] ORGAR1 ARC1_ORGAR
[OP Mode ID69] Not assigned [OP Mode Name69] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID237] 4A6001 8100011B67 [OP Mode Name237] ARC-S2 ARC1 SHOT2
[OP Mode ID72] Not assigned [OP Mode Name72] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID240] 4A6001 8400011B6A [OP Mode Name240] ARC-S5 ARC1 SHOT5
[OP Mode ID73] Not assigned [OP Mode Name73] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID241] 4A6001 8400011B6E [OP Mode Name241] FT1 ARC1 FT
[OP Mode ID74] Not assigned [OP Mode Name74] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID242] 4A6001 8700011B70 [OP Mode Name242] AR1 ARC1 RESET
[OP Mode ID75] Not assigned [OP Mode Name75] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID243] 4A6001 8C00011B71 [OP Mode Name243] AF1 ARC1 CLOSE FAIL
[OP Mode ID76] Not assigned [OP Mode Name76] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID244] 4A6001 8000011B72 [OP Mode Name244] AS1 ARC1 CLOSE SUCCESS
[OP Mode ID77] Not assigned [OP Mode Name77] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID245] 4A6001 8000021B63 [OP Mode Name245] SPAR2 ARC2_SPAR
[OP Mode ID78] Not assigned [OP Mode Name78] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID246] 4A6001 8100021B64 [OP Mode Name246] TPAR2 ARC2_TPAR
[OP Mode ID79] Not assigned [OP Mode Name79] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID247] 4A6001 8200021B65 [OP Mode Name247] ORGAR2 ARC2_ORGAR
[OP Mode ID81] Not assigned [OP Mode Name81] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID249] 4A6001 8400021B6A [OP Mode Name249] FT2 ARC2 FT
[OP Mode ID82] Not assigned [OP Mode Name82] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID250] 4A6001 8700021B6C [OP Mode Name250] AR2 ARC2 RESET
[OP Mode ID83] Not assigned [OP Mode Name83] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID251] 4A6001 8C00021B6D [OP Mode Name251] AF2 ARC2 CLOSE FAIL
[OP Mode ID84] Not assigned [OP Mode Name84] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID252] 4A6001 8000021B6E [OP Mode Name252] AS2 ARC2 CLOSE SUCCESS
[OP Mode ID85] Not assigned [OP Mode Name85] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID253] 4A6001 8300001B64 [OP Mode Name253] EXT-STA EXT.ARC_START
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 523 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
7.1.4 Scheme logic

The operation of the fault recorder can be directed by the TRC function, protection functions
(FC1 to FC40†), and the PLC function, as shown in Figure 7.1-3.
Fault recorder
Clock function Date & Time & Date and time at fault
Metering function Quantities in the power system & Quantities at fault
From TRC OPT-PHASE-A OPT/PHASE-A & Operating in phase-A
OPT-PHASE-B OPT/PHASE-B &

Operating in phase-B
Operating
OPT-PHASE-C OPT/PHASE-C & mode
Operating in phase-C
OPT-PHASE-N OPT/PHASE-N & Operating in phase-N
TRIP COMMAND1-A TRIP COMMAND1-A & Tripping in phase-A
TRIP COMMAND1-B TRIP COMMAND1-B Trip phases

& Tripping in phase-B in CB1
TRIP COMMAND1-C TRIP COMMAND1-C & Tripping in phase-C

TRIP COMMAND CB2 -A TRIP COMMAND2-A & Tripping in phase-A
TRIP COMMAND CB2 -B TRIP COMMAND2-B Trip phases
&
Tripping in phase-B in CB2
TRIP COMMAND CB2 -C TRIP COMMAND2-C &
Tripping in phase-C
GEN.TRIP_ALARM OP.MODE-GET
From ARC 0 t
ARC INPROG F.RECORD_TRIG_SPRED
0. 1s
8020001001 1 Drop Off
802000E001 ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1
8120011001 0.01s
≥1 ≥1
1 ≥1
8220021001
Drop Off
8320031001 1s
832003E001 ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG4 Pick Up
1
≥1
Drop Off
0.01s
From protection function #1(FC1)
FC1_OPT_AR Identifier signals &
FC1_OPT_BR (FC*_OPT_*) coming Setting [OP Mode ID1] Operation mode information recorded
FC1_OPT_CR from protection functions when GEN.TRIP_ALARM signal is
(FC*) are detected & generated in the TRC function
FC1_OPT_ABR changing the logic level Setting [OP Mode ID2]
FC1_OPT_BCR “0(Un-operated)” to
FC1_OPT_CAR “1(Operated)”. &
Setting [OP Mode ID3]
From protection function #2(FC2)
FC1_OPT_AR
FC1_OPT_BR
FC1_OPT_CR Signals about the
FC1_OPT_ABR operation modes in the
FC1_OPT_BCR protection functions are &
set. Setting [OP Mode ID128]
FC1_OPT_CAR
&
Setting [OP Mode ID2] Setting [OP Mode ID201]
From protection function #40(FC40) &

FC40_OPT_AR
FC40_OPT_BR
FC40_OPT_CR
FC40_OPT_ABR
Setting [OP Mode ID264] &
FC40_OPT_BCR Setting [OP Mode ID264]
FC40_OPT_CAR
Figure 7.1-3 Fault record circuit

†Note:The correspondences table for the FC numbers are discussed in Chapter Relay
application: Trip circuit.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 524 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
7.1.5 Setting
Setting of FAULT_RECORD(Function ID: 200602)
Default setting
value
Pre-Fault Time 10s/ 50 / 100 / 200 / 300 Sec. Recording time before the fault 10
Op Mode Name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the operation mode for ID1 –
Op Mode ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier –
Op Mode ID2 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier2 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
7.1.6 Signal (Data ID)

FAULT_RECORD (Function ID: 200602)
ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 8020001001 Receiving Trigger1
FAULT RECORD TRIG1 8000011001 TRIG1 signal generated
FAULT RECORD TRIG3 8200031001 TRIG3 signal generated
FLTRCDING 8020101001 Data writing in the fault recorder
FR_CLR 3000001001 Data erasing in the fault recorder

FAULT_RECORD (Function ID: 200602)
ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 802000E001 Input1 for the external trigger
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 525 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Event recorder
Signals are generated in the logics of BIO modules etc. in the IED. The event recorder can
memory the generated signals as events. To operate the event recorder, the user should pick a
preferred signal as a trigger of the event recorder; the event recorder can have 768 triggers,
some of which have been set as a default. The user can group the triggers into three
categories; consequently, it is possible that a number of the events are divided depending on
the degree of the errors, the meaning of the operations, and the signals of relay elements, etc.
The user can also program how an event is to be detected. An event is recorded with
millisecond accuracy. The information are memorized until the number of the events reaching
1024; the oldest event will be deleted when a new event appears.
7.2.1 Trigger signals

The event is memorized when the event recorder detects changing the trigger signal that is
connected with the logic signal; they are defined using settings [Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID768].
Settings [End of E.Record-1] and [End of E.Record-2] are provided for grouping†; the user
can adjust the size of the ‘Event Record1’ group using the [End of E.Record-1]. The next
‘Event Record2’ group is set with the [End of E.Record-2]. The remains are set for the ‘Event
Record3’ group. Remember that the [Trigger ID1] etc. are required to set together with the
[Event Name1] etc.; user’s preferred names should be less than 18 letters.
July 25, 2012 July 26, 2012
10:31:12 Deleting the fault record 12:34:51 Deleting the fault record
Setting [End of E.Record-1] = 256
Setting [End of E.Record-2] = 512 10:56:12 Changing system setting
Pulse train
3000001001
FR_CLR List of ‘Event record1’
FAULT RECORD (200602)
Event #3
On 2012-07-25 10:31:12
Event #3 F.Record clear ‘On’
Setting [Trigger ID14] = 200602 3000001001

Setting [Trigger Mode14] = On
Setting [Event Name14] = F.Record clear
Event #2
3010001001
Active group Active group
2012-07-25 10:56:12
SYS_CHG Set group change
‘3’ Changed to ‘4’
Setting_PF (201400)
Event #2
Setting [Trigger ID7] = 201400 3010001001 Event #1

Setting [Trigger Mode7] = Change On 2012-07-26 12:34:51
Setting [Event Name7] = Set group change
Event #1 F.Record clear ‘On’
Figure 7.2-1 Relation between function signals and triggers for Event record1
Figure 7.2-1 illustrates signals connected with triggers in the event recorder. For
example, ‘SYS_CHG’ is connected with trigger#7 using the [Trigger ID7] and ‘FR_CLR’ is
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 526 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
connected with trigger#14 using the [Trigger ID14]. Note that the both triggers (#7 and #14)
are smaller than the setting [End of E.Record-1]=256; hence, the both are listed in the ‘Event
recored1’ list. Keep in mind that the event names are set by the [Event Name7] and [Event
Name14]. All ones are tabulated in Table 7.2-1 to Table 7.2-3.
†Note:The GR-TIEMS uses terms ‘Level1’, ‘Level2’, and ‘Level3’ to represent the ‘Event
Record1’, ‘Event Record2’, and ‘Event Record3’. The scope of each level is the same
as the scope of each group. The GR-TIEMS does not show unused triggers and
Trigger ID numbers automatically when the triggers are displayed on the screen.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 527 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 7.2-1 Event1 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256

Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names
[Trigger ID1] 220001 3110201001 On-Off Serious error [Trigger ID91] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID181] 453001 8200011BB2 On-Off EXT.CBF1_START-C
[Trigger ID2] 220001 3110211001 On-Off ErrorLevel2 [Trigger ID92] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID182] 453001 8000021BB0 On-Off EXT.CBF2_START-A
[Trigger ID3] 220001 3110221001 On-Off Minor error [Trigger ID93] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID183] 453001 8100021BB1 On-Off EXT.CBF2_START-B
[Trigger ID4] 220001 3110231001 On-Off ErrorLevel4 [Trigger ID94] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID184] 453001 8200021BB2 On-Off EXT.CBF2_START-C
[Trigger ID5] 220001 3110241001 On-Off ErrorLevel5 [Trigger ID95] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID185] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID6] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID96] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID186] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID7] 201400 3200001001 Change Set. group change [Trigger ID97] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID187] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID8] 201400 3010001001 On System set. change [Trigger ID98] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID188] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID9] 201400 3010011001 On Comm. set. change [Trigger ID99] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID189] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID10] 201400 3010021001 On Prot. set. change [Trigger ID100] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID190] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID11] 201400 3010031001 On Ctrl. set. change [Trigger ID101] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID191] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID14] 200602 3000001001 On F.Record clear [Trigger ID104] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID194] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID15] 200710 3001001001 On E.Record1 clear [Trigger ID105] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID195] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID18] 20040130A0001001 On D.Record clear [Trigger ID108] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID198] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID39] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID129] 48A001 8000001B73 On-Off CB1-A_CLOSE [Trigger ID219] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID40] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID130] 48A001 8100001B74 On-Off CB1-B_CLOSE [Trigger ID220] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID41] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID131] 48A001 8200001B75 On-Off CB1-C_CLOSE [Trigger ID221] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID42] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID132] 48A001 8000001B7C On-Off CB2-A_CLOSE [Trigger ID222] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID43] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID133] 48A001 8100001B7D On-Off CB2-B_CLOSE [Trigger ID223] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID44] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID134] 48A001 8200001B7E On-Off CB2-C_CLOSE [Trigger ID224] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID45] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID135] 48A001 8E00001B85 On-Off DS_CLOSE [Trigger ID225] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID46] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID136] 48A001 8000001B9C On-Off DEAD_LINE_DETECT [Trigger ID226] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID48] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID138] 4A6001 8000011B60 On-Off ARC1 READY [Trigger ID228] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID49] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID139] 4A6001 8000021B60 On-Off ARC2 READY [Trigger ID229] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID60] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID150] 4A6001 8200001BB4 On-Off ARC_BLOCK [Trigger ID240] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID61] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID151] 4A6001 8000001BB3 On-Off ARC NO ACT [Trigger ID241] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID62] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID152] 4A6001 8000001BB0 On-Off EXT.ARC_START-A [Trigger ID242] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID63] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID153] 4A6001 8100001BB1 On-Off EXT.ARC_START-B [Trigger ID243] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID64] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID154] 4A6001 8200001BB2 On-Off EXT.ARC_START-C [Trigger ID244] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID65] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID155] 4A6001 8000011B6C On-Off ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND [Trigger ID245] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID66] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID156] 4A6001 8100021B68 On-Off ARC2 CLOSE COMMAND [Trigger ID246] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID68] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID158] 490001 8000001B61 On-Off VTF DETECT [Trigger ID248] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID69] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID159] 490001 8100001BB1 On-Off EXTERNAL VTF [Trigger ID249] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID71] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID161] 491001 8000001B62 On-Off CTF DETECT [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID72] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID162] 491001 8100001BB1 On-Off EXTERNAL CTF [Trigger ID252] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID74] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID164] 4A0001 8000001B6C On-Off GEN.TRIP-A [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID75] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID165] 4A0001 8100001B6D On-Off GEN.TRIP-B [Trigger ID255] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID76] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID166] 4A0001 8200001B6E On-Off GEN.TRIP-C [Trigger ID256] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID77] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID167] 4A0001 8300001B6F On-Off GEN.TRIP
[Trigger ID78] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID168] 4A0001 8400001B64 On-Off GEN.ALARM
[Trigger ID79] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID169] 4A0001 8000001B71 On-Off OPT.PHASE-A
[Trigger ID80] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID170] 4A0001 8100001B72 On-Off OPT.PHASE-B
[Trigger ID81] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID171] 4A0001 8200001B73 On-Off OPT.PHASE-C
[Trigger ID82] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID172] 4A0001 8300001B74 On-Off OPT.PHASE-N
[Trigger ID83] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID173] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID89] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID179] 453001 8000011BB0 On-Off EXT.CBF1_START-A
[Trigger ID90] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID180] 453001 8100011BB1 On-Off EXT.CBF1_START-B
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 528 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 7.2-2 Event2 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256 and [End of E.Record-2]=512
[Trigger ID266] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID356] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID446] 530001 3109001001 Change R/L Key
[Trigger ID283] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID373] 528001 3107011EA1 On LED RST [Trigger ID463] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID287] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID377] 540001 000E001F41 On CNTVAL CTRL [Trigger ID467] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID288] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID378] 540001 000E011F42 On ARC1 CLOSE CTRL [Trigger ID468] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID289] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID379] 540001 000E021F42 On ARC1_SPAR CTRL [Trigger ID469] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID290] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID380] 540001 000E031F42 On ARC1_TPAR CTRL [Trigger ID470] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID291] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID381] 540001 000E041F42 On ARC1_MPAR CTRL [Trigger ID471] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID292] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID382] 540001 000E051F42 On ARC2 CLOSE CTRL [Trigger ID472] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID293] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID383] 540001 000E061F42 On ARC2_SPAR CTRL [Trigger ID473] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID294] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID384] 540001 000E071F42 On ARC2_TPAR CTRL [Trigger ID474] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID295] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID385] 540001 000E081F42 On ARC2_MPAR CTRL [Trigger ID475] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID296] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID386] 540001 8A0E011E76 On ARC1 CLOSE SEL OK [Trigger ID476] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID297] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID387] 540001 8A0E021E76 On ARC1_SPAR SEL OK [Trigger ID477] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID298] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID388] 540001 8A0E031E76 On ARC1_TPAR SEL OK [Trigger ID478] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID299] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID389] 540001 8A0E041E76 On ARC1_MPAR SEL OK [Trigger ID479] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID300] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID390] 540001 8A0E051E76 On ARC2 CLOSE SEL OK [Trigger ID480] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID301] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID391] 540001 8A0E061E76 On ARC2_SPAR SEL OK [Trigger ID481] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID302] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID392] 540001 8A0E071E76 On ARC2_TPAR SEL OK [Trigger ID482] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID303] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID393] 540001 8A0E081E76 On ARC2_MPAR SEL OK [Trigger ID483] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID304] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID394] 540001 8B0E011E7B On ARC1 CLOSE SEL FAI [Trigger ID484] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID305] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID395] 540001 8B0E021E7B On ARC1_SPAR SEL FAI [Trigger ID485] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID306] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID396] 540001 8B0E031E7B On ARC1_TPAR SEL FAI [Trigger ID486] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID307] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID397] 540001 8B0E041E7B On ARC1_MPAR SEL FAI [Trigger ID487] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID308] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID398] 540001 8B0E051E7B On ARC2 CLOSE SEL FAI [Trigger ID488] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID309] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID399] 540001 8B0E061E7B On ARC2_SPAR SEL FAI [Trigger ID489] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID310] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID400] 540001 8B0E071E7B On ARC2_TPAR SEL FAI [Trigger ID490] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID311] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID401] 540001 8B0E081E7B On ARC2_MPAR SEL FAI [Trigger ID491] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID312] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID402] 540001 830E011E8B On ARC1 CLOSE EXE FAI [Trigger ID492] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID313] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID403] 540001 830E021E8B On ARC1_SPAR EXE FAI [Trigger ID493] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID314] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID404] 540001 830E031E8B On ARC1_TPAR EXE FAI [Trigger ID494] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID315] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID405] 540001 830E041E8B On ARC1_MPAR EXE FAI [Trigger ID495] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID316] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID406] 540001 830E051E8B On ARC2 CLOSE EXE FAI [Trigger ID496] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID317] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID407] 540001 830E061E8B On ARC2_SPAR EXE FAI [Trigger ID497] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID318] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID408] 540001 830E071E8B On ARC2_TPAR EXE FAI [Trigger ID498] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID319] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID409] 540001 830E081E8B On ARC2_MPAR EXE FAI [Trigger ID499] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID320] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID410] 540001 820E011E84 On ARC1 CLOSE EXE OK [Trigger ID500] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID321] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID411] 540001 820E021E84 On ARC1_SPAR EXE OK [Trigger ID501] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID322] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID412] 540001 820E031E84 On ARC1_TPAR EXE OK [Trigger ID502] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID323] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID413] 540001 820E041E84 On ARC1_MPAR EXE OK [Trigger ID503] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID324] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID414] 540001 820E051E84 On ARC2 CLOSE EXE OK [Trigger ID504] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID325] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID415] 540001 820E061E84 On ARC2_SPAR EXE OK [Trigger ID505] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID326] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID416] 540001 820E071E84 On ARC2_TPAR EXE OK [Trigger ID506] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID327] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID417] 540001 820E081E84 On ARC2_MPAR EXE OK [Trigger ID507] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID328] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID418] 540001 840E011E95 On ARC1 CLOSE CANCEL [Trigger ID508] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID329] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID419] 540001 840E021E95 On ARC1_SPAR CANCEL [Trigger ID509] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID330] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID420] 540001 840E031E95 On ARC1_TPAR CANCEL [Trigger ID510] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID331] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID421] 540001 840E041E95 On ARC1_MPAR CANCEL [Trigger ID511] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID332] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID422] 540001 840E051E95 On ARC2 CLOSE CANCEL [Trigger ID512] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID333] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID423] 540001 840E061E95 On ARC2_SPAR CANCEL
[Trigger ID334] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID424] 540001 840E071E95 On ARC2_TPAR CANCEL
[Trigger ID335] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID425] 540001 840E081E95 On ARC2_MPAR CANCEL
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 529 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 7.2-3 Event3 group set with [End of E.Record-2]=512

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 530 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
7.2.2 Trigger modes

We can simplify the trigger signals into four: ‘On’, ‘Off ’, ‘On and Off ’, and ‘Change’ modes.
Thus, the user can should set a mode for respective triggers using [Trigger Mode1] and others.
(i) ‘On’ mode

In the ‘On’ mode, the event recorder can take an action when the trigger signal is switched to
‘On’, as shown in Figure 7.2-2. For the operation, set On for the [Trigger Mode*].
On
Pulse train
Off
Triggers generated Triggers generated Triggers generated
Figure 7.2-2 Trigger generated at ‘On’ mode
(ii) ‘Off’ mode

The ‘Off ’ mode is the other way of the ‘On’ mode; set Off for the operation.
On
Pulse train
Off
Figure 7.2-3 Trigger generated at ‘Off’ mode
(iii) ‘On-Off’ mode

In the ‘On-Off ’ mode, the trigger signal is generated when the pulse train is changed from ‘On
to Off ’ and ‘Off to On’ both, as shown in Figure 7.2-4. Set On-Off for the operation
On
Pulse train
Off
Figure 7.2-4 Trigger generated at ‘On-Off’ mode
(iv) ‘Change’ mode

The ‘Change mode’ is provided to detect the increment or the decrement of a number, where
the PLC logic generates. For example, this mode allows to detect the change of group settings
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 531 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(e.g., the ‘SYS_CHG’ signal; which has been connected with the trigger#9 using the setting
[Trigger ID9], as default; we have been discussed in Chapter Technical description: Group
setting for protection functions.)

Figure 7.2-5 illustrates the structure about the ‘Event Recored1’ group, which can be shown
the latest event#1 at the top structure (line ○
b ). The lines ○
c and ○
d describes how an event
occurred for the event#1. Preceding event#2, event#3, etc. are shown below the event#1.
Similarly, the information about the ‘Event Record2’ and ‘Event Record3’ groups are displayed
on the IED screen.
†Note:For more information about the screen operation, see Chapter User interface:
Record sub-menu.
Event Record1 ○
a Event record1 list
10:48 1/4
#1 2012-07-26 ○
b The latest event#1
12:34:51.223
F.Record clear ○
c Trigger information
On ○
d Trigger mode information
#2 2012-07-25
Screen scroll down 10:56:12.021
○
e Event#2
Set group change

4
#3 2012-07-25 ○
f Event#3
10:31:12.159
F.Record clear
On
#4 2012-07-23 ○
g Event#4
23:56:12.159
Figure 7.2-5 Event information grouped in the Event record1
7.2.4 Setup for the event recorder

Consider that a trip-command, which is denoted with Data ID ‘4A1001 8300001B6F’, should
be sorted into the ‘Event record1’ group. The settings [End of E.Record-1]=256 and [End of
E.Record-2]=512 have been made as default; hence, we may select it with the trigger#157 by
setting the [Trigger ID157]= ‘4A1001 8300001B6F’. Set On-OFF for the [Trigger Mode157],
because the pulse-train of the trip command should be recorded along the pick-up and drop-off
times. Remember that the preferred name for the Trigger ID157 should be set using the
[Event Name157].
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 532 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
7.2.5 Setting
Setting of EVENTRECORD(Function ID: 200710)
Default setting
value
End of E.Record-1 0 to 768 – The last position of the event group1 256
End of E.Record-2 0 to 768 – The last position of the event group2 521
Trigger ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Trigger signal1 for the operation –
Tigger Mode1 On / Off / On-Off / Change – Mode setting for the detection –
Event name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal1 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –

EVENTRECORD (Function ID: 200710)
ER1_CLR 3001001001 Clearing the data in Event group1
POWER ON 3100001001 Detection of switch On
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 533 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Disturbance recorder
Disturbance recorder is to record the phenomenon about the occurrences of the fault with 1ms
accuracy; the disturbance recorder is operated with the reception of the TRC trip command.
The disturbance recorder has exclusive overcurrent and other relays; thus, they can also start
the disturbance recorder when the exclusive relays detects abnormal phenomenon.
Additionally, the disturbance recorder can accept the instruction of the PLC function using
settings. The recording time and the sampling time are programmable; thus, the measuring
values about currents, voltage, frequency, and logic signals are collected in accordance with
the recording and the sampling times. The logic signals are also memorized during the
disturbance phenomenon; the disturbance recorder can hold up to 256 signals. The recording
number of the disturbance phenomena is limited by the recording and sampling times.
7.3.1 Recording time and amount

(i) Time settings
Period of the recording is set using the [Record Time]. The disturbance recorder can operate
before the occurrence of the fault; the time before the fault occurrence can be set using the
[Pre-fault Time]. The user can choose a time among 0.1 sec. to 10.0 sec.
Setting [Record Time]
Setting [Pre-fault time]

Fault
Pre-fault information Succeeding formation
Start of recording Trip command issued End of recording
Figure 7.3-1 Period of recording time

(ii) Sampling rate setting
Sampling time is defined with setting [Sampling rate]; it can be can choose from 7.5 electrical
degree to 15.0 electrical degree. For example, if the user set 7.5 for the [Sampling rate], the
disturbance recorder starts to collect the date in the sampling rate (2400Hz) in 50Hz system.
(iii) Trip command setting

As shown in Figure 7.3-1, the disturbance recorder start when the trip command is issued,
provided On is set for the [Trip Trig.Sw]. If the disturbance recorder shall not start with the
trip command, set Off.
7.3.2 Relays within disturbance recorder

Four relays are provided in the disturbance recorder exclusively: OC-DRT, EF-DRT, UV-DRT,
and UVS-DRT relays.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 534 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(i) OC-DRT relay setting

An overcurrent relay within the disturbance recorder (OC-DRT) is provided. The user should
set a pick-up value for the relay to commence the disturbance recorder. Use the setting
[OC-DRT]; then set On for the [OC-DRT-EN] if this relay operation is required to commence
the recording.
(ii) EF-DRT relay setting

An earth fault relay (EF-DRT) is provided; set the pick-up value for the [EF-DRT]; then set On
for the [EF-DRT-EN].
(iii) UV-DRT relay setting

An under-voltage relay (Line-ground) (UV-DRT) is provided. Set the value for the [UV-DRT];
then set On for the [UV-DRT-EN].
(iv) UVS-DRT relay setting

An under-voltage relay (Line-Line) (UVS-DRT) is provided. Set the value for the [UVS-DRT];
then set On for the [UVS-DRT-EN].
7.3.3 Maximum number for recording disturbance phenomena

Note that the maximum number for recording the disturbance phenomena depends on the
recording time and the sampling rate. Table 7.3-1 illustrates the maximum number. For
example, the 77 phenomena can be memorized in the disturbance recorder, when the [Record
Time] =1 and the [Sampling Rate] =7.5° elec., if the IED operates in 50Hz system. The user
can also check the maximum number on the IED screen (See Figure 7.3-2).
Table 7.3-1 Max number depending on time settings
Recording Max. recording number for Disturbance phenomena
period set with Setting [Sampling Rate] in 50Hz sys. Setting [Sampling Rate] in 60Hz sys.
[Record Time] 7.5º 15º 7.5º 15º
1 sec 77 151 64 126
3 sec 26 51 21 43
5 sec 15 31 13 26
7.3.4 Number of analog quantities and logical signals for disturbance recorder
Ten analog quantities and 256 logical signals are record in a disturbance phenomenon.
(i) Number of analog quantities
For example, when VCT11B is used in the IED, currents (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ie, Iem) and the voltages
(Va, Vb, Vc, Vs, Vs2) are recorded. For more information about the VCT, see Chapter
Technical description: Transformer module for AC analog input.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 535 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 7.3-2 Recording number of logic signals depending on time settings

VCT type 11B 12B
Va Va
Vb Vb
Voltages Vc Vc
Vs Vs
Vs2 Vs2
Ia Ia
Ib Ib
Currents Ic Ic
Ie Ie
Iem Iem
Number of recording 10 10
(ii) Number of logical signals

As mentioned earlier, the disturbance recorder can hold the traces of logic signals during the
recording time. Using settings [Binary Signal*], the user can select 256 logic signal arbitrary.
The logic signals that the user has selected should be termed with user’s preferred names
using settings [Binary Sig.Name*]. Table 7.3-3 tabulates the settings. For example,
‘CB1-A_CLOSE’ signal of the PROT_COMM function may be chosen to record using the
setting [Binary Signal1]; we should term it ‘CB1-A_CLOSE’ using the [Binary Sig.Name1].
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 536 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 7.3-3 Setting list for logic signals

[Binary Sig. [Binary Sig. [Binary Sig.
Settings Data IDs Origins Settings Data IDs Origins Settings Data IDs Origins
Name] Name] Name]
[Binary Signal1] 48A001 8000001B73 CB1-A_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal91] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal191] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal2] 48A001 8100001B74 CB1-B_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal92] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal192] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal3] 48A001 8200001B75 CB1-C_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal93] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal193] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal4] 48A001 8000001B7C CB2-A_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal94] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal194] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal5] 48A001 8100001B7D CB2-B_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal95] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal195] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal6] 48A001 8200001B7E CB2-C_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal96] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal196] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal7] 48A001 8E00001B85 DS_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal97] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal197] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal8] 4A0001 8300001B6F GEN.TRIP TRC [Binary Signal98] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal198] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal9] 4A0001 8000001B6C GEN.TRIP-A TRC [Binary Signal99] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal199] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal10] 4A0001 8100001B6D GEN.TRIP-B TRC [Binary Signal100] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal200] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal11] 4A0001 8200001B6E GEN.TRIP-C TRC [Binary Signal101] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal201] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal12] 4A0001 8400001B64 GEN.ALARM TRC [Binary Signal102] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal202] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal13] 490001 8000001B61 VTF_DETECT VTF [Binary Signal103] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal203] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal14] 491001 8000001B62 CTF_DETECT CTF [Binary Signal104] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal204] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal15] 430001 8300011B63 Z1S-ORX ZS [Binary Signal105] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal205] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal16] 430001 8700061B63 Z1XS-ORX ZS [Binary Signal106] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal206] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal19] 430001 8000011B23 Z1S-OPT ZS [Binary Signal109] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal209] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal20] 430001 8100061B23 Z1XS-OPT ZS [Binary Signal110] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal210] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal23] 430001 8000081B61 PSBS_DET ZS [Binary Signal113] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal213] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal24] 431001 8300011B63 Z1G-ORX ZG [Binary Signal114] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal214] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal25] 431001 8700061B63 Z1XG-ORX ZG [Binary Signal115] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal215] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal28] 431001 8000011B69 Z1G-OPT ZG [Binary Signal118] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal218] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal29] 431001 8100061B69 Z1XG-OPT ZG [Binary Signal119] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal219] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal32] 431001 8000081B70 PSBG_DET ZG [Binary Signal122] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal222] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal33] 4A6001 8000011B60 ARC1_READY ARC [Binary Signal123] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal223] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal34] 4A6001 8000021B60 ARC2_READY ARC [Binary Signal124] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal224] (Not Assigned) - ….
ARC1_CLOSE_CO
[Binary Signal35] 4A6001 8000011B6C ARC [Binary Signal125] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal225] (Not Assigned) - ….
MMAND
ARC2_CLOSE_CO
[Binary Signal36] 4A6001 8100021B68 ARC [Binary Signal126] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal226] (Not Assigned) - ….
MMAND
[Binary Signal37] 4A6001 8400011B6E ARC1_FT ARC [Binary Signal127] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal227] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal38] 4A6001 8400021B6A ARC2_FT ARC [Binary Signal128] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal228] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal39] 4A6001 8200001BB4 ARC_BLOCK ARC [Binary Signal129] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal229] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal40] 436001 8300001B76 DISCA DISCAR [Binary Signal130] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal230] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal41] 437001 8300001B77 DEFCA DEFCAR [Binary Signal131] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal231] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal42] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal132] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal232] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal57] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal157] (Not Assigned) - ….
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 537 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
7.3.5 Trigger settings for PLC programming

If the PLC program instructs the operation of the disturbance recorder, the user should set
the [Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID4]. That is, the program-output points should be set for the
settings [Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID4]; then, set On for the [Trigger SW1] to [Trigger SW4],
respectively.

Figure 7.3-2 indicates the maximum number of the recording operations as the number is
changed depending on the time settings, which are shown in Table 7.3-1. Figure 7.3-3 shows
the operation time and the date for the disturbance recorder and the figure illustrates five
disturbance phenomena have been memorized in the IED.
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/2
_Record List >
Number of items
5/77
Clear Records +
Max. recording number for Disturbance phenomena
Operating counter
Figure 7.3-2 Running counter and Max number in the disturbance recorder
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/5
#1 2012-07-25 ○
a Disturbance record#1
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 ○
b Disturbance record#2
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/21 ○
c Disturbance record#3
Screen scroll down 13:11:29.621
#4 2012-07-02 ○
d Disturbance record#4
23:32:09.015
#5 2012-06-20 ○
e Disturbance record#5
09:37:48.915
Figure 7.3-3 Detail information in the disturbance recorder
The information in the disturbance recorder are managed in the COMTRADE format,
hence, the user can transferor the disturbance recording file to the PC using the engineering
tool ‘GR-TIEMS’. Figure 7.3-4 shows the example of the GR-TIMES screen. For more
information, see Chapter Engineering tool.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 538 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 7.3-4 Screen shot from GR-TIEMS
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 539 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
7.3.7 Setting
Setting of DRT_LP(Function ID: 4B0001)
Default
Range Uni
Setting item Contents setting value Notes
ts
OC-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger OC-DRT enable Off
OC-DRT 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A OC-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
EF-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger EF-DRT enable Off
EF-DRT 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A EF-DRT relay operating value 0.20 1.00
UV-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger UV-DRT enable –
UV-DRT 5.0 - 130.0 – UV-DRT relay operating value –
UVS-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger UVS-DRT enable –
UVS-DRT 5.0 - 130.0 V UVS-DRT relay operating value –
Setting of DISTURB_REC(Function ID: 200401)

Uni Default
ts setting value
Record Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Time for disturbance recording 3.0

Sampling Rate 7.5 - 15.0 deg Sampling rate in electrical degree 7.5
Pre-fault Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Pre-fault time 0.3
Trigger ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Signal1 generated in User’s program No Assign
Trigger SW1 Off / On – Enabling the signal1 of user’s program Off
Trigger ID2 - – Signal2 generated in User’s program No Assign
Trip Trig.SW Off / On – Operation with the TRC trip command On
Binary Signal1 (Preferred DataID) – Logic signal1 for the operation –
Binary Sig.Name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the logic signal1 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
Binary Signal256 (Preferred DataID) – Mode setting for the detection –
Binary Sig.Name256 (Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal768 –
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 540 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

DRT_LP (Function ID: 4B0001)
8000001C20 DRT-LP DRT-LP protection operated
8400021C23 EF-DRT EF-DRT relay element operated
8000011C20 OC-DRT-A OC-DRT relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 OC-DRT-B OC-DRT relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 OC-DRT-C OC-DRT relay element operated (phase-C)
8800031C20 UV-DRT-A UV-DRT relay element operated (phase-A)
8900031C21 UV-DRT-B UV-DRT relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00031C22 UV-DRT-C UV-DRT relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00041C20 UVS-DRT-AB UVS-DRT relay element operated (phase-AB)
8D00041C21 UVS-DRT-BC UVS-DRT relay element operated (phase-BC)
8E00041C22 UVS-DRT-CA UVS-DRT relay element operated (phase-CA)

DISTURB_REC (Function ID: 200401)
80A0041001 DSTRING Writing the disturbance data
30A0001001 DSTR_CLR Data erased
80A0031001 DSTR_MADE Completion for writing the disturbance data
32A0011001 DSTR_MAX Maximum possible number of the operations
32A0021001 DSTR_NUM Operation counter
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 541 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8 Monitoring function
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 542 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Outline
The monitoring function is provided to measure the number of power quantities and statistics
data obtained within the VCT and BI circuits†. When the measuring instruments start
measures power quantities, mathematical means is applied to the data from the VCT so that
the data are shown accurately on the IED screen. The monitoring function has several screens
together.
†Note:The VCT/BIO structures and their features are discussed in Chapter Technical
description.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 543 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Metering data (Metering group)

Several abbreviations are screened for metering data, which is shown in the below Table1–5.
1Note: Terms ‘I0 (i.e., 3I0)’ and ‘V0 (i.e., 3V0)’ are calculated using three-phase quantities.
2Note: The ‘Ie’ and ‘Iem’ are taken usually with corresponding ‘Ie’ and ‘Iem’ circuits of the
VCT.
3Note: Those metering items are provided for the special models, which are designated at
ordering made.
4Note: The frequency is measured with positive-sequence V1, which represents power
system.
5Note: For more information, see Chapter Relay application: Voltage check for
autoreclosing.
Table 8.2-1 Metering data

Groups Displayed quantities Abbreviations
Ia, Ib, Ic,
Current in phase, phase-to-phase , symmetrical, Iab, Ibc, Ica,
residual currents Ie (2)
I1, I2, I0 (1)

Residual current in the other side of the parallel line Iem(2)
Va, Vb, Vc
Voltage in phase, phase-to-phase, and symmetrical Vab, Vbc, Vca
V1, V2, V0(1)
Metering One or two reference (busbar) voltages Vs, Vs2

Frequency f(4)
Power factors in phase-a,-b,-c / three-phase PFa, PFb, PFc / PF
Active(real) power in phase-a,-b,-c / three-phase Pa, Pb, Pc / P
Reactive power in phase-a,-b,-c / three-phase Qa, Qb, Qc / Q
Complex (apparent) power in phase-a,-b,-c / Sa, Sb, Sc / S
three-phase
Rate of thermal capacity in % THM-Capacity(3)

Running voltages and Incoming voltages at a (center) VR1 and VI1
CB and the other (busbar) CB VR2 and VI2 (5)
8.2.1 Metering information on the screen

The user can examine the values provided by the metering function on the IED screen; Figure
8.2-1 illustrates the information about currents. A reference phasor is defined to examine a
complex data in the metering and a positive-sequence voltage (V1) is defined as the reference.
The metering function has minimum sensing threshold; thus, the user shall notice that zero
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 544 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(0) is displayed, if the provided data is lesser than the threshold.
Metering
10:48 1/59
Ia
12.345kA 123.45deg
Ib
12.345kA 123.45deg
Ic
12.345kA 123.45deg
Figure 8.2-1 Current meter on the IED screen

Note: If any quantity does not enter to the VCT, the value on the screen is displayed such
as “***.**” and “–––––”.
8.2.2 Setting for measurements

(i) Selecting either primary/secondary values
In the metering function, the value of the primary side is displayed on the screen; when the
value is greater than 1000 volts, it will be displayed in KV unit. When the user prefers
displaying the value of the secondary side, the user should set Secondary for the setting
[Display_Value].Table 8.2-2 shows the effective digit when Secondary is set.
Metering
10:48 1/2
Display Value +
Primary
I-Display Unit +
kA
V-Display Unit +
kV
Figure 8.2-2 Metering setting in the setting screen

Note: For the operation of the menu, see Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu.
Table 8.2-2 Effective digits for metering in the secondary side
Number of significatnt figures
Metering Rated values rulued
Phase
items at the secondary Current or voltage
angle
3 digit number with 2 decimal places
Voltage 100/110/115/120 volt
(***.**V)
(±***.*°)
3 digit number with 2 decimal places
Current 1 amper / 5 amper
(***.**A)
(ii) Unit setting

The user can select to a metering unit for each metering value. For example, the current is
preferred to be displayed in kA unit, the user should set kA for the [I-Display Unit]. Table 8.2-3
shows the unit lists in the metering funciton.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 545 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 8.2-3 Selection of units to display

Metering items Settings Selection of a unit to display
Voltage (V) [V-Display Unit] Volt (V) or kilo-volt (kV)
Current (I) [I-Display Unit] Ampare (A) or kilo-ampare (kA)
Active power (P) [P-Display Unit] Kilo-watt (kW) or Mega-watt (MW)
Reactive power (Q) [Q-Display Unit] Kilo-var (kvar) or Mega-var (Mvar)
Apprent power (S) [S-Display Unit] Kilo-VA (kVA) or Mega-VA (MVA)
8.2.3 Diminishing a very small value to display zero

In the metering function, negligible metering values will be considered as zero. The user can
set the level to diminish in % using settings [I-Valid Level] and [V-Valid Level], at which
values ‘4.00’ and ‘0.30’ are set, as default, respectively. Thus, zero (0) will be displayed when
the applied quantities at the VCT, which are lesser than the setting levels.
8.2.4 Flow settings for active/reactive/apparent powers

The user should set the rules for the metering P, Q, and S
(i) Metering in active power (P)
When the metering function measures the value for supplying power, the user should set
Send for the [Power]. Conversely, if the metering function should operate for absorbing power,
set Receive for the setting. Figure 8.2-3 illustrates the sign of the active power (P), which is
polarized with the voltage (V). In Figure 8.2-3.a exemplifies the metering function operating
for the supplying power so that the value P will have plus (+) sign (i.e., the I lags the V, which
shown in Quadrant IV). In Figure 8.2-3.b, the value P will have minus (–) sign when the I lags
the V, provided Receive is set for the setting.
Receiving Sending Receiving Sending
II
(P<0)
I
(P>0)
II
(P>0)
I
(P<0)
V V (+)
III I
IV
(P>0)
III
(P>0)
I
IV
(P<0) (P<0)
a. Metering (P) for supplying power b. Metering (P) for absorbing power
[Power]=Send [Power]=Receive
Figure 8.2-3 Sign of the active power (P) ruled by setting [Power]
(ii) Metering in reactive power (Q)

Similar to the active power (P), the user should set the metering sign for the reactive power
(Q). The Q value will have the minus sign (–) based on the P value, when Lag is set for setting
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 546 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
[Current] (Figure 8.2-4.a). On the other hand, the Q value will have the plus sign (+) based on
the P value, when Lead set for the setting (Figure 8.2-4.b).
II
(Q>0)
I
(Q>0)
II
(Q<0)
I
(Q<0)
V
V
III
(Q<0)
I
IV
(Q<0)
III I
IV
(Q>0)
(Q>0)
a. Q (shown in quadrant IV) has a minus sign b. Q (shown in quadrant IV) has a plus sign because
because the Q is supplied by the outside source. the Q is absorbed by the outside source. The
The decision is made with the P (shown in the decision is based on the P (shown in the
quadrant IV, defined with [Power]=Send) having quadrant I, defined with [Power]=Receive)
“a plus sign” when the current lags the voltage. having “a minus sign” when the current leads
the voltage.
[Current]=Lag [Current]=Lead
Figure 8.2-4 Sign of the reactive power (Q) ruled by setting [Current]
8.2.5 Polarity setting for power factor values

The power factor (PF) value is shown by the rule to align the plus/minus sign (±) of the P value
(i.e., setting [PF_sign]=AP, default setting). However, the user can change the rule (i.e.,
setting [PF_sign]=AP+RP); as a result, the PF value will have the plus sign (+), provided both
the P value and the Q value have the same plus (+) sign or minus (–) sign.
(i) AP setting
When the sign of the PF value is required to match with the sign of the P value, set AP for the
setting [PF_sign].
II I II I
(PF <0) (PF>0) (PF <0) (PF <0)
[Power]=
V [Current
III
(PF <0)
I
IV III I
IV
(PF >0)
(PF>0) (PF >0) a. Q has a minus sign be
the outside. The deci
[Power]=Send [Power]=Send sending P having “a
[Current]=Lag [Current]=Lead lags the voltage.
[Current]=Lag
II I II I
(PF >0) (PF<0) (PF >0) (PF <0)
V
V
III
(PF >0)
I
IV III I
IV
(PF<0) (PF >0) (PF <0)
[Power]= Receive [Power]=Receive

Figure 8.2-5 PF sign matched with the sign of the P value (i.e., [PF sign]=AP)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 547 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) AP+PR setting

When the plus or minus sign of the PF value is required to be in conjunction with the states of
the leading current (i.e., supplying power) and the ragging current (i.e., absorbing power), the
user should set AP+RP for the set [PF_sign]. Note that the plus or minus signs of the P and Q
values cause the difference from the sign of the PF value; thus, the user should figure out the
correspondences between the settings [Power] and [Current] of Figure 8.2-6.
II I II I
(PF <0) (PF>0) (PF >0) (PF <0)
[Powe
V [Curr
III
(PF >0)
I
IV III I
IV
(PF >0)
(PF<0) (PF <0) a. Q has a minus sign
the outside. The d
[Power]=Send [Power]=Send sending P having
[Current]=Lag [Current]=Lead lags the voltage.
[Current]=Lag
II I II I
(PF >0) (PF<0) (PF <0) (PF >0)
V
V
III
(PF <0)
I
IV III I
IV
(PF>0) (PF >0) (PF <0)
[Power]= Receive [Power]=Receive

Figure 8.2-6 PF corresponding with P and Q (i.e., [PF sign]=AP+RP)
8.2.6 Setting for the report (Dead band feature)

The data collected in the metering function will be sent to the network upward, but the data
sent may give the network a heavy burden because the amount of the data sent could be
larger. Thus, the dead band (SD) feature is designed not to send unnecessary data will not be
sent (say, the dead band feature regulates not to send the same data repeatedly). In practice
the analog values in the metering are not always the same; hence, the regulation for not
sending is defined by the user can change it using a setting in each power quantity.
(i) Counting operation in SD feature

Figure 8.2-7 illustrates the operation for the SD feature about entering a current. At Time=0,
the current enters into the VCT and it is observed (Time=0). When the entering current is
being beyond the upper limit (Time=a), a repeated number is set for ‘1’. If the entering current
is out of the upper and lower limits (Time=b), the repeat number gets to have ‘2’. Note that the
repeated number is kept to have ‘2’ even if the entering current goes back within the upper
and lower limits (Time=c). The repeated number will be larger than the setting [Period SD]=3,
when the entering current is out of the upper and lower limits again (i.e., Time=d). Then, at
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 548 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Time=e, the value of the entering current will be sent to the network, because the repeated
number is incremented. After that, the repeated number will be set zero (0); the new positon
for the SD feature is set (i.e., from Time=e).
Entering current (I)
Following SD position with [ISD]

Upper limit
First SD position with [ISD] First SD standardization level
Lower limit
Repeat number
4
3
2
1
0 Time
a b c d e f g h i j k
Figure 8.2-7 Dead band operation with [PeriodSD]=3
(ii) Check cycle in SD feature

The check cycle is defined for 500 milliseconds in the SD feature. (i.e., interval ab in Figure
8.2-7 is equal to 500ms). If the entering current, in Figure 8.2-7, is required to send promptly
when the entering current is beyond the limits, set 0 for the setting [Period SD].
(iii) Setting bands for the operation

As illustrated in Figure 8.2-7, with regard to the entering current the user can define the
upper limit and lower limit using the setting [ISD] in %. The limit-size of the SD feature is
calculated based on the amount of the entering current. Table 8.2-4 shows respective settings
for the power quantities.
Table 8.2-4 SD settings for respective quantities
Units for
Quantities SD settings Setting ranges
settings
Voltage VSD % 0.00% to 50.00%
Current ISD % 0.00% to 50.00%
Active/Reactive/Apparent power P/Q/SSD – 0.00% to 50.00%
Power factor PFSD – 0.00 to 1.00
Frequencty FSD % 0.00% to 50.00%
Watt-hour/var-hour Wh/varhSD – 0.0 to 999.9
Phase PhaseSD Degree 0.0 deg. to 90 deg.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 549 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Units for
Quantities SD settings Setting ranges
settings
Difference of voltages† dVSD % 0.00% to 50.00%
†Note:The values are derived in the VCHK function. For more information, see Chapter
Relay application: Voltage check for autoreclose function.
Metering
10:48 1/8
ISD +
5.00 %
VSD +
0.60 %
dVSD +
0.60 %
Figure 8.2-8 Metering setting in the setting screen

Note: For the operation of the menu, see Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 550 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Statistics data (Power value group)

Table 8.3-1 shows the statistics information and its abbreviation in power value data.
Table 8.3-1 Power value data
Power values Watt-hour (plus/minus), var-hour (plus/minus) Wh, varh
8.3.1 Power information on the screen

Figure 8.3-1 shows the information about the watt-hour and var-hour (Wh and varh).
Power Value
10:48 1/4
Wh+ +
0.0MWh
Wh- +
0.0MWh
varh+ +
0.0Mvarh
Figure 8.3-1 Example of Power Value screen

Note: See Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Statistics sub-menu.
8.3.2 Setting for power values

The user can select the unit for each power value. For example, set the [Wh-Display
Unit]=kWh, when kWh is perferred to display.
Table 8.3-2 Selection of units for displaying
Statisics items Settings Selection of a unit fot the displaying
Watt-hour Wh-Display Unit Kilo-watt-hour (kWh) or Mega-watt-hour (MWh)
Var-hour Varh-Display Unit Kilo-var-hour (kvarh) or Mega-var-hour (Mvarh)
8.3.3 Regulation of power values

The number of digits for the power value can be reduced based on the units kWh, MWh and
kvarh+. For instance when the power is measured as "123,456kWh" then it is displayed as
"123MWh". If this value has to be changed then the user can key in a new compensated value.
For example, if "78MWh" should be displayed on the IED screen even though the measured
value is "123,456kWh" then the user can set the new value of "78MWh". Note that the
compensated value "78MWh" is "78,000kWh", and it is not "78,456kWh" or "123,456kWh"; the
compensated value will be affected when a change in the setting of VCT ratio. That is, the
user can set a value of "78MW" during the CT ratio of "2000:1", but the CT ratio would be
changed from "2000:1" to "4000:1"; hence, the value will be displayed as "156MW" on the IED
screen later. Therefore, when the CT ratio setting is required to be changed, remember to set
the value of "78MW" again to display the compensated value.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 551 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Statistics data (Demand value group)

The user can keep track of the variable power quantities using the demand feature; the
statistical information (such as maximum load, minimum load, and averaged load) are
collected in every defined period.
Table 8.4-1 Demand data

Current in phase-a (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Ia Max, Ia Min, Ia Ave
Current in phase-b (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Ib Max, Ib Min, Ib Ave
Current in phase-c (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Ic Max, Ic Min, Ic Ave
Residual current (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Ie Max, Ie Min, Ie Ave(1)
The other residual current on parallel lines (Max., Min., and Averaged) Iem Max, Iem Min, Iem Ave(1)
Voltage applied at phase-a (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Va Max, Va Min, Va Ave
Voltage applied at phase-b (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Vb Max, Vb Min, Vb Ave
Demand
value Vc Max, Vc Min, Vc Ave
Voltage applied at phase-c (Max., Min., and Averaged data)
Voltage applied between phases-a-to-b (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Vab Max, Vab Min, Vab Ave
Voltage applied between phases-b-to-b (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Vbc Max, Vbc Min, Vbc Ave
Voltage applied between phases-c-to-a (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Vca Max, Vca Min, Vca Ave
Zero-sequence voltage (Max., Min., and Averaged data) V0 Max, V0 Min, V0 Ave(2)
Reference voltages (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Vs Max, Vs Min, Vs Ave
The other reference voltages (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Vs2 Max, Vs2 Min, Vs2 Ave
1Note: The ‘Ie’ and ‘Iem’ are taken usually with corresponding VCT circuits .
2Note: Terms ‘I0 (i.e., 3I0)’ and ‘V0 (i.e., 3V0)’ are gotten in the software calculation using
three-phase quantities.
8.4.1 Demand information on the screen

The statistics feature can provides the information about maximum, minimum, and averaged
values. Figure 8.4-1 shows the example about the current information
Demand Value
10:48 1/42
Ia Max
0.00kA
Ia Min
0.00kA
Ia Ave
0.00kA
Figure 8.4-1 Example of Demand Value screen
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 552 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8.4.2 Max/Min/Averaged information about the demand feature

The demand feature is used to calculate the active power (P), the reactive power (P), and the
complex power (S) that are weighted with the plus (+) or minus (–) sign; the calculation will be
made by the following rules:
(i) Maximum and minimum value

For example, the demand feature gets to have both a minus (e.g., –100 watt) and a plus (e.g.,
+50 watt) values, ‘–100 watt’ is taken to the minimum data and ‘+50 watt’ is taken to the
maximum data. Note that given values do not come out as absolute values.
(ii) Averaged value

If the demand feature gets a data (e.g. +100 watt) in the first period and the other data (that
is, –100 watt) in the later period, the data is taken into the absolute value calculation (that is,
|–100W|+|100W|=200W; 200W/2=100W).
8.4.3 Demand cycle

The data is taken into the memory every second; the demand feature will calculate the
Max/Min/Ave values by the function by collecting the latest data in the memory. When setting
15 minutes for the [Demand_period], for example, the calculation is done using the data
during the latest 15 minutes. The user can have the cycle of the demand feature be selected
among 1min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, and 60min.
Metering
10:48 21/23
PhaseSD +
0.50 deg
PeriodSD +
0
Demand_period +
10 min
Figure 8.4-2 Demand cycle setting in the setting screen
8.4.4 Resetting data in demand features

The data will be cleared by the following cases:
(a) To energize the IED or to make the initialization about the IED functions
(b) To set a value for the setting [Demand_period]
(c) To operate “Reset All Values” on the IED menu
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 553 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Demand Value
10:48 1/2
Demand Value >
Reset All Values +
Figure 8.4-3 Reset menu for Demand values
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 554 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Statistics data (Peak-demand value group)

Similar to the demand feature (Demand value group), the user can have another
peak-demand feature that provides the Max/Min/Ave data that can be obtained from the
initialized time to the current time; note these data have been calculated from the first
energizing moment of the IED. That is, the data of the peak-demand feature gets to have the
latest values in every cycle; the data will be replaced if the past data is not needed. The user
can find that the nature of the collected values in the peak-demand values being identical to
the one of the Demand value group.
8.5.1 Max/Min/Averaged information about the peak-demand feature

(i) Maximum value
The peak-demand feature starts to collect the data in every cycle after the IED energized; the
peak-demand feature will have the largest data. If the present data is larger than the past one
with the peak-demand feature will replace the past one for the present one. The maximum
value will be cleared when the data is reset.
(ii) Minimum value

Similarly, for the minimum value, the IED displays the smallest data after energizing; the
data will be replaced when the present data is smaller than the past one.
(iii) Averaged value

The averaged value is computed using the data in the IED memory, the data which was
collected after energizing. Collecting data stays on for a long time; hence, when the counter
with regard to the data collection gets to be 2,147,483,647(=0x7FFFFFFF; almost 68 years),
resetting data is performed.
8.5.2 Resetting data of peak-demand features

The data will be cleared by the following operations:
(a) To energize the IED or to make the initialization about the IED functions
(b) To operate “Reset All Values” on the IED menu
Peak Demand
10:48 1/2
Peak Demand Value >
Reset All Values +
Figure 8.5-1 Reset menu for Peak demand values
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 555 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Statistics data (Counter group)

The user can check the counting numbers provided by the general counter function†. Table
8.6-1 shows the user to find the count numbers in the counter group.
Table 8.6-1 Counter data
Counter number Correspondences
Group Origin of info (default)
displayed to GCNTs†
ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND ARC function‡ GCNT01
ARC1_SPAR ARC function GCNT02
ARC1_TPAR ARC function GCNT03
ARC1_MPAR ARC function GCNT04
ARC2 CLOSE COMMAND ARC function GCNT05
ARC2_SPAR ARC function GCNT06

Counter
ARC2_TPAR ARC function GCNT07
ARC2_MPAR ARC function GCNT08
COUNT9 (Not assigned) GCNT09
…. …. ….
†Note:See Chapter General control function: Counter function for the general (GCNT) .
‡Note:See Chapter Relay application: Autoreclose for more information.
8.6.1 Count information on the screen

The user can see the count number in the counter group. Figure 8.6-1 illustrates the count
numbers provided by the ARC function.
Counter
10:48 1/32
ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND +
0
ARC1_SPAR +
0
ARC1_TPAR +
0
Figure 8.6-1 Example of Counter screen

Note: See Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Statistics sub-menu.
8.6.2 Report setting for GCNT (Dead band feature)

The data collected with the GCNT functions will be sent to the network; thus, the user should
set a regulation value using the SD feature in the GCNT function. See section Setting for the
report (Dead band) in the GCNT function.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 556 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Statistics data (Accumulated time)

Over all running time for which the IED has operated is provided in “Accumulated Time”. The
user can see the overall time on the Accumulated Time screen. The time will be cleared when
the IED is switched off.
Accumulated Time
10:48 1/1
ACT_TIME +
***d **h **m
Figure 8.7-1 Example of Accumulated Time screen

Note: The user can also clear the Accumulated time in the screen menu. For key
operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Statistics sub-menu.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 557 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Monitoring for miscellaneous functions

Operating status of relay elements, binary IO modules, communication modules, GOOSE, and
diagnostics are displayed in the monitoring function.
(i) Relay element

(For more information about the menu operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring
sub-menu: Relay Elements. The relay functions and their characteristics are discussed in
Chapter Relay application).
(ii) Communication
sub-menu: Communication. The communication features about the LAN port is discussed in
Chapter Communication protocol: LAN communication. The hardware information is
discussed in Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module).
(iii) Binary IO
sub-menu: Binary I/O. The structure and its operation is discussed in Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module).
(iv) Goose monitoring

sub-menu: Goose monitoring. The information about the GOOSE is discussed in Chapter
Communication protocol: IEC 61850 communication).
(v) Diagnostics
sub-menu: Diagnostics sub-menu. The information about the diagnostics is discussed in
Chapter Automatic supervision).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 558 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting
Metering settings in MES (Function ID: 710001)
Default
setting value
Display Value Primary/Secondary – Display selection of primary or secondary Primary
Power Send/Receive – Power flow definition (Supply or absorb) Send
Current Lead/Lag – The angle compared with the voltage Lead
I-Valid Level 0.10 to 5.00 % Cutting off small entering current 4.00
V-Valid Level 0.10 to 5.00 % Cutting off small applied voltage 0.30
I-Display Unit A/kA – Current shown in Ampere or Kilo-Ampere kA
V-Display Unit V/kV – Voltage shown in Volt or Kilo-Volt kV
P-Display Unit kW/MW – Active power shown in Kilo- or Mega-watt MW
Q-Display Unit kvar/Mvar – Reactive power shown in Kilo- or Mega-var Mvar
S-Display Unit kVA/MVA – Apparent power shown in Kilo- or Mega-VA MVA
Statistics settings in MES (Function ID: 710001)

Default
setting value
Wh-Display Unit kWh/MWh – Watt-hour shown in Kilo- or Mega-Wh MWh
varh-Display Unit kvarh/Mvarh – Var-hour shown in Kilo- or Mega-varh Mvarh
Demand settings in MES (Function ID: 712001)

Default
setting value
1min / 5min / 10min
Demand_period / 15min / 30min / – Period of demand calculation 10min
60min
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 559 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Signal (Data ID)

MES_MANAGEMENT (Function ID: 711001)
3100901060 CT-ERR CT Monitoring Result
3100911060 I0-ERR I0 Monitoring Result
3100921060 V0-ERR V0 Monitoring Result
 Signals generated for the 61850

4201601051 Ia-Angle Ia measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201601053 Ib-Angle Ib measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201601055 Ic-Angle Ic measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201611051 Iab-Angle Iab measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201611053 Ibc-Angle Ibc measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201611055 Ica-Angle Ica measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201691051 Ia2-Angle Ia2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201691053 Ib2-Angle Ib2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201691055 Ic2-Angle Ic2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
42016a1051 Iab2-Angle Iab2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
42016a1053 Ibc2-Angle Ibc2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
42016a1055 Ica2-Angle Ica2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201621051 I1-Angle I1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
42016b1051 I12-Angle I12 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201631057 Iem-Angle Iem measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202641051 Va-Angle Va measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202641053 Vb-Angle Vb measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202641055 Vc-Angle Vc measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202651051 Vab-Angle Vab measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202651053 Vbc-Angle Vbc measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202651055 Vca-Angle Vca measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202661051 V1-Angle V1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202671057 Vs-Angle Vs measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202681057 Vs2-Angle Vs2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201601076 Ia Ia measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201601078 Ib Ib measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420160107A Ic Ic measurement primary(for IEC61850)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 560 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

4201611076 Iab Iab measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201611078 Ibc Ibc measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420161107A Ica Ica measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201691076 Ia2 Ia2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201691078 Ib2 Ib2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420169107A Ic2 Ic2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42016a1076 Iab2 Iab2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42016a1078 Ibc2 Ibc2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42016a107A Ica2 Ica2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201621076 I1 I1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201621078 I2 I2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420162107C I0 I0 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42016b1076 I12 I12 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42016b1078 I22 I22 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42016b107C I02 I02 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420163107C Iem Iem measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4202641076 Va Va measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4202641078 Vb Vb measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420264107A Vc Vc measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4202651076 Vab Vab measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4202651078 Vbc Vbc measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420265107A Vca Vca measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4202661076 V1 V1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420266107C V0 V0 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420267107C Vs Vs measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420268107C Vs2 Vs2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42066c105C f Frequency measurement(for IEC61850)
42016d1051 Ia-R1-Angle Ia Remote CH1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
42016d1053 Ib-R1-Angle Ib Remote CH1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
42016d1055 Ic-R1-Angle Ic Remote CH1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
42016e1057 Ie-R1-Angle Ie Remote CH1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
42016f1051 Ia2-R1-Angle Ia2 Remote CH1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
42016f1053 Ib2-R1-Angle Ib2 Remote CH1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
42016f1055 Ic2-R1-Angle Ic2 Remote CH1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201701057 Ie2-R1-Angle Ie2 Remote CH1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201711051 Ia-R2-Angle Ia Remote CH2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201711053 Ib-R2-Angle Ib Remote CH2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201711055 Ic-R2-Angle Ic Remote CH2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201721057 Ie-R2-Angle Ie Remote CH2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201731051 Ia2-R2-Angle Ia2 Remote CH2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201731053 Ib2-R2-Angle Ib2 Remote CH2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201731055 Ic2-R2-Angle Ic2 Remote CH2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201741057 Ie2-R2-Angle Ie2 Remote CH2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 561 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

42016d1076 Ia-R1 Ia Remote CH1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42016d1078 Ib-R1 Ib Remote CH1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42016d107A Ic-R1 Ic Remote CH1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42016e107C Ie-R1 Ie Remote CH1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42016f1076 Ia2-R1 Ia2 Remote CH1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42016f1078 Ib2-R1 Ib2 Remote CH1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42016f107A Ic2-R1 Ic2 Remote CH1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420170107C Ie2-R1 Ie2 Remote CH1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201711076 Ia-R2 Ia Remote CH2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201711078 Ib-R2 Ib Remote CH2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420171107A Ic-R2 Ic Remote CH2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420172107C Ie-R2 Ie Remote CH2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201731076 Ia2-R2 Ia2 Remote CH2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201731078 Ib2-R2 Ib2 Remote CH2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420173107A Ic2-R2 Ic2 Remote CH2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420174107C Ie2-R2 Ie2 Remote CH2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4209751057 Ise-Angle Ise measurement angle(for IEC61850)
420975107C Ise Ise measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4202761051 Va2-Angle Va2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202761053 Vb2-Angle Vb2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202761055 Vc2-Angle Vc2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202771051 Vab2-Angle Vab2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202771053 Vbc2-Angle Vbc2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202771055 Vca2-Angle Vca2 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4202761076 Va2 Va2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4202761078 Vb2 Vb2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420276107A Vc2 Vc2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4202771076 Vab2 Vab2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4202771078 Vbc2 Vbc2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420277107A Vca2 Vca2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42017a1076 DIFL-Ida Ida measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42017a1078 DIFL-Idb Idb measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42017a107A DIFL-Idc Idc measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42017b1076 DIFL-Ira Ira measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42017b1078 DIFL-Irb Irb measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42017b107A DIFL-Irc Irc measurement primary(for IEC61850)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 562 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

42017c107C DIFGL-Id0 Id0 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42017d107C DIFGL-Ir0 Ir0 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42037e1095 Pa Pa measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42037e1096 Pb Pb measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42037e1097 Pc Pc measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42037e1098 P P measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42047f1095 Qa Qa measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42047f1096 Qb Qb measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42047f1097 Qc Qc measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42047f1098 Q Q measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4205801095 Sa Sa measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4205801096 Sb Sb measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4205801097 Sc Sc measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4205801098 S S measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4203811095 Pa2 Pa2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4203811096 Pb2 Pb2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4203811097 Pc2 Pc2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4203811098 P2 P2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4204821095 Qa2 Qa2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4204821096 Qb2 Qb2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4204821097 Qc2 Qc2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4204821098 Q2 Q2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4205831095 Sa2 Sa2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4205831096 Sb2 Sb2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4205831097 Sc2 Sc2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4205831098 S2 S2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420684105C f2 Frequency measurement(for IEC61850)
4200851091 PFa PFa measurement(for IEC61850)
4200851092 PFb PFb measurement(for IEC61850)
4200851093 PFc PFc measurement(for IEC61850)
4200851094 PF PF measurement(for IEC61850)
4200861091 PFa2 PFa measurement(for IEC61850)
4200861092 PFb2 PFb measurement(for IEC61850)
4200861093 PFc2 PFc measurement(for IEC61850)
4200861094 PF2 PF measurement(for IEC61850)
4202871095 VR1 Running voltage of SyncRy1 (for IEC61850)
4202871096 VI1 Incoming voltage of SyncRy1 (for IEC61850)
4202871097 dV-SyncRy1 Differential voltage of SyncRy1's VR and VI (for IEC61850)
4200881099 dAng.-SyncRy1 Differential angle of SyncRy1's VR and VI (for IEC61850)
420689109E df-SyncRy1 Differential frequency of SyncRy1's VR and VI (for IEC61850)
42068a109E VR1-f Frequency of SyncRy1's VR (for IEC61850)
42068b109E VI1-f Frequency of SyncRy1's VI (for IEC61850)
42028a1095 VR2 Running voltage of SyncRy2 (for IEC61850)
42028a1096 VI2 Incoming voltage of SyncRy2 (for IEC61850)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 563 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

42028a1097 dV-SyncRy2 Differential voltage of SyncRy2's VR and VI (for IEC61850)
42008b1099 dAng.-SyncRy2 Differential angle of SyncRy2's VR and VI (for IEC61850)
42068c109E df-SyncRy2 Differential frequency of SyncRy2's VR and VI (for IEC61850)
42068d109E VR2-f Frequency of SyncRy2's VR (for IEC61850)
42068e109E VI2-f Frequency of SyncRy2's VI (for IEC61850)
4317601098 Wh+ Wh+ measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4317611098 Wh- Wh- measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4318621098 varh+ varh+ measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4318631098 varh- varh- measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4317641098 Wh2+ Wh2+ measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4317651098 Wh2- Wh2- measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4318661098 varh2+ varh2+ measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4318671098 varh2- varh2- measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4212681095 VB Busbar Voltage (for IEC61850)
4212681096 VL Line Voltage (for IEC61850)
4212681097 dV-SYN1 Differential voltage of SYN1's VB and VL (for IEC61850)
4210691099 dAng.-SYN1 Differential angle of SYN1's VB and VL (for IEC61850)
42166a109E df-SYN1 Differential frequency of SYN1's VB and VL (for IEC61850)
42126b1095 VL2 Line2 voltage (for IEC61850)
42126b1097 dV-SYN2 Differential voltage of SYN2's VL2 and VL (for IEC61850)
42106c1099 dAng.-SYN2 Differential angle of SYN2's VL2 and VL (for IEC61850)
42166d109E df-SYN2 Differential frequency of SYN2's VL2 and VL (for IEC61850)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 564 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9 Automatic supervision
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 565 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Outline of automatic supervision

In power system, the protection function is not required to operate during normal conditions.
That is, the protection function should stay silent for the unfaulty conditions, but it has to
start respond immediately upon the occurrence of the fault. Therefore, as for the operation of
the protection system, the detection of an unhealthy condition, such as malfunction or errors
in the hardware or in the software, is requisite within the IED. The automatic supervision
function is designed to detect the unhealthy condition within the IED; the following concepts
are taken into account:
 The operating performance of the protection system should not be distorted.
 Supervision should be carried out by itself without any failure whenever possible.
 The protection system should identify the fault instantly upon its occurrence.
Tips: The alarms can be blocked to set Of f for the switch [A.M.F]. The switch can be used
to remove alarms during testing. See Chapter User interface: Test sub-menu for
more information.
(i) Error levels

In the applications and the hardware, the number of items are supervised for detecting the
operation failure; hence, the results of the supervision functions are grouped and they are
classified into five error-levels to identify the error degree directly: warning (level 5=the minor
error) to the serious error (level 1=the critical error). Incidentally, zero (level 0) can be
identified as no error. Table 9.1-1 shows the errors grouped by the error degree. The grouping
are provided, for setting the degree of error, the user can select an user-defined degree for
each error occurs randomly. If a number of failures occur on several levels at same time, the
automatic supervision function selects the critical error among them to represent the error
inside the IED.
Table 9.1-1 Meanings and error degree in the supervision function
Levels Degree of error Example failures and errors
0 No error No error exists
1‡ Serious Fatal failures such as the memory errors within the IED
2†‡ Serious (Comm.) Failures on tele-communication
3†‡ Minor Failure on LAN (Ethernet) communication
4 Alarm Minor errors such as invalid errors by the user using settings
5 Warning Detection of warnings classified by the user using settings
†Note:Level 2 and level 3 are shown, but the difference between the level 2 and the level 3
not given; thus, we can take the both having the same degree.
‡Note: The IED changes the value of Quality signal in the IEC 61850 communication
when either ‘level1’, ‘level2’ or ‘level3’ is set in the IED. For more information, see
Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850 communication: Quality signal.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 566 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Error LED and LCD error message

The IED has LEDs and LCD screen† so that the automatic supervision function issues a
result for the LEDs and the LCD screen. When the IED is linked with the SAS, it is possible to
transfer the result for the LED and LCD screen using the communication system. Table 9.1-2
shows that which indicators are used for result generation in the function.
Table 9.1-2 Displays on LEDs, LCD, and SAS
Levels “In service” LED “Error” LED Error message on LCD
0: No error On Off (Not displayed)
1: Serious Off On Displayed
2: Serious (Comm.) On On Displayed
3: Minor On On Displayed
4: Alarm On Off Displayed
5: Warning On Off Displayed
†Note:For more information, see Chapter User interface: Outline and Diagnostics.
‡Note:It depends on the degree of the communication failure.
The user can see a current error information in Monitoring sub-menu† on the LCD
screen† (see Figure 9.1-1); Table 9.1-3 shows the six detail information, which the user can
examine carefully using the hexadecimal number. When two or more errors occur at the same
time, an error code is given by the summation of the error codes. That is, when X and Y errors
(e.g., X-error-code ‘00000002’ and Y-error-code ‘00000004’) occur, the sum value ‘00000006’ is
screened.
CP1M(ROM/RAM) error 1/1 Current error indicated by Supervision
10:48 Current local time (Not Error occurring time)
[Serious error] Error degree (level) displayed
Detailed information in Hexadecimal dump
[00000011] [01234567] 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
[01234567]
[01234567]
[01234567]
[00000000] [ “Top left” ][ “Top right” ]
[ “Middle left” ][ “Middle right” ]
[ “Bottom left” ][ “Bottom right” ]
Figure 9.1-1 Example error codes and detailed information on Diagnostics sub-menu
†See Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Diagnostics. Note that the
information will not be updated automatically. Refresh the information if required.
Table 9.1-3 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in the ROM and the RAM error (example)
Display Meaning of the detailed information
area Left column Right column
00000001: ROM read error
Top row ROM address
00000002: ROM RAM mismatch
Middle row RAM address ROM value
Bottom row RAM value (No information displayed)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 567 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) Error outputs with contacts and binary output circuits

Automatic supervision function drives a contact of the power supply module (PWS)† when an
error occurs without warning; additionally, binary output circuits (BOs‡) will be locked out to
drive when serious error (Level 1=Critical error) is detected.
Table 9.1-4 FAIL contact, BO, LED outputs depending on levels
PWS† contact outputs
Error FAIL1 terminal FAIL2 terminal Error
BO‡ locked out
Levels Screw No. 1 Screw No. 3 Screw No. 7 Screw No. 9 LED
(N/C) (N/O) (N/C) (N/O)
0: No error Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
1:Serious Closed Open Closed Open Locked out On
2:Serious(Comm.) Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out On
3:Minor Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out On
4:Alarm Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
5:Warning Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
Error output by PWS contact†

If serious error (Level1) is detected by Automatic supervision function,
normally-closed-contact (N/C) on FAIL1 and FAIL2 terminals is closed. On the other hand, the
N/O contact is open on the serious error, as shown in Table 9.1-4.
Locking out of BO circuit operation‡

BO is locked out to operate, when serious error (Level1) occurs. Serious error stops trip signal
generations to the BO circuit. When serious error is removed, the operation will be recovered.
†Note:See Chapter Technical description: Power supply module. FAIL1 (FAIL2) contact is
in Form-C; terminal-screw No. 2 & 4 (8 &10) are provided with the common.
‡Note:BO is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Binary output circuit.
(iv) Affection of application operation by error levels

The error levels influence the operation of relay and control and monitoring application.
Table 9.1-5 Operation states in the IED applications affected by the error levels
Levels Relay applications Control and monitoring applications Notes
0: No error – –
1: Serious Stopped Stopped
2: Serious (Comm.) Not affected† Not affected
3: Minor Not affected Stopped
4: Alarm Not affected Not affected
5: Warning Not affected Not affected
†Note: Serious (Comm.) can be related to communication of tele-protection applications.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 568 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Generic supervision tasks

Displaying errors regarding to common problems are summarized in Table 9.2-1; the error is
cleared when recovered
Table 9.2-1 Supervision items and error levels for generic

Detailed ERROR
Sec. No. Supervision items(Screen message) Info. Lvl LED
9.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM (ROM/RAM error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.2 Check-sum error (SUM error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.3 Supervision of RAM (RAM error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.4 Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.5 Supervision of MRAM (MRAM) Displayed 1 On
9.2.6 Supervision of program codes (CPU error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.7 Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.8 Supervision of DPRAM on sub-CPU (DPRAM error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.9 Supervision of DPRAM on external-CPU (DPRAM error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.10 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.11 Detection of sub-CPU not operated (Stopped error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.12 Detection of external-CPU not operated (Stopped error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.13 Supervision of setting data (Setting error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.14 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error) Displayed 3 On
9.2.15 Supervision of analog input data on VCTs (AI ACC error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.16 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error) N/A 3 On
9.2.17 Supervision of current in zero-sequence (I0 error) N/A 3 On
9.2.18 Supervision of voltage in negative-sequence (Z21/Z22 error) N/A 3 On
9.2.19 Supervision of voltage in zero-sequence (VZ error) N/A 3 On
9.2.20 Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.28 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error) Displayed 1 On
9.2.29 Supervision of power supply module (Power error) N/A 3 On
9.2.30 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error) Displayed 3 On
9.2.31 Current transformer failure (CT fail) N/A 3 On
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 569 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Detailed ERROR
Sec. No. Supervision items(Screen message) Info. Lvl LED
9.2.32 Voltage transformer failure (VT fail) N/A 3 On
9.2.33 Supervision of circuit breaker contacts (CB1/CB2 fail) N/A 3 On
9.2.34 Supervision of disconnector contacts (DS fail) N/A 3 On
9.2.35 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error) Displayed 3 On
9.2.36 Supervision of data in 61850 settings (Commslv error) Displayed 3 On
9.2.37 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error) Displayed 3 On
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
11 Note
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 570 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM (ROM/RAM error)

The ROM and RAM on the CPU module are verified every two minutes; when the error is
found, an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision, checking error on
the RAM and the ROM is carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its
operation automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU modules1; hence,
the error detection is carried out in each CPU module.
1Note: The kinds of the CPU modules are discussed in Chapter Technical description:
Signal processing and communication module: Processing module.
(ii) Error message

When the function operates and detects error, an error message can be shown at the LED and
the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-3 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ROMRAM
Message and level Meaning of the information
Mismatch between the RAM and ROM detected on the
following module instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP*_ (ROM/RAM) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Error level Serious error (Level 1)
Table 9.2-4 Detailed information in CHK_ROMRAM

Top 00000001: ROM read error
ROM address
row 00000002: ROM RAM mismatch
Middle
RAM address ROM value
row
Bottom
RAM value (No information displayed)
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 571 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.2 Check-sum error (SUM error)

The check sum in the memory on the CPU module is verified every four minutes; when the
error is found the error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision, the check-sum error
on the memory is carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its
operation automatically. The supervision function runs in the respective CPU modules1; hence,
the error detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error message is made
promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-5 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SUM
Sum error in the memory detected on the following CPU
module:
CP*_ (SUM) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 9.2-6 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_SUM

Top Bit 0: ROM read error
Sum value calculated
row Bit 1: ROM RAM mismatch
Middle Address information that read error occurs

Sum value pre-programmed
row in the ROM
Bottom
(No information displayed) (No information displayed)
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 572 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.3 Supervision of RAM (RAM error)

The read-write operation on RAM circuit of the CPU module is verified at any time; when
the error is found an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on
the RAM is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU modules1; hence, the error
detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error message is made promptly
when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-7 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RAM
Error detection in the RAM located on the following module
instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CPxx(RAM) error 1M: CPU1 module (main CPU)
1S: CPM1 module (sub CPU)
2M: CPX1 module (another main CPU)
Table 9.2-8 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_RAM

Top
Read value Write value
row
Middle
Error address (No information displayed)
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 573 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.4 Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error)

The error detection on the error-correcting code memory (ECC memory) of the CPU module is
verified at any time; when the error is found an error message is displayed by the supervision
function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking error on
the ECC is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU modules 1; hence, the error
detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error message is made promptly
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-9 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ECC
Error in the ECC is detected on the following module instructed
with “CP*_” as follows:
CP*_ (ECC) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 9.2-10 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ECC

Top
00000080: err_cnt LR register
row
Middle
SRR0 register ADDR
row
Bottom
DATA (H) DATA (L)
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 574 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.5 Supervision of MRAM (MRAM)

The error detection on the Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory (MRAM memory) of the
CPU module is verified every 1 second; when the error is found, an error message is displayed
by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on
the ECC is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
automatically. The function supervise for the MRAM on the main CPU module1. Clearing the
error message is made in 1 second when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-11 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_MRAM
Error detection in the MRAM located on the following CPU
CP*_(MRAM) error module:
1M: CPU1 module (main CPU)
Table 9.2-12 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_MRAM

Top 00000000: Error detected with 0xaaaaaaaa
Address at error occurs
row 00000001: Error detected with 0x555555555
Middle
(No information is displayed) (No information is displayed)
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 575 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.6 Supervision of program codes (CPU error)

The program code in the ROM and RAM on the CPU module is verified every times; when
the error is found an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision, detecting Program
errors on the RAM and the ROM are carried out any time. If the error is detected, the IED
restarts its operation automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU
modules1; hence, the error detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error
message is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-13 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PROGRAM
Error detection in the RAM and ROM located on the following
CPU module:
CPxx(CPU) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 9.2-14 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_PROGRAM

00000001: Address
Top 00000002: Sub
(No information displayed)
row 00000004: Mul
00000008: Div
Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 576 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.7 Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error)

The occurrences of non-maskable-interruptions (NMIs) on the CPU module are examined
every time; when the interruption is triggered, an interruption message is detected and
displayed.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; detecting the
interruption carried out at any time. If the interruption is detected, the IED restarts its
operation automatically. The supervision function runs in the respective CPU modules1; hence,
the detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error message is made promptly
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-15 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_NMI
Interruptions occurs on the following module instructed with
“CP*_” as follows:
CPxx(NMI) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 9.2-16 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in NMI

Top
NMI code LR register
row
Middle
SRR0 resister SPP1 resister
row
Bottom
Stack pointer FRSCR register
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 577 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.8 Supervision of DPRAM on sub-CPU (DPRAM error)

The state of the dual-ported RAM (DPRAM) is checked every 20 seconds when the erroneous
state is found.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; the detection is
carried out cyclically. If the error is detected, the IED does not restart its operation
automatically. The function runs for the DPRAM on the main CPU of CPU1 module1. Clearing
the error message is made in a second when the erroneous state is removed.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-17 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_DPRAM
Detection is performed o detected on the following module
CP*_ (DPRAM) error instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU1 module
Table 9.2-18 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_DPRAM

Top Value of the counter to check the renewal
Checked data
row not being occurred (=64H)
Middle Inverted data retrieved from the opposite

row circuit module
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 578 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.9 Supervision of DPRAM on external-CPU (DPRAM error)

The state of the dual-ported RAM (DPRAM) is checked every 20 seconds when the erroneous
state is found.
(i) Error level

carried out cyclically. If the error is detected, the IED does not restart its operation
automatically. The function runs for the DPRAM on the CPU of CPX1 module 1. Clearing the
error message is made in a second when the erroneous state is removed.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-19 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_EXDPRAM
Detection is performed o detected on the following module
CP*_ (DPRAM) error instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 9.2-20 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_EXDPRAM

Top Value of the counter to check the renewal
Checked data
row not being occurred (=64H)
Middle Inverted data retrieved from the opposite

row circuit module
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 579 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.10 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error)

The sampling error is verified at any time; when the error is found an error message is
displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; sampling errors are
checked every seconds. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation automatically.
The supervision function runs in respective CPU modules1; hence, the error detection is
carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error message is made in a second when the
error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-21 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SMP
Sampling error detected on the following module instructed
with “CP*_” as follows:
CP*_ (SMP) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 9.2-22 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_SMP

Top
1 Diff time
row
Middle
Current timing Pervious timing
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 580 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.11 Detection of sub-CPU not operated (Stopped error)

The operation on the sub CPU is monitored every five minutes; the error message is displayed
when the sub CUP is stopped.
(i) Error level

carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED does not restart its operation
automatically. The supervision function runs for respective sub CPU modules1; hence, the
error detection is carried out in each sub CPU module. Clearing the error message is made in
a second when the sub CPU runs again.
(ii) Error message

When the function operates and detects errors, an error message can be shown at the LED
and the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-23 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SUBCPU
Stopping detected on the following module instructed with
CP*_ stopped error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPM1 module
Table 9.2-24 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_SUBCPU

Top Value of the counter to check the renewal not
00000001: Failure existing
row being occurred
Middle
Value of the counter when stopped (No information displayed)
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 581 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.12 Detection of external-CPU not operated (Stopped error)

The operation on the external CPU is monitored every five minutes; the error message is
displayed when the external CPU is stopped.
(i) Error level

carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED does not restart its operation
automatically. The supervision function runs for respective CPU modules1; hence, the error
detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error message is made in a second
when the CPU runs again.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-25 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SUBCPU
Stopping detected on the following module instructed with
CP*_ stopped error “CP*_” as follows:
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 9.2-26 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_SUBCPU

Top Value of the counter to check the renewal not
00000001: Failure existing
row being occurred
Middle
Value of the counter when stopped (No information displayed)
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 582 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.13 Supervision of setting data (Setting error)

The values of the Settings are checked every second; the error message is displayed when the
erroneous value is found.
(i) Error level

carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED does not try to restart its operation
automatically. The function runs for the saved settings in the main CPU module1. When the
erroneous setting is removed, the error messages will be cleared in a second.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-27 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SETTING
Setting error detected on the following module instructed with
CP*_ (Setting) error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU1 module
Table 9.2-28 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_SETTING

Top 00000001: Failure exists in the common settings Offset address corresponding to
00000002: Failure exists in the group setting
row 00000004: Error data found in the initial setting the failure in the common settings
Middle Offset address corresponding to the failure in
(No information is displayed)
row the group setting
00000001: Exec_tbl.cnf
Bottom 00000002: Lcd_conf.cnf
row 00000004: g2minic.dat
00000008: guidance.dat
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 583 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.14 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error)

The state of the real time clock (RTC) is checked every five minutes; the error message is
displayed when the clock stops.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error), but the user can
program the level using setting [CHK_RTC:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_RTC:Sw].
The manufacturer sets five (5) minutes is set to detect the failure; it is reset within five
minutes when the clock starts to operate again.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-29 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RTC
Error detection is performed on the RTC on the following CPU
CP*_ (RTC) error module:
CP1M: CPU1 module (main CPU)
Error level Minor error (Level 3)
Table 9.2-30 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_RTC

Top “1” shows that the error exists in the
Time in the second when the RTC stopped
row RTC
Middle Time in the minute when the RTC

row stopped
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 584 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.15 Supervision of analog input data on VCTs (AI ACC error)

It is possible to detect the failure of the analog to digital conversion in the VCT module†.
†Note:For more information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical description:
Transformer module for AC analog input. The function can operate for respective
VCTs.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1). For example, the
user can program the level using setting [CHK_ACC1:LVl] when the VCT module at the
VCT#12 slot should be supervised. Set On for the settings [CHK_ACC1:Sw]. The
manufacturer sets one (1) second to detect the failure; it is reset within a second when the
failure is cleared.
1Note: When the error is detected, the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
2Note: The location of the VCT is discussed in Alpha-numerical references. See chapter
Technical description: IED case and module slot.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-31 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ACC
AI#x(ACC) error Detection of the conversion deterioration at VCx slot
Table 9.2-32 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ACC

00000001: P error
00000002: N error
Top 00000004: Neg error
Plus value / Minus value
row 00000010: P(H) error
00000020: N(H) error
00000040: Neg(H) error
Middle
Plus rev value / (none) Plus value / Minus value
row
Bottom
Plus rev value (No message displayed)
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 585 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.16 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error)

The CT supervision is to examine whether the three-phase currents are balanced and the
current in zero-sequence is minimum. It secures the operation of the CT circuits†. By
monitoring the currents flowing in the AC analog input circuits, it is also applicable to detect
the failure in the CT circuit. The failure is determined as Equation (9.2-1) is satisfied.
1. Max(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) − 4 × Min(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) ≥ k 0 (9.2-1)
where,
Max (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): The largest amplitude among Ia, Ib, and Ic
Min (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): The smallest amplitude among Ia, Ib, and Ic
k0: 20% of the rated current†
†Note:When the VCT has two or more three-phase-CT circuits, the CT supervision may
be required to operate for respective CT circuits. The rated current above the
equation is defined with VCT setting. For more information regarding the VCT, see
Chapter Technical description: Transformer module for AC analog input . Settings
are required to respective groups of the three-phase currents.
(i) Error level

program the level using settings [CHK_CT1:LVl] and the others; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_CT1:Sw] or whatever required. The time to detect can be programmed using
[CHK_CT1:Timer], etc., which can be set for 15 seconds as default. After the error is cleared,
resetting will be performed after the elapse of setting time.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-33 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CT
CTx error the extraordinary current flowing located at CTx
Table 9.2-34 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CT

Display area Meaning of the detailed information
N/A (No information is displayed)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 586 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.17 Supervision of current in zero-sequence (I0 error)

The zero-phase-sequence current entering to the input circuit is monitored; it is possible to
provide a high sensitivity to detect the failure using the residual circuit current. Equation
(9.2-2) is represented for the supervision:
|Ia + Ib + Ic − Ie |
1. ≥ 0.1 × Max(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) + k 0 (9.2-2)
3
where,
Ie Residual current
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) The largest amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0: 5% of the rated current†
†Note:The rated current above the equation is defined with the setting of the VCT. For
more information regarding the VCT, see Chapter Technical description:
Transformer module for AC analog input.
(i) Error level

program the level using setting [CHK_IZ:LVl].; then, set On for the settings [CHK_IZ:Sw]. The
time to detect can be set using [CHK_IZ:Timer], which is set for 15 seconds as default. If the
error is cleared, resetting will be performed after the elapse of setting time.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-35 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_IZ
I0 error Detection of flowing the zero-sequence current
Table 9.2-36 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_IZ

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 587 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.18 Supervision of voltage in negative-sequence (Z21/Z22 error)

The voltage in negative-sequence is calculated regularly using three-phase voltages within
the IED. If the equation below is satisfied over 10 seconds, the supervision function
determines that a failure occurs in the input circuit.
The voltage in negative sequence can be used to detect a failure within the voltage input
circuit in high sensitivity. It facilitates the detection of the incorrect phase sequence if cables
are irregularly.
|Va + 𝑎2 Vb + aVc |
1. ≤ 6.35 (V) (9.2-3)
3
where,
a = Phase shift operator of 120
(i) Error level

program the level using settings [CHK_V21:LVl] for the first circuit and [CHK_V22:LVl] for the
second circuit; then, set On for the setting [CHK_V21:Sw] or whatever required. The time to
detect can be set using [CHK_V21:Timer], etc., which are set for 15 seconds as default. After
the error is cleared, resetting will be performed after the elapse of setting time.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-37 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_V2
V21 error Detection of the negative-sequence voltage at the first circuit
V22 error Detection of the negative-sequence voltage at the second
Table 9.2-38 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_V2

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 588 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.19 Supervision of voltage in zero-sequence (VZ error)

Voltage in zero-sequence is automatically calculated using three-phase voltages measured in
the relay. If Equation (9.2-4) is made up, the supervision function can determine that a
voltage in zero-sequence is being applied erroneously.
|Va + Vb + Vc |
1. ≤ 6.35 (V) (9.2-4)
3
(i) Error level

program the level using setting [CHK_VZ:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_VZ:Sw]. The
time for the detection can be set using [CHK_VZ:Timer] , which is set for 15 seconds as default.
After the error is cleared, it is reset in the time that is the same as the setting time to the
detection.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-39 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_VZ
V0 error Detection of the zero-sequence voltage
Table 9.2-40 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_VZ

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 589 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.20 Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the first binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
†Note:The function can operate for respective BIO modules mounted in the IED; the user
should have settings in them, which are located at the IO slot identified with the
number.
(i) Error level

user can program the level using setting [CHK_BIO1:LVl] when the BIO module at the IO#12
slot should be supervised; then, set On for the setting [CHK_BIO1:Sw]. The manufacturer sets
one (1) second to detect the failure; it is reset with in a second when the failure is cleared.
2Note: The location of the VCT slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description: IED
case and module slot.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-41 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO

BIO#1 error Detection of the BIO failure at IO slot#1
Table 9.2-42 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_BIO

Top 00000001: CRC error
00000002: Connection error Count number by the CRC error
row 00000004: Read back error
Middle
Count number by the connection error Count number by the read-back error
row
Bottom
(No message displayed) (No message displayed)
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 590 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the second binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

one (1) second to detect the failure; it is reset within a second when the failure is cleared,.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.


Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 591 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the third binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

1Note: when the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.


Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 592 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the forth binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

Generally, the error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1), as default. For example, the
slot should be supervised; then, set On for the setting [CHK_BIO4:Sw]. The manufacture sets
one (1) second to detect the failure; it is reset in a second when the failure is cleared.
1Note: The entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly when the error is detected.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.


Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 593 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the fifth binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.


Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 594 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the sixth binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

1Note: when the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.


Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 595 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the seventh binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.


Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 596 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

A supervision function is provided, to detect the operation failure in the eighth binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.


Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 597 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.28 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error)

Supervising the failure in the human machine interface (HMI) is provided.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error1). However, the user can
program the level using setting [CHK_HMI:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_HMI:Sw].
The manufacturer sets ten (10) seconds to detect the failure; it is reset within 10 seconds
when the failure is cleared.
2Note: The functions of the HMI is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Human
machine interface.
(ii) Error message

When detecting an error, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 9.2-57 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_HMI
HMI error Detection of the HMI failure
Table 9.2-58 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_HMI

Top 00000001: Timeout of LCD communication Culminated value for the
00000002: Format error in LCD communication
row 00000004: Communication error in MIMIC LCD timeout
Middle Counter of the MIMIC
Counted value for the format error
row communication
Bottom (No information is
row displayed)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 598 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.29 Supervision of power supply module (Power error)

A power error is issued when the DC voltage generated in the power supply module (PWS†) is
less than a threshold. The user can select either 85V or 170V thresholds for issuing the power
error; it is determined by inserting a shut connector (JP4) on the PWS.
†Note:For more information about the PWS, see Chapter Technical description, Power
supply module. When the AC supply—however, the manufacture does not
guarantee the operation in the AC power—is connected with the PWS module, the
user shall set Off for the setting [CHK_POWER:Sw] (that is, the supervision
function concerning to the PWS module are stopped). Remember that the state of
the binary input circuit (BI) will be latched when the Power error occurs anytime.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error), as default, but the user
can program the level using setting [CHK_POWER:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_POWER:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one (1) second to detect the failure; it is reset with
in a second when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-59 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_POWER
Power error Detection of the failure in the PWS
Table 9.2-60 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_POWER

Top
00000001: PWS failure (No information displayed)
row
Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 599 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.30 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error)

The error of the PLC function† is detected when the data coded by the PLC editor has an
error.
(i) Error level

program the level using setting [CHK_PLC_DAT:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_PLC_DAT:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one-hundred-twenty (120) second to detect the
failure; it is reset within 60 seconds when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

When detecting an error, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 9.2-61 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PLC_DAT

PLC data error Detection of the failure in the PLC function
Table 9.2-62 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ PLC_DAT

00000001: No PLC data exists in the IED.
Top 00000002: Errors caused by the Input Data ID1
00000004: Errors caused by the Output Data ID2 (No information)
row 00000008: Time over in the computation3
00000010: PLC stopped by the operation of the PLC editor
Middle
(No information) (No information)
row
Bottom
(No information) (No information)
row
1The error code can be displayed when Data IDs are set erroneously in the DIN function.
2The error code can be displayed when Data IDs are set erroneously in the DOUT function.
3Tasks corresponding to Main_1, Main_2, and Main_3 may be too large. For more
information about the task and the main, see Chapter PLC editing in PLC editor
(6F2S1904) separately.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 600 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.31 Current transformer failure (CT fail)

Detecting the failure in the CT is achieved by the operation of the CT failure detection
function (CTF†). Thus, the failure signal in the CTF is transferred to the automatic
supervision function and it is grouped into the error level together with other error signals.
†Note:For more information about the CTF function, see Chapter Relay application: CT
failure detection.
(i) Error level

program the level using setting [CHK_CTF:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_CTF:Sw].
The manufacturer sets ten (10) seconds to detect the failure; it is reset instantly when the
failure is cleared
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-63 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CTF
CT fail Detection of the failure in the CT
Table 9.2-64 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CTF

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 601 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.32 Voltage transformer failure (VT fail)

Detecting the failure in the VT is achieved by the operation of the VT failure detection
function (VTF†). Thus, the failure signal in the VTF is transferred to the automatic
supervision function and it is grouped into the error level together with other error signals.
†Note:For more information about the VTF function, see Chapter Relay application: VT
failure detection.
(i) Error level

program the level using setting [CHK_VTF:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_VTF:Sw].
The manufacturer sets ten (10) seconds to detect the failure; it is reset instantly when the
failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-65 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_VTF
VT fail Detection of the failure in the VT
Table 9.2-66 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_VTF

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 602 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.33 Supervision of circuit breaker contacts (CB1/CB2 fail)

Detecting the operation failure in the CB is achieved by the operation of the protection
common function (PROT_COMM†). Thus, the failure signal in the PROT_COMM is
transferred to the automatic supervision function and it is grouped into the error level
together with other error signals.
†Note:For more information about the PROT_COMM function, see Chapter Relay
application: Protection common. When the IED operates for the 1.5CB
arrangements, the detection is carried out for two CBs.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level is set at level 3 (Minor error), as default, but the user can
program the level using settings [CHK_CB1:LVl] and the others; then, set On for the settings
[CHK_CB1:Sw] or whatever. The time for the detection can be set using [TCBSV], which is
provided in the PROT_COMM function. It is reset instantly if the error is cleared,.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-67 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CB
CBx fail Detection of the failure in the CBx
Table 9.2-68 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CB

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 603 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.34 Supervision of disconnector contacts (DS fail)

Detecting the operation failure in the disconnector (DS) is achieved by the operation of the
protection common function (PROT_COMM†). Thus, the failure signal in the PROT_COMM is
transferred to the automatic supervision function and it is grouped into the error level
together with other error signals.
†Note:For more information about the PROT_COMM function, see Chapter Relay
application: Protection common.
(i) Error level

program the level using settings [CHK_DS:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_DS:Sw].
The time for the detection can be set using [TDSSV], which is provided in the PROT_COMM
function. It is reset instantly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 9.2-69 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_DS
DS fail Detection of the failure in the DS
Table 9.2-70 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_DS

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 604 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.35 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error)

Communication error on the LAN† is detected by pinging for the addresses instructed.
†Note:For more information about the LAN, see Chapter Communication Protocol: LAN
communication. For the information about the LAN hardware, see Chapter
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module. When two
network modules operates, the message is provided for the both.
(i) Error level

program the level using settings [CHK_PING*:LVl]; then, set On for the settings
[CHK_PING*:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one-hundred (100) second to detect the failure; it is
reset in 20 seconds when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

When detecting errors, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 9.2-71 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PING

Detection of the pinging failure instructed with “LAN*” as
follows:
LAN* (ping) error
LAN1 (ping): Communication module (COM#1 at C11)
LAN2 (ping): Communication module (COM#2 at C12)
Table 9.2-72 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_PING

Top
Destination address for pinging (No information is displayed)
row
Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 605 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.36 Supervision of data in 61850 settings (Commslv error)

The error† is detected when an inconsistency is found in the 61850 settings. Note that the
information for the error may vary on the communication protocol.
(i) Error level

program the level using setting [CHK_CMLV:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_CMLV:Sw]. The error can be detected in two minutes after the IED is turned on.
(ii) Error message

Table 9.2-73 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CMLV
Data(cmmslv) error Detection of the failure in the settings
Table 9.2-74 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CMLV
Displaying the Data ID relating to
Top row Error reasons code
erroneous mapping
Displaying the Data ID relating to
Middle row Additional information
erroneous mapping
Bottom
Additional information Additional information
row
†Note:In the IEC 61850 communication protocol, LN, DO and DA names are displayed in
ASCII characteristic codes, which instruct wrong mappings performed. In the
below sample, for example, the user can get the error mapping of “GGIO2$STtVal”
when ASCII codes are solved in eight-characters and four-characters.
Top row and left colum: [4747494F] Top row and right column: [32245354]
Middle row: [7456616C]
47 47 49 4F 32 24 53 54 74 56 61 6C = “GGIO2$STtVal”
Table 9.2-75 Error reasons detected by the supervisor in CHK_CMLV
Reasons of errors
Function error found Erroneous index being used in the data for the protocol stack
designated
Failure occurred on going through the selection process with Time out
regard to the protocol
Failure occurred on the initialization in the protocol process Going through the process
Failure for opening file Found invalid arguments
Failure of access Found the data type not being supported
No space left in the buffer Failure of the acquisition of the authority right
No space left in the buffer provided for the SSP mapping Failure occurred on the setting process
Failure of memory allocation in the memory dynamically Failure of the event registration
Check sum errors No event occurred
Not unfound about the searching object Restarting
Failure of the defining of data type Communication error
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 606 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.37 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error)

Publishing error in the IEC 61850 communication† is detected when a GOOSE message is not
received.
†Note:For more information about GOOSE, see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC
61850 communication.
(i) Error level

program the level using setting [CHK_GOOSERCV:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_GOOSERCV:Sw]. Detecting the error is expressed in five-minutes when the IED
detects no reception of the GOOSE. When the GOOSE is started to receive, it is reset in
one-minute.
(ii) Error message

Table 9.2-76 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_GOOSERCV

LAN(GOOSE) error Detection of the failure in GOOSE
Table 9.2-77 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_GOOSERCV

Top Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
row subscribe information#1† subscribe information#2†
Middle Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
Bottom Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
†Note:“c000” is shown when no reception.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 607 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9.2.38 Setting
Setting of CHK_SAMPLING (Function ID: 220701)
Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes
CHK_SPSYNC1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

--- / Serious error / Serious error(Comm) /
CHK_ SPSYNC1:Lvl Error level Serious error(Comm)
Minor error / Alarm/ Warning
CHK_SPSYNC2:Sw Off / On Enable switch On
CHK_ SPSYNC2:Lvl Error level Serious error(Comm)
Setting of CHK_ACC (Function ID: 220E01 and 220E02)

CHK_ACC1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ ACC1:Lvl Error level Serious error
CHK_ACC2:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ ACC2:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_BIO (Function ID: 221101 to 221108)

CHK_BIO1:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#1 On

CHK_ BIO 1:Lvl Error level at BIO#1 Serious error
… … … …
CHK_ BIO8:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#8 On

CHK_ BIO8:Lvl Error level at BIO#1 Serious error
Setting of CHK_HMI (Function ID: 221301)

CHK_HMI:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ HMI:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_RTC (Function ID: 221701)

CHK_RTC:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_RTC:Lvl Error level Minor error
Minor error / Alarm / Warning
Setting of CHK_CT (Function ID: 221801)

CHK_CT:Sw Off / On Enable switch On
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 608 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting of CHK_CT (Function ID: 221801)


CHK_CT:Lvl Error level Serious error
CHK_CT:Timer 10 – 60 seconds Checking timer 15 seconds
Setting of CHK_IZ (Function ID: 221901)

CHK_IZ:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_IZ:Lvl Error level Minor error
CHK_IZ:Timer 10s – 60s Checking timer 15s
Setting of CHK_V2 (Function ID: 221A01)

CHK_V2:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_V2:Lvl Error level Minor error
CHK_V2:Timer 10s – 60s Checking timer 15s
Setting of CHK_VZ (Function ID: 221B01)

CHK_VZ:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_VZ:Lvl Error level Minor error
CHK_VZ:Timer 10s – 60s Checking timer 15s
Setting of CHK_VTF (Function ID: 221C01)

CHK_VTF:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ VTF:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01)

CHK_POWER:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_POWER:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_CTF (Function ID: 221E01)

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 609 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting of CHK_CTF (Function ID: 221E01)

CHK_CTF:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ CTF:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_CB (Function ID: 222001 and 222002)

CHK_CB1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ CB1 1:Lvl Error level Minor error
CHK_ CB2:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ CB2:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_DS (Function ID: 221101)

CHK_DS:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_DS:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_PLC_DAT (Function PLC_DAT: 223201)

CHK_PLC_DAT:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_PLC_DAT:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_CMLV (Function ID: 224001)

CHK_CMLV_DAT:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CMLV_DAT:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_GOOSERCV (Function ID: 223501)

CHK_GOOSERCV:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_GOOSERCV:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_PING (Function ID: 223601)

CHK_PING1:Sw Off / On Enable switch Off
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 610 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting of CHK_PING (Function ID: 223601)


CHK_PING1:Lvl Error level Minor error
PING_IP_ADRS 0 - 255 192
PING_IP_ADRS2 0 - 255 168

Ping target IP address
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 611 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

CHK_ROMRAM (Function ID: 220101)
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT Executing counter
3210001001 RESULT Check result
3210011001 RES_INST Check result (instant)

CHK_SUM (Function ID: 220201)
3210101001 CHECKSUM
3210111001 CHECKSUMC
32E0001001 CHK_POINT
3210201001 LOADERSUM
3210121001 PROG_SIZE

CHK_PROGRAM (Function ID: 220301)
30E0001001 CHKPOINT test point1
30E0011001 CHKPOINT2 test point2
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter
3210001001 RESULT check result
3210011001 RES_INST check result(instant)

CHK_NMI (Function ID: 220401)

CHK_RAM (Function ID: 220601)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT test point
3210021001 ECC_SECNT ECC single error cnt
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 612 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
CHK_ECC (Function ID: 220602)


CHK_ SAMPLING (Function ID: 220701)

CHK_SUBCPU (Function ID: 220901 and 220902)

CHK_ ACC (Function ID: 220E01 and 220E2)
3210021001 RES_FAST check result(fast)

CHK_MRAM (Function ID: 220F01)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT test point

CHK_ BIO (Function ID: 221101 to 221108)

CHK_ HMI (Function ID: 2201301)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 613 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

CHK_ HMI (Function ID: 2201301)

CHK_SETTING (Function ID: 221501)

CHK_DPRAM and CHK_EXDPRAM (Function ID: 221601 and 221602)

CHK_RTC (Function ID: 221701)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT Test point

CHK_CT (Function ID: 221801)

CHK_IZ (Function ID: 221901)

CHK_V2 (Function ID: 221A01)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 614 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

CHK_V2 (Function ID: 221A01)

CHK_VZ (Function ID: 221B01)

CHK_ VTF (Function ID: 221C01)

CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01)

CHK_CTF (Function ID: 221E01)

CHK_CB (Function ID: 222001 and 222002)

CHK_DS (Function ID: 221101)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 615 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

CHK_DS (Function ID: 221101)

CHK_PLC_DAT (Function ID: 223201)

CHK_PING (Function ID: 223601)
EXEC_CNT 32FFFF1001 execute counter
RESULT 3210001001 check result
RES_INST 3210011001 check result(instant)

CHK_ CMLV (Function ID: 224001)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 616 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
10 Communication protocol
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 617 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
LAN communication
When LAN module(s) are provided in the IED, the IED can operate with LAN
communications using the “Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”. Thus,
the user should set IP addresses and other information in accordance with the requirements
of TCP/IP. Two communication features are provided within TCP/IP: Hot-standby
communication and LAN monitoring. The two features are discussed later.
10.1.1 Setup
(i) How to set the local IP address
Table 10.1-1 shows a summary of the setting items provided in the communication module for
Network. The user can set an IP address, subnet mask and gateway addresses in the IED†.
Table 10.1-1 TCP/IP setting of LAN module

Setting items Range Setting meaning Default value
IPADDRESS1‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 IP address 192.l68.1.11
SUBNETMASK1‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
GATEWAY1‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Default gateway 192.168.1.1
When the wishing to change addresses, the user can use this setting menu. Figure
10.1-1 shows the setting menu provided to change the addresses‡.
LAN
10:48 1/6
IPADDRESS1 +
192. 168. 1. 11
SUBNETMASK1 +
255. 255. 255. 1
GATEWAY1 +
192. 168. 1. 1
Figure 10.1-1 Local LAN setting menu (on IED screen)
†Note:For more information with regard to the communication modules, see Chapter
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module.
‡Note:Although the IED can support either one or two LAN modules, the user should
assign a single IP address for the IED. (Just for the record, subscript ‘1’ of
“IPADDRESS1, SUBNETMASK1, and GATEWAY1” is not relevant in this case.)
‡Note:Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu describes how to set the address on the
IED screen.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 618 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) How to set Hot-standby communication

Redundant communication (i.e. “Hot-standby”) is designed to provide additional security if a
communications failure should occur on the LAN network. The “Hot-standby (HOTST)”
function is implemented using two LAN modules in the IED.
For the Hot-standby communication, the first communication module for Network is
used as the primary port, (i.e. LAN#1) while a second communication module for Network, (i.e.
LAN#2) is used as the secondary port; the IED will communicate using the LAN#1 for normal
operation. If a communications failure occurs at the LAN#1, the IED can automatically switch
communication from the LAN#1 to the LAN#2.
When the IED detects the occurrence of a communications failure, for which the LAN
module is unable to respond to the IED (i.e. a communications link is down), the IED starts a
timer. When the timer exceeds a setting [DownTime], the IED will switch ports. Thus, LAN#2
is then used for communications. (Note that LAN#1 can be determined to be the secondary
port on the occurrence of the failure. If LAN#2 is unable to continue to operate, then LAN#1
will be re-switched to run after a predetermined setting [UpTime]. Then, LAN#2 will be
discriminated as the secondary port.)
Setting for redundant mode

The Hot-standby function runs when the user sets Hot_Standby for scheme switch
[RedundantMode]. If the user does not wish to run the Hot-standby function, set Fixed for the
scheme switch [RedundantMode]. In this case, LAN#2 will not function even though dual
LAN ports are provided by the IED.
Selection of any one of ports as the primary port

The user can select any one of the ports to be the primary port although the LAN#1 is
normally used as the primary port. For example, provided that both the LAN#1 and the
LAN#2 are physically connected to the LAN, when the user wishes to use LAN#2 as the
primary port, the user should set Port2 for scheme switch [PrimaryPort]. If the user wishes
not to select the primary port, set None for scheme switch [PrimaryPort].
Setting of link-down timer

As mentioned earlier, the occurrence of a communication failure is determined when the timer
exceeds the setting [DownTime]. Thus, the user should set a time setting for this decision.
Setting of link-up timer

Another timer is provided in the Hot-standby function. Let us assume that the
communication on LAN#1 is changed to LAN#2. If the failure of LAN#1 is removed after
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 619 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
changing to LAN#2, the IED will try to re-start using LAN#1 as the primary port. In this case,
the user can define a time to revert to the original port and re-start communication on the
original port by applying a re-start time for setting [UpTime].
Table 10.1-2 Summary of Hot-standby communication setting

Setting Items Range Meaning Default
Fixed / Fixed: LAN#2 not used.
RedundantMode Fixed
Hot_Standby Hot_Standby: Hot-standby activated.
A timer starts upon the occurrence of the communication
DownTime 0–10000ms failure (link down). The standby port commences 5ms
communication in the DownTime.
Selection of priority port
None / Port1 / None: No selection for the priority port.
PrimaryPort None
Port2 Port1: LAN#1 selected as the priority port.
Port2: LAN#2 selected as the priority port.
A timer starts when the primary port is ready to
UpTime 0–10000ms 5ms
commence communication after switching port.
The user should be aware of the following three facts prior to the Hot-standby operation:
1 The IED uses the IP/MAC address of LAN#1 for the Hot-standby operation. The
IP/MAC address of LAN#2 is not used even if communication is carried out on
LAN#2.
2 The user should ensure that an optical fiber is correctly connected when a
100Base-FX module is used in the IED, otherwise a repeat communication failure
(link-down) will be experienced continuously. If the period for which the link-down
is shorter than the setting [DownTime], another LAN port cannot be switched as
the primary port. Thus, the user should determine the setting to be applied for
[DownTime] on the basis of the system requirement. It is allowable for the user to
apply a setting of zero for [DownTime] so that the switching of the ports will be
performed immediately; conversely, the user can set any value less than 3000ms in
order that the system would negate chattering failures if the optical fiber were not
connected securely. Switching between the primary and the secondary ports is not
performed when the user is keying a value for the setting [DownTime]. The user
should consider the setting approach for [UpTime] in the same manner as when
setting [DownTime].
3 The auto-negotiation function is executed when the 100Base-TX modules establish
communication over the communications network. The auto-negotiation function
selects a mode for communication; the auto-negotiation function adjusts the
communication speed. In the case of a link-down condition, the auto-negotiation
function will run again immediately. The link-down condition continues until
auto-negotiation has been completed (it may continue for 1 or 2 seconds). The user
can apply a setting for [DownTime] for any value of time less than that required by
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 620 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
the auto-negotiation function in response to the system requirement (i.e. the user
can set [DownTime] to be zero milliseconds). In this case, switching between the
primary and secondary ports is performed immediately i.e. prior to the
auto-negotiation function running. If switching between ports is not required
before the completion of the auto-negotiation function, the user can set the setting
[DownTime] longer than the time required by the auto-negotiation function. The
user can consider the setting for [UpTime] in the same manner as when setting
[DownTime].
Switching using PLC signals

Compulsory signals may be used to switch the ports. For example, if a compulsory signal is
issued via PLC connection point “CH1_CH_CHG”, communication is switched from the
LAN#1 to the LAN#2. On the other hand, changing from the LAN#2 to the LAN#1 can be
executed upon the reception of a signal via PLC signal “CH2_CH_CHG”.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 621 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) Network monitoring during Hot-standby operation

The Hot-standby (HOTST) function can send PING packets to remote devices thus enabling
the Hot-standby function to monitor the state of the network. The Hot-standby function
checks for a response signal from the remote device. If the Hot-standby function does not
receive a response signal, the Hot-standby function will switch to the other port. The
operation is performed when the user sets the scheme switches [RedundantMode]
Hot_Standby and [NetMonitor_EN] On.
Settings [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP12] are provided in the Hot-standby function for the
monitoring of remote devices on the network. When the user sets plural remote IP addresses
for the settings [Ping_IP*], and if the Hot-standby function does not receive a response from
any one of these remote devices, the Hot-standby function determines that a communication
failure has occurred. Table 10.1-3 shows the network monitoring settings for Hot-standby
operation.
Table 10.1-3 Settings network monitoring on Hot-standby
Setting items Range Meaning Default
NetMonitor_EN Off/On Enabling switch for monitoring Off
The user can set twelve IP addresses at 12 remote
Ping_IP1
terminals.
to 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0
Value “0.0.0.0”should be set respectively when the
Ping_IP12
remote IP addresses are not provided.
Waiting time to PING response; if any one of the
responses is not received, after the setting time
Ping_Wait 1–10 (sec) 1
has elapsed, the function will determine that there
has been no-response.
Interval of PING send; a PING packet is sent
Ping_Interval 1–120 (sec) 5
sequentially in accordance with this setting.
Number of PING packets for checking; the
“no-response “condition is determined when the
IED is unable to obtain a number of responses from
Chk_Count 1–10 the same IP address. The user can set the number 3
of responses required to determine the
“no-response” condition using the setting
[Chk_Count].
The user should note that the use of network monitoring could increase the burden on
the network. This is because a number of PING packets are repeatedly transmitted over the
network. Thus, the user should choose the setting values carefully in accordance with the
network capacity, the burden, and the required time. Examples 1 and 2 below show the
respective results using the network monitoring function with for different settings.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 622 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Example operation 1
There is a remote device on the network with the address Ping_IP1. The Hot-standby function
sends ping packets to the remote device every five seconds; then the Hot-standby function
waits for one second until the Hot-standby function receives a response signal from the
remote device. The Hot-standby function will determine that a communication failure has
occurred if two sequential response signals are not received from the remote device.
Subsequently, the Hot-Standby function will switch from one port to the other port (See
Figure 10.1-2). The following settings are required in this example 1:
・ The IP address of the remote device1 is set for setting [Ping_IP1]. (the setting of IP
addresses in the other remote devices is not required.)
・ One second is set for setting [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “2” is set for [Check_Count].
Local IED Remote device with Ping_IP1 address
Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
: 5sec : 1sec Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.
OK: Response received
Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.

1sec
5sec NG: due to delayed response

1sec
5sec
NG: due to no response
Switching LAN ports is
performed if a response signal is
not received for setting
[ Chk_Count]. 1sec
5sec
Figure 10.1-2 Time chart for Example 1
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 623 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Example operation 2
In Example 2 it is assumed that there are three remote devices on the network: Ping_IP1,
Ping_IP2, and Ping_IP3. The Hot-standby function sends a Ping packet to each of the
respective remote devices alternately every 10 seconds (i.e., the IED sends ping packets to the
same remote device every 30 seconds). Since “1” is set for [Check_Count], the Hot-standby
function will determine that a communication failure has occurred after 30 seconds if any one
of the remote devices is unable to send a response. Figure 10.1-3 shows the operation of the
Hot-standby function for Example 2; first switching of the ports is not executed as shown in
the figure. This is because a response has not been confirmed from one of the remote
addresses. In other words, switching of the ports is only applicable when all responses from all
remote devices are not confirmed.
・ The IP addresses of the remote devices are set for [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP3]. (Setting IP
addresses for other remote devices is not required.)
・ 10seconds is set for [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “1” is set for [Check_Count].
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 624 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Device with Ping_IP3

IED
Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
: 5sec : 10sec
OK: Response received
5sec
10sec OK: Response received
5sec
10sec
LAN switching is not performed because the IED has not confirmed a response from the IP3.
5sec NG: due to no response

10sec

5sec
10sec NG: due to no response

5sec
10sec
LAN switching is performed because the IED has not confirmed all response.
Figure 10.1-3 Time chart for Example 2
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 625 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
10.1.2 Auto reset function

To set the communication protocols† in the IED, the user can write the settings in the IED by
transferring the setting-file generated in GR-TIEMS. After the transfer, the IED is required to
start up again, but the user can allow the IED restart automatically with Auto reset function,
shown in Table 10.1-4. Figure 10.1-4 shows the setting ‘Common’ under ‘Main
Menu-Setting-Communication’ screens.
Table 10.1-4 Autoreset setting

Setting item Switch Feature Default setting
AUTORESET None / Cold Restart function None
†Note:GOOSE Subscribe, IEC 61850-CID File, IEC61850-Mapping Data, IEC 61870-103,
DNP3, Modbus are applied.
None: is used when the user wishes to reset the IED by the hand. For example, the
communication settings are written in the IED using the GR-TIEMS, the user should make
restart the IED by oneself.
Cold: can allow the IED restart automatically when settings have been written in the IED
with the GR-TIEMS. After that, the settings can be applied in the IED. Note that the
protection operations are disqualified during the restart.
Common
10:48 1/1
AUTORESET +
None
Figure 10.1-4 Setting screen for AUTORESET
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 626 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
10.1.3 Monitoring LAN communication

(i) LCD screen
The user can examine the statuses about the communion modules by the monitoring function.
PortStatus PortStatus
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
*Port1_Link UP *Port1_Link UP
Port2_Link DOWN Port2_Link UP
One port is conn ected. Two ports are connected.

Figure 10.1-5 shows the port status about the modules; terms ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ mean running
and stopping, respectively. For menus operations, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring
sub-menu.
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
One port is connected. Two ports are connected.

Figure 10.1-5 Communication status
(ii) Status signals for Port1 and Port2

The user can also examine the LAN status using PLC signal monitoring points ‘Port1_Link
(3100061001)’ and ‘Port2_Link (3100061001)’ of the HOTST function. For example, when the
user wishes to monitor the status of the Prot1_Link, use the ‘Port1_Link’. Consequently, the
user can get the physical information about the port1: the value ‘1’ is issued when the
communication is made (Linkup), whereas value ‘0’ is issued when the communication is not
made (Linkdown).
When the Hot_Standby is set for the setting [RedundantMode], the user can find a
running port using the PLC signal monitoring point ‘Using_CH (3100081001)’ of the HOTST
function. Value ‘1’ is provided when the Port1 is running, whereas value ‘2’ is provided when
the Port2 is running.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 627 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
10.1.4 Settings
Setting of TCP/IP (Function ID: 230201)
Default setting
value
IPADDRESS1 0 – 255 – First decimal in IP at local IED 192

IP IP1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal in IP at local IED 168
IP1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal in IP at local IED 1
IP1_4 0 – 255 – Forth decimal in IP at local IED 11
SUBNETMASK1 0 – 255 – First decimal in subnet mask 255
SUB SM1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal in subnet mask 255
NET SM1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal in subnet mask 255
SM1_4 0 – 255 – Fourth decimal in subnet mask 1
GATEWAY1 0 – 255 – First decimal in gateway 192
GATE GW1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal in gateway 168
WAY GW1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal in gateway 1
GW1_4 0 – 255 – Fourth decimal in gateway 1
Setting of Net_MONITOR(Function ID: 351001)

Default setting
value
NetMonitor_EN Off / On – Enable switch for net monitoring Off

Ping_IP1 0 – 255 – First decimal address in IP1 0
IP1 Ping_IP1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal address in IP1 0
Ping_IP1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal address in IP1 0
Ping_IP1_4 0 – 255 – Fourth decimal address in IP1 0
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 628 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting of Net_MONITOR(Function ID: 351001)

Default setting
value

Ping_Wait 1 – 10 sec Ping packet waiting time 1
Ping Ping_Interval 1 – 120 sec Ping packet interval time 5
Chk_Count 1 – 10 sec Number of ping check count 3
Setting of REDLAN(Function ID: 340001)

Default setting
value
RedundantMode Fixed / Hot_Standby – Selection of Hot-standby Fixed
Setting of HOTST(Function ID: 341001)

Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents value Notes
Selection of any one of the actual ports

PrimaryPort None / Port1 /Port2 – None
as the primary port
DownTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-down 5
UpTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-up 5
Setting of TOOL_COM (Function ID: 201501)

Default setting
value
AUTORESET None / Cold – Auto Restart function None
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 629 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
10.1.5 Data ID
TCPIP_DRV (Function ID: 230201)
3010001150 MAC1_OCT1 MAC1 address octet 1
3110111001 RX1ER_CNT receive error counter
3110101001 RX1_CNT receive packet counter
3111111001 RX2ER_CNT
3111101001 RX2_CNT
3110211001 TX1ER_CNT send error counter
3110201001 TX1_CNT send packet counter
3111211001 TX2ER_CNT
3111201001 TX2_CNT

NET_MONITOR (Function ID: 351001)
3121001001 NETMONITOR Change to Network monitoring function
3120001460 Ping_IP1 Decision output of PING1 response w.r.t IP1 address
31200A1460 Ping_IP11 Decision output of PING11 response w.r.t IP11 address
31200B1460 Ping_IP12 Decision output of PING12 response w.r.t IP12 address
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 630 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

HOTST (Function ID: 341001)
3100061001 Port1_Link Port1 Link Status
3100071001 Port2_Link Port2 Link Status
3100081001 Using_CH Using channel information

HOTST (Function ID: 341001)
310000E001 CH1_CH_CHG Change to CH1 from CH2
310001E001 CH2_CH_CHG Change to CH2 from CH1
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 631 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
IEC 61850 communication

Figure 10.2-1 shows a substation automation system (SAS) and a number of IEDs connected
via a Ring LAN (100BASE-FX). The IEDs can have communication with other devices using
the international standard protocol (IEC 61850 standard‡); additionally, the ring network
topology is used to achieve network redundancy in the system. The user should use the
GR-TIEMS to configure the protocol in the IEC 61850 standard. That is, the functions for the
protection, the measurement, monitoring at local and remote, controlling and logging the data
are required to program in the IEC 61850 standard.
Remote
Monitoring
GPS
Communication Substation
Operator Network
Workstation Computer
Engineering
Workstation Printer Router/
Modem
SNTP Ethernet LAN (TCP/IP)
Fiber Optic Ring: 100BASE-FX

CONTROL
MEASUREMENT
GBU GRT GRG GBU GRL GRB GBU GRG GRZ GBU GRT GRL
GOOSE
Figure 10.2-1 SAS network using IEC 61850 protocol
†Note:When applying IEC 61850 communications, the user should map application
signals with the required logical-nodes (LNs) within the IED. In this manual, we
show the application signals as Data IDs; hence, the user is able to connect the
Data IDs with the required LNs using the engineering tool (GR-TIEMS) provided
by Toshiba. For the GR-TIEMS, see Chapter Engineering tool.
‡Note:Before using the IEC 61850 communications feature provided within the IED, the
user should verify its IEC 61850 capability by reviewing both the
protocol-implementation-conformance-statement (PICS) and the
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 632 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
model-implementation-conformance-statement (MICS). The MICS provides the

user with information for the LNs provided within the IED; the PICS provides the
user with information to enable the IED to communicate with both SAS and other
devices. See appendices in this manual explaining how the user can obtain this
information.
When TCP/IP operates, the IEDs can communicate with SAS computer, operator
workstation (OWS), engineering workstation (EWS), remote monitoring system, SNTP server.
In the SAS, the communication is served with the method of data transfer:
 Report method of sending event messages like measurement, status, alarm and so on
 GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) method of communication
between IEDs like interlock
 Control method like controlling the circuit breaker (CB), the disconnector (DS), the
selector device (43), the transformer tap (TAP) and so on
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 633 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
10.2.1 61850 protocol

The IED dynamically generates Logical Nodes, Data sets and control blocks defined in CID
file upon boot-up. We shall discuss the configuration procedure to set the data in CID files
later.
For the IEC 61850 communication, the IED consists of multiple logical devices and
logical nodes. The user should configure the 61850 Data Model to perform a required function
for the protection and control.
Modular approach achieves data transfer between devices in the IEC 61850 standard.
All function in the IEC 61850 network are grouped into smaller objects called Logical Nodes
(LNs), which contains process objects related data and attributes of a logical device protection
and control function. Logical Node Zero (LLN0) represents specific information of the logical
device. Logical Node Physical Device (LPHD) represents specific information of a physical
device. A generic device is called Physical device (PD). The LPHD contains the properties of
the PD. A specific function in the IED is represented as domain specific LN. The domain
specific LN contains the essential function for target devices in the IEC 61850 network.
LN data model defines the abstract syntax and semantics of the information exchanged
between PDs. The relation between data object classes, data types, data attributes and
abstract data objects are provided in the LN data model. The LN data model is mapped to
Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) and Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
(GOOSE) functions. Table 10.2-1shows the description of LNs.
Table 10.2-1 LN descripion

Actual device
LN Description
corresponding to LN
Logical node zero represents logical device specific Operation state of BCU
LLNO
information State of 43 switch
Logical node physical device represents physical device BCU,BCPU
LPHD
specific information
Domain Domain specific LN represents protection relay specific XCBR,CSWI
specific LN function
Generic input output logical node is used if essential Based on client
GGIO
signals are not defined in the extended logical nodes. requirements
All LN classes (LLN0 and domain specific LN) receive the mandatory data of the
common LN except LPHD. Table 10.2-2 exemplifies Function, Logical node and
Communication service used in the IEC 61850 communication.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 634 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 10.2-2 Function groups in 61850

Examples of IED applications Logical node
Functions grouped in Communication methods
to provide protection/control defined in
61850 serviced in 61850
functions for the power system 61850
Overvoltage relay (OV) PTOV Buffered Report
Overcurrent relay (OC) PTOC Buffered Report

Monitor
Trip circuit (TRC) XCBR GOOSE
Generic functions SIMG GOOSE

Control SPOS etc. CSWI Enhanced-security Control
Measurement MMXU Unbuffered Report
Measurement
Harmonics MHAI Unbuffered Report
Time Synchronization Simple Network Time Protocol NA SNTP
Figure 10.2-2 exemplifies Physical Model, which is equivalent to the IEC 61850 Model.
The Physical Model illustrates that both the IED and its functions are communicating with
the SAS using the Ethernet. The equivalent IEC 61850 Model represents communication at
LNs in both the PD using different Communication services, which we shall discuss in section
10.2.2.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 635 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Monitoring
x Control IED SAS
×
Over current Server / Work
CB Open/Close
relay station
CB Status
Measuring
Monitoring Under voltage

relay Ethernet
Substation
Harmonics
measurement
Measuring
Control / Monitoring Protection function
Physical Model
“Logical Node” “Communication Service”
IEC 61850 Model Physical Device
LN Physical Device
LN LPHD LN
GOOSE
CB XCBR CALH
LN Enhanced-security Control
LN
CSWI
IHMI
LN Buffered Report
LN
CT PTOC
LN IARC
GOOSE
PTRC
LN
Buffered Report
VT PTUV
LN Unbuffered Report
MHAI
LN GOOSE
Binary
SIMG
Input
Figure 10.2-2 Example of Physical model and its equivalent IEC 61850 model
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 636 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
10.2.2 Communication service

.
All essential data transmission methods are summarized in Abstract communication service
interface (ACSI); the IED application from communication stack is separated by the ACSI.
The user can map an interface to a communication stack using Specific communication
service mapping (SCSM).
The LN contains data list with their attributes based on their functionality in SAS. A
data has a well-defined structure and information of SAS. The data and attributes of the LN
in a logical device are exchanged by the communication services according to IEC 61850
protocol. The communication services are implemented by SCSM using Ethernet TCP/IP
protocol.
(i) Report for SAS

In the IED, ‘report’ is a method of sending status data, alarm data, measurement data and so
on. Using server-client communication, ‘Report’ is a ‘data set’ transferred from the IED to the
SAS. The ‘reports’ generated by the predefined ‘triggers’ are issued regularly in interval; the
‘reports’ are also generated upon a change in the event. The ‘reports’ are grouped into two
types: (1) Buffered-report-control-block and (2) Unbuffered-report-control-block. Note that the
system achieved by the unbuffered-report-service cannot start an event recover function
during the communication failure.
(ii) GOOSE for peer-to-peer communication

‘Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) ’ is a faster method to transfer the data
in ‘Generic substation event (GSE)’ between IEDs. In all IEDs, multicast GOOSE message is
published from the ‘GOOSE_control_block (GCB)’. The GOOSE communication methods are
grouped into two: (1) GOOSE publish and (2) GOOSE subscribe.
The data structures of the GOOSE are illustrated in Table 10.2-3; they are grouped for
the system (say, SAS) and other logical devices (say, a relay); they are used in the applications
in the SAS and the IED.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 637 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 10.2-3 Data structures in the GOOSE

Logical Device
Category “System” Other Logical device (e.g., “Relay”)
Data Model System Relay
DataSet “GOOSEDS” LLN0
GGIO1 Ind1..16 GoCB
LLN0 LPHD1
GoCB PTRC
The DataSet “GOOSEDS” is fixed ….
LPHD1
GGIO
Data set Fixed (Not configurable) Configurable
Performance GOOSE data sent communication time GOOSE data sent, communication
is < 3msec time is around 10msec
(iii) System
The data model in the LN named “System” is not allowed to modify (that is, a data model is
fixed; other LN data models are configurable to meet the system requirement). Mapping
signals to the GGIO1 is required when the GOOSE should send data faster.
(iv) Control mode using GOOSE

In the IED, signals generated on the binary output circuit (BO) can be controlled by the SAS,
if the user makes the link between a reviving control message and a control function block
that changes the state of the output element. Four control modes are provided:
DOes: Direct control with normal security (direct-operate)
SBOns: SBO control with normal security (operate-once or operate-many)
DOes: Direct control with enhanced security (direct-operate)
SBOes: SBO control with enhanced security (operate-once or operate-many)
(v) Time synchronization using IEC 61850 protocol / SNTP

SNTP (Simple network time protocol) is used to synchronize clocks of all IEDs in SAS. Time
synchronization is required to maintain common time across all IEDs in the network. This
makes it easier to analyze the Time stamped event data generated by the IEDs in
chronological order. In the system, IEDs are synchronized with the device having precision
time source (for example, GPS).
(vi) File transfer (COMTRADE)

To send data of the disturbance records, file transfer service is used, which is the operated in
COMTRADE format.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 638 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(vii) Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS)

MMS is an application layer protocol that provides data transmission between IEDs, which
performs monitoring and controlling; it can provide reliability for the data transmission. The
MMS operates in the international standardized messaging system that are made of TCP/IP
and Ethernet.
(viii) Generic Substation Events (GSE)

GSE is a control model defined in the IEC 61850 standard; it provides a fast and reliable
method for transferring the event data over the SAS. The GSE provides facility to transfer the
same event message to multiple physical devices using multicast or broadcast service.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 639 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
10.2.3 Engineering in 61850 communication

An IED can have multiple logical devices, which represents protection and control functions.
Each logical device has Logical Nodes (LN), Datasets, Report Control Block (RCB), GOOSE
Control Block (GCB), GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe function. Figure 10.2-3
illustrates the data structure in the IED.
IED
*IEC 61850-7-4
Logical device1 CONTROL
Logical Node
*Set of LN variables REPORT

Logical Node (Event,
VCT Report Measurement)

DataSet
Voltage Control Block
Logical Node
Input / Output Signals
Current
Application
Data Logical device2
BIO ・・・ GOOSE GOOSE
DataSet
Binary
Control Block (outgoing)
Logical Node
Input
Binary
Input
2. Mapping 1. icd(cid)
data
GOOSE
GOOSE subscribe function
(incoming)
3. GOOSE subscribe
Figure 10.2-3 IED Data Structure
To configure the data structure of an IED, the user needs to edit the following items
using the GR-TIEMS. Figure 10.2-4 shows the flow diagram for IEC 61850 configuration
using GR-TIEMS.
 Edit Signal mapping
 Edit Logical Node
 Edit DataSet
 Edit Report Control Block
 Edit GOOSE Control Block
 Edit GOOSE Publish
 Edit GOOSE Subscribe
 Edit Control function
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 640 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Connect IED and workstation installed with GR-TIEMS tool
Login to GR-TIEMS
Add Substation, Voltage level, Bay and IED to the project tree
Select an IED and Click IEC 61850 under Configuration Tools
Import ICD/CID file from the selected IED
Map the signals to Logical Nodes
Edit Data set, RCB and GCB
Edit signals for GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe
Write configured data to IED
Figure 10.2-4 Flow diagram

(i) Creating and opening project
In the operation of the GR-TIEMS, the user can find an existing project or create a new
project. Figure 10.2-5 shows the ‘File Menu’, where the user can open an existing project or
create a new project.
Figure 10.2-5 File menu
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 641 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Once the project is created, the user can add IEDs in the project tree structure as shown in
Figure 10.2-6.
Figure 10.2-6 Adding IED

Select the IED in the project tree structure and Click IEC 61850 under Configuration Tools as
shown in Figure 10.2-7.
Figure 10.2-7 GR-TIEMS main screen
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 642 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Click ‘IEC 61850’, then check to see that four engineering screens are appeared:
 Logical Node Screen
 Signal List Screen
 GOOSE Publish Screen
 GOOSE Subscribe Screen
Figure 10.2-8 IEC 61850 Main screen
(ii) IEC 61850 configuration files

Substation configuration language (SCL) files are generated by the configuration in the IEC
61850 protocol. The SCL files are used to exchange the configuration data in different
manufacture tools. Two types of files are used for exchanging data in Table 10.2-4.
Table 10.2-4 Types of SCL files

SCL file Description
.ICD This file describes the capabilities of an IED. It contains the
IED Capability Description communication data and function of LN in an IED.
.CID Every device configured for IEC 61850 in the GR-TIEMS tool
Configured IED Description generates a CID file. This file is then written to the IED. This
file contains configuration information of the IED to which it is
connected.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 643 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Exporting and Importing CID/ICD file

The user can export or / import a CID/ICD file as a CSV file. The user can edit the exported
CSV file using the MS-EXCEL®; the user can import the edited CSV file back to the
GR-TIEMS. Figure 10.2-9 shows the options available to import/export CID/ICD file. The user
can either click the icons on the menu bar or select the required option form the File menu
drop down list.
Import CID/ICD
Export CID
Export ICD
Figure 10.2-9 Export / Import of CID / ICD file
Manage third party CID file

The GR-TIEMS can have third party CID file. In the project tree of the GR-TIEMS, the user
can use the device information for creating a third Party IED. To configure dataset, RCB,
GCB, GOOSE publish and GOOSE subscribe settings and so on, the data attributes are used
after the creation of the data.
Mapping application data in IEC 61850

For any IED, the IEC61850 configuration* is available by default. The user should check
whether the required signals are mapped in the default configuration.
*Note: There is no default configuration for GOOSE subscription. If GOOSE subscribe

function is required, then a new configuration has to be done.
To verify the signals configured for the IEC 61850 protocol, the user should check the
mapped data, Dataset or Report Control list. If they have existed, the signals in the signal list
should be matched with the attributes of LNs.
Figure 10.2-10 shows an example to check if the signals are mapped in default
configuration. For example, to check for mapping of the primary element signal in earth fault
protection (EF1), follow the steps below:
1. To check if the EF1 signal is already mapped in the LN, key ‘EF1’ under Signal
Name in the Signal List screen.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 644 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Mapped data
“EF1” in signal list
Figure 10.2-10 Signal mapping

As shown in the above figure, the “EF1” signal is already mapped to LN attribute
Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general.
2. To check if “Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general” is already added in Dataset. Right

click on “LLN0” and select Edit DataSet, then DataSet List screen appears as shown
in Figure 10.2-11.
Figure 10.2-11 DataSet list
As shown in the above figure, “Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general” is already mapped in the

Dataset “STAT1”.
3. To check, if the DataSet is already assigned to RCB, Right click on “LLN0” and
select Edit Report Control, then Report Control List screen appears as shown in
Figure 10.2-12.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 645 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 10.2-12 Report Control List

As shown in the above figure, the DataSet “STAT1” is already assigned to RCB
“brcbST-A”.
(iii) Mapping signals in signal list to Logical Nodes

The user can add or modify signal mapping to the LN variable. The following section describes
how to modify the mapped data if the user wants to add signals, which are sent using Report
or GOOSE.
Edit Mapping Data

1. Search the signal to be sent from the Signal List window as shown in Figure
10.2-13.
2. Drag and Drop the selected signal to the logical node variable.
Mapped data
Drop
Drag
Signals
Figure 10.2-13 Signal mapping

Note: To optimize the performance of the IED, “Period” should be 100 if the signal is not
required to be sent immediately.
“301001 3110041005 (Qual_Validity)” should be mapped to “q” with Period=100.
“200301 9010001006 (SYS_TIME)” should be mapped to “t”.
Export / Import Mapping Data

The user can export mapped data in the CSV file; the user can edit the exported CSV file by
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 646 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
the MS-Excel® and import back into the GR-TIEMS. Figure 10.2-14 shows the export / import
options.
Export Mapping Data

Import Mapping Data
Figure 10.2-14 Export / Import mapping data
Edit Logical Node

If the required LN or variable is not available in the IED, the user should follow the steps
below to add or modify the Logical Node:
1. To add new LN or to edit the variable of an existing LN, Right click Prot and select
Add Logical Node or select Edit Logical Node.
2. In the Edit Logical Node screen, select LN Class, Prefix and LN Instance and check
the required variable check boxes as shown in Figure 10.2-15 below.
To Add Logical Node
To add optional variable

To choose a proper Logical Node*
Figure 10.2-15 Add or Edit Logical Node
*Note: Refer to IEC 61850-7-4 to choose a proper Logical Node.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 647 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Edit DataSet
Dataset can be edited or a new dataset can be added for the LNs as shown in Figure 10.2-16.
For editing the DataSet, follow the steps below:
1. Right click LLNO and select Edit DataSet, DataSet List window appears as shown in
Figure 10.2-16.
2. Choose the variables to be added to the DataSet and click OK.
Users can choose the existing

Dataset*, or enter a new
DataSet name.
Figure 10.2-16 Edit DataSet screen
*Note: 100 DataSets can be added in the DataSet List and each DataSet can have
maximum of 32 elements.
Edit Report Control Block (RCB)

Report Control Block (RCB) is used to send report from IEDs to client. If the user wishes to
assign the DataSet to Report Control Block, follow the steps below:
1. Under the LN tree structure, select Prot, Right click LLN0 and select Edit Report
Control. Report Control List screen appears as shown in Figure 10.2-17.
2. Click Add or Edit to add a new dataset or to edit the existing dataset in the Report
Control List window as shown in Figure 10.2-17.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 648 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 10.2-17 Edit Report Control screen
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 649 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Edit GOOSE Control Block

GOOSE control block is used to exchange information between IEDs. GOOSE messages are
used for interlock operation between IEDs in order to protect the electrical system. GGIO1 is
used for sending high-speed GOOSE messages. The DataID assigned to GGIO1 is sent within
3ms.
If the user wishes to assign the DataID for GOOSE operation, follow the steps below:
1. Click GGIO1 and select Ind1 as shown in Figure 10.2-18.
2. Drag and Drop the required signals to be sent by GOOSE.
Note: The user can assign any signal to GGIO1->Ind1~16 for high-speed GOOSE, as
required.
Drop
Drag
Figure 10.2-18 Signal mapping for high speed GOOSE
As shown in the above figure, signals are assigned to “System/GGIO1$Ind1”. The user
can assign signals to other GGIOs (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3 and so on) which are not
meant for high-speed GOOSE operation.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 650 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Edit GOOSE Publish

The signals assigned to GGIO1 variables are published automatically by default. The GGIO1
data set is fixed and is pre-configured in GOOSE Publish screen. If the user assign signals to
other GGIO variables (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3) for GOOSE publish operation, then the
user needs to add those variables in the GOOSE Publish screen.
Figure 10.2-19 shows the GOOSE Publish screen, where “System” is fixed and is not
configurable for GGIO1, whereas “Ctrl” (Control) and “Prot” (Protection) are configurable. The
user can add new variables from the “Logical Node” screen to the GOOSE Publish screen
using drag & drop* method. Figure 10.2-19 shows an example for GOOSE Publish, where
“System/GGIO2$Ind1$stVal” is added to the GOOSE Publish screen.
*Note: Only “stVal” and “q” variables can be added to GOOSE Publish screen.
Drag
Fixed
Drop
Figure 10.2-19 GOOSE Publish
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 651 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Edit GOOSE subscribe

GOOSE subscribe function is configured to receive GOOSE messages published by other IEDs.
Figure 10.2-20 exemplifies the GOOSE Subscribe screen; the user can select the necessary
signals to be added. For example, “Bay1 GBU200” is the current IED; “Bay2 GRZ200” is the
other IED. “List 1” is GOOSE publisher of GRZ200; “List 2” is GOOSE subscriber for GBU200.
The user can select the GOOSE publisher from GRZ200 and add to the GOOSE subscriber of
GBU200.
In the example shown below, select the required variable and click Add. Similarly, the
user can delete the variables.
When the user adds a signal to the GOOSE subscribe list from the other IED, then the
same signal is automatically added in the Signal List of the current IED.
List 2
List 1 List 2
Figure 10.2-20 GOOSE Subscribe
Edit Control function

The Data IDs (i.e., Signal Number) starting with “5” is used for control function when the IED
has the control function by default. The user should check whether the required signals are
mapped in the default configuration. The user can edit and add the control signals to the LN
as described in section 10.2.3(iii).
In an IED, usually an output Data ID of a protection function is assigned to LN variable.

However, for the control application, the IED is capable of receiving command from the SAS
server. To control a device (such as a circuit breaker), the input point* (Data ID) in the control
application should be configured to receive commands from the SAS sever (that is, selecting,
operating or cancel command).
For example, to let a device execute “Select”, “Operate” and “Cancel” commands from the
sever through “CSWI4” and transmit the information to an IED, the user should map an
input point (Data ID) to several variables of “CSWI4” (See Figure 10.2-21). Mapping period for
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 652 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Control shall be 100.
*Note: For more information of the input points, see chapter General control function or
Control and monitoring application, if available.
SBOW
Mapping Input DataID
Oper
DEV01_CONTROL_REQ
Cancel
Figure 10.2-21 Control function mapping

To complete the setting for control function, after mapping data, the user needs to set BI,
BO† in the GR-TIEMS ->Setting.
†Note:For more information for the BI, BO, see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO
module.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 653 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iv) Writing the configuration file to IED

After completing the IEC 61850 configuration, follow the steps below to download the CID file
for the IED.
1. Save the project.
2. Right click on the required IED and select Write to IED.
3. Configure the parameters in the Connection Method window to connect the IED (If
needed).
4. Select the writing items (IEC 61850-CID File and IEC 61850-Mapping Data) to be
written into the IED and click Write to download the IEC 61850 configuration. If
GOOSE subscribe operation is required, then select writing items Signal List and
GOOSE Subscribe before clicking Write.
Figure 10.2-22 Write to IED
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 654 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
10.2.4 Setting for IED

(i) Setting time for re-sending GOOSE subscribe information
The user can configure the maximum duration time for the case when the IED fails to re-send
GOOSE subscribe information. Set the time in seconds using setting [GOINT].
(ii) Setting for 61850 authentication

When the IED is to be authenticated for starting the IEC 61850 communications, the user
should set scheme switch [850AUT] On.
(iii) Blocking 61850 communication

If the user does not want the IED to start the IEC 61850 communications, the user should set
scheme switch [850BLK] On.
(iv) Setting ‘keep-alive’ time for TCP

When applying IEC 61850 communications with TCP/IP, the user should set a time for the
‘keep-alive’ signal. The user should set the time in seconds using the setting [850KEEPALIVE].
(v) Setting ‘CommTerm’

If the user wishes to receive a ‘CommTerm’ signal carrying an actual operation time from a
device outside the IED, the user should set scheme switch [TCMD] On. Note that the
‘CommTerm’ signal† will not conform to the IEC 61850 standard when the user turns on this
function. That is, this function can be availed on the server communication provided by
TOSHIBA.
†Note:For example, Figure 10.2-23 shows the signal flow between a substation computer
(SC), an IED and a target device (e.g. CB). If the requirement is to close the CB on
request of the SC, the SC will send the operation command “Operate” to the IED;
the time information (T) is also sent along with the operation command. When
receiving the operation command and observing that the CB has closed, the IED
will send a response signal “CommTerm” to the SC along with the time information.
However, this time information is not the actual operation time of the CB, but the
same time information originally sent with the operation command. The IEC
61850 standard defines this rule; hence, general operations in the IEC 61850
standard are subject to this rule. However, the server communication provided by
Toshiba is able to accept the actual operation time; hence, the setting ‘CommTerm’
is required in the Toshiba communication. The user should also note that Off is set
for the scheme switch [TCMD] as the default setting.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 655 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Station computer (SC) IED Target device (e.g. CB)
Command “CB closed” Operate+(T)
Command Open
Response
Process Closed
CommTerm+(T) Response
Figure 10.2-23 Example of CB operation flow
(vi) Setting test mode

With regard to the reception test for GOOSE subscribe information, the user can simulate a
bad condition passively by using both GOSNDBLK and GOSUBBLK functions†.
GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

For the test using the GOOSE sending block function (GOSNDBLK), the user can disable the
IED so that it does not send the GOOSE message. The GOSNDBLK function is useful when
there is a conflict in the communication with another active IED on sending a GOOSE signal.
To block the sending of the GOOSE message, the user should set On for scheme switch
[GOSNDBLK].
GOOSE receive block (GOSUBBLK)

Suppose the user wishes to simulate a bad reception condition with regard to the GOOSE
signal, the user can apply a setting that will prevent an IED from receiving the GOOSE
message from another IED using this test. The user can perform this test using the test
setting On for scheme switch [GOSUBBLK]. Consequently, the IED rejects the GOOSE
messages from other IEDs. The GOOSE receive block function (GOSUBBLK) is also useful for
the validation of switchgear interlocking determination.
†Note:The user may wish to perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using the
GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a remote
terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid the influence, we recommend the user to test bad receptions for a particular
IED using the GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the
particular IED under test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the tests.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 656 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
10.2.5 How to monitor 61850 communications

The IED can monitor the status of the IEC 61850 communications. Discussions on IEC 61850
communications status monitoring are provided separately. (See Chapter Automatic
supervision)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 657 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
10.2.6 Quality signal in 61850 communication

The IED can send the quality signal of the IEC 61850 communications. Table 10.2-5 shows the
structure of the quality signal; a value is set for the ‘Validity’ bits in accordance with ‘Error
level’ in the IED†. ‘Test mode’ bit is set when the IED is set for the test operation‡.
Table 10.2-5 Quality signal in the IEC 61850-7-3
Definitions in the IEC 61850 7-3
Bit(s) Value Definitions in the IED
Attribute Name Attribute Value
No error, Warning, Alarm
Good 00
(Level0)†
Serious Error, Serious
Invalid 01
0-1 Validity Error(Comm.) (Level1 and Level2)†
Reserved 10 Not applicable
Minor Error
questionable 11
(Level3, Level4, Level5)†
2 Overflow – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
3 OutofRange – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
4 BadReference – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
5 Oscillatory – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
6 Failure – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
7 Olddata – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
8 Inconsistent – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
9 Inaccurate – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
Process 0 ‘0’ setting, unconditionally
10 Source
Substituted 1 Not used
0 Operation in ‘Test mode’
11 Test –
1 Normal operation
12 OperatorBlocked – 0 ‘0’ setting, unconditionally
†Note: For more information about the meanings about the error levels, see Chapter
Automatic supervision: Outline of automatic supervision .
‡Note: The user can change the IED the test mode by the screen operation. See Chapter
User interface: Test sub-menu and Chapter Commissioning and Maintenance.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 658 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
10.2.7 Setting
Setting of 61850(Function ID: 301001)
Default setting
value
GOINT 1 to 120 sec. Maximum GOOSE resend interval 2

850BLK Off/On IEC 61850 enable/disable Off
850AUT Off/On Authentication of IEC 61850 association Off
850KEEPALIVE 1 to 120 sec. TCP ‘KeepAlive’ time for IEC 61850 20
GOSNDBLK Off/On GOOSE publishing block Off
GOSUBBLK Off/On GOOSE subscription block Off
TCMD Off/On Set ‘T’ in ‘CommTerm’ as actual Time Off
10.2.8 Data ID
 Monitoring point
61850 (Function ID: 301001)
0010001001 61850STAT Status of IEC 61850(T:Running, F:Stop)
3100001440 INCOMINGPKT#0 Incoming packet number from IEC 61850 client#0
3100001441 OUTGOINGPKT#0 Outgoing packet number to IEC 61850 client#0
3100001001 REMOTEPORTNUM#0 Port number of IEC 61850 client #0
3110041005 Qual_Validity IEC 61850 validity of quality
GOOSE (Function ID: 301101)
3110001001 GOOSESUB_STATUS 0 if all GOOSE being subscribed are not subscribed.
3100001001 SUB_QUAL#0 GOOSE subscription quality for record #0
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 659 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
GOOSE (Function ID: 301101)
31000A1001 SUB_QUAL#10 GOOSE subscription quality for record #10
……. ……….. ………………
31013E1001 SUB_QUAL#318 GOOSE subscription quality for record #318
31013F1001 SUB_QUAL#319 GOOSE subscription quality for record #319
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 660 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
USB communication
The IED has an USB port in B-type connector; the user PC can be connected with the IED
through that. The USB port places on the IED front panel. The communication operates in the
serial transmission; its speed is fixed at 115.2kbps.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 661 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
11 User interface
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 662 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Outline
Users can perform maintenance on the IED from the front panel. Monitoring is also possible
locally by using a PC connected through the USB cable. This section discusses the
configuration of the front panel and the basic configuration of the screen-menu hierarchy of
the Human Machine Interface (HMI).
(i) Front Panel

As shown in Figure 11.1-1, the front panel is provided with a screen (LCD Screen), 26 light
emitting diodes (LEDs), 11 operation keys, seven function keys (in the later section the
function keys are referred to as F1 to F7.), monitoring jacks and a USB receptacle.
LEDs
LCD screen
Operation keys
Function keys
with LEDs
Monitoring jacks with USB

LEDs (A, B, and C)
Figure 11.1-1 Front Panel

(ii) LCD screen
The LCD screen provides the user with detailed internal information provided by the IED
such as records, monitoring and settings. Normally, the LCD screen appears blank unless an
operation key is pressed, by pressing any of the operation keys, the LCD screen will display
the top menu.
If the top menu is shown on the LCD screen, the user can turn off the screen backlight
by pressing the operation key ◄. When operation is idle for some time, the screen backlight
turns off. By pressing any key except the CLEAR key, the backlight turns on, and the previous
menu will be displayed on the LCD screen.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 663 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) LEDs
As shown inTable 11.1-1, 26 LEDs, each having signal labels and colors, are defined:
Table 11.1-1 LED labels and their color
LED User configurable
Label Color Remarks
No. setting2
Lit up when the IED is
1 IN SERVICE Green N/A
in service.
Lit up when an error
2 ERROR Red N/A
is occurred.
31 N/A N/A ✔
41 TRIP Red ✔ Default

51 N/A N/A ✔
61 TEST Yellow ✔ Default

71 N/A N/A ✔
. N/A N/A ✔ .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
261 N/A N/A ✔
1Note: LED #3 to LED #26 is user-configurable LEDs. User can assign a signal with or
without latch function.
2Note: For setting LEDs, see section 11.6(iv).
(iv) Monitoring jacks

There are three monitoring jacks on the front panel; the three monitoring jacks have LEDs, A,
B, and C respectively. For example, if the user wishes to undertake test work1, two
monitoring-jacks (A and B) are available for use. By selecting the Data ID of an object signal
from the Data ID list, and by keying this Data ID into the IED, the object signal can be
displayed on the selected LEDs (A and B). The user can also observe this object signal at the
output of the monitoring jacks (A and B) on an oscilloscope.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 664 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(v) Function keys

The IED provides seven function keys (F1 to F7) with the following two features; a LED is
attached on each function key. Table 11.1-2 shows the features for these keys.
 Skip to a specific screen directly, set by the user.
Used for skipping to a set page by pressing the function keys. Press again to return to the
previous page. Set by pressing the function key for 2 seconds on the selected page. (See section
11.5(v)-1)
 Control the signal setting easily.
A convenient method that can be used for operating binary signals. Set by assigning the signal
in the settings menu. (See section 11.5(v)-2)
Table 11.1-2 Features of Function keys (F1 to F7)

Labels on Keys Feature and Remark
LED† Skip to a specific screen directly.

Control for the operation of pre-assigned
F1 to F7 binary signals.
†Note: Like in the LEDs of Table 11.1-1, the user can set to light the above LEDs by itself.
Setting the above LEDs are similar to the ones of the Table 11.1-1 (For setting, see
section 11.6(iv)). Note the manufacture programs to light the respective LEDs in
default prior to shipping.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 665 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(vi) Operation keys

By using the operation keys, the user can display records, relay status etc. Input of setting
values is performed using these keys. The operation keys are tabulated in Table 11.1-3.
Table 11.1-3 Features of operation keys
Label Functions and Remarks
Move the cursor up / Scroll up / Count up1
Move the cursor down / Scroll down / Count down1
Previous page / Move to the left digit.
Next page / Move to the right digit
ENTER Enter edit mode, if item is active / Executive operation / Accept alarm
message.
CANCEL Exit edit mode / Cancel operation.
CLEAR Clear all latched LEDs (Except [In service] and [Error] LEDs).
HELP Display the help message, for cases where the active item has a help
function.
L
R
Switch between Local mode and Remote mode.
I Control key. (Close)
O Control key. (Open)
MENU Switch for using MIMIC2 mode or for returning back to the menu screen.
MIMIC
This key is not provided for standard LCD screen2.
1Note: To scroll up or scroll down quickly, press keys ▲ or ▼ respectively along with key
►.
2Note: The MIMIC key is only available when a large LCD screen is mounted on the front
panel. The pixel resolution (dot) is 240(W) × 320(H). Note that this mode is only
provided when the user programmed the feature using the engineering tool. See
chapter Engineering tool: MIMIC configuration tool.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 666 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
HMI operation
By using the LCD screen, the operation keys and the function keys, the user can access
functions such as recording, monitoring, relay setting and testing.
Note: The operation of the LCD screen is more or less common in all IED models.
However, the contents of the LCD screen depend upon the IED model.
(i) Screen and LEDs during normal HMI operation

When the IED is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit. Press any key
except the key CLEAR; and then the backlight of the LED screen is turned on1. If the IED
detects a fault, the fault message will appear in a pop-up screen. At the same time, the
“TRIP”2 LED is lit.
1Note: If another fault occurs during the period of time for which the previous fault
pop-up screen, is displayed, the previous fault information will be overwritten by
the new fault on the pop-up screen. Press the key CANCEL to remove the pop-up
screen for “Latest Fault” to return to the previous screen.
2Note: Press the key CLEAR to turn off the LED.
(ii) Main-menu and Sub-menu

 Main-menu
When the IED screen is turned off press any key, except the key CLEAR, and the
“Main-Menu" will appear on the LCD screen as shown in the left of Figure 11.2-1. To
go to the next level of hierarchy, press the key ►.
 Sub-menu
An example of setting the sub-menu screen is shown in the right of Figure 11.2-1. By
using the key ▼ and the key ▲, the user can move the cursor downward or upward
to view all of the items. By using the keys ◄ ►, the user can return to a previous
level of hierarchy or go to the next level of hierarchy.
 Screen structure
The LCD screen is composed of a title area and a data area. The title area is fixed on
the top two lines. The first line displays the screen title. The second line on the
left-hand side displays local time, whereas the right-hand side displays either the
current line number, cursor position number and the maximum page number, or the
item number. For example, the display “2/4” means the current cursor position, which
is at the second item of a maximum of four items.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 667 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Main Menu OC
10:48 1/8 10:48 2/4
_Record > OC1EN +>
Monitoring > On
Setting > _OC2EN +>
I/O Setting > On
Time > OC3EN +
Test > Off
a. Main Menu b. Sub Menu
Figure 11.2-1 LCD screen for Main-Menu and Sub-menu
Figure 11.2-2 shows the menu hierarchy. The menu consists of a Main-Menu and several
Sub-menus. Table 11.2-1 shows the configuration of Main-Menu.
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu
Main Menu Record Record List Main Menu
Fault Record Clear Records
Event Record1 Record List
Clear Records Setting
Event Record2 Record List Statistics GCNT01~
Clear Records
Event Record3 Record List
Function Key F1 Key ~ F7 Key
Clear Records
Disturbance Record Record List
Diagnostics Detail
Clear Records
Clear All Records
Monitoring Metering IO Setting AC Analog Input AI (#1~)
Binary I/O Slot#n Binary Input Slot (#1~)
Communication LAN Binary Output Slot (#1~)

IEC61850
Relay Element DIF_LP LED LED (3~26)
DIFG_LP F1 Key ~ F7 Key
Distance_ZS
Distance_ZG
Distance_Common
OC
EF
SOTFOC
ICD
PROT_Common Time Clock ActiveSyncSrc
VTF
CTF Time Zone
VCHK
Time Sync SNTP
BI SYNC
Statistics Power Value

Display Format IRIG SYNC
Demand Summer Time

Peak Demand
Counter
GOOSE Monitoring Accumulated Time
Test Test Mode Test Option
Diagnostics Function Test
Binary Input (Slot#n)
Binary Output (Slot#n)
Simultaneous Fault
Setting Record Fault Record
Event Record
Metering Disturbance Record
Mode Change F1 Key ~ F7 Key
Communication LAN Security

IEC61850
Signal Monitoring
Information
Protection Common
Active Group Security Setting Change Password
Copy Group(A->B)
Group1 Security
Group2
Group3
Group4
Group5 Login / Logout
Group6
Group7
Group8
Control Control Common

Reset Control
Figure 11.2-2 Menu hierarchy
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 668 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 11.2-1 Outline of Main-menu and their purposes

Sub-menu Purpose and functions
The "Record" sub-menu provides fault record, event record and disturbance
record. The user can erase each record individually or can clear all records at
Record
the same time. The user can assign event records to three distributed “Event
Record” sub-menus as required.
The "Monitoring" sub-menu displays all of the status values for the IED,
Monitoring such as Metering, Binary I/O, Communication, Relay Element, Statistics,
Interlock, GOOSE Monitoring, and Diagnostics.
The "Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings: Record,
Setting
Metering, Communication and Protection.
The "I/O Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings for inputs,
I/O Setting configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs, and configurable
LEDs.
The "Time" sub-menu provides settings for calendar clock, time zone, the
Time
source of time synchronization and the display format of the calendar clock.
The "Test" sub-menu is used to set and to test the following: a trip circuit,
Test forcible operation of binary outputs from the IED, time measurement of
variable timers, and observation of the binary signals in logic circuits.
The "Information" sub-menu displays information about the IED such as
Information
hardware, software, communication, etc.
The "Security Setting" sub-menu is used to change the password and access
Security
level, providing high levels of security by assigning users different levels of
Setting
access.
When the "Security Setting” sub-menu is ON, the “Login/Logout” sub-menu
Login/Logout
is displayed.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 669 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Record sub-menu
The Record sub-menu is composed of several sub-menus: fault record, event record,
disturbance record, and clearance of all records. In each sub-menu, the user can clear records
separately.
Record
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record1 >
Event Record2 >
Event Record3 >
Disturbance Record >
Clear All Records +
Figure 11.3-1 Display of Record

Table 11.3-1 Operation and display in Record sub-menu
Display Operation key Remark
[>] ► Press the key ► to go to the sub-menu
[+] ENTER Press the key ENTER for executing “Clear all records”.
Confirmation dialog screen will be displayed.
(i) Fault Record
The “Fault Record” sub-menu displays the date and time of fault occurrence, fault phase,
tripping mode, and the power system quantities, as shown in Figure 11.3-2.
Fault Record Fault Record#1

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/222
#1 2012-07-25 > 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223 10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 > Phase AB
01:15:55.018 Trip 1,2,3,4,5,6
#3 2012/07/21 > OC1
13:11:29.621 2012-07-25
Fault Record List Details of Fault Record
Figure 11.3-2 Display of Fault Record
Display fault record

Record 1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Fault Record
10:48 1/2 2). Fault Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List
_Record List >
Clear Records + sub menu.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 670 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Fault Record
3). Fault record list in the Fault Record screen is displayed. Move
10:48 1/6 cursor to a desired item by ▲ or ▼ and press ►.
#1 2012-07-25 >
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 >
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/20 >
13:11:29.621
Fault Record#2
10:48 1/222 4). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.
2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
Phase AB
Trip AB
OC1
53.4km (23%)
Clear fault record
Record
1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Fault Record
10:48 1/2 2). Move cursor to Clear Records and press ENTER.
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Fault Record 3). Clear records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of “Fault
Clear records? Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.

ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Clear all information in Fault Record

Record 1). Move cursor to the Clear all Records sub menu and press
10:48 1/6
ENTER.
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Clear all Records +
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 671 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Clear Records
2). Clear all records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of
Clear All records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
“Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.
(ii) Event Record

The “Event Record” sub-menu provides three parts namely, “Event Record1”, “Event Record2”
and “Event Record3”. In each Event Record sub-menu, the data and time, device name, and
the operation of the device are displayed as shown in the example below.
Event record1
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set.Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:21.021
Figure 11.3-3 Display of Event Record
Display of Event Record

Record 1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
To clear all records, refer to section (i)-3.
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List
Event Record1 sub menu.
10:48 1/2
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Event Record1
3). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set. Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:11.021
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 672 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Clear of Event Records

1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
Record
10:48 2/6 To clear all records, refer to section (i)-3.
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the Clear
Event Record1
Records sub menu.
10:48 1/2
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Event Record1 3). Clear all Event records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of
Clear records?
Event Record directly if CANCEL is pressed.
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
(iii) Disturbance Record

Disturbance Records can be displayed graphically on the PC screen by using GR-TIEMS. The
IED screen displays only the recorded date and times, which are stored in the IED as the
entire disturbance data, as shown in the following example:
Disturbance record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:04.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Figure 11.3-4 Display of Disturbance Record

The following shows the steps to display and erase disturbance records.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 673 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Display of disturbance Record

Record 1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
To clear all records, refer to section (i)-3.
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/2 2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record
_Record List >
Clear Records + List sub menu.
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25 3). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Clear of Disturbance Records
Record
10:48 2/6 1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
Disturbance Record 2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the
10:48 1/2
Record List > Clear Records sub menu.
_Clear Records +
Disturbance Record 3). Clear all Disturbance records if ENTER is pressed. Back to
display of “Disturbance Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 674 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Monitoring sub-menu
The “Monitoring” sub-menu is used to display the current status of the IED. The data is
updated every second on the LCD screen. The user can view the following functions from the
Monitoring sub-menu:
i. Metering sub-menu
ii. Binary I/O sub-menu
iii. Communication sub-menu
iv. Relay Elements sub-menu
v. Statistics sub-menu
vi. GOOSE Monitoring sub-menu1
vii. Diagnostics sub-menu
(i) Metering
In the “Metering” sub-menu, the value and direction of current, voltage etc. can be displayed.
The user can change the units as required by using the appropriate setting. Figure 11.4-1
shows an example of the Metering sub-menu.
Metering
10:48 1/25
Va
23.231kV 121.34deg
Vb
23.200kV 120.14deg
Vc
22.713kV 121.50deg
Figure 11.4-1 Display for Metering

Figure 11.4-2 shows the steps to display metering data on the LCD screen
Main Menu Monitoring Binary I/O

10:48 2/9 10:48 2/14 10:48 1/4
Record > ► Statistics > ► _Slot#1 >
_Monitoring > Metering > Slot#2 >
Setting > _Binary I/O >
IO setting >
◄ ◄
Operation Time >
Time > Relay Element >
Test > Communication >
► ◄
Slot#1 Slot#1
10:48 2/12 10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact ▲ BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup. BI2 0 DC power sup.
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1 BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1
▼
BI4 0 ARC-Block1 BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset BI5 0 Indi. Reset
Figure 11.4-2 Steps to display metering data
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 675 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Binary I/O

The “Binary I/O” sub-menu can be used to display the respective status of the binary IO
module circuits. Each line on the IED screen displays the binary input or output signal
number, the signal name1 assigned to the circuits of the binary IO modules and their status.
The status is shown as logic level “1” or “0” for the binary output circuit. Figure 11.4-3
provides an example for binary IO module at IO#1 (Slot#1).
Slot#1
10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup.
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2
BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset
Figure 11.4-3 Display of Binary I/O status

1Note: Names can be assigned to binary signals using GR-TIEMS.
Figure 11.4-4 shows the steps required to display the status of the binary inputs and outputs.
Main Menu Monitoring Binary I/O

10:48 2/9 10:48 2/14 10:48 1/4
Record > ► Statistics > ► _Slot#1 >
_Monitoring > Metering > Slot#2 >
Setting > _Binary I/O >
IO setting >
◄ ◄ Slot#3 >
Operation Time > Slot#4 >
Time > Relay Element >
Test > Communication >
► ◄
Slot#1 Slot#1
10:48 2/12 10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact ▲ BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup. BI2 0 DC power sup.
▼
BI4 0 ARC-Block1 BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset BI5 0 Indi. Reset
Figure 11.4-4 Steps to display Binary I/O status
(iii) Communication
The “Communication” sub-menu provides several sub-menus as shown in Figure 11.4-5.
Sub-menu sub-menu sub-menu

Monitoring Communication LAN
61580STAT
Figure 11.4-5 Menu hierarchy for Communication sub-menu

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)
- 676 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
The display structure for each sub-menu is explained in the following sections:
LAN sub-menu: the communication port name and status are shown on one
line. When an IED has a communication module for Network, or when the
setting of dual-port communication is set to non-operation (Off is set for
scheme switch [RLNSCH]), the communication port status will be as shown
in Figure 11.4-6.
The “LAN” sub-menu can display “PortStatus” and “NetMonitor status”. If

“NetMonitor” is running (active), the LCD screen will display a “>”mark.
LAN
10:48 1/2
PortStatus >
NetMonitor Inactive
Figure 11.4-6 Display for LAN

If the status of a port is “UP”, it means that the communication link is working;
if the status of a port is “DOWN, it means that the LAN cable is not connected to
the port.
The following two sub-menus are displayed to show the communication status
when the IED has dual LAN comunication modules.
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
Port 1(Port A) is connected. Port 1&2 (Port A&B) are connected.

Port 2(Port B) is not connected.
Figure 11.4-7 Communication status
IEC61850 sub-menu: IP addresses of the devices connecting using IEC61850

are shown in one line. Configurations of those IP addresses are available
from GR-TIEMS.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 677 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
61850STAT
10:48 1/6
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
Figure 11.4-8 Display of IEC61850

(iv) Relay Elements
In the “Relay Element” sub-menu, the name of the relay element and status of operation are
shown on one line. To view all of the relay elements, the user has to press keys ▲ and ▼.
OC
10:48 1/25
OC1-A 0
OC1-B 0
OC1-C 0
OC2-A 0
OC2-B 0
OC2-C 0
Figure 11.4-9 Displaying Relay Elements

Figure 11.4-10 shows the steps necessary to display the status of the measuring
elements.
Main Menu Main Menu Relay Element

10:48 2/9 10:48 2/9 10:48 1/4
Record > ► Metering > ► CBF >
_Monitoring > Binary I/O > EFP >
Setting > Communication > _OC >
IO setting >
◄ _Relay Element > ◄ EF >
Time > Statistics >
Test > GOOSE Monitoring >
► ◄
OC
10:48 1/25
OC1-A 0
OC1-B 0
OC1-C 0
OC2-A 0
OC2-B 0
OC2-C 0
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 678 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 11.4-10 Steps to display the status of measuring elements

(v) Statistics
The “Statistics” sub-menu is provided with several sub-menus.
Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu

Monitorin Statistic Power value
g s Counter
Accumulated Time
Figure 11.4-11 Menu hierarchy for Statistics

For each statistical item, with the exception of displaying their status, the data can be
reset or revised. The display structure of each sub-menu is shown in the following sections:
Power Value sub-menu: With regard to statistics item, its name and its
value are shown in the figure below. The user can also change the unit of
each value by the setting1. It is allowed to reset or revise the statistics
value.2
Power Value
10:48 1/4
Wh+ +
0.0MWh
Wh- +
0.0MWh
varh+ +
0.0Mvarh
Figure 11.4-12 Display of Power Value

Table 11.4-1 Operation means for data reset or data revise
Step Display Operation key Remark
1 [>] ► Press ► key to go to the sub-menu
Press ENTER key to execute reset or revise. After
2 [+] ENTER
executing, a confirmation dialog screen displays.
1Note: In order to secure the reliability, the reset and revision items are controlled by the
vendor.
2Note: The number of digits for the power value can be reduced based on the units kW,
MW and kvar+. For instance when the power is measured as "123,456kW" then it
is displayed as "123MW". If this value has to be changed then the user can key in a
new compensated value. For example, if "78MW" should be displayed on the IED
screen even though the measured value is "123,456kW" then the user should key in
the new value of "78MW". Note that the compensated value "78MW" is "78,000kW",
and it is not "78,456kW" or "123,456kW". Note that the compensated value will be
affected when there is a change in CT ratio setting. That is, when the user key in a
value of "78MW" for the CT ratio of "2000:1" and later when the CT ratio is
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 679 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
changed from "2000:1" to "4000:1", then the value is displayed as "156MW" on the
IED screen. Therefore when the CT ratio setting is changed, the user should key in
the value of "78MW" again to display the compensated value.
Counter sub-menu: the name and number of statistical items are shown in
two lines. When an item is revised, a [+] mark is shown at the end of the first
line.
Counter
10:48 1/8
0
0
0
Figure 11.4-13 Display for Counter sub-menu

To change the counter number, follow the steps as shown in Figure 11.4-14.
Main Menu Monitoring Statistics

10:48 2/10 10:48 1/8 10:48 1/2
Record > ► Metering > ► _Counter >
_Monitoring > Binary I/O > Accumulated Time >
Setting > Communication >
◄ ◄
IO Setting > Relay Element >
◄
Time > _Statistics >
Test > GOOSE Monitoring >
► ◄
▲
Counter Counter Counter

10:48 1/8 10:48 1/8
Change? ENTER Output COUNT + ENTER Output COUNT +
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No 0 0
Count2 (No Assign) + Count2 (No Assign) +
1 0
Count3 (No Assign) + Count3 (No Assign) +
0 0
Revise the data
CANCEL Counter
ENTER 10:48 1/8
OUTPUT COUNT +
0
The data is revised. 1
0
Figure 11.4-14 Steps for changing the counter number

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)
- 680 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Accumulated Time sub-menu: the name and the total time over which the
statistical item has run are shown in two lines. The total time is displayed for
each statistical item in “d (date) h (hour) m (minute)” format. The user can
clear each value of accumulated time using the clear step (reset) is shown in
Figure 11.4-15.
Accumulated Time Accumulated Time

10:48 1/1
_ACT_TIME + Reset?
CANCEL
234d 23h 39m ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
ENTER
Figure 11.4-15 Display for Accumulated Time
(vi) GOOSE monitoring

The status of the GOOSE subscription information is shown for each record-unit, as shown in
Figure 11.4-16. Each IED name (for example, “GRx200-11-603”) has been defined in the
GOOSE subscription information.
GOOSE Monitoring
10:48 1/3
GRx200-11-603 OK
GRx200-21-603 OK
GRx200-31-603 NG
Figure 11.4-16 Display for GOOSE Monitoring
(vii) Diagnostics
Errors are shown for each monitoring element. If there are no errors, an error message is not
displayed.
Diagnostics
10:48 1/2
PLC data error >
Data(commslv) error >
Figure 11.4-17 Display for Diagnostics
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 681 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting sub-menu
The "Setting" sub-menu is used to view and change settings for the following functions:
Recording, Metering, Communication interface, Relay application, and Monitoring. In this
section, we show the “Setting method for elements, switches, and list selection”, “Protection
setting”, and others. Furthermore, this section describes the confirmation of setting, and the
“On/Off” function that is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figures in this chapter are examples only. The user should confirm
setting values after their values are changed.
(i) Setting method

In “Setting” sub-menu, four setting modes are provided as follows:
1. Element Setting Mode
2. Switch Setting Mode
3. List Selection Mode (items selection)
4. Signal Selection Mode (signal selection)
Element Setting Mode: The “Element Setting Mode” is used for setting
numerical values. For each setting, the setting name, setting value and the
unit are displayed in two lines. Figure 11.5-1 provides an example of the
element setting mode.
OC1 OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_OC1-b + *OC1-b +
123.00000 124.00000
OC1-c + OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
Before Changing Setting After Changing Setting
Figure 11.5-1 Example of Element Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting has been
changed, the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. Once the
change is canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. For
the setting of a value, follow the steps as shown in Figure 11.5-21:
- 682 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
OC1 OC1 OC1

10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_OC1-b + [ENTER] OC1-b + [◄] x 5 OC1-b +
123.00000 123.00000 123.00000
OC1-c + OC1-c + OC1-c +
1.00000
[CANCEL]
1.00000 [►] x 5 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg 45 deg
[▲] [▼]
[CANCEL] [CANCEL]
OC1 OC1
OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
10:48 2/8
*OC1-b + [▼] *OC1-b + [ENTER]
*OC1-b +
124.00000 124.00000
124.00000
_OC1-c + [▲] OC1-c +
OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000 [ENTER] 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
45 deg
Figure 11.5-2 Steps for setting the value

1Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figure above is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
the setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer
to “Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.
2Note: The operation keys have several features enabling the user to key values for
setting items. Table 11.5-1 shows values that have been changed before and after
the user presses the operation keys.
Table 11.5-1 Operation example when the operation keys are pressed.
Before Key After
1 2 6 7 9
1 2 6 8 0
[▲]
9 1 7 1 0 1 7
9 1 7 [▼] 1 0 9 1 7
9 . 1 1 0 9 . 1
6 7 5 6 7 5
[◄]
1 . 7 5 1 . 7 5
2 1 : 2 3 [►] 2 1 : 2 3
Switch Setting Mode: The “Switch Setting Mode” is a setting used for the
selection of two modes. Figure 11.5-3 provides an example of the switch
setting mode. For each setting, the setting name and the selected item are
- 683 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
displayed on two lines.
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
_OC1-VTFBlk + *OC1-VTFBlk +
Non Block
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
Before Changing Setting After Changing Setting
Figure 11.5-3 Display Example of Switch Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting is changed,
the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. When the change is
canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. Figure 11.5-4
shows the operation of the switch setting mode.
OC1 OC1 OC1

10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56 [►] / [▼] / 10:48 24/56
_OC1-VTFBlk + [ENTER] OC1-VTFBlk + [▲] / [◄] *OC1-VTFBlk +
Non Non Block
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
[CANCEL]
Trip Trip [►] / [▼] / Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD + [▲] / [◄] OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR 3POR
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
*OC1-2fBlk + *OC1-2fBlk +
[▼] Block
Block
_OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip [▲] Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
Figure 11.5-4 Operation of Switch Setting Mode

Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The above figure is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer to
“Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.
List Selection Mode: The “List Selection Mode” is composed of

main-setting-screens and selection-list-screens as shown in Figure 11.5-5. In
- 684 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
the main-setting-screen, the setting name and the selected item are
displayed. Press the key ENTER to begin the setting process; the screen for
selection list will appear. Once a setting has been changed, the [*] mark will
appear alongside the name of the setting. When the change is canceled or
confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically.
OC1 OC1-2fBlk OC1-2fBlk

10:48 23/56 10:48 1/3 10:48 2/3
_OC1-2fBlk + [ENTER] _Non [▼] Non
Non Block-3P _Block-3P
OC1-VTFBlk + Block-PerP Block-PerP
[CANCEL]
Non [▲]
OC1-UseFor +
Trip
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 23/56 10:48 23/56
*OC1-2fBlk + [▼] *OC1-2fBlk +
Block-3P Block-3P
_OC1-VTFBlk + OC1-VTFBlk +
Non [▲] Non
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
Figure 11.5-5 Operation of List Selection Mode
Signal Selection Mode: Figure 11.5-6 shows the steps to select a signal.
F1 Key Select Function Select Element

10:48 1/2 10:48 2/128 10:48 2/128
_Signal + [ENTER] No assign [►] No assign
Assign Signal _423100 > _AF00001001
Logic + 423101 > AF00002001
[CANCEL]
Toggle 423102 > [◄] AF00003001
423103 > AF00004001
423104 > AF00005001
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
F1 Key
10:48 1/2
*Signal +
423100 AF00001001
Logic +
Toggle
Figure 11.5-6 Operation of signal selection
- 685 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Confirmation dialog in each sub-menu

In “Setting” menu, a confirmation dialog #1 and #2 appears in the sub-menu and lower-level
menu, as shown in Figure 11.5-7
Sub-menu Sub -menu Sub -menu

Case2
Setting Record
Metering
Communication
Protection Active Group
： Copy gr.(A->B).
Confirmation
Group 1 Dialog #1
Group 2
Confirmation ：
Case1
Group 8
Dialog #2
Trip
Figure 11.5-7 Confirmation dialog setting
 Case1: Confirmation dialog #1

Suppose the setting of each group is changed; the confirmation dialog will
appear when returning to the screen of the “Protection” sub-menu, as shown
in Figure 11.5-8.
 Case2: Confirmation dialog #2
Suppose a setting is changed; the confirmation dialog will appear when
returning to the “Upper Menu”, as shown in Figure 11.5-9.
- 686 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
Setting Protection Group 1

10:48 4/7 10:48 3/10 10:48 2/3
Record > [►] Active group > Telecommunication >
[►]
Metering > Copy gr.(A->B) > *Trip >
Communication > _Group 1 > Autoreclose >
_Protection > [◄] Group 2 > [◄]
Counter > Group 3 >
Function key > Group 4 >
[►] [◄]
OC OC Trip
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 1/12
*OC1EN +> [ENTER] *OC1EN + [►] *OC >
On On UV >
OC2EN + OC2EN + ZS >
Off [CANCEL] Off [◄] ZG >
OC3EN + OC3EN + EF >
Off Off DIFF >
[►] / [▼] / [►] / [▼] /

[▲] / [◄] [▲] / [◄]
OC [CANCEL] OC Group1
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 2/3
*OC1EN +> *OC1EN +> [◄] x 2 Telecommunication >
Off Off *Trip >
OC2EN + [ENTER] OC2EN + Autoreclose >
Off Off
[►] x 2
OC3EN + OC3EN +
Off Off
[◄]
Protection Protection
[ENTER]
10:48 3/10 The changed Setting
Active group > Change setting?
is confirmed. ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Copy gr.(A->B) >
_Group 1 >
Group 2 > The changed Setting
Group 3 > [CANCEL]
Group 4 >
is canceled.
Figure 11.5-8 Setting example in case #1
- 687 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
Main Menu Setting Communication

10:48 3/9 10:48 3/7 10:48 2/5
Record > [►] Record > [►] LAN >
Monitoring > Metering > _IEC61850 >
_Setting > _Communication > IEC103 >
[◄] [◄]
IO Setting > Protection > Modbus >
Time > Counter > DNP >
Test > Function key >
[►] [◄]
IEC61850 IEC61850 IEC61850

10:48 1/6 [►] / [▼] / 10:48 1/6 10:48 1/6
*850BLK + [▲] / [◄] [ENTER] _850BLK +
850BLK +
Block Normal Normal
GSECHK + GSECHK + GSECHK +
ON [CANCEL] ON [CANCEL] ON
SI1-1 + SI1-1 + SI1-1 +
254 254 254
[ENTER] [CANCEL]
IEC61850 Setting
Communication
10:48 1/6 10:48 2/5
*850BLK + [◄] [◄] Change setting?
LAN >
Block ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
*IEC61850 >
GSECHK + IEC103 >
ON
[►] Modbus >
SI1-1 + DNP >
254
Setting [ENTER]
The changed setting is
10:48 3/7
Record > confirmed.
Metering >
_Communication >
Protection > The changed setting is
Counter >
[CANCEL]
canceled.
Function key >
Figure 11.5-9 Setting example in case #2
- 688 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) On/Off function

When the “Setting->Protection->Group (1 to 8)” sub-menu is displayed, the “On/OFF function”
is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
“On” indicates that the setting is enabled; the mark [>] will appear. More detail of the
settings provided within the hierarchy are described later.
“Off” indicates that the setting is disabled; the detailed settings are hidden, the mark [>]
is not indicated. The following figure shows the usage of On/Off function.
OC OC OC
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4
[►] / [◄] /
10:48 1/4
*OC1EN +>
[ENTER] *OC1EN +>
[▲] / [▼]
*OC1EN +
On On Off
OC2EN + OC2EN + OC2EN +
Off [CANCEL] Off [►] / [◄] / Off
OC3EN + OC3EN + [▲] / [▼] OC3EN +
Off Off Off
[ENTER]
Protection OC
10:48 1/4
Change setting? *OC1EN +
The changed setting [ENTER] ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Off
is confirmed. OC2EN +
[◄] x 3
Off
OC3EN +
Off
Protection OC
10:48 3/10 10:48 1/4
Active group > *OC1EN +
Copy gr.(A->B) >
Return to the “OC” Off
_Group 1 > setting screen. OC2EN +
Group 2 > Off
Group 3 > OC3EN +
Group 4 > Off
Figure 11.5-10 Operation of On/Off function
Table 11.5-2 Explanation of [+>] mark in On/Off function

Display Operation Remark
[+>] ► Go to the sub-menu
ENTER Change setting.
(iv) Protection group setting

The IED provides eight setting groups for the protection of the power system; the user can
choose an alternative setting group from one of the eight groups in response to a change in the
- 689 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)
6F2S1905 (0.80)
operation of the power system. In the “Protection” sub-menu, the user can change the active
group and can copy the group settings. Jump to the “Element Setting Menu” if a relay setting
is requied.
Change active group: An example for changing the active group is shown in
the following figure.
Protection Protection Protection

10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11
Common [▲] x 4 Common [►] Common
Active Group + Active Group + Active Group +
3
3 [◄] 3
Copy Group (A->B) > [▼] x 4 Copy Group (A->B) > Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 1 > Group 1 >
Group 2 > Group 2 > Group 2 >
Refer to “Note: 1)”
[▲] x 2 [▼] x 2
Protection
Protection
10:48 5/11
Common
Change Setting? [ENTER]
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Active Group +
1
Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
[ENTER]
Protection
10:48 1/10
Common
The changed setting [►]
Active Group >
is confirmed. Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Group 3 >
†Note: When the screen moves to the “Protection”

sub-menu from the “Setting” sub-menu, the cursor will
appear alongside the current active group.
Figure 11.5-11 Operation of changing active group
Copy group setting: The user can copy an active setting from one group to
another group. As an example, in the following figure “Group3” will be copied
to “Group2”, as shown in Figure 11.5-12.
Note: In the “Copy Group (A->B)” screen, the number displayed at A is the current active
group number.
- 690 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
Protection Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group (A->B)

10:48 1/11 10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
Common
[►] _A (1 – 8): + [▼] A (1 – 8): +
3 3
Active Group +
B (1 - 8): +
1 [◄] [▲] _B (1 - 8): +
1 1
*Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
[ENTER]
Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group(A->B)

10:48 1/2
[ENTER]
10:48 1/2 [▲] 10:48 1/2
A (1 – 8): + A (1 – 8): + A (1 – 8): +
3 3 3
*B (1 - 8): + *B (1 - 8): + [► B (1 - 8): +
2 2 ] 1
[◄]
Protection
Copy Group? [ENTER]

ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No The changed setting
is confirmed.
Protection
10:48 1/11
Common
Active Group >
1
Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Figure 11.5-12 Copy group setting
Change group settings: Upon shipment from the factory, the default settings
are set. Therefore, in each group, the user can change the settings of the
protection functions and other features. To change the settings in each group,
refer to the setting method discussed in section 11.5(i).
(v) Configuration of Function keys

Function keys (F1 to F7) on the IED front panel provide a feature to navigate to a specific
screen, which is configurable by the user. These keys have their own LED, which can be
- 691 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
programmed using settings. Six screens are configured for six of the function keys (F1 to F6),
respectively, as the default settings shown in Table 4.6-3.
Table 11.5-3 Function keys which are configured to navigate a menu

Function Key configured Menus
F1 Metering
F2 Fault Record
F3 Event Record1
F4 Event Record2
F5 Event Record3
F6 Diagnostics
Screen jump function: To configure the screen jump function, follow the steps
as shown in the figure below.
Function Key F1 Key F1 Key Function
10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > [►] *Function + [ENTER] Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal +
[◄] [CANCEL] _No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[ ]x2 [▼] x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 [ENTER] 10:48 1/3
[◄] x 2
Change Setting? *Function + *Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Screen Jump Assign Signal
Signal + No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
[ENTER]
[An Example]
OC F1 Key
The “Screen Jump”
10:48 1/4 Push [F1]
setting is _OC1EN +> for 3s. Register this screen
On to F1 Key?
confirmed. Do the
OC2EN +> ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
next step to select On
OC3EN +
a screen.
Off
[ENTER]
The selected screen is assigned to [F1].
Figure 11.5-13 Operation of screen jump setting
- 692 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
On any screen, press the screen-jump function key to display a screen, refer to the
following figure:
Main Menu OC
10:48 2/8 10:48 1/4
Record > [F1] _OC1EN +>
_Monitoring > On
Setting > OC2EN +>
[F1]
IO setting > On
Time > OC3EN +
Test > Off
Figure 11.5-14 Operation of screen jump function
To cancel the screen-jump function, follow the procedure provided in Figure

11.5-15.
Note: 1) Once a screen is configured to a function key, it will not be deleted until a new
screen is configured for the same function key.
2) If a configured screen is disabled by “On/Off Function” setting (refer to section
11.5(iii)), the screen jump function is also disabled for the function key.

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 1/3
F1 Key > [►] Function + [ENTER] *Screen Jump
F2 Key > Screen Jump Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal + No Assign
[◄] [CANCEL]
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[▼] x 2 [▲] x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
[◄] x 2 [ENTER]
Change Setting? *Function + Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No No Assign Assign Signal
Signal + _No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
[ENTER]
The “Screen Jump” function is
canceled on F1 key.
Figure 11.5-15 Cancelling screen jump function
Signal control function: To assign a test signal to a function key, follow the
steps as shown in Figure 11.5-16.
- 693 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > [►] *Function + [ENTER] Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal +
[◄] [CANCEL] _No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[▲] [▼]
F1 Key F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2 10:48 2/3
[ENTER]
*Function + [▼] *Function +> Screen Jump
No Assign Assign Signal *Assign Signal
*Signal + [▲] LED > [ENTER] No Assign
123101AF00001001
Logic +
Instant
[ENTER]
Select Function Select Element Select Element

10:48 1/25 10:48 1/128 10:48 3/128
_123100 >
[►] _AF00001001 [▼] x 2 AF00001001
123101 > AF00002001 AF00002001
123102 > AF00003001 _AF00003001
123103 > [◄] AF00004001 [▲] x 2 AF00004001
123106 > AF00005001 AF00005001
123107 > AF00006001 AF00006001
[ENTER]
Setting F1 Key
[ENTER] [◄] x 2 10:48 1/3
The changed setting Change Setting? *Signal +
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No 123101AF00003001
is confirmed.
Logic +
Instant
Figure 11.5-16 Assigning a signal to the function key
- 694 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
I/O setting sub-menu

The “I/O Setting” sub-menu is used to set or change settings for the following items:
(i) AC Analog Input
(ii) Binary Input
(iii) Binary Output
(iv) LED
This section explains the details of the setting method.
(i) AC analog input

For the AC analog inputs in the VCT module, the user can configure a ratio for each AC
analog channel. With regard to the ratio, the user can key the value of the ratio from the
sub-menu.
Selection of ratio: For example, Figure 4.2-1 shows how the channel
selection is made for the AC analog input on a VCT module (AI#1 = VCT#1).
Move the cursor by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Then, press key ►to go to the
next level in the hierarchy.
AC Analog Input AI#1

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/12
AI#1 > [►] CH1 >
AI#2 > CH2 >
CH3 >
CH4 >
CH5 >
CH6 >
[►]
AI#1
10:48 1/2
AI1_Ch1_Ratio +
2000
AI1_Ch1_Rating +
DEP
Figure 11.6-1 AC analog input screen

Note: This screen is a sample. The AI numbers displayed are dependent upon the
configuration of VCT modules in each IED.
Check of rating: Figure 11.6-2 is an example of rating in channel#1. From

this screen, the user can find a rating defined for each channel.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 695 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
AI#1 AI1_Ch1_Rating
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/3
AI1_Ch1_Ratio + DEP
2000 [►] 1A
AI1_Ch1_Rating + 5A
DEP
Figure 11.6-2 Check of rating

Note: Term “DEP” means that a rating value follows the default setting at the
manufacture when it is carried out customer’s ordering. For more information of
ordering, see Appendix: Ordering.
(ii) Binary input

All binary input circuits provided in the IED are user-configurable; the user can set common
programmable logic (CPL) for each binary input circuit. (For more information of CPL, see
Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module: Binary input circuit)
The user can activate or turn off the above timers and switches using the setting
function. To configure the binary input circuits, the user should follow the procedure in steps
((ii)-1 and (ii)-2)
Selection of binary input circuit: For example, Figure 11.6-3 illustrates the
selection of a binary input circuit on a binary IO module. Move the cursor by
pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Then, press key ►to go to the next hierarchy.
Binary Input Slot#3

10:48 2/3 10:48 1/8
Slot#1 > [►] _Common >
_Slot#3 > BI1 >
Slot#4 > BI2 >
BI3 >
BI4 >
BI5 >
Figure 11.6-3 Selection of slot and binary input circuit

Note: This screen is a sample. The slot numbers displayed depend upon the configuration
of the binary IO module in each IED.
CPL setting: Figure 11.6-4 is an example of a “Common” setting. From this

screen, the user can set a threshold level and the number of comparisons
feature for contact chatter for all binary input circuits.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 696 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Common
10:48 1/2
Thres_Level +
Low
Cmp_Num +
4
Figure 11.6-4 Common screen
For example, Figure 11.6-5 shows the CPL setting for binary input circuit (BI1).
The timer and the inverse switch can be activated when On or Off is set for
setting [BI1_CPL]. Press key ENTER to commence the setting of a switch or
parameter.
BI1
10:48 1/2
BI1_CPL +
Off
On Delay Timer +
0.000 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.000 s
SW
Inverse-SW +
Normal
Figure 11.6-5 CPL setting

Note: Setting items “On Delay timer and others” are displayed when the user sets
[BI*_CPL] On.
(iii) Binary output

All binary output circuits provided in the IED are also user-configurable; the user can
configure timers and switches using CPL settings. (For more information of CPL, see Chapter
Technical description: Binary IO module: Binary output circuit)
Selection of binary output circuit: For example, Figure 11.6-6 illustrates the
selection of a binary output circuit on a binary IO module. Move the cursor by
pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the next level in the hierarchy.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 697 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Binary Output Slot#2

10:48 2/3 10:48 1/10
Slot#1 > [►] _BO1 >
_Slot#2 > BO2 >
Slot#3 > BO3 >
BO4 >
BO5 >
BO6 >
Figure 11.6-6 Selection of slot and binary output circuit

Note: This screen is a sample. The slot numbers displayed are dependent upon the
configuration of the binary IO module in each IED case.
CPL Setting: For example, Figure 11.6-7 illustrates the setting of a binary
output circuit (BO1). Using setting [BI1_CPL] On, the CPL logic in BO1 is
available. Similarly, assigned signals, timers and switches can be set in this
menu. Note that detailed setting items are shown when On is keyed into
setting [BI*_CPL].
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 698 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
BO1
10:48 1/17
BO1_CPL +
Off
Input signal1 +
No Assign
Input Signal2 +
No Assign
Input Signal3 +
No Assign
Signal8 +
No Assign
LOGIC-SW
AND
On Delay Timer +
0.000 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.000 s
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
Logic Timer +
0.000 s
FF-SW +
Off
Reset Signal +
No Assign
Figure 11.6-7 Binary output setting
Figure 11.6-8 shows how to assign a signal:
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 699 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
BO1 Select Function Select Function

10:48 2/17 10:48 1/127 10:48 2/127
BO1_CPL + [ENTER] _No Assign [▼] No Assign
On ARC 4A6001> _ARC 4A6001>
_Signal1 + BCD 452001> BCD 452001>
[CANCEL]
No Assign BIO_Slot1 200B01> BIO_Slot1 200B01>
Signal2 + BIO_Slot2 200B02> BIO_Slot2 200B02>
No Assign BIO_Slot3 200B03> BIO_Slot3 200B03>
[►] [CANCEL]
Select Element
10:48 2/155
No Assign
_CO-OC-A 8000001B60
CO-OC-B 8100001B61
CO-OC-C 8200001B62
CO-EF 8300001B63
EXT.ARC_S 8300001B64
Figure 11.6-8 Assigning a signal

Note: “No Assign” is always displayed on the first line, even when the page is changed.
(iv) Selection and setting of LED

As shown in Figure 11.1-1, the IED provides 26 LEDs and 7 function-keys. The user can
configure LEDs (“LED#3” to “LED#26”) and the function key LEDs (F1 to F7; each has a
LED). Each LED is driven via a logic gate which can be programed to be an AND gate, OR
gate or XOR gate operation. Furthermore, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic,
settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. One or up to eight signals can be
assigned to a single LED with selectable LED color.
Selection of LED: Figure 11.6-9 shows the LED selection screen; the user can
select a setting item by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the
next level in the hierarchy.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 700 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
LED
10:48 1/31
_LED3 >
LED4 >
LED5 >
LED6 >
LED7 >
LED8 >
LED26 >
F1 Key >
F2 Key >
:
Figure 11.6-9 LED selecting screen
LED Setting: As shown in Figure 11.6-10, the user can set the logical gate,
timer, color of LED and assign signals in this screen.
LED3
10:48 1/16
Color >
RED
Input signal1 +
No assign
Input signal 2 +
No assign
Input signal 8 +
No assign
Reset signal +
No assign
LOGIC-SW +
AND
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
On Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Logic Timer +
0.00 s
Color +
Figure 11.6-10 LED setting screen
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 701 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Time sub-menu
In the Time sub-menu, the user can change settings of time function, such as time zone, time
synchronizing source, format of time display and so on. Figure below shows the Time
sub-menu.
Time
10:48 1/5
Clock >
Time Zone >
Time Sync >
Display Format >
Summer Time >
Figure 11.7-1 Time function screen

(i) Clock
The clock can run locally or synchronize with the external time source shown in
[ActiveSyncSrc] menu. Figure 11.7-2 shows the Clock screen:
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 11.7-2 Clock screen

The Clock sub-menu is composed of the [Time] menu, [Format] menu and [ActiveSyncSrc]
menu. Time for the IED can be set in the screen. When the active synchronizing source is
SNTP, the user can go to another sub-menu to check the current active SNTP server.
The following shows how to operate in this screen.
Time menu
(1) Move cursor to the Time menu and press ENTER.
Clock
10:00 1/2
_[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
(2) Current time can be changed to press ▲ or ▼.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:05:00
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 702 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
ActiveSyncSrc menu
ActiveSyncSrc can be shown by the following procedure.
Clock (1) Move cursor to the [ActiveSyncSrc] menu and press ►.

10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05 *Note: When the active synchronizing source is not SNTP, the >
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss is not shown in the screen.
_[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
(2) The ActiveSyncSrc screen shows the active IP address of
ActiveSyncSrc
10:48 active SNTP server.
192. 168. 0. 100
192. 168. 0. 101
*192. 168. 0. 102
192. 168. 0. 103
(ii) Time zone

The user can input time zone designated by UTC in Time zone screen. Time zone according as
local area for the IED should be set. Figure 11.7-3 shows the Time Zone screen:
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
0.00hour
Figure 11.7-3 Time zone setting screen
Time Zone
10:48 1/1 (1) Move cursor to the Time zone menu and press ENTER.
_Time zone +
0.00hour Time zone can be set by 0.25 hour. The user has to fill the Time
zone in accordance with UTC (Coordinate Universal Time).
(iii) Time synchronization

Time synchronization source can be selected in Time synchronization screen. The
synchronization function can be activated by configuration of the On/Off switch in this menu.
Figure 11.7-4 shows the configuration screen for the time synchronization function:
Time Sync
10:48 1/4
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
Figure 11.7-4 Time synchronization setting
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 703 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
The following shows how to operate in this screen.

TimeSyncSrc menu
Time SyncSrc (Time Synchronization Source) can be changed by the following procedure.
Time Sync
10:48 1/4 1) Move cursor to the TimeSyncSrc menu and press ENTER.
_TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
TimeSyncSrc 2) The TimeSyncSrc menu is composed of “---”, SNTP, BI,

10:48 1/5
--- MODBUS and IRIG-B.
_SNTP
BI
MODBUS
IRIG-B
Note: When “---” is selected, it means that time synchronization is
not operated.
By using time synchronization via Ethernet with a SNTP server, the user can connect up
to a maximum of four SNTP servers. If more than one SNTP is used, the priority of the
servers can be decided in ascending order of synchronized stratum value (in order of
higher-accuracy) and select the server with the smallest value.
SNTP menu
IP address of SNTP server can be set by the following procedure.
1) To confirm that the SNTP synchronization function is set for
Time Sync
10:48 1/4 On. Subsequently move cursor to the SNTP menu and press ►.
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
_SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
SNTP
10:48 1/4 2) Move cursor to desired server number and press ENTER.
_Server1 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
3) The user can set IP address using ▲ or ▼ by each digit.
SNTP When the user has finished setting IP address of the server, press
10:48 1/4
Server1 + ENTER.
0. 0. 0.176
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 704 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
BI SYNC menu
When the “BI SYNC” is set to On in BI SYNC menu, the user can choose a binary input circuit
(BI) as a synchronization standard. Adjustment setting ‘SYNC_ADJ’ is provided.
Binary synchronization function can be set by the following procedure.
BI SYNC
1) Key the Data ID of the BI output
10:48 1/2 2) Set adjustment time for [SYNC ADJ]
BI_ID +
No Assign
SYNC_ADJ +
0.000 s The “IRIG SYNC” setting is similar to activate by using the
On/Off switch.
(iv) Display format

Display format of time in the IED can be selected in Display format screen. All time formats
will be displayed according to Date_fmt setting. The IED provides different formats to display
the date. Figure 11.7-5 shows display format menu:
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Figure 11.7-5 Display format menu

Display Format sub-menu is composed of Date_fmt menu, Date_delimiter setting
Time_delimiter setting and Sec_delimiter setting.
Date format menu

(1) Move cursor to the Date_fmt menu and press ENTER.
Display Format
10:48 1/4
_Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
(2) Date display format can be selected by moving cursor to the
Date_fmt
desired format type.
10:48 1/3
_YYYYMMDD
MMDDYYYY
DDMMYYYY
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 705 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Date delimiter menu

Display Format
10:48 1/4 (1) Move cursor to the [Date_delimiter] menu and press
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD ENTER.
_Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Date_delimiter
10:48 1/3 (2) Date delimiter can be selected by moving cursor to the
_-
/ desired format type.
.
Time delimiter menu

(1) Move cursor to the [Time_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Display Format
10:48 3/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter + (2) The time delimiter mark is switched.
:
Display Format
10:48 3/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
.
Second delimiter menu

Second delimiter can be switched by the following procedure.
Display Format
10:48 4/4 (1) Move cursor to the [Sec_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
.
Display Format (2) The second delimiter mark is switched.

10:48 4/4
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
,
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 706 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(v) Summer time

When the Summer Time configuration is On, the details can be set:
Figure 11.7-6 Summer time
Summer Time
10:48 1/13
Summer time +
Off
Notice that summertime can be set by the following procedure If summertime is started or
ended in the last week of the month, Start_Week and End_Week must be filled “5”. The IED
controls starting or ending summer time day to set last week of the month on Start_Week or
End_Week automatically.
Summer Time (1) Move cursor to the [Summer time] menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/13 Summer time mode can be switched On/Off by pressing ► or ◄.
_Summer time +
Off After Summer time mode is set to On, the user can set summer
time in detail.
Summer Time
10:48 1/9 (2) In this screen, details of summer time setting can be set.
IS_UTC_base +
On
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
The user can set the starting date and ending of summer time.
Summer Time
10:48 4/9 The following procedure is a case of starting weekday setting.
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday + (1) Move cursor to the [Start_Wday] menu and press ►.
Sun
Start_SM(Wday)
10:48
1/8 (2) Move cursor to the desired weekday and press ENTER.
---
_Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Summer Time
10:48 4/9
Start_Month + (3) Starting weekday is set.
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 707 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Test sub-menu
Test functions can be operated from the test screen available on the front panel of the IED.
(i) Test screen
The Test screen has functions such as Test Mode, Test Flag, Mode Change and Signal
Monitoring. The user can select any of these test functions using the following test screen.
Test
10:48 1/4
Test Mode +
Off
TestFlag-EN +
On
Mode Change >
Single Monitoring >
Figure 11.8-1 Test screen

(ii) Test mode screen
The Test Mode screen is shown in Figure 11.8-2. The Test Mode screen has four functions, Test
Option, Function Test, Binary Input and Binary Output.
Test Mode
10:48 1/4
Test Option >
Function Test >
Binary Input >
Binary Output >
Figure 11.8-2 Test Mode screen

Test option screen: The Test Option screen, shown in Figure 11.8-3, is used
to select the following functions and perform a Test flag forced reset.
Test Option
10:48 1/65
S-TestFlagCancel +
Off
GOSNDBLK +
Off
GOSUBBLK +
Off
Figure 11.8-3 Test Option screen

 Test flag cancel (S-TestFlagCancel)
This function is used to forcibly reset the Test flag in the communication
packet. The Test flag is set to OFF by default. The Test flag is used in
combination with another device in the Test mode. When this option is
selected, the Test flag in the communication packet is reset temporarily to
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 708 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
reproduce a pseudo-operation condition.
 GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

This function is used for selecting or disabling the GOOSE sending
information in Test mode. This function is used when there is a conflict in
communication with another active IED while sending a GOOSE signal.
 GOOSE receiving block (GOSUBBLK)

This function is used for receiving or rejecting GOOSE subscription
information from another IED in Test mode. This function is used for testing
in case of bad reception (For example, Validation of Interlock determination).
The user can simulate a bad reception condition passively by using two
GOOSE Sending Blocks.
Note: The user may perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using the
GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a remote
terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid that the user can simulate bad reception tests for a particular IED using the
GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the particular IED under
test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the tests.
Function test screen: Function test screen is provided for testing; the use
can program test operations, which can be implemented in protection and
control functions. Figure 11.8-4 exemplifies the Test screen. Automatic
supervision will stop when the user sets Off for A.M.F (for more information
about the automatic supervision, see Chapter Automatic supervision).
Function Test
10:48 1/65
A.M.F. +
On
BU1_Exclusion +
Off
BU2_Exclusion +
Off
Figure 11.8-4 Function test menu (an example)
Binary input test screen: The user can have a virtual signal to a binary input
circuit using the binary input test screen. Figure 11.8-5 shows an example;
the user can select IO#1 or IO#3. (Actually, the content displayed will differ
depending upon the binary IO module inserted. Refer to Chapter Technical
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 709 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
description: Binary IO Module)
Binary Input
10:48 1/2
Slot#1 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 11.8-5 Binary input menu

Figure 11.8-6 is a case when IO#3 (Slot#03) is selected.
Slot#3
10:48 1/19
BIF OP +
Slot3-BIO1-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BIO2-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BI03-SET +
Figure 11.8-6 Setting menu for Slot #3 module

For example, if the user wishes to simulate binary input circuit #1 (BI1) on the
BIO1A module at IO#3 slot, the user can select SLOT3-BI01-SET screen, as shown
in Figure 11.8-6).
Slot3-BIO1-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 11.8-7 Setting menu after selecting “Slot #3-BIO1-SET”
The user can then make the following selections on the screen and configure the
items required for simulation.
 ON: BI1 output is set forcibly to ON(Logic level=high(1)) regardless of
the actual input signal.
 OFF: BI1 output is set forcibly to OFF(Logic level=low(0)) regardless of
the actual input signal.
 Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
Use the screen shown in Figure 11.8-7 only to configure the BI signals for the
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 710 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
simulation test. This does not start the simulation.
The setting menu is shown in the manner of the screen illustrated in Figure 11.8-7,
if the user needs to configure an Input Circuit other than BI01 (BI02 to BI18 in the
screen shown in Figure 11.8-6); the user can configure each BI signal in a manner
similar to that described for BI01.
After selecting OP in Figure 11.8-6, use the following screen to start the simulation
test.
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Press <- to return
To previous page
Figure 11.8-8 Execution menu of BI test

If key ENTER is pressed in Figure 11.8-8, the status will change to test status. The
following screen will be displayed after pressing the key ENTER. Figure 11.8-9
shows that the IED is in simulation test mode.
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Operating..
Press <- to return

To previous page
Figure 11.8-9 Running test menu

Note: The user has to continue to depress the key ENTER on the IED front panel during
the simulation test period. The simulation status will be released if key ENTER is
not pressed.
Binary output test screen: The user is able to test a binary output circuit by
using GR-TIEMS. Figure 11.8-10 is an example of how to select a binary
output from the Test Mode screen.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 711 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Binary Output
10:48 1/2
Slot#2 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 11.8-10 Binary output menu

Figure 11.8-11 shows selection of IO#2 (Slot #2).
Slot#2
10:48 1/19
BO2F OP +
SLOT2-BO01-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Figure 11.8-11 Setting menu for Slot #2 module
Figure 11.8-12 shows the Output Circuit configuration of BO01 at IO#2 (Slot#2).
The procedure for operation is similar to the operation of the binary input circuit.
(Refer to Figure 11.8-7 to Figure 11.8-9)
SLOT2-BO01-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 11.8-12 Setting menu after selecting “SLOT2-BO01-SET”
The user can configure the required settings for the simulation test of the binary
output circuit.
 ON: Output signal for simulation test is ON
 OFF: Output signal for simulation test is OFF
 Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
(iii) TestFlag-EN screen

This function can set all communication protocol Test flags to Test mode. The user should
select TestFlag-EN in Figure 11.8-1 and select On or Off.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 712 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iv) Mode change screen

When the user selects “Mode Change” from the Test sub-menu shown in Figure 11.8-1, the
following Mode change screen is displayed (Figure 11.8-13). This allows control from a remote
device (For example, SAS server) by configuring the MDCTRL-EN setting.
Mode Change
10:48 1/3
MDCTRL-EN +
Off
MDCTRL-SELRST +
30 s
MDCTRL-EXERST +
30 s
Figure 11.8-13 Mode Change sub-menu
(v) Signal monitoring screen

Figure 11.8-14 shows that the user can assign signal-monitoring points to the monitoring
jacks (A, B, and C) on the IED front panel. Incidentally, points have not been assigned for the
monitoring jacks in the menu below.
Signal Monitoring
10:48 1/3
Term A +
No Assign
Term B +
No Assign
Term C +
No Assign
Figure 11.8-14 Signal monitoring sub-menu
When the user wishes to use monitoring jack A to monitor a signal-monitoring point,
select “Term A” in the signal monitoring sub-menu (Figure 11.8-15). The user can then assign
the signal monitoring point for Term A.
10:48 1/3
Input signal +
No Assign
Figure 11.8-15 Selection menu
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 713 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Security setting sub-menu

The Access control function is accessed using the Security Setting sub-menu. Passwords,
active or inactive and several allowed operations can be set for each user ID.
Table 11.9-1 Access control function settings
Display Order 1 2 3 4 5
User ID Guest Setting Test Operation Full Access
Password (Default) N.A 0000 0000 0000 0000
View ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Setting N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Security Setting N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Test N.A N.A ✔ ✔ ✔
Clear record N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔

Functions
Monitoring
(function N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
(Reset/Revise)
keys) F1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
allowed to F2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
operate
F3 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F4 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F5 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F6 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F7 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Note: Sign “✔” shows that the user can operate the function. Sign “N.A” shows that the user
cannot operate the function. Password can be changed in Change-Password sub-menu in the
Security setting.
Table 11.9-2 Meaning of allowed operation

Functions Meaning
View All users can see all screens/menus
In the “Setting” and “IO setting” menu the authorized user can change
Setting each setting item. Operation of the “Time” menu is also allowed.
(Incidentally, all users can set the time.)
Security setting Authorized users can change security settings
An operator can control a device. An operator can also change the mode
Control
between “Remote” and “Local”.
Test A tester and an operator can access the “Test” menu.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can remove
Clear record
record information.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can clear and
Monitoring
change statistical data.
F1 to F7 Users can operate a function/an application with a function key.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 714 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Security setting sub-menu

The Access control function is accessed using the Security Setting sub-menu. Passwords,
active or inactive and several allowed operations can be set for each user ID. Table 11.9-1
shows the settings of the configurable access control function. Table 11.9-2 shows the allowed
operation items.
Table 11.10-1 Access control function settings

Display Order 1 2 3 4 5
User ID Guest Setting Test Operation Full Access
Password (Default) N.A 0000 0000 0000 0000
View ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Setting N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Security
N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Setting
Control N.A N.A N.A ✔ ✔
Test N.A N.A ✔ ✔ ✔

Functions
Clear record N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
(function
Monitoring
keys) N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
(Reset/Revise)
allowed to
F1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
operate
F2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F3 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F4 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F5 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F6 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F7 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Note: Sign “✔” shows that the user can operate the function. Sign “N.A” shows that the user
cannot operate the function. Password can be changed in Change-Password sub-menu in the
Security setting.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 715 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 11.10-2 Meaning of allowed operation

Functions Meaning
View All users can see all screens/menus
In the “Setting” and “IO setting” menu the authorized user can change
Setting each setting item. Operation of the “Time” menu is also allowed.
(Incidentally, all users can set the time.)
Security setting Authorized users can change security settings
An operator can control a device. An operator can also change the mode
Control
between “Remote” and “Local”.
Test A tester and an operator can access the “Test” menu.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can remove
Clear record
record information.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can clear and
Monitoring
change statistical data.
F1 to F7 Users can operate a function/an application with a function key.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 716 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
12 Installation
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 717 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Caution for storage

If the equipment is not installed immediately, it should be repacked in the original boxes and
should be stored in dry and clean condition.
Recommended storage condition:
- Temperature: 0 degree Celsius to +40 degree Celsius
- No condensation
Handling precautions
The inside module should be handled in the electro static charge free environment. That is,
the user shall use an anti-electrostatic-wrist-band, which is grounded.
CAUTION
 Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
 Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board.
Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit board or connectors.
 Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface connected to
the earth.
We strongly recommend the user to do a detailed investigation on the electronic circuitry that
should be carried out for the handling area, which is defined in the IEC 60747 standard.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 718 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Unpack and inspection of hardware and software

The user can unpack, check, and turn on the IED power. For any issues, be in touch with us at
http://www.toshiba-tds.com/tandd/contactform/topform_e.htm.
(i) Opening and inspecting relay (IED) package

Open the relay packing and inspect physical damage if any. Ensure that the following items
are included. If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the above items are missing,
contact your agent.
- Relay (IED) unit
- Test record: One report sheet
- Installation guide: One guide sheet
- Instruction manuals: Provided within a CD-ROM
- Flange covers: Left and right covers
- Function keys label: One label sheet
- LEDs Label: One label sheet
(ii) Manufacture settings (In, Vn, fn, Vdc)

Find the hardware nameplate. The user can know the IED has been delivered correctly in
terms of rated current (In), voltage (Vn), frequency (fn), and DC rating (Vdc). The user can
also find them with Factory settings (Figure 12.3-2).
Ordering positions
7 8 9 A B C D E F G H J K L
- 1 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 1 0 - 2 2 0
Distance protection IED

GRZ200 -21-34H-21-66-30-220
1A / 5A 50 / 60 Month, Year
100-120 110-250
****** ** ***
DC rating (Vdc)
Rated frequency (fn)
Rated voltage (Vn)
Rated current (In)
Figure 12.3-1 Hardware nameplate example on the rear
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 719 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Ordering positions
- 1 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 1 0 - 2 2 0
VCT type(VCT12B)
System frequency (fn) = 60Hz
AC rating (In) = 5A
Figure 12.3-2 Factory setting example

Note: The user is not able to change rated values (fn and In); therefore, the user should
return the IED for the manufacture if required.
(iii) Combination of VCT and BIOs

The transformer module (VCT) is located at the far right slot (e.g., at ‘VC1’ in Figure 12.3-3).
Identify the code at Position ‘7’ to know the VCT type (e.g., VCT12B is implemented by the
instruction code at Position ‘7’ in Figure 12.3-2).
The user can check the layout of the binary input and output modules (BI, BO, or BIO)
using the ordering codes. For example, the user can find BI3A and BO1A modules in IED
depending the ordering cords “4H” at Positions A&B. The user can also know the
configuration with IO configuration label.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 720 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Ordering positions
- 1 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 3 0 - 2 2 0
Figure 12.3-3 IO configuration label example (viewing from the back in 3/4 case)
Note: See Section IED case and module slot in Chapter Technical description to find the
structure of IED cases and terminals. For more information about the BI, BO, and
BIO circuits, see Section Binary IO module in the same chapter.
(iv) Communication modules (LAN and others)

Figure 12.3-3 shows communication modules are implemented at C11 to C15. The layouts of
the communication modules are matched with Ordering codes at Positions ‘E and F’.
Ordering positions
- 1 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 1 0 - 2 2 0
Selected LAN and IRIG
Figure 12.3-4 Example for module selected
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 721 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(v) Relay and control software

Verifying relay software is possible to check the codes at Positons ‘S, G, and T’ on Software
nameplate. For example of Figure 12.3-5, the IED has ‘011’ software†. This IED can operate in
the IEC61850 protocol‡.
Positions
7 S G T E F U 9 V
- 1 0 1 1 - 6 6 2 - 3 E
GRZ200- --
Selected language
Selected protocol
Selected software
Figure 12.3-5 Software nameplate example on the rear

†Note:For more information about relay functions, see Chapter Relay application.
‡Note:For more information about the communication, see Chapter Communication
protocol.
(vi) Flange covers and labels

Two flange covers (blue ones in Figure 12.3-6) are included in the package. The user can
attach them on the IED when mounting into the rack (see succeeding section Rack mounting).
LEDs label
Pockets for labels
Function keys label
Flange covers
Figure 12.3-6 Flange covers and labels attached on IED
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 722 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
PWS alarm threshold setting

The IED has power supply module (PWS) at the far left slot. The user can confirm DC rated
voltage on the hardware nameplate by checking the cord at Positions ‘8’, but the user should
select either alarm thresholds for dropping DC voltage by inserting a jumper on the PWS
(Figure 4.5-2). See Section Power supply module in Chapter Technical description.
Ordering positions
- x 1 - x x x - x x - x x - x x - x x x
DC rated voltage, e.g., 1=’110 to 250Vdc’, selected by the ordering
Figure 12.4-1 Alarm threshold can be set on the PWS module
CAUTION
Note: The connection between terminal screw No. 35 and terminal screw No. 37 is made
with a short-wire, which is installed by the manufacturer. The user shall remove
this short-wire when undertaking the dielectric voltage test for the IED.
Remember that the user shall reconnect the terminals with this short-wire after
the test (See Appendix: Notes for the dielectric voltage test).
Figure 12.4-2 PWS terminal label
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 723 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Removing and installation of an inside module

WARNING
Switch off the DC power supply. Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after
switching off the DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and place the modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components may get damaged. After replacing the module, check all of the settings including
the data related to the PLC, IEC103 and IEC61850, etc. are restored the original settings.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 724 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(i) Removal of the front panel and rear terminal

Step 1: Check the power is not been supplied to the device. Unscrew the four screws on the
front panel to uncover the front panel. An internal flat-cable is used to connect with the inside
modules (approximately 100 millimeters length). Do not pull forcibly.
Screws
Flat cable (100mm)
Removing direction
Step 2: To remove the flat cable, release the locks at the connector.
Releasing the lock
Connector released
Step 3: Detach the terminals where the user wants to replace a broken module with the new
one.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 725 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(ii) Usage of hook for detaching rear terminal blocks

The user can remove the compression terminals using an optional hook designed for
detaching (ordering code is ‘EP-235’). The user should follow the steps, as shown in the below
figures.
Figure 12.5-1 Hook for detaching compression terminals (optional accessory: EP-235)
Step 1: Check whether the power not been supplied for the device. Unscrew four screws on the
terminal.
Remove the screws on
the terminals
Step 2: For detaching, insert the hook in the gap between the terminal and the rear panel by
the means of the illustration below. Check the hook thrusts into the gap between. Then pull
the terminal toward you..
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 726 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) Replacement of modules

Step 1: Remove the flat cable between the CPU module and the binary IO modules.
Before the removal of After the removal of

the flat cable the flat cable
Step 2: Rake out broken module&; insert the new one.
Replace a module
Step 3: Make the connection securely between the CPU and the BIOs using the flat cable. To
check the locks are enabled to the connector.
Make the connection between

the CPU and the BIOs
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 727 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iv) Installation of terminals

Step 1: Attach the terminal that was detached on the rear. Note that the upper terminal† has
20 screw-numbers denoted ‘1’ to ‘20’, whereas the lower terminal has 20 screw-numbers
denoted ‘21’ to ‘40’. Never attach the upper and lower terminals in the other way. Do not
confuse adjacent terminals when the adjacent ones are detached together. Check the
terminals are plugged in tightly without any clearances.
Example of plugging loosely Example of plugging tightly
Looseness
Step 2: Fasten the upper terminal and lower terminals by using the four screws.
Fasten the screws
†The description is intended for the instruction of the “Compressed type terminal”. Hence,
the works for other types are not matched, but the user shall check all the
terminals including the above terminals are also attached securely.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 728 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(v) Attachment of the front panel

Step 1: Plug the flat cable. Check the locks are tighten firmly.
Plug the cable in as

far as a locking
sound is heard.
Step 2: Cover the front panel by tightening the four screws; then the device is ready.
Screws
CAUTION
Supply DC power after checking that all the modules are in their original positions and the
flat cables are plugged in. If the flat cables are plugged in enough, then the module may get
damaged.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 729 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Rack mounting
(i) Mounting 3/4 case
Figure 12.6-1 shows the dimensions for 3/4 case. The mounting procedure is illustrated in
Figure 12.6-2. Remember that flange covers for the front panel is provided in the package.
Figure 12.6-1 Dimension (19” × 3/4 size in millimeters)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 730 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 12.6-2 Mounting procedures
(ii) Mounting 1/2 case

For example, the user can mount 1/2 case using a mounting kit (optional accessary) for the
rack. Figure 12.6-3 shows the dimension about 1/2 case; Figure 12.6-4 illustrates the IED case
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 731 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
is ready for mounting in the rack when the optional kit is attached on the IED. The procedure
to mount the IED for the rack is similar to the instruction of Figure 12.6-2. For more
information, see Appendixes Rack mounting and Case outline.
Figure 12.6-3 ‘1/2 case’ dimension (19” × 1/2 size in millimeters)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 732 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
CP-121
Pan-head screws (M4×8)
Countersunk screws (M4×6)
Figure 12.6-4 Optional kit to mount a ‘1/2 case’

Note: This procedure is not required for flash mounting, but remember that required to
attach flange covers.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 733 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Wiring work
Busbar Busbar VT1
VC1 VCT12B BO1A T6

5A rated 11 1
CT#1 12 Output command1
13 BO1 2
14 3
15 Output command2
BO2 4
16
CB#1
17 5
18 Output command3
BO3 6
7
Output command4
BO4 8
9
Output command5
BO5 10
11 Output command6
BO6 12
13 Output command7
BO7 14
1
2
VT 3
4 35
5 Output command17
BO17
6 36
37 Output command18
Line
BO18 38
100-120V rated Busbar VT1 7
8
Busbar VT2 9
10 LAN A LAN B
CT
3I0 from adjacent line 27
28 CPU C11
Adjacent Line 30
20- 100Base-FX
Input in 110-250Vdc rated
C12
(+) (–)
T3 BI3A 100Base-FX
Input command1 Contact1 1
BI1
Input command2 Contact2
2
BI2
BI3
Input command4
Contact4 4
BI4
Input command5
Contact5 5
BI5
Input command6
Contact6 6
Input command7 BI6

Contact7 7 IRIG C15 Input signal
SIG A1
BI7 B1 External clock
DISUSE A2
B2
GND A3
B3
BI31
BI32
USB
35
36
37
Engineering tools
38
Failure detected in
T7 PWS
Automatic supervision
T7
Power supply in 110/250Vdc nominal 2
DD FAIL. 1
(+) (–) FAIL1 4
Switch Output signals
29
30 +5Vdc 3 Error, Alarm, or warning (N/O)
DC-DC
31
32 0V 1
Error, Alarm, or warning (N/C)
8
35
36 FAIL2 10
37
9 Error, Alarm, or warning (N/O)
38
FG 7
Error, Alarm, or warning (N/C)
E
Figure 12.7-1 Cable wiring; example for VCT12B and the other modules
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 734 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 12.7-1 illustrates example wirings. Power, Current, Voltage, communication signals,
contact signals, and signals for engineering tools are connected with the IED.
Table 12.7-1 Wire termination
Connecting for Wire termination Wire thickness
BI / BO / PWS Stripping length = 10 mm (typical) 1.5 mm2 or smaller
VCT M3.5 ring tongue with insulation 2.5 mm2 or smaller
Protective earth (FG) M5 ring tongue with insulation 5.5 mm2 or larger
Figure 12.7-2 Ring tongue terminations for VCT; ferrule for BI, BO
Note: Use appropriate ferrules depending on the wire thickness.
(i) Power supply module PWS

Power supply module (PWS) can supply power for the relay and control applications when
appropriate voltage is provided at Terminals 29 and 31.
Plus
DC supply
Minus
Figure 12.7-3 Terminals for PWS

Note: The error/alarm/warning signals can be also issued on the PWS (See Chapter
Automatic supervision and Chapter Technical description: Power supply module).
(ii) Transformer module VCT

Transformer module (VCT) is provided for AC analog input. The user should connect to VT
and CT referring the layout picture of VCT screw terminals.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 735 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Terminals for
voltages
Terminals for
currents
Figure 12.7-4 Terminals for VCT

Note: For more information, see Chapter Technical description: Transformer module for
AC analog input.
(iii) Binary input module BI, Binary output module BO

Terminals in compression type are provided for binary input and output signals. To know the
module type and its circuit structure, refer the IO configuration label on the IED side.
Opening holes for

wires and Terminal
screw numbers
Figure 12.7-5 Terminals for BI and BO
Note: For more information, see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module. The
user can program input and output logics using settings.
(iv) Communication modules on CPU

LAN and other communication modules are provide with Signal processing module (CPU).
See Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module for more
detail.
Notice for Optical cable handling

 Do not view directly with optical instruments.
 Invisible laser radiation is most dangerous, care should be taken when handling.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 736 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 12.7-6 Class 1M Laser Warning Message

 Do not bend the cable.
 Do not twist the cable.
 Do not kink in the cable.
 Do not put and drop on the cable.
Figure 12.7-7 Fiber Optic Cable Precautions
(v) Communication to a local PC using USB

Figure 12.7-8 illustrates that the user can connect the local PC with the IED (type B
receptacle) using a USB cable. Alternatively, the user can connect the local PC with the IED
by connecting a RJ45 cable to the LAN port (if available in the IED). In Figure 12.7-9, when
using the LAN port, the user has to select the communications option, which can be found
from the Main menu in GR-TIEMS (go to “Tool” ->“Option…”; “Option” dialog will be
displayed; change communications option with the second tab – ‘Communication’).
Note: For more information, see Chapter Engineering tool and Chapter Communication
protocol.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 737 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Figure 12.7-8 USB Communications
Figure 12.7-9 GR-TIEMs Communications Options
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 738 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
13 Commissioning and maintenance
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 739 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
The IED is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.

Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the IED or local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general function of IED testing practices and safety
precautions to avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring
which circuits functions when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
Measuring elements
Timers
Protection schemes
Autoreclose
Metering and recording
Fault locator
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment,
telecommunication equipment and other external equipment.
The following tests are included in these tests:
On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Signaling circuit test
Tripping and reclosing circuit test
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 740 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Cautions
(i) Safety Precautions
CAUTION
 The IED rack is provided with a grounding terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the IED rack is grounded.
 When connecting the cable to the back of the IED, firmly fix it to the terminal block
and attach the cover provided on top of it.
 Before checking the interior of the IED, be sure to turn off the power.
 Class 1M laser radiation when remove cap for models with 30km class optical
interface. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
(ii) Cautions on Tests

CAUTION
 While the power is on, do not connect/disconnect the flat cable on the front of the
printed circuit board (PCB).
 While the power is on, do not mount/dismount the PCB.
 Before turning on the power, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.
 Be careful that the transformer module is not damaged due to an overcurrent or
overvoltage.
 If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
Before mounting/dismounting the PCB, take antistatic measures such as wearing an earthed
wristband.
Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Three-phase voltage source
2 Single-phase current sources
1 Dynamic three-phase test set (for protection scheme test)
1 DC power supply
3 DC voltmeters
3 AC voltmeters
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 741 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3 Phase angle meters

2 AC ammeters
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or
the default settings.
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the IED case. If there is any damage,
the internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the IED conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage, current and frequency ratings,
and auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
To examine the IED with a PC locally, connect the PC with the IED using a USB cable. The
GR-TIEMS software is required to install in the PC.
(i) Hardware Tests

On commissioning and maintenance, check wire connection and observe the movement of
relay elements. The IED is equipped the feature of signal monitor and you can check the
operation whether the movement is appropriate or not. In this section, checking points of wire
connection and signaling are discussed.
(ii) HMI operation

The user can change the IED into the Test mode for testing by the IED operation (see chapter
User interface: Test sub-menu). To monitor a logic signal in the IED, the user can use
monitoring jacks on the front panel (see Chapter Technical description: Human machine
interface). Note that the quality value of the IEC 61850 communication will be changed when
the IED runs in Test mode (see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850 communication).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 742 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Main Menu Record
Monitoring
Test Test Mode

Signal Monitoring
Mode change
Figure 13.2-1 Selection of test mode in menu tree
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 743 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iii) Setting list for ZS and ZG

Table 13.2-1 Setting of ZS-common and Z1S
Default setting Note
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Common ZS-Chara Quad / Mho – ZS relay character Quad Quad
ZSF-X.GrAngle1 0 – 45 deg 0 0
ZSF-X.GrAngle2 45 – 90 deg 75 90
ZS-CovCoeff† 1.5 – 3.0 – Covered characteristic size coefficient 1.5 --
Z1S Z1S-TPEN‡ Off / On – Z1S protection enable On On
0.10 – 0.01 –
Z1S-X.Reach ohm Z1S reactance reach 8.00 1.60 ***
500.00 100.00
Z1S-R.Angle 30 – 90 deg Z1S resistive reach characteristic angle 75 75
0.10 – 0.01 –
Z1S-R.Reach ohm Z1S resistive reach 25.50 5.10 ***
500.00 100.00
Off / On–Set / On–
Z1S-X.GrAngleEN – ZS gradient characteristic Off Off
Adapt
Z1S-DX.Angle 0 – 60 deg Z1S directional-X characteristic angle 30 30
Z1S-DR.Angle 0 – 60 deg 5 5
Quad)
TZ1S 0.00 – 100.00 S Z1S operation delay time 0.00 0.00
†Note: For testing, set On for the scheme switch [Z1S-TPEN].

Element ID Z1S (Data ID: 8000011C20)
(Data ID: 8100011C21)
(Data ID: 8200011C22)
‡Note:When a zone is just choose to operate, the zone is multiplied by the setting
[ZS-CovCoeff].
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 744 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Z1S Quadrilateral
X
Z1S-X.Reach The degree of slope function of

ZSF-X.GrAngle1
Reactance adds only Z1, Z1X, Z5
ZSF-X.GrAngle2 Z1S-R.Angle
Z1S-DR.Angle
Z1S-DX.Angle
Z1S-R.Reach
 CovCoeff function is designed for the following two purposes: (1) Realizing the coordination
for operating time between the reactance element (X), the blinder element (BL), and the
directional element (D). (2) In the ZG function, prevailing the operation of the zone1 only
for the incident due to the one-line-to-ground(1LG) fault (i.e., the other faults can be
detected by the operation of the ZS function). We recommend the user to select a value from
2.0 to 3.0 for the settings [ZS-CovCoeff] and [ZG-CovCoeff]. This is because, an adjacent
line beyond the remote end is protected surely by the coordination circuit (i.e., 100% or
longer reach distances are covered); additionally, prevailing does not start unconditionally
even if a fault occurs at different terminals of the parallel lines and the fault is found in
different phases.
Figure 13.2-2 Characteristic of Z1S
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 745 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 13.2-2 Setting of Z2S—Z5S

Default setting Note
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Z1XS Z1XS-TPEN Off / On – Z1XS protection enable Off Off
Z2S Z2S-TPEN Off / On – Z2S protection enable On On
0.10 – 0.01 – ***
500.00 100.00
Z2S directional-R characteristic angle (for 5
Quad)
TZ2S 0.00 – 100.00 S Z2S operation delay time 0.30 ***
Z3S Z3S-TPEN Off / On – Z3S protection enable On On
0.10 – 0.01 – ***
500.00 100.00
0.10 – 0.01 – ***
500.00 100.00
Z3S directional-R characteristic angle (for 5
Quad)
TZ3S 0.00 – 100.00 S Z3S operation delay time 0.40 ***
Z4S Z4S-TPEN Off / On – Z4S protection enable On Off
Z5S Z5S-TPEN Off / On – Z5S protection enable On Off
Note: For test, place On for scheme switch [Z*S-TPEN]

Element ID Z2S (Data ID: 8000021C20)
(Data ID: 8100021C21)
(Data ID: 8200021C22)
Z3S (Data ID: 8400031C20)
(Data ID: 8500031C21)
(Data ID: 8600031C22)
Zero aspect compensation setting ks of ZG, kx

can settle individually every each Zone; the
others set as ZS setting
Figure 13.2-3 Characteristic of Z2S and Z3S
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 746 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 13.2-3 Setting of ZG-common and Z1G—Z5G

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Common ZG-Chara Quad / Mho – ZG relay characteristic Quad Quad
ZG-forward gradient characteristic angle 0
ZG-forward gradient characteristic angle 90
ZG-CovCoeff 1.5 – 3.0 – Covered characteristic size coefficient 1.5 --
Z1G Z1G-TPEN Off / On – Z1G protection enable On On
0.10 – 0.01 – ***
500.00 100.00
Z1G-R.Angle 30 – 90 deg Z1G resistive reach characteristic angle 75 75
0.10 – 0.01 – ***
500.00 100.00
Z1G-DX.Angle 0 – 60 deg Z1G directional-X characteristic angle 30 30
Z1G directional-R characteristic angle (for 5
Quad)
Z1G-Krs 0 – 1000 % Zero phase current factor, Self line R0/R1 340 ***
Z1G-Kxs 0 – 1000 % Zero phase current factor, Self line X0/X1 340 ***
Zero phase current factor, Adjacent line 0
Z1G-Krm 0 – 1000 % 300
R0m/R1
Z1G-Kxm 0 – 1000 % 300
X0m/X1
TZ1G 0.00 – 100.00 S Z1G operation delay time 0.00 0.00
Z1XG Z1XG-TPEN Off / On – Z1XG protection enable Off Off
0.10 – 0.01 – ***
500.00 100.00
0.10 – 0.01 – ***
500.00 100.00
Quad)
Z2G-Krm 0 – 1000 % 300
R0m/R1
Z2G-Kxm 0 – 1000 % 300
X0m/X1
TZ2G 0.00 – 100.00 S Z2G operation delay time 0.30 0.00
0.10 – 0.01 – ***
500.00 100.00
0.10 – 0.01 - ***
500.00 100.00
Quad)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 747 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Z3G-Krm 0 – 1000 % 300
R0m/R1
Z3G-Kxm 0 – 1000 % 300
X0m/X1
TZ3G 0.00 – 100.00 s Z3G operation delay time 0.40 0.00
Z4G Z4G-TPEN Off / On – Z4G protection enable On Off
Z5G Z5G-TPEN Off / On – Z5G protection enable On Off
Note: For test, place On for scheme switch [Z*S-TPEN]

Element ID Z2G (Data ID: 8000021C20)
(Data ID: 8100021C21)
(Data ID: 8200021C22)
Z3S (Data ID: 8400031C20)
(Data ID: 8500031C21)
(Data ID: 8600031C22)
Table 13.2-4 Setting of PSB

Default setting
Range
Setting item value
1A 5A 1A 5A
2.50 - 0.50 - ***
PSBSZ ohm Power swing block detection 10.00 2.00
75.00 15.00
TPSBS 0.020 - 0.100 s Power swing block detection timer 0.040 ***
PSBSFR Off / On – Power swing reset enable Off ***
TPSBSFR 0.00 – 10.00 s Power swing reset timer 1.00 ***
2.50 – 0.50 – ***
PSBGZ ohm Power swing block detection 10.00 2.00
75.00 15.00
TPSBG 0.020 – 0.100 s Power swing block detection timer 0.040 ***
PSBGFR Off / On – Power swing block reset enable Off
TPSBGFR 0.00 – 10.00 s Power swing block reset timer 1.00
Note: PSBS-OUT: 8400091B65 / 8500091B66 / 8600091B67

PSBG-OUT: 8400091B69 / 8500091B6A / 8600091B6B
PSBS-IN : 8000091B62 / 8100091B63 / 8200091B64
PSBG-IN : 8000091B6C / 8100091B6D / 8200091B6E
Realization of the PSB-ΔZ zone:

Under use (TPEN setting:) In all zones of On), I constitute X, each R maximum reach and this
symmetric point of contact with the quadrilateral that assumed the reach which Offset made
"PSB-IN", PSB setting (ΔZ) to X, R "PSB-OUT". (I cooperate in the left / right of the
Impedance locus detection, up or down in sensitivity, the time for change
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 748 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
PSB
PSB-OUT
〃
Z3X
〃〃
-Z3R
-Z3X
PSB-IN
〃
Figure 13.2-4 Characteristic of PBS
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 749 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(iv) Setting of Load encroachment for phase-to-phase & phase-to-neutral

(LES and LEG)
Table 13.2-5 Setting of LES
Default setting
Range
Setting item value
1A 5A 1A 5A
LES-EN Off / On – Load encroachment enable Off On
0.10 – 0.01 –
LESR ohm Minimum load resistance on the right 25.50 5.10 ***
500.00 100.00
LESR-Angle 5 – 75 deg Maximum load angle on the right 10 30
0.10 – 0.01 –
LESL ohm Minimum load resistance on the left 25.50 5.10 ***
500.00 100.00
LESL-Angle 5 – 75 deg Maximum load angle on the left 10 30
LEG-EN Off / On – Load encroachment enable Off On
0.10 – 0.01 – ***
LEGR ohm Minimum load resistance on the right 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
LEGR-Angle 5 – 75 deg Maximum load angle on the right 10 30
0.10 – 0.01 – ***
LEGL ohm Minimum load resistance on the left 25.50 5.10
500.00 100.00
LEGL-Angle 5 – 75 deg Maximum load angle on the left 10 30
Note: LES-R : 80000A1860 / 81000A1B61 / 82000A1B62

LEG-R : 80000A186F / 81000A1B70 / 82000A1B71
LES-L : 80000A1B63 / 81000A1B64 / 82000A1B65
LEG-L : 80000A1B72 / 81000A1B73 / 82000A1B74
Sets of Load-impedance (LES-L and LES-R) should be placed independently. So should be sets
of Load-impedance (LEG-L and LEG-R). Sets of Load-angle between front and back should be
set equally.
R-angle L-angle
LE-R LE-L
0
Figure 13.2-5 Zone of LES
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 750 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(v) Setting for miscellaneous

Table 13.2-6 Setting of OC1—OC4
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
OC1 OC1-EN Off / On - OC1 protection enable Off On
NonDir
OC1-Angle 0 - 180 deg OC1 directional characteristic angle 45 −85

DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI / DT
Original
OC1 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A OC1 threshold (in DT mode) 1.00 5.00 ***
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A OC1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 1.00 5.00 ***
TOC1 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00 ***
OC2 OC2-EN Off / On - OC2 protection enable Off Off
Note: Element ID of OC1: -B010001001 -B110011011 -B210021001
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 751 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 13.2-7 Setting of EF1—EF4

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
EF1 EF1-EN Off / On - EF1 protection enable Off On
NonDir
EF1-Angle 0 - 180 deg EF1 directional characteristic angle 45 −60

DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI / DT
Original
EF1-DT 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A EF1 threshold (in DT mode) 0.30 1.50 ***
EF1-IDMT 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A EF1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.30 1.50 ***
TEF1 0.00 - 300.00 s EF1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00 ***
EF2 EF2-EN Off / On - EF2 protection enable Off Off
Note: Element ID of OC1: -B010001001

・A direction: Forward direction, Reverse direction, Non-direction
・A period: DT, IDMT is possible
Table 13.2-8 Setting of VTF

Setting item Units Contents 1A 5A Notes
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
VTF1 VTF1-EN Off / On / OPT-On - VTF1 enable On On
Under voltage level for VTF1 ***
UVVTF 1.0 - 220.0 V 20.0
detection
VTF2 VTF2-EN Off / On / OPT-On - VTF2 enable On On
Zero phase over voltage level ***
OVGVTF 1.0 - 220.0 V 20.0
for VTF2 detection
Zero phase over current level ***
EFVTF 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A 0.20 1.00
for VTF2 detection block
Note: Element ID of UVVTF: -8010001001 -8110011001 -8210021001

EFVTF: 8810041001
OVGVTF: 8410051001
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 752 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 13.2-9 Setting of SOTF

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
SOTFOC-EN Off / On - SOTF-OC protection enable Off On
OCSOTF 0.02 - 3.00 0.10 - 15.00 A OC relay for SOTF threshold 1.20 6.00 ***
Note: Element ID of OCSOTF: -B000001C20 -B100001C21 -B200001C22
Table 13.2-10 Setting of Failsafe of ZS

Default setting
Range
Setting item value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Fail Z1S Z1S-OCFS Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z1S-trip Off On
0.02 – 0.10 –
Safe OCF1S A Fail-safe OC operation level for Z1S-trip 0.20 1.00 ***
5.00 25.00
Z1XS Z1XS-OCFS Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z1XS-trip Off Off
0.02 – 0.10 –
OCF1XS A Fail-safe OC operation level for Z1XS-trip 0.20 1.00 ***
5.00 25.00
Z2S Z2S-OCFS Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z2S-trip Off On
0.02 – 0.10 –
OCF2S A Fail-safe OC operation level for Z2S-trip 0.20 1.00 ***
5.00 25.00
Z3S Z3S-OCFS Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z3S-trip Off On
0.02 – 0.10 –
5.00 25.00
Z4S Z4S-OCFS Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z4S-trip Off Off
0.02 – 0.10 –
5.00 25.00
Z5S Z5S-OCFS Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z5S-trip Off Off
0.02 – 0.10 –
OCF5S A Fail-safe OC operation level for Z5S-trip 0.20 1.00 ****
5.00 25.00
Note: Element ID
OCF1S: 8000011C24 / 8100011C25 / 8200011C26
OCF2S: 8000021C24 / 8100021C25 / 8200021C26
OCF3S: 8400031C24 / 8500031C25 / 8600031C26
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 753 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table 13.2-11 Setting of Failsafe of ZG

Default setting
Range
Setting item value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Z1G Z1G-OCFS Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z1G-trip Off On
0.02 – 0.10 – ***
5.00 25.00
Z1XG Z1XG-OCFS Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z1XG-trip Off Off
0.02 – 0.10 – ***
OCF1XG A Fail-safe OC operation level for Z1XG-trip 0.20 1.00
5.00 25.00
0.02 – 0.10 – ***
5.00 25.00
0.02 – 0.10 – ***
5.00 25.00
Z4G Z4G-OCFS Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z4G-trip Off Off
0.02 – 0.10 – ***
5.00 25.00
Z5G Z5G-OCFS Off / On – Fail-safe OC for Z5G-trip Off Off
0.02 – 0.10 – ***
5.00 25.00
Note: Element ID
OCF1G: 800011C24 / 8100011C25 / 8200011C26
OCF2G: 800021C24 / 8100021C25 / 8200021C26
OCF3G: 840031C24 / 8500031C25 / 8600031C26
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 754 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 755 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001)
C0_BIT 8000001220
C1_BIT 8000011220
C0_N8 2000001128
C1_N8 2000011128
C0_N16 2100001129
C1_N16 2100011129
C0_N32 220000112A
C1_N32 220001112A
C0_N64 230000112B
C1_N64 230001112B
C0_S8 2000001120
C1_S8 2000011120
C2_S8 2000021120
C4_S8 2000041120
C5_S8 2000051120
C6_S8 2000061120
C7_S8 2000071120
C8_S8 2000081120
C9_S8 2000091120
C10_S8 20000A1120
C11_S8 20000B1120
C12_S8 20000C1120
C13_S8 20000D1120
C14_S8 20000E1120
C15_S8 20000F1120
C16_S8 2000101120
C17_S8 2000111120
C18_S8 2000121120
C19_S8 2000131120
C20_S8 2000141120
C21_S8 2000151120
C22_S8 2000161120
C23_S8 2000171120
C24_S8 2000181120
C25_S8 2000191120
C26_S8 20001A1120
C27_S8 20001B1120
C28_S8 20001C1120
C29_S8 20001D1120
C30_S8 20001E1120
C31_S8 20001F1120
C32_S8 2000201120
C40_S8 2000281120
C50_S8 2000321120
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 756 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

C60_S8 20003C1120
C70_S8 2000461120
C80_S8 2000501120
C90_S8 20005A1120
C100_S8 2000641120
C0_S16 2100001121
C1_S16 2100011121
C2_S16 2100021121
C3_S16 2100031121
C4_S16 2100041121
C5_S16 2100051121
C6_S16 2100061121
C7_S16 2100071121
C8_S16 2100081121
C9_S16 2100091121
C10_S16 21000A1121
C11_S16 21000B1121
C12_S16 21000C1121
C13_S16 21000D1121
C14_S16 21000E1121
C15_S16 21000F1121
C16_S16 2100101121
C17_S16 2100111121
C18_S16 2100121121
C19_S16 2100131121
C20_S16 2100141121
C21_S16 2100151121
C22_S16 2100161121
C23_S16 2100171121
C24_S16 2100181121
C25_S16 2100191121
C26_S16 21001A1121
C27_S16 21001B1121
C28_S16 21001C1121
C29_S16 21001D1121
C30_S16 21001E1121
C31_S16 21001F1121
C32_S16 2100201121
C40_S16 2100281121
C50_S16 2100321121
C60_S16 21003C1121
C70_S16 2100461121
C80_S16 2100501121
C90_S16 21005A1121
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 757 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

C100_S16 2100641121
C0_S32 2200001122
C1_S32 2200011122
C2_S32 2200021122
C4_S32 2200041122
C5_S32 2200051122
C6_S32 2200061122
C7_S32 2200071122
C8_S32 2200081122
C9_S32 2200091122
C10_S32 22000A1122
C11_S32 22000B1122
C12_S32 22000C1122
C13_S32 22000D1122
C14_S32 22000E1122
C15_S32 22000F1122
C16_S32 2200101122
C17_S32 2200111122
C18_S32 2200121122
C19_S32 2200131122
C20_S32 2200141122
C21_S32 2200151122
C22_S32 2200161122
C23_S32 2200171122
C24_S32 2200181122
C25_S32 2200191122
C26_S32 22001A1122
C27_S32 22001B1122
C28_S32 22001C1122
C29_S32 22001D1122
C30_S32 22001E1122
C31_S32 22001F1122
C32_S32 2200201122
C40_S32 2200281122
C50_S32 2200321122
C60_S32 22003C1122
C70_S32 2200461122
C80_S32 2200501122
C90_S32 22005A1122
C100_S32 2200641122
C0_S64 2300001123
C1_S64 2300011123
C0_U8 3000001124
C1_U8 3000011124
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 758 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

C2_U8 3000021124
C3_U8 3000031124
C4_U8 3000041124
C5_U8 3000051124
C6_U8 3000061124
C7_U8 3000071124
C8_U8 3000081124
C9_U8 3000091124
C10_U8 30000A1124
C11_U8 30000B1124
C12_U8 30000C1124
C13_U8 30000D1124
C14_U8 30000E1124
C15_U8 30000F1124
C16_U8 3000101124
C17_U8 3000111124
C18_U8 3000121124
C19_U8 3000131124
C20_U8 3000141124
C21_U8 3000151124
C22_U8 3000161124
C23_U8 3000171124
C24_U8 3000181124
C25_U8 3000191124
C26_U8 30001A1124
C27_U8 30001B1124
C28_U8 30001C1124
C29_U8 30001D1124
C30_U8 30001E1124
C31_U8 30001F1124
C32_U8 3000201124
C40_U8 3000281124
C50_U8 3000321124
C60_U8 30003C1124
C70_U8 3000461124
C80_U8 3000501124
C90_U8 30005A1124
C100_U8 3000641124
C0_U16 3100001125
C1_U16 3100011125
C2_U16 3100021125
C4_U16 3100041125
C5_U16 3100051125
C6_U16 3100061125
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 759 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

C7_U16 3100071125
C8_U16 3100081125
C9_U16 3100091125
C10_U16 31000A1125
C11_U16 31000B1125
C12_U16 31000C1125
C13_U16 31000D1125
C14_U16 31000E1125
C15_U16 31000F1125
C16_U16 3100101125
C17_U16 3100111125
C18_U16 3100121125
C19_U16 3100131125
C20_U16 3100141125
C21_U16 3100151125
C22_U16 3100161125
C23_U16 3100171125
C24_U16 3100181125
C25_U16 3100191125
C26_U16 31001A1125
C27_U16 31001B1125
C28_U16 31001C1125
C29_U16 31001D1125
C30_U16 31001E1125
C31_U16 31001F1125
C32_U16 3100201125
C40_U16 3100281125
C50_U16 3100321125
C60_U16 31003C1125
C70_U16 3100461125
C80_U16 3100501125
C90_U16 31005A1125
C100_U16 3100641125
C0_U32 3200001126
C1_U32 3200011126
C2_U32 3200021126
C3_U32 3200031126
C4_U32 3200041126
C5_U32 3200051126
C6_U32 3200061126
C7_U32 3200071126
C8_U32 3200081126
C9_U32 3200091126
C10_U32 32000A1126
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 760 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

C11_U32 32000B1126
C12_U32 32000C1126
C13_U32 32000D1126
C14_U32 32000E1126
C15_U32 32000F1126
C16_U32 3200101126
C17_U32 3200111126
C18_U32 3200121126
C19_U32 3200131126
C20_U32 3200141126
C21_U32 3200151126
C22_U32 3200161126
C23_U32 3200171126
C24_U32 3200181126
C25_U32 3200191126
C26_U32 32001A1126
C27_U32 32001B1126
C28_U32 32001C1126
C29_U32 32001D1126
C30_U32 32001E1126
C31_U32 32001F1126
C32_U32 3200201126
C40_U32 3200281126
C50_U32 3200321126
C60_U32 32003C1126
C70_U32 3200461126
C80_U32 3200501126
C90_U32 32005A1126
C100_U32 3200641126
C0_U64 3300001127
C1_U64 3300011127

BIO_FORCE (Function ID: 240101)
BI1F OP 3110001198 BI1 forced operate start
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 761 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

BIO_FORCE (Function ID: 240101)
BI11F OP 311A001198 BI11 forced operate start
BI12F OP 311B001198 BI12 forced operate start
BI13F OP 311C001198 BI13 forced operate start
BI14F OP 311D001198 BI14 forced operate start
BI15F OP 311E001198 BI15 forced operate start
BI16F OP 311F001198 BI16 forced operate start
BO1F OP 3110201198 BO1 forced operate start
BO11F OP 311A201198 BO11 forced operate start
BO12F OP 311B201198 BO12 forced operate start
BO13F OP 311C201198 BO13 forced operate start
BO14F OP 311D201198 BO14 forced operate start
BO15F OP 311E201198 BO15 forced operate start
BO16F OP 311F201198 BO16 forced operate start
BI11F OP 311A001198 BI11 forced operate start
BI12F OP 311B001198 BI12 forced operate start
BI13F OP 311C001198 BI13 forced operate start
BI14F OP 311D001198 BI14 forced operate start
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 762 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Appendix 2 Case outline
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 763 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3/4 case size

1. Trihedral figure (3/4×19 inches) for “Compression type terminal” case
Note: Dimensions shown in millimeters
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 764 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2. Panel cut out figure (3/4×19 inches) for “Compression type terminal” case
1Note: Dimensions shown in millimeters.

2Note: When you wish to know about the panel-cut-out-figures corresponding to
rack-attachment kits, refer to Appendix: Rack mounting.
3Note: For the size relating to “Ring type terminal” case, see other figures.
1/2 case size

1. Trihedral figure (1/2×19 inches) for “Compression type terminal” case
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 765 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Note: Dimensions shown in millimeters
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 766 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2. Panel cut out figure (1/2×19 inches) for “Compression type terminal” case
1Note: Dimensions shown in millimeters.

2Note: When you wish to know about the panel-cut-out-figures corresponding to
rack-attachment kits, refer to Appendix: Rack mounting.
3Note: For the size relating to “Ring type terminal” case, see other figures.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 767 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Appendix 3 Typical external connection

1.1. 3/4 case for Compression-type terminal
Typical external connection diagram for Compression-type terminal
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 768 -
1.1. 3／4 case size for Compression-type terminal (GRZ200-11-301-00-46)
[IO#6] [IO#5] [IO#4] [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
PWS1 A BIO3 A BO1 A BI1 A C11 VCT12B
100BASE-FX
(+) 1 1 (+) 1 1
2 BI1 BO1(SF) BI1 Va
(-) 2 2 (-) 2 2
4 TX
(+) 3 3 (+) 3 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BO2(SF) BI2 Vb
(-) 4 4 (-) 4 4
1 RX
(+) 5 5 (+) 5 5
BI3 BO3(SF) BI3 Vc

(-) 6 6 (-) 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 7 (+) 7 C12 7
BI4 BO4(SF) BI4 100BASE-FX Vs/Ve
9 (-) 8 8 (-) 8 8
FAIL2
7 (+) 9 9 (+) 9 9
BI5 BO5(SF) BI5 TX Vs2/Ve

(-) 10 10 (-) 10 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11
BI6 BO6(SF) BI6 RX Ia

(-) 12 12 (-) 12 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13
BI7 BO7 BI7 Ib

(-) 14 14 (-) 14 14
(+) 15
C13 15
(+) 15 15
BI8 BO8 BI8 Ic
(-) 16 16 (-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17
BO9 BI9 Ie
18 (-) 18 18
21 21 (+) 21
BO1(F) BO10 BI10

22 22 (-) 22
2¥¥
23 23 (+) 23
BO2(F) BO11 BI11

24 24 (-) 24 C14
25 25 (+) 25
BO3(F) BO12 BI12

26 26 (-) 26
27 27 (+) 27
BO4(F) BO13 BI13

28 28 (-) 28
(+) 29 (+) 29 27
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14 BI14 Iem
30 30 (-) 30 28
(-) 31 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15 BI15
32 (-) 32 IRIG-B000 30
32
35
33 (+) 33 •A1
33
36 BI16 •B1• SIG
BO7 BO16 (-) 34
34 34
A2 DISUSE
37 •B2
(+) 35 • DISUSE
38 35 35
37 BO17 BI17
(-) 36 •A3
36
36 (+) 37 •B3• GND
BO8 37
38 BI18
BO18 (-) 38
38
GRZ/GRL (1.0)
●FG ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E

6F2S1905 (0.80)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 769 -
[IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
PWS1 A BIO1 A C11 VCT12B
100BASE-TX
(+) 1 1
2 BI1 Va
(-) 2 2
4
(+) 3 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 Vb
(-) 4 4
1
(+) 5 5
BI3 6
Vc
(-) 6
8
10 (+) 7 C12 7
BI4 8
Vs/Ve
9 (-) 8
FAIL2
7 (+) 9 9
BI5 10
Vs2/Ve
(-) 10
(+) 11 11
BI6 12
Ia
(-) 12
(+) 13 13
BI7 14
Ib
(-) 14
15
C13 15
BO1(SF) 16
Ic
16
17 17
BO2(SF) 18
Ie
18
21
BO3(SF)
22
23
BO4(SF)
24 C14
25
BO5(SF)
26
27
BO6(SF)
28
(+) 29 27
29
30
DC/DC BO7 28
Iem
30
(-) 31 31 C15
32 BO8 30
32
35 IRIG-B000
33
36
BO9
•A1
34 •B1• SIG
37 A2 DISUSE
38 35
•B2
37
• DISUSE
36
•A3
BO10 •B3• GND
38
GRZ/GRL (1.0)
●FG ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E

6F2S1905 (0.80)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 770 -
[IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
PWS1 A BO1 A BI1 A C11 VCT12B
100BASE-TX
1 (+) 1 1
2 BO1(SF) BI1 Va
2 (-) 2 2
4
3 (+) 3 3
3
FAIL1 BO2(SF) BI2 Vb
4 (-) 4 4
1
5 (+) 5 5
BO3(SF) BI3 Vc
6 (-) 6 6
8
10 7 (+) 7 C12 7
BO4(SF) BI4 Vs/Ve

9 8 (-) 8 8
FAIL2
7 9 (+) 9 9
BO5(SF) BI5 Vs2/Ve

10 (-) 10 10
11 (+) 11 11
BO6(SF) BI6 Ia
12 (-) 12 12
13 (+) 13 13
BO7 BI7 Ib
14 (-) 14 14
15 (+) 15
C13 15
BO8 BI8 Ic
16 (-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17
BO9 BI9 Ie
18 (-) 18 18
21 (+) 21
BO10 BI10
22 (-) 22
2¥¥
23 (+) 23
BO11 BI11
24 (-) 24 C14
25 (+) 25
BO12 BI12
26 (-) 26
27 (+) 27
BO13 BI13
28 (-) 28
(+) 29 (+) 29 27
29
30
DC/DC BO14 BI14 Iem
30 (-) 30 28
(-) 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO15 BI15
(-) 32 IRIG-B000 30
32
35
(+) 33 •A1
33
36 BI16 •B1• SIG
BO16 (-) 34
34 A2 DISUSE
37 •B2
(+) 35 • DISUSE
38 35
BO17 BI17
(-) 36
36 •A3
37
(+) 37 •B3• GND
BI18
BO18 (-) 38
38
GRZ/GRL (1.0)
●FG ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E

6F2S1905 (0.80)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 771 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Typical external connection diagram for Compression-type terminal

VCT12B, IO: BI1A, BO1A and BIO3A
BUS BUS VT1 or VT2
VCT1-11 VCT12B
CT 12
13
14 1
CB 15 BI1
2 A1
16
17 3
1 B1
18 BI2 4
BO1 Semi-fast BO A2
2 5
1 B2
3 BI3
2 6 A3
VT BO2 4 Semi-fast BO
3 7
4 5 B3
5 BI4 8
BO3 Semi-fast BO A4
6 6
9 B4
7
7 BI5 10
BO4 Semi-fast BO A5
BUS VT1 8 8
11 B5
9 9
BI6 12 A6
BUS VT2 10 BO5 10 Semi-fast BO
13 B6
27 11
3I0 from adjacent line BI7 A7
28 BO6 12 Semi-fast BO 14
13 15 B7
BO7 BI8 16 A8
14
30 B8
20- 15
21 A9
BO8 16
BIO3A BO1 Fast BO
22 B9
1 17
23 A10
2 BI1 BO9 18 BO2 Fast BO
BO1A 24 B10
3 21
BO10 25 A11
4 BI2 22 BO3 Fast BO
26 B11
5 23
BO11 27 A12
BI3 24
6 BO4 28 Fast BO B12
7 25
29 A13
BO12 26
8 BI4 BO5 Fast BO
30 B13
9 27
31 A14
BO13 28
10 BI5 BO6 Fast BO
32 B14
11 29
33 A15
BO14 30
12 BI6 BO7 34
31 B15
13 A16
BO15 32 35
14 BI7 36 B16
33
15 A17
BO16 34 37
16 BI8 BO8
35 B17
17 38 A18
BO17 36
Programmable BI 18 BI9 B18
37
21 BI1A
BO18 38
22 BI10
23
24 BI11
25
26 BI12
COM-A A1
27 B1
A2
28 BI13 COM-B B2
RS485 I/F
29 A3
COM-0V B3 (option)
Ethernet LAN I/F
30 BI14 RJ45 (option)
31
COM Optical I/F
32 BI15 (option)
33
34 BI16 SIG A1
B1
35 DISUSE A2
B2 IRIG-B
36 BI17 A3
GND B3 (option)
37
38 BI18
PWS1A
RELAY FAIL. 2
1
DD FAIL. 4
DC (+) 29
30 +5Vdc 3
SUPPLY DC-DC FAIL RELAY FAILURE 1
31
(-) 32 1
0V
8
35
36 10
37
9
38 FAIL RELAY FAILURE 2
FG 7
E
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 772 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT, and TICS
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 773 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
IEC61850 ACSI Conformance Statement
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 774 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
IEC61850 PICS
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
GRZ200
INTRODUCTION
This document specifies the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) of
the IEC 61850 interface in GR series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01 series
version upper than E (G2M850-01-E).
Together with the MICS and the PIXIT, the PICS forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10.
CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT

Each tables of this document is specified in IEC 61850-7-2 Annex A.3 “ACSI models
conformance statement”.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 775 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Client/ Server/ IED Remarks

subscriber publisher
Client-server roles
B11 Server side (of TWO-PARTY- - c1 Y
APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
B12 Client side of (TWO-PARTY- c1 - -
APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
B21 SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used Y
B22 SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used N
B23 SCSM: IEC61850-9-2 used N
B24 SCSM: other -
Generic substation event model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side - O Y
B32 Subscriber side O - Y
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side - O N
B42 Subscriber side O - N
If Server side (B11) supported

M1 Logical device c2 c2 Y
M2 Logical node c3 c3 Y
M3 Data c4 c4 Y
M4 Data set c5 c5 Y
M5 Substitution O O N
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y
M7-5 data-reference Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y
M7-7 entryID Y
M7-8 BufTm Y
M7-9 IntgPd Y
M7-10 GI Y
Unbuffered report control O O Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y
M8-5 data-reference Y
M8-6 BufTm Y
M8-7 IntgPd Y
M8-8 GI Y
Logging O O N
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N
M10 Log O O N
M11 Control M M Y
If GSE (B31/B32) is supported
GOOSE O O Y
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 776 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
M13 GSSE O O N
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File Transfer O O Y
Server
S1 GetServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M M Y
S3 Abort M M Y
S4 Release M M Y
Logical device
S5 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory M M Y
Logical node
S6 GetLogicalNodeDirectory M M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues O M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M M Y
S9 SetDataValues O O Y
S10 GetDataDirectory O M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition O M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues O M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O O N
S14 CreateDataSet O O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory O O Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M M N
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG O O Y
S19 SelectEditSG O O N
S20 SetSGValues O O N
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues O O N
S22 GetSGValues O O N
S23 GetSGCBValues O O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24 Report c6 c6 Y
S24-1 data-change (dchg) Y
S24-2 quality-change (qchg) Y
S24-3 data-update (dupd) N
S25 GetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
S26 SetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
Unbuffered report control block (BRCB)
S27 Report c6 c6 Y
S27-1 data-change (dchg) Y
S27-2 quality-change (qchg) Y
S27-3 data-update (dupd) N
S28 GetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
S29 SetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues M M N
S31 SetLCBValues O M N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 777 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime c7 M N
S33 QueryLogAfter c7 M N
S34 GetLogStatusValues M M N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35 SendGOOSEMessage c8 c8 Y
S36 GetGoReference O c9 N
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O c9 N
S38 GetGoCBValues O O Y
S39 SetGoCBValues O O Y
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40 SendGSSEMessage c8 c8 N
S41 GetGsReference O c9 N
S42 GetGSSEDataOffset O c9 N
S43 GetGsCBValues O O N
S44 SetGsCBValues O O N
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
Multicast SVC
S45 SendMSVMessage c10 c10 N
S46 GetMSVCBValues O O N
S47 SetMSVCBValues O O N
Unicast SVC
S48 SendUSVMessage c10 c10 N
S49 GetUSVCBValues O O N
S50 SetUSVCBValues O O N
Control
S51 Select M O Y
S52 SelectWithValue M O Y
S53 Cancel O O Y
S54 Operate M M Y
S55 CommandTermination M O Y
S56 TimeActivatedOperate O O N
File Transfer
S57 GetFile O M Y
S58 SetFile O O N
S59 DeleteFile O O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues O O Y
Time
T1 Time resolution of internal clock 1ms
T2 Time accuracy of internal clock 1ms T1
T3 Supported TimeStamp resolution 1ms
M – Mandatory
O – Optional
c1 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared.
c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared.
c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared.
c4 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has been
declared.
c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared.
c6 – shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)
c7 – shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter).
c8 – shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9 – shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available.
c10 – shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 778 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
PICS for A-Profile support

A-Profile Profile Description Client Server IED Remarks
shortcut F/S F/S
A1 Client/server A-Profile c1 c1 Y
A2 GOOSE/GSE c2 c2 Y
management A-Profile
A3 GSSE A-Profile c3 c3 N
A4 TimeSync A-Profile c4 c4 Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 2 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c4 Support for at least one other A-Profile shall be declared (e.g. in A1-A3) in order to claim conformance to IEC
61850-8-1.
PICS for T-Profile support

A-Profile Profile Description Client Server IED Remarks
shortcut F/S F/S
T1 TCP/IP T-Profile c1 c1 Y
T2 OSI T-Profile c2 c2 N
T3 GOOSE/GSE T-Profile c3 c3 Y
T4 GSSE T-Profile c4 c4 N
T5 TimeSync T-Profile o o Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
c2 Shall be ‘o’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 779 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
MMS InitiateRequest general parameters

Client-CR Server-CR
InitiateRequest IED
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
InitiateRequest
localDetailCalling m m m m Y
proposedMaxServOutstandingCalling m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
proposedMaxServOustandingCalled m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
initRequestDetail m m m m Y
InitiateRequestDetail
proposedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y
proposedParameterCBB m m m m Y
servicesSupportedCalling m m m m Y
additionalSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N
additionalCbbSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N
privilegeClassIdentityCalling c1 x c1 x N
c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI
MMS InitiateResponse general parameters

Client-CR Server-CR
InitiateResponse IED
InitiateResponse
localDetailCalled m m m m Y
negotiatedMaxServOutstandingCalling m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
negotiatedMaxServOustandingCalled m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
initResponseDetail m m m m Y
InitiateResponseDetail
negotiatedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y
negotiatedParameterCBB m m m m Y
servicesSupportedCalled m m m m Y
additionalSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N
additionalCbbSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N
privilegeClassIdentityCalled c1 x c1 x N
c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 780 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
MMS service supported conformance table

Client-CR Server-CR
MMS service supported CBB IED
status o o o m Y
getNameList o o o c1 Y
identify o o m m Y
rename o o o o N
read o o o c2 Y
write o o o c3 Y
getVariableAccessAttributes o o o c4 Y
defineNamedVariable o o o o N
defineScatteredAccess o i o i N
getScatteredAccessAttributes o i o i N
deleteVariableAccess o o o o N
defineNamedVariableList o o o o N
getNamedVariableListAttributes o o o c5 Y
deleteNamedVariableList o o o c6 N
defineNamedType o i o i N
getNamedTypeAttributes o i o i N
deleteNamedType o i o i N
input o i o i N
output o i o i N
takeControl o i o i N
relinquishControl o i o i N
defineSemaphore o i o i N
deleteSemaphore o i o i N
reportPoolSemaphoreStatus o i o i N
reportSemaphoreStatus o i o i N
initiateDownloadSequence o i o i N
downloadSegment o i o i N
terminateDownloadSequence o i o i N
initiateUploadSequence o i o i N
uploadSegment o i o i N
terminateUploadSequence o i o i N
requestDomainDownload o i o i N
requestDomainUpload o i o i N
loadDomainContent o i o i N
storeDomainContent o i o i N
deleteDomain o i o i N
getDomainAttributes o o o c14 Y
createProgramInvocation o i o i N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 781 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Client-CR Server-CR
deleteProgramInvocation o i o i N
start o i o i N
stop o i o i N
resume o i o i N
reset o i o i N
kill o i o i N
getProgramInvocationAttributes o i o i N
obtainFile o c9 o c9 N
defineEventCondition o i o i N
deleteEventCondition o i o i N
getEventConditionAttributes o i o i N
reportEventConditionStatus o i o i N
alterEventConditionMonitoring o i o i N
triggerEvent o i o i N
defineEventAction o i o i N
deleteEventAction o i o i N
alterEventEnrollment o i o i N
reportEventEnrollmentStatus o i o i N
getEventEnrollmentAttributes o i o i N
acknowledgeEventNotification o i o i N
getAlarmSummary o i o i N
getAlarmEnrollmentSummary o i o i N
readJournal o c13 o c13 N
writeJournal o o o o N
initializeJournal o o o c12 N
reportJournalStatus o i o i N
createJournal o i o i N
deleteJournal o i o i N
fileOpen o c8 o c8 Y
fileRead o c8 o c8 Y
fileClose o c8 o c8 Y
fileRename o i o i N
fileDelete o c9 o c9 N
fileDirectory o c11 o c11 Y
unsolicitedStatus o i o i N
informationReport o c7 o c7 Y
eventNotification o i o i N
attachToEventCondition o i o i N
attachToSemaphore o i o i N
conclude m m m m Y
cancel o o o m Y
getDataExchangeAttributes o c10 o c10 N
exchangeData o c10 o c10 N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 782 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Client-CR Server-CR
defineAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N
getAccessControlListAttributes o c10 o c10 N
reportAccessControlledObjects o c10 o c10 N
deleteAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N
alterAccessControl o c10 o c10 N
reconfigureProgramInvocation o c10 o c10 N
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if logical device or logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement or if support for the MMS
write service is declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for SetDataValues service is declared or implied.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c5 Shall be ‘m’ if data set support is declared in the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c6 Shall be ‘m’ if support for defineNamedVariableList is declared.
c7 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI Report or ACSI command termination is declared.
c8 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFile is declared.
c9 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI SetFile is declared.
c10 Shall not be present since MMS minor version is declared to be 1.
c11 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFileAttributeValues is declared.
c12 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI log model is declared.
c13 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter is declared.
c14 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI logical device model is declared.
MMS Parameter CBB

Client-CR Server-CR
MMS parameter CBB IED
STR1 o o o c1 Y
STR2 o o o o N
1 1 or 1 c2 Y(10
gre )
NEST ater
VNAM o o o c1 Y
VADR o o o o N
VALT o o o c1 Y
bit x x x x N
TPY o o o o N
VLIS o c1 o c3 Y
bit x x x x N
bit x x x x N
CEI o i o i N
ACO o c4 o c4 N
SEM o c4 o c4 N
CSR o c4 o c4 N
CSNC o c4 o c4 N
CSPLC o c4 o c4 N
CSPI o c4 o c4 N
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI logical node model support declared.
c2 Shall be five(5) or greater if ACSI logical node model support is declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI data set, reporting, GOOSE, or logging model support is declared.
c4 Shall not be present. Receiving implementations shall assume not supported.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 783 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
GetNameList conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
GetNameList IED
Request
ObjectClass m m m m Y
ObjectScope m m m m Y
DomainName o o m m Y
ContinueAfter o m m m Y
Response+
List Of Identifier m m m m Y
MoreFollows m m m m Y
Response-
Error Type m m m m Y
NOTE Object class ‘vmd' (formerly VMDSpecific in MMS V1.0) shall not appear. If a request contains this ObjectClass, an
MMS Reject shall be issued.
AlternateAccessSelection conformance statement

Not applicable.
VariableAccessSpecification conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
VariableAccessSpecification IED
listOfVariable o o o c1 Y
variableSpecification o o o c1 Y
alternateAccess o o o c1 Y
variableListName o o o c2 Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for Logical Node Model is declared.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for ACSI DataSets, reporting, or logging is declared.
VariableSpecification conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
VariableSpecification IED
name o o o m Y
address o o o i N
variableDescription o o o i N
scatteredAccessDescription o x o x N
invalidated o x o x N
Read conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
Read IED
Request
specificationWithResult o o o m Y
variableAccessSpecification m m m m Y
Response
variableAccessSpecification o o o m Y
listOfAccessResult m m m m Y
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 784 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Write conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
Write IED
Request
listOfData m m m m Y
Response
failure m m m m Y
success m m m m Y
InformationReport conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
InformationReport IED
Request
listOfAccessResult m m m m Y
GetVariableAccessAttributes conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
GetVariableAccessAttributes IED
Request
name o o m m Y
address o o m x N
Response
mmsDeletable m m m m Y
address o x o x N
typeSpecification m m m m Y
DefineNamedVariableList conformance statement

Not applicable.
GetNamedVariableListAttributes conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
GetNamedVariableListAttributes IED
Request
ObjectName m m m m Y
Response
mmsDeletable m m m m Y
listOfVariable m m m m Y
variableSpecification m m m m Y
alternateAccess o m o i N
DeleteNamedVariableList conformance statement

Not applicable.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 785 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
ReadJournal conformance statement

Not applicable.
JournalEntry conformance statement

Not applicable.
InitializeJournal conformance statement

Not applicable.
FileDirectory conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
FileDirectory IED
Request
filespecification o o m m Y
continueAfter o o m m Y
Response+
listOfDirectoryEntry m m m m Y
FileOpen conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
FileOpen IED
Request
filename m m m m Y
initialPosition o o m m Y
Response+
frsmID m m m m Y
fileAttributes m m m m Y
FileRead conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
FileRead IED
Request
frsmID m m m m Y
Response+
fileData m m m m Y
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 786 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
FileClose conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
FileClose IED
Request
frsmID m m m m Y
Response+ m m m m Y
GOOSE conformance statement

Subscriber Publisher Value/comment IED
GOOSE Services c1 c1 Y
SendGOOSEMessage m m Y
GetGoReference o c3 N
GetGOOSEElementNumber o c4 N
GetGoCBValues o o Y
SetGoCBValues o o Y
GSENotSupported c2 c5 N
GOOSE Control Block (GoCB) o o Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support is declared within ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI basic conformance support for either GetGoReference or GetGOOSEElementNumber is
declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGoReference is declared.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber.
c5 Shall be ‘m’ if no support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber is declared.
GSSE conformance statement

Not applicable.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 787 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(This page is intentionally blank)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)
- 788 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
IEC61850 Model Implementation

Conformance Statement (MICS)
GR-Series (Distance protection)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 789 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
The GR relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the following tables.
Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4

Logical Nodes GRZ GGIO_GOOSE Yes
L: System Logical Nodes GSAL ---
LPHD Yes I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving
Common Logical Node Yes IARC ---
LLN0 Yes IHMI ---
P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions ITCI ---
PDIF --- ITMI ---
PDIR --- A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control
PDIS Yes ANCR ---
PDOP --- ARCO ---
PDUP --- ATCC ---
PFRC --- AVCO ---
PHAR Yes M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement
PHIZ --- MDIF ---
PIOC --- MHAI ---
PMRI --- MHAN ---
PMSS --- MMTR ---
POPE --- MMXN ---
PPAM --- MMXU Yes
PSCH Yes MSQI Yes
PSDE --- MSTA ---
PTEF --- S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring
PTOC Yes SARC ---
PTOF Yes SIMG ---
PTOV Yes SIML ---
PTRC Yes SPDC ---
PTTR Yes X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear
PTUC Yes XCBR Yes
PTUV Yes XSWI ---
PUPF --- T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers
PTUF Yes TCTR ---
PVOC --- TVTR ---
PVPH --- Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers
PZSU --- YEFN ---
R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions YLTC ---
RDRE --- YPSH ---
RADR --- YPTR ---
RBDR --- Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system
RDRS --- equipment
RBRF Yes ZAXN ---
RDIR --- ZBAT ---
RFLO Yes ZCAB ---
RPSB Yes ZCAP ---
RREC Yes ZCON ---
RSYN Yes ZGEN ---
C: Logical Nodes for Control ZGIL ---
CALH --- ZLIN ---
CCGR --- ZMOT ---
CILO Yes ZREA ---
CPOW --- ZRRC ---
CSWI Yes ZSAR ---
G: Logical Nodes for Generic references ZTCF ---
GAPC Yes ZTCR ---
GGIO Yes
Nodes GRZ
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 790 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3

Common data classes GRZ
Status information
SPS Yes
DPS ---
INS Yes
ACT Yes
ACT_ABC Yes
ACD Yes
ACD_ABC Yes
SEC ---
BCR ---
Measured information
MV Yes
CMV Yes
SAV ---
WYE Yes
WYE_ABCN ---
DEL Yes
SEQ Yes
HMV ---
HWYE ---
HDEL ---
Controllable status information
SPC Yes
DPC Yes
INC Yes
BSC ---
ISC ---
Controllable analogue information
APC ---
Status settings
SPG ---
ING Yes
Analogue settings
ASG Yes
CURVE ---
Description information
DPL Yes
LPL Yes
CSD ---
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 791 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
LPHD class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
PhyName DPL Physical device name plate M Y
PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Y
OutOv SPS Output communications buffer overflow O N
Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M Y
InOv SPS Input communications buffer overflow O N
NumPwrUp INS Number of Power ups O N
WrmStr INS Number of Warm Starts O N
WacTrg INS Number of watchdog device resets detected O N
PwrUp SPS Power Up detected O N
PwrDn SPS Power Down detected O N
PwrSupAlm SPS External power supply alarm O N
RsStat SPC Reset device statistics T O N
Common Logical Node class

Data
Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)
Mod INC Mode M Y
Beh INS Behaviour M Y
Health INS Health M Y
NamPlt LPL Name plate M Y
Optional Logical Node Information
Loc SPS Local operation O N
EEHealth INS External equipment health O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
OpCntRs INC Operation counter resetable O N
OpCnt INS Operation counter O N
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and 792pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)
LLNO class
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O Y
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Controls
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 792 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Diag SPC Run Diagnostics O Y

LEDRs SPC LED reset T O Y
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 793 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
PDIS class
Data
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD_ABC Start M Y
Op ACT_ABC Operate T M Y
Settings
PoRch ASG Polar Reach is the diameter of the Mho diagram O Y
PhStr ASG Phase Start Value O Y
GndStr ASG Ground Start Value O Y
DirMod ING Directional Mode O Y
PctRch ASG Percent Reach O N
Ofs ASG Offset O Y
PctOfs ASG Percent Offset O N
RisLod ASG Resistive reach for load area O N
AngLod ASG Angle for load area O N
TmDlMod SPG Operate Time Delay Mode O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Time Delay O Y
PhDlMod SPG Operate Time Delay Multiphase Mode O N
PhDlTmms ING Operate Time Delay for Multiphase Faults O N
GndDlMod SPG Operate Time Delay for Single Phase Ground Mode O N
GndDlTmms ING Operate Time Delay for single phase ground faults O N
X1 ASG Positive sequence line (reach) reactance O Y
LinAng ASG Line Angle O Y
RisGndRch ASG Resistive Ground Reach O Y
RisPhRch ASG Resistive Phase Reach O Y
K0Fact ASG Residual Compensation Factor K0 O N
K0FactAng ASG Residual Compensation Factor Angle O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Time Delay O N
PHAR class
Data
Status Information
Settings
HarRst ING Number of harmonic restrained O N
PhStr ASG Start Value O Y
PhStop ASG Stop Value O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 794 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
PSCH class
Data
Status Information
ProTx SPS Teleprotection signal transmitted T M Y
ProRx SPS Teleprotection signal received T M Y
Str ACD_ABC Carrier Send M Y
CarRx ACT Carrier received after unblock logic O N
LosOfGrd SPS Loss of guard O N
Echo ACT_ABC Echo signal from weak end infeed function O Y
WeiOp ACT_ABC Operate signal from weak end infeed function O Y
RvABlk ACT_ABC Block signal from current reversal function O Y
GrdRx SPS Guard Received O N
Settings
SchTyp ING Scheme Type O N
CrdTmms ING Co-ordination timer for blocking scheme O Y
DurTmms ING Minimum duration of carrier send signal O N
UnBlkMod ING Unblock function mode for scheme type O N
SecTmms ING Pickup security timer on loss of carrier guard signal O N
WeiMod ING Mode of weak end infeed function O N
WeiTmms ING Co-ordination time for weak end infeed function O N
PPVVal ASG Voltage level for weak end infeed function -phase-phase O N
PhGndVal ASG Voltage level for weak end infeed function -phase-ground O N
RvAMod ING Mode of current reversal function O N
RvATmms ING Pickup time for current reversal logic O N
RvRsTmms ING Delay time for reset of current reversal output O Y
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 795 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
PTOC class
Data
Status Information
TmASt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmACrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O Y
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
TypRsCrv ING Type of Reset Curve O N
RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
DirMod ING Directional Mode O N
PTOF class
Data
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Op ACT Operate T M Y
BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O Y
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O Y
BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Y
OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 796 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
PTOV class
Data
Status Information
Op ACT_ABC Operate T O Y
TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
PTRC class
Data
Status Information
Tr ACT_ABC Trip C Y
Op ACT Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection functions) C N
Str ACD Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes O N
Settings
TrMod ING Trip Mode O N
TrPlsTmms ING Trip Pulse Time O N
Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 797 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
PTTR class
Data
Measured Values
Amp MV Current for thermal load model O N
Tmp MV Temperature for thermal load O N
TmpRl MV Relation between temperature and max. temperature O N
LodRsvAlm MV Load reserve to alarm O N
LodRsvTr MV Load reserve to trip O N
AgeRat MV Ageing rate O N
Status Information
Str ACD Start O Y
AlmThm ACT Thermal Alarm O Y
TmTmpSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
TmASt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmTmpCrv CURVE Characteristic Curve for temperature measurement O N
TmACrv CURVE Characteristic Curve for current measurement /Thermal model O N
TmpMax ASG Maximum allowed temperature O N
ConsTms ING Time constant of the thermal model O N
AlmVal ASG Alarm Value O N
PTUC class
Data
Status Information
Op ACT_ABC Operate T O Y
Settings
TmACrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
TypRsCrv ING Type of Reset Curve O N
DirMod ING Directional Mode O N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 798 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
PTUV class
Data
Status Information
Settings
TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
PTUF class
Data
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O Y
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O Y
BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Y
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 799 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
RBRF class
Data
Status Information
Str ACD_ABC Start, timer running O Y
OpEx ACT Breaker failure trip (“external trip”) T C N
OpIn ACT_ABC Operate, retrip (“internal trip”) T C Y
Setting
Breaker Failure Detection Mode (current, breaker status, both,
FailMod ING O Y
other)
FailTmms ING Breaker Failure Time Delay for bus bar trip O Y
SPlTrTmms ING Single Pole Retrip Time Delay O N
TPTrTmms ING Three Pole Retrip Time Delay O N
DetValA ASG Current Detector Value O Y
ReTrMod ING Retrip Mode O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used depending on the applied tripping schema.
RFLO class
Data
Measured values
FltZ CMV Fault Impedance M Y
FltDiskm MV Fault Distance in km M Y
Status Information
FltLoop INS Fault Loop O Y
Setting
LinLenKm ASG Line length in km O Y
R1 ASG Positive-sequence line resistance O Y
X1 ASG Positive-sequence line reactance O Y
R0 ASG Zero-sequence line resistance O Y
X0 ASG Zero-sequence line reactance O Y
Z1Mod ASG Positive-sequence line impedance value O N
Z1Ang ASG Positive-sequence line impedance angle O N
Z0Mod ASG Zero-sequence line impedance value O N
Z0Ang ASG Zero-sequence line impedance angle O N
Rm0 ASG Mutual resistance O Y
Xm0 ASG Mutual reactance O Y
Zm0Mod ASG Mutual impedance value O N
Zm0Ang ASG Mutual impedance angle O N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 800 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
RPSB class
Data
Status Information
Str ACD Start (Power Swing Detected) C1 Y
Op ACT Operate (Out of step Tripping) T C2 N
BlkZn SPS Blocking of correlated PDIS zone C1 Y
Setting
ZeroEna SPG Zero Enable O N
NgEna SPG Negative Sequence Current Supervision Enabled O N
MaxEna SPG Max Current Supervision Enabled O N
SwgVal ASG Power Swing Delta O Y
SwgRis ASG Power Swing Delta R O N
SwgReact ASG Power Swing Delta X O N
SwgTmms ING Power Swing Time O Y
UnBlkTmms ING Unblocking Time O N
Maximum number of pole slips until tripping (Op, Out of step
MaxNumSlp ING O N
tripping)
EvTmms ING Evaluation time (time window, Out of step tripping) O N
Condition C1: Mandatory if RPSB is used for “Power swing blocking”
Condition C2: Mandatory if RPSB is used for “Out of step tripping”
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 801 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
RREC class
Data
Controls
BlkRec SPC Block Reclosing O N
ChkRec SPC Check Reclosing O N
Status Information
Auto SPS Automatic Operation (external switch status) O N
Op ACT Operate (used here to provide close to XCBR) T M Y
AutoRecSt INS Auto Reclosing Status M Y
Setting
Rec1Tmms ING First Reclose Time O N
Rec2Tmms ING Second Reclose Time O N
Rec3Tmms ING Third Reclose Time O N
PlsTmms ING Close Pulse Time O Y
RclTmms ING Reclaim Time O Y
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 802 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
RSYN class
Data
Controls
RHz SPC Raise Frequency O N
LHz SPC Lower Frequency O N
RV SPC Raise Voltage O N
LV SPC Lower Voltage O N
Status Information
Rel SPS Release M Y
VInd SPS Voltage Difference Indicator O N
AngInd SPS Angle Difference Indicator O N
HzInd SPS Frequency Difference Indicator O N
SynPrg SPS Synchronising in progress O N
Measured values
DifVClc MV Calculated Difference in Voltage O N
DifHzClc MV Calculated Difference in Frequency O N
DifAngClc MV Calculated Difference of Phase Angle O N
Setting
DifV ASG Difference Voltage O N
DifHz ASG Difference Frequency O N
DifAng ASG Difference Phase Angle O Y
LivDeaMod ING Live Dead Mode O N
DeaLinVal ASG Dead Line Value O N
LivLinVal ASG Live Line Value O N
DeaBusVal ASG Dead Bus Value O N
LivBusVal ASG Live Bus Value O N
PlsTmms ING Close Pulse Time O N
BkrTmms ING Closing time of breaker O N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 803 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
CILO class
Data
Status Information
EnaOpn SPS Enable Open M Y
EnaCls SPS Enable Close M Y
CSWI class
Data
Controls
Pos DPC Switch, general M Y
PosA DPC Switch L1 O N
PosB DPC Switch L2 O N
PosC DPC Switch L3 O N
OpOpn ACT Operation “Open Switch” T O N
OpCls ACT Operation “Close Switch” T O N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 804 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
GAPC class
Data
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
Auto SPS Automatic operation O N
Setting
StrVal ASG Start Value O N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 805 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
GGIO class
Data
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
Ind01 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
:
:
:
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 806 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
GGIO_GOOSE class
Data
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 807 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
MMXU class
Data
Measured values
TotW MV Total Active Power (Total P) O N
TotVAr MV Total Reactive Power (Total Q) O N
TotVA MV Total Apparent Power (Total S) O N
TotPF MV Average Power factor (Total PF) O N
Hz MV Frequency O Y
PPV DEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …) O Y
PhV WYE Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …) O Y
A WYE Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) O Y
W WYE Phase active power (P) O Y
VAr WYE Phase reactive power (Q) O Y
VA WYE Phase apparent power (S) O Y
PF WYE Phase power factor O Y
Z WYE Phase Impedance O N
MSQI class
Data
Measured values
SeqA SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current C Y
SeqV SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage C Y
DQ0Seq SEQ DQ0 Sequence O N
ImbA WYE Imbalance current O N
ImbNgA MV Imbalance negative sequence current O N
ImbNgV MV Imbalance negative sequence voltage O N
ImbPPV DEL Imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
ImbV WYE Imbalance voltage O N
ImbZroA MV Imbalance zero sequence current O N
ImbZroV MV Imbalance zero sequence voltage O N
MaxImbA MV Maximum imbalance current O N
MaxImbPPV MV Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
MaxImbV MV Maximum imbalance voltage O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 808 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
XCBR class
Data
OpCnt INS Operation counter M Y
Controls
Pos DPC Switch position M Y
BlkOpn SPC Block opening M Y
BlkCls SPC Block closing M Y
ChaMotEna SPC Charger motor enabled O Y
Metered Values
SumSwARs BCR Sum of Switched Amperes, resetable O N
Status Information
CBOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability M Y
POWCap INS Point On Wave switching capability O N
MaxOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability when fully charged O N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 809 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
SPS class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg TRUE | FALSE M Y
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal BOOLEAN SV TRUE | FALSE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13
INS class
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y(*1)
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Substitution
subVal INT32 SV PICS_SUBST N
Services
(*1): “ENUM” type is also used.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 810 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
ACT class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
Services
ACT_ABC class
Name
DataAttribute
status
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
Services
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 811 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
ACD class
Name
DataAttribute
status
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) N
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) N
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) N
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) N
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) N
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) N
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Services
ACD_ABC class
Name
DataAttribute
status
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) Y
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) Y
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) Y
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Services
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 812 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
MV class
Name
DataAttribute
measured values
instMag AnalogueValue MX O N
mag AnalogueValue MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | low-low |… O N
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subVal AnalogueValue SV PICS_SUBST N
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
Services
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 813 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
CMV class
Name
DataAttribute
measured values
instCVal Vector MX O N
cVal Vector MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | low-low |… O N
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subVal Vector SV PICS_SUBST N
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
magSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
angSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
angRef ENUMERATED CF V | A | other … O N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
Services
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 814 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
WYE class
Name
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 N
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca | O N
Vother | Aother
Services
WYE_ABCN class
Name
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 Y
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca | O N
Vother | Aother
Services
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 815 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
DEL class
Name
Data
phsAB CMV GC_1 Y
phsBC CMV GC_1 Y
phsCA CMV GC_1 Y
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | O N
Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother
Services
SEQ class
Name
Data
c1 CMV M Y
c2 CMV M Y
c3 CMV M Y
DataAttribute
measured attributes
seqT ENUMERATED MX pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero M Y
phsRef ENUMERATED CF A|B |C |… O N
Services
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 816 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
SPC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator_RO CO, ST AC_CO_O Y
ctlNum INT8U_RO CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE | TRUE AC_ST Y
q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y
t TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
Services
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 817 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
DPC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M Y
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O Y
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O Y
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M Y
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M Y
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal CODED ENUM ST dchg intermediate-state | off | on | M Y
bad-state
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Substitution
subVal CODED ENUM SV intermediate-state | off | on | PICS_SUBST N
bad-state
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
ctlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O Y
Services
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 818 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
INC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal INT32 CO AC_CO_M N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M N
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y
Q Quality ST qchg M Y
T TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subVal INT32 SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
D VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
Services
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 819 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
ING class
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setVal INT32 SP AC_NSG_M Y(*3)
setVal INT32 SG, SE AC_SG_M N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
(*3): “ENUM” type is also used.
ASG class
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag AnalogueValue SP AC_NSG_M Y
setMag AnalogueValue SG, SE AC_SG_M N
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y
minVal AnalogueValue CF O N
maxVal AnalogueValue CF O N
stepSize AnalogueValue CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 820 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
DPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
hwRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
serNum VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
model VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
location VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
Services
LPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
configRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC AC_LN0_M Y
ldNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX shall be included in LLN0 only; AC_LN0_EX N
for example "IEC 61850-7-4:2003"
lnNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLD_M N
Services
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 821 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
(This page is intentionally blank)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)
- 822 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Protocol implementation extra information
for testing (PIXIT)
on the IEC61850 communication interface (Ver. 0.6)
Note: The template of this document is “Protocol Implementation eXtra Information for
Testing (PIXIT) for the IEC 61850 interface in G2 series IED” published by UCA
International Using Group with note” PIXIT template extracted from server test
procedures version 2.3 and updated according to TPCL version 1.5” in March
12,2012 .
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 823 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
1. INTRODUCTION
This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of
the IEC 61850 interface in G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01 series
version upper than E (G2M850-01-E).
Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10.
2. CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT

Each chapter specifies the PIXIT for each applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC
61850-10.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 824 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
3. PIXIT FOR ASSOCIATION MODEL

ID Description Value / Clarification
Maximum number of clients that can set-up an
As1 6
association simultaneously
Configurable from 1 to 20 seconds
As2 TCP_KEEPALIVE value
(default is 20 seconds)
From 10 to 30 seconds
As3 Lost connection detection time
(TCP_KEEPALIVE + 10sec.)
As4 Is authentication supported N
Transport selector N
Session selector N
What association parameters are necessary for
As5 Presentation selector N
successful association
AP Title N
AE Qualifier N
If association parameters are necessary for
As6 N.A.
association, describe the correct values e.g.
Max MMS PDU size 8172
What is the maximum and minimum MMS PDU
As7 Min MMS PDU size Not limited. It
size
depends on a request.
Typically about 130 seconds
Please check LCD

Monitoring -> Communication
What is the maximum start up time after a power
As8 -> 61850STAT as “Active”
supply interrupt
(Note) The startup time depends
on the type of IED and
its configuration/setting.
Same as “Lost connection detection time”
As9 Physical link disconnection
above
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 825 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
4. PIXIT FOR SERVER MODEL

Validity:
Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N Overflow
N OutofRange
N BadReference
Which analogue value (MX) quality bits are supported (can be N Oscillatory
Sr1
set by server) N Failure
N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate (Only Hz)
Source:
N Process
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
Validity:
Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N BadReference
N Oscillatory
Which status value (ST) quality bits are supported (can be set N Failure
Sr2
by server) N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Source:
N Process
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
Not restricted;
What is the maximum number of data values in one depend on the max.
Sr3
GetDataValues request MAX PDU size given
in previous page.
Not restricted; depend on the
What is the maximum number of data values in one
Sr4 max. MAX PDU size given in
SetDataValues request
previous page.
On Y
Blocked N
Sr5 Which Mode / Behavior values are supported Test Y
Test/Blocked N
Off N
Front-to-back order. This
might influence on write
The order of interpretation of write requests involving a list of
Sr6 request involving RptEna and
variables.
other variables in the same
RCB.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 826 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
5. PIXIT FOR DATA SET MODEL

Not limited by an internal
configuration parameter.
This IED does not have

What is the maximum number of data elements in one data CreateDataSet service. But
Ds1
set (compare ICD setting) any DataSet can be defined
by using engineering tool.
The maximum number
depends on the memory size
of IED.
How many persistent data sets can be created by one or more
Ds2 clients N.A.
(this number includes predefined datasets)
How many non-persistent data sets can be created by one or
Ds3 N.A.
more clients
6. PIXIT FOR SUBSTITUTION MODEL

Not applicable
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 827 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
7. PIXIT FOR SETTING GROUP CONTROL MODEL

What is the number of supported setting groups
Sg1 for each logical device (compare NumSG in the 8
SGCB)
Just SelectActiveSG service will be
supported according to PICS.
When an IED receives correct

SelectActiveSG request, the IED returns
Response+ within 10 seconds. And the
What is the effect of when and how the ActSG and LActTm variable are updated
Sg2 non-volatile storage is updated within 10 seconds after the Response+.
(compare IEC 61850-8-1 $16.2.4) (These times are typical values, and they
depend on IED types and its
configurations/settings.)
After changing setting group number with

LED panel, you can see new setting group
with GetSGCBValue service.
Sg3 Can multiple clients edit the same setting group N.A.
What happens if the association is lost while
Sg4 N.A.
editing a setting group
Sg5 Is EditSG value 0 allowed? N.A.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 828 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
8. PIXIT FOR REPORTING MODEL

integrity Y
data change Y
quality change Y
data update Y*
The supported trigger conditions are
Rp1 general interrogation Y
(compare PICS)
*data-update can be set, but IED
doesn’t send the report caused by
data update
sequence-number Y
report-time-stamp Y
reason-for-inclusion Y
data-set-name Y
Rp2 The supported optional fields are data-reference Y
buffer-overflow Y
entryID Y
conf-rev Y
segmentation Y
Rp3 Can the server send segmented reports Y
Mechanism on second internal data change Send report immediately
Rp4 notification of the same analogue data value within
buffer period (Compare IEC 61850-7-2 $14.2.2.9)
Multi client URCB approach Each URCB is visible to all clients
Rp5
(compare IEC 61850-7-2 $14.2.1)
It is made up of the circular buffer
Rp6 What is the format of EntryID counter at the time the event was
entered.
What is the buffer size for each BRCB or how many For example, LLN0$ST$Health can
Rp7
reports can be buffered be stored 408 events.
Pre-configured RCB attributes that cannot be <data set name>
Rp8 changed online when RptEna = FALSE
N.A.
(see also the ICD report settings)
May the reported data set contain:
Rp9 - structured data objects? Y
- data attributes? Y
What is the scan cycle for binary events? More than 1.6 milliseconds
Rp10
Is this fixed, configurable Configurable
Does the device support to pre-assign a RCB to a
Rp11 N
specific client in the SCL
This is incremented when DatSet is
Rp12 ConfRev value
updated.
Rp13 Is it supported to change LLN0.Mod online? N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 829 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
9. PIXIT FOR LOGGING MODEL

Not applicable
10. PIXIT FOR GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENTS MODEL

What elements of a subscribed GOOSE header N source MAC address
are checked to decide the message is valid and Y destination MAC address
the allData values are accepted? If yes, describe = as configured
the conditions. Y Ethertype = 0x88B8
Note: the VLAN tag may be removed by a Y APPID = as configured
ethernet switch and should not be checked Y gocbRef = as configured
N timeAllowedtoLive
N datSet
Go1
Y goID = as configured
N t
N stNum
Y sqNum
Y test
N confRev
Y ndsCom
N numDatSetEntries
Can the test flag in the published GOOSE be
Go2 N
turned on / off
What is the behavior when the GOOSE publish If the configuration is incorrect, the
Go3
configuration is incorrect GOOSE isn’t published.
When is a subscribed GOOSE marked as lost?
(TAL = time allowed to live value from the last
Go4 Message does not arrive prior to TAL.
received GOOSE message)
What is the behavior when one or more [stNum is out-of-order, or missed]

subscribed GOOSE messages isn’t received or No fail will be detected.
syntactically incorrect (missing GOOSE)
[sqNum is out-of-order, or missed]
GOOSE subscribe quality information
will become QUESTIONABLE |
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000 1000 0).
Go5
After receiving message with correct
sqNum order, the quality information is
set to GOOD (=0000 0000 0000 0).
You can assign the information to any

data attribute using our configuration
tool.
What is the behavior when a subscribed GOOSE Refer to Gos5
Go6
message is out-of-order
What is the behavior when a subscribed GOOSE GOOSE subscribe quality information
Go7 message is duplicated will become QUESTIONABLE |
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000 1000 0).
Does the device subscribe to GOOSE messages Yes for both
Go8
with/without the VLAN tag?
May the GOOSE data set contain: Subscribed Published
- structured data objects (FCD)? Y Y
Go9
- timestamp data attributes? N Y
Note: data attributes (FCDA) is mandatory
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 830 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Published FCD supported common data classes /
Go10 All CDC/data types can be published.
data types are
[Supported CDC]
All
[Supported data type]

Boolean
BitString
Integer
Subscribed FCD supported common data classes / Unsigned Integer
Go11
data types are
Other types
(TimeStamp, OctetString, etc) will be
ignored by IED.
(NOTE)
But each data size shall be less than 32
bits.
What is the slow retransmission time? 60 seconds with TAL = 120 seconds
Go12
Is it fixed or configurable? Fixed.
What is the minimum supported retransmission 1sec
time?
What is the maximum supported retransmission 1 – 60sec(configurable)
Go13
time?
Is it fixed or configurable? Configurable

Can the Goose publish be turned on / off by using
Go14 Y
SetGoCBValues(GoEna)
What is the fast retransmission scheme?
Go15 1sec
Is it fixed or configurable?
When expected time (TAL) spends
without GOOSE message, GOOSE
subscribe quality information will
become QUESTIONABLE (=1100 0000
0000 0).
After that, when IED receive time

exceeded GOOSE with SqNum=0,
What is the behavior when one subscribed
Go16 GOOSE message exceeds the previous time
will become GOOD (=0000 0000 0000 0).
Allowed to Live (TAL)
When IED receive time exceeded
GOOSE with SqNum!=0, GOOSE
subscribe quality information will
become QUESTIONABLE |
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000 1000 0)
Payload data consistency is not used to

determine if TAL is exceeded.
What is the behavior when a subscribed GOOSE
Go17 will become QUESTIONABLE | TEST
message is “test”
(=1100 0000 0001 0).
What is the behavior when a subscribed GOOSE
Go18 will become QUESTIONABLE |
message is “ndsCom”
INACCURATE (=1100 0000 0100 0).
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 831 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

This is not checked. Two GOOSEs,
which have same header (e.g.GoID) and
different dataset structure, are treated
as the same GOOSEs.
And if received GOOSEs have same

header, the fixed position of the GOOSE
dataset is read. E.g. the 1st element of
the dataset is set to read, it keeps
Go19 Dataset structure of a subscribed GOOSE
reading the 1st element even if the
dataset structure is different.
Note:
Subscribed payload data structure is
checked to determine if IED
accepts/discards the data; however the
TAL timeout is reset even when such
data is discarded.
The device starts sending GOOSE from
Go20 What is the behavior when the device starts up?
stNum=1 and sqNum=1.
Go21 Is it supported to set the “ndsCom” as TRUE? N
TAL = Time Allowed to Live
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 832 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
11. PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL

Y status-only
Y direct-with-normal-security
What control models are supported
Ct1 Y sbo-with-normal-security
(compare PICS)
Y direct-with-enhanced-security
Y sbo-with-enhanced-security
Is the control model fixed, configurable and/or
Ct2 Fixed
online changeable?
Ct3 Is TimeActivatedOperate supported N
Ct4 Is “operate-many” supported N
Will the DUT activate the control output
when the test attribute is set in the
Ct5 SelectWithValue and/or Operate request Y
(when N test procedure Ctl2 is
applicable)
What are the conditions for the time (T) attribute
Ct6 N.A.
in the SelectWithValue and/or Operate request
Ct7 Is pulse configuration supported N
What is the behaviour of the DUT when the check Both bits are checked.
conditions are set
(NOTE) The result of Opening
operation (ctval = F) is not
influenced by SynchroCheck bit.
Ct8
This behavior is fixed.
Is this behaviour fixed, configurable, online

changeable?
Y Not-supported
Y Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
Y Select-failed
Y Invalid-position
Y Position-reached
Y Parameter-change-in-execution
N Step-limit
Y Blocked-by-Mode
N Blocked-by-process
Ct9 What additional cause diagnosis are supported
Y Blocked-by-interlocking
Y Blocked-by-synchrocheck
Y Command-already-in-execution
Y Blocked-by-health
Y 1-of-n-control
Y Abortion-by-cancel
Y Time-limit-over
Y Abortion-by-trip (only for BCPU)
Y Object-non-selected
Set orCat with unsupported value. See
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with
Ct10 below “Which origin categories are
SelectWithValue request?
supported?” .
Send SELECT request to the control
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Select
Ct11 object which is not mapped to control
request?
application.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 833 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

DOns, SBOns, DOes:
[Example1]
Set orCat as unsupported value
-> Cause AddCause as
“Not-supported(1)”
[Example2]
Set ctlCat same as stVal
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Operate
Ct12 “Position-reached(5)”
request?
SBOes:
Same as above. Or,
[Example3]
Set Oper parameters as different
parameter from the parameter of
SelectWithVal
“Parameter-change-in-execution (6)”
not-supported (0):N
bay-control (1):N
station-control (2):Y
remote-control (3):Y
Ct13 Which origin categories are supported? automatic-bay (4):N
automatic-station (5):Y
automatic-remote (6):Y
maintenance (7):N
process (8):N
DOns, SBOns, DOes, SBOes:
Ct14 What happens if the orCat value is not supported?
“test-not-ok” IED respond
Does the IED accept a SelectWithValue/Operate
Ct15 DOns, SBOns, DOes, SBOes: N
with the same ctlVal as the current status value?
DOns: N
SBOns: N
DOes: N
Does the IED accept a select/operate on the same SBOes: N
Ct16 control object from 2 different clients at the same
time? Note:
Commands are refused until the new
position is not reached or a timeout does
not occur.
Does the IED accept a Select/SelectWithValue SBOns: N
Ct17 from the same client when the control object is SBOes: N
already selected (tissue 334)
Is for SBOes the internal validation performed Yes for both SelectWithValue and
Ct18
during the SelectWithValue and/or Operate step? Operate
N.A.
Can a control operation be blocked by Mod=Off or
Ct19 (Only “On” and ”Test” are supported as
Blocked
Mod.)
Ct20 Does the IED support local / remote operation? Y
Does the IED send an InformationReport with
SBOns: N
Ct21 LastApplError as part of the Operate response-
DOns: N
for control with normal security?
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 834 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

If IED is set to test mode, IED outputs
What is the behavior of the DUT when the test control command to primary equipment
Ct22 attribute is set in the SelectWithValue and/or same as in normal mode. Otherwise IED
Operate request? rejects the request with
“Blocked-by-Mode”.
N.A.
Can a control operation be blocked by Mod=Off or
Ct23 (Only “Normal” and ”Test” are supported
Blocked
as Mod.)
Ct24 Does the IED support local / remote operation? Y
Y instance-not-available
N instance-in-use
Y access-violation
N access-not-allowed-in-current-state
N parameter-value-inappropriate
Y parameter-value-inconsistent
Ct25 What service error types are supported? N class-not-supported
Y instance-locked-by-other-client
N control-must-be-selected
Y type-conflict
Y failed-due-to-communications
N constraint failed-due-to-server –
constraint
N No Error
N Unknown
Ct26 What “Error” in LastApplError are supported?
Y Timeout Test Not OK
Y Operator Test Not OK
IED reply with LastApplError and
Write-.
Ct27 When Oper request has invalid data type data But LastApplError does not include
request parameters because IED cannot
retrieve them from Oper request.
Instance-not-available
(object-non-existent)
access-violation (object-access-denied)
ServiceError related to Control service: parameter-value-inconsistent
It is only included in Write- response. (invalid-address)
Ct28
According to table23 in part8-1, IED will send instance-locked-by-other-client
ServiceError as right in the case “Control”. (temporarily-unavailable)
type-conflict (type-inconsistent)
failed-due-to-communications
(hardware-failure)
Test flag
FALSE TRUE
IED On Accepted Rejected
Mode Test Rejected Accepted
The behavior of DUT according to the relationship
Ct29 between IED mode and Test flagged control Accepted:
request The control request is accepted by IED,
and Activate Binary Output
Rejected:
The control request is rejected by IED
with AddCause “Blocked-by-Mode”.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 835 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

Select timeout
Configurable from 30 to 300sec
(default is 30 sec.)
Ct30 Select and Operate timeout value
Operate timeout
Configurable from 1 to 100sec
(default is 30 sec.)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 836 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
12. PIXIT FOR TIME AND TIME SYNCHONISATION MODEL

N LeapSecondsKnown
What quality bits are supported (may be set
Tm1 N ClockFailure
by the IED)
Y ClockNotSynchronized
The quality attribute
Describe the behavior when the time
Tm2 “ClockNotSynchronized” will be set to
synchronization signal/messages are lost
TRUE.
When is the time quality bit "ClockFailure" RTC is out-of-order
Tm3
set?
It depends on the condition of
When is the time quality bit "Clock not
Tm4 synchronization. Typically from 1 to 10
synchronized” set?
minutes.
Is the timestamp of a binary event adjusted to Y
Tm5
the configured scan cycle? (More than 1.6 milliseconds)
Does the device support time zone and Yes for both.
Tm6
daylight saving?
Y Leap indicator not equal to 3?
N Mode is equal to SERVER
N OriginateTimestamp is equal to
value sent by the SNTP client as
Which attributes of the SNTP response
Tm7 Transmit Timestamp
packet are validated?
Y RX/TX timestamp fields are
checked for reasonableness
Y SNTP version 3 and/or 4
N other (describe)
What kinds of quality accuracy bits are Y Invalid
Tm8
supported? N Unspecified
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 837 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
13. PIXIT FOR FILE TRANSFER MODEL

What is structure of files and directories? Support tree structure
Where are the COMTRADE files stored? “/COMTRADE/” directory
(NOTE)
At root directory in IED,
Ft1 the directory “/COMTRADE/” is
hidden.
Therefore a client shall directly
access this directory.
Are comtrade files zipped and what files are Not zipped
included in each zip file?
Directory names are separated from the file name
Ft2 “/”
by
The maximum file name size including path
Ft3 64 chars
(recommended 64 chars)
Ft4 Are directory/file name case sensitive N
Maximum file size Not limited by implementation or
Ft5 configuration. It depends on available
memory.
Is the requested file path included in the MMS
Ft6 N
fileDirectory respond file name?
Is the wild char supported MMS fileDirectory
Ft7 N
request?
Is it allowed that 2 clients get a file at the same
Ft8 Y
time?
Ft9 Is the IETF FTP protocol also implemented? N
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 838 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
IEC61850 Tissues conformance statement (TICS)
on the IEC61850 communication interface (Ver. 0.3)
Note: The template of this document is “TISSUES Implementation Conformance

Statement for the IEC 61850 interface in G2 series IED” published by KEMA
consulting with document number “2008-v0.2”.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 839 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
1. Introduction
According to the UCA IUG QAP the tissue conformance statement is required to perform a
conformance test and is referenced on the certificate.
This document is applicable for G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01
series version upper than D (G2M850-01-D).
2. Mandatory Intop Tissues

During the October 2006 meeting IEC TC57 working group 10 decided that:
• green Tissues with the category “IntOp” are mandatory for IEC 61850 edition 1
• Tissues with the category “Ed.2” Tissues should not be implemented.
Below table gives an overview of the implemented IntOp Tissues.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 840 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Tissue Description
Part Y/n.a.
Nr Implemented
116 GetNameList with empty response? Y
8-1 165 Improper Error Response for GetDataSetValues Y
183 GetNameList error handling Y
7-4 None
28 Definition of APC n.a.
54 Point def xVal, not cVal n.a.
55 Ineut = Ires ? n.a.
7-3 60 Services missing in tables Y
63 mag in CDC CMV Y
219 operTm in ACT n.a.
270 WYE and DEL rms values Y
30 control parameter T Y
31 Typo n.a.
32 Typo in syntax n.a.
35 Typo Syntax Control time n.a.
36 Syntax parameter DSet-Ref missing n.a.
37 Syntax GOOSE "T" type Y
39 Add DstAddr to GoCB Y
40 GOOSE Message “AppID” to “GoID” Y
41 GsCB “AppID” to “GsID” n.a.
42 SV timestamp: “EntryTime” to “TimeStamp" n.a.
43 Control "T" semantic Y
44 AddCause - Object not sel n.a.
45 Missing AddCauses (neg range) Y
46 Synchro check cancel n.a.
7-2
47 "." in LD Name? Y
49 BRCB TimeOfEntry (part of #453) Y
50 LNName start with number? Y
51 ARRAY [0..num] missing n.a.
52 Ambiguity GOOSE SqNum Y
53 Add DstAddr to GsCB, SV n.a.
151 Name constraint for control blocks etc. Y
166 DataRef attribute in Log n.a.
185 Logging - Integrity periode n.a.
189 SV Format n.a.
190 BRCB: EntryId and TimeOfEntry (part of #453) Y
191 BRCB: Integrity and buffering reports (part of #453) Y
234 New type CtxInt (Enums are mapped to 8 bit integer) n.a.
275 Confusing statement on GI usage (part of #453) Y
278 EntryId not valid for a server (part of #453) Y
1 Syntax Y
5 tExtensionAttributeNameEnum is restricted Y
8 SIUnit enumeration for W n.a.
6 10 Base type for bitstring usage Y
17 DAI/SDI elements syntax Y
169 Ordering of enum differs from 7-3 Y
534 Dpos Y
Note: Tissue 49, 190, 191, 275 and 278 are part of the optional tissue #453, all other
technical tissues in the table are mandatory if applicable.
Note: Editorial tissues are marked as “n.a.”.
Note: Final proposal on tissue 45 is not defined yet
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 841 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
2. Optional IntOp Tissues

After the approval of the server conformance test procedures version 2.2 the following IntOp
tissues were added or changed. It is optional to implement these tissues.
Tissue Implemented
Part Description
Nr Y/N/n.a.
8-1 246 Control negative response (SBOns) with LastApplError N
8-1 545 Skip file directories with no files Y
7-2 333 Enabling of an incomplete GoCB n.a.
7-2 453 Combination of all reporting and logging tissues N
6 245 Attribute RptId in SCL N
6 529 Replace sev - Unknown by unknown n.a.
3. Other Implemented Tissues

Tissue Implemented
Part Description
Nr Y/N/n.a.
109 GOOSE, GSE, SV Addresses Y
118 File directory Y
8-1
121 GOOSE subscriber behavior Y
344 TimeOfEntry misspelled Y
7-4 76 CBOpCap and SwOpCap N
7-3 65 Deadband calculation of a Vector and trigger option Y
7-2 38 Syntax "AppID" or "GoID" Y
3 Missing ENUMs Y
6 ReportControl/OptFields N
6 7 Duplication of attributes N
11 Schema for IP Addr? N
15 bufOvfl in Schema? Y
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 842 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Appendix 5 Ordering
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 843 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Ordering information
[Hardware selection] (1/2)
Configurations G R Z 2 0 0 - - - 0 0 - - - 0
Application of power system

For 1CB arrangement (VCT12B: 5xCT, 5xVT) 1
For 1.5CB arrangement (VCT11B: 9xCT, 5xVT) 2
Rated Frequency (Default)
50Hz 1
60Hz 2
Rated Phase Currents (Default)
1A 1
5A 2
DC Rating
110-250 Vdc (or 100 – 220 Vac1) 1
Outline
Standard LCD, 1/2 x 19’’ rack for flush mounting 2
Standard LCD, 3/4 x 19’’ rack for flush mounting 3
Large LCD, 1/2 x 19’’ rack for flush mounting 6
Large LCD, 3/4 x 19’’ rack for flush mounting 7
Standard LCD, 1/2 x 19’’ rack for rack mounting2) F
Standard LCD, 3/4 x 19’’ rack for rack mounting2 G
Large LCD, 1/2 x 19’’ rack for rack mounting2 J
Large LCD, 3/4 x 19’’ rack for rack mounting2 K
BI/BO Module
Refer to Number of BI/BO Table
BI/BO Terminal Type
Compression plug type terminal 0
Ring type terminal 1
1Operation is not guaranteed in the AC power source.
2For 19” rack panel mounting, accessories of joint kits are available. (See
Appendix: Rack mounting))
- 844 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
[Hardware selection] (2/2)
Configurations G R Z 2 0 0 - - - 0 0 - - - 0
Number of Serial and/or Ethernet Communication and/or Time Synch Port(s)

1 port 1
1 port + GPS 2
1 port + IRIG-B 3
2 ports 4
2 ports + GPS 5
2 ports + IRIG-B 6
3 ports 7
1 port + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) B
1 port + GPS + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) C
1 port + IRIG-B + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) D
2 ports + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) E
2 ports + GPS + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) F
2 ports + IRIG-B + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) G
3 ports + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) H
3 ports + GPS + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) J
3 ports + IRIG-B + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) K
Selection of Serial and/or Ethernet Communication Port(s)
100Base-TX x 1 port (When position E = 1 - 3 and B – D) 3
100Base-FX x 1 port (When position E = 1 - 3 and B – D) 4
100Base-TX x 2 ports (When position E = 4 - 6 and E – G) 5
100Base-FX x 2 ports (When position E = 4 - 6 and E – G) 6
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-TX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 and E – G) A
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-TX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 and H – K) B
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-FX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 and E – G) C
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-FX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 and H – K) D
Fiber optic (for serial) + 100Base-TX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 and E – G) E
Fiber optic (for serial) + 100Base-TX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 and H – K) F
Fiber optic (for serial) + 100Base-FX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 and E – G) G
Fiber optic (for serial) + 100Base-FX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 and H – K) H
Function Block (linked with software selection)

See function table of software selection
- 845 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
[Software selection]
7 S G T E F U 9 V
Configurations G R Z 2 0 0 - 0 - -
Application of power system

Assignment on position “7”
Function Block
Refer to Function Table
Communication for Remote / Time Synch. (1)
Assignment on position “E”
Communication for Remote / Time Synch. (2)
Assignment on position “F”
Protocol
IEC 61850 2
Outline
Assignment on position “9”
Language
English E
- 846 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
Number of BI/BO
BI/BO 1 x I/O module

Number of BI/BO Ordering
No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
“A” to Configuration
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
7 - - - - 6 4 - - 11 1xBIO1
12 - - - - 3 2 - - 12 1xBIO2
8 - - - 6 - 2 - - 13 1xBIO3
- 6 - - - - 2 6 - 14 1xBIO4
18 - - - - - - - - 15 1xBI1
- 12 - - - - - - - 16 1xBI2
- - 32 - - - - - - 17 1xBI3
Other Configuration ZZ To be specified at ordering

No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
- - 32 - - 6 12 - - 21 1xBI3+1xBO1
7 - 32 - - 6 4 - - 22 1xBI3+1xBIO1
12 - 32 - - 3 2 - - 23 1xBI3+1xBIO2
18 - - - - 6 12 - - 24 1xBI1+1xBO1
25 - - - - 6 4 - - 25 1xBI1+1xBIO1
30 - - - - 3 2 - - 26 1xBI1+1xBIO2
8 - - - 6 6 14 - - 27 1xBO1+1xBIO3
15 - - - 6 6 6 - - 28 1xBIO1+1xBIO3
7 - - - - 12 16 - - 29 1xBO1+1xBIO1
16 - - 12 - 4 - - 2A 2xBIO3
- - 32 - - - - 16 - 2B 1xBI3+1xBO2
- 12 - - - 6 12 - - 2C 1xBI2 +1xBO1
- 847 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)

No.
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
(Position
Semi-fast
Common
Configuration
Fast-BO
“A” to
DC-AO
DC-AI
“B”)
BO
BO
BO
BI
BI
15 - - - 6 12 18 - - 31 1xBO1+1xBIO1+1xBIO3
20 - - - 6 9 16 - - 32 1xBO1+1xBIO2+1xBIO3
23 - - - 12 6 8 - - 33 1xBIO1+2xBIO3
26 - - - 6 6 14 - - 34 1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO3
8 - 32 - 6 6 14 - - 35 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO3
24 - - - 18 - 6 - - 36 3xBIO3
25 - - - - 12 16 - - 37 1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO1
- - 32 10 - 6 12 - - 38 1xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
36 - - - - 6 12 - - 39 2xBI1+1xBO1
- 24 - - - 6 12 - - 3A 2xBI2+1xBO1
18 6 - - - 6 14 6 - 3B 1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO4
7 - 32 - - 6 4 16 - 3C 1xBI3+1xBIO1+1xBO2
7 - 32 - - 12 16 - - 3D 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO1
- - 32 - - 6 12 16 - 3E 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBO2
18 - - 10 - 6 12 - - 3F 1XBI1+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
16 - - - 12 6 16 - - 3G 1xBO1+2xBIO3
- 6 32 - - 6 14 6 - 3H 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO4
- - 64 - - 6 12 - - 3K 2xBI3+1xBO1
14 - 32 - - 12 8 - - 3L 1xBI3+2xBIO1
- - 96 - - - - - - 3M 3xBI3
8 12 - - 6 6 14 - - 3N 1xBI2+1xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 32 - - 12 24 - - 3P 1xBI3 + 2xBO1
- 848 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
BI/BO 4 x I/O modules

No.
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
(Position
Semi-fast
Common
Configuration
Fast-BO
“A” to
DC-AO
DC-AI
“B”)
BO
BO
BO
BI
BI
26 - - - 6 12 26 - - 41 1xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO3
32 - - - 24 - 8 - - 42 4xBIO3
8 - 32 - 6 12 26 - - 43 1xBI3+2xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 64 - - 12 24 - - 44 2xBI3+2xBO1
1xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
8 - 32 10 6 6 14 - - 45 +1xBIO3
54 - - - - 6 12 - - 46 3xBI1+1xBO1
1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO2
20 - 32 - 6 9 16 - - 47 +1xBIO3
20 6 15 28 49 2xBO1+1xBIO2+1xBIO3
- - 64 10 - 6 12 - - 4A 2xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
34 - - - 12 6 16 - - 4B 1xBI1+1xBO1+2xBIO3
- - 64 - - - - 32 - 4C 2xBI3+2xBO2
21 - 32 - - 18 12 - - 4D 1xBI3+3xBIO1
- - 128 - - - - - - 4E 4xBI3
7 96 6 4 4F 3xBI3+1xBIO1
8 24 - - 6 6 14 - - 4G 2xBI2 +1xBO1 +1xBIO3
- - 32 - - 18 36 - - 4H 1xBI3 + 3xBO1
1xBI1 + 1xBI2 + 1xBO1
26 12 - - 6 6 14 - - 4J + 1xBIO3
24 - 32 - - 12 16 - - 4K 1xBI3+1xBO1+2xBIO2
15 - - - 6 18 30 - - 4L 2xBO1+1xBIO1+1xBIO3
7 - - - - 24 40 - - 4M 3xBO1+1xBIO1
- 849 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)

No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI 1xBI1+1xBIO1+1xBIO3
33 - - - 6 6 6 32 - 51 +2xBO2
44 - - - 6 12 26 - - 52 2xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO3
25 - 96 - - 6 4 - - 53 1xBI1+3xBI3+1xBIO1
8 - 96 - 6 6 14 - - 54 3xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 64 10 - 12 24 - - 55 2xBI3+1xDCAI2+2xBO1
62 - - - 6 6 14 - - 56 3xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO3
54 6 - - - 6 14 6 - 57 3xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO4
54 - - 10 - 6 12 - - 58 3xBI1+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
36 - - 10 - 12 24 - - 59 2xBI1+1xDCAI2+2xBO1
1xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
20 - 32 - 6 9 16 - - 5A +1xBIO2+1xBIO3
- - 96 - - 12 24 - - 5B 3xBI3+2xBO1
- - 96 10 - 6 12 - - 5C 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 64 10 - - - 32 - 5D 2xBI3+1xDCAI2+2xBO2
- - 128 - - 6 12 - - 5E 4xBI3+1xBO1
- - 160 - - 6 12 - - 5F 5xBI3
44 12 - - 6 6 14 - - 5G 2xBI1 + 1xBI2 + 1xBO1 +
1xBIO3
15 - - - 6 24 42 - - 5H 3xBO1+1xBIO1+1xBIO3
- - 64 - - 18 36 - - 5J 2xBI3+3xBO1
7 - 96 10 - 6 4 - - 5K 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBIO1
- - - - - 30 60 - - 5L 5xBO1
- - 64 30 - - - - - 5M 2xBI3+3xDCAI2
- - 96 20 - - - - - 5N 3xBI3+2xDCAI2
- 850 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)

No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
2xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO1
51 - - - 6 18 30 - - 61 +1xBIO3
8 - 96 - 6 12 26 - - 62 3xBI3+2xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 128 - - 12 24 - - 63 4xBI3+2xBO1
8 - 128 - 6 6 14 - - 64 4xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO3
3xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
8 - 96 10 6 6 14 - - 65 +1xBIO3
3xBI1+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
54 6 - 10 - 6 14 6 - 66 +1xBIO4
- - 128 10 - 6 12 - - 67 4xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 96 10 - 12 24 - - 68 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+2xBO1
52 - - - 12 - 4 32 - 69 2xBI1+2xBIO3+2xBO2
52 - - - 12 12 28 - - 6A 2xBI1+2xBO1+2xBIO3
36 - - - - 24 48 - - 6B 2xBI1+4xBO1
36 - 64 - - 12 24 - - 6C 2xBI1+2xBI3+2xBO1
44 - - - 6 18 38 - - 6D 2xBI1+3xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 160 - - 6 12 - - 6E 5xBI3+1xBO1
7 - 160 - - 6 4 - - 6F 5xBI3+1xBIO1
- 851 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)

No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
80 - BI
- - 6 12 26 - - 71 4xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO3
72 6 - - - 12 26 6 - 72 4xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO4
8 - 96 - 6 18 38 - - 73 3xBI3+3xBO1+1xBIO3
- 6 96 - - 18 38 6 - 74 3xBI3+3xBO1+1xBIO4
2xBI1+1xDCAI2+2xBIO4
36 12 - 10 - - 4 44 - 75 +2xBO2
- - 96 20 - 12 24 - - 76 3xBI3+2xDCAI2+2xBO1
7 - 64 20 - 6 4 32 - 77 +2xBO2
- 60 - - - 6 12 16 - 78 5xBI2+1xBO1+1xBO2
- - 160 - - 12 24 - - 79 5xBI3+2xBO1
52 - - 10 12 12 28 - - 7A +2XBO1
54 - 64 - - 12 24 - - 7B 3xBI1 + 2xBI3 + 2xBO1
18 - 96 10 - 12 24 - - 7C 1xBI1+3xBI3+1xDCAI2
+2xBO1
- - 128 - - 18 36 - - 7D 4xBI3+3xBO1
7 - 160 - - 12 16 - - 7E 5xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO1
- - 192 - - 6 12 - - 7F 6xBI3+1xBO1
7 - 192 - - 6 4 - - 7G 6xBI3+1xBIO1
- - 224 - - - - - - 7H 7xBI3
26 - 64 20 6 6 14 - - 7J 1xBI1+2xBI3+2xDCAI2
+1xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 128 30 - - - - - 7K 4xBI3+3xDCAI2
- 852 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)

No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
- - 128 10 - 18 36 - - 81 4xBI3+1xDCAI2+3xBO1
54 12 - 10 - - 4 44 - 82 +2xBO2
- - 160 - - 18 36 - - 83 5xBI3+3xBO1
- - 160 20 - 6 12 - - 84 5xBI3+2xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 192 10 - 6 12 - - 85 6xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 96 10 - 24 48 - - 86 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+4xBO1
- 60 - - - 6 12 32 - 87 5xBI2+1xBO1+2xBO2
8 - 128 - 6 18 38 - - 88 4xBI3+3xBO1+1xBIO3
14 - 96 30 - 12 8 - - 89 3xBI3+3xDCAI2+2xBIO1
- - 128 20 - 12 24 - - 8A 4xBI3+2xDCAI2+2xBO1
- - 192 20 - - - - - 8B 6xBI3+2xDCAI2
- - 256 - - - - - - 8C 8xBI3
36 - 64 20 - 12 24 - - 8D 2xBI1+2xBI3+2xDCAI2
+2xBO1
18 - 96 10 - 18 36 - - 8E 1xBI1+3xBI3+1xDCAI2
+3xBO1
- - 128 10 - - - 48 0 8F 4xBI3+1xDCAI2+3xBO2
7 - 224 - - 6 4 - - 8G 7xBI3+1xBIO1
- - 192 - - 12 24 - - 8H 6xBI3+2xBO1
7 - 192 - - 12 16 - - 8J 6xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO1
3xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
21 - 96 10 - 24 24 - - 8K +3xBIO1
- - 128 30 - 6 12 - - 8L 4xBI3+3xDCAI2+1xBO1
Note that the user should contact with the sales staffs when requiring “other configuration (Ordering number: ZZ)”
not indicated in the ordering code above.
- 853 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
FUNCTION TABLE
Ordering No. (Position “G & T”)
Function Block Protection function
11
ZS (6zone) 21 Distance protection(for phase fault) with 6zone
68 Power swing block ●
SOTF-OC Switch on to fault protection
ZG (6zone) 21N Distance protection(for earth fault) with 6zone
68 Power swing block ●
SOTF-OC Switch on to fault protection
DEFCAR 85-67N Directional earth fault carrier command protection ●
DISCAR 85-21 Distance carrier command protection ●
OC 50/67 Non-directional / directional definite time
over-current protection
●
51/67 Non-directional / directional inverse time over-current
protection
EF 50N/67N Non-directional / directional definite time earth fault
●
51N/67N Non-directional / directional inverse time earth fault
OCN 46/67 Non-Directional / directional Negative sequence
●
phase over-current protection
THM 49 Thermal overload protection ●
BCD 46BC Broken conductor protection ●
CBF 50BF Circuit breaker failure protection ●
STUB OC 50STUB Stub protection ●
OV 59 Phase over-voltage protection ●
OVS 59 Phase-phase over-voltage protection ●
UV 27 Phase under-voltage protection ●
UVS 27 Phase-phase under-voltage protection ●
FRQ 81 Frequency protection ●
OSTZ 56Z Out of step tripping by distance ●
ICD ICD Inrush current detection function ●
FS FS Fail-safe function ●
VTF VTF VTF detection function ●
CTF CTF CTF detection function ●
FL-Z 21FL Fault locator ●
ARC 79 Autoreclosing function ●
VCHK 25 Voltage check for autoreclosing ●
Standard for single breaker scheme
(5.1)
- 854 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
Appendix 6 Technical data
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 855 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
[Technical data]
Analog Inputs
Rated current In Either 1A or 5A (selectable by settings)
Rated voltage Vn 100V to 120V
Rated Frequency Either 50Hz or 60Hz (fixed when the ordering is performed)
Overload Rating
Current inputs 4 times rated current continuous
5 times rated current for 3 minutes
6 times rated current for 2 minutes
30 times rated current for 10 seconds
100 times rated current for 1 second
250 times rated current for one power cycle (20 or 16.6ms)
Voltage inputs 2 times rated voltage continuous
2.5 times rated voltage for 1 second
Burden
Phase current inputs  0.1VA at In = 1A,  0.2VA at In = 5A
Earth current inputs  0.3VA at In = 1A,  0.4VA at In = 5A
Sensitive earth fault inputs  0.3VA at In = 1A,  0.4VA at In = 5A
Voltage inputs  0.1VA at Vn
Power Supply
Rated auxiliary voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operative range: 19.2~ 72Vdc),
48/110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 ~ 132Vdc),
110/250Vdc (Operative range: 88 ~ 300Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply  15%
Supply interruption  20ms at 110Vdc
Restart time < 5ms
Power consumption  15W (quiescent)
 25W (maximum)
- 856 - GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

6F2S1905 (0.80)
Binary Inputs
Input circuit DC voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operating range: 19.2 – 72Vdc),
48/110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc),
110/125/220/250Vdc (Operating range: 88 – 300Vdc)
Note: Pick-up setting is available in BI2 and BIO4 (Setting
range: 18V to 222V)
Capacitive discharge immunity 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage and discharged
into the input terminals, according to ENA TS 48-4 with an
external resistor
Maximum permitted voltage 72Vdc for 24/48/60Vdc rating,
300Vdc for 110/250Vdc rating
Power consumption  0.5W per input at 220Vdc
Binary Outputs
Fast operating contacts
Make and carry 5A continuously
30A, 290Vdc for 0.2s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.15A, 290Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time Typically 3 ms
Semi-fast operating contacts
30A, 240Vdc for 1s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.1A at 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
0.2A at 125Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Auxiliary contacts
30A, 240Vdc for 1s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.1A at 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
0.2A at 125Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Hybrid contacts (10 A breaking)
10A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R=5ms)
Break 10A, 220Vdc (L/R=20ms)
10A, 110Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time 1 ms
Durability ≥ 10,000 operations (loaded contact)
≥ 100,000 operations (unloaded contact)
Measuring input capability

Full scale
Standard current input ≥ 60A (1A rating) or 300A (5A rating)
Sensitive current input ≥ 3A (1A rating) or 15 A (5A rating)
Voltage input ≥ 200V
Sampling rate 48 samples / cycle
Frequency response < 5% deviation over range 16.7Hz to 600Hz
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 857 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Mechanical Design
Installation Flush mounting
Weight Approx. 10kg (1/3 size), 12kg (1/2 size), 15kg (3/4 size), 25kg
(1/1 size)
Case color 2.5Y7.5/1 (approximation to Munsell value)
LED
Number 26 (Fixed for “In service” and “ERROR”)
Color Red / Yellow / Green (configurable) except In service (green)
and Error (red)
Function keys
Number 7
Local Interface
USB Type B
Maximum cable length 2 meters (less than)
Terminal Block
CT/VT input M3.5 Ring terminal (ring lug type terminal only)
Binary input, Binary output M3.5 Ring terminal with 15mm stripping length (for
compression plug type terminal)
M3.5 Ring terminal (for ring lug type terminal)
Compression type terminal Ring lug type terminal
System Interface (rear port)

100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet
Physical medium Twisted pair cable, RJ-45 connector
100BASE-FX Fast Ethernet
Physical medium 50/125 or 62.5/125m fibre, SC connector
Protocol IEC 61850
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 858 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Environmental performance
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2 Operating range:–25C to +55C.
IEC 60068-2-14 Storage / Transit:–25C to +70C.
Cyclic temperature test as per IEC
60068-2-14
Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.
IEC 60068-2-78 Cyclic temperature with humidity test as per
IEC 60068-2-30
Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 - Dust and Dripping Water Proof
IP20 for rear panel
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-27 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals
and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent
circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open
contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-27 Three positive and three negative impulses of
IEEE C37.90 5kV(peak), 1.2/50s, 0.5J between all
terminals and between all terminals and
earth.
Voltage Dips, IEC 60255-11, 1. Voltage dips:
Interruptions, IEC 61000-4-29, 0 % residual voltage for 20 ms
Variations and Ripple IEC 61000-4-17 40 % residual voltage for 200 ms
on DC supply IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 70 % residual voltage for 500 ms
2. Voltage interruptions:
0 % residual voltage for 5 s
3. Ripple:
15 % of rated d.c. value, 100 / 120 Hz
4. Gradual shut-down / start-up:
60 s shut-down ramp, 5 min power off, 60s
start-up ramp
5. Reversal of d.c. power supply polarity:
1 min
Capacitive Discharge ENA TS 48-4 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage
and discharged into the input terminals with
an external resistance
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 859 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Environmental performance
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3, 1 MHz burst in common / differential modes
Disturbance / IEC 61000-4-18 Auxiliary supply and I/O ports: 2.5 kV / 1 kV
Damped Oscillatory IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 1 kV / 0 kV
Wave
Electrostatic IEC 60255-22-2 Class 4, Contact: 2, 4, 6, 8kV
Discharge IEC 61000-4-2 Air: 2, 4, 8, 15kV
IEEE C37.90.3-2001
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3
Radiated RF IEC 60255-22-3, Sweep test ranges: 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4
Electromagnetic GHz to 2.7 GHz.
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-3 Level 3 Spot tests at 80, 160, 380, 450, 900, 1850 and
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 2150 MHz.
Field strength: 10 V/m
IEEE C37.90.2-1995 Field strength 35V/m for frequency sweep of
25MHz to 1GHz.
Fast Transient IEC 60255-22-4 5 kHz, 5/50ns disturbance
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-4 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4 kV
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 2 kV
Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5 1.2/50µms surge in common/differential modes:
IEC 61000-4-5 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4, 2,
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 1, 0.5 kV / 1, 0.5 kV
Communications ports: up to 1, 0.5 kV / 0 kV
Surge Withstand IEEE C37.90.1-2002 3kV, 1MHZ damped oscillatory wave
4kV, 5/50ns fast transient
Conducted RF IEC 60255-22-6 Sweep test range: 150 kHz to 80MHz
Electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-6 Spot tests at 27 and 68 MHz.
Disturbance IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Voltage level: 10 V r.m.s
Power Frequency IEC 60255-22-7 50/60 Hz disturbance for 10 s in common /
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-16 differential modes†
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Binary input ports: 300 V / 150 V
Power Frequency IEC 61000-4-8 Class 4 Field applied at 50/60Hz with strengths of:
Magnetic Field IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 30A/m continuously,
300A/m for 1 second.
Conducted and IEC 60255-25 Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions EN 55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB
EN 61000-6-4 (mean)
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions
30 to 230 MHz: < 40 dB(uV/m)
230 to 1000 MHz: < 47 dB(uV/m)
Measured at a distance of 10 m
†For differential mode, ‘CMP_NUM’ setting utilized.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 860 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
European Commission Directives
European Commission Directives

2014/30/EU Compliance with the European Commission
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is
demonstrated according to EN 60255-26:2013
2014/35/EU Compliance with the European Commission Low
Voltage Directive for electrical safety is
demonstrated according EN 60255-27:2014.
Performance and Functional Standards
Performance and Functional Standards

Category Standards
General
Common requirements IEC 60255-1
Data Exchange IEC 60255-24 / IEEE C37.111 (COMTRADE)
Product Safety IEC 60255-27
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 861 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Functional Data
Phase Fault Distance Measuring Element
Z*-Mho.Reach, Z*-X.Reach and Z*-R.Reach 0.10 to 500.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (1A rating)
(Z1S, Z1XS, Z2S, Z3S, Z4S, Z5S, ZCSF, ZCSR) 0.01 to 100.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (5A rating)
Characteristic angle 30° to 90° in 1° steps
Z*-Mho.Angle and Z*-R.Angle (Z1S, Z1XS,
Z2S, Z3S, Z4S, Z5S, ZCSF, ZCSR)
Z*-DirX.Angle and Z*-DirR.Angle (Z1S, 0° to 60° in 1° steps
Z1XS,Z2S, Z3S, Z4S, Z5S, ZCSF, ZCSR)
ZSF-X.GrAngle1 and ZSR-X.GrAngle1 0° to 45°in 1° steps
ZSF-X.GrAngle2 and ZSR-X.GrAngle2 45° to 90° in 1° steps
Earth Fault Distance Measuring Element
Z*-Mho.Reach, Z*-X.Reach and Z*-R.Reach 0.10 to 500.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (1A rating)
(Z1G, Z1XG, Z2G, Z3G, Z4G, Z5G, ZCGF, 0.01 to 100.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (5A rating)
ZCGR)
Characteristic angle 30° to 90° in 1° steps
Z*-Mho.Angle and Z*-R.Angle (Z1G, Z1XG,
Z2G, Z3G, Z4G, Z5G, ZCGF, ZCGR)
Z*- DirX.Angle and Z*-DirR.Angle (Z1G, 0° to 60° in 1° steps
Z1XG,
Z2G, Z3G, Z4G, Z5G, ZCGF, ZCGR)
ZGF-X.GrAngle1 and ZGR-X.GrAngle1 0° to 45°in 1° steps
ZGF-X.GrAngle2 and ZGR-X.GrAngle2 45° to 90° in 1° steps
Timer Setting
Time setting of Z1S, Z1XS, Z2S, Z3S, Z4S, 0.00 to 100.00s in 0.01steps
Z5S, Z1G, Z1XG, Z2G, Z3G, Z4G, Z5G
Overcurrent Element for Fail-safe
Overcurrent elements Z*_OCFS for 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating )
supervision distance measuring elements 0.10 to 25.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
(Z1S, Z1XS, Z2S, Z3S, Z4S, Z5S, Z1G, Z1XG,
Z2G, Z3G, Z4G and Z5G)
Command Protection Distance Scheme
Time for current reverse block 0.00 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Coordination time for BOP scheme 0 to 50ms in 1ms steps
delayed drop-off timer 0.00 to 1.00s in 0.01s steps
Command Protection Earth Fault Scheme
Time for delay trip 0.00 - 0.30s in 0.01s steps
Time for current reverse block 0.00 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Coordination time for BOP scheme 0 to 50ms in 1ms steps
delayed drop-off timer 0.00 to 1.00s in 0.01s steps
Power Swing Block
Detection zone (PSBGS) 2.50 to 75.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (1A rating)
Detection timer (TPSBS) 0.50 to 15.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (5A rating)
Load Encroachment
Minimum load resistance (LESR, LESL) 0.10 to 500.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (1A rating)
0.01 to 100.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (5A rating)
Maximum load angle (LESR-Angle, 5° to 75° in 1° steps
LESL-Angle)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 862 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Charging Current Compensation

Charging current compensation for distance 0.00 to 1.00A in 0.01A steps (1A Rating)
relay 0.00 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (5A Rating)
Rated voltage for charging current 100 to 120V in 1V steps
compensation
Minimum Operating Current
Current 0.08A fixed (1A relay)
0.4A fixed (5A relay)
Earth fault current 0.10 to 1.00A in 0.01A steps(1A rating)
0.50 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
Switch-on-to-fault Protection
Overcurrent threshold 0.02 to.5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Stub Protection
Overcurrent threshold 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Out-of-step Protection
Resistive reach (at Right side) 15.00 to 150.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (1A rating)
Resistive reach (at Left side) 5.00 to 50.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (1A rating)
Resistive reach (at Forward) 5.00 to 250.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (1A rating)
Resistive reach (at Backward) 1.0 to 50.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (1A rating)
0.200 to 10.000Ω in 0.001Ω steps(5A rating)
Detection time 0.01 to 1.00s in 0.01s steps
Breaker Failure (BF) Protection
Overcurrent element 0.1 to 2.0A in 0.1A steps (1A rating)
BF timer for retry-trip of failed breaker 50 to 500ms in 1ms steps
BF timer for related breaker trip 50 to 500ms in 1ms steps
Non-directional and Directional Overcurrent Protection
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Definite time overcurrent 0.02 to 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
threshold 0.10 to 250.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Inverse time overcurrent 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Direction characteristic Non Directional / Forward / Backward
Polarising voltage 1.0 V(fixed)
Characteristic angle 0 – 180 degs in 1 deg steps
Delay type DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI / UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI
/ IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 / Original
Drop-out/pick-up ratio 10 to 100% in 1% steps
DTL delay 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS 0.010 to 50.000 in 0.001 steps
Reset type Definite Time or Dependent Time
Reset definite delay 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS 0.010 to 50.000 in 0.001 steps
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 863 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Non-directional and Directional Earth Fault Protection

1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Definite time earth fault 0.02 to 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Inverse time earth fault 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Characteristic angle 0 to 180° in 1° steps (3I0 lags for −3V0)
Polarising voltage (3V0) 0.5 to 100.0V in 0.1V steps
Non-directional and Directional Negative Sequence Phase Overcurrent (OCN) Protection
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Definite time OCN threshold 0.02 to 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Inverse time OCN threshold 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Characteristic angle 0 to 180° in 1° steps (3I0 lags for −3V0)
Polarising voltage 0.5 to 25.0V in 0.1V steps
Phase Undercurrent Protection
Undercurrent 1st, 2nd threshold: 0.10 – 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.5 – 10.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)
Inrush Current Detection
Second harmonic detection 10 to 50% in 1% steps
Inrush current thresholds 0.10 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 864 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Thermal overload Protection

Thermal setting (THM = k.IFLC) 0.40 – 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Time constant (τ) 0.5 – 500.0mins in 0.1min steps
Thermal alarm OFF, 50% to 100% in 1% steps
Pre-load current setting 0.00 – 1.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Broken Conductor Detection
Broken conductor threshold 0.10 to 1.00 in 0.01 steps
Phase Overvoltage Protection
1st, 2nd overvoltage threshold 1.0 to 220.0V in 0.1V steps
Delay type DTL, IDMT, Original
Reset delay 0.0 to 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Phase to Phase Overvoltage Protection
1st, 2nd overvoltage threshold 1.0 to 220.0V in 0.1V steps
Phase Undervoltage Protection
1st, 2nd undervoltage threshold 5.0 to 130.0V in 0.1V steps
Undervoltage block threshold 5.0 to 20.0V in 0.1V steps
Undervoltage block delay 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 865 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Phase to Phase Undervoltage Protection

1st, 2nd undervoltage threshold 5.0 to 130.0V in 0.1V steps
Undervoltage block threshold 5.0 to 20.0V in 0.1V steps
Undervoltage block delay 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Autoreclose
Number of shots 1 to 5 shots
Dead time for single-phase autoreclose 0.01 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Dead time for three-phase autoreclose 0.01 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Multi-shot dead line time 0.01 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Reclaim time 0.0 to 600.0s in 0.1s steps
Pulse width of reclosing signal output 0.01 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Autoreclose reset time 0.01 to 310.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset time for developing fault 0.01 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Synchronism check
Synchronism check angle 0° to 75° in 1° steps
UV element 10 to 150V in 1V steps
OV element 10 to 150V in 1V steps
Busbar or line dead check 0 to 150V in 1V steps
Busbar or line live check 0 to 150V in 1V steps
Synchronism check time 0.01 to 100.00s in 0.01s steps
Voltage check time 0.01 to 100.00s in 0.01s steps
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 866 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Voltage Transformer Failure Supervision

Undervoltage element (phase-to-phase) 50 to 100V in 1V steps
Undervoltage element (phase-to-earth) 10 to 60V in 1V steps
Current change detection element 0.1A fixed (1A rating)
0.5A fixed (5A rating)
Residual voltage element 20V fixed
Residual current element Common use with earth fault detection element
Fault Locator
Line reactance and resistance setting 0.0 to 999.9 in 0.1 steps (1A rating)
0.00 to 199.99 in 0.01 steps (5A rating)
Line length 0.0 to 399.9km in 0.1km steps
Correction factor of impedance between lines 80 to 120% in 1% steps
Correction factor of impedance between in 80 to 120% in 1% steps
each phase
Accuracy 2.5km (up to 100km)
2.5% (up to 399.9km)
Minimum measuring cycles 2.5 cycles
Metering Function
AC current Accuracy  0.5% (at rating)
AC voltage Accuracy  0.5% (at rating)
Energy (Wh, varh) Accuracy  1.0% (at rating)
Power (P, Q) Accuracy  1.0% (at rating when power quantities being fed)
Frequency Accuracy  0.03%
Time Synchronisation
Protocol SNTP
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 867 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Cabling
The table below shows the recommended cables in the cross-section and rated-voltage for the
connection with the transformer module (VCT), the binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO), and
the power supply module (PWS). Rated-voltage required for the cable is 600Vac.
Table Cables for the connection with module
Origin of Required cable-cross-section
Required end-terminal
connection (AWG)
For Ring-lug type:
M3.5 ring-tongue terminal with insulation
BI, BO, BIO 1.5 mm squired or larger
and PWS (Either AWG14 or 15)
For Compression-plug type:
Not applicable
2.5 mm squired or larger
VCT M3.5 ring tongue terminal with insulation
(AWG13)
Protective 5.5 mm squired or larger
M5 ring tongue terminal with insulation
earth (AWG9)
Fuses
The table below shows the required fuse in the PWS. DO NOT change the fuse by the user.
The fuse is complies with IEC60127-2 Sheet 5.
Table Fuse specification in PWS
Specification Description
Rated current 3.15A
Rated voltage 500Vac & 400Vdc
Cutoff velocity Type “T”
Manufacture Littelfuse, Inc.
Type 04773.15XP
Safety and environment

The table below shows the safety category of the insulation resistance and the environment.
Table Safety and environment requirement
Safety requirement Definition in IEC Specification
Insulation resistance IEC 60255-27 More than 100 M-ohm at 500V d.c.
Protection bonding continuity test IEC 60255-27 Test current: 10 A a.c.
Resistance: less than 0.1 ohm
Protective bonding resistance test IEC 60255-27 Resistance: less than 0.2 ohm
Creepage distance and clearance IEC 60255-27 Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category III
Protective class IEC 60255-27 Class I
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 868 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Appendix 7 Manufacture setting
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 869 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
LED Setting for GRZ200
Standard2(all-around protection)
LED No
Logic Attribute
Remarks
Label Fixed Color Blink Fixed
1 IN SERVICE x Green - x Lit when IED is in service.
2 ERROR o Red - x Lit when failure is detected. User configurable only Logic condition.
4 TRIP Red Lit when trip command issued.
6 TEST Yellow Lit when test mode changed.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
PF-Key
GR RELAY (DISTANCE)
PF-Key
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Model
Fault Event Event Event
GRZ200 Metering ― ―
Record Record1 Record2 Record3
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 870 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Appendix 8 Rack mounting
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 871 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Table-1 shows mounting methods for 19” rack; the user can mount non-1/1 case (i.e., 3/4 case,
1/2 case, and 1/3 cases) using optional mounting kits (Table-2). The combined mounting is also
available for 1/3 and 1/2 cases. Follow the below steps when mounting:
Step1: Remove the flange(s) on the sides of the case.
Step2: Attach parts of the optional kit; e.g. joint plates, lock bracket, and screws.
Step3: Mount the case for the rack using screws‡
‡Screws are not included in the kit. Prepare the screws by yourself.
Table-1 Methods for rack mounting

Mounting methods Applicable sizes
Flush mount 1/3 case, 1/2 case, 3/4 case 1/1 case
Rack mount 1/1 case, 1/3 case†, 1/2 case†, 3/4 case†
†Use a mount kit.
Table-2 Required mounting kits (optional parts)

Parts
Mounting for the 19” rack Optional kit names References
codes
Simple mounting in a 1/3 case Joint kits for single 1/3 case EP−201 Figure-1
Combined mounting in double 1/3 cases Joint kits for two 1/3 cases EP−202 Figure-2
Combined mounting in triple 1/3 cases Joint kits for three 1/3 cases EP−203 Figure-3
Simple mounting in a 1/2 case Joint kits for single 1/2 case EP−204 Figure-4
Combined mounting in double 1/2 cases Joint kits for two 1/2 case EP−205 Figure-5
Simple mounting for a 3/4 case Joint kits for single 3/4 case EP−206
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 872 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
CP-131
Figure-1 Mounting a 1/3 case for the 19’’ rack
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 873 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
CP-132

Seal-caps for the holes
CP-CC1
Figure-2 Mounting double 1/3 cases for the rack
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 874 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
CP-CC1
Figure-3 Mounting triple 1/3 cases for the rack
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 875 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
CP-121
Figure-4 Mounting a 1/2 case for the rack
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 876 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)

CP-CC1
Figure-5 Mounting double 1/2 case for the rack
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 877 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Appendix 9 CT requirement
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 878 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
For the GRZ series relays, the requirement for minimum CT knee-point voltage is evaluated
in three cases:
(1) Stability for faults beyond the Zone1 reach-point:
Vk > k1 × If_z1_max × (Rct + R2)
(2) Stability for close-up faults in the reverse:
Vk> k2 × If_rev_max × (Rct + R2)
(3) Dependability of tripping for close-up faults in the forward:
Vk> k3 ×If_max × (Rct + R2)
where,
Vk: Knee point voltage.
If_z1_max: Maximum current of the fault located within the Zone1.
If_rev_max: Maximum current of the close-up fault located in the reverse.
If_max: Maximum current of the close-up fault located in the forward.
Rct: Resistance of CT.
R2: Burden including connecting leads.
k1, k2, k3: Transient dimensioning factor
(All values refer to the CT secondary side)
The minimum requirement for Vk is determined for each of the three cases and the
highest of the three results is used to dimension the CT. k1, k2 and k3 are chosen depending on
the primary system time constant as follows:
Transient dimensioning factor, k

a) Stability for faults b) Stability for c) Dependability of
Primary system
beyond the zone 1 close-up reverse tripping for close-up
time constant, Td
reach point (If_z1_max) faults (If_rev_max) forward faults
(ms)
(If_max)
k1 k2 k3
< 35 6 2 2
< 50 7 3 2
< 75 8 6 2
< 100 8 6 2
< 150 8 6 2
Notes:
1. Knee-point voltage, Vk, is defined according to IEC 60044-1 as the minimum
sinusoidal e.m.f. (r.m.s.) at rated power frequency when applied to the secondary
terminals of the transformer, all other terminals being open circuited, which when
increased by 10%, causes the r.m.s. exciting current to increase by no more than
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 879 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
50%.
2. In cases where CTs are specified as P-class protective current transformers
according to IEC 60044-1 (e.g. 5P10, 5P20 etc.), the knee point voltage can be
approximated as follows:
Vk 0.8 × n × In × (Rct + RVA)
where,
Vk: Knee point voltage.
In: Rated current at secondary CT.
Rct: Resistance of CT.
RVA: Rated burden.
n: Accuracy limiting factor of CT (e.g. 20 for 5P20)
(All values refer to the CT secondary side)
3. Remanent flux has not been considered. In cases where a high level of remanent
flux may be experienced, it may be necessary to include an additional margin when
dimensioning the CT.
4. The data provided is valid for 50Hz and 60Hz power systems.
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 880 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Appendix 10 Input dummy for relay application
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 881 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
The PLC connection points described in the main chapter are applicable to use when the user
wishes to create a custom logic by itself provided both the custom logic and the functions
provided by the manufacture are implemented in the same CPU. On the other hand, the
custom logic and the logic provided are not accommodated in the same CPU, or the custom
logic is required to connect with the BIO modules or others modules, the user cannot use the
PLC connection point directly. That is, exchanging data between CPUs and modules are not
achieved by the PLC function only. Therefore, dummy connection points are provided for the
user†; the user can program the PLC logic using the dummy connection points when
exchanging data is required between CPUs and modules.
†Note:The dummy connection points are available just for Software models 11 and 21 (at
Position “G&T” of Ordering number), where mark ‘X’ is checked in the table below.
Term ‘N.A’ represents that the input dummy is not required to use. Notice that the
model 21 is made with CPU1, CPM1, and CPX1 modules.
to ZS (Dummy FB: 715001) Models
PLC connection points PLC monitoring points Actual destinations

to 11 21
Element ID Element ID Data ID
LES BLOCK 8B0003EBBB OUT_LES BLOCK 8B00031BBB → LES BLOCK 430001 800008EBB2 – X
PSBS BLOCK 8C0003EBBC OUT_PSBS BLOCK 8C00031BBC → PSBS BLOCK 430001 800008EBB0 – X
PSBS F.RESET 8D0003EBBD OUT_PSBS F.RESET 8D00031BBD → PSBS F.RESET 430001 810008EBB1 – X
SOTF-Z1S BLOCK 8E0003EBBE OUT_SOTF-Z1S BLOCK 8E00031BBE → SOTF-Z1S BLOCK 430001 800001EBB3 – X
SOTF-Z1XS BLOCK 8F0003EBBF OUT_SOTF-Z1XS BLOCK 8F00031BBF → SOTF-Z1XS BLOCK 430001 810006EBB3 – X
SOTF-Z2S BLOCK 800003EBC0 OUT_SOTF-Z2S BLOCK 8000031BC0 → SOTF-Z2S BLOCK 430001 820002EBB3 – X
Z1STP_BLOCK 840003EBC4 OUT_Z1STP_BLOCK 8400031BC4 → Z1STP_BLOCK 430001 800001EBB0 – X
Z1S_ARCBLOCK 850003EBC5 OUT_Z1S_ARCBLOCK 8500031BC5 → Z1S_ARCBLOCK 430001 800001EBB2 – X
Z1S_INST_OP 860003EBC6 OUT_Z1S_INST_OP 8600031BC6 → Z1S_INST_OP 430001 800001EBB1 – X
Z1XSTP_BLOCK 870003EBC7 OUT_Z1XSTP_BLOCK 8700031BC7 → Z1XSTP_BLOCK 430001 810006EBB0 – X
Z1XS_ARCBLOCK 880003EBC8 OUT_Z1XS_ARCBLOCK 8800031BC8 → Z1XS_ARCBLOCK 430001 810006EBB2 – X
Z1XS_INST_OP 890003EBC9 OUT_Z1XS_INST_OP 8900031BC9 → Z1XS_INST_OP 430001 810006EBB1 – X
Z2STP_BLOCK 8A0003EBCA OUT_Z2STP_BLOCK 8A00031BCA → Z2STP_BLOCK 430001 820002EBB0 – X
Z2S_ARCBLOCK 8B0003EBCB OUT_Z2S_ARCBLOCK 8B00031BCB → Z2S_ARCBLOCK 430001 820002EBB2 – X
Z2S_INST_OP 8C0003EBCC OUT_Z2S_INST_OP 8C00031BCC → Z2S_INST_OP 430001 820002EBB1 – X
Z3STP_BLOCK 8D0003EBCD OUT_Z3STP_BLOCK 8D00031BCD → Z3STP_BLOCK 430001 830003EBB0 – X
Z3S_ARCBLOCK 8E0003EBCE OUT_Z3S_ARCBLOCK 8E00031BCE → Z3S_ARCBLOCK 430001 830003EBB2 – X
Z3S_INST_OP 8F0003EBCF OUT_Z3S_INST_OP 8F00031BCF → Z3S_INST_OP 430001 830003EBB1 – X
Z4STP_BLOCK 800003EBD0 OUT_Z4STP_BLOCK 8000031BD0 → Z4STP_BLOCK 430001 840004EBB0 – X
Z4S_ARCBLOCK 810003EBD1 OUT_Z4S_ARCBLOCK 8100031BD1 → Z4S_ARCBLOCK 430001 840004EBB2 – X
Z4S_INST_OP 820003EBD2 OUT_Z4S_INST_OP 8200031BD2 → Z4S_INST_OP 430001 840004EBB1 – X
Z5STP_BLOCK 830003EBD3 OUT_Z5STP_BLOCK 8300031BD3 → Z5STP_BLOCK 430001 850005EBB0 – X
Z5S_ARCBLOCK 840003EBD4 OUT_Z5S_ARCBLOCK 8400031BD4 → Z5S_ARCBLOCK 430001 850005EBB2 – X
Z5S_INST_OP 850003EBD5 OUT_Z5S_INST_OP 8500031BD5 → Z5S_INST_OP 430001 850005EBB1 – X
to ZG (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
LEG BLOCK 8A0002EBEA OUT_LEG BLOCK 8A00021BEA → LEG BLOCK 431001 800008EBB2 – X
PSBG BLOCK 8B0002EBEB OUT_PSBG BLOCK 8B00021BEB → PSBG BLOCK 431001 800008EBB0 – X
PSBG F.RESET 8C0002EBEC OUT_PSBG F.RESET 8C00021BEC → PSBG F.RESET 431001 810008EBB1 – X
SOTF-Z1G BLOCK 8D0002EBED OUT_SOTF-Z1G BLOCK 8D00021BED → SOTF-Z1G BLOCK 431001 800001EBB4 – X
SOTF-Z1XG BLOCK 8E0002EBEE OUT_SOTF-Z1XG BLOCK 8E00021BEE → SOTF-Z1XG BLOCK 431001 810006EBB4 – X
SOTF-Z2G BLOCK 8F0002EBEF OUT_SOTF-Z2G BLOCK 8F00021BEF → SOTF-Z2G BLOCK 431001 820002EBB4 – X
SOTF-Z3G BLOCK 800002EBF0 OUT_SOTF-Z3G BLOCK 8000021BF0 → SOTF-Z3G BLOCK 431001 830003EBB4 – X
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 882 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
to ZG (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
Z1GTP_BLOCK 830002EBF3 OUT_Z1GTP_BLOCK 8300021BF3 → Z1GTP_BLOCK 431001 800001EBB0 – X
Z1G_3PTP 840002EBF4 OUT_Z1G_3PTP 8400021BF4 → Z1G_3PTP 431001 800001EBB2 – X
Z1G_ARCBLOCK 850002EBF5 OUT_Z1G_ARCBLOCK 8500021BF5 → Z1G_ARCBLOCK 431001 800001EBB3 – X
Z1G_INST_OP 860002EBF6 OUT_Z1G_INST_OP 8600021BF6 → Z1G_INST_OP 431001 800001EBB1 – X
Z1XGTP_BLOCK 870002EBF7 OUT_Z1XGTP_BLOCK 8700021BF7 → Z1XGTP_BLOCK 431001 810006EBB0 – X
Z1XG_3PTP 880002EBF8 OUT_Z1XG_3PTP 8800021BF8 → Z1XG_3PTP 431001 810006EBB2 – X
Z1XG_ARCBLOCK 890002EBF9 OUT_Z1XG_ARCBLOCK 8900021BF9 → Z1XG_ARCBLOCK 431001 810006EBB3 – X
Z1XG_INST_OP 8A0002EBFA OUT_Z1XG_INST_OP 8A00021BFA → Z1XG_INST_OP 431001 810006EBB1 – X
Z2GTP_BLOCK 8B0002EBFB OUT_Z2GTP_BLOCK 8B00021BFB → Z2GTP_BLOCK 431001 820002EBB0 – X
Z2G_3PTP 8C0002EBFC OUT_Z2G_3PTP 8C00021BFC → Z2G_3PTP 431001 820002EBB2 – X
Z2G_ARCBLOCK 8D0002EBFD OUT_Z2G_ARCBLOCK 8D00021BFD → Z2G_ARCBLOCK 431001 820002EBB3 – X
Z2G_INST_OP 8E0002EBFE OUT_Z2G_INST_OP 8E00021BFE → Z2G_INST_OP 431001 820002EBB1 – X
Z3GTP_BLOCK 8F0002EBFF OUT_Z3GTP_BLOCK 8F00021BFF → Z3GTP_BLOCK 431001 830003EBB0 – X
Z3G_3PTP 800003EBB0 OUT_Z3G_3PTP 8000031BB0 → Z3G_3PTP 431001 830003EBB2 – X
Z3G_ARCBLOCK 810003EBB1 OUT_Z3G_ARCBLOCK 8100031BB1 → Z3G_ARCBLOCK 431001 830003EBB3 – X
Z3G_INST_OP 820003EBB2 OUT_Z3G_INST_OP 8200031BB2 → Z3G_INST_OP 431001 830003EBB1 – X
Z4GTP_BLOCK 830003EBB3 OUT_Z4GTP_BLOCK 8300031BB3 → Z4GTP_BLOCK 431001 840004EBB0 – X
Z4G_INST_OP 860003EBB6 OUT_Z4G_INST_OP 8600031BB6 → Z4G_INST_OP 431001 840004EBB1 – X
Z5G_INST_OP 8A0003EBBA OUT_Z5G_INST_OP 8A00031BBA → Z5G_INST_OP 431001 850005EBB1 – X
Z5GTP_BLOCK 870003EBB7 OUT_Z5GTP_BLOCK 8700031BB7 → Z5GTP_BLOCK 431001 850005EBB0 – X
to ZS ZG Common (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
Z1CNT_MPROT 890002EBE9 OUT_Z1CNT_MPROT 8900021BE9 → Z1CNT_MPROT 432001 800000EBB0 – X
to DEFCAR (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
DEF PHSEL-A 820002EBB2 OUT_DEF PHSEL-A 8200021BB2 → DEF PHSEL-A 437001 800000EBBB X X
DEF PHSEL-B 830002EBB3 OUT_DEF PHSEL-B 8300021BB3 → DEF PHSEL-B 437001 810000EBBC X X
DEF PHSEL-C 840002EBB4 OUT_DEF PHSEL-C 8400021BB4 → DEF PHSEL-C 437001 820000EBBD X X
DEF-ECHO BLOCK 850002EBB5 OUT_DEF-ECHO BLOCK 8500021BB5 → DEF-ECHO BLOCK 437001 800000EBBE X X
DEF-WKIT BLOCK 860002EBB6 OUT_DEF-WKIT BLOCK 8600021BB6 → DEF-WKIT BLOCK 437001 810000EBBF X X
DEFCAR-R1 870002EBB7 OUT_DEFCAR-R1 8700021BB7 → DEFCAR-R1 437001 800000EBB1 X X
DEFCAR-R1-2 880002EBB8 OUT_DEFCAR-R1-2 8800021BB8 → DEFCAR-R1-2 437001 800000EBB2 X X
DEFCAR-R2 890002EBB9 OUT_DEFCAR-R2 8900021BB9 → DEFCAR-R2 437001 810000EBB3 X X
DEFCAR-R2-2 8A0002EBBA OUT_DEFCAR-R2-2 8A00021BBA → DEFCAR-R2-2 437001 810000EBB4 X X
DEFCAR_3PTP 8B0002EBBB OUT_DEFCAR_3PTP 8B00021BBB → DEFCAR_3PTP 437001 800000EBC0 X X
DEFCAR_ARCBLOCK 8C0002EBBC OUT_DEFCAR_ARCBLOCK 8C00021BBC → DEFCAR_ARCBLOCK 437001 810000EBC1 X X
DEFCAR_BLOCK 8D0002EBBD OUT_DEFCAR_BLOCK 8D00021BBD → DEFCAR_BLOCK 437001 800000EBB0 X X
DEFCAR_F.BLOCK 8E0002EBBE OUT_DEFCAR_F.BLOCK 8E00021BBE → DEFCAR_F.BLOCK 437001 800000EBC2 X X
DEFCAR_F.PERMIT 8F0002EBBF OUT_DEFCAR_F.PERMIT 8F00021BBF → DEFCAR_F.PERMIT 437001 810000EBC3 X X
INT.DISCAR-R1-A 800002EBD0 OUT_INT.DEFCAR-R1-A 8000021BC0 → INT.DEFCAR-R1-A 437001 800000EBB5 X X
INT.DISCAR-R1-B 810002EBD2 OUT_INT.DEFCAR-R1-B 8100021BC1 → INT.DEFCAR-R1-B 437001 810000EBB6 X X
INT.DISCAR-R1-C 820002EBD3 OUT_INT.DEFCAR-R1-C 8200021BC2 → INT.DEFCAR-R1-C 437001 820000EBB7 X X
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 883 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
to DEFCAR (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
INT.DISCAR-R2-A 830002EBD1 OUT_INT.DEFCAR-R2-A 8300021BC3 → INT.DEFCAR-R2-A 437001 840000EBB8 X X
INT.DISCAR-R2-B 840002EBD2 OUT_INT.DEFCAR-R2-B 8400021BC4 → INT.DEFCAR-R2-B 437001 850000EBB9 X X
INT.DISCAR-R2-C 850002EBD3 OUT_INT.DEFCAR-R2-C 8500021BC5 → INT.DEFCAR-R2-C 437001 860000EBBA X X
to OC (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
OC1_BLOCK 860003EBF6 OUT_OC1_BLOCK 8600031BF6 → OC1_BLOCK 440001 800001EBB0 X X
OC1_INST_OP 870003EBF7 OUT_OC1_INST_OP 8700031BF7 → OC1_INST_OP 440001 800001EBB4 X X
OC2_BLOCK 880003EBF8 OUT_OC2_BLOCK 8800031BF8 → OC2_BLOCK 440001 810002EBB1 X X
OC2_INST_OP 890003EBF9 OUT_OC2_INST_OP 8900031BF9 → OC2_INST_OP 440001 810002EBB5 X X
OC3_BLOCK 8A0003EBFA OUT_OC3_BLOCK 8A00031BFA → OC3_BLOCK 440001 820003EBB2 X X
OC3_INST_OP 8B0003EBFB OUT_OC3_INST_OP 8B00031BFB → OC3_INST_OP 440001 820003EBB6 X X
OC4_BLOCK 8C0003EBFC OUT_OC4_BLOCK 8C00031BFC → OC4_BLOCK 440001 830004EBB3 X X
OC4_INST_OP 8D0003EBFD OUT_OC4_INST_OP 8D00031BFD → OC4_INST_OP 440001 830004EBB7 X X
to EF (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
EF1_BLOCK 860003EBD6 OUT_EF1_BLOCK 8600031BD6 → EF1_BLOCK 441001 800001EBB0 X X
EF1_INST_OP 870003EBD7 OUT_EF1_INST_OP 8700031BD7 → EF1_INST_OP 441001 800001EBB1 X X
EF2_BLOCK 880003EBD8 OUT_EF2_BLOCK 8800031BD8 → EF2_BLOCK 441001 810002EBB0 X X
EF2_INST_OP 890003EBD9 OUT_EF2_INST_OP 8900031BD9 → EF2_INST_OP 441001 810002EBB1 X X
EF3_BLOCK 8A0003EBDA OUT_EF3_BLOCK 8A00031BDA → EF3_BLOCK 441001 820003EBB0 X X
EF3_INST_OP 8B0003EBDB OUT_EF3_INST_OP 8B00031BDB → EF3_INST_OP 441001 820003EBB1 X X
EF4_BLOCK 8C0003EBDC OUT_EF4_BLOCK 8C00031BDC → EF4_BLOCK 441001 830004EBB0 X X
EF4_INST_OP 8D0003EBDD OUT_EF4_INST_OP 8D00031BDD → EF4_INST_OP 441001 830004EBB1 X X
to OCN (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
OCN1_BLOCK 8E0003EBFE OUT_OCN1_BLOCK 8E00031BFE → OCN1_BLOCK 443001 800001EBB0 X X
OCN1_INST_OP 8F0003EBFF OUT_OCN1_INST_OP 8F00031BFF → OCN1_INST_OP 443001 800001EBB1 X X
OCN2_BLOCK 800004EBB0 OUT_OCN2_BLOCK 8000041BB0 → OCN2_BLOCK 443001 810002EBB0 X X
OCN2_INST_OP 810004EBB1 OUT_OCN2_INST_OP 8100041BB1 → OCN2_INST_OP 443001 810002EBB1 X X
to THM (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
THMA_BLOCK 8D0004EBBD OUT_THMA_BLOCK 8D00041BBD → THMA_BLOCK 451001 800001EBB0 X X
THMT_BLOCK 8E0004EBBE OUT_THMT_BLOCK 8E00041BBE → THMT_BLOCK 451001 810002EBB0 X X
to BCD (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
BCD_BLOCK 800002EBB0 OUT_BCD_BLOCK 8000021BB0 → BCD_BLOCK 452001 800000EBB0 X X
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 884 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
to CBF (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
CBF1-RE_INST 890002EBD9 OUT_CBF1-RE_INST 8900021BD9 → CBF1-RE_INST 453001 810001EBB5 X X
CBF1-TP_INST 8A0002EBDA OUT_CBF1-TP_INST 8A00021BDA → CBF1-TP_INST 453001 820001EBB6 X X
CBF1_BLOCK 8B0002EBDB OUT_CBF1_BLOCK 8B00021BDB → CBF1_BLOCK 453001 800001EBB4 X X
CBF2-RE_INST 8C0002EBDC OUT_CBF2-RE_INST 8C00021BDC → CBF2-RE_INST 453001 810002EBB5 X X
CBF2-TP_INST 8D0002EBDD OUT_CBF2-TP_INST 8D00021BDD → CBF2-TP_INST 453001 820002EBB6 X X
CBF2_BLOCK 8E0002EBDE OUT_CBF2_BLOCK 8E00021BDE → CBF2_BLOCK 453001 800002EBB4 X X
EXT.CBF1_START 8F0002EBDF OUT_EXT.CBF1_START 8F00021BDF → EXT.CBF1_START 453001 830001EBB3 X X
EXT.CBF1_START-A 800002EBE0 OUT_EXT.CBF1_START-A 8000021BE0 → EXT.CBF1_START-A 453001 800001EBB0 X X
EXT.CBF1_START-B 810002EBE1 OUT_EXT.CBF1_START-B 8100021BE1 → EXT.CBF1_START-B 453001 810001EBB1 X X
EXT.CBF1_START-C 820002EBE2 OUT_EXT.CBF1_START-C 8200021BE2 → EXT.CBF1_START-C 453001 820001EBB2 X X
EXT.CBF2_START 830002EBE3 OUT_EXT.CBF2_START 8300021BE3 → EXT.CBF2_START 453001 830002EBB3 X X
EXT.CBF2_START-A 840002EBE4 OUT_EXT.CBF2_START-A 8400021BE4 → EXT.CBF2_START-A 453001 800002EBB0 X X
EXT.CBF2_START-B 850002EBE5 OUT_EXT.CBF2_START-B 8500021BE5 → EXT.CBF2_START-B 453001 810002EBB1 X X
EXT.CBF2_START-C 860002EBE6 OUT_EXT.CBF2_START-C 8600021BE6 → EXT.CBF2_START-C 453001 820002EBB2 X X
to SOTF (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
OC-RTP.EN 8A0004EBBA OUT_OC-RTP.EN 8A00041BBA → OC-RTP.EN 454001 800000EBB1 X X
SOTFOC_BLOCK 8B0004EBBB OUT_SOTFOC_BLOCK 8B00041BBB → SOTFOC_BLOCK 454001 800000EBB0 X X
ADD.SOFT_EN 8C0004EBCC OUT_ADD.SOFT_EN 8C00041BCC → ADD.SOFT_EN 454001 800000EBB2 X X
to OV (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
OV1_BLOCK 860004EBB6 OUT_OV1_BLOCK 8600041BB6 → OV1_BLOCK 460001 800001EBB0 X X
OV2_BLOCK 870004EBB7 OUT_OV2_BLOCK 8700041BB7 → OV2_BLOCK 460001 810002EBB0 X X
to OVS (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
OVS1_BLOCK 880004EBB8 OUT_OVS1_BLOCK 8800041BB8 → OVS1_BLOCK 461001 800001EBB0 X X
OVS2_BLOCK 890004EBB9 OUT_OVS2_BLOCK 8900041BB9 → OVS2_BLOCK 461001 810002EBB0 X X
to UV (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
CB_APH_OPEN 8F0004EBBF OUT_CB_APH_OPEN 8F00041BBF → CB_APH_OPEN 470001 800000EBB0 X X
CB_BPH_OPEN 800004EBC0 OUT_CB_BPH_OPEN 8000041BC0 → CB_BPH_OPEN 470001 810000EBB1 X X
CB_CPH_OPEN 810004EBC1 OUT_CB_CPH_OPEN 8100041BC1 → CB_CPH_OPEN 470001 820000EBB2 X X
UV1_BLOCK 820004EBC2 OUT_UV1_BLOCK 8200041BC2 → UV1_BLOCK 470001 800001EBB0 X X
UV2_BLOCK 830004EBC3 OUT_UV2_BLOCK 8300041BC3 → UV2_BLOCK 470001 810002EBB0 X X
to UVS (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
CB_APH_OPEN 840004EBC4 OUT_CB_APH_OPEN 8400041BC4 → CB_APH_OPEN 471001 800000EBB0 X X
CB_BPH_OPEN 850004EBC5 OUT_CB_BPH_OPEN 8500041BC5 → CB_BPH_OPEN 471001 810000EBB1 X X
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 885 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
to UVS (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
CB_CPH_OPEN 860004EBC6 OUT_CB_CPH_OPEN 8600041BC6 → CB_CPH_OPEN 471001 820000EBB2 X X
UVS1_BLOCK 870004EBC7 OUT_UVS1_BLOCK 8700041BC7 → UVS1_BLOCK 471001 800001EBB0 X X
UVS2_BLOCK 880004EBC8 OUT_UVS2_BLOCK 8800041BC8 → UVS2_BLOCK 471001 810002EBB0 X X
to VTF (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
VTF BLOCK 8A0004EBCA OUT_VTF BLOCK 8A00041BCA → VTF BLOCK 490001 800000EBB0 X X
EXTERNAL VTF 890004EBC9 OUT_EXTERNAL VTF 8900041BC9 → EXTERNAL VTF 490001 810000EBB1 X X
to CTF (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
CTF BLOCK 870002EBE7 OUT_CTF BLOCK 8700021BE7 → CTF BLOCK 491001 800000EBB0 X X
EXTERNAL CTF 880002EBE8 OUT_EXTERNAL CTF 8800021BE8 → EXTERNAL CTF 491001 810000EBB1 X X
to ARC (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
ARC NO ACT 800001EBB0 OUT_ARC NO ACT 8000011BB0 → ARC NO ACT 4A6001 800000EBB3 X X
ARC1-S2 COND 810001EBB1 OUT_ARC1-S2 COND 8100011BB1 → ARC1-S2 COND 4A6001 810001EBC9 X X
ARC1-S3 COND 820001EBB2 OUT_ARC1-S3 COND 8200011BB2 → ARC1-S3 COND 4A6001 820001EBCA X X
ARC1-S4 COND 830001EBB3 OUT_ARC1-S4 COND 8300011BB3 → ARC1-S4 COND 4A6001 830001EBCB X X
ARC1-S5 COND 840001EBB4 OUT_ARC1-S5 COND 8400011BB4 → ARC1-S5 COND 4A6001 840001EBCC X X
ARC1_BLOCK 850001EBB5 OUT_ARC1_BLOCK 8500011BB5 → ARC1_BLOCK 4A6001 800001EBCF X X
ARC1_MODE-FT 860001EBB6 OUT_ARC1_MODE-FT 8600011BB6 → ARC1_MODE-FT 4A6001 810001EBB1 X X
ARC1_MODE-MPAR 870001EBB7 OUT_ARC1_MODE-MPAR 8700011BB7 → ARC1_MODE-MPAR 4A6001 850001EBB5 X X
ARC1_MODE-OFF 880001EBB8 OUT_ARC1_MODE-OFF 8800011BB8 → ARC1_MODE-OFF 4A6001 800001EBB0 X X
ARC1_MODE-ORG 890001EBB9 OUT_ARC1_MODE-ORG 8900011BB9 → ARC1_MODE-ORG 4A6001 860001EBB6 X X
ARC1_MODE-S&T 8A0001EBBA OUT_ARC1_MODE-S&T 8A00011BBA → ARC1_MODE-S&T 4A6001 840001EBB4 X X
ARC1_MODE-SPAR 8B0001EBBB OUT_ARC1_MODE-SPAR 8B00011BBB → ARC1_MODE-SPAR 4A6001 820001EBB2 X X
ARC1_MODE-TPAR 8C0001EBBC OUT_ARC1_MODE-TPAR 8C00011BBC → ARC1_MODE-TPAR 4A6001 830001EBB3 X X
ARC2_BLOCK 8D0001EBBD OUT_ARC2_BLOCK 8D00011BBD → ARC2_BLOCK 4A6001 810002EBB7 X X
ARC2_MODE-FT 8E0001EBBE OUT_ARC2_MODE-FT 8E00011BBE → ARC2_MODE-FT 4A6001 810002EBB1 X X
ARC2_MODE-MPAR 8F0001EBBF OUT_ARC2_MODE-MPAR 8F00011BBF → ARC2_MODE-MPAR 4A6001 850002EBB5 X X
ARC2_MODE-OFF 800001EBC0 OUT_ARC2_MODE-OFF 8000011BC0 → ARC2_MODE-OFF 4A6001 800002EBB0 X X
ARC2_MODE-ORG 810001EBC1 OUT_ARC2_MODE-ORG 8100011BC1 → ARC2_MODE-ORG 4A6001 860002EBB6 X X
ARC2_MODE-S&T 820001EBC2 OUT_ARC2_MODE-S&T 8200011BC2 → ARC2_MODE-S&T 4A6001 840002EBB4 X X
ARC2_MODE-SPAR 830001EBC3 OUT_ARC2_MODE-SPAR 8300011BC3 → ARC2_MODE-SPAR 4A6001 820002EBB2 X X
ARC2_MODE-TPAR 840001EBC4 OUT_ARC2_MODE-TPAR 8400011BC4 → ARC2_MODE-TPAR 4A6001 830002EBB3 X X
ARC_BLOCK 850001EBC5 OUT_ARC_BLOCK 8500011BC5 → ARC_BLOCK 4A6001 820000EBB4 X X
CB1 F.BRIDGE 860001EBC6 OUT_CB1 F.BRIDGE 8600011BC6 → CB1 F.BRIDGE 4A6001 800001EBB8 X X
CB1-ARC READY 870001EBC7 OUT_CB1-ARC READY 8700011BC7 → CB1-ARC READY 4A6001 800001EBB7 X X
CB1_MANUAL_CLOSE 880001EBC8 OUT_CB1_MANUAL_CLOSE 8800011BC8 → CB1_MANUAL_CLOSE 4A6001 800001EBCD X X
CB2 F.BRIDGE 890001EBC9 OUT_CB2 F.BRIDGE 8900011BC9 → CB2 F.BRIDGE 4A6001 810002EBB9 X X
CB2-ARC READY 8A0001EBCA OUT_CB2-ARC READY 8A00011BCA → CB2-ARC READY 4A6001 810002EBB8 X X
CB2_MANUAL_CLOSE 8B0001EBCB OUT_CB2_MANUAL_CLOSE 8B00011BCB → CB2_MANUAL_CLOSE 4A6001 810002EBCA X X
EXT.ARC_START-A 8C0001EBCC OUT_EXT.ARC_START-A 8C00011BCC → EXT.ARC_START-A 4A6001 800000EBB0 X X
EXT.ARC_START-B 8D0001EBCD OUT_EXT.ARC_START-B 8D00011BCD → EXT.ARC_START-B 4A6001 810000EBB1 X X
EXT.ARC_START-C 8E0001EBCE OUT_EXT.ARC_START-C 8E00011BCE → EXT.ARC_START-C 4A6001 820000EBB2 X X
F.CB1_94TT 8F0001EBCF OUT_F.CB1_94TT 8F00011BCF → F.CB1_94TT 4A6001 800001EBCE X X
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 886 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
to ARC (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
F.CB2_94TT 800001EBD0 OUT_F.CB2_94TT 8000011BD0 → F.CB2_94TT 4A6001 810002EBCB X X
MPAR1_COND 810001EBD1 OUT_MPAR1_COND 8100011BD1 → MPAR1_COND 4A6001 830001EBC6 X X
MPAR1_START 820001EBD2 OUT_MPAR1_START 8200011BD2 → MPAR1_START 4A6001 830001EBC5 X X
MPAR1_SUB_COND 830001EBD3 OUT_MPAR1_SUB_COND 8300011BD3 → MPAR1_SUB_COND 4A6001 830001EBC8 X X
MPAR1_SUB_START 840001EBD4 OUT_MPAR1_SUB_START 8400011BD4 → MPAR1_SUB_START 4A6001 830001EBC7 X X
MPAR2_COND 850001EBD5 OUT_MPAR2_COND 8500011BD5 → MPAR2_COND 4A6001 830002EBC7 X X
MPAR2_START 860001EBD6 OUT_MPAR2_START 8600011BD6 → MPAR2_START 4A6001 830002EBC6 X X
MPAR2_SUB_COND 870001EBD7 OUT_MPAR2_SUB_COND 8700011BD7 → MPAR2_SUB_COND 4A6001 830002EBC9 X X
MPAR2_SUB_START 880001EBD8 OUT_MPAR2_SUB_START 8800011BD8 → MPAR2_SUB_START 4A6001 830002EBC8 X X
ORGAR1_COND 890001EBD9 OUT_ORGAR1_COND 8900011BD9 → ORGAR1_COND 4A6001 820001EBC2 X X
ORGAR1_START 8A0001EBDA OUT_ORGAR1_START 8A00011BDA → ORGAR1_START 4A6001 820001EBC1 X X
ORGAR1_SUB_COND 8B0001EBDB OUT_ORGAR1_SUB_COND 8B00011BDB → ORGAR1_SUB_COND 4A6001 820001EBC4 X X
ORGAR1_SUB_START 8C0001EBDC OUT_ORGAR1_SUB_START 8C00011BDC → ORGAR1_SUB_START 4A6001 820001EBC3 X X
ORGAR2_COND 8D0001EBDD OUT_ORGAR2_COND 8D00011BDD → ORGAR2_COND 4A6001 820002EBC3 X X
ORGAR2_START 8E0001EBDE OUT_ORGAR2_START 8E00011BDE → ORGAR2_START 4A6001 820002EBC2 X X
ORGAR2_SUB_COND 8F0001EBDF OUT_ORGAR2_SUB_COND 8F00011BDF → ORGAR2_SUB_COND 4A6001 820002EBC5 X X
ORGAR2_SUB_START 800001EBE0 OUT_ORGAR2_SUB_START 8000011BE0 → ORGAR2_SUB_START 4A6001 820002EBC4 X X
P.INTCONN-A_LR1 810001EBE1 OUT_P.INTCONN-A_LR1 8100011BE1 → P.INTCONN-A_LR1 4A6001 800000EBB8 X X
P.INTCONN-A_LR2 820001EBE2 OUT_P.INTCONN-A_LR2 8200011BE2 → P.INTCONN-A_LR2 4A6001 800000EBBB X X
P.INTCONN-A_LR3 830001EBE3 OUT_P.INTCONN-A_LR3 8300011BE3 → P.INTCONN-A_LR3 4A6001 800000EBBE X X
P.INTCONN-A_LR4 840001EBE4 OUT_P.INTCONN-A_LR4 8400011BE4 → P.INTCONN-A_LR4 4A6001 800000EBC1 X X
P.INTCONN-B_LR1 850001EBE5 OUT_P.INTCONN-B_LR1 8500011BE5 → P.INTCONN-B_LR1 4A6001 810000EBB9 X X
P.INTCONN-B_LR2 860001EBE6 OUT_P.INTCONN-B_LR2 8600011BE6 → P.INTCONN-B_LR2 4A6001 810000EBBC X X
P.INTCONN-B_LR3 870001EBE7 OUT_P.INTCONN-B_LR3 8700011BE7 → P.INTCONN-B_LR3 4A6001 810000EBBF X X
P.INTCONN-B_LR4 880001EBE8 OUT_P.INTCONN-B_LR4 8800011BE8 → P.INTCONN-B_LR4 4A6001 810000EBC2 X X
P.INTCONN-C_LR1 890001EBE9 OUT_P.INTCONN-C_LR1 8900011BE9 → P.INTCONN-C_LR1 4A6001 820000EBBA X X
P.INTCONN-C_LR2 8A0001EBEA OUT_P.INTCONN-C_LR2 8A00011BEA → P.INTCONN-C_LR2 4A6001 820000EBBD X X
P.INTCONN-C_LR3 8B0001EBEB OUT_P.INTCONN-C_LR3 8B00011BEB → P.INTCONN-C_LR3 4A6001 820000EBC0 X X
P.INTCONN-C_LR4 8C0001EBEC OUT_P.INTCONN-C_LR4 8C00011BEC → P.INTCONN-C_LR4 4A6001 820000EBC3 X X
RYOP-A 8D0001EBED OUT_RYOP-A 8D00011BED → RYOP-A 4A6001 800000EBB5 X X
RYOP-B 8E0001EBEE OUT_RYOP-B 8E00011BEE → RYOP-B 4A6001 810000EBB6 X X
RYOP-C 8F0001EBEF OUT_RYOP-C 8F00011BEF → RYOP-C 4A6001 820000EBB7 X X
SPAR1_COND 800001EBF0 OUT_SPAR1_COND 8000011BF0 → SPAR1_COND 4A6001 800001EBBA X X
SPAR1_START 810001EBF1 OUT_SPAR1_START 8100011BF1 → SPAR1_START 4A6001 800001EBB9 X X
SPAR1_SUB_COND 820001EBF2 OUT_SPAR1_SUB_COND 8200011BF2 → SPAR1_SUB_COND 4A6001 800001EBBC X X
SPAR1_SUB_START 830001EBF3 OUT_SPAR1_SUB_START 8300011BF3 → SPAR1_SUB_START 4A6001 800001EBBB X X
SPAR2_COND 840001EBF4 OUT_SPAR2_COND 8400011BF4 → SPAR2_COND 4A6001 800002EBBB X X
SPAR2_START 850001EBF5 OUT_SPAR2_START 8500011BF5 → SPAR2_START 4A6001 800002EBBA X X
SPAR2_SUB_COND 860001EBF6 OUT_SPAR2_SUB_COND 8600011BF6 → SPAR2_SUB_COND 4A6001 800002EBBD X X
SPAR2_SUB_START 870001EBF7 OUT_SPAR2_SUB_START 8700011BF7 → SPAR2_SUB_START 4A6001 800002EBBC X X
TPAR1_COND 880001EBF8 OUT_TPAR1_COND 8800011BF8 → TPAR1_COND 4A6001 810001EBBE X X
TPAR1_START 890001EBF9 OUT_TPAR1_START 8900011BF9 → TPAR1_START 4A6001 810001EBBD X X
TPAR1_SUB_COND 8A0001EBFA OUT_TPAR1_SUB_COND 8A00011BFA → TPAR1_SUB_COND 4A6001 810001EBC0 X X
TPAR1_SUB_START 8B0001EBFB OUT_TPAR1_SUB_START 8B00011BFB → TPAR1_SUB_START 4A6001 810001EBBF X X
TPAR2_COND 8C0001EBFC OUT_TPAR2_COND 8C00011BFC → TPAR2_COND 4A6001 810002EBBF X X
TPAR2_START 8D0001EBFD OUT_TPAR2_START 8D00011BFD → TPAR2_START 4A6001 810002EBBE X X
TPAR2_SUB_COND 8E0001EBFE OUT_TPAR2_SUB_COND 8E00011BFE → TPAR2_SUB_COND 4A6001 810002EBC1 X X
TPAR2_SUB_START 8F0001EBFF OUT_TPAR2_SUB_START 8F00011BFF → TPAR2_SUB_START 4A6001 810002EBC0 X X
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 887 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
to HOST (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
CH1_CH_CHG 3100100 OUT_CH1_CH_CHG 3100101001 → CH1_CH_CHG 341001 310000E001 X X
CH2_CH_CHG 3100110 OUT_CH2_CH_CHG 3100111001 → CH2_CH_CHG 341001 310001E001 X X
to OSTZ (Dummy FB: 715001) Models

to 11 21
OSTZ_BLOCK 8B0004EBCB OUT_OSTZ_BLOCK 8B00041BCB → OSTZ_BLOCK 478001 800000EBB0 X X
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 888 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Appendix 11 Notes for the dielectric voltage test
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 889 -
6F2S1905 (0.80)
Dielectric voltage testing shall be carried out after reading the below notices carefully.
Cable connections
Figure-11.A illustrates external connection around the power supply module (PWS). During
dielectric voltage testing, two short-wires attached on PSW shall be carefully handled; follow the
below instructions (1) and (2).
(1) Short-wire between terminal screw No.35 and No.37

 Remove this short-wire for undertaking the dielectric voltage test. If this short-wire is not
removed, the IED will be damaged.
 After the test, reconnect this short-wire to the original positons.
(2) Short-wire between terminal screw No.38 and FG

 Never remove this short wire. If this short-wire is removed, the IED will be damaged.
[IO#*] [IO#*] [VCT#*]

T* T* T* TC*
PWS T*
BIO BIO
2
4
3
FAIL1
1
8
10
9
FAIL2
7
(1)
(+) 29
30
DC/DC
(-) 31
32
35
36
37
y
38
(2)
FG
Figure-11.A Short-wires shall be handled with Cautions
GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

- 890 -
Revision-up Records
Rev. and Section Approved Checked by Prepared
Change place and contents
Date (page) by by
-- -- Tentative edition T. Kaneko
-- --
Feb. 17 2014 Jun. 12
0.00 -- First issue M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
Jun. 12 2014 Jun. 12 Jun. 12 Sep. 11
0.1 Chap. 3 LED setting added M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
Oct. 1 2014 Oct. 1 Oct. 1 Sep. 30
0.11 Appendix FB table revised M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
Oct. 1 2014 Oct. 1 Oct. 1 Sep. 30
0.12 Chap. 3 Terminal names on VCT revised. M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
Oct. 15 2014 Oct. 15 Oct. 15 Oct. 14
Chap. 3 Half size case added; Comm. modules added.
0.2 M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
Appendix External connection figs added
Oct. 20 2014 Oct. 20 Oct. 20 Oct. 19
CT requirement added
Chap. 2.1.3 PSB reset timer added in ZS and ZG
0.3 Chap. 2.3.1 TDEFC timer added in DEFCAR M. Okai X. Tang T. Kaneko
Oct. 31 2014 Chap. 2.11.1 PLC Point ADD.SOTF_EN added in SOTF Oct. 31 Oct. 30 Oct. 29
Chap. 2.24.1 Timer TCBLOSPH added in PORT_COMMON
0.31 Chap. 2.3.4 Examples of TDEFC timer added in DEFCAR M. Okai X. Tang T. Kaneko
Nov. 6 2014 Nov.6 Nov. 6 Nov. 6
Chap. 2.1 Description in Offset ZS revised
Chap. 2.5 Description revised in OC
0.4 Chap. 2.6 Description revised in EF A. Morimoto K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Jan. 30 2015 Chap. 2.7 Description revised in OCN Jan. 30 Jan. 30 Jan. 27
Chap. 12.5 Signal control function revised
Appendix Input dummy added
0.41 Chap. 2.24 Description revised entirely in VTF M. Okai K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Feb. 4, 2015 Chap. 2.25 Description revised entirely in CTF Feb.6 Feb. 4 Feb. 2
0.42 Chap. 3 Added clock and function key features K. Kobayashi T. Ohnari T. Kaneko
Mar. 6, 2015 Mar. 6 Mar. 5 Feb. 2
0.43 Chap. 2.8 Changed the time units to “minutes” F. Kawano M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Mar. 11,2015 Mar. 10 Mar. 10 Mar. 10
Chap. 2.5 Revised description of blinders in ZS/ZG H. Amoh A. Morimoto T. Kaneko
Mar. 10 Mar. 10 Mar. 9
Chap. 2.12 Erroneous reset settings revised in OV
Chap. 2.13 Erroneous reset settings revised in OVS M. Okai N. Nagano T. Kaneko
Chap. 2.14 Erroneous reset settings revised in UV Mar.26 Mar. 26 Mar. 26
Chap. 2.15 Erroneous reset settings revised in UVS
Chap. 2.13 Changed the time units to “minutes” in THM F. Kawano M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Mar. 10 Mar. 10 Mar. 10
Chap. 2.17 Corrected a ramp line in ICD characteristic M. Okai M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
0.5
Apr.20 Apr. 20 Apr. 20
May 25, 2015
Chap. 2.19 Typos corrected in VTF M. Okai M. Mizunoue T. Kaneko
Apr.20 Apr. 16 Apr. 16
Chap. 3 Group setting added M. Okai N. Nagano T. Kaneko
May.18 May. 18 May. 18
Chap. 4 Corrected channel allocations on the VCT T.
F. Kawano T. Kaneko
Sugamoto
Mar. 10 Mar. 9
Mar. 10
Appendix Tables of BIO codes modified F. Kawano N. Yokoya T. Kaneko
Apr. 16 Apr. 16 Apr. 16
0.6 Chap. 2 Deleted DTT function (ex-section 2.4) M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
Jun 30, 2015 Added OVG and FRQ functions (sections 2.13, 2.16) Jun.30 Jun.30 Jun 21
Date (page) by by
Chap. 2.25 Erroneous Data IDs corrected in TRC
K. Ohashi K. Ohashi T. Kaneko
Jun 16 Jun 16 Jun 16
Chap. 3 Added another figure for group setting function F. Kawano M. Okai T. Kaneko
Jun 30 Jun.30 Jun. 20
Chap. 5.5 Added a notice for recording w.r.t clock setting F. Kawano F. Kawano T. Kaneko
Jun 23 Jun 23 Jun. 20
Chap. 1.1 Revised the discussion for protection relays M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
Aug 17 Aug 17 Aug 17
Chap. 2.1 Added PSB characteristic in Quad characteristic M. Okai A. Morimoto T. Kaneko
Added the meaning of setting CovCoeff Aug.17 Aug 17 Aug 17
Chap. 2.1.2 Revised the features of Z1 offset action H. Amoh A. Morimotoi T. Kaneko
Aug 1 Aug 1 July 30
Chap. 2.5 Added the OC minimum sensing voltage for
polarizing M. Okai K. Ohashi T. Kaneko
Added the rating current depends on the VCT setting Aug.1 Aug 1 July 30
Chap. 2.6, 2.7 Added the rating current depends on the VCT setting M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
in EF and OCN Aug. 1 Aug. 1 July 30
0.61 Chap. 2.17 Added the setting notice about threshold settings for S. Gondou S. Gondou T. Kaneko
Aug 26, 2015 blocking the operation of FRQ Aug 20 Aug 20 Aug. 20
Chap. 2.23 Corrected the logic for trigger signals in the FL M. Okai A. Fuku T. Kaneko
Added the trigger for data saving and calculations Aug.20 Aug.20 Aug 20
Chap. 2.25 Modified the erroneous voltage checking condition in M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
zone D2 in Table 2.25 of VCHK Aug.7 Aug.7 Aug 7
Chap. 6.3 Modified the PLC driver descriptions M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
Aug.24 Aug.24 Aug 24
Chap. 12.6 Added the instruction for replacing modules M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
Appendix 8 Combined the replacing methods with Chap. 12.6 Aug. 1 Aug. 1 July 20
Appendix 5 Tables of BIO codes modified M. Okai N. Yokoya T. Kaneko
Aug 26 Aug 26 Aug. 26
Appendix 10 Revised the PLC driver tables M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
Aug. 24 Aug. 24 Aug 24
0.62 Chap. 2.27 Revised the PROT_COM and unified into one section. M. Okai N. Nagano T. Kaneko
Sep 4, 2015 Sep 4 Sep 4 Sep 4
Chap. 2.1 Typos revised in Fig 2.1-20,21,22,25,26,27,28,29, and K. Kobayashi M. Oohashi T. Kaneko
31. Oct. 23 Oct. 23 Oct. 22
Appendix 4 Added PIXIT and TICS T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
Oct 23 Oct 23 Oct. 22
Chap. 4.5 Revised the operation meanings at the FAIL1 and M. Okai T. Ohnari T. Kaneko
Fail2 contacts; revised the operation conditions Oct. 8 Oct. 5 Sep. 25
Chap. 4.5 Added the notice not to guarantee the operation on T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
Appendix 6 the AC power source Nov. 4 Nov. 4 Nov. 4
Chap. 9 Revised whole contents T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
0.63 Oct 23 Oct 23 Oct. 17
Nov 4, 2015 Appendix 1 Organized signal lists T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
Oct. 30 Oct. 30 Oct. 30
Sep 11 Sep 10 Sep. 9
Appendix 5 Revised typos about the VCT in Ordering T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
Oct 2 Oct 2 Oct. 2
Appendix 6 Deleted the descriptions about the function standard T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
in the IEC Oct 30 Oct 30 Oct. 2
Appendix 6 Modified at contact spec. of BO circuits as to Break T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
capability when 0.2A current flowing Sep. 10 Sep. 10 Sep. 10
Date (page) by by
Chap. 10.1 Added the description to monitor the LAN M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
communication Nov 19 Nov 19 Nov. 19
Chap. 10.2 Revised the performance value about GOOSE S. Katayama S. Katayama T. Kaneko
sending to other Logical Node device in Table 10.2-3 Nov 19 Nov 19 Nov. 19
Appendix 4 Deleted “PBSB_OST Class” in MICS lists of S. Katayama S. Katayama T. Kaneko
IEC61850 Nov 19 Nov 19 Nov. 19
Appendix 4 PIXIT8: PIXIT FOR REPORTING MODEL:
11: PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL:
0.64
Modified from 'N' to 'Y', '40' to '408', respectively in in
Nov 24, 2015
"data update" and "The number of events". Changed
M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
descriptions from "station-level" to "station-control"
Nov. 24 Nov. 24 Nov. 24
based on the standard in. Changed from Y to N at
"maintenance" and "process".
TICS:
Added Dpos in part 6 of2. Mandatory Intop Tissues.
Nov 18 Nov 18 Nov. 17
Chap. 2.24 Renewed the contents of ARC function T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
0.65 Dec 7 Dec 7 Dec. 4
Dec. 7, 2015 Appendix 5 Tables of BIO codes modified T. Nakatsuka N. Yokoya T. Kaneko
Dec 7 Dec 1 Dec. 1
Chap. 2.2 Revised the SOTF-OC logic about the signals coming T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
from the ICD function Jan 16 Jan 16 Jan. 16
Chap. 2.5 Revised the OC logic about the signals coming from T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
the ICD function Jan 16 Jan 16 Jan. 16
Chap. 2.5 Added the note for the OC signal characterized with K. Oohashi T. Nagano T. Kaneko
the DT and IDMT operations Jan. 17 Jan 17 Jan. 17
Chap. 2.6 Revised the EF logic about the signals coming from T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
Chap. 2.6 Added the note for the EF signal characterized with K. Oohashi T. Nagano T. Kaneko
Chap. 2.7 Revised the OCN logic about the signals coming from T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
0.66 the ICD function Jan 16 Jan 16 Jan. 16
Jan. 18, 2016 Chap. 2.7 Added the note for the OCN signal characterized with K. Oohashi T. Nagano T. Kaneko
Chap. 2.9 Revised the BCD logic about the signals coming from T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
Chap. 2.11 Revised the STUB-OC logic about the signals coming T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
from the ICD function Jan 16 Jan 16 Jan. 16
Chap. 2.21 Added the destinations for the signals generated in T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
ICD function. Refined the contents Jan 16 Jan 16 Jan. 16
Chap 2.26 Revised the contents of TRC F. Kawano N. Nagano T. Kaneko
Dec. 28 Dec 28 Dec. 27
Appendix 5 Tables of BIO codes modified T. Nakatsuka N. Yokoya T. Kaneko
Jan 12 Jan 12 Jan 12
Chap. 8 Renewed the contents of Recording function T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
0.67 Jan 28 Jan 28 Jan. 27
Jan. 29, 2016 Appendix 10 Revised the lists of Input dummy H. Hiramatsu T. Nagano T. Kaneko
Jan 29 Jan 29 Jan. 25
Chap. 4.3.2 Added the value of the input register of IRIG-B000 T. Nakatsuka F. Kawano T. Kaneko
0.68 module Feb 8 Feb. 8 Feb. 6
Feb. 15, 2016 Chap. 11.2.6 Added the information about the quality signal in T. Nakatsuka M. Okai T. Kaneko
IEC 61850 communication Feb. 12 Feb. 10 Feb. 10
0.69 Chap. 3.3.1 Deleted the DCB feature T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
Apr. 8, 2016 Mar 17 Mar 17 Mar. 27
Date (page) by by
Chap. 4.4.2(i) Revised the settings about the variable type in BI2 T.Kawasaki T.Kawasaki T. Kaneko
and BIO4 Mar. 30 Mar. 30 Mar. 29
Chap. 4.4.5 Added FG cable for BI2A module T. Nakatsuka N. Fujiyama T. Kaneko
May 10 May 10 May 10
Chap. 4.8 Revised the example logics for the group setting T. Nakatsuka K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
function May 10 May 10 May 10
0.70 Chap. 9.2.36 Revised the information about Data(commslv) error F. Kawano M. Okai T. Kaneko
May 10, 2016 May 10 May 10 May 10
Appendix 5 Tables of BIO codes modified T. Nakatsuka M. Ueda T. Kaneko
May 10 May 10 May 10
Appendix 6 Added a CMP_NUM notice in Electromagnetic T. Nakatsuka K.Oohashi T. Kaneko
Environment for the Environmental performance May 16 May. 16 May 16
Chap. 2.1 Corrected typo ‘Z1S-X.Reach’ to ‘Z1S-Mho.Reach’ in T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
Figure 2.1-11 June 1 June 1 June 1
Chap. 2.25 Added the calibration factor when the rating voltages T. Nakatsuka T. Nagano T. Kaneko
are different in VCHK June 16 Jun 16 Jun. 16
Chap.4.4.2(i) Corrected Typo in the notice with regard to the T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
0.71 contents about the variable type in BI2 and BIO4 June 15 June 15 June 15
June28, 2016 Appendix 5 Added new codes ‘2D’ and 4M’ in the ordering about T. Nakatsuka M. Ueda T. Kaneko
the BIO modules June 1 June 1 May 31
Appendix 5 Deleted ‘3J’, ‘3Q’, and ‘48’ codes in the ordering about T. Nakatsuka M. Ueda T. Kaneko
the BIO modules June 21 June 21 Jun 21
Appendix 5 Corrected the position identifiers for the software T. Nakatsuka M. Ueda T. Kaneko
ordering table May 24 May. 24 May 24
Chap. 1.7 Corrected element ID w.r.t ‘OC1_BLOCK’ in Figure K. Oohashi T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
1.7-1 June 28 June 28 June 28
Chap. 2.5.6 Corrected ‘OC1_BLOCK’ and ‘OC1_INST_OP” K. Oohashi T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
0.72 connection points in Figure 2.5-8 June 28 June 28 June 28
July1, 2016 Chap. 3.4 Revised LOCRNT logic in Figure 3.4-1 J. Nagata T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
June 28 June 28 June 28
Appendix 6 Deleted ‘COMFEDE’ in the Data exchange at General S.Katayama S.Katayama T. Kaneko
performance June 29 June 29 June 29
Chap. 3.4 Added the notice that the local mode will be canceled T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
when key operations are not carried out. Aug. 8 Aug. 8 Aug 8
0.73 Chap. 4.5 Added the contents of threshold setting for dropping T. Nakatsuka M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Aug8, 2016 DC voltage generated in the PWS Aug. 8 Aug 8 Aug 8
Chap. 9.2.30 Revised the contents for the occurrence of Power T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
errors; added the info. about PWS threshold set Aug. 8 Aug. 8 Aug 8
Chap4.2.1etc. Unifying several type names of VCTs to one name T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
Appendix 6 (e.g., VCT type xxB→VCTxxB) Nov. 1 Nov. 1 Nov 1
Chap. 4.3.2 Revised the figure for GIO cable structure; added FG T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
wire-connection Nov. 1 Nov. 1 Nov 1
Chap. 4.5 Revised the value of threshold level setting on PSW T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
Nov. 1 Nov. 1 Nov 1
Chap. 9.1 Corrected the PWS contact outputs in Serious error T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
Nov. 1 Nov. 1 Nov 1
0.74
Chap. 9.2 Revised the list orders in Table 9.2-1; rearranged T. Nakatsuka T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
Nov. 1 2016
the order of error contents Oct. 30 Oct. 30 Oct 14
Appendix 5 Added new codes ‘5K’, and ‘7J’ in the ordering about T. Nakatsuka M. Ueda T. Kaneko
the BIO modules Nov. 1 Nov. 1 Nov. 1
Appendix 6 Revised the range (–10° to +55°C) of the operating T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
temperature for the new one (–25° to +55°C). Sep. 1 Sep. 1 Sep. 1
Appendix 7 Revised the contents of the CE to comply with 2014
T. Nakatsuka T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
rules
Sep.16 Sep. 16 Sep. 6
Date (page) by by
Appendix 10 Corrected Z5STP_BLOCK element ID etc. numbers; T. Nakatsuka
T. Nakatsuka T. Kaneko
corrected software model numbers Oct. 14
Oct. 14 Oct 14
Chap. 4.4 Corrected BIO circuits w.r.t inversion signals in Fig. T. Nakatsuka X. Tung T. Kaneko
0.75 4.4-1 and 4.4-5 Nov.15 Nov. 11 Nov. 11
Nov. 15, 016 Chap. 4.6 Corrected LED circuits w.r.t inversion signals in Fig. T. Nakatsuka G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
4.6-2 Nov.15 Nov. 14 Nov. 14
Chap. 2.2 Corrected the test setting name of SOTF-OC element T. Nakatsuka K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
of Fig. 2.2-1 Nov.16 Nov. 16 Nov. 16
Chap. 2.27 Corrected the signal numbers of OCD element of Fig. T. Nakatsuka K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
2.27-5 Nov.16 Nov. 16 Nov. 16
0.76 Chap. 11.1 Added the information about screen resolution of T. Nakatsuka K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
Jan. 12, 2017 MIMIC Dec. 28 Dec. 28 Dec. 26
Chap. 12 Revised all contents in Chapter Installation M. Ueda M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Jan. 6 Jan. 6 Dec. 26
Appendix 6 Added new BIO codes T. Nakatsuka M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Dec. 28 Dec. 28 Dec. 26
Chap. 2.8 Corrected the signal destinations for TRC in Fig. K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
2.8-2 in THM Jan.26 Jan.26 Jan. 26
(Chap.2.14) Delete the OVG contents in Chap.2 because the K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
function does not implemented in GRZ200 series. Mar.27 Mar.27 Mar 27
Chap. 2.15 Corrected the signal destinations for TRC in Fig. K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
0.77 2.15-4 Mar.27 Mar.27 Mar 27
Apr. 7, 2017 Chap. 2.25 Corrected the tables for trip signals coming from K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
respective relays (Table 2.25-2 and -6) Mar.27 Mar.27 Mar 27
Chap. 7.2 Added the notice for displaying the event information K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
on GR-TIEMS Jan.30 Jan.30 Jan. 26
Chap. 9 Added time information (i.e., current time) in the K. Oohashi T. Kawasaki T. Kaneko
error screen in Fig. 9.1-1 Jan. 18 Jan. 18 Jan. 18
Cover sheet Revised the notice how to recognize the software K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
0.78 codes on the nameplate Apr.26 Apr.26 Apr. 26
Apr. 27, 2017 Chap. 12.3 Revised the check method about the software code K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
using ordering codes Apr.26 Apr.26 Apr. 26
Chap. 2 Deleted the FRQ/DFRQ content not implemented in K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
GRZ200 relay July.18 July.18 July 14
Chap. 2.23 Revised the setting Tips and notices of [SYN-Angle] K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
and [T_SYN] in VCHK Aug. 9 Aug. 9 July 31
Chap. 2.23 Corrected the incoming voltage about the relationship Y. Sonobe G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
between Vs, Vs2, Vb in VCHK Aug. 9 Aug. 3 Aug. 3
Chap. 2.24 Corrected the TRC operations in Table 2.24-2 and -3 K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
July.18 July.18 July 14
Chap. 10.1 Added Auto reset function in Communication protocol K. Oohashi M. Okai T. Kaneko
June.22 June.22 June 21
0.79 Chap. 10.2 Corrected the definitions of quality bits in IEC61850 K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
Aug 9,2017 June.6 June.6 June 6
Appendix 4 Corrected the “Sr1” and “Sr2” validity values “ in the K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
PIXIT table June.16 June.16 June 14
Appendix 6 Revised the contents of Analog inputs in Technical K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
data table regarding rated current and frequency July.18 July.18 July 14
Appendix 6 Deleted incorrect Functional standards in K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
Performance table July.18 July.18 July 14
Appendix 7 Deleted information not to relating GRZ200 relay K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
July.18 July.18 July 14
Appendix 13 Added the notes for Dielectric voltage test K. Oohashi T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
Aug. 3 Aug. 3 Aug. 2

GRZ200 (6F2S1905) 0.80

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GRZ200 (6F2S1905) 0.80

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GRZ200 (6F2S1905) 0.80

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety precautions are described in the document?

What safety precautions are described in the document?

What components does the document describe?

What components does the document describe?

6F2S1905 (Rev. 0.

Distance Protection IED

GR200 series (GRZ200)

Notice: GRZ200 manual is issued for ‘011’

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in

Equipment installation and operation

Protective conductor terminal

Caution, risk of electric shock

Liability, copyright and others

2.3.6 Countermeasure for current reversal ................................................................................. 100

Thermal overload function (THM) ............................................................................................. 167

2.13.5 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 202

2.18.10 Data ID list ....................................................................................................................... 239

2.24.3 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 336

3.6.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes....................................................................................... 395

4.6.5 Operation keys ..................................................................................................................... 493

7.3.2 Relays within disturbance recorder .................................................................................... 534

9.2.2 Check-sum error (SUM error) ............................................................................................. 572

LAN communication ................................................................................................................... 618

Appendix 2 Case outline .......................................................................................................................... 763

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

GRZ200 distance protection is designed to provide distance protection with control

1.1.1 Purposes of the protection

1.1.2 Requirements in the protection functions

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

Ry(V) Ry(U) Ry(S) Ry(X) Ry(T) Ry(O) Ry(P) Ry(Q)

: Current transformer (which is connected with a relay)

M : Circuit Breaker (which is located at M)

Ry(V) : Protection relay (which is located at V)

: Protection area by line protection scheme

: Protection area by busbar protection scheme

Figure 1.1-1 Two protection schemes for line and busbar

Ry(S) Ry(X) Ry(S) Ry(X)

Figure 1.1-2 Protection schemes and the location of the CB

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

1.1.3 Behavior of backup protections

(i) Protection for the line

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

Busbar R Busbar G Busbar H

Relay(M) Relay(S) Relay(N) Relay(K) Relay(O) Rela

Backup (local) Delay timer OC(O)

Backup (remote) Fail safe

(ii) Coordination between the main and the backup protections

(iii) Types of the backup protections

Remote backup protection (Retarded backup protection)

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

Local backup protection (High-speed backup protection)

1.1.4 Concepts of distance protection (ZS/ZG) function

Figure 1.1-4 Six zones in Mho characteristic

(i) The reach of the zone1 element

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)

†Note:Operation of the carrier command protection function (DISCAR or DISDEF) is

(ii) Measuring error and its influence

(iii) Detection of power swing and out-of-step

GRZ200 (Soft: 011)